Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http: //books .google .com/I
\4
• ^^ip'^^ ^
A HANDBOOK
OF THE
ILA LANGUAGE
(COMMONLY CALLED THE
SESHUKULUMBWB^
SPOKEN IN NORTH-WESTERN RHODESIA
SOUTH-CENTRAL AFRICA
COMPRISING GRAMMAR, EXERCISES, SPECIMENS OF
ILA TALES, AND VOCABULARIES
BY
EDWIN W. SMITH
OF THE BAILA-BATONGA MISSION
.. HENRY FROWDE
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
LONDON, NEW YORK AND TORONTO
1907
^ I
1 •.■> :
. .;\y 1
OXFORD: HORACE HART
PRINTER TO THE UNrVRRSITY
TO
MY FATHER
WHO GAVE MANY YEARS TO THE SERVICE
'OF Jesus Christ in Africa
AND in whose steps
]T HAS EVER BEEN MY AMBITION
TO FOLLOW
I AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBE THIS BOOK.
%
PREFACE
On my arrival at Nanzela in July, 1902, 1 found it necessary
to commence at the very beginning in learning the language, for
nothing had as yet been done to reduce it to a written form.
I was fortunate in having some knowledge of the Suto language
and in securing as my first assistant a young man who knew
considerable Suto as well as Ua. With his help I began at once
to compile a vocabulary and to make grammatical notes. After
a time I found that this man used a dialect which was more like
Tonga than real Ila; so I procured the assistance of another
young man, who was a true Mwila, and who had lived for some
time at the mission. He has continued to be my assistant since
then^ and his help has been invaluable. The extensive knowledge
he has displayed of his own language, and especially the copious-
ness of his vocabulary, have been a constant source of wonder and
pleasure to me. From the beginning I had the intention of
compiling such a Handbook as this ; and I now submit the result
of my labours to my fellow pioneers in North- Western Rhodesia,
trusting that they may find it a help in learning the language.
I do not pretend to have mastered every detail of the language ;
but SLS it is certain that I shall have to make the same remark if
I continue my studies for many years, I do not think that is
a reason for delaying the publication of the book. Whatever has
been omitted through' ignorance or inadvertence, the main outlines
of the language will^ I believe, be found correctly delineated.
And here I should like to utter a word of caution. If any one
using this book finds that some expression he has caught from
C a native is dififerent in sound or form from what he reads here,
I would ask him not to hastily conclude that I am wrong. In
\! different parts of the country different words are used, and the
',' same words may occur in slightly different forms ; indeed one
S:* man will at one time pronounce a word in a certain way aud ^X
•^
X
V.
V
f
vi PREFACE
another differently. I shall be glad if readers will note down any
variations they find, any new grammatical forms, and any new
words, and communicate them to me, so that later it may be
possible to compile a more complete work.
It has been my aim throughout to produce a book that will be
of practical use to those who desire to learn the language.
Matter that would be of interest to philologists merely I have
either entirely omitted or had printed in smaller type than the
rest of the book. And I have paid special attention to preparing
the exercises, which I should like to bring to the particular notice
of readers.
It was my intention to have added another chapter to the
grammar dealing with the relation of Ila to other Bantu languages.
For this I had prepared many notes tracing the resemblances to
and variations from other languages, and had collected also short
vocabularies of the Koya, Lamba, Luba and Sodi dialects, all as
yet unwritten. But I have been compelled by lack of space to
omit this.
The sentence, and not a word, is the unit of language ; and one
of the chief difficulties in systematizing a new language is to
determine the method of dividing sentences into their component
words. In this respect this book will be found to differ con-
siderably from some other works on Bantu. In reading some
books one is struck by the inordinate length of the words.
Thus in the first Kaffir grammar published we find on one page
a long list of words containing from eighteen to twenty-five
letters each; e.g. Dayendtbendtngebendtbendu And in the
latest Kaffir grammar we find such words as Obungenakuianda-
huzeha. In Kongo, again, such as Bekutufwantalakeselanga.
In Ganda, Natambulatambulakedomusana, The explanation
of such words is that they are compounded of various pronouns,
particles, verbs, &c. It would no doubt be possible to match
these with equally lengthy words in Ila, but I cannot but think
that they must prove a stumbling-block to learners. I have, there-
made it a rule to write as far as possible the various
PREFACE vii
pronouns, &c., by themselves ; though as a matter of convenience,
and where it may be done without causing any perplexity, I have,
in some instances, joined into one word several small particles.
In this method I have followed the example set by Zulu and
other grammarians.
In issuing this Handbook I cherish the hope that it may lead
many to study the language and not to use Kitchen Kaffir.
For those who are not familiar with the term, I may explain that
Kitchen Kaffir is a hotch-potch of many dialects, without gram-
matical structure and very limited as to vocabulary. It is largely
used by Europeans throughout South Africa, and it is a proof of
the intelligence of the natives that they frequently understand
what in reality is the most arrant nonsense. It is customary to
laugh at the * pidgin' English spoken by natives; how much
greater reason is there for ridicule when one hears an educated
Englishman speaking a jargon at least as hideous as any corrup-
tion of English ! I am sure that readers of this book will agree
with me that nothing is of more consequence for the future of
this country than that Europeans and natives should understand
each other ; and for that reason I plead for a careful and diligent
study of the native idiom. A knowledge of Ila is the chief
means to an understanding of Baila customs and modes of
thought. 'Every language is a temple in which the soul of
those who speak it is enshrined.' I believe that without knowing
the language it is impossible to properly understand any people
— especially a savage people like the Baila.
Ila is by no means a difficult language to learn, and I should
think that any one could gain a very considerable knowledge of
it in six months. As regards methods of study, the well-known
aphorism of Bacon is as applicable to Ila as to anything else —
* Reading maketh a full man ; conference a ready man ; and
writing an exact man.' To learn Ila one must embrace every
opportimity of speaking it, not in a careless, slipshod fashion, but
with constant and careful attention to pronunciation, accentuation,
and grammar. One should aim at speaking as nearly as possible
viii PREFACE
as the natives do. This makes the ready man. I would further
recommend readers not to neglect reading and writing. Reading,
as Bacon's words suggest, is invaluable as a means of enlarging
one's vocabulary and becoming familiar with grammatical forms ;
the diligent reader will be a full man. It is for this reason that
I have included in the Handbook a number of Ila tales. These
I have written down from natives' dictation ; and I trust they
may be as useful to others as they have been to myself in under-
standing the language. I would further advise readers to write
— not only the exercises given in this book, but also new words,
tales, riddles, proverbs, as they may have opportunity. They
will, I am sure, find that any labour spent in this way will bear
abundant fruit.
In the preparation of this Handbook I have derived consider-
able help from similar books published on other Bantu languages ;
among these I would specially refer to Bishop Steere's book on
Swahili, Dr. Grout's on Zulu, and Dr. Bentley's on Kongo. Nor
must I forget to mention the work on Suto by my friend the
Rev. E. Jacottet, a book which laid the foundation of all I have
since learnt concerning Bantu languages. Father Torrend's Com-
parative Grammar has been in my hands constantly of late years,
and I have derived much help from it, especially as the language
he takes as his standard, Tonga, is a very close cognate to Ila.
I must express my gratitude to the Directors of the British
South Africa Company and to the committee of the Primitive
Methodist Missionary Society, who together have provided the
funds for publishing the Handbook ; and, also to my colleague,
the Rev. W. Chapman, who is the first European of those now
living in the country who settled among the Baila, and who has
an unrivalled knowledge of the people and their ways. He has
read through most of my manuscript and favoured me with many
suggestions and also additions to the vocabularies.
EDWIN W. SMITH.
Nanzela,
NW. Rhodesia.
Nov. 37, 1906.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I
THE GRAMMAR
PAGE
CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTORY . • i
CHAPTER n. PHONOLOGY.
Sect. I. The Alphabet 5
Sect. 2. Phonetic Changes ....... 9
Sect. 3. Syllables and Accent 13
Exercises on Chapter II 14
CHAPTER III. THE NOUN.
Sect. I. Classification 16
Sect. 2. Gender 26
Sect 3. Case of Nouns 27
Sect. 4. Locative Nouns . • 32
Sect. 5. Copulative Particles 33
Sect. 6. Formation of Nouns 35
Sect. 7. Foreign Nouns 40
Exercises on Chapter III 42
CHAPTER IV. THE ADJECTIVE.
Sect. I. Adjectives of Quality 56
Sect. 2. Comparison of Adjectives 64
Sect. 3. Adjectives of Quantity 66
Sect. 4. Locative Adjectives 74
Exercises on Chapter IV 7S
X TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER V. THE PRONOUN.
PAGE
Sect. I. The Personal Pronoun . . . . . .80
Sect. 2. The Substantive Pronoun 86
(a) The Simple Form 86
(d) The Indicative Form ...... 88
(c) The Indicative Form emphasized .... 90
(cf) The Prepositional Form '91
(e) The Conjunctive Form 92
Sect. 3. The Possessive Pronoun 93
Sect. 4. The Interrogative Pronoun 100
Sect. 5. The Reflective Pronoun 103
Sect. 6. The Demonstrative Pronoun 104
Sect. 7. The Relative Pronoun 108
Exercises ON Chapter V 11 1
Ila Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Hare eats Lion's Children 115
The Tortoise and the Hare 116
The Two Leopards 117
CHAPTER VI. THE VERB.
Sect. I. Verbal Species 119
1. The Relative Species 120
2. The Causative Species 123
3. The Reciprocal Species 127
4. The Stative Species . . . . . . .128
5. The Capable Species . . . . . .128
6. The Intensive Species 129
7. The Reversive Species 130
8. The Repetitive Species 131
9. The Persistent Repetitive Species . . . .131
Compound Derivative Forms 132
Sect. 2. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs . . . '135
Sect. 3. Conjugation 136
Sect. 4. Auxiliary Particles 139
Exercises on Chapter VI 140
I LA Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Hyena and the Moon 142
The Hare and the Moon 143
TABLE OF CONTENTS xi
PAGE
The Leopard and the Cheetah 143
The Hare and Momba 144
The Hare and the Jackal 144
The Hare and the Lion 145
CHAPTER Vn. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB.
Sect I. Affirmative Conjugation 146
Sect. 2. Negative Conjugation 164
Exercises on Chapter VII 175
ILA Tales for Reading and Translation :
A Tale of a Fool 177
The Elephant and the Wart Hog 178'
The Woman who wanted a Husband 179
CHAPTER VIII. IRREGULAR VERBS ; THE VERBS
*T0 BE' AND 'TO HAVE'; VERBS USED
IDIOMATICALLY.
Sect I. Irregular Verbs 181
Sect. 2. The Verb * To Be ' 184
Sect. 3. The Verb * To Have ' 184
Sect. 4. Verbs used idiomatically 185
Exercises on Chapter VIII 187
iLA Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Lion and the Hare 188
A Tale of a Fool 189
CHAPTER IX. THE COPULA.
Sect. I. The Copula in the Present 190
Sect. 2. The Copula in the Past 199
Sect. 3. The Copula in the Future 204
Sect. 4. The Copula in Indirect Clauses .... 206
Exercises on Chapter IX 207
iLA Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Bird which swallowed People 208
The Hippo, and the Rhino 209
Why the Zebra has no Horns 209
xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
The Honeybird and the Bees . 210
The Crab and the Jackal 210
A Tale of Two Men 211
CHAPTER X. THE ADVERB. PREPOSITION, CON-
JUNCTION, AND INTERJECTION.
Sect. I. The Adverb 213
Sect. 2. The Preposition 220
Sect. 3. The Conjunction 224
Sect. 4. The Interjection 227
Exercises on Chapter X 227
ILA Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Honeybird and the Bee 230
The Jackal and the Dog . * 230
The Hare and the Jackal 23 r
CHAPTER XL SYNTAX.
Sect. I. The Syntax of Sentences 232
1. The Simple Sentence 232
2. Compound Sentences 238
Sect. 2. Syntax of Particular Forms 242
1. Syntax of the Noun 242
2. Syntax of the Adjective 244
3. Sjmtax of the Pronoun 244
4. Syntax of the Verb 246
Sect. 3. Analysis and Parsing 247
Final Exercises 249
iLA Tales for Reading and Translation :
The Hare and the Lion 25 1
The Elephant and the Hare 252
PART IL ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY . . 255
PART HI. ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY . . 356
APPENDICES
I. Words inadvertently omitted and others acquired since
Part III went to press 481
II. Some Proverbs in addition to those in the Vocabularies • 487
III. Table of Ila Concords tofacep,^Z%
PART I
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTORY
The Ila language is spoken by the Baila, or, as they are
commonly called, the Mashukulumbwe, a people livmg in North-
West Rhodesia on either side of the middle Kafue. The home
of the true Baila is a tract of country about 250 miles long by
50 wide. They number about 25,000. But the use of the
language is by no means limited to that area. The neighbouring
tribes — the Basala, the Bambala, the Balamba, the Baluba — all
understand and speak it : to a less extent so do the Mankoya.
On the south the language of the Batonga (or Batoka) is so
closely allied to Ila that they can hardly be called different
languages. The language of the Basubia is also very similar.
It will therefore probably be found that Ila is the most widely
understood, and therefore the most useful, language in North-
West Rhodesia.
The name Mashukulumbwe was given to the Baila by the
Marotsi, whose custom it was at one time to make periodic raids
into the country for slaves and cattie. The meaning of the
word is doubtful, but in some way it probably refers to the chief
physical characteristic of the Baila, their tall head-dresses.
Another name heard in connexion with the tribe is * Bamala '.
This strictly applies to the inhabitants of the Mala district, but
inasmuch as that is the centre of the true Baila the name is
sometimes applied to the whole tribe. It will be noticed that
Mala corresponds to Ila as plural to singular ; but the derivation
of the words is very obscure.
B
"9
2 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Around Nanzela the majority of the people call themselves
Balumbu, and others bearing the same name are found else-
where. They differ somewhat from the true Baila in their
customs : in not wearing the cone, and in not going naked.
The nucleus of these people seems to have migrated from the
south-west : slaves and refugees from other tribes have swelled
their numbers. Whatever their original language, they now
speak Ila, but with certain variations. The aim of this Hand-
book is to record the true Ila language : any Lumbu variations
will be found noted in the vocabulary.
The Baila have always had the reputation of being a par-
ticularly savage and turbulent people. Until the arrival of the
pioneers of the Baila-Batonga Mission at the end of 1893, no
European had settled in their country. There are stories still
to be heard among the people of Europeans who had previously
visited them and who were murdered or robbed : two well-
known travellers, Holub and Selous, met with the latter fate and
barely escaped from the former.
Ila belongs to the great family of languages to which the
name Bantu is given, and which covers almost the whole of
Africa south of a line drawn obliquely across the continent from
the Cameroons to the mouth of the Tana River.
To these languages certain terms are applied by philologists.
They are said to be Agglutinative languages. This point, which
however is of very little practical importance, may be understood
from the following quotation : — * In the agglutinative languages
grammatical relations are shown by prefixing, suffixing, or in-
fixing sounds and syllables which are no longer independent
words, and yet are clearly distinguishable from the full-words
they modify, and not inextricably blended with them as in in-
flexion. If English, in addition to word-order and form-words,
indicated grammatical relations only by such formations as
im-just-ly, care-less-ness, it would be an agglutinative lan-
guage.' ^
* Sweet, History of Language , p. 62. .
INTRODUCTORY 3
They are also termed prefix pronominal languages, because
the pronoims are formed from the prefixes of the nouns, not as
in the case of many languages, from the suffixes.
From a practical standpoint, the most important principle of
these languages is that of the Alliterative or euphonic concord.
Now, the term alliteration is a well-known one. Early English
poetry, we are told, had alliteration as its rule in place of rhyme;
and to-day ' Alliteration's artful aid * is often invoked for the sake
of emphasis or as a mere play of the fancy. Compare Shake-
speare's line : —
* The praiseful princess pierced and pricked a pretty pleasing
pricket.'
In Ila, as in all Bantu languages, alliteration, i. e. the continued
repetition of one letter or syllable (sometimes changed slightly
but always immediately recognizable), is not an accident of
style, it is the very essence of the language. The whole structure
of the language is based upon it. In the inflexional languages,
the relation between the various words in a sentence is shown
by suffixes. Thus in Greek: anthrop-os agath-os, a good
man ; anthrop-oi agath-oi, good men. In Latin : porta bona,
a good gate; port-ae bon-ae, good gates. In French: un
homme bon, a good person ; des hommes bons, good people.
In English : the tree's leaf; the trees' leaves. In Ila this
grammatical relation is formed by means of prefixes, not suffixes :
we have to look at the beginning of words, not the end. Thus :
mu-ntu mu-botu, a good man: ba-ntu ba-botu, good people.
The noun is the chief word in the s.entence : it is the master,
so to speak, and every pronoun or adjective dependent upon
it takes its prefix (or modification of it) as a livery or mark of
dependence.
This will be clear from the following examples :—
Mu-ntu u-mwi mu-botu mw-ini-mw-ini wa ke za.
LiL — Person one good truly he did come.
One really good person came.
B 2
4 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Ba-ntu ba-mwi ba-botu be-ni-be-ni ba ke za.
Lit. — People others good truly they did come.
Other really good people came.
Aka letwa ma-samo a-mwi ma-lamfu me-ni-me-ni ; twa a zanda.
Lit. — They were brought trees other long truly : we them like.
Other really long trees were brought : we like them.
Tw-ambotwa-kwe tu-mwi ntu-biabe twi-ni-twi-ni: twa tusula.
Lit. — Sayings his some bad truly : we them hate.
Some of his sayings are really bad : we hate them.
Nohl che-chi ohi-ntu cha-ngu nohi nda leta.
Lit. — It this thing mine which I bring.
This is my thing which I have brought.
Nshi she-Shi shi-ntu sha-ngu nshi nda leta.
Lit. — They these things mine which I bring.
These are my things which I have brought.
This is the principle of the Euphonic or Alliterative Concord.
NoT£. — Many variations exist in spelling the word Mashukulumbwe.
The following may be mentioned : — Bashnkulompo (Livingstone) ; Mashu-
kulambe (Holab and Amot) ; Mashukulumbwi (Selons) ; Basbikulombwe
(Sir H. Johnston) ; Mashikulumbwe (Gibbons). The French spelling is
Machikouloumbone. The spelling adopted above is that used in the
Mission from the beginning, and the one adopted by the R. G. S. and the
B.S.A. Co.*s Administration. It would be best to drop the use of this
ponderous polysyllable in favour of ' Baila ', the true tribal name of the
people.
Note. — ^As some misunderstanding may occur with reference to the use
of the terms Ila, Chila, Baila, Bwila, Mwila, it may be as well to explain
their use here. The word Chila cannot be used adjectively so as to say :
the Chila language, for it includes within itself the idea of the language.
Ila is properly so used: say, the Ila language, the Ila people, the Ila
country; or simply: Chila, Baila, Bwila. In speaking of the language it
is permissible to speak simply of Ila. But only in use with Europeans : no
native would understand 'Ila'; in speaking to natives be careful to say
Chila. The use of Ila is thus similar to that of English in the following
phrases : the English people, the English language, the English country.
CHAPTER II
PHONOLOGY
The principles guiding the Ila orthography are as follows: —
1. To write phonetically, i.e. as the words are pronounced.
2. To write the principal words of a sentence, nouns and
verbs, without any addition of particles such as auxiliaries,
pronouns, prepositions, &c.
But it is not always practicable to carry out these principles
to their fullest extent, as they are sometimes found in antagonism
to each other. That is to say, it is sometimes convenient, in
order to preserve the correct sound, to join words together
which otherwise were best written separately. Thus the irregular
verbs are written kwiba {^for ku iba), kwina i^for ku ina), &c.
Again, to carry out the second principle we are sometimes bound
to write grammatically instead of phonetically. Thus in the
regular verbs we write ku amba {^pronounced kwamba), ku
imba {^pronounced kwimba), &c. These need cause the student
no trouble.
Sect. i. THE ALPHABET.
The Ila alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, i, e. the
English alphabet without the signs q and z. The sound of q is
represented by kw : x is not required
The Vowels.
The vowels are a, e, i, o, u : but each has more than one
value according to the stress laid upon it.
a is pronounced as a in mat written & ku niat&, to daub.
a long „ „ a „ fi:7ther „ a ku mat&, to daub,
e „ « <? » th<?n „ 6 ku bdtdka, to judge,
e long „ „ e „ th^re „ e menzhi, water.
i „ „ t „ p^'ty „ i chintu, a thing.
6 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
i long is pronounced as i in ravine written i ku dila, to cry.
o
99
0 „ ^n
tf
5 bdngo, brains.
o long „
9)
0 „ b(7ne
»
5 insoki, grass seed.
o broad „
*i
0 „ b^re
»
6 ku b61a, to rot.
u
»
u „ full
>»
a Mtintu, a person.
u long „
91
00 „ ^oo\
»
u ku filla, to blow.
Diphthongs,
There are two diphthongs in Ila : ai and oL Ai is pronounced
as in the English affirmative aye : oi as in doj^. '
Examples : Bongai P ShongaiP OngaiP Ingoi.
But often these vowels come together and are separately pro-
nounced, with no diphthongal sound, although in rapid speech
they may seem to have. In that case a diaresis is placed over
the latter vowel. Thus : Chinshainshai, ingaXna, mai, ku-
waila.
The Consonants.
The consonants are as follows : —
B pronounced as h in ^one. Ku bona, to see.
B sometimes has a slightly explosive sound as in ku bala,
to read. Cf. ku bala, to pass by.
C occurs only in the compound Ch,
D pronounced as d in ^ie. Ku dila, to cry.
D is very closely related to 1: when followed by i it is
often very difficult to know whether to write di or li.
F pronounced as/in/ool Ku fUla, to blow.
Ku guna, to nod.
Ku humpa, to crowd.
Kjovwa, help me.
Kangashikoswe, a mouse.
Ku lapa, to convey
Mama ! Oh dear !
Nini, so-and-so.
Ku pala, to scrape.
(See note below,)
G
>>
V
g „ ^one
H
»
»>
h „ ^imp
J
»
1)
J »Joy
K
>J
)>
k „ ^ngardo
L
>J
>>
/ ,,/ap
M
>>
>>
m „ mzmmz,
N
>>
>l
n „ mne
P
>»
»
p ,,/arlour
R
»
;t
r „rest
PHONOLOGY 7
S pronounced as s in ^lad Ku sala, to choose.
T „ „ / „ Aimonr Ku tuma, to send.
V „ „ V „ very Ku vwima, to hunt.
Z „ » Si f, 2^eal Ku zea, to consider.
Note. — ^The sound of the English r is never heard in Ila, but is intro-
duced here for use in spelling proper names transferred from other languages.
In such cases the Baila would sound the r as 1 ; but often the r seems
necessary in writing in order to preserve the int^rity of the names. For
example : Kreste, Abrahama, would be pronounced as Keleste, Abelahama.
Compound Consonants.
CH. This varies between the sound of ch in church and the
sound of fue in vt'rfue. Sometimes it comes very near to k to
which it is phonetically closely allied.
TCH represents ch preceded by the explosive t, as in Tchita,
I don't know.
SH is pronounced as in English^ shin, ShintUi things.
ZH is pronounced as 2 in azure. Ku zhala, to bring forth.
VH. By this we represent the peculiar sound in so many Ila
words, e. g. ku vhumba ; ku vhwa. It is neither v nor h, nor
is it an aspirated v. In fact it must be heard to be learnt. It
and its nasalized form ngvh are the only difficult Ila sounds to
acquire.
NG. There are in Ila two distinct sounds of ng, corresponding
to the sounds in English of finger (fing-ger) and singer (sing-
er). In the former, the sound of g passes over to the following
vowel, and so we get a diflferent sound from that in singer, in
which there seems to be a slight hiatus between the ng and the
next vowel. Both these sounds are in Ila. The former is repre-
sented by ng, the latter by ng\ "
Examples,
Ng (finger). Ng (singer).
Ingubi. Ing'ombe.
IngiuLna. Ing'anda.
Manga. Mang'a.
Note. — The difference between ng and ng* will be noticed Ixi \.\i&
8 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Grammar and Vocabularies, but elsewhere there is no need to distinguish
between them, as one soon becomes accustomed to the words in which they
occur.
Combinations of Consonants.
No two consonants come together except (a) in the case of
the nasals m and n which may be prefixed to other consonants ;
and (b) the semi-vowels which may be suffixed to other con-
sonants.
Nasalized consonants are rather troublesome to a European,
but the difficulty of pronouncing them is more apparent than
real. In the following list, if the English words be divided and
pronounced as shown, they will give sounds very like the Ila.
mb pronounced as mb in co-;»3ine thus : ko-mbila.
nd „ „ nd „ la-»<Ang „ ta-ndila.
naf „ „ mf ,^ co-fn/brt „ kn-mfosa.
nj ,» „ ng „ lou-«^er „ i-njelo.
nk „ „ nk „'\2L-nky „ i-nkuti.
inp „ „ mp „ la-fv/oon „ la-mpisha.
ns „ „ ns „ cou-«jel „ me-nso.
nt „ „ nt „ hu-«^ng „ i-ntimba.
nw „ „ nw ,, x-mmx^ „ ka-nwino.
ny „ „ ny „ la-«yard „ i-nyemo.
nz „ y^ ns „ clea-;tring ,, mushi-nzo.
neh ,, „ nc „ co-//retto(c=ch)„ ku nchi-dila.
nsh „ „ ns „ ^z-nsion „ ma-nsha.
There is also ngvh, as in bongvhn, for which there is no
English equivalent.
The combination of consonants with the semi-vowels gives a
long list which it is not necessary to record here.
The Semi-Yowels.
W and Y are semi-vowels.
W is the sound of u followed by another vowel.
u + a = wa;u + e = we;u + o = wo;u + i = wi.
Y is the sound of i followed by another vowel,
i + a = ya ; i + e = ye ; i + o = yo ; i + u = yu.
PHONOLOGY 9
W and Y are not used in those cases where the two vowels
are separately pronounced. Often in such cases a very light
w or y may be detected between the vowels, as in iya = ia ;
iyi = ii ; iyamba = iamba; bowa = boa; sowa = soa.
Examples.
mwami mwangu (smuami uangu); intipa yangu
( = intipa iangu).
Sect. 2. PHONETIC CHANGES.
The principle of euphony, or the easy enunciation of sounds,
plays a great part in Ua, and demands many changes in vowels
and consonants when they come together. In some cases a
toning down takes place by which harder sounds are made
easier ; in other cases a strengthening of weaker sounds so that
they may be brought out and better heard. All through the
following changes this is the principle at work.
Changes in Consonants.
I. — When m is prefixed to words beginning with b which
contain another nasal, the b is deleted.
Examples,
ku bamba Ba la m'amba (= mba- They arrange me.
mba)
ku banda Ba la m'anda ( = mba- They name me.
nda)
ku banzela Ba la m'anzela ( » mba- They take out (grain)
nzela) for me.
ku bambasikila Ba la m'ambasikila They level for me.
( = mbambasikila)
This is also seen when the classifier IM- is added to stems
beginning with b. Thus: Lnbanza, a courtyard. Imanza
(~ im-banza), courtyards.
2. — When n is prefixed to words beginning with 1 which
contain another nasal, the 1 is deleted.
lo GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples,
kulumba Ba la n'umba (=nlumba) They thank me.
ku londela Ba la n'ondela (» nlondela) They receive for me.
ku lanzha Ba la n'anzha (= nlanzha) They show me.
ku lengela Ba la n'engela (== nlengela) They cut up for me.
ku lambila Ba la n'ambila ( = nlambila) They worship me.
This is also seen when the classifier IN- is prefixed to stems
in 1. Thus : Inembo (= inlembo, from ku lemba, to engrave),
engraving.
3. — In cases other than the above 1 becomes d when n or m
is prefixed. Thus : ku lemeka. Ba la ndemeka, they honour
me.
4. — ^When n or in is prefixed to words beginning with y, y
changes into j.
Examples,
ku yaya Ba la njaya (= nyaya) They kill me.
ku yalwila Ba la njalwila(= nyalwila) They open for me.
ku yana Ba la njana (= nyana) They find me.
5. — Before an initial w, n becomes ng.
ku wisha Wa ngwisha (= nwisha) He throws me down.
ku wezela Wa ngwezela ( = nwezela)He hunts for me.
6. — Before i, 1 generally is sounded as d. (See note above,
p. 6.)
Ku bala, to carry on the back. Ku badika, to cause to carry.
Ku sala, to choose. Ku sadisha, to choose carefully.
7. — For the sake of euphony letters are often introduced into
a word. These letters are generally termed epenthetic, but they
really mean that a strong nasal is introduced to make the word
sound more forcibly.
Examples,
From the adj. -inu. Cf. ing'ombe iujinu with muntu mwinu.
From the root -anda. Cf. ing*anda with ianda.
From the root -ombe. Cf. ing'ombe with mpmbe.
PHONOLOGY 1 1
So when n is prefixed to verbs beginning with a vowel.
Ku idila, to imitate. Ba la njidila, they imitate me.
Ku ita, to pass. Ba la njita, they pass me.
Notice the insertion of g or j in these examples.
Changes in Vowels.
Many changes are caused by two vowels coming together.
What takes place is either elision, assimilation, or contraction.
Elision means that one of the vowels is dropped ; assimilation
that one of the vowels is modified to become like the other ;
contraction means that the two vowels unite to form one.
I. — When two a's come together, elision may take place.
UxampUs,
Bik! anshi {/or Bika anshi) Put down.
Waamb' ati {/or Wa amba ati) He said that.
Kadi mo {/or Ka a di mo) He was there.
This rule does not always apply, in deliberate speaking and
writing at all events. Thus we may read : Ba la amba, they
are speaking. When uttered rapidly the two vowels are slurred
over and only one heard, da V amba,
2. — When a and e come together, either assimilation or con-
traction takes place, a + e = ee (7r e.
Examples,
Beembezhi (or bembezhi) shepherds \/or Baembezhi.
TS'di le za I am coming \/or Ndi la eza.
3. — When a and i come together contraction takes place.
A + i = e.
Examples.
Kedi mo, It was there 'y/or Ka i di mo.
Ke zize. Let it come \/or Na i zize.
This takes place when the locative prefix or preposition, a,
comes before nouns of class 3. e,g. Ezeulu, above; /or a
izeulu.
12 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Also in the case of verbs beginning with i, short and unstable.
But not when the i is long and permanent. Compare the
following : —
Ba le njila, they enter ; for ba la injila.
But Ba la ingiila, they answer.
Ba le ta, they call ; for ba la ita.
But Ba la ita, they pass.
This also takes place in nouns of Class 8 and Class 9 pi.,
where the initial i is also short and unstable. Compare these
with nouns of Class 3.
Ba le te ng*ombe, they bring catde ; for ba leta ingombe.
Ba ine nsana, they have not strength ; for ba ina insana.
4. — When & and ti come together they are contracted into o.
Examples.
Miimoni no be o, let there be light ; for na u be o.
Kg ya koko, go thou there ; for ka u ya.
This takes place when the nominative personal pronouns
ending in a come before the objective pronoun, cl. 2. sing. u.
Thus :—
Wo leta, he brought it ; for Wa u leta.
5. — Short i is generally elided before another vowel, which
then is pronounced long.
Examples.
Chamba, chest ; for chiamba.
Chuna, stool ; for chiuna.
Notice this in the genitive particles where shi + a becomes
aha ; ohi + a = cha ; and in the demonstratives, shi-esho
becomes shesho. But dia and bia are not altered because the
i is long ; so in the demonstratives we have biebi not bebi,
6. — When a comes before o assimilation or contraction takes
place. A + o = 00 <?r o.
PHONOLOGY 13
Examples.
Ba lo ompolola, or ba rompoloJia;y^r Ba la ompolola, they call
Ba lo ona, or ba Tona ; for Ba la ona, they sleep.
7. — When ti comes before o contraction takes place.
U + o = o.
Examples.
Bongo; /or buongo, brain.
Lozhi ; /or luozhi, bark-string.
Mombe ; /or muombe, calf.
Note. — Other changes besides the above might be noticed, bat it is
impossible to note all those caused by rapid utterance. As is only natural
where all words end and many begin with vowels, in rapid speaking the
vowels are slurred over or omitted. Attention to the above rules and
examples will soon enable the student to follow such changes.
Sect. 3. SYLLABLES AND ACCENT.
Every syllable in Ila ends in a voweL This is an important
rule in learning the pronunciation of words. Thus : Muntu is
to be divided and pronounced mu-ntu, nol mun-tu ; ba-mba,
nof bam-ba ; la-nga, nol lan-ga.
Instead of learning intricate rules for correctly placing the
accent, it is far better for the student to learn by constant inter-
course with natives the correct accentuation. Where mistakes
are most likely to be made the accent will be found noted in the
vocabularies.
It will considerably help him if the student will read through
the following exercises with an intelligent native, not to learn
the meanings of the words so much as the pronunciation and
accent. It would also be to his advantage to read through in
the same way the Ha Readir^ Book^ No, i, which contains
a number of Ila tales, lists of hard words, and other reading
matter. These will do him more service than learning rules for
pronunciation, for it cannot be too strictly urged upon the
student that it is from the natives themselves that he must learn
how to pronounce the language.
14
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER 11.
Beading Exercise 1.
A list of words to be carefully distinguished in sound.
Ku bala, to read.
Ku baia, to carry.
Ku bala, to pass by.
Ku cha^ to clear
(night).
Ku cha, to get fish.
Ku cheka, to set ajar.
Ku cheka, to carve.
Ku dia, to pay.
Ku dya, to eat.
Ku ela, to bear fruit.
Ku ela, to fit.
Ku fuma, to sail along.
Ku fuma, to be early.
Ku fumba, to burrow.
Ku fumba, to extol
oneself.
Ku fua, to possess.
Ku fwa, to die.
Ku kamba, to clap.
Ku kamba, to scratch.
Ku komba, to pray.
Ku komba, to eat
food left over.
Ku kumba, to brew.
Ku lampa^ to be long.
Ku lampa, to be
sharp.
Bongo, brains.
B6ngo, he-goats.
Ku sama, to cut up
meat.
Ku sama, to dress.
Chamba, chest.
Chamba, an old hoe.
Chanda, old house.
ChUnda, curds.
Chanda, forked stick.
Changa, an animal.
Chango, three-forked
stick.
Chilu, site of ruin.
Chilu, race of people.
Chiwa, drought.
Chiwa, outer appear-
ance.
Chulu, ant-heap.
Chulu, thousand.
Ilundu, a mountain.
Hondo, a drop.
Imo, very tall person.
Imo, razors.
Impute, large fish-
hook.
Impute, ground-nut.
Imputi, binding on
* spear.
Inkanzo, dancing-
place.
Inkanzo, kind of meat.
Insuki, a hair.
Insoki, grass seed.
Bwanda, curds.
Bwanda, a wall.
Ku shika, to paddle.
Ku shika, to arrive.
Lwiya, side.
Lwlya, a horn.
Lwala, mane.
Lwala, nail, claw.
Manga, kindness.
Manga, twins.
Mang'a, ruts.
Masuki, many hairs.
Masuke, buttermilk.
Mwezhi, moon.
Mwezhi, jawbone.
Mwezhi, waterfall.
Mwendo, hind-leg.
Mwendo, a trader.
Mwini, master.
Mwini, handle of hoe.
Mumi, living person.
Mume, dew.
Munto, name of a
tree.
Muntu, a person.
Inseke, a hen.
Inseke, a grain.
Kanda,small fork stick.
KSnda, small house.
Ku pela, to lick lips.
Ku pela, to sweep.
Ku soma, to eat new*
grain.
Ku soma, to sheathe.
PHONOLOGY
15
Beading Exercise 2.
Some Salutations.
Person at home : Wa bonwa Thou art seen. Good day.
Stranger :
Nda bonwa
I am seen.
P.
Ku mudi
You are there. (Inquiry as
S.
Ku tudi
We are there, to people at
stranger's
place.)
P.
Mu la langa ?
You are alive ?
S.
Tu la langa
We are alive.
P.
Mwinako
kwadi ?
Is your wife there ?
s.
Kwadi
She is there.
p.
Mwana u la
nonka ?
Does the child suck ?
s.
U la nonka
It sucks.
p.
Kuambwanzhi?
What is said? i.e. What
news?
s.
Ku la inza
budio
It is simply quiet.
p.
Mu dya nzhi ?
What do you eat ?
s.
Inzala budio,
mwenzuma
Famine only, my friend.
Beading Exercise 3.
Turn to the exercises on Chapters V and VI and read the Ila
tales over with a native, ignoring for the present the translation.
CHAPTER III
THE NOUN
Sect. i. CLASSIFICATION.
Every noun consists of a root and a prefix. The root carries
only a general meaning, the precise signification of the word
being given by the prefix. Thus the root -Ila gives the general
idea of the Ila people and from it are formed various nouns, each
with a definite meaning.
Thus : —
Mw-ila ( = Mu-ila), a person of the Ila tribe.
Baila, the Ila people.
Ch-ila (=5 Chi-ila), the language of the Ila people.
Bw-ila (= Bu-ila), the country of the Ila people.
Again, the root -anda gives the general idea of a dwelling-
place ; by adding various prefixes we get the following words : —
In-g*-anda, a house.
I-anda, a large house.
M-anda (= ma-anda), houses.
Ch-anda (= chi-anda), a tumbledown house.
E!-anda (= ka-anda), a small house.
Tw-anda ( = tu-anda), small houses.
Bw-anda ( = bu-anda), the wall of a house.
These prefixes, thirteen in number, are called classifiers,
because by their means all nouns are divided into classes. They
are as follows : — i. MU-; 2. BA- ; 3. MI-; 4. I- ; 5. MA-;
6. BU-; 7. KU-; 8. KA-; 9. TU-; 10. CHI-; 11. SHI-;
12. IM- orIN-; 13. LU-.
In forming number, the prefix of a noun undergoes change to
indicate singular or plural, while the root remains unchanged.
THE NOUN 17
Some of the prefixes represent the singular and others the
plural. Arranged in pairs they appear as follows : —
Singular.
Plural.
I. MU-
2. BA-
I. MU-
3- MI-
4. !•
5. MA-
6. BU-
5. MA-
7. KU-
5. MA-
8. KA-
9. TU-
10. CHI-
n. SHI-
12. IM- IN-
12. IM-IN-
13- LU-
12. IM- IN-
From this it is seen that the fifth prefix MA- corresponds as
plural to three singular prefixes ; that the first, MU-, corresponds
to two plural prefixes ; and that the twelfth appears in both the
singular and plural.
Nouns, then, are classified according, not to meaning, but to
their prefixes. As has already been explained, and as will be
seen more fully presently, the whole structure of the language
is built up by means of these prefixes and it is therefore most
important to grasp them thoroughly at the start.
We have thus nine classes of nouns.
Note. — It is not intended that the many words given as illustrations in
this chapter and elsewhere shoold all be committed to memory: many
of them are not common words, and it is useless for the student to commit
long lists of words to memory. The words given in the exercises, on the
contrary, should be learnt.
Class 1.
This consists of nouns having in the singular the prefix MU-
and in the plural BA-. When the root of the noun begins with
a vowel MU- generally appears as MW-.
Examples,
Mu-ntu, a person. Ba-ntu, people.
Mu-loxnbwana, a man. Ba-lombwana, men.
Mu-kamtu, a woman. Ba-kaintu, women.
Mw-iyi, a teacher. Ba-iyi, teachers.
i8 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The nouns of this class are mostly personal.
To it also belong the generic names of animals. Thus : —
Mu-nyama, a wild beast. Ba-nyama, wild beasts, game.
Mu-ssune, a bird. Ba-znne, birds.
Mu-puka, an insect. Ba-puka, insects.
Many names of animals belong to this class, mostly those
which are large and powerful compared with others of the same
kind. Thus : —
Mu-nyati, buffalo. Ba-nyati, buffaloes.
Mu-sefu, eland. Ba-sefa, eland.
Mu-zovu, elephant. Ba-zovu, elephants.
Mu-chende, a bull. Ba-ohende, bulls.
Mu-bondo, the barbel. Ba-bondo, barbel.
Many proper names are found in this class, though, of course,
they have no plural. Such names, however, may take the
prefix Ba- to denote a company of people of whom the person
named is the leader or representative. Thus: — Ba-Miika-
matame, Mukamatame and her people.
Sub-claas la.
There are many nouns which are shown by their pronouns
and adjectives to belong to class i, but which have not the
proper singular prefix MU-; these may be regarded as belong-
ing to a sub-class.
They include : —
1. Many proper names.
These are largely formed by means of certain prefixes : Shi
or Sha, ' father of,' for masculine names ; Na, ' mother of,' for
feminine. Thus : —
Sha-matanga, the father of melons, or^ herds.
Na-miyobo, mother of reeds.
2. Words beginning with Shi, Sha, and She. These are : —
Certain names of animals : —
THE NOUN 19
Shiluwe, a leopard. Plural: B»-8hilawe.
Shempela, the rhinoceros. ,, Ba-shempela.
Shimakoma, a kind of snake. „ Ba-shimakoma.
Shaluzuke, a kind of fish. ,, Ba-shaluroke.
Certain names of trees and bushes : —
Shikameba, a bush with red fhiit. PL : Ba-shikameba.
Certain personal nouns : —
Shinkondo, enemy. Plural: Ba-shinkondo.
Shiluse, a merciful man. „ Ba-shilnse.
Shatambi, a dumb person. „ Ba-shatambi.
3. Certain words expressing relationship: —
Tata, my father. Plural : Ba-tata.
Use, thy father. „ Ba-uso.
Ushe, his father. „ Ba-uahe.
Ushesu, our father. „ Ba-ushesu.
Ushenu, your father. „ Ba-ushenu.
Ushabo, their father. ,, Ba-ushabo.
Uachisha, my uncle. „ Ba-chisha.
4. Certain words which seem by their form to belong to other
classes but which really belong to this.
Words beginning Mi which seem to belong to class 2, pi. : —
Mintengwe, a kind of bird. Plural : Ba-mintengwe.
Mishika, a large hawk. ,, Ba-mishika.
Words beginning with Ka which seem to belong to class 6 : —
EAbwenga, a hyena. Plural: Ba-kabwenga {not
tubwenga).
Kafnmbwi, sable antelope. „ Ba-kafombwi.
Eaknne, a certain snake. „ Ba-kakune.
Words beginning with Cha or Chi which seem to belong to
class 7 : —
Chiwena, crocodile. Plural : Ba-ohiwena.
Chibizit a zebra. ,, Ba-chibizL
COiibawe, otter. „ Ba-ohibawe.
c 2
20 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
5. A few nouns seemingly of class i form their plural by
prefixing BA- to the singular form of the noun without removing
the prefix.
Moze, a kind of bird. Plural: Barmoze.
Mwaba, a jackal. „ Ba-mwaba*
Nouns of this class have really U as their singular classifier,
but with most nouns it is heard only when special emphasis is
put on the word. Thus at the beginning of sentences one may
hear, or see written, U-ohibizi, U-shiluwe.
Note. — ^In the tables of prononns, &c., it is not necessary to give
separate lines to this sub-class as the words contained in it are treated
uniformly as those of class i.
Class 2.
This comprises nouns which in the singular have the prefix
MU-, as in cl. i, and MI- in the plural. They are distinguished
from those of cl. i by being impersonal. When the root of
a word begins with a vowel the classifier generally appears
as MW.
Examples,
Mu-kondo, a spoor. Plural: Mi-kondo.
Mu-lusu, a stick. ,, Mi-lusu.
Mu-laka, tongue. „ Mi-laka.
Mu-chila, a tail. ,, Mi-ohila.
Names of trees belong largely to this class. (See list in
Eng.-Ila Vocab.)
Examples of contracted words found in this class : —
Mozo, heart. /or mu-ozo. Plural : Miozo.
Moza, spirit. „ mu-oza. ,, Mioza.
Munda, garden. „ mu-unda. „ Miunda.
Mungo, spoon. „ mu-ungo. ,y Minngo.
Class 3.
This consists of nouns whose singular prefix is I- and the
plural MA-; The singular prefix is a contraction for DI-,
THE NOUN 21
which appears in a few words, and which gives the form to
many of the pronouns, &c., belonging to this class.
Examples,
I-dindi, a hole. Plural: ma-dindi.
I-fafwe, a lung. ,, ma-fufwe.
I-kanda, a soft skin. „ ma-kanda.
I-kumbi, a cloud. ,, ma-kmnbi.
Many nouns in this class are augmentatives. That is to say,
the prefix I- gives them the notion of greats large, important.
For example : —
Lubu, a reed. Ibu, a large reed.
Miikainta, a woman. Ikainto, a large woman.
Ing<anda, a house. landa, a large house.
Mulombwana, a man. Ilombwana, a big man.
Examples of contracted words found in this class : —
Dinso, eye for di-inso. Plural : menso for ma-inso.
Dine, tooth ,, di-ino. „ mono „ ma-ino.
Class 4.
The singular prefix of this class is BU-, which before roots
beginning with a vowel appears as BW-; the plural prefix
is MA-.
Examples,
Bu-ta, a bow. Plural \ Va-ta.
Bu-tala, a grain-bin. „ Ma-tala.
Bwato, a canoe. „ Mate (^for ma-ato).
Many of the nouns of this class are abstract : —
Bubotu, goodness. Bubiabe, badness.
Bnlozhi, witchcraft. Buzhike, slavery.
Busongo, wisdom. Busu, sorrow.
Bufwi, jealousy. Bwami, authority.
22 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Names of countries belong to this class: —
Bwila, the country of the Baila.
Bukubu, „ ,, Marotsi.
Butonga, „ „ Batonga.
Many nouns in this class are of a collective character and
have no plural. Thus : —
lyi, an egg (cl. 3). Buyi, roe of a fish.
Mwani, a mopani tree (cl. 2). Bwani, a mopani forest.
Ibwe, a stone (cl. 3). Bubwe-bubwe, gravel.
Muzune, a bird (cl. i). BuEune, a number of tiny birds
regarded as one thing.
Examples of contracted words found in this class : —
Meya, thorns, /or ma-iya.
Bongo, brain. „ bu-ongo.
Boa, mushroom. „ bu-owa.
Boza, wool, hair. „ bu-oza.
Bofa, blindness. „ bu-ofu.
Class 5.
This class consists of : {a) three nouns which in the singular
have KU-, and in the plural MA-; and {d) verbal nouns.
These latter are simply verbs in the infinitive mood, Ku, the
sign of the infinitive, being prefixed to the verb and becoming
a classifier. These nouns are treated in every respect as the
others, but have no plural.
I^xamples,
Ku-twi, an ear. Plural: Ma-twi.
Ku-boko, forearm. „ Ma-boko.
E!ulu, a leg {/or ku-ulu). „ Ma-ulu.
Knfona, love, loving.
Kuzanda, wanting, will.
Class 6.
This consists of nouns which in the singular have the prefix
KA- and in the plural TU-, which before roots beginning with
THE NOUN 23
a vowel appears as TW-. This is the diminutive class, though
all nouns in it cannot be regarded as diminutives. To form
a diminutive a word is taken from another class, stripped of its
prefix and given the prefixes of this class.
Examples.
Moshimbi, a girl (cl. i). Kashimbi, a little PL : Tushimbi.
girl.
Isamo, a tree (cl. 3). Kasamo, a stick. PL : Tusamo.
Mulonga, a river (cl. 2). Kalonga, a brook. PL : Tulonga.
The plural classifier TU- is often used to express a small
quantity of something, especially something to eat or drink.
TukukxL, a small quantity of beer. From Bukuku.
Tnshima, a small quantity of bread. „ Inshima.
Twine, a small quantity of salt. „ Mwino.
Examples of contractions found in this class : —
Kembe {or Keembe), an axe, /or Kaembe.
E!ele {or Keele), a scab,/(7r Kaele.
Class 7.
This class consists of nouns which in the singular have the
prefix CHI- and in the plural SHI-.
Examples*
Chi-ntu, a thing. Plural : Shi-ntu, things.
Chi-bia, a pot. „ Shi-bia, pots.
Chi-banga, an axe. „ Shi-banga, axes.
Chi-ftia, a bone. „ Shi-fua, bones.
A few nouns have BI- as an alternative prefix in the plural.
Bi-dyo or shi-dyo, food.
Bi-nta or shi-ntu, things.
In many cases CHI- gives the idea of old^ broken^ worthless.
For example : —
Lukoma, a calabash dipper. Chikoma, a spoilt lukoma.
Mnkaintu, a woman. Chikaintu, a bad woman.
lamba, a hoe. Chamba, an old hoe.
24 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Names of languages belong to this class : —
Chila, the language of the Baila.
Chitonga, the language of the Batonga.
It would be more correct, perhaps, to regard the Chi in such cases as
indicating ' custom ' or ' manner*, e,g, U la amba Chitonga, he speaks after
the manner of the Batonga. The prefix has this meaning in many nouns.
Thus : Wa zaka chikua, he builds after the manner of a white man ; Wa
mata chikaintu, he daubs after the manner of a woman. Allied to this, if
not identical with it, is the prefix Cha which goes to form adverbs. U la
chita chansana, he does with strength, forcibly ; U la chita chaluse, he does
in a merciful manner, mercifully.
Examples of contractions found in this class : —
Chulu, an ant-heap, for chi-ulu.
Chamba, chest, for chi-amba.
Chela, iron, for chi-ela.
Class 8.
This comprises nouns which are identical in form in both
numbers, i. e. both the singular and plural classifiers are IM- or
IN-. The numbers are only distinguishable by the pronouns
which follow, the singular personal pronoun being i or ya, the
plural shi or sha. Thus : —
Impongo i la ya, the goat is going.
Impongo shi la ya^ the goats are going.
The prefix IM- is found before roots beginning with h, /, and
w, IN- before others.
Examples,
Sing, and Plur. In-komo, bag, bags.
„ „ In-gubo, blanket, blankets.
„ In-swi, fish, fishes.
„ Im-poko, knife, knives.
The initial i of this prefix is unstable and very liable to be lost.
Thus :—
Bika oheclu mu nkomo, put this in the bag.
N.B. — Not mu inkomo.
The i is always retained at the beginning of a sentence.
THE NOUN
25
Class 9.
This class consists of nouns which in the singular have the
prefix LU- and in the plural IM- or IN-. Before roots be-
ginning with a vowel LU- appears as LW-.
Examples,
Lu-fumba, a hoof. Plural i Im-fumba, hoofs.
Lu-tele, a net. „ In-tele, nets.
Lw-imbo, a hymn. „ In-yimbo, hjmns.
Examples of contractions found in this class : —
lK>yo, quitch grass, yV lu-oyo.
Lozhi, bark-string, for lu-ozhi.
Sub-olass 0 a.
While the proper plural classifier corresponding to LU- is
undoubtedly IN- there are many nouns which take MA- in the
plural instead. These we regard as forming a sub-class.
Examples,
Lu-pidi, a hill. Plural', ma-pidi.
Lu-ngwalo, a l&ter. „ ma-ngwalo.
Iiu-bu, a reed. „ ma-bu.
Examples of contractions found in this class : —
Lwala, a finger-nail. Plural-, malay^^r ma-ala.
Lwampa, unroofed house. „ mampay2?r ma-ampa.
Table of the Noun Classes.
Singular
Plural
No
Class
Example
Class
Example
MU- (MW-)
MiL-ntu, a person
BA-
Ba-ntn, people
la
(U.)
(TJ-) shiliLwe, leopard
BA
Ba-shiluwe, leopards
MU- (MW-)
I- (Di)
Ma-nshi, a village
MI-
Mi-nsbi, villages
I-tende, foot
MA-
Ma-tende, feet
BU- (BW-)
Bu-shiku, a day
MA-
Ma-shiku, night
KU- (KW-)
Ku-twi, an ear
MA-
Ma-twi, ears
KA-
E[a-8himbi, a girl
TU- (TW-)
Tu-shimbi, girls
7
CHI-
Ohi-nta, a thing
SHI-
BI-
Shi-ntu, things
Bi-ntu, things
8
IM-IN-
Im-pongo, a goat
IM- IN-
Im-pongo, goats
9
LU- CLW-)
Iin-tele, a net
IM- IN-
In-tele, nets
9a LU-(LW-)
IiiL-bu, a reed
MA-
Ma-bu, reeds
26 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Defeotive Nouns.
There are many nouns which have no singular form. For
example : —
Menzhi, water. Mabishi, sour milk.
Mankanza, honeycomb. Maumba, butter.
Madianshima, wedding feast. Makatalo, weariness, fatigue.
Sect. 2. GENDER.
There is no change in the noun to indicate distinction of sex.
So important in European languages, gender plays no part
whatever in the construction of Ila. To distinguish the sexes
we must resort to the methods indicated below.
1. Different words are used for the masculine, feminine and
common genders.
Examples.
>
Masculine, Feminine, Common,
Mulombwana, a man. Mnkainta, a woman. Muntu, a per-
son.
Mukombwe, a cock. Inseke, a hen. Inkuku,afowl.
Muchende, a bull. Impwizhi, a cow. Ing'ombe, a
head of cattle.
2. A limited use is made of the adjectives -zhazhi and -tumbe,
both indicating ' child-bearing '.
Examples,
Ingombe inzhazhi, a cow.
Munyama muzhazhi, a female animal.
Chibizi muzhazhi, a zebra mare.
Impongo intumbe, a she-goat.
3. In the case of children the words mulombwana, a man,
and mushimbi, a girl, or mukaintu, a woman, are used to
indicate the male and female sexes respectively. Thus : —
THE NOUN 27
Hwana mulombwana^ a male child.
Hwana muahimbi, or mwana mukaintu, a female child.
Sect. 3. CASE OF NOUNS.
There are four cases in Ila, viz. Nominative, Accusative,
Genitive, and Vocative. Except in the last, the noun undergoes
no change in form, the case-relation being expressed by position
in the sentence or by means of particles.
The Nominatiye Case.
This indicates that the noun is the subject of the action ex-
pressed by the verb. The noun in the nominative always stands
absolute, i. e. it is not the real subject of the verb, it must always
be connected with the verb by means of a personal pronoun.
This is one of the most important points in Ila grammar and
must be firmly grasped at once.
Examples.
Muntu a la ya, the person is going.
Lit. — Person he is going,
Bantu ba la ya, the people are going.
Lit. — People they are going,
Kashimbi ka la ya, the little girl is going.
Lit. — Little girl she is going,
Tuslumbi tu la ya, the little girls are going.
Lit. — Little girls they are going,
Ixnpongo i la ya, the goat is going.
Lit. — Goat it is going,
Impongo shi la ya, the goats are going.
Lit. — Goats they are going.
The pronouns will be given subsequently; from the above
examples it will be seen that they are either identical with, or
slightly modified from, the classifiers.
The noun in the nominative may be placed either before the
28 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
verb or after it, but the connecting pronoun always retains its
position before the verb. Thus : —
Muntu u la ya, the person is going.
or U la ya muntu, the man is going.
Lit. — He IS going {the) person.
The Accusatiye (or Objeotiye) Case.
The noun in the accusative case does not change in form but
may easily be distinguished from the nominative. It is never
preceded or followed by a personal pronoun in the same way as
the nominative. Sometimes to give emphasis to the thing spoken
of, it is placed at the beginning of the sentence, and the pronoun
in the nominative case is inserted between the accusative noun
and its pronoun. Just as we say in English : The man, do you
see him ? Thus : —
Bantu ba la bona banyama, the people see game.
Banyama twa ba bona, the game, we saw them.
Lit. — Game we them saw.
Prepositions govern the accusative case. They will be found
in their proper place, but here we may draw attention to the
three prepositions, Mu, Ku and A. These are identical in
form and meaning with the locative prefixes given in the next
section, but used as prepositions they are properly not joined to
the noun.
Mu indicates position within, motion out of, ox from, or into\
and answers to our prepositions in, into^ among, out-of,
Ku indicates motion towards or from, position at; and
answers to our prepositions to, from, at.
A indicates position on, near, motion off', and answers to our
prepositions along, upon,from''Off.
Mu tends to become tun when it comes before nouns beginning
with b, and u when it comes before nouns beginning with ni.
Likewise Ku tends to become u or o before nouns beginning
THE NOUN 29
with k. Ma and ku may become mw and kw and be joined
to nouns beginning with a vowel. A coalesces with the initial i
of nouns of class 3 to form e.
Examples.
Mnkainta wa ka zhoka mu kudima, the woman returned
from hoeing.
Muloxnbwana udi shiti mu nfif anda, the man stays in the
house.
Bakaintu ba la bika maseka ku matwi, the women put
rings in the ears.
Bantu ba la diza ku lupidi, the people climb up the hill.
Beenzu ba la kala ku munzhi, the travellers stay at the
village.
Bantu ba le enda a muma wa Iwenge, the people walk
along the river bank.
A mu kale a shuna, sit ye on the chairs.
Genitiye Case.
This case denotes certain relations between two nouns,
such as : —
1. Possession, e.g. in^ombe sha mwami, the chiefs cattle.
2. Origin, e.g. masamo a inshi, trees of the earth, i.e.
trees which spring from the earth.
3. fitness, e.g. Cliindi oha kudya, a time for eating, //'/.
of eating.
The first noun always represents the thing possessed, having
origin or fitness; the second, that possessing, originating, or
giving fitness.
The two nouns are connected by means of what are called
genitive particles, as given in the table below. These have the
same meaning as ^ in such phrases as : the law of the land,
the Tvork of John. But often we should translate them hy for
or to rather than of e.g. Imbuka ya kubala, lit. a book of
reading, L e. a book for reading, or, to read.
30
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Table of Gtenitiye Particles.
No,
I
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
9a
Singular
Class
MU-
MU-
I- (DI.)
BU-
KU-
KA-
CHI-
IM-IN-
LU-
LU-
GeH» Particle
Simple
wa
wa
dia
bwa
kwa
ka
oha
ya
Iwa
Iwa
Full
OWE
owa
odia
obwa
okwa
oka
ocha
oya
olwa
olwa
Copulative
Dgwa
ngwa
ndia
mbwa
nkwa
nka
ncha
nja
ndwa
ndwa
Plural
Class
BA-
MA-
MA-
MA-
NA-
TU-
SHI-
BI-
IM-IN-
IM- IN-
MA-
Gen. Particle
Simple
Full
ba
oba
ya
oya
a
a
a
twa
olwa
8ha
osha
bia
obia
8ha
osha
8ha
osha
a
Copulative
mba
Dja
nga
nga
nga
ntwa
nsha
mbia
nsha
nsha
nga
On the formation of these particles, note the simple forms are generally
formed from the classifiers by suffixing the preposition a ; thus bu + a «
bwa, lu -h a « Iwa, ku + a » kwa. But when the a is added to a classifier
ending in i, the i is dropped, thus shi + a -« sha. But the / of BI being
long the particle is bia. In class 3, sing., the full form of the classifier
DI- is used, giving dia not ia. Whenever the classifier begins with m,
this letter is dropped, thus ya not mia, wa not mwa, a not ma. In the
plurals of classes 7, 8, 9, the particle is sha. The full forms are simply the
above with o prefixed. The copulative forms are effected by a conjunction
of the copulative particles and the simple forms, e,g, ngn + wa ~ ngwa,
n + ya « nja, ngu + a — nga, &c.
The simple forms are in common use as in the following
examples. The full forms are used when the noun possessed
is understood and the particle stands first in the sentence.
Thus :—
Owa mwami ngu wezu, that of the chief is this.
The copulative forms are used in such sentences as this : —
That village is of my chief, or, my chief's, Munzhi wezo
ngwa mwami wangu.
Examples of the use of these particles.
Class I. Muzhike wa mwami, the slave of the chief.
Bazhike ba mwami, the chiefs slaves.
THE NOUN 31
Class 2. Muohila wa mtinyama, the tail of the wild beast.
miohila ya banyama, the tails of the beasts.
Class 4. Buta bwa shilnmamba, the warrior's bow.
Mata a bashilumamba, the warriors' bows.
Class 5. Kutwi kwa mwana, the child's ear.
Matwi a mwana, the child's ears.
Class 6. Kasonde ka mukaintu, the woman's needle.
Tnsonde twa bakaintu, the women's needles.
Class 7. Chibia cha muzhike, the slave's i)Ot.
Shibia sha bazhike, the slaves' pots.
Bintu bia mwami, the chiefs things.
Class 8. Imbelele ya mwami, the chiefs sheep.
Imbelele sha mwami, the chiefs sheep.
Class 9. Lwimbo Iwa mwenzu, the traveller's song.
Inyimbo sha beenzu, the songs of the travellers.
Class 9 a. Luseba Iwa muntu, a person's body.
Maseba a bantu, people's bodies.
In the possessive of personal nouns and proper names there
is a different formation. Instead of using the genitive particles
the possessive pronoun is used in the following manner : —
Mwanakwe Sezungo, son'of-him Sezungo, Sezungo's child.
Mwinakwe Shaloba, wt/e-of-him Skaloba, Shaloba's wife.
Namatwangakwe mnzhike, mistress-of-him slave^ the slave's
mistress.
In such words the pronoun kwe is an enclitic, i. e. it is so
closely united with the noun as to seem part of it ; the accent is
thrown forward, mwdna, mwandkwe ; mwina, mwindkwe.
The Vocative Case.
The vocative case is confined to a few nouns of class i a,
expressing relationship. In addressing one's father, e,g, you do
not say Tata^ but Ta; to your mother, not Bama^ but Ma; to
your uncle, not Uachisha, but Achisha.
32 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Sect. 4. LOCATIVE NOUNS.
Besides the classifiers already given there are three other pre-
fixes found in nouns. They differ from the classifiers in that
they are prefixed to the whole noun, not simply to the root.
A locative noun is made up of three parts : locative prefix +
classifier + root.
These prefixes are as follows : —
MU indicates position within^ inside,
KU „ „ at.
A „ „ around^ upon.
They are, therefore, identical in form and meaning with the
prepositions given in the last section ; but while as prepositions
they are properly written separate from the nouns, as locative
prefixes they must be treated like the classifiers and joined to
the nouns.
Mu and Ku when joined to nouns of cl. 3, sing., become
Mw, Kw. A then coalesces with the i to form e. When
joined to nouns of cl. 8 and cl. 9, pL, the initial vowel of the
classifier is lost.
Like other nouns, locative nouns in the nominative case are
followed by pronouns, which in their case are identical in form.
They also give form to adjectives, demonstratives, &c.
Note. — This will be fuUy illustrated in the following chapters, but in
view of its immediate importance it may be as well to give examples in
advance.
The student would do well at this point to refer to and carefully study
the parts of Chapter IX dealing with the connecting of nouns and pronouns
with locatives. (Sect. 1,4; 2,4.)
Examples,
Mnng'anda mu la shia, the house is dark inside.
Lit. — Inside-ihe-house inside is blacks
Mono muohikilo mubiabe, it is dirty here in the kitchen.
Lit. — In-here in-kifchen in-bad.
THE h^OUN 33
KunsM kwisamo nkubiitbe, it is dirty beneath the tree.
Lit. — To-earih to-iree to-ts bad.
Adi solWele amudiango, it is dirty around the door.
Lit — Around'ts dirfy arcund-door,
Sa mwadi menzhi mtmkomo P Is there water in the bag ?
Lit. — Is it-is water in-bag.
Pe, mwina menshi mimkomo. No, there is no water in
the bag.
Lit. — NOf in-is»noi water in-bag.
Ano angu ngakando, my place here is big.
Lit. — at'here at-mine at-big.
Skct. 5. COPULATIVE PARTICLES.
In English we say : it is a tree \ they are trees^ using the two
words it and they of all nouns in the singular and plural re-
spectively. In Ua there are two ways of expressing such a
thought We may simply say : Munto, it is a man ; Bantu,
they are people. Or we may use certain particles as given in
the following table : —
Table of Cppulative Fartioles.
Sif^tdar.
Example,
Kgu muntu, it is a person.
Kgu munzhi, it is a village.
Kdi isamo, or nd' isamo, it is
a tree.
4. BU- M, mbu Mbuzane, or mbu buzane, it is
meat.
Kku kutwi, it is an ear.
Nku kashimbi, it is a little girl.
Kchi chintu, it is a thing.
Kimpongo, it is a goat.
Kdumo, orndu lumo, it is arazor.
Kdupidi, or ndu lupidi, it is
a hill.
D
'ass.
Particle,
I. MU-
Ngu
2. MU-
Ngu
3- I-
Ndi, nd'
5. KU-
nkn
6. KA.-
IVku
7. CHI-
Nohi
8. IM- IN-
TS (nji)
9. LU-
lSt\ ndu
9 a. LU-
K; ndu
Class,
Particle.
I. BA-
M; Mbo
2. MI-
Nji
3. MA-
»rgu(nga)
4. MA-
Ngu{nga)
5. MA-
Ngu(nga)
6. TU-
Ntu
7. SHI-
Kshi
8. IM- IN-
KRhi
9. IM- IN-
Nshi
9 a. MA-
»rgu(nga)
34 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Plural.
Example,
Mbantu, or Mbo bantu, they
are people.
Kji minzhi, they are villages.
Kgu masamo, they are trees.
Kgu mazane, they are meats.
Kgu matwi, they are ears.
Ktu tushimbi, they are little girls.
Kshi shintu, they are things.
Nsh'impongo, they are goats.
Ksh'imo, they are razors.
Kgu mapidi, they are hills.
It will be noticed that these particles are merely the classifiers nasalized.
In Classes 7 singly 7, 8, and 9//., the n is so slight as to be almost inaudible.
In CI. 8 and 9//. the singular particle n is also used.
The forms in brackets are used with pronouns, &c. Where
two forms are given the second is used in emphasis.
These particles may be used to connect two nouns, but in
that case it must be carefully noted that the particle agrees in
class with the second noun, not the first.
Examples,
Tushimbi mbo bateu, the little girls are thieves.
Not ntu bateu.
Isamo ngu mwani, the tree is a mopani.
Not ndi mwani.
Impongo ngu shembwe, the goat is a ram.
• Not n shembwe.
Note. — There are negative forms of these particles, which the student
may conveniently learn at this stage. See Chap, ix, Sect, i, i.
Note. — These particles are often a stumbling-block when writing down
words from natives. You ask the word for a canoe and get the answer
xnbwato : you write down the word thinking perhaps it belongs to Class 8.
Afterwards yon find it means, it is a canoe. Even Dr. Livingstone was
THE NOUN 35
caught in this trap. In his MS. vocabulazy of Tonga, we read Ndoka,
a tsetse ; ISfiBixxia, porridge ; for Inka, insima.
Sect. 6. THE FORMATION OF NOUNS.
Nouns are formed from other nouns, from verbs, adjectives,
and adverbs. This is done by prefixing a classifier according
to the idea to be expressed, and often, when formed from verbs,
by changing the final vowel of the verb. The rules governing
the use of the various classifiers are very obscure, and only a few
general remarks can here be made at present. Further study
may possibly bring to light many more rules than are given here.
1. Many nouns are formed from simple verbs by prefixing
the classifiers MTJ-, BA-, and changing the final vowel into i.
These nouns indicate the doer of an action, and correspond to
English words ending in -rr, such as : reader ^ writer ^ traveller.
Examples,
Ku bula, to advise, instruct. Mubudi, adviser, instructor.
Ku iya, to teach. Mwiyi, a teacher.
Ku fana, to love. MufUni, a lover.
2. Many active nouns are formed, not from the simple but
from the causative form of the verb, by prefixing MU-, B A-, and
changing the final vowel into L These nouns are much more
common than the above.
Examples.
Simple Verb. Causative Verb. Noun.
Ku embela, to herd. Ku embezha. Mwembezhi, herds-
man.
Ku swaya, to visit. Ku swazha. Muswazhi, a visitor.
Ku Bolola, to precede. Ku solozha. Musolozhi, prede-
cessor, guide.
3. Some nouns are formed from the stative species of the
verb. They indicate that the person named is in a certain state
or condition. The final suffix -uka becomes -ushi : Mu-, Ba-,
are prefixed, and the final vowel changes into i.
D 2
36 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples,
"KvL futiika, to be saved. Muftitiishi, one saved.
Ku fanguka, to be weaned Muftrngaslxi, a weaoed one.
Sometimes another prefix is used instead of Mu-. Thus : —
Ku zapaiika, to be torn. ObiBapanshi, something torn, rag.
4. Many nouns are formed from verbs by prefixing the
classifier Chi and changing the final vowel into o. These are
formed from causative verb$ and indicate the instrument with
which the action is performed.
Examplis.
SimpU Verb. Causative. Noun.
Ku yala, to close. Ku yasha. Chiyazho, something to close
with, e. g. a door fastening.
"KvL paila, to offer Ku paizlia. Chipaizho, an offering,
to ancestors.
Instead of Chi, the classifiers IM- or I- or KA- may be used.
Observe the shades of meaning given by the different classifiers.
As we have seen before, Chi often gives the idea of old, useless,
worn out.
Examples,
From Ku pela, to sweep. Causative form, Ku pezha.
Impezho, an ordinary broom or brush.
Ipezho, a large „ „
Kapezho, a small „ „
Chipezho, a worn-out „ „
From Ku beza, to carve wood. Causative form, Ku bezha.
Imbezho, a carving tool.
Ibezho, a large carving tool.
Kabezho, a small carving tool.
Chibezho, a worn-out carving tool.
5. Some nouns are formed from the relative species of the
verb by prefixing Chi, and changing the final vowel into o : they
indicate the place where the action is performed.
THE NOUN
37
Simple Verb,
Examples*
Relative form.
Eu Imnbtila, to Ealtunbudila.
pay a tax.
Eu paila, to offer Ku paidila.
to ancestors.
Eu ika, to cook.
Eu ona, to sleep.
Noun,
Ohilnmbudilo, place for
paying tax ; ' Receipt
of custom '.
Chipaidilo, a place for
praying.
Chikilo, a kitchen.
Ghoneno, a bedroom.
Eu8hingaliika,to Eushiugalu-
go round. kwa.
Euikila.
Eu onena.
6. Some nouns are formed from the passive verb by prefixing
a classifier without changing the final vowel.
Examples.
Verb. Passive Verb, Noun,
Eu ftma, to love. . Eu fnnwa. Mufanwa, one who is
loved.
Chiahingulukwa, some-
thing gone round, as
obstacle in path.
Eu sama, to dress. Ku samwa. Chisamwa, clothing.
7. Verbs in the infinitive mood become nouns by simply
taking as a classifier the particle Eu, which otherwise is not pre-
fixed to the verb. Nouns may in this way be formed from any
verb, or any form of a verb, but care must be taken as to the
shades of meaning imparted by various forms of the verb.
Examples,
From Eu katala, to tire.
Eukatala, weariness.
Eukatazha, troublesomeness.
Eukatazhiwa, troubledness.
From Eu bona, to see.
Kubona, seeing, sight. Eubonwa, being seen.
Kubonya, showing. Euboneka, visibleness.
Elubonesha^ clear sight Eubonana, mutual seeing.
38 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
8. Other nouns are formed from these, infinitive nouns by
simply prefixing the genitive particle Sha (Class 7, pL\
Examples,
Kudya, eating. Shakudya, food.
"Km hozha, to pay wages. Shakuhozha, wages.
9. Nouns of Class i a are formed from other nouns by pre-
fixing Shi^
Examples,
Shikufwa, a dead person from Kufwa, death.
Shimano, a cunning person ,, Mano, cunning.
ShilwengU; a notorious person „ Lwengu^ notoriety.
Shimanga, a kind person „ Manga, kindness.
Shinkole, a cruel person ,, Inkole, cruelty.
10. Nouns of Class i a are also formed, by prefixing Na to
other nouns.
Examples,
Kabukando, a chief wife from Bnkando, greatness..
Kakufunwa, a favourite wife ,, Knfiinwa, love.
Nabwaniohe, a younger wife „ Bwaniohe, youthfulness.
11. Nouns are formed from others by simply changing the
prefix into Chi. These nouns indicate something broken^ bad,
worn-out, useless.
Examples,
Miikaintu, a woman. Chikaintu, a bad woman. ,
Mubinda, a loin-cloth. Chibinda, a worn-out loin-
cloth.
12. Diminutive nouns are formed from others by changing
their classifiers into KA-, TXJ-.
Examples.
Mwembezhi, shepherd, young Kembezhi, a boy.
man.
Midombwana, a man. Kalombwana, a boy.
THE NOUN 39
13. Other diminutive nouns are formed by prefixing Kanga.
These belong to Class 6, and mostly are names of animals.
Examples,
Shikembezhi, a lad. Kangashikembezhi, a young lad.
PL Tungabashikembezhi.
MnzoYU, an elephant. Kangamazovu, a young elephant.
PI. TiingabazoYU.
14. Augmentative nouns are formed from other nouns by
changing the prefixes into I-, MA-.
Example,
Mulombwana, a man. Ilombwana, a big man.
15. Abstract nouns are formed from other nouns by changing
the singular classifier into BIT-.
Examples,
Muoneki, a king. Buoneki, kingly dominion,
kingdom.
Mwami, a chief. Bwami,chieftainship,authority.
Musu, a sorrowful person. Busu, sorrow^ distress.
16. Proper nouns are formed from common nouns by pre-
fixing Shi, Sha, Shi for masculine names ; Muka or Na for
feminine names. Often no prefix is heard, but the word is
changed into Class i a, and U is always understood, and is heard
when the noun is emphasized.
Examples,
Shimunza, from Munza, daytime.
Shibwizu, „ Bwizu, grass.
Shimiata, ,
Mukamiduti,
Mukamukombwe, ,
Mukachikwikwi, ,
Shantebe, ,
Shamanga, , ,
Mata, bows.
Muluti, missionary.
Mukombwe, a cock.
Chikwikwi, locusts.
Intebe, a bag made of barL
Manga, kindness (or perhaps twins).
40 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Shamweshi, from Mweahl, moon.
Kamiyobo, „ Miyobo, reeds.
(XJ-)Cliikanda, „ Chikanda, a hide.
X 7. Abstract nouns are formed from adjectives by prefixing Bu-.
Examples,
Bubongvhu, softness from -bongvhu, soft.
Bubotn, goodness ,, -botu, good.
Btuiumo, hardness „ "Eiuno, hard.
These adjectives are themselves formed from the verbs j ku
bomba, ku bota, ku zuma.
18. Some adjectives are treated as nouns.
Examples.
Muzhazhi, a female person: the adj. -sliashi, with prefix of CI x.
Inzhazhi, a female goat, &c. „ CI. 8.
19. A few nouns are formed from adverbs.
Examples,
Shikalo, an ancient from Kale, long ago.
Shakumbadi, secrets „ Kuxubadi, aside.
20. Finally, examples may be given of compound nouns, 1. e.
nouns formed of two or more words of different parts of speech.
Chi-zhinga-bula, that-which-surrounds-the-bowel^ i. e. in-
testinal fat.
I'PB,'0'lsjihozha,I/e'lkal'-gtveS'-and'-ro/s (a name given to God).
Mu-dima-ku-bushu, wkal-digs-on-lkeface, I e. small-pox.
Sect. 7. FOREIGN NOUNS.
The introduction of civilization among the Baila has inevitably
enlarged their ideas and rendered necessary many additions to
their vocabulary. For many of the new ideas it has not been
necessary to borrow words ; either {a) existing words have had
an extended meaning given them, or {d) new words have been
made according to the rules given in the previous section.
THE NOUN 41
But over and beyond these, there exist many foreign words
ilatzed. Many words are borrowed from Tebele, others from
English ; many more from Suto. Suto has had most influence
in this way, because of the Kololo (Suto) speaking Marotsi, and
also because the first settlers among the Baila were missionaries
who spoke Suto. Many of the words from Suto are really
sutoized Dutch words, and this explains the curious presence in
Ua of many Dutch words. A study of neighboining dialects
would probably show that from them also the Baila have bor-
rowed. But notwithstanding all this, Ila remains a very pure
language.
In introducing foreign words they are brought as much as
possible into an Ila form, by giving them classifiers, spelling
them phonetically (where necessary), and making such changes
as will render them easy of pronunciation to Baila.
Foreign words are indicated as such in the Vocabulary. They
include the following : —
(N.B.—E.»* English; T.« Tebele; S.«Suto; D.- Dutch.)
1. Administrative terms', Inkambe, a government station
(E. camp); IntelongOy a prison (S. teranko; D. tronk);
Ukapoteni, a captain ; Useijaiii, a sergeant ; Itikiti, a census
receipt, labour ticket.
2. Names of coins i Itiki, a threepenny bit {tickey); Icdkis-
pense, a sixpence ; Impondo, a pound ; Ishilini, a shilling.
3. Names of common articles of civilized use : Chikati, a watch,
clock (T. isikati^ tin^); Ghlnotolo, a key (S. senotlolo] D.
sleutit) ; Ibiikiti, a bucket
4,, Names of articles of clothing: Ibulukwe, trousers (S.
burukwe', D. broek) ; Ihempi, a shirt (S. hempi) D. hemd).
5. Names of time and seasons : Imbelekelo, Saturday (T.
if^egelo)] MushimbuLttko, Monday (T. Umsombulukoy i.e.
the unfolding) ; Insunda, Sunday ; Chismasi, Christmas.
6. ^Missionary words* i Inkeleke, a church (S. kereke;
D. ker^); Lubapatizo, baptism; Imputeu, a catechumen
class (S. phuteho) ; Ghikolo, a school.
42 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER III.
The following exercises have been designed with a view to enabling the
student, after mastering them, to join words into sentences, and thus
anticipate what he will learn afterwards. He may find them rather a tax
npon his patience : but he will have the consolation of knowing that when
he has mastered them he possesses the essence of the whole grammar, and
should straightway be able to make himself understood by the people.
Subsequent exercises will not be upon this scale.
Exercise L
Classify the nouns given in Chapter II, writing down the
singular and plural of each.
Exercise 2.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following words
of CI. I and i a, and write down and learn their plurals : —
Muntu; midombwazia; makaizitu; mwana; muztme;
mwembezhi; mwami; mazhike; mutwanga; miishimbi;
kamwale; chiwena; shumbwa.
Also the words for my father ^ thy father^ my mother^ thy
mother^ &c. With all these nouns, and all others of CI. i and i a,
use the following :
Adjectives \ — Mubiabe, //. babiabe, bad ; mubotu, //. ba-
botu, good, fine; bonse, all; banjibanji, many; omwi, one;
bobili, two.
Pronouns : — Wa, he, she, it ; ba, they ; wezu, this ; wezo,
that ; ivedia, yonder ; baba, these ; babe, those ; badia,
yonder ; wakwe, //. bakwe, his ; wesu, //. besu, our ; wenu,
//. benu, your ; wabo, pi, babo, their.
With adverbs, use udi for it is ; badi for they are.
With nouns and pronoims, use ngu for it is; mbo for
they are.
Adverbs : — Inzho, now, then ; kabotu, well ; kwi P where ?
Verds : — Ku bona, to see ; ku leta, to bring ; ku langa, to
look for ; ku f una, to love ; ku chita, to do ; ku yaya, to kill.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER IH 43
Kda bona, I see ; wa bona, thou seest, he sees ; twa bona,
we see ; mwa bona, you see ; ba bona, they see.
Translate into English : —
Nda bona mulombwana mubotu. Muzbike mubiabe. Ba-
shimbi ba langa ushabo. Sa mwa bona bakamwale ? Nda bona
kamwale omwi. Ngu wedia chiwena. Balombwana babo ba
yaya bashumbwa bobili. Twa bona batwanga bakwe bonse. Mbo
babotu. Mwami wakwe wa yaya munyama. Bantu bonse ba
langa banyama. Bama ba leta mwana wabo. Mukaintu wedia
ngubauia. Beembezhi babotu badi kwi ? Mbobadia. Bashimbi
ba chita kabotu. Sa mwa bona banyama banjibanji? Twa
bona munyama omwi. Mwami wenu udi kwi ? Shumbwa wezo
wa yaya bakaintu bobili. Nda bona bazune inzho. Ushesu
wa bona chiwena omwi. Uso wa leta muzhike wakwe. Ngu
wezo mushimbi mubotu. Ngu wako mwana wezo.
Translate into Ila : —
Those young-girls. All the shepherds. My father sees
many game. Those children are good. I look-for my father.
My children do well. Do you see my mother ? The two slaves
are his. I see now. The chiefs are yonder. This is my child.
Do you see the birds ? All the men look-for game. We saw
two crocodiles. The men kill many lions. Your mother brings
her child. Where are all the men ? I see one man. Those
servants. This lion. Your children. Thy slave. Your two
children. A bad girl. Bad servants. Good people.
Exercise 8.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following words
of CI. 2, and learn their plurals : —
Mnnzhi; mutwi; mosamo; mukondo; mudiango;
mozo; muchelo; mudllo; mnnda; mwaka; mwani;
mweshi.
With these nouns in the singular use the same adjectives, &c.
as in Class i ; in the plural use these : —
Mibiabe, bad; mibota, good; yonse, all; minjiminji,
44 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
many; yobili, two; ya, they; eshi^ these; eeho, those;
yedia, those yonder; yangu, mine, my; yniko, thy; yakwe,
his ; yesu, our ; yenu, your ; yabo, then*.
With adverbs, use idi for /hey are : with nouns, &c., nji.
Verbs :— Ku dima, to hoe ; ku zaila, to weed; ku ya, to go ;
ku weza, to hunt ; ku biawa, to be ripe ; ku tema, to cut
down ; ku tola, to take to ; ku londa, to fetch ; ku tobela,
to follow (spoor).
Ku, to; mu, in; nxhiP what?
Translate into English .•—
Mutwi wangu. Nji ezho miunda yenu. Ba ya ku dima mu
miunda yabo. Sa mwa bona menzhi ? Nda leta musamo mu-
botu. Ngu wezu mwani« Mozo wako mubiabe. Bakaintu ba
ya ku zaila. Balombwana ba tema miani ezho. Munyama
nzhi wezo ? Twa tobela mikondo ya munyama. Miaka yonse.
Twa dima miaka minjiminji mu munda wezo. Bana ba londa
michelo. Ba tola michelo ku ushabo. Twa bona minzhi
minjiminji: nji mibiabe yonse. Ngu wezu tnunzhi mubotu:
ngu wangu. Mudilo udi kwi ? Bana ba ya ku kunka mudilo.
Twa bona shumbwa mu munzhi.
Translate into Ila : —
My two villages are bad. This is the door. The girls go to
the gardens to weed. The men follow the spoor. They go to
cut-down mopani-trees. Many years. The women go to light
fires. Where is thy village? The children take fruit to their
mothers. The fruit is ripe in the garden. This month. Next
month. This is thy medicine. The men go to hunt. They
kill many game. Two years. Their fields. What are you
cutting-down ?
Exercise 4.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following and
learn their plurals : —
Isamo; itashi; itende; dinso; dino; ikumbi; iamba;
ikani; ibwantu; isuba; isani; isumo.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER HI 45
l^th diese nouns, and all others of CL 3, use the foUowing :-<-^
AdjecHves: — ^Ibisbe, //. msbiabe, bad; iboto, pi. ma-
bota, good ; onse, all ; manjimanji, many ; diomwi, one ;
obili, two.
Pronaufu : — Dia, it ; a, they ; ledi, this ; ledio, that ; ledia,
yonder ;. aaa, these ; aao, those ; adia, yonder ; dianga, //.
anga, my ; diako, //. ako, thy, thine ; diakwe, pi akwe, his ;
diesu,//. esu, our ; di9nu,//.e]iu,your; diabo,^/.abo, their.
With adverbs use didi for it is ; adi for ihey are.
With nouns, pronouns, adjectives : nd', H is ; JXgu, /^ are.
Verbs : — Eu yasai to spear ; ku dya^ to eat ; ku nwa, to
drink ; kn amba, to gpeaJc ; ku enda, to travel, walk ; ku
Tbumba, to cover; ku ula, to buy; a tu, let us; ko, do
thou (imperative) ; ka mii^ do ye.
O, with^ and.
Transktie into English : —
Twa ya ku nwa ibwantu. Babo bantu ba amba makani
manjimanji. Mwa ula kwi isani dienu ? Masumo ngu a balo-
mbwana : mamba ngu a bakaintu. Makumbi a vhumba izuba.
Nd' isamo nzhi ? Ngu mwani. Balombwana ba yasa banyama
o masumo abo. A tu ende inzho. Ka mu leta masumo enu o
mamba enu. Matashi obili. Itende diomwi. Meno abo onse.
Menso enu obili. A tu ende ku masamo adla. Meno angu
onse mabiabe. Masumo aza onse ngu angu. Isamo diako
didi kwi? Ndi ledio. Mwa nwa nzhi? Twa nwa ibwantu.
Mwa dya nzhi ? Ba amba nzhi ?
Translate into Ila : —
The cloud covers the moon. Where is your spear ? This is
it The women go to drink beer. Thy tooth is bad. The
men speak many tidings (makani). The girls' teeth are fine.
The men spear the game with their spears. The women hoe
their fields with their hoes. This tooth of mine is bad. Thy
two feet. Bring ye all the trees. What does he say ? What
46 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
do you buy ? Let us go now. What are you eating ? Those
affairs are yours. Let us go to see the chiefs villages ; they
are two.
Exercise 6.
Find from the Vocabulary the meanings of the following
nouns of CI, 4, and learn their plurals, where they have, any : —
Bwato; biita; buzane; buchi; busongo; bwami;
biikoko; buloa ; bulungu ; biimi; bushiku; bulongo.
With nouns of this class, in the singular use the following.
In the plural use those of CI. 3, //.
Bubiabe, bad ; bubotu, good ; bonse, all ; bunjibrmji,
much ; bomwi, one ; bwa, it ; bobu, this ; bobo, that ;
bodia, yonder ; bwangu, my, mine ; bwako, thy, thine ;
bwakwe, his ; bwesu, our ; bwenu, your ; bwabo, their.
With adverbs use budi for it is; with nouns, &c., xnbu, or xn.
Ndi kwete, I have ; udi kwete, thou hast, he has ; tudi
kwete, we have ; xnudi kwete, you have ; badi kwete, they
have. Ku zaka, to build ; ku zasha, to build with.
Translate into English : —
Bwato bwako mbubotu. Ndi kwete buchi bunjibunji. Ba
zasha bulongo. Ba ya ku ula bulungu. Bushiku bobu.. Bantu
banjibanji ba funa ku nwa bukoko. Bumi bwako. Buta
bwakwe budi kwi ? Mbu bobu. Ko leta buchi bwako bonse.
Baami babo badi kwete bwami bunjibunji. Ka mu leta buzane
bwangu. Mwa tola kwi bwato bwangu ? Mata angu adi kwi ?
Bulungu bwenu mbu bobu, Mbu bodia buchi bubotu. Buloa
bwakwe bonse.
Translate into Ila : —
This is thy canoe. The men build-with clay. The women
go to buy beads. That man has much wisdom. All this day.
Let us go at night. Thy life. Those people love to drink
strong-beer ; we love light-beer. Bring much clay. This honey
is bad. Our chiefs have authority in their villages. I have two
canoes ; bring the big one. This is his bow.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER III 47
Ezeroise 6.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following nouns
of Class 5 and learn their plurals, if they have any : —
Kutwi; kuboko; kulu; knfuna; knshis; kudya;
komana.
{Remember thai any verb may be made into a noun by joining up
the Ku.)
Most of the nouns of this class have no plural : those that
have use the same adjectives, &c., as CI. 3 ; in the singular use
the following : —
Kubiabe, bad; kubotu, good; komwi, one; kwa, it;
koku, this; koko, that; kodia, yonder; kwangu, my;
kwako, thy ; kwakwe, his ; kwesu, our ; kwenu, your ;
kwabo, their.
With adverbs use kudi for {'/ is ; with nouns, &c., nkn.
Buti? how? chinichini, much, very much.
Ku chisa, to pain; ku lampa, to be long; ku zosha, to
astonish.
Translate into English : —
Bwami bwa mwami wezu bwa zosha. Kutwi kwangu kwa
chisa. Nda bona kushia kwako. Kufuna kwakwe kwa zosha.
Matwi akwe a lampa. Kudya kwakwe. Udi kwete kutwi
komwi. Kuchita kwako kudi buti ? Nku kubotu. A tu ende
chinichini. Kwenda kwako kwa zosha. Maulu akwe a lampa.
Mutwi wangu wa chisa chinichini. Kuchisa kudi kwi ? Kudima
kwako kudi buti ? A mu lete buchi bunjibunji.
Translate into Ha : —
I like your doings. My ear is painful. Your love is
wonderful. Your eating. I see your blackness. You love
your food very much. He has long arms. Your buying is
good. His singing is bad. My leg is very painful. He has
one ear. The ears of zebras are long. Their building. Your
going. Your love.
48 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Bzeroise 7.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following nouns
of Class 6, and learn their plurals ^^
Easlumbi; kasamo; kambo; kasonde; kalambwe;
kalobo; kalombwana; kasaka; kembe; k&nda.
With these nouns use the following .*«*-
Kabiabe, //. tubiabe, bad ; kabotu, //. tnbotu, good ;
tonse, all ; tunjitunji, many ; komwi, one ; tobili, two.
Ea, it; twa^ they; kaka, this; kako, that; kadia, yonder;
totu, these ; toto, those ; todia, yonder ; kangu, //. twangu,
my, mine ; kako, pi, twako, thy ; kakwe, pL twakwe, his ;
kenu, pL twenu, our ; kesu, //. twesu, our ; kabo, //. twabo,
their.
With adverbs: kadi, it is; tudi, they are. With adjectives, &c.:
nku, it is ; ntu, they are. To say /here ts none, use kwina,
with all nouns.
Ku sobana, to play ; ku beleka, to work ; ku sha, to dig ;
ku loba, to fish with a hook ; ku lukanka, to run ; ku dila,
to cry ; ku sempula, to carry.
Translate into English : —
Tushimbi twa sobana kabotu. Nku kako kambo kabiabe.
Tnlombwana twa ya ku mulonga ku loba. Kembe kako kadi
kwi? A mu lete tusamo tunjitunji. Balombwana ba sha
kalambwe. Bakaintu ba ya ku kasaka ku chaba nkuni. Tu-
shimbi twa zaka twanda tobili. Babo bantu ba amba twambo
nzhi? Kasonde kaka nku kangu. Tusamo toto ntubiabe: a
mu lete tubotu. A tu ende ku kasaka kadia. Kwina tulobo.
Tushimbi twa dila chinichini. Tulombwana twa sempula
nkuni. Bashimbi ba beleka. Nku kambo komwi. Badi kwete
makani manjimanji. Kasonde kakwe kadi kwi? Twembe
twenu ntubiabe.
Translate into Ila ;—
This is my axe. We go to the forest to gather firewood.
The crying of the little girls. The forest is yonder. The boys
EXERaSES ON CHAPTER III 49
go to the river to fish. The little girls play : they build little
houses. The man digs a pit. Bring ye many sticks. Bad girls.
This is your affair. There is no news. Two little giris. My
fishhook. What are you digging? How do they play? What
are you working at? What are you carrying? There is no
firewood. There are no people.
8.
Find fi-om the Vocabulary the meaning of the following nouns
of Class 7, and learn their plurals :
Chintu; ohana; ohibia; ohifua; chimpata; chanda;
chishi; chmiibwa; chikala; chidisho; cbianza, chi-
londa*
With these nouns use the following : —
Chibiabe, //. shibiabe, bad ; chibotu, pL shibotu, good ;
shonse^ all; shinjishinji, many; ohomwi, one; shobili, two.
Clia, it ; sha, they ; checlii, this ; checho, that ; chedia,
yonder; sheshi, these; shesho, those; shedia, yonder;
changu, //. shangu, mine; chako,//. shako, thy; ohakwe,
pi, shakwe, his ; chesu, //. sheso, our ; chenu, pL shenu,
your; chabo,//. shabo, their.
With adverbs : chidi, it is ; shidi, they are. With nouns, &c.
nchi, it is; nshi, they are.
iEflfdi la bona, I am seeing; u la bona^ thou art, he is
seeing ; tu la bona, we are seeing ; mu la bona, you are see-
ing ; ba la bona, they are seeing. (NB. this form of the verb
is also used as an immediate future tense : we shall see, &c.)
TSlXjl kala, to sit, to remain : ku njila, to enter; ku njizha,
to put in ; ku bumba, to form ; ku sata, to be sick.
Translate into English : —
Nshi sheshi shumbwa shangu. Ka mu njizha ing'ombe mu
chimpiata. Nda sata chilonda; nda langa musamo mubotu.
Bashimbi ba la dya chanda. Nchi checho chifua. Ka mu leta
shibia shobili. Nshi shianza shesho. Kwina shuna shinjishinji.
E
60 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
■
Leta shuna shako shonse. Chishi chechi chidi buti? Tu la
langa chidisho : tu le njizha mu chibia chestu Balombwana ba
la ya ku chikula chedia. Nchi chabo chibotiL Ka mu kala mu
chimpata. Shidi kwi shintu shenu? Bakaintu ba la bumba
shumbwa shesu. Nchi chedia chikula cha mwami wenu.
Nchi chibiabe chishi chechi.
Translate into Ila : —
Where are all your things? There is no relish to put into
our pot. The girls are eating curds. That man has many
pots. Where are the stools? Bring ye two. We want to sit.
Go ye and sit in the kraal. The girls are sick with ulcers.
That woman is making bins. Those are your things yonder.
This is a bad nation. We look-for relish to put into our pot.
The cattle are entering the kraal. Their customs are all bad.
My pots are all good. This is his stooL Dogs like to eat bones.
Exercise 9.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following nouns
of Class 8, and learn their plurals : —
Imbelele ; imbongolo ; imbuto ; impato ; impoko ; im-
pwizhi; ing'ombe; ingubo; ing'anda; inkldi; inkuku;
inshi; inswi.
With these nouns (except where the plurals vary) use the
following: imbiabe, bad; imbotu, good; shonse, all; shinji-
shiiiji, many ; yomwi, one ; shobili/two; ya, it; sha, they;
ezhi, this ; ezho, that ; yedia, yonder ; sheshi, these ; shesho,
those ; shedia, yonder.
Yangu,//. shangu, mine; yako, //. shako, thy; yakwe,
pL shakwe, his ; jesxifpL shesu, our ; yenu,//. shenu, your;
yabo,//. shabo, their.
With adverbs use : idi, it is ; shidi, they are. With nouns :
n, it is. With pronouns : nji, it is. With nouns and pronouns :
nshi, they are.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER III 51
Nda ka bona, I did see, I saw ; wa ka bona, thou didst,
he did see ; twa ka bona, we did see ; mwa ka bona, you
did see ; ba ka bona, they did see.
Eu mena, to grow (of plants, &c.) ; ku kula, to grow (of
persons) ; ka vhula, to be much, many ; ku shanga, to sow ;
Ndetela, bring me.
Translate into English : —
Nshi sheshi impongo shangu: nda zanda ku ula masani.
Nda ka bona imbelele shobili. Inkuku shangu shinjishinji.
Kwina imbongolo. Bakaintu ba la shanga imbuto shabo.
Balombwana ba ka loba inswi. Ingubo shakwe sha vhula.
Mwana wa ka kula chinichini. Impoko yangu nimbotu. Nji
ezhi ng'anda yangu: a mu njile. Inkidi yako nji yedia; ni*
mbotu chinichini. Impato shako nshi sheshi. Inshi ezhi idi buti ?
Bantu babo ba ka bona inkuku shinjishinji. Sheshi inkuku nshi
shako.
Translate into Ila : —
Where are your two donkeys ? These are they. This is my
good knife. The women are sowing the seed yonder in their
gardens. These trees are growing well. Bring me your stamp-
ing-block. There are many cows in the kraal. Those are his
goats. How are you selling your sheep ? The boys are going
to fish. The fish are many in the river. Bring me two cows.
Exercise 10.
Find from the Vocabulary the meaning of the following nouns
of Classes 9 and 9 a, and learn their plurals, noting especially
those which have ma and those which have in for the plural.
Iiuba; lubalo; lubeta; lubanza; ludimi; Iwinibo;
Inkoma; Inkwi; Inmo; lusako; luseba; lutambo.
With the nouns which have in- for the plural, use the same
adjectives, &c., as those given in Class 8 : with those which have
ma- use the adjectives, &c., given for Class 3, pi. In the singular,
use the following : —
Lubiabe, bad; lubotu, good; lomwi^ one; Iwa^it; lolu,
£ 2
52 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
this ; lolo, that ; lodia, jonder ; Iwanga, my ; Iwako, thy ;
Jlwakwe, his; Iwesu, our; Iwenu, your; Iwabo, their.
With adverbs use ludi, it is ; with pronouns, ndu, it is ;
with nouns n (changing initial 1 into d), or ndu, it is.
KxL bika, to place; ku imba, to sing; ku laxupa, to be
sharp ; ku anga, to tie ; ku angulula, to untie.
Translate into English : —
Ka mu ya ku leta ingozhi shinjishinji. Wezo muntu udi
kwete indaka shobili. Bakaintu ba la imba kabotu inyimbo
shabo. Ndu lodia lupidL Lutambo Iwangu ludi kwi? Imo
shako shidi shobili. Leta lukoma Iwangu. Mwami wa bika
imbeta shinjishinji, nshimbotushonse. Nshi sheshi imbalo. Lukwi
Iwako ndu lolo. Lumo Iwangu Iwa lampa. A mu bike luba.
Lubanza lolu ndukando.
Translate into Ila : —
Your razor is sharp. They sing good songs. The hill is
ponder. The men are going to bring bark-string. This is his
belt. He has two dippers. The hills are many. The chief
puts a law. There are no wattles. His body is sick. All the
bark-string is mine. Untie that string. Let us sing this song.
Exercise 11.
Learn the meaning of the following : —
Mudiango; lutele; ehifaa; ku pona; ifofWe^; lubu;
xnukalo; chifwezho.
Translate into English : —
Midiango ya minzhi. Intele sha balombwana. Ing'ombe ya
mwami. Indiasho sha mulombwana. Mato a mwenzu. Buchi
bwa nzuki. Mano a mwami. Inkuku sha bakaintu. Kuenda
kwa mushimbi. Michelo ya masamo. Kutwala kwa muntu.
Kudila kwa kashimbi. Shifua sha munyama. Kupona kwa
muntu. Mafufwe a muntu. Chuna cha mukaintu. Mukalo
wa munzhl Mabu a mwenzu. Kufwa kwa mwami Musamo
EXERaSES ON CHAPTER III 53
wa mushidishL Chifwezho cha muzhike. Shintu sha mukaintu.
Kuimba kwa Iwimbo.
Translate into Ha : —
The ox's head. The women's pots. The trees of the village.
A woman's heart. The fruits of the trees of the gardens. The
chiefs house. The man's marriage. The town's fountains.
The men's sheep. The children's blankets. The sheep's bones.
The doorway of the house. The trees of the forest. The
men's cunning. The bees' honey. The man's nets. The
love of the child. The traveller's boots. The woman's fowls.
The heads of the game and their tails. The playing of the
little-girls. The head of my father. The men's bows. The
children's reeds.
Insert the genitive particles in the following spaces : —
Kudila . . . bana. Menzhi . mulonga. Intele . . . muntu.
Mitwi . . banyama. Kufdna • . . mushimbi. Butanga . . .
mwami. Bongo • . . muntu. Chuna . . . mukaintu. Lozhi
. . . muntu. Masamo . kuzaka. Meno . muntu. Mabu . mu-
longa. Ifufwe . . . mushimbi. Ikanda • . • munyama. Mukondo
. . ng'ombe. Munda • . mwami, Dinso , . mushimbi. Inswi . ,
mulombwana. Isamo , • . kasaka.
Exercise 12.
Learn the meaning of the following : —
Ku shia ; ku sweya ; ku pidingene ; ku tuba ; ku
sofWala; ku tontola ; ku pia; ku nunka.
Translate into English : —
Mung'anda mu la tontola. Mono muchimpata mu la sweya.
Ano a la shia. Koko kudi sofwele. Bantu mubadi modia.
Kwadi muntu koko. Momo mwina muntu. Mono mu la
nunka chikuno* Tola ngombe mu chimpata. Njizha shintu
mu nkomo. Mung*anda mudi pidingene. Lubu kuludi ku-
mulonga. Koko kushidi shintu shinjishinji. Mukasaka mwadi
masamo manjimanji. Ing'ombe yangu idi kwi ? Mwidi muchi-
mpata.
54 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Translate into Ila : —
Here in the house is dirty. Put the meat in the box. They
go along the bank of the river. We have come from hunting.
Where are the people? They are at the village. The house is
clean inside. The top of the house is white. The house Is
cold inside. It stinks in here. Yonder there are many game.
Where is my hat? It is in the box. Around here is in dis-
order. There is no man there.
Exercise 13.
Translate into English : —
Ngu mapidi. Nshing'ombe. Nji minzhi. Nd'isamo. Mbu^
zane. Nimbelele. Nku kuchita. Nku kutwi. Ngu matwi.
Ngu mano. Nchi chintu. Mbo bakaintu. Ntu twambo. Nku
kusobana. Ngu musamo. Nji michelo. Ngu mata. Nji
mikondo. Nshintele, Ngu manda. Nd' ikumbe. Ndutele. Nchi
chimpata. Ningubo. Nku kasonde. Nku koma.
Translate into Ha : —
It is an. eland. It is a crab. It is the feather of a cock. It
is the bone of a sheep. They are men. It is the saying of the
chief. It is the man's fault. Those things are mine. They
are the chiefs nets. It is my house. It is the spoor of an
elephant. This is the fruit of that tree. This is your doing.
Exercise 14.
Correct the /allowing where necessary, and assign reasons for
so doing : —
Nji menzhi ya mulonga. Ngu bantu ba munzhi. Nda langa
kuboko wa munyama. Isamo ezhi ndi mwanL Tushimbi tu
bateu. Ing'ombe ni mongo. Nji mano wa muntu. Nku kutwi
kwa muntu. Nku kashimbi wa mwami. Ngu mitwi ya banyama.
Kambo ka mwami. Mbulongo ba ku zaka. Nga mano a
balombwana. Nshing'ombe ya mwami, Tushimbi ntu bana ba
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER III 55
mwamL Mulombwana enda ku munzhi. U la fiina mukaintu
balombwana. Bongo ba muntu. Shikisu sha mwana. Chibawe
cha mulonga. Isamo ya kasaka. Chiwena chidi u menzhi.
Menso a mukaintiL Kamwale ka la ya ku muDzhi. Shumbwa
sha luma bantu. Shumbwa sheshi wa shi bumba mukaintu,
Mung*anda u la shia. Lozhi Iwesu Iwa mana. Shiluwe shi la
ya mashiku. Bama u la amba. Baushabo ba ndetela kudya.
Kabwenga ka ke njila munganda. Udi kwi chibizi ?
CHAPTER IV
THE ADJECTIVE
Adjecti\^es may be divided into two classes according as they
express quality or quantity. The former include adjectives
proper and such other constructions as take their place, while in
the latter division are found the numerals, &c.
Sect. i. ADJECTIVES OF QUALITY.
a. Adjectives proper.
Adjectives proper are like nouns in this : they consist of two
parts, root and prefix. But they differ from nouns in that the
prefixes are not stable, the root taking the prefix of whatever
noun the adjective qualifies. This explains what is very per-
plexing to a new student. He hears, e. g., the word good given
as xnubotu, then again as ohibotu, bubotu, xnabota, &c. — in
fact, he may hear thirteen or fourteen forms of that simple
adjective. The explanation is simple : the root of the adjective
is -botu, and the prefix is added according to the classifier of
the noun. There being thirteen prefixes (fourteen with Bi),
there must also be thirteen forms of each regular adjective.
The following are adjectives proper : —
-beta, good, beautiful, nice. -fumpiu, blunt.
-biabe, bad, nasty, ugly. -kulukulu, old, very old.
-bongv)iu, soft. -ini-ini, true, real.
-zumo, hard, dry, difficult. -lamfa, long, tall, high,
-teke, moist, wet. -fWafwi, short.
-lemu, heavy. -shonto, small.
-pia, new, young. -inu, fat.
THE ADJECTIVE
57
•koftt, lean, thm. -iki, cooked,
-kando, large, big, great. -kadi, angry, sharp,
-bishi, unripe, raw. -nji-nji, many, much.
Besides the above, there are many adjectives proper directly
derived from the stative and capable forms of the verb.
Examples,
-hundanshi, dirty, defiled (of water) from Ku hundauka.
•komoshi, broken
-pandnlushi, trained, educated
-sampnshi, useless
-sepweleshi, weak
-tandubudishi, elastic
-zandishi, precious
-bendnshi, chipped
-boneshi, visible
-chengeshi, credulous
-zapanshi, ragged
-ebeshi, admirable
-fonishi, lovable
-ftingushi, weaned
-dimbushi, foolish
•fvirembeslii, unlovable
-kasazhi, warm
-knnkumiiBhi, faded
-lamaushi, sticky
9)
>>
»
1}
a
a
}>
»
J>
>>
a
>J
it
>»
>>
a
»
a
Ku komoka.
Ku panduluka.
Ku sampuka.
Ku sepweleka.
Ku tandubudika.
Ku zandika.
Ku benduka.
Ku boneka.
Ku chengeka.
Ku zapauka.
Ku ebeka.
Ku funika.
Ku fiinguka.
Ku dimbuka.
Ku fwembeka.
Ku kasala.
Ku kunkumuka.
Ku lamauka.
Note. — ^This fonnation of adjectives is the same as that of the notins of
the third derivatioii (see Sect. 6, Chap. 3). Indeed these adjectives may
stand alone as nouns, but nevertheless are trne adjectives when they qnalify
noons. This, indeed, applies, more or less, to all proper adjectives.
Examples,
As adjectives,
Manta mudimbashi, a foolish person.
Chibia chikomoshi, a broken pot.
Masani maEapaushi, ragged cloths.
Manta mubiabe, a bad person.
Bosane l^utemeki, dried meat.
As nouns.
MtLdimbushi, a fool.
Chikomoshi, a broken thing.
Mazapaushi, ragged things.
Mubiabe, a bad person.
Butemeki, biltong.
58 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Adjectives may be used in two ways : first, the adjective may
be used as a descriptive word, as in the expression, ' a good
man ' ; second, it may be used as affirming something with the
aid of a verb. In the former case the adjective is termed an
attribute, jn the latter a predicate.
Adjectives proper used as attributes.
The following examples will show the use of adjectives as
attributes : —
CI. I. MU- Muntu mubotu, a good person.
Muntu xnubiabe, a bad person,
BA- Bantu babotu, good people.
Bantu babiabe, bad people.
CI. 2. MU- Munzhi mushonto, a small village.
Munzhi mupia, a new village.
MI- Minzhi xnishonto, small villages.
Minzhi mipia, new villages.
CI. 3. I- Ivhu izumo, hard ground.
Ivhu ibODgvhu, soft ground.
MA- Masamo malamfu, tall trees.
Masamo mafwafwi, short trees.
CI. 4* BU- Bufu buzumo, dry meal.
Bufu buteke, moist meal.
MA- Meya manjimanji, many thorns.
Meya makando, big thorns.
CI. 5. KU- Kuftma kukando, great love.
Kuftma kushonto, small love.
MA- Matwi malamfu, long ears.
Matwi mafWafwi, short ears.
CI. 6. KA- Ejksani kazapaushi, a torn rag.
Kabia kabendushi, a chipped cup.
TU- Tuzane tukasazhi, a small quantity of warm meat.
Tushimbi tukofa, thin little girls.
CI. 7. CHI- Chibia chikomoshi, a broken pot.
Chintu ohikulukulu, a very old thing.
THE ADJECTIVE 59
SHI- Shidyo shibishi, raw food.
Shintu BhigandiBhl, precious things.
BI- Bidyo biki, cooked food.
Bidyo bikasashi, warm food.
CI. 8. IM- Imbata inzumo, hard potatoes.
Impongo imfunguslii, a weaned goat.
IM- Impongo inkofa, lean cattle.
Ing*ombe injinn, fat cattle.
CI. 9. LU- Lutele lusepweleshi, a weak net.
Lutele Insampushi, a useless net.
IN- Ingcihi inteke, moist bark-string.
Intele impia, new nets.
CI. 9a. LU- Lubu liiBepweleshi, a weak reed.
Lupidi Inkando, a big hill.
MA- Mabu mafwafwi, short reeds.
Hapidi mashonto, small hills.
Note. — (a) The adjectives -Dji-nji and -ini-ini are reduplicated words
and require that the noun prefixes be used twice, thus : Maila maxiji-
manji, much grain ; makani menimeni, true affairs. The latter obeys
the laws given for the coalescence of vowels : a + i a* e. In Class 8 pi. we
find ing'ombe ahinjialiiiiji, not injiinji; also ixikani shinishini. In
Class 3 sing, ikani inini, a true saying ; ivhu diBjidiaji, much earth.
(p) In adjectives of Classes 8 and 9 the rule obtains that im- is prefixed
to those whose initial letter is d,p or/; in- to others.
(c) When the adjective -inu is used with nouns of Classes 8 and 9 the
letter/ is inserted, thus : injinn, not ininu.
Adjectives proper used as predicates.
Used as predicates, the adjectives do not differ in form from
those given above, except that, in all cases where the classifier
does not begin with m, the copulative particles are used instead
of the noun prefixes. There is also a secondary form in which
the adjective is joined to the noun by means of the particle di
suffixed to the personal pronouns. This form is used in relative
clauses, and at other times to give emphasis. Htuitu udi
mnbotu really means person who is good.
6o GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The adjectives given above as formed from verbs obey these
rules, or their corresponding verbal forms may be used. Thus : —
Menzhi mahtindaiishi, dirty water.
Menzhi a hnndanka, the water is dirty.
Examples.
CI. I. MU- Muntu mnbotu, or mtintu udi mubotu, the
person is good.
BA- Bantu mbabotu, or bantu badi babotu, the
people are good.
CI. 2. MU- Munzhi mupia, or munzhi udi mupia, the
village is new.
MI- Minzhi mipia, or minzhi idi mipia, the villages
are new.
CI 3. I- Isamo ndilamfa, the tree is tall.
MA- Masamo malamfti, or masamo adi malamfu,
the trees are tall.
CI. 4. BU- Bufu mbuzumo, or bufu budi buzumo, the
meal is dry.
MA- Meya mazuxno, or meya adi mazumo, the
thorns are dry.
CI. 5. KU- Eutwi nkushonto, or kutwi kudi kushonto,
the ear is small.
MA- Matwi mashonto, or matwi adi mashonto,
the ears are small.
CI. 6. KA- !Ea8himbinkabiabe,(?rkashimbikadikabiabe,
the girl is bad.
TU- Tu8liimbiiitubiabe,(?rtushimbituditubiabe,
the girls are bad.
CI. 7. CHI- Chintu nchipia, or chintu cMdi chipia, the
thing is new.
SHI- Shintu nshipia, or shintu shidi shipia, the
things are new.
BI- Bintu mbinjibinji, or bintu bidi binjibinji, the
things are many.
THE ADJECTIVE 6i
CI. 8. IM- Impongo niojinu, the goat is fat.
IM- Impongo nshinjinu, the goats are fat.
CI. 9. LU- Iiutele ndolemti, the net is heavy.
IN- Intele nshindemti, the nets are heavy.
CI. 9a. LU- Iiupidi ndnlamfa, the hill is high.
MA- Mapidi malamfa, or mapidi adi malamfu, the
hills are high.
b. Other Adjectival ConstructionB.
Besides the adjectives proper, other expedients are resorted
to for forming adjectival constructions, words being used as
such which are not adjectives at all.
Verbs used as adjectives.
I. — Many of the adjectives proper have corresponding verbs
which may be used in place of them as predicates. Thus : —
Adjective, Verb,
-lemu, heavy. Kn lema, to be heavy.
-inu, fat. TSjol ina, to be fat.
-biabe, bad. Eu bia, to be bad.
-fwafBiri, short Eu fwimpa, to be short.
-bongvhu, soft. ^ TSLvl bom^ba, to be soft.
-zumo, hard. TSLvl zuma, to be hard.
-botu, good. TSLvl beta, to be good.
-lamfa, long. TSLvl lampa, to be long.
When these verbs are used as predicates they follow the
ordinary construction of verbs with nouns ; as attributes they
follow the construction of relative classes.
Examples,
Lwa lema lubono lolu, this load is heavy = Iiubono lolu
ndulemu.
Shi zanda lubono lu lema, I don't like a heavy load = Shi
zanda lubono lulemu.
Muntu wezu wa bota, this man is good = Huntu wezu
mubotu.
6a GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Nda langa muntu u bota, I want a good person = Kda
langa muntu mubotu.
Other verbs may be used in the same way. Thus : —
Menzhi aza a la tontola, this water is cold
Nda langa menzhi a tontola, I want cold water, i. e. which
is cold.
MenzM aza a la pia, this water is hot
Nda langa menzhi a pia, I want hot water, i. e. which is hot
2. — Another construction is to use the verb in the perfect
tense with the relative pronoun. It is convenient in this case to
join the relative pronoun to the verb, but the relative construc-
tion must not be forgotten. And care must be taken to use the
relative pronouns, not the classifiers, as with adjectives proper.
When it is desired to use them as predicates, the full form of
the perfect must be used, i. e. the relative pronoim has suffixed
to it the particle di.
Examples,
Shisamo shandene, different, or divided, sticks.
Shisamo shidi andene, the sticks are different, or divided.
Chintu chibumbunkene, a round thing.
Chintu chidi bumbunkene, the thing is round.
Bantu badiebile, quiet people.
Bantu badi diebile, the people are quiet.
Mulomo ulakeme, an open mouth.
Mulomo udi lakeme, the mouth is open.
Muntu ululeme, a righteous person.
Muntu udi luleme, the person is righteous.
Chintu chipampamene, a flat thing.
Chintu chidi pampamene, the thing is flat.
Makani apotene, involved affairs.
Makani adi potene, the affairs are involved.
Butanga butwetene, a decreased herd.
Butanga budi twetene, the herd is decreased.
Nouns used as adjectives,
I. — When a noun is to be used as a predicate it carries the
THE ADJECTIVE 63
copulative prefix ; when used as an attribute it is joined to the
noun qualified by means of the genitive particle in its full form.
Examples.
Butezhi, slipperyness.
Inghila ezhi mbatezhi, this road is slippery.
Shi zanda Inzhila oya butezhi, I don't like a slippery road.
Banvuka, beeswax.
Musamo wezn mbtmvuka, this medicine is sticky, i. e. it
is beeswax.
Shi zanda musamo owa bunvuka, I don't like sticky
medicine.
Bntambo, voracity, rapacity.
Shumbwa wezo mbutambo, that lion is ravenous.
Shi zanda ku swanganya shumbwa owa butambo, I
don't like meeting a ravening lion.
Buzandi, preciousness.
Chintu chechi mbuzandi, this thing is precious.
Nda nla shintu osha buzandi, I buy precious things.
Bwala, plenty, plenteousness.
Mwaka wezu mbwala, this is a plenteous year.
Tn la zanda miaka oya bwala, we like plenteous years.
2. — Another way is by employing the nouns beginning with Shi-.
Examples,
Wezu muntu ngu shinsana, this person is strong.
Lit. — IS a strong person,
Wezu muntu ngu shimanga, this person is kind.
Lit. — is a kind person.
Wezu muntu ngu shimano, this person is cunning.
Lit. — is a cunning person.
As attributes these may follow the first noun without any
connecting link ; or the prefix Shi is dropped and only the
neuter noun used. Thus : —
Kda fona muntu shinsana, or Nda funa muntu udi
insana, I love a person who is strong, /;'/. who has
strength.
64 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. — There are some nouns describing the colours of cattle
which are used adjectively.
Examples,
Bubala^ white and black, with black spots.
Ing*ombe ezM nja bubala, this beast is as above.
Nja = n+ya, // is of.
Ikosole, red or black with white stripes around body.
Ing*ombe ezM nje kosole, this beast is as above.
Nje = n+ya+i.
Masekwe, black and white.
Ing*ombe ezhi nja masekwe, this beast is as above.
Ishudiangombe, yellow.
Ing'ombe ezhi nje shudiangombe, this beast is yellow.
Nje = n+ya+L
Sect. 2.— COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
In English the degrees of comparison are formed by simply
adding -er and -est to the adjective, as in the expressions : He is
taller than I ; He is the tallest of all. In Ila there is nothing
corresponding to this. Properly speaking, there are no degrees
of comparison in the language ; the idea can only be expressed
by circumlocutions.
I. — To express the comparative degree the verb ku bazha.
to surpass^ may be used.
Examples,
Muntu wezu mukando ku bazha wedia, lit. — person this
great to surpass yonder. This person is bigger than yon.
Isamo ledi ndikando ku bazha ledio, lit. — tree this is great
to surpass that. This tree is larger than that one.
* Or the verb may be used in a different way. Thus : —
Muntu wezu u la bazha wezo ku nsana, this person sur-
passes that in strength, lit. by strength.
Isamo ledi di la bazha ledio ku kumena, this tree surpasses
that in growth, lit. — by growing.
THE ADJECTIVE 65
Intipa yanga i la basha yako ku kulampa, my knife sur-
passes thine in sharpness, liL^hy being sharp.
The same verb may be used to express the superlative degree.
Examples.
Kttnta weau mal>ota ku basha bonse, this person is good
to surpass all, i. e. this person is the best of all ;
er Muntu wezu a la basha bonse ku kubota, this person
surpasses all in being good, i. e. is the best of alL
Isamo ledi ndikando ku basha onse, this tree is big to sur-
pass aU, i. e. this tree is the biggest of all ;
or Isamo ledi i la basha onse ku kumena, this tree
surpasses all in growing, i. e. is the biggest of all.
2. — ^Another way of expressing the comparative is by using
the copula di with the preposition ktL
Examples,
Muntu wezu mukando kudi wedia, this person is big to
that, i. e. this person is bigger than you.
Bantu baba mbashonto kudi badia, these persons are small
to those, i. e. these people are smaller than you.
The superlative may be formed in the same way.
Examples.
Xuntu wesu xnubotu kudi bonse, that person is good to all,
i. e. that person is best of all.
Impongo ezhi ninjinu kudi shonse, this goat is fat to all,
i. e. this goat is fattest of all.
3. — The adjective may be reduplicated to express a kind of
indefinite superlative.
Examples.
Ifda langa masamo makando makando, I want big big
trees, i. e. very big.
Udi muntu mubotu mubotu, he is a very good person.
4. — The adverbs, chinichini, very; chakubazha, sur-
passingly y may also be used.
F
66 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples.
Bulo bobo mbukando chinichini, that bed is very big.
Bulo bobo mbukando ohakubazha, that bed is surpassingly
big.
5. We may here take notice of certain particles sufiSxed to
adjectives which express a superlative or absolute idea. They
do not seem to be used with all verbs.
Ne. Menzhi a la tontola-n^, the water is very very cold.
Bu. Mnntu u la tuba-bii, the person is very, or altogether,
white.
Nswa, Menzhi a ziuna-nswd, the water is altogether dried up.
Nia. Cheohi cha zuma-nt&, this is very very hard.
Pi. Menzhi a la pia-pi, the water is very very hot.
Ptu, Ing'ombe ya subila-piii, the beast is very very red.
6. These particles are also used interjectionally, the verbs
being omitted, e.g. Nda ka ya kn menzhi. Nswa I I went
to the water. Quite dry ! Ne pole ne ! Quiet, quite quiet !
Sect. 3. ADJECTIVES OF QUANTITY.
a. The Cardinal Numerals.
The Baila count on their fingers. The left hand is closed, the
little finger is then raised by the forefinger of the right hand to
indicate one. The next finger is two, the next three, and so on.
Six is represented by placing the two thumbs together ; seve^
by raising the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, toget|ier
with those of the left, and so on. Ten is shown by placing the
two palms together.
There are also names for the numbers up to and including
ten ; also names for hundred and thousand. The numbers can
be formed beyond a thousand. In schools children are taught
to count in English.
I. The numbers 1-5.
These are proper adjectives, but do not take the simple dassi-
THE ADJECTIVE
67
fiers of the nouns like other adjectives. The particles used with
them are as follows : —
Table of particles prefixed to nnmerals.
Singular
Plural
Class
Particle
Particle
I. MU-BA-
a. MU-MI-
3. I-MA-
4. BU-MA-
5. KU-MA-
6. KA-TU-
7. CHI-SHI-
BI-
8. IM-IM-
9. LU-IN-
9a. LU- MA-
0
0
dio
bo
ko
ko
cho
yo
lo
lo
bo
yo
0
0
0
to
sho
bio
sho
sho
0
Note. — ^It is difficult to explain these particles. In other Bantu languages
the numerals are treated jnst as other proper adjectives ; why this change
thronghout from the vowel of the classifiers to o, we do not know. If the
nmneral roots were -omwi, -obili, or -unwi, -abili, &a, the explanation
would be simple, the assimilation of the two vowels would produce o.
Thus — ba-obili <= bobili, &c.
The following examples will show the use of these numerals i —
Class
One.
Tluo.
ITiree.
I.
Muntu omwi.
Bantu bobili.
Bantu botatwe.
2.
Munzhi omwi.
Minzhi yobili.
Minzhi yotatwe.
3.
Isamo diomwL
Masamo obili.
Masamo otatwe.
4.
Bushiku bomwi.
Malo obili.
Malo otatwe.
S*
Kutwi komwi.
Matwi obili.
Matwi otatwe.
6.
Kambo komwi.
Twambo tobili.
Twambo totatwe.
7.
Chintu chomwi.
Shintu shobili.
Shintu shotalwe.
8.
Ingubo yomwi.
Ingubo shobili.
Ingubo shotatwe.
9-
Lutele lomwi.
Intele shobili.
Intele shotatwe.
9 a.
Lupidi lomwi.
Mapidi obili.
Mapidi otatwe.
Class Four.
Five.
I. Bantu bond Bantu bosanwe.
2. Minzhi yon€. Minzhi yosanwe.
F 2
6» GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
::iass
5 Four.
Five.
3-
Masamo on^.
Masamo otatwe.
4.
Malo on^.
Malo osanwe.
5-
Matwi on^.
Matwi osanwe.
6.
Twambo ton^.
Twambo tosanwe.
V-
Shintu shon^.
Shintu shosanwe.
8.
Ingubo shond.
Ingubo shosanwe.
9-
Intele shon€.
Intele shosanwe.
9 a.
Mapidi on^.
Mapidi osanwe.
The above table shows the use of the numerals as attributes.
As predicates they are used as follows : —
Muntu omwi or Muntu udi omwi, the person is one.
Bantu bobili or Bantu bad! bobili, the people are two.
Shintu shotatwe or SMntu shidi shotatwe^ the things
are three.
Impongo shone or Impongo shidi shone, the goats are
four.
Michelo yosanwe or KEichelo idi yosanwe, the fruits are
five.
The particle -nana is suffixed to omwi, diomwi, &c., to
express only, merely. Thus : —
Eadi muntu omwin&na, it was only one person.
Eadi ng'ombe yomwindna, it was only one beast.
2. 7%^ numbers 6-9.
Six, Chisambomwi. Seven, Chiloba.
Eight, Lusele. Nine, Ifoka.
These are nouns and are connected with the nouns they
qualify by means of the particle di suffixed to the pronouns.
Examples.
Bantu badi chisambomwi, the people are six ; or six people.
Masamo adi chiloba, the trees are seven ; or seven trees.
Baohiwena badi liuele, the crocodiles are eight ; or eight
crocodiles.
i.
THE ADJECTIVE 69
Mikalo idi iftikft, the water-holes are nine ; or nine water-
holes.
Note : — ^In the Lambn dialect, six is kakole, seven is tukole tobili,
eight is tukole totatwe, nine is tokole tone.
3. Tens^ hundreds.
Ten is Ikumi.
Twenty is two ttnsy Malnimi obilL
Thirty is three ienSy Makumi otatwe.
Forty IS /our tens, Makumi one.
Fifty is five lensy Maknmi osanwe.
Sixty is six ienSy Makumi adi chisambomwi
Seventy is seven tens, Makumi adi chiloba.
Eighty is eight tens, Makumi adi lusele.
Ninety is nine tens, '^^^nmA adi ifnka.
One hundred is Mwanda.
Two hundred is Mianda yobili.
Three hundred is Mianda yotatwe.
&c., &c.
4. The joining of the units to the tens is rather complicated.
If you are simply counting use the word intesha, a unit ; if you
are counting anything use the constructions as below : —
Eleven, Ikumi diomwi o mu ntesha yomwL
Eleven people, Bantu badi ikumi o mu muntu
omwi.
Twelve, Ikumi diomwi o mu ntesha shobili.
Twelve cattle, Ing'ombe shidi ikumi o mu ng'ombe
shobili.
Thirteen, Ikumi diomwi o mu ntesha shotatwe.
Thirteen trees, Masamo adi ikumi o mu masamo
otatwe.
Fourteen, Ikumi diomwi o mu ntesha shon^.
Fourteen men, Balombwana badi ikumi omu balom-
bwana bon^^
70 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Twenty-one, Makumi obili o mu ntesha yomwi.
Twenty-one sheep, Imbelele shidi ikumi o mu mbelele
yomwi.
One hundred and one, Mwanda omwi o mu ntesha yomwi.
One hundred and eleven, Mwanda omwi o mu ikumi
diomwi o mu ntesha yomwi.
One hundred and twenty-one, Mwanda omwi o mu ma-
kumi obili o mu ntesha yomwi
&c., &c.
b. The Ordinal Numerals.
These are formed by the cardinal numerals joined to the
nouns by means of the genitive particles. An exception is in
first, which is not formed by the numeral -mwi but by the noun
lutanzhi, beginning. Or the regular adjective -tanzhi, first,
may be used.
First, lutanzhi Bushiku bwa lutanzhi, or bushiku
butanzhi, the first day.
Second -bidi Bushiku bwabidi, the second day.
Third, -tatu Bushiku bwatatu, the third day.
Fourth, -ne Bushiku bwan^, the fourth day.
Fifth, -sanu Bushiku bwasanu, the fifth day.
SixthjChisambomwi Bushiku bwa chisambomwi, the
sixth day.
Seventh, ohiloba Bu8hikubwachiloba,the seventh day.
Eighth, lusele Bushiku bwa lusele, the eighth day.
Ninth, ifiika Bushiku bwa ifUka, the ninth day.
Tenth, ikumi Bushiku bwa ikumi, the tenth day.
&c. &c.
Note that the ordinals for second^ third, ^xA fifth differ slightly
in form from the cardinals. Thus : -bidi^ not -bill ; -tatu, not
-tatwe ; -sanu, not -sanwe.
When the ordinal numeral stands first in a sentence o is pre-
fixed to it Thus : —
Owan6 ngu wezu, the fourth (person) is this.
THE ADJECTIVE
71
c. Numeral Adverbs.
To express once, twice, three times, &c. the particle ko is pre-
fixed to the numerals from one to five. Beyond ^37^, the cardinal
numerals are used. Thus : —
Once, komwi.
Twice, kobilL
Three times, kotatwe.
Four times, kon^.
Five times, kosanwe.
Six times, chisambomwi.
Seven times, chiloba.
&c. &c.
d. Indefinite Adjectives.
I. The indefinite B.d}tctrvesone,some, other fanotherzre expressed
by means of the root -mwi prefixed by the personal pronoun.
In the same way is treated the root -nji, signifying : other,
different; also the root -udieP which J^ found in the next
chapter imder interrogative pronouns.
Tadie of the Indefinite Adjectives -mwi, -nji.
Singular
Plural
Class
-mwi
• •
-njt
-mwi
• •
I. MU-BA-
uxnwi
tmji
bamwi
banji
2. MU-MI-
uxnwi
unji
imwi
inji
3. I- MA-
dimwi
dinJi
'
4. BU-MA-
bmnwi
bunji
■ axnwi
aDJi
5. KU-MA-
Immwi
kunji
6. KA-TU-
kamwi
kanji
tumwi
tunji
7. CHI-SHI-
8. IM-IM-
ohimwi
imwi
chlnji
inji
1 shimwi
shinji
9. LU-TN-
9a. LU- MA-
1 lumwi
Innji
amwi
anji
Those of the above indefinite adjectives beginning with a consonant have
0 prefixed to them when they stand first in a sentence. Thus Oshimwi nshi
aheahi, other (things) are these.
72 GRAMMAR' OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples^
Class 1.
Mtintu tunwi wa fvira, umwi wa pona, one person is dead,
another lives.
Bantu bamwi ba shala, bam^id be enda, some people stay,
others go.
Wa yasa munyama weztt, ome nda yasa nnji, he speared
this animal, I speared another, i. e. a different one.
Baba bantu ba shika 'sunti, 8C»ia ku la shika banji,
these people come to-day, to-morrow there will arrive others,
i. e. different ones.
Class 3.
Isamo dixnwi ndilamfa, dimwi ndifwafwi, one tree is long,
the other is short.
Masamo amwi nji miani, amwl nji milombe, some trees
are mopani, others milombe.
Walo ngu a leta masamo asa, ome nda leta anji, he it is
who brought these trees, I brought others.
Class 7.
Chintu chimwi nohishonto, chimwi nohikando, one thing
is small, the other large.
Shintu shimwi nshikando, shimwi nshishonto, some things
are large, others are small.
Shi zanda chintu cheohi, nda zanda chinji, I don't want
this thing, I want a difTerent one.
Shintu sheshi ta shidi shangu, shangu shinji, these things
are not mine, mine are different.
Class 8.
Ing*ombe imwi ninjinu, imwi ninkofa, one beast is fat,
another lean.
Impwizhi shimwi sha subila, shimwi sha tuba, some
cows are red, others white.
Nshi sheshi impongo nshi nda zanda ku ula, shi zanda
THE ADJECTIVE
73
shinji, these are the goats which I wish to buy, I don't want
others, i.e. different ones.
Note the difference between mnwi, &c., and omwi, &c.
The difference is slight in form, but great in meaning.
Lupidi lomwi, one single hill.
Lupidi Itunwi, one hill, a certain hill among others.
2. The indefinite adjective aii is the root -onse, joined to the
personal pronoun. The root -ongeana^ /hv, is treated in the
same way. Also the root -ongai P haw many ? found in the
next chapter.
TahU of the Indefinite Adjectives -onse, -ongeana.
Singular.
Plural
Class
-onse
"Onse
'Ongeana
I. MU-BA-
onse
bonse
bongeana
(a + onse)
(ba + onse)
(ba + ongeana)
a. MU- MI-
onse
yonae
yongeana
(u + onse)
(i + onse)
(i + ongeana)
3. I-MA-
dionae
(di + onse)
4. BU-MA-
bonae
onae
ongeana
(bn + onse)
(a + onse)
(a -¥ ongeana)
5. KU-MA-
konse
(kn-i-onse)
1
6. KA-TU-
konse
tonae
tongeana
(ka + onse)
(tu + onse)
(tn + ongeana)
7. CHI-SHI-
chonse
(chi + onse)
'
8. IM-IM-
yonae
^ ahonae
ahongeana
(yi + onse)
(shi + onse)
(shi + ongeana)
9. LU- IN- )
lonse
i
9a.LU-MA-)
(la + onse)
onae
ongeana
(a + onse)
(a + ongeana)'
Examples,
CI. I. Mtintu onse, the whole person.
Bantu bonse, all the people.
Bantu bongeana, a few people.
U GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
CI. 2. Moiizlii oxLse, the whole village.
Minzhi yonse, all the villages.
Mikalo yongeana^ a few water-holes.
CI. 6. Eambo konse, the whole matter.
Twambo tense, all the affairs.
Tushimbi tongeana, a few girls.
CI. 8. Impwizhi yonse, the whole cow.
Impwizhi shonse, all the cows.
ImpwizM shongeana, a few cows.
The adjective -onse has also forms for the first and second
persons plural. Thus : —
Tn la ya tense, we are all going.
A mu zize nonse, come all of you.
3. The indefinite adjective evety is the reduplicated form of
-mwi, i.e. -mwi -mwi.
Examples,
Mnntu mnwi umwi, every person.
Ing'ombe imwi imwi, every beast.
Ikani dimwi dimwi, every affair.
Note.— It is difficult to know whether such words as the above should
be classified as adjectives or pronouns. Some vrriters call them the one,
others the other. On the whole it is perhaps better to do as we have done.
But it must be noticed that all the words given above may be used as pro-
nouns. Thus : Bonse ba la ya, they are all going, where, of course, the word
bantu is understood before bonse. But in that sentence bonse may be
correctly regarded as a pronoun. So with the others.
Sect. 4. LOCATIVE ADJECTIVES.
The three locative prefixes may also be used with adjectives.
Examples.
Mono mnng'anda mubiabe, Here in the house is bad.
A mu pele muohimpata monse, Sweep ye all the yard,
i. e. in all the yard.
A mu bike bnlongo ezenln anganda onse, Put ye clay
all on the top of the house.
THE ADJECTIVE 75
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER IV.
Ezeroise 1.
Vocabulary: Adjectives proper in Sect. i. Nouns, &c., will
be found in Vocabularies.
Translate into English : —
Banyama banjibanji. Kasamo kashonto. Minzhi mibotu.
Miunda mikando. Bulo buzumo. Lozhi luteke. Inzuki
shinjishinji. Musamo mukadi. Mukalo mulamfu. Koma
kashonto. Imbelele inkofu. Tushimbi tubiabe. Ingubo
impia. Lwimbo lubotu. Michelo mibishi. Buzane bwiki.
Mulombwana mufwafwi. Inshima imongvhu. Inshi inteke.
Chela chilemu. Intipa imfumpiu. Chisani chikulukulu. Ma-
kani menimeni. Tata mubotu. Bwato bulamfu. Muntu
mufiinishi. Mutiba mubendushi. Impongo imfiingushi. Ma-
bala makunkumushi. Musamo mulamaushi. Mitiba misam-
pushi. Shimamo mufwembishL
Translate into Ha : —
An unlovable rogue. Ragged loincloths. A short needle.
Soft clay. A large bow. Beautiful flowers. Admirable chil-
dren. Warm food. Raw meat. Bad water. A heavy tree.
Many wild animals. A sharp knife. A hard bed. Dry reeds.
Lean goats. Bad gardens. Foolish women. A small affair.
A long string. A young child. Moist clay. A pretty little
girl. Bad men. Good women. Sticky medicine. Precious
grain. A big village. Fat sheep. Faded colours. Ragged
clothing. A credulous man. A visible star. Elastic string.
Explained affairs. Broken pots.
Ezeroise 2.
Vocabulary : Adjectives as before.
Translate into English : —
Lubono ndulemu. Bulongu mbubongvhu. Imbelele sheshi
nshinjinu. Inzuki shidi shinjishinjL Impongo ezho ninkofu.
76 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Isamo ledio ndilamfu. Tushimbi tudi tubotu. Inyimbo nshim-
botu. Mitwi yesu mizumo. Wezo muntu wa funika. Chibia
changu cha benduka. Wezo mwana wa dimbuka. Mwami wabo
wa chengeka ; wa vumina budio makani onse. Shikobelo shako
sha zapauka. Chilendi checho nchilamfu. Chifua chechi chi-
bongvhu. Wezo chihole wa sepweleka. Bachivhubwe babo
mbo bakadi. Dino diangu ndilamfu. Mabwe azo adi buti?
A zuma chinichini. Imbuto shakwe nshiteke^
Translate into Ila : —
That fence is strong (zumo). This song is new. That belt
is useless. These clothes are very old. This stamping-block
is new. The mealies are dry. The meal is moist. The pit is
deep. The goats are fat. His wisdom is great. The meat is
bad. The houses are tall. The girls are good. The clay
is wet The villages are big. This man is credulous ; he be*
lieves all I say. This basket is small ; I don't want it. The
lion is fierce. These basins are chipped; take them away.
These are many fruits ; where did you find them ? That man is
very foolish. He wears ragged clothes.
Exercise 8.
Vocabulary : Nouns, &c., used as adjectives in Sect. i.
Translate into English : —
Lozhi lolo Iwa fwimpa. Luba Iwesu Iwa zuma. Baba bantu
ba la bomba inzho. Muntu wezo mbutambo ; wa beleka chini-
chini shikwense. Moza wa muntu mbuzandi. Mwami wesu
ngu shimanga ; owabo ngu shilutuzhi. Tu la letela mubeteshi
makani aza apotene. Wezo mimtu wa usa ku bona butanga
bwakwe butwetene. Ozona nda ka ula ngombe idi bubala.
lamba ledi didi pampamene. Wa beza lusako lubumbunkene.
Translate into Ila : —
Bring me that round thing. This thing is short; I want
a long one. In our village the people are quiet ; in his village
they are fighting. This road is slippery ; many people fall here.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER IV 77
That man is ravenous in eating (xov to eat). That man is wise ;
he knows all our affairs. My herd has decreased very much.
Years of plenty follow years of famine. This cow is yellow.
Bring me cold water ; this is hot. That man is righteous ; he
is not harsh. This business is divided.
Exercise 4.
Vocabulary : All adjectives in Sect. i.
Insert the proper prefixes in the/oUawing spaces : —
Mata . . kando. Inswi . . nji . . nji. Imbeta . . zumo.
Ingombe , . inu. Dino . . lamfu. Mozo . . bongvhu. Tulam-
bwe . • lamfu. Shintu . . pampamene. Muntu , . luleme.
Bufu • . teke. Buzane . . iki. Tata . . botu. Chiwena
. . kadi. Ing'anda . . zumo.
Translate into English : —
Sa mapopwe a zuma ? A zuma kabotu. Tu langa ku ula
inyemo. Nda kapola isani ibotu. Ba ka leta minkodi. Imbata
shi la bomba. Matuba a bola. Mapushi a subila. Nda langa
matanga mabishi. U la ula buti miseza ? Nda langa bulungu
bn tuba. Ba ka nwa bukoko bunjibunji. Nda zanda ibwantu
ikadi. Shimwina mulombwana wezo a tu letele buchi.
Translate into Ila ;—
What do they bring to sell ? They brought potatoes yester-
day; to-day they bring honey and cassava. Is the cassava
cooked ? Is the honey new ? Are the potatoes soft ? What
do you want ? The mealies are very dry. We found nuts in
the field. Do you want red cloth ? These are the chiefs goats ;
he wishes to buy white cloth.
Exercise 6.
Subject: Sect. 2.
Translate into English : —
Inzoka ezho ninlamfu ku bazha yedia. Chile chechi nchilemu
ku bazha shimwi. Bulo bwangu mbukando ku bazha bwako.
78 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Chihunisho cbechi cha chea kudi checho. Menzhi aza a la
pia-pi. Nda langa shisamo shilamfu-lamfu. Nda zanda ku kala
kono ku bazha kodia. Muntu wezo udi luleme chakubazha.
Twa ka ya ku mukalo ku nwa menzhi : twa yana a zuma-nswa.
Mwana wezo u la bazha bonse ku kukula.
Translate into Ha : —
My goat is fatter than that. This reed is stronger than that
This country is finer than mine. Your wife has more children
than mine. Give me your knife ; it is sharper than his. I want
very tall trees, for I am building a surpassingly high house. This
load is lighter than that. This water is very very cold ; bring
me some hot to add to it. Your cattle are all redder than mine.
I prefer red cattle to all.
Exercise 6.
Subject : The numerals in Sect. 3.
Translate into English:—
Imbata shotatwe. Imbelele shi^i makumi one. Ingubo
yomwi. Bantu badi chisambomwi. Masamo adi osanwe.
Banako badi bongai ? Badi botatwe budio. Ndi kwete mwana
omwinana. Bakaintu bosanwe. Bantu badi ifuka. Ndetela
inyemo shidi chiloba. Kwa ka shika bantu badi makumi adi
ifuka. Ndi kwete ng'ombe shidi ikumi o mu ng'ombe shosanwe.
Mwami wezu ngu muvhubi : udi kwete impwizhi shidi mianda
yobili. Kale kale wa ka fua ku bazha 'sunu: pele butanga
bwakwe budi twetene.
Translate into Ha : —
My father has three goats; I have only one. Sixty-four
children. Ninety zebras. Bring me six baskets of com. How
many children have you ? I have only one child. In this fence
there are 435 mopani poles. I want twenty-six carriers. There
are nineteen loads, and I want eight boys to carry me in the
hammock. When five days have passed we shall arrive at
Nkala. That man has four wives.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER IV . 79
Exercise 7.
Subject'. Ordinal numerals, numeral adverbs, indefinite adjec-
tives.
Translate into English ;— ^
Wa ka chita bobo kongai ? Nda chita komwi. Bantu bamwi
badi kwete masumo manjimanji; ome ndi kwete diomwinana.
Mwanako mutanzhi ngudie ? Ka badi bantu bongeana. Nda
ko ompolola banjibanji, anokuti kwa shika pele bongeana.
Bufii bumwi mbuteke, bumwi mbuzumo. Ndetela inyemo
shenu shonse. Lutele lumwi nduznmo : lumwi Iwa sepweleka.
Mapidi amwi adi kono; amwi adi kodia. Kashimbi kamwi
nkabiabe, kamwi nkabotu. Ndetela ibwe yomwinana. Makani
ako onse adi potene. Usunu mbushiku bwatatu nambuti ? Shi
zanda chechi : leta chinjL
Translate into Ha : —
I don't like this fowl ; bring me another. One of your cows
has calved This is the sixth day. Do this four times. This
is your first work. All the men came yesterday ; to-day there
are but few. Some of these trees are short; go and bring
others. I told him to ptdl out the rotten tooth, whereas he
pulled out a different one. Where are all your children ? Only
a few are here. All this journey we have travelled fast. I have
visited that village four times.
CHAPTER V
THE PRONOUN
The pronouns in Ila are very numerous and most important.
In English we have simply the pronouns, singular and plural, of
the three persons, ist, 2nd, and 3rd, nominative and objective,
masculiqe, feminine, and neuter. In Ila there is no gender
classification, but in addition to die ist and 2nd persons there
are pronouns in the 3rd person corresponding to each of the
noun classes. Nobody can hope to speak the language correctly
without thoroughly mastering all the different forms.
There are seven different kinds of pronouns, viz. : — Personal,
Substantive, Possessive, Interrogative, Reflective, Demonstrative,
and Relative.
Sect. i. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN.
We will first take the forms of the pronoun used in the first
and second persons and in the third person. Class i. These
are : —
Pers,
Singular
Plural
Nominative
Accusative
Nominative
Accusative
I.
2.
3-
ndi, nda, n, I
u, wa, thon
a,wa,a,he,she,it
n, m, me
ku, thee
ma, him
tu, twa, we
mu, mwa, yon
ba, they
tu, us
mu, ma, you
ba, them
Note : —
(a) Of the two forms given in the nominative, that ending in
a is used in certain perfect and past tenses, and the aorist. The
form n in the first pers. sing, is used with verbs in the subjunc-
tive mood.
THE PRONOUN 8i
{d) There is no difference in pronunciation between the 2nd
and 3rd pers., nom. sing, u ; the distinction between them is
given only in the context, or by the use of certain substantive
pronouns.
(c) In the ace. of the 2nd pers. plur. there is a double form,
mu and ma. These can be used interchangeably ; only when
mu is likely to be confounded with the 3rd pers. sing. ace. it is
better to use ma.
(d) Occasionally one may hear the 2nd pers. plur., mu, you,
used instead of u, /Aou, as in English, but generally u is
employed.
The accusative of the ist pers. sing., n, m, is prefixed to
the verb. 'When it is prefixed to certain verbs phonetic change
takes place in the initial consonant or vowel of the verb accord-
ing to the rules given in Chapter II.
I. When prefixed to a verb beginning with a vowel the pro-
noun is nasalized, i.e. n or m prefixed to a verb beginning with
a, 0, or u becomes ng.
Examples,
Eu anzha, to salute. Ba la nganzha, they salute me.
Ku abila, to divide among. Ba la ngabila, they distribute
to me.
Eu ambila, to speak to. Ba la ngambila, they speak to
me.
Ku ompolola, to call. Ba la ngompolola, they call me.
Ku udila, to buy for. Ba la ngudila, they buy for me.
N or m prefixed to a verb beginning with e or t becomes nj
or ny.
Ku ebela, to look at. Ba la njebela, they look at me.
Eu enzha, to guide. Ba la nyenzha, they guide me.
Ku ingula, to answer. Ba la nyingula, they answer
me.
Eu iyiVj to teach. Ba la njiya,, they teach me.
6
82 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
2. Prefixed to verbs beginning with ze;, n or m becomes ng.
Example.
Ku wisha, to throw down. Ba la ngwisha, they throw me
down.
3. When n or m is prefixed to verbs in /, 1 becomes d.
Examples,
Ku lemeka, to honour. Ba la ndemeka, they honour me.
Ku Iwila, to fight for. Ba la ndwila, they fight for me.
Ku letela, to bring for. Ba la ndetela, they bring for
me.
4. When n or m is prefixed to verbs whose initial is 3 or /
and which contain another nasal, the 3 or / is deleted.
See examples given in Chap, II ^ Sect, 2 (i, 2).
5. When n or m is prefixed to verbs beginning with ^,
y becomes j.
Examples.
Ku yaya, to kill. Ba la njaya, they kill me.
Ku yovwa, to help. Ba la njovwa, they help me.
6. Before verbs beginning with m or n the pronoun is simply
dropped. To indicate this elision an apostrophe may be inserted,
but there is no change in the spoken language.
Examples.
Ku manina, to serve. Ba la 'manina, they serve me.
Ku nununa, to redeem. Ba la 'nununa, they redeem me.
7. Before the other consonants m or n undergoes no change.
B. — Ku bala, to pass by. Ba la mbala, they go past me.
Ch. — Ku china, to throw down. Ba la nchina, they throw me
down.
D. — Ku didila, to weep for. Ba la ndidila, they weep for me.
E. — Ku fusa, to throw. Ba la mfosa, they shoot me.
K. — Ku kaka, to refuse. Ba la nkaka, they refuse me.
S. r-Ku sempula, to carry. Ba la nsempula, they carry me.
THE PRONOUN
83
T. — Eu tambuia, to receive. Ba la ntambula, they receive me.
V. — Ku vumina, to believe. Ba la nyumina, they believe me.
Z. — Ku zanda, to like. Ba la nzanda, they like me.
The verbs also take this form in the subjunctive mood, the
final vowel changing into e. Thus : —
Sa wa axnb'ati, ngange P Do you say I must tie ?
Wa ntnina kumbele ati nyenzhe beenzu, he sent me
ahead that I might guide the travellers.
Nde ziza, ntambule shintu shangu, I come that I
may receive my things.
In relative clauses, also, this form of the pronoun is often found ; but
here, in order, it seems, that the pronoun may be more distinctly heard, it
takes the form of in-. Thus Nku kako kambo nku inanga, this is the
affair I want; Inge masamo aza ngu inanga, they are not the trees
I want Pronounce: nkwinanga; ngwinanga.
When the accusative xnu is used before verbs beginning with
h it often appears as urn prefixed to the verb. Thus : —
Ta ba oh'timboni dinji, they did not see him again.
Dimwi ba ka mnbusha, afterwards they raised him.
Bantu ba ka umbuzlia, the people asked him.
The pronouns given above are equivalent to our English /,
thmiy he, &c. ; there yet remain forms for all the classes, 2-9a,
equivalent to our /'/, they^ them. These pronouns are shown in
the following table : —
Singular
Plural
Class
Nominative
Accusative
Nominative
Accusative
3. MU-MI-
u, wa
n
i, ya
i
3. I- MA-
di, dia
di
)
4. BU-MA-
bu, bwa
bu
f »
a
5. KU-MA-
ku, kwa
ku
s
6. KA-TU-
ka
ka
tu, twa
tu
7. CHI- SHI-
ohi, oha
ohi
shi, aha
shi
BI-
bi, bia
bi
8. IM- IM-
i, ya
i
shi, sha
shi
9. LU-IN-
lu, Iwa
lu
shi, sha
shi
9a. LU- MA
lu, Iwa
lu
a
a
G 2
84 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
On the use of these pronouns note particulariy : —
{a) The subject of a sentence, when a noun or substantive
pronoun, must always be followed by a personal pronoun. An
apparent exception to this is when the subject noun or substan-
tive pronoun is placed after the verb ; but that it is only apparent
is seen by changing the position of the subject. Thus : —
Muntu u la ya, the person is going ; //'/, — person he is
going.
Ing'ombe shi la fiila, the cattle are grazing ; ItL — cattle
they are grazing.
Putting the subject at the end, these sentences appear thus : —
TJ la ya mxintu, he is going, the man.
Shi la fiila ng'ombe, they are grazing, the cattle.
(d) When used as objects the personal pronouns are placed
between the pronominal subject and the verb, never in any other
position. Thus : —
Muntu u la mu yaya, the person kills him ; //'/. — person
he him kills.
These are most important rules and, particularly the first, are always
violated by those who speak that dreadful lingo called 'Kitchen Kaffir'.
This is the sort of thing one has inflicted upon him : — * Mhia fima tenga,'
'Umfana funa hamba,' corruptions of the Tebele; *Mina ngi ya ftina ugu
tenga,* * Umfana u ya funa ugu hamba.' Fancy : * Me want go ' ! * Boy
want walk ' ! — as those ' sentences ' may be translated.
Examples of the use of the Personal Pronoun.
Notice the suflBxing of the verbal copula di to the pronoun.
This is merely a matter of convenience.
Muntu u le enda, the person Nda mu bona, I see him.
travels.
Bantu ba le enda, the people Twa ba bona, we see them,
travel.
THE PRONOUN 85
Munzhiwazakwa, the village Two ebela (= twa u), we
is built. admire it.
Minzhi idi kwi P Where are Ta tu i bwene, we have not
the villages ? seen them.
Isamo di la mena, the tree Wa di nwisha, he waters it.
grows.
Masamo adi ongai P How Adi otatwe, they are three.
many trees ?
Bwa xnana bufa, the meal is Twa bu dya, we have eaten
finished. it.
Eutwi ka la ohisa, the ear is Nda ku bona, I see it.
painful.
Kashimbi ka la sobana, the TJ ka shimwine, tell her.
little girl plays.
Tushimbi tu la dila, the Sa mwa tu lelaP Do you
little girls are crying. feed them ?
Chintu ohidi kwiP Where Sa mwa ohl bona P Have you
is the thing ? seen it ?
Shintu shidi kwiP Where Sa mwa shi bona? Have
are the things ? you seen them ?
BintubiayhwakwiP Where Sa mwa bi bulaP Do you
are the things from ? need them ?
Impongo i la dila, the goat Ko ya, u i yaye, go and
bleats. kill it.
Ing'ombe shi la fula, the Ka mu shi bingile kono,
cattle are grazing. drive ye them here.
Lupidi ludi kulale, the hill Twa lu bona, we see it.
is far.
Lutele ludi kwiP Where is Shi lu bwene, I haven't seen
the net ? it,
Intele shidi kwi P Where are Shi shi bwene, I haven't seen
the nets ? them.
Locative Personal Pronouns,
The locative prefixes appear as pronouns, mu, ku, a.
86
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples.
Mimganda xnudi sofwele, the house is dirty inside.
Anganda adi sofwele, the house is dirty, i. e. outside.
Kunganda kudi sofw^ele, it is dirty by the house.
Munganda xnwina (= mu ina) chintu^ there is nothing
in the house ; //'/. — In-the-house in-it-has-no thing.
Kunganda kwina ohintu, there is nothing at the house.
Anganda a ina chintu, there is nothing on the house.
Sect. 2. THE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUN.
The substantive pronoun has different forms, the various uses
of which may cause some perplexity to the student at first ; it
will be best to take each form separately and explain it.
a, — The Simple Form.
Ome, I myself Uswe, we ourselves.
Uwe, thou thyself TJmwe, you yourselves.
Walo, he himself. Bale, diey themselves.
The forms for the classes 2-9a are as follows : —
2.
3-
4-
6-
6.
7-
8.
9-
9a.
Class, Singular,
MU- MI- Walo \
I- MA- Dialo
BU- MA- Bwalo
KU- MA- Kwalo
KA- TU- Kalo ^ It itself,
CHI- SHI- Chalo
IM- IM- Yalo
LU- IN- Lwalo
LU- MA- Lwalo/
PluraL
Yalo
&c.
Alo
Twalo
Shalo
Alo
^They themselves.
In the third person, all classes, the demonstrative forms are
sometimes used instead of the above.
Use of these pronouns : —
{a) The pronouns of the second person are used vocatively : —
TJmwe ! Urn we ! Ka mweza (mu eza) kono : You ! You !
Come you here.
Uwe ! Ko ya : You, go you.
THE PRONOUN 87
(S) They are used to distinguish clearly between two persons
or things named in a sentence. They may thus be used when
there is a likelihood of confusion between the 2nd and 3rd
persons sing, of the personal pronoun, u, Zhou or he. They are
also used in a general way to give emphasis.
Examples,
Ome nda ma pa nshima; walo {or wezo) u la ma pa
buzane, I, I give you bread ; he, he gives you meat.
JSwOj ko ya ku munda ; wezo a shale kono, you, go you to
the field ; he, he may stay here.
Balo ba la tuba, wezo u la shia, they are white, (whereas)
he is black.
Ewalo kukozhana ba la kozhana, even as regards resem-
blance, they resemble each other.
Budimbtislii bwalo, foolishness indeed.
Ome nda ma bapatizha menzhi ; walo u ka la ma
bapatiza o Moza u sweya, I, I baptize you with water ;
(but) he shall baptize you with the Holy Spirit.
The locatiye forms are as follows : —
Mwalo, even in.
Kwalo, even at, or to.
Alo, even on.
J^xampies.
Mwalo media ka ya ku njila, even, or just, there he
entered in.
Ewalo kodia ka ya ku vhwa, even just there he came out.
Alo adia ka ya ku kala, just there he sat down.
{c) These pronouns may also be used as objectives after
prepositions, the particle di being appended to the preposition.
Examples.
Wa ka leta shidyo kudi balo, he brought food to them.
88
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
TJ tu kwatile milandu bubona mbu tu kwatila badi
milandu kudi uswe, forgive our faults as we forgive them
that have faults to us.
{d) These pronouns when immediately following nouns express*
only, merely, simply ; e. g. Impongo shalo, only goats.
{e) These pronouns are emphasized in the plur. by means of
the particle lona. The meaning is peculiar. Intongwezhi
sha ba shalo lona, the stars are themselves alone ; i. e. nothing
else visible. Koko kudi balombwana bale lona : There are
only men there, i. e. no women or children.
3. The Indicative Form.
This is formed by means of the copulative particles and the
latter syllables of the simple form. In the first and second
persons the copulative particle is ndi.
Singular
Plural
Class
Affirmative
Negative
Affirmative
Negati7/e
1st p.
Ndime, it is I
Indime, it is
Ndiswe, it is
Indiswe, it is
not I
we
not we
2nd p.
Ndiwe, it is thou
Indiwe, it is
19'dimwe, it is
Indimwe, it is
•
not thou
you
not you
I. 3rd p.
Inguwe, it is he
Ingwe, it is
Imbabo, it is
Imbo, it is not
1
not he
they
they
2.
Inguo \
Ingwe V
Injiyo \
Injo \
a-
Indidio ]
Indio
)
4-
Imbubo 1
Imbo
Ingao
Ingo
5.
6.
7.
Inkuko
Inkako
Inohioho
it is
'it, &c.
Inko
Inko
Incbo
It is '
Wit X
Intuto
It IS
rthey
Into
it is not
'they
8.
Injio
Injo
Inshisho
Insho
9-
Indulo
Indo
9a.
Indulo /
Indo /
Ingao / Ingo /
On the uses of these pronouns, note : —
{a) In the negative of classes i-pa use is made of the
copulative particle negative, followed generally by the demon-
strative pronouns; and in the affirmative, the demonstratives
preceded by the copulative particles are also often used. Thus : —
THE PRONOUN 89
Ngu weso, it is this, or it. Ingwe weao, it is not that, or it
Ndi ledio, „ Indio ledio, „
(d) As the name implies, these pronouns are used in indicating
or pointing out somebody or some thing. Unlike the demon-
strative pronouns, they are never used adjectively.
Examples.
Kgnni owa ohita bodia P Who is it who did so ?
Kdime nda ka ohita, It is I who did (it).
Ingawe owa shika 'zona, it is he who arrived yesterday.
Inko kako kaxnbo nku inanga, it is not the affair I look for.
Ingao masamo ako, these are thy trees.
(r) The afilrmative forms (the initial i being deleted) are
used, with or without prepositions, to indicate the author of an
action or^the instrument with which it is done, thus including our
prepositions ^, with^ by means of.
Examples.
Chintu ohechi cha letwa ndime, this thing was brought by me.
8a cha letwa ndiwe P Was it brought by thee ?
Bantu ba la shindikilwa ndiswe, the people are accom-
panied by us.
Mutatula wezo, nda ka umwa nguo [pr ku nguo), this
whip, I was beaten with it.
Bwato bobo, tu la landuka mulonga mbubo (or ku
mbubo), that canoe, we will cross the river by means of it.
{d) These pronouns may also be used with the preposition
ka, to, from, to which the particle di may or may not be
appended.
Examples,
Eweza (Ko eza) kudi ndime, come to me.
Wa ke za kudi ndiwe, he came to thee.
Ka mu ya kudi nguwe, go ye to him.
Kweza kudi ndiswe, come to us.
90
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The locative forms are as follows :—
ImumO; it is in. Ima, it is not in.
^^^^Jnkirirorit is at. Inko, it is not at.
Ingao, it is on. Inge, it is not on.
c. The Indicative Form Emphasized.
By suffixing -na to the indicative form given above, an
emphasis is given to it. The meaning is, it is just so-and-so.
Class
Singular
Plural
Ndimena, it is I
Ndiswena, it is we
particularly
particularly
Ndiwena, it is thon
Ndimwena, it is you
particularly
particularly
I.
Nguwena, it is he
Mbobona, it is those
particularly
particularly
2. MU- MI-
Nguwena \
Njiona \
3. I- MA-
Ndidiona
)
4. BU- MA-
Mbubona
[
Ngona
it is
5. KU- MA-
Nkukona
it is \
those
6. KA- TU-
Nkakona rjust it
Ntutona Vparti-
7. CHI- SHI-
Nohiohona
)
cularly
8. IM- IM-
NJiona
[
Nshishona
9. LU- IN-
Ndolona
9a. LU- MA-
Ndolona /
Ngona /
Examples,
Shikwe iiiji, njiona ezhi inshipi yangu, I don't want
another, it is just this my bracelet.
Ndnlona lolo Iwimbo, that is the very song.
Mbubona bushiku bobo, it is just that very day.
Nda tola miisamo wezu nguwena ngu wa ka sha, I
take this very medicine which you have dug up.
Ngoni a sempula inkomo yangup Nguwena Shama*
tanga. Who is it carries my bag? It is even he, Shama-
tanga.
From some of these examples it is seen that these pronouns
are used to emphasize the demonstratives. The same is true of
the locative forms : —
THE PRONOUN
91
Mtunona, just in there.
Nkokona, just at there.
Ngona, just on there, &c.
Examples.
A ahike ngona a ka wila shumbwa ase muxovn wa wa.
When he arrived just where the lion fell, he also the
elephant fell
Mbike kwi ohinta oheohi P Bika mumona momo. Where
am I to put this thing ? Put it just in there.
Mwa Yhwa kwi umweP Nkokona koko nku tu vhwa.
Where are you from ? It is just there whence we come.
Tnishila idi kwiP Ngona 'wa. Where is the road? Just
here.
d. The Prepositional Fonn.
CUuj
Singular
Plural
Imbele, me
Tubele, us
ITbele, thee
Mubele, you
I.
Abele, he
Babele, him
2. MU-MI-
Ubele \
Imbele \
3. I- MA-
Dibele
)
4. BU-MA-
Bubele
[
Abele
5. KU-MA-
Kubele
6. KA-TU-
Kabele Vit
Tubele Vthem
7. CHI-SHI-
Ohibele
)
8. IM-IM-
Imbele
Shibele
9. LU-IN-
Iiubele
9a. LU- MA-
Iiubele '
Abele /
These forms are verbal in origin ; the second part of them,
-bele, being the perfect of the verb ka ba, to be, to become, Ko
ya ku babele really means go where they are, but is commonly
used to mean simply go to them. So that while the meanings
above are used care must be taken to remember the original
meaning. To express a more personal idea the indicative forms
are used as shown above.
92
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples,
Kweza kwimbele (ku imbele), come to me*
Ing'ombe ku shidi koko, ko ya ku shibele, the cattle are
yonder, go to them.
Be ziza ku tubele, they come to us.
e. The Conjunctive Form.
This is formed by means of the particle a, wiihy and, prefixed
to the latter syllable of the simple form of the substantive
pronoun.
Ame, I also, with me.
Aze, thou also, even thee.
Aswe, we also, even us, with us.
Amwe, you also, even you,
with you.
Aze, he also, even him, with Abo, they also, even them, with
him. them.
Notice that the 2nd and 3rd persons sing, are irregular ; the
particle aze being substituted for the form awe.
In the 3rd person plur. there is a double form, abo and
abalo.
The sufi^ -bo is added to the above to give them emphasis.
Amebo, I, even I. Aswebo, we, even we.
Azebo, thou, even thou. Amwebo, you, even you.
Azebo, he, even he. {wantingy use abalo).
For the other classes, these are the forms : —
Class
2.
3-
4-
5-
6.
7.
8.
9-
MU- MI-
I-MA-
BU- MA-
KU- MA-
KA- TU-
CHI- SHI-
IM- IM-
LU- IN-
9a. LU- MA-
Singular
awo \
adio
abo
ako
ako
aoho
ayo
alo
alo ,
.even it,
r with it
Plural
ayo >^
ao
ato
asho
ao
even they,
with them
These pronouns are both nominative and accusative; as
nominatives they have the meaning even /, even il, &c., and
THE PRONOUN
93
must then be followed by a personal pronoun like other pro-
nouns ; as accusatives they have the meaning with me, with it, &c.
Examples,
Tu la ya ase, we will go with thee, i. e. together.
Twa ke enda abo, we travelled with them.
Ame ka nda ya, I also am going.
8a wa BJOYwa, amebo ni nku swile, do you help me, me
who hated you ?
Ome 8lii ka ba amwe, I, I will not be with you.
Mwaba wa ya ku mnnzhi wakwe ; aye inkala yo ona a
xnnnzhi wayo, Mwaba went to his village ;. it also the crab
slept at his place.
Ome shikwe aza, nda zanda ipepe odia ko aze, I, I
don't want these, I want the feather which is there with you,
i.e. on you.
Ndutele lubotu, kweza kono alo, it is a fine reed, come
here with it.
Nda langa kaboko kwa museAi, kweza kono ako, I want
the foreleg of the eland, come here with it.
Sect. 3. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.
The following is a table of the possessive pronouns : —
Singular
Plural
Pers.
Class
Pronoun
Pronoun
I
-ngu, my, mine
-isu, our, ours
3
-ko, thy, thine
-inn, thy, thine
3
I.
MU- BA-
-kwe, his, hers, its
-bo, their, theirs
2.
MU- MI-
-0 « >»
-yo „ ,y
3-
I-MA-
-dio „ „
)
4-
BU- MA-
-bo „ „
\ -0 „ „
.6*
KU- MA-
-ko „ „
)
6.
KA- TU-
-ko „ „
-to „ „
7.
C^I- SHI-
-oho „ ,,
)
8.
IM-IM-
-yo y, f*
\ -sho „ „
9-
LU- IN-
-lo „ „
)
9a.
LU- MA-
-lo » i>
-0 „ „
94 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
On the form and use of these, note : —
a. The pronouns of classes 2--9a are identical with the latter
syllables of the indicative substantive pronoun, i. e. that part of
them which is not the copulative prefix.
h. These pronouns are connected with the nouns they qualify
by means of the genitive particles which are prefixed to them.
Thus :—
Ohintu cha-ngu, my thing.
c. In the I St and 2nd persons plur. -isu and -inn obey the
phonetic law that their initial i coalesces with the a of the genitive
particle to produce e. Thus : —
Makani esu ( = a + isu), our affairs.
Manda enu (= a + inu), your houses.
Shintu shesu ( = sha + isu), our things.
Ing'ombe shenu ( = sha + inu), your cattle.
d. They are placed immediately after the noun possessed.
€, The locative prefixes are also used with these pronouns.
Examples of the use 0/ Possessive Pronouns,
Ing'anda yangu, my house. Manda angu, my houses.
Ing'anda yako, thy house. Manda ako, thy houses.
Ing'anda yakwe, his house. Manda akwe, his houses.
Ing'anda yesu, our house. Manda esu, our houses.
Ing'anda yenu, your house. Manda enu, your houses.
Ing'anda yabo, their house. Manda abo, their houses.
Mnnzhi o bantu ba6, the village and its people.
Minzhi o bantu bay6, the villages and their people.
Isamo o matovu adi6, the tree and its leaves.
Masamo o matovu a6, the trees and their leaves.
Bwato o mwini wab6, the canoe and its owner.
Kulu o shilonda shakd, the leg and its ulcers.
Kalombwana o kusobana kwak6, the boy and his playing.
Tulombwana o kiusobana kwatd, the boys and their
playing.
THE PRONOUN
95
Chiknba o mudixni waoh6, the garden and its hoer.
Shiknba o badimi ba8h6, the gardens and their hoers.
Ing*ombe o chimpata ohay6, the beast and its kraal.
Ing'ombe o ohimpata oha8h6, the cattle and their kraal.
Lutanga o beembezhi bal6, the cattle outpost and its
herdsmen.
Intanga o beembezhi bashd, the cattle outposts and their
herdsmen.
Locative Possessives.
Prefixed by mu
Prefixed by ku
Prefixed by Vk
1st p. sing.
mwangu
kwansu
ansu
2nd p. sing.
xnwako
kwako
ako
3rd p. sing. CI. I
xiiwakw6
kwakwo
akwe
1st p. plur.
mwesu
kwesu
esu
and p. plur.
mwenu
kwenu
enu
3rdp.plnr.Cl. I
mwabo
kwabo
abo
Class
Sing.
Plur.
Sif^.
Plur.
Sing,
Plur,
2.
xnwao
xnwayo
kwao
kwayo
ao
ayo
3-
xnwadio
xnwao
kwadio
kwao
adio
ao
4-
mwabo
xnwao
kwabo
kwao
abo
ao
5.
xnwako
xnwao
kwako
kwao
ako
ao
6.
mwako
xnwato
kwako
kwato
ako
ato
7.
xnwacho
xnwasho
kwaoho
kwasho
aoho
asho
8.
xnwayo
mwasho
kwayo
kwasho
ayo
asho
9.
mwalo
xnwasho
kwalo
kwasho
alo
asho
9a.
xnwalo
xnwao
kwalo
kwao
alo
ao
These are formed like other possessives by prefixing the genitive
particles to the possessive pronouns given above. Their mean-
ings must be carefully noted, as they differ in some respects from
other pronouns.
The first forms, mwangu, &c., mean literally in-of-mine.
They are used in two ways ^ («) to indicate inside something,
inside one; or (^) within one's dwelling. This latter meaning
of course applies only to the ist and 2nd persons, and to the
ist cl. of the 3rd pers.
The second forms, kwangu, &c., mean literally to-of-mine.
96 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
They also are used in two ways : {a) to indicate to something,
and thus they have more of a prepositional than a possessive
meaning ; and {d) to indicate at or to one's place of residence,
one's home. In the latter sense they are used only in the ist
and 2nd persons and the 3rd pers., CI. i ; they are also in this
sense preceded by the preposition u (modified form of ku) to
distinguish from the other sense.
The third forms mean literally on^of-mine and are used with
locative nouns, &c., to express the meaning of possession only.
The following examples will make all this clear.
Examples.
Sa koko kwako kwina u zanda ku belekaP At your
place is there nobody wanting work ?
Ano angu a ina masamo, On my premises here there are
no trees.
Ohifumo tu la bwela u kwesu, In the morning we are
going to our home.
Mono mwangu mwina biQwazhi, In me, or^ in my place
there is no suffering.
Monse mwakwe mwina chintu, In all his place is nothing.
Tola sheshi u shi bike mukati mwadio, Take these and
put them within it (i. e. ikwati, a box).
Twa ka ona afwafWi ao. We slept in the vicinity of it (i. e.
mimzhi).
Bika ohechi kumbadi kwayo, Put this by the side of it
(i. e. inganda).
Enclitic Possessives.
Various possessive pronouns are suffixed to the nouns, and
therefore have the name enclitics. The following are examples
of this : —
TatSsu, our father.
Mwandngu, my child.
BanSsu, our children.
THE PRONOUN 97
Mwanikwe mwami, the chiefs child.
Ban&bo band, the chiefs childreiu
Besides these, other possessive suffixes are found in nouns
bearing a kind of collective meaning. These suffixes are as
follows : —
-ma, my fellow . . . -nokwesu, our fellow . . .
-noko, thy fellow . . * -nokwenu, your fellow . . .
-na, -nina, his fellow . . . -nokwabo, their fellow . . .
Examples,
Mnkazhima, my fellow wife.
Mukazhinoko, thy fellow wife.
Mukazhina, her fellow wife.
Mukazhinokwesu, our fellow wife.
Mukazhinokwenu, your fellow wife.
Mnkazhinokwabo, their fellow wife,
Bakazhima, my fellow wives.
Bakazhinoko, thy fellow wives.
Bakazhina, her fellow wives.
Bakazhinokwesu, our fellow wives.
Bakazhinokwenn, your fellow wives.
Bakazhinokwabo, their fellow wives.
The above are used by and of the wives of a polygamist.
Miusama, my fellow initiate.
Musanoko, thy fellow initiate.
Miusanina^ his fellow initiate.
Musanokwesu, our fellow initiate.
Miusanokwenii, your fellow initiate.
Miusanokwabo, his fellow initiate.
Basama, my fellow initiates.
Basanoko, thy fellow initiates.
Basanina, his fellow initiates.
Basanokwesu, our fellow initiates.
Basanokwenu, your fellow initiates.
Basanokwabo, their fellow initiates.
H
98
GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The preceding are used by and of men who passed through the
initiation ceremonies together and who through life form a kind
of league.
Possessive Phrases.
Another way of expressing the possessive is by using the
following forms. These are really phrases, containing in them-
selves personal and possessive pronouns, as we should say, ' it
is mine,' &c.
In the singular these phrases are personal, i. e. they indicate
what belongs to one himself. In the plural they denote what
belongs to one's family, village, or nation.
Singular
Plural
1st Person,
2nd.
Zrd,
1st.
2nd,
ird.
munakwangu
banakwangu
munakwangu
minakwangu
dinakwangu
manakwangu
bunakwangu
manakwangu
kunakwangu
manakwangu
kanakwangu
lunakwangu
chinakwangu
shinakwangu
inakwangu
shinakwangu
lunakwangu
shinakwangu
lunakwangu
manakwangu
munakwako
banakwako
munakwako
minakwako
dinakwako
manakwako
bunakwako
manakwako
kunakwako
manakwako
kanakwako
tunakwako
chinakwako
shinakwako
inakwako
shinakwako
lunakwako
shinakwako
lunakwako
manakwako
munakwakwe
banakwakwe
munakwakwe
minakwakwe
dinakwakwe
manakwakwe
bimakwakwe
manakwakwe
kunakwakwe
manakwakwe
kanakwakwe
tunakwakwe
chinakwakwe
shinakwakwe
inakwakwe
shinakwakwe
lunakwakwe
shinakwakwe
lunakwakwe
manakwakwe
munakwesu
bauakwesu
munakwesu
minakwesu
dinakwesu
manakwesu
bunakwesu
manakwesu
kunakwesu
manakwesu
kanakwesu
tunakwesu
chinakwesu
shinakwesu
inakwesu
shinakwesu
lunakwesu
shinakwesu
lunakwesu
manakwesu
munakwenn
banakwenn
munakwenn
minakwenn
dinakwenu
manakwenu
bunakwenn
manakwenu
•
kunakwenu
manakwenu
kanakwenn
tunakwenn
chinakwenu
shinakwenn
inakwenu
shinakwenu
lunakwenn
shinakwenu
lunakwenu
manakwenu
munakwabo
banakwabo
munakwabo
minakwftbo
dmakwabo
manakwabo
bunakwabo
manakwabo
kunakwabo
manakwabo
kanakwabo
tunakwabo
chinakwabo
shinakwabo
inakwabo
shinakwabo
lunakwabo
shinakwabo
lunakwabo
manakwabo
Examples of ike use of these,
wezo ngwa kani P Munakwangu. Whose is this
Mubwa
dog ? It is mine.
THE PRONOUN 99
lamba ledi ndinakwangu, This hoe is mine. •
A mu tole mamba onse, pele manakwangu a shale^ Take
ye all the hdes, but let mine stay.
Mwa sambasha ing'ombe shangu nambuti P Pe, twa tola
flhinakwangg badio. You have traded with my cattle, is
it not so ? No, we took mine only.
Haobeme asa onse ngu manakwesu, All this Kaffir com
belongs to our village, or to our family.
Tuntu totu ntmiakwangu tonse. All these little things are
mine.
Baoakwesn, People of our &mily, my intimates, relations,
fellows, brethren.
Notice that used as predicates these are prefixed by n or m,
except where the initial is already m.
Pofisessive PronoiinB with the Copula.
The possessive interrogative pronoun whose? is kaniP
This is connected with the noun by means of the genitive
particles, copulative form. In answering the question, the
copulative particles are also used.
JExamples,
Hontu wezu ngwa kani P Whose person is this ? Ngu
wanga, he is mine. Or, Ngwangu.
Bana babo mba kamP Whose children are those.' Mbo
bangu, they are mine. Or, Mbangu.
Mutiba wezu ngwa kaniP Whose basin is this? Ngu
wakwe, it is his. Or, Ngwakwe.
Mitiba ezhi nja kani P These basins are whose ? Nji yesu,
they are ours. Or, Njesu.
Ismno ledi ndia kani P Whose spear is this ? Ndi diangu,
it is mine. Or^ Ndiangu.
Masomo aza nga kaniP Whose spears are these? Ng'
esu, they are ours.
Hbwa kani bwato boboP Whose canoe is that? Mbu
bwangu, it is mine. Or, Mbwangiu
H 2
loo GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Kashimbi kako xika kaniP Whose girl is that? Wlvl
kangu, it is mine. Or, Nkangiu
Tiushimbi toto ntwa kaniP Whose girls are those? Ntu
twakwe, they are his. Or, Ntwakwe.
Ohintu oheobi ncha kaniP Whose is this thing? I^'ohi
changu, it is mine. Or, Nohangu.
Shintu sheshi nsha kani P Whose are these things ? IS'shi
shangu, they are mine. Or, Nshangu.
Impongo ezhi nja kaniP Whose goat is this? JSfji yako,
it is thine. Or, Njako.
Lutele lolo ndwa kani P Whose net is this i Ndu Iwanspi,
it is mine. Or, Ndwancpi.
Sect. 4. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
Personal Stng. NiP Who? Whom? FI. Bani?
Neuter „ and Plur, NzhiP What?
Possessive „ „ KaniP Whose?
On the use of these, note : —
(a) The possessive kani P whose ? has been illustrated above.
ifi) The form nzhi succeeds a noun or verb without any inter-
vening particle, the accent of the noun or verb being drawn forward
to the final vowel. It asks the question. What sort? when used
with nouns ; simply whai ? when used with simple verbs ; and
why ? when used with verbs of the relative species.
Uxampks.
Mnnyama nzhi wedia P What sort of animal is yon ?
Mwand nzhi wezo P What sort of child is that ? i. e. male or
female ?
Mwa letd nzhi P What do you bring ?
Mwa ambild nzhi bobo P Why do you speak like that ?
{c) In asking the question What is this j' in a general way,
without special reference to a particular thing, the pronouns of
THE PRONOUN tor
Class 7 are used In this way also there is another form of the
interrogative, nyamanshi P what ? Thus :— >
Chi nyamanshi P What is it ?
ChinzhiP What is it?
(d) The pronoun niP who? whom? is sufiixed to the
indicative forms of the substantive pronoun of the 2nd and 3rd
persons to ask the question Who is he ? &c Thus : —
Ndiweni P Who art thou i
Ngnni P Who is he ? {noi nguweni).
Ndimweni P Who are you ?
Hbobani P Who are they ? {nof mbaboni).
Ndiweni izhina diakoP h'/. — it-is-you-who name of-you?
What is your name ?
{e) The pronoun nip may be preceded by a preposition,
which is then prefixed to it. Thus : —
Wa ka amba oni P With whom did yon speak ?
Wa ka pewa kwani ohintu ohechi P By whom were you
given that thing ?
There are two other forms used in asking questions, viz.
-ndieP Which? and-ongaiP How many?
a. The Stem -die? Which?
This may be called a discriminative pronoun, as it seeks to
distinguish one thing from among many of the same kind.
Used adjectively it is prefixed by the personal pronouns of the
classes to which the nouns belong. Used pronominally it is
prefixed by the copulative particles.
Examples.
CI. I. MU- Wa langa muntu udieP Which person do you
want?
Muntu ngudie P Which is the person ?
B A- Wa langa bantu badie P Which people do you
want ?
Bantu mbobadie P Which are the people ?
102 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
CL 2. MI- Mwa beza xnitiba idieP Which basins have
you carved ?
Mitiba xgidie P Which are the basins ?
CI. 3. I- Mwa shika iznba didie P Which day did you arrive ?
lamba ndidie P Which is the hoe ?
MA- Mwa dima o mamba adieP Which hoes do
you hoe with ?
Mamba ngadie P Which are the hoes I
CI. 4. BU- Wa tila bufa budie P Which meal have you
bought?
BuftL mbudie P Or, mbnbudie P Which is the
meal?
CI. 5. KU- TJ la sata kutwi kudie P Which ear are you sick?
Kutwl nkudie P Or, nkukudie P Which ear ?
CI. 6. KA- Wa leta kasonde kadie P Which needle have
you brought ?
Kasonde nkukadie P Which is the needle ?
TU- Wa leta tusonde tudiep Which needles have
you brought ?
Tusonde ntutudie P Which are the needles?
CI. 7. CHI- Mwa bona ehinta obidie P Which thing have
you seen ?
Ohintu nohidieP Or, nehiohi^ieP Which is
the thing?
SHI- Mwa bona shintu shidie P Which things have
you seen ?
Shintu nshidie P Or, nshishidie P Which are
the things ?
CI. 8. IM- Wa yaya impongo idle P Which goat have you
killed?
Impongo njidie P Which is the goat ?
IM- Wa yaya impongo shidie P Which goats have
you killed ?
Impongo nshidie P Or, nshishidie P Which
are the goats?
THE PRONOUN 103
CL 9. LU- Wa lets lutele Indie P Which net have you
brought ?
Iiutele ndudie P Or^ nduludie P Which is the
net?
h. The Stem -ongaiP How many?
This is treated like the indefinite adjectives -onse, all\
-ongea2ia,yh&. (See Chap. IV, Sect. 3 d)
Examples,
CI. I. Mwa leta bantu bongaiP How many people have
you brought ?
Bantu badi bongai P How many are the people ?
CI. 2. Mwa bona mitiba yongaiP How many basins have
you seen ?
Mitiba idi yongai P How many are the basins ^
CI. 3. Mwa kapola mate ongaiP How many canoes do you
require ?
Mato adi ongai P How many are the canoes?
CI. 7. Mwa bona shintn shongai P How many things do
you see ?
Shintn shidi shongai P How many are the things ?
Sect. 5. THE REFLECTIVE PRONOUN.
The reflective pronoun is di, for all persons, numbers, and
classes. Its position in the sentence is immediately before the
verb, to which it may be conveniently prefixed.
Examples,
Ku anga, to tie. Kn dianga, to tie oneself.
Ku angulnla, to untie. Kn diangulnla, to untie one-'
self.
En koBola, to cut. Kn dikosola, to cut oneself.
En iya, to teach. Kn diiya, to teach oneself, to
learn.
104 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Sect. 6. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
The following is a table of the demonstrative pronouns :-
Singular
Plural
Class
* This'
'Thai'
« Yonder'
'These'
'Those'
« Yonder'
I. MU-BA-
wesu,
weno
weBO
wedia
baba,
bano
babo
badia
2. MU-MI-
wezu,
weno
wezo
wedia
ezhiy
eno
ezho
yedia
3. I- MA-
ledi,
leno
ledio
ledia
\
4. BU-MA-
bobu,
bobo
bobo
bodia
1 aza,
[ ano
azo
adia
5. KU-MA-
koku,
kono
koko
kodia
/
6. KA-TU-
kaka,
kano
kako
kadia
totu,
tono
toto
todia
7. CHI-SHI-
oheohi,
cheno
cheoho
ohedia
sheshiy
sheno
shesho
shedia
BI-
biebi
bieno
biebo
Media
8. IM-IM-
ezhi,
ezho
yedia
r slieshi.
shesho
shedia
9. LU-IN-
eno
lolu,
lono
lolo
lodia
1 sheno
9a, LU- MA-
lolu,
lolo
lodia
aza,
azo
adia
lono
ano
On the form and use of these, note : —
{a) The first forms given, wezn, weno; ledi, leno, &c.,
denote things close to the speaker — IhiSf these. The second
forms, wezo, ledio, &c., denote things at some distance from
the speaker and also things already referred to — that^ those.
The third forms, wedia, ledia, &c., refer to things at a dis-
tance— that yonder^ those yonder,
{J>) By laying stress upon the latter syllable of the third form,
things at a greater distance are indicated ; the more the syllable
is drawn out the further away the thing. Thus : Shintu she-
d-i-a. This is not shown in the written language.
(c) It will be noticed that there are two forms for this, these ;
the latter ending in -no, the former in the vowels a, i ^r u. The
THE PRONOUN log
forms for that^ those ^ all end in o ; and those for yonder in dia.
This is a useful help to the memory.
i^d) The demonstratives are generally placed after nouns, but
sometimes they are used before them. Either position is correct.
Examples of the use 0/ Demonstrative Pronouns.
Class I.
Munta wezn, this man. Bantu baba, these people.
Munta wezo, that person. Bantu babe, those people.
Muntu wedia^ yon person. Bantu badia, yon people.
Class 2.
Munzhi wesu, this village. Minzhi ezhi, these villages.
Munzhi wezo, that village. Minzhi ezho, those villages.
Munzhi wedia, yon village. Minzhi yedia, yon villages.
Class 3.
Isamo ledi, this tree. Masamo aza, these trees.
Isamo Iodic, that tree. Masamo azo, those trees.
Isamo ledia, yon tree. Masamo adia, yon trees.
Class 4.
Bulo bobu, this bed. Male aza, those beds.
Bulo bobo, that bed. Male azo, those beds.
Bulo bodia, yon bed. Male adia» yon beds.
Class 5.
Eulu koku, this leg. Maulu aza, these legs.
Eulu koko, that leg. Maulu azo, those legs.
Class 6.
Eashimbi kaka, this girl. Tushimbi totu, these girls.
Eashimbi kako, that girl. Tushimbi toto, those girls.
Eashimbi kadia, yon girl. Tushimbi todia, yon girls.
Class 7.
Chintu cheohi, this thing. Shintu sheshi, these things.
Chintu ohecho, that thing. Shintu shesho, those things.
Chintu ohedia, yon thing. Shintu shedia, yon things.
io6 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Qass 8.
Impongo ezhi, this goat. Impongo sheshi, these goats.
Impongo ezho, that goat. Impongo sheshOi those goats.
Impongo yedia, yon goat. Impongo shedia, von goats.
Class 9»
Lntelo lolu, this net. Intele sheshi, these nets.
Lutele lolo, that net. Intele shesho, those nets.
Lntele lodia, yon net. Intele shedia, yon nets.
Demonstratiyes used predicatiyely.
Instead of saying this is the things Baila say it is this the thing y
or the thing it is this. Thus : —
Kgu wezu muntu, this is the person.
Mbo babo bantu, those are the people.
Muntu ngu wedia, yon is the man.
Bantu mbo badia, yon are the people.
Mutiba ngu wezu, this is the basin.
Mitiba nji ezhi, these are the basins.
Kdi ledio isamo, that is the tree.
Kg' azamasamg^ these are the trees.
When the question is asked : Where is so and so ? the proper
answer employs the demonstrative in the same manner.
Kgudi kwi muntu P Where is the person? Kgu wezo,
that is he.
Hjidi kwi mitiba ? Where are the basins ? Hji yedia, yon
are they.
Isamo ndidi kwiP Where is the tree? Ndi ledio, that
IS It.
Notice that m asking die above questions the copulative
particles are used; it would be equally correct to use the
personal pronouns, udi kwi, Ac.
THE PRONOXJN 107
Iiooattre DemonstratiTes.
These are as iollows :—
Locative prefix.
UMs'
'that*
^yonder,*
MU
mono
momo
modia.
KU
kono
koko
kodia.
A
ano, awa
awo
adia.
These are used with locative nouns. Thus : —
MuxLganda mono, in this house, or in the house here.
They can also be used substantively. Thus : —
Mono mwina (mu ina) mnntu, //*/. — In-here it-has-no person.
There is no person in here.
An o anga a ina masamo, //'/. — At-here at-of-my at-has-no trees.
There are no trees here at my place.
Eodiakwina (ku ina) mabwe,/i7. — ^To-yonder to-has-no stones.
•
There are no stones yonder.
They are also used as adverbs.
Mono, kono, ano each mean here; momo^ koko, awo,
there] modia, kodia, wdoA^ yonder — but with slighdy different
meanings.
Mono means in here ; momo, in there ; modia, in yonder.
Kono means to here; koko, to there ; kodia, to yonder.
Ano, awa means on here ; awo, on there ; adia, on yonder.
Thus while it is correct to say Leta kono, bring to-here, it is
incorrect to say Leta ano. On the other hand, while it is in-
correct to say Bika kono, you may say correctly Bika awa,
put here^ because the verb leta implies bringing to somewhere,
while bika implies putting on somewhere; so that the two
adverbs kono and awa are not interchangeable. So with the
others.
There are shortened forms of these demonstratives, mo, ko, o,
used in relative constructions and elsewhere. Thus : —
Wa ka lukanka a ka shike ko kwa ku salwa meya, He
ran that be might arrive there where horns were chosen.
io8 GRAMMAR OF THE IL A LANGUAGE
Sect. 7. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.
The following is a table of the relative pronouns : —
SingtUar
Plural
Class
ist
2nd
ird
\5t
2nd
Zrd
form
jovtn
form
form
form
form
I. MU-BA-
u, ngu
owa
ngu
ba
oba
mbo
2. MU-MI-
u
owa
ngu
i
07a
nji
3. I-MA-
di
odia
ndi
)
4. BU-MA-
bu
obwa
mbu
*
a
ngu
5. KU-MA-
ku
okwa
nku
s
6. KA-TU-
ka
oka
nku
tu
otwa
ntu
7. CHI- SHI-
ohl
ooha
nohi
)
8. IM-IM-
i
07a
nji
\ Shi
osha
nahi
9. LU-IN-
lu
olwa
ndu
)
9a. LU- MA-
lu
olwa
ndu
a
a
ngu
Note on the form of these pronouns : —
The first forms are identical with the personal pronouns ; the
second with the lengthened form of the personal pronoun with o
prefixed (except in those classes in the plural which have a) ;
the third forms are identical with the copulative particles.
Formation of Belatiye Clatises.
r. When the subject of the relative clause represents the
antecedent the first form of the relative pronoun is used, but if
the verb is in the past or aorist tense the second form is used.
Examples.
Kgudi kwi muntn a leta bwizuP Where is the person
who brings grass ?
Ngadi kwi muntu owa ke za 'zona P Where is the person
who came yesterday ?
Nguwena ngu ponya bantu tusunu, it is he who makes
people live to-day.
Imbabo bantu ba to zhi Leza, they are people who do not
know God.
Ndi ledi ibuka odia ka ngwalwa nguwe, this is a book
that was written by him.
THE PRONOUN I09
2. When the subject of the relative clause does not represent
the antecedent the third form of the relative pronoun is used.
Examples,
Musamo wezo nga wa ka mpa wa mana, that medicine
which you gave me is done.
Mukamta wesK> ngu nda ka f ana wa fwa, that woman
whom I loved is dead.
Isamo ndi nda ka shimpikila awa dia fwa, the tree which
I planted here is dead.
Ivhn ndi wa leta dia mana, the soil which you brought is
finished.
Lungwalo ndu wa ka ngwala Iwa sweka, the letter which
you wrote is lost.
Masamo nga nda ka shimpikila awa a fwa onse, the trees
which I planted here are all dead.
Minzhi nji nda ka bona 'sona mibiabe, the villages which
I saw yesterday are bad.
Tushimbi ntu nda ka bona ntubotu, the little girls whom
I saw are good.
Shintn shesho nshi nda leta shidi kwiP Where are those
things which I brought ?
Bwiohi mbu nda ka nla bwa bola, the honey which
I bought is rotten.
Easamo nkn nda ka tema kadi kwiP Where is the stick
which I cut?
Wa ya kwi ngpa ta sempnla aze P Where has he gone with
whom we carry ?
Relative clauses which in English are introduced by a prepo-
sition are constructed in the same way as those above, no notice
being taken of the preposition. If possible the verb is changed
to convey the idea that we convey by the preposition.
Examples,
Kji ezhi intipa nji u ka manya midimo, this is the knife
no GRAMMAR OF THE IL A LANGUAGE
viith which you can do the work. Z//. — Which you can
cause-to-finish the worL
Kji ezhi inzhila bantu nji ba ya bu enda, this is the
road by which people travel.
Inshi eshi bantu nji ba shiti mnflhi inkaudo, this earth
on which people live is a great earth.
3. In forming possessive relative clauses use is made of the
copula diy here taken to stand for fo have.
Examples,
Kgudi kwi muntu udi ng'ombe ezhi i fnla P where is the
person whose ox this is grazing ? LiL — Who has this ox
which is grazing ?
Kgnni muntu udi milandu nji u swileP Who is the
person whose faults you hate ?
4. The locative classifiers may also be used to form relative
clauses.
Examples,
Kg ya nku tu yhwa, go where we came from.
Chi bike mu mwa ka chi yana, put it where you found it.
Koko nku nda vhwa, there where I come from.
5. We must notice here a change that takes place in the
negative verb when used in the relative clause. The negative
verb is formed by means of the auxiliary ta; in principal
clauses this ta is foimd before the personal pronoun, thus : ta
boni (ta + a), he does not see. In relative clauses this ta shifts
its position and is found after the personal pronoun. The ist
person pronoun n is prefixed to the ta.
Examples,
Ta be zhi twambo twangu, they do not know my afifairs.
Imbabo bantu ba ta zhi twambo twangu^ they are people
who do not know my affairs.
THE PRONOUN iii
Ta boni shintu ; ingnwe mofti, he does not see anything ;
he is a blind person.
ULcfa ngu munta a ta boni shintu, a blind person is a
person who does not see things.
Shi bwene shintu Bhanga; shidi kwiP I don't see my
things ; where are they ?
Shidi kwi ahintn nshi nta boni? Where are the things
which I don't see ?
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER V.
Exercise 1.
For words in these exercises consult the Vocabularies.
The subjunctive mood is as follows : — Mbone, fhaf I may
see ; u bone, fha/ thou mayesi see ; a bone, that he may see ; tu
bone, thai we may see; mu.bone, that you may see; ba bone,
that they may see. The future is formed by inserting ka, thus —
nka bone, u ka bone, &c.
Translate into Ha : —
They distribute food to me. They speak to me. What is it
you told me yesterday ? Come and untie me. Hang up this
axe for me. My father it is who gave me this name. Go and
take out for me (use the subj.) some grain from the bin. They
show me their cattle. They answer me well. They call me.
These men fought well for me. Bring me my food. The men
have gone to buy grain for me. They come to help me. The
people all honour me. Do you say I must tie this ox ? We
saw him yesterday. I am going to ask him the news. There
is the little girl ; go and tell her what I say. Have you brought
your cows ? Drive them here that I may see them.
Translate into English : —
Bantu ba ka ngabila inyemo. Ba ka nshimwina makani abo.
Kg ya u ka pele koko nku nda ka beza. Manzila maila
mashonto. Banangu ba la ngompolola ndye. Ba la ndetela
It 2 GRAMMAR OF THE IL A. ' LANGUAGE
ngombe shabo, ati ngule. Ba shimwine ati be zize ku ngangul-
wila ingozhi sheshi. Bantu bonse ba la ndemeka. Sa mbike
kwi sheshi shintunshi nda leta? Bakaintu ba la 'maninamidimo
kabotu. Ba la ndimina miunda. Ka mu ziza mu ka nimbile
kono. Ba la umbusha wezo u ona chinichini. Nchi chechi
chikoma changu ; tata ngu wa mpa. Balombwana babo be ziza
ati ba ndwile.
Ezeroiso 2.
Translate into Ila : —
I give yoii meat ; he gives you bread. Even in that house
there are many snakes. We are taking food to them. It is not
so ; you are telling me a different tale. It is just there in the
house where I foimd him. You men go and cut down trees ;
the others stay here and work. Come ye here to me all of you.
See ye those mopani trees ? Go to them and cut down three.
Have you seen my children ? Go to them and tell them that I
want them. It is you yourselves who ought to be beaten. I
will destroy that very village which he has built. This very ox
is mine. I don't want that man : I want another ; yes, that is the
very one I want. Where did he sit ? He sat just there. Where
am I to put this box ? Put it just there on the ground. Where
do those men come from ? They come from just there whence
we also came. The goats are in the kraal ; go to them and
choose the fattest. Those are the people with whom we
travelled. You are a good traveller ; I will go with you to-day.
Translate into English : —
Shikwe aza masamo, nda langa anji mabotu ; eya, ngon'azo,
kweza ab kwimbele. Nkukona koko nku tu vhwa. Balombwana
l)amwi ba ye ku tema miani : bamwi ba shale. Ndimwena mwa
ka chita bobo, mudi elele ku fwa nonse. Ing'ombe sheshi shalo
nshi shangu. Wa ka kala kwi, uwe ? Nda ka kala ngona ngu
kala aze. Uswe tu la zanda bukoko : balo ba zanda ibwantu
dialo. Imbo bobo mbu mwa chita ; mwa chita bunji. Indidio
jsamo ledi ndi 'nanga^ nd'ilamfu chinichini. Sa mwa bona
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER V 113
keembe kangu ? Nda ka yasa muntu nkako. Umwe mwa ka
mana buti mudimo wezu? Mbubona bobo mbu two mana.
Ing'ombe shangu nshishona shedia : ka mu ya ku shibele, mu ka
shi bingile kono. Bantu babo mbo beenzu : aswebo tu le enda
abo. Bana babo mbo bangu, abalo badia, bonse mbanakwangu.
Nda ka fusa shumbwa : aze muzovu nda ka mu yaya.
Exercise 8.
TranshUe into Ila : —
Bring me the hoe and its handle. Where am I to put this
blanket ? Do you see that box yonder ? Is it that one near
the house ? Yes, that's the very one ; go and put the blanket
inside it. At your place yonder are there no children who wish
to enter school ? No, there are none. Here at our place there
is abundance : yonder it is simply famine. We have no slaves
here. Tell your fellow wives to all come and work. Whose
are these many catde ? They are mine, all of them. That man
is of our place ; he has come here to visit us. Whose is this
thing ? It is mine. And these basins also, whose are they ?
They are ours. Take them and put them all in the house.
What sort of animal is yon ? It is an eland. With whom did
you come ? What does that man say? My children, by whom
were you given these things ? Which is the ox you want to
sell? It is just that white one grazing there. How much
money do you want ? How many cattle have you ?
Translate into English : —
Kodia kwako kwina bakaintu ba bumba shibia ? Nsha kani
ng'ombe shesho ? Shonse nshinakwakwe. Wezo muntu wa amba
nzhi ? Twambo twakwe ntutona toto. Sa mwa bona mubwa
wezo ? Ko ya mu kwate, mu bike mono munganda. Nchi chidie
chuna chu langa ? Nchichona chechi nchi u kadile. Kodia nku
ta vhwa twa ka bona banyama banjibanji. Banyama bonse ba
mikumo mikumo. Mwa ka yaya bongai ? Pele omwi. Mono
mwina muntu u zanda ku sempula makwati. Sa mwadl menzhi
media? Eya, muroona mu tu ka one. Chi bike mono mu
I
114 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
inkala. Ka mu ya koko ku cbitantala. Konse nku twe enda tw&
yana bantu oba usa. Zeni kono kwangu. Sa mwa luba bubona
bu twa zhima ngon' awa ozona : nda ka ku shimwina, ati, Munda
wako nguwena wezo, u ta ku bala inyinza sheshi. Konse nku
mwa bona masamo aza inshi i la bota. Shi vuminina ati u zake
koko nku nda zanda ku shanga. Ko ya u ka zake kukona koko.
U ta diati ano ngu shi shangwa imbuto shangu. Mono
mwinzhila ezhi mwina chintu pele mabwe.
Exercise 4.
Translate into Ila : —
Whose is yonder village that I see ? Who art thou who hast
left thy father's village ? By whom will your ox be brought ?
Which is the person whom you love best ? By whom are you
sent ? The dog you gave me has eaten my meat. Is it not the
chief whom you have seen? My friend who went away last
year is dead. The river which we have crossed is full of big
stones. The game we saw this morning has now gone into the
forest. The fountain at which we have often drunk is com-
pletely dry. The women who cultivate in our garden. The
boys whom I saw. The girls whom I told to come. Who is it
who cut up the meat ? The children who have brought these
flowers. The man whom I hit The stranger who slept at our
place. The fence which will fall. The flowers which they
bring. The rubbish which they took away. Where is the bowl
which you threw away ? The bridge which they made. The
chair which I brought. These two fowls which he left. The
elephant which they shot yesterday died in the night That man
with whom we spoke yesterday has cut his fingers. I do not
see that bird you speak of; which is it ? Whom do you like —
the chief of this village or his wife ?
Translate into English : —
Nguni wezo owa ka kusha chechi mu nganda ? Nsha kani
ng'ombe sheshi nshi twa bona. Sena nje ku mwita wezo owa
shika 'zona. Ba ka shika kale mbo twa ke enda abo. Nguni
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 113
weso mwanakwe ngu u kwete? Wedia mwana ngu a kwete
ngwa kani ? Twe ke enda aze mwenzu u te edi. Nda langa
mnlombwana u nyembelela. Mudimo wakwe ngu a chita wa
mu fununa. Bantu babo oba shika 'sunu ba la fwembana.
Wezo muntu u shika nzho u hupula kwi? Shimakoma ngu
nduma. Nda mu fwila ntenda wezo u bula shakudya. A
kunkumuka mabala a ngubo nshi twa ula. Chisamo chechi nchi
twa shimpa chidi kwadle kabotu. Wa lambila mwami ngu a
fwine. Leza ngu a shi lenga. Bantu ba la longa munzhi wezu
ngu ba zaka kale kale. Udi sakene munzhi wezo ngu twe elele
ku shikila ko.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
Ths Hare sats Lion's Children.
Ushumbwa wa ka zhala bana badi jkumL Inzho mwenzhina
sulwe we za, wa ba yana bana ba shumbwa. ^ We ba umwi, wa
mu tola, wa ku dya. Mwini bana wa zhoka, ati : * * Wa ndila
bana; inzho ame nda ku dya.' Wa amba sulwe, ati: 'Pe.
Indime nda tola mwanako.' Shumbwa wa leka. ' Bwa cha, wa
vhwa, wa shia banakwe ; inzho odimwi sulwe wa zhoka wa dya
umwi. Pele * dimwi wa ba mana bonse bana. Inzho wa ba
mana bana, wa ya ku chishi chimwi. Wa amb'ati : ' Nda tia ;
* u la njaya banakwe mbo nda dya.' * A shike ku chishi chimwi,
inzho ba amb'ati : ' Wa londa nzhi ? ' Ati : ' Ndime nda ka dya
bana ba shumbwa ; inzho chi nde zila. Ushumbwa u ina mudimo
ngu a ka mana.' Wa kala. Inzho ba mu tanda ku chishi
chabo, ba mu shimwina, ati: 'Ko ya; bwela kwa shumbwa
banakwe mbo wa ka dya.' Odimwi wa zhoka kwa shumbwa.
A shike, wa amb'ati : ' Shumbwa, koko nku nda vhwa, ku kudi ba
ka dya banako. Inzho ^ nku funge lozhi.' Inzho wa mu funga,
wa mu tola ko. " A shike budio, ati : ' Tu one.' Bo ona.
'Buche budio, wa amb'ati shumbwa: 'Ndimwe mwa ka dya
banangu. Ngonao ame nda zanda ku ma dya.' Inzho wa ba
dya bonse oba ka dya banakwe. Wa ba mana bonse. Inzho
I 2
ii6 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
wa amb'ati : ' Wa mana mulandu/ Pele odimwi wa amba :
^0 ( Bu ^a mana mulandu inzho u ka zhale bana bamwi/ Pele
wa ya ku zhala : wa zhala banji. Abalo ba ba dya. Ngonao
shumbwa wa amb'ati : ' Bu mwa ndila bana nda leka ku zhala.'
Kwa mana makani a shumbwa.
Notes. — ^ We ba s wa iba, he stole. ' Wa ndila bana, lit, you have eaten
from me children, i. e. you have eaten my children, or, you have deprived
me of my children. ' Bwa cha, it dawned, i. e. next day. Bnshikn i$
understood before bwa. ^ Dimwi, i. e. izuba dimwi, another day. ° He
will kill me whose children I have eaten. * A shike, when he arrived, on
his arrival. ^ Let me tie you with bark-string. * A shike budio, as soon
as he arrived. * Bu che budio, as soon as it dawned. ^ As the fault is
done with, you can beget other children.
The Tortoise and the Hare.
Banyama bonse ba ka fwe nyotwa, ba amb'ati : ' A tu lukanke
lubilo, tu bone ^ ati a ka shike ku menzhi.' Pele, * Fulwe ngu a
ka zhala bana banjibanji : ' u la ya bu zhika ^ mwivhu ; umwi
mwana wa mu zhika kumbadi ku menzhi. Inzho banyama ba
amb'ati : ' A tu tiane, tu ka shike ku mulonga, tu ka nwe
menzhi.' Ba fuma, ba lukanka bonse, ba amb'ati : ' Tu bone
ati nguni u ka tanguna ku shika.' Pele ba lukanka, odimwi
• bafulwe ba la ya bu amb'ati : * Imbelembele o bashanasulwe.'
Odimwi ba lukanka, odimwi ba amb'ati : ' Imbelembele
obashanasulwe/ Dimwi izuba dia ibila, ba la ya bu ompolola :
' ' Dimwi kwa shia. Imbelembele o bashanasulwe.' Dimwi
banyama ba mana ku fwa, mwana fulwe ^owa kudi kum-
badi ku menzhi wo ompolola^ ati : ' Imbelembele o bashana-
sulwe.' Wezo Sulwe wa ya ku fwa, wa bula o ku shika ku
menzhi. Mwana fulwe owa kudi kumbadi ku menzhi ^ wa ba
letelela menzhi mu kanwa : ke ziza ku lapwila banyama. Ati :
' Ndimwe mwa ku zumanana, ati, Fulwe tu la mu shia lubilo.
Inzho ^mwa ba nzhi ku shika? Mudi banichi. Ndime
mukando, nda shika ku menzhi. Mudi banichi.' Ngonao wa
ba lapwila menzhi a kudi mu kanwa. ^^Ba bula o ku mu
ngula: ba usa budio. Inzho banyama ba amb'ati: 'Tu ku
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 117
fumbe mukalo, ^^ tu ka ku nwa u mukalo menzhi.' Inzho ba
fumba. Basulwe ba kaka ku fumba, inzho ba amb'ati: *Bu
mwa kaka ku fumba inzho '* ta mu ti mu nwe menzhi. Mu la
mana ku fwe nyotwa.' Kwa shia, ba kaka ku fumba ba ya ku
mukalo, ba ^' kwiba. Inzho banyama bamwi ba amb'ati : ^^ ' A
tu ba zube basulwe, tu ba bone.' Inzho ba ba bona, ba ba
kwata, ba ba anga. Pele ba amb'ati : ' Bu mwa tu anga, inzho
twa beba. A mu tu tole a bwina, ^' mu ka tu yayile ngona.'
NOTES^ — ^ Ati a ka shike kn menzhi, that he may arrive at the water,
le. that who wUl arrive first at the water. ' Falwe, it is who bore.
' U la ya bn zhika, he goes burying. * Mwivhn » ma ivhn, in the
gromid. * The tortoises go along saying, forward, forward, and they also
who are with Snlwe. ' Dimwi kwa shia, /it. another (day) it is dark,
le. another day has passed. ^ Owa kudi, who was. * Wa ba letelela,
he brought to them. ' Mwa ba nzhi ku shika? — yon become what to
arrive ? i. e. what has become of yon that you did not arrive ? ^* £a bula o
ku mu ngula, they were without answer for him, they could not answer
him. ^^ That we may be able to drink water in the hole. ^' You shall
not drink. ^ Kwiba « ku iba. ^* Let us lie in wait for Sulwe. ^ That
you may kill us just there.
The two Leopards.
Bashiluwe bobili ba ka dima maila : inzho ba amb'ati : ' Twa
dima, inzho maila esu twa a dia, ^ twe 'kuta. 'A tu ka tente
mudilo.' Pele ba ya. Umwi wa tenta maila akwe : umwi wa
kaka, ati : * Shi tenti maila.' Umwi wa tenta, pele odimwi wa
fwe nzala. Mwenzhina wa amb'ati : ' ' Ome angu sha tentele,
inzho u la fwe nzala.' Pele wa tola bukwebo bwakwe wa ku
ula ku shiluwe umwi ^u ina uka tenta maila akwe. Inzho a
shike budio, wa kumba bukoko, wa amb'ati : ' Bodia mbu nda
kumba bukoko ' a mu ka mwite wezo shiluwe umwi.' Ba ya ku
mwita : ba mane ku mwita ba amb'ati : * A shike budio niu pe
bukoko, a nwe. A mana ku nwa tu mu yaye. Twa mana ku
mu yaya tu ka sale maila akwe.' Wa shika mukamwini maila,
wa nwa. Ngonao ba mu kwata, ba leta keembe, ba mu yasa
* mu mutwi. Ngonao ba ya ku sala. Ba mane ku sala, kwa
shika basazhina shiluwe. Ba shike budio, ba amb'ati : * Mwa
n8 GRAMMAR OP THE ILA LANGUAGE
mu yajila nzhi musazhinokwesu ? MaOa akwe ngu a ka dima
mwini, sa mwa mu yayila a mailaakwe ? Pele, a mu lete madi»
mu tu pe. Inzho a mu zake ing'anda inkando, mu die/ Ba
zaka, ^ be zuzha lubono ezbo ng*anda. Odimwi ba amb'ati : ^ ' A
mu zake imwi, shi be shobili/ Ba zaka imwi. Inzho ba
amb'ati : ' Imwi i zuzhe maila.' Pele ba i zuzha maila; ayo be
zuzha maila. Pele ka mana kambo.
Notes. — ^ Twe 'kuta -> twa ikuta. ' A ta ka tente mudilo » a ta ka a
tente. ' Ome angu sha tentele ■■ shi a tentele, I m]rself I have not burnt
mine. * U ina uka tenta, who did not bom. ' A mn ka mwite » a ma
ka mu ite. * Mn mutwi. Notice the nse of mu, it signifies * into the
head'. ' Be (>> ba) zuzha lubono ezho ng'anda, they it filled with goods
that house. ' Build ye another, that they be two (houses).
CHAPTER VI
THE VERB
The simplest form of the verb is found in the second person,
singular, of the present imperative, active voice : ohita, do ;
kala, sit. The verb almost invariably ends in a ; when this
final vowel is removed we get the root of the verb, i. e. that part
which remains unchanged whatever prefixes or suffixes may be
added. Changes at the end of a verb are generally made to the
root, that is, after the final vowel has been removed.
Note. — ^The only ezoeptions to the rule that the verb ends in a are
found in (a) the subjunctive mood where a is changed to e, and (j6) in the
negative conjugation where a becomes i. Besides these there are two verbs
which end always in i, ku ti, to say ; ku shiti, to stay.
Sect. i. VERBAL SPECIES.
Most probably all root or original verbs in Ila are disyllabic ;
if therefore we meet with verbs of more than two syllables we
may conclude them to be derivatives. Certain derivative forms
are termed verbal species. They are formed by adding suffixes
to the verbal root and they modify or extend very considerably
the original meaning of the verb. These verbal species, indeed,
are one secret of the flexibility and richness of the language. It
must be noted that the various derivative forms are treated in
the conjugation just as simple verbs.
The species are nine in number : —
I. — Relative. 5. — Capable.
2. — Causative. 6. — Intensive.
3. — Reciprocal. 7. — Reversive.
4. — Stative. 8. — Repetitive,
9. — Persisteiit repetitive.
I20 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
I. The Belative Species.
The relative form gives the verb a prepositional meaning and
largely takes the place of our words— ^r, to, on behalf of
about, &c.
It is formed by suffixing -ila, -ela,-ina, or -ena to the verbal
root. These suffixes are applied according to the phonetic
rules : —
(a) If the root contains a, i, or n the suffix has i (i. e. -ila or
-ina).
(3) If the root contains e or o the suffix has e (i. e. -ela or
-ena).
(c) If the previous syllable contains m or n, -ina or -ena is
suffixed, i. e. the 1 in -ila, -ela becomes n. (These rules apply to
other species also.) When the suffixes are added to roots
ending in 1, the 1 becomes d. Thus ku sala, ku sadila.
Examples,
Verbs ending in -na and -ma take the suffix -ina or -ena.
Kn kotama, to bow. Ku kotamina, to bow down
to, or before.
Ku lema, to be heavy. Ku lemeua, to be heavy upon.
Ku Buntama, to kneel. Ku suntamina, to kneel down
to.
Ku tuma, to send. Ku tumina, to send to, or for.
Ku shina, to squeeze. Ku shinina, to squeeze for.
Other verbs have -ila or -ela.
Ku amba, to speak. Ku ambila, to speak to.
Ku bamba, to arrange. Ku bambila, to arrange for.
Ku beza, to carve. Ku bezela, to carve for.
Ku dila, to weep. Ku didila, to weep for.
Ku ika, to cook. Ku ikila, to cook for.
Verbs ending in -ula, -ola, -una, -ona, all polysyllabic, take
-wila, -wela, -wina, -wena. These are mostly verbs of the
repetitive and reversive species.
THE VERB 121
Ka shimnna, to tell. Ku shimwina, to tell to.
Ka angulula, to untie. ,Ku angulwila, to untie for.
Ku kosola, to cut. Ku koswela, to cut for.
Ku Bomonona, to draw out. Ku somonwena, to draw out
for.
Verbs ending in -ezlia or-izha, or -islia or -esha, take -isha.
These verbs belong to the causative species.
En iijisha, to put in. Ku njizhizha, to put in for.
En bisha, to destroy. Ku bishizlia, to destroy for.
En buaba, to lift up. Ku bushizba, to lift up for.
Note the following verbs : —
En ya, to go. Ku ila, to go for.
Eu nwa, to drink. Ku nwina, to drink for.
En eza (kweza), to come. Ku zila, to come for.
Eu dya, to eat. Ku dila, to eat for.
Eu Ha, to fear. Ku tila, to fear for.
On the use of this species, note the following : —
Intransitive verbs taking the relative suffix become in a way
transitive, i. e. they take what in English would be called an
indirect object. Thus : —
Eu lemana, to be angry. TSda, mu leHianina, I am
angry with him.
Eu chebauka, to look around. Kda chebaukila bantu, I
look round upon the people.
Transitive verbs with the relative suffix take two objects, one
direct, the other indirect. The direct object is governed by the
verb itself ; the indirect by the suffix, as if it were a preposition.
Thus : wa ndila bana (a phrase in an Ila tale), ke ea/s-/rom-me
children, i. e. he eats my children^ or he deprives me of my children.
Here n is the indirect and bana the direct object. Nda letela
mwami impongo, / bring-for the chief a goat. Here mwami
is the indirect object and impongo the direct object. Generally
speaking, the indirect object stands before the direct in a
sentence.
123 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The verbs in the relative species form the passive voice in the
usual way by inserting w before the final vowel, but the meaning
of the passive needs to be noticed. Thus : Kda lelelwa bana
means not, as it might appear, I am fed on behalf of the children^
but / have the children fed on my behalf i. e. that somebody has
fed the children on my behalf In the active construction this
sentence would read : Ba ndelela bana, they feed-on- behalf-of-
me children. This is according to the rule of the passive, that
the indirect object in the active construction becomes the subject
of the passive. Thus, again : —
Active, Passive.
Ba bezela mwami bwato, Mwami wa bezelwa mbabo
they carve-for the chief a bwato, the chief has carved
canoe. for him by them a canoe.
Tata wa nfwila, my father is Nda fwilwa tata, I am
dead to me. deprived (by death) of my
father.
Intipa yangu ya nswekela, Nda swekelwa ntipa yangu,
my knife is lost to me. I have lost my knife.
Verbs in the relative species are generally used in sentences
before locative nouns and adverbs. Thus : —
A tu landukile mwitala modia^ let us cross over to yonder
side.
Wa ke Djizhizha kwi oluntu checho P In where did you
put that thing ?
In asking the question Why ? the relative verb is used followed
by nshi. Thus : —
Ba ambila nzhi bobo P Why do you speak thus ?
U la udila nzhi isani led! P Why do you buy this cloth ?
Mwa chitila nzhi chechi P Why do you make this ?
The literal meaning of such expressions is, You speak-for
what ? corresponding to our * What do you say that for ? '
^ In replying to such questions, and generally in giving a reason
for anything, this form of the verb is also used. Thus : —
THE VERB 123
Kohl oheohi nohi nda ohi ohitila, it is for this that I am
doing it.
Nkn kako nka twe sila, that is why we came.
Kka kako nka nda udila ohechi, it is for that reason I buy
this.
The Double Relative Form.
In some verbs the meaning given by the prefix is simply that
of the preposition to; to give the idea of 'on behalf of the
suffix is repeated. Thus : —
En ambila, to speak to. Kn ambidila, to speak on
behalf of.
Ka kombela, to pray to. Ku kombelela, to pray on
behalf of.
Other verbs which have a quasi-relative form, i. e. they are
used only in that form, the root from which they are derived
being either obsolete or rarely used, also take the double suffix
to indicate a prepositional meaning. Thus : —
En Yumina, to believe, assent (from ku vuma, obs.).
En Ytiminina, to assent for, to allow.
En dindila, to wait (from ku dinda, to watch — seldom heard).
En dindidila, to wait for, on behalf of.
The double form is also sometimes used idiomatically, to
indicate an intensive meanit^g. Thus : —
En znminina, to be completely dried up (from ku zuma, to
be dry).
2. The Causatiye Species.
Verbs in the causative species express the idea of causing,
helping, or making a thing to be done. Intransitive verbs put
into this species become transitive.
This species is formed by means of the suffixes -zha, -sha, -ya.
Instead of being added to the root of the verb, these suffixes are
largely added to what remains of the verb when the final syllable
is removed.
124 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Examples,
Verbs ending in -la take the suffix -zha, the final syllable
being removed.
Ku pala, to scrape.
Ku pazha, to scrape with, to
set to scrape.
Ku Bofvirazlia, to defile.
Ku endezha, to cause or help
to rule.
Ku dizha, to cause or help to
weep.
Ku sozha, to cause to taste.
Ku uzha, to cause to buy, to
sell.
Verbs ending in -nga, -nda take -nzlia, the final syllable
being removed.
Ku langa, to behold. Ku lanzha, to show.
Ku ohinga, to meet. Kudhinzha, to cause to meet.
Ku tonda, to be tabooed. Ku tonzha, to taboo.
Verbs ending in -ka take -sha, the final syllable being
removed.
Ku sofvirala, to be unclean.
Ku endela, to rule.
Ku dila, to weep.
Ku sola, to taste.
Ku ula, to buy.
Ku leka, to leave off.
Ku teka, to draw water.
Ku ambuka, to turn aside.
Ku lesha, to stop.
Ku teslia, to draw water with.
Ku ambusha, to cause to turn
aside.
Ku londauslia, to cause to
drop.
Ku lobosha, to cause to run
away.
Verbs ending in -ta, -sa take -sha, the final syllable being
removed.
Ku chita, to do. Ku chisha, to cause to do.
Ku sata, to be sick. Ku sasha, to sicken.
Ku ikuta, to be satiated. Ku ikuslut; to satiate.
Ku londauka, to drop.
Ku loboka, to run away.
THE VERB
"5
Ka oliisa, to be painful.
Ka ita, to pass.
Ku ohiflha, to pain.
Ka isha, to cause to pass, to
miss.
Many verbs ending in -na take -zha, the final syllable being
removed.
Ka lemezha, to overload.
Ku lemazha, to anger.
Kn komezha, to make big.
Kn manizha, to cause to serve.
Ku lemena, to be heavy
upon.
En lemana, to be angry.
Kn komena, to be big.
Kn manina, to serve.
Notice that the above verbs ending in -na are polysyllabic ;
disyllabic verbs ending in -na take -ya added to the root.
Verbs ending in -ma and -mpa, -mba, take the same.
Kn minya, to cause to swallow.
Kn lakamya, to cause to open.
Kn sen ya, to cause to approach.
Kn fnmpya, to blunt
Kn temya, to fell with.
Kn znmya, to dry.
Kn ambya, to cause to speak.
There are a few exceptions to these rules ; they will be found
in the Vocabularies. Thus : —
Kn mina, to swallow.
Kn lakama, to open the
mouth.
Kn sena, to approach.
Kn fompa, to be blunt.
Kn tema, to fell.
Kn znma, to be dry.
Kn amba, to speak.
Kn lampa, to be long.
Note also the following: —
Kn Iwa, to fight.
Kn shia, to be black.
Kn loa, to bewitch.
Kn nwa, to drink.
Kn lansha, to lengthen.
Kn Iwisha, to fight against.
Kn shizha^tomake black, dirty.
Kn lozha, to cause to bewitch.
Kn nwislia, to cause to drink.
Besides the above suffixes there is another which also gives
a causative meaning to the verb, but the idea it conveys seems
to be slightly different. The suffix is -ika or -eka. It seems to
be related to the stative suffix -nka, and to mean : to cause to
126 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
be in a certain state. Some verbs have two causative forms.
Thus :—
Ku mena, to grow. Ku menya, to make grow.
Ka meneka, to cause to be in
a growing state.
Ku ona, to sleep. Ku onya, to cause to sleep.
Kn oneka, to cause to be in
a sleeping state.
Ku bomba, to be soft. Ku bonzha, to soften.
Ku bombeka, to moisten.
Ku bunga> to gather. Ku bungika, to cause to gather
together.
Ku banda, to name. Ku bandika, to converse.
Ku vhundama, to lie on the Ku vhundamika, to lay on
face. the face.
Verbs with this causative suffix are liable to be confused with
those of the capable species.
On the uses of the causative form, note the following : —
The causative suffix gives the idea, not only of causing, but
also of helping to be done. Thus: ku sempuzha, from ku
sempula, to carry, means not only to cause one to carry, but also
to help one to carry.
The causative suffixes have also a prepositional force, in-
dicating to do a thing by means of, with, by. Thus : —
Muzune u la zhunzha mababa, the bird flies with wings.
Muntu u la tuluzha chituluzho cheohi, the person bores
with this boring-tool.
Ba disrazha mushinzo mulamfa, they kill themselves by a
long journey.
0/Aer Illustrative Sentences.
Wezo u la ku manya midimo, he will set you to work.
Lit. — He will you cause to finish works.
Mwami u tu fwezhe, Sir, make us to smoke. (A request for
tobacco.)
THE VERB 127
Kguni n meneka maila ? Who is it causes the grain to grow ?
Tu la ya ku disha bantu ba fwilwa mwana, we are going
to weep with people who have lost a child.
Leza wa ka andanya muxnoni o mushixiBe, God separated
the light from darkness.
Mushidishi u la ponya bantu, the physician cures people.
Zt/, — causes-to-live people.
3. The Beoiprooal SpeoieB.
This expresses mutual action ; also to do something together.
It is formed by suffixing -ana to the verbal root
Uxatnp/es.
En bona, to see. Ku bonana, to see each other.
Ku buzha, to ask. Ku buzhana, to ask each other.
Ku Iwa, to fight. Ku Iwana, to fight together.
Ku sula, to hate. Ku sulana, to hate each other.
Ku fnna, to love. Ku funana, to love each other.
Ku telela, to hear. Ku telelana, to hear each
other.
Ku sena, to approach. Ku senana, to approach to-
gether.
Verbs in this species are sometimes used in an idiomatic way,
to indicate a plural. Thus: Nda binda, I (singly) am in
a hurry. Twa bindana, we are both in a hurry, used by two
people. A tu tiane, let us both run.
0/Aer Illustrative Sentences,
^ ka twalana o mukaintu, he marries the woman. Lit. —
They married-each-other, or together, with a woman.
Babo ba chita mulongo ukuti ba ftmana, they make a
covenant because they love each other.
Bantu ba la bushana twambo, the people ask each other the
news.
128 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
4. The Stative Species.
Verbs in the stative species express being in a state or con-
dition. The suffix is -nka or -oka. Verbs found in this species
are mostly formed not from simple verbs but from derivatives.
Thus there are numerous transitive verbs ending in -ula or -ola,
which have a corresponding intransitive form ending in -uka or
-oka. These form the majority of the verbs in this species.
Examples.
Ku andnla, to split. Ku andnka, to be split ; to be
in a split condition.
Ku fansula, to wean. Ku fanguka, to be weaned, in
a weaned state.
Ku sandula, to turn. Ku sanduka, to be in a turned
condition.
Ku tulula, to bore. Ku tuluka, to be pierced.
Ku kosola, to cut. Ku kosoka, to be cut.
Ku konona, to break. Ku konoka, to be broken.
Ku euzununa, to melt. Ku enzunuka, to be molten.
Illustrative Sentences.
Twa ke enda o ba oh' ambuka ambuka, we went with
people who were continually getting out of the road. (Ila
riddle : answer, mubwa, a dog.)
Cha tuluka chisamo, the log is pierced. Said when an auger
has pierced a piece of timber.
Dia kosoka isamo, the tree is cut.
Sandula ohintu chechi, turn over this thing. Cha sanduka,
it is turned.
Sa mwana wezo wa fonguka P Is that child weaned ? Eya,
nda mu fangula kale. Yes, I have weaned it already.
5. The Capable Species.
This gives the idea that the action expressed by the verb is
capable of being done, or fit to be done. Verbs in this species
correspond to English verbs ending in -able.
I
THE VERB 129
The suffix is -ika or -elui ; the same as the causative suffix,
from which it needs to be distinguished
Examples,
Ka aba» to divide. Ku abika, to be divisible.
Ka chenga, to deceive. Ku ohengeka, to be deceivable,
credulous.
En bona, to see. Ku boneka, to be visible.
Eu fwemba, to dislike. Eu fwembeka, to be dislike-
able, unlovable.
Eu mina, to swallow. Ku minika, to be swallowable.
Eu twala, to marry. Ku twadika, to be marriage-
able.
Eu chita, to do. Ku chitika, to be possible to
be done, to be fit to be done.
Eu shoma, to trust. Ku shomeka, to be trust-
worthy.
Eu ula, to buy. Ku udika, to be saleable.
Illustrative Sentences,
Shidyo fiheshi sha Ohea; ta shi abika, this food is small ;
it is not divisible, i. e. it cannot be divided and distributed.
Hudimo wezo to chitiki, that work cannot be done.
Shi fwine muntu wezo ; wa fwdmbeka, I don't love that
person ; he is unlovable.
ITda ka zanda ku uzha musune wangu ; ta udika, I wanted
to sell my ox, but it is not saleable.
Makani akwe a teleleka, his affairs are capable of being
understood.
6. The Intensive Species.
Verbs in the intensive species express the idea of the simple
^rb intensified in meaning. The suffix has the effect of our
adverbs very, greatly, clearly, carefully, &c. The suffix is
'iflha or -esha, and is added to the verbal root.
I30 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
ExatftpUs*
£u amba, to speak. Ku ambisha, to speak loudly.
Ku bamba, to arrange. Ku bambisha, to arrange
carefully.
Ku beza, to carve. Ku bezesha, to carve nicely.
Ku bona, to see. Ku bonesha, to see clearly.
Ku langa, to look. Ku langisha, to look intently.
Ku enda, to travel. Ku endesha, to travel swiftly.
Ku lakama, to open the Ku lakamisha/to open widely.
mouth.
Ku bonzha, to soften. Ku bonzesha^ to make very
soft.
Illustrative Sentences.
A mu telelishe makani a mwami, understand well the affairs
of the chief.
Bezesha musako wangu, carve nicely my walking-stick.
U ta ku tepekezha ; ambisha, don't mumble ; speak put
loud.
We, tu le endesha. Dear me, we are going fast.
Uwe, lakamislia, mbone mono ako, open your mouth wide
that I may see your teeth.
A mu langishe ; banyama nzhi badia P Look ye intendy ;
what are yon animals ?
7. The Beversive Species.
Verbs in this species express just the opposite idea to those of
the simple verbs. The suffix answers to our English prefix un-.
The suffixes of this species are -ula or -ulula; -una or
-ununa; -ona or -onona.
Examples,
Ku amba, to speak. Ku ambulula, to unspeak; to
retract.
Ku yhumba, to cover. Ku vhumbulula, to uncover..
Ku anga, to tie. Ku angulula, to untie. Also
angununa.
THE VERB
i3»
Kn yala, to shut.
En vhunga, to fold up.
Ku bamba, to arrange.
Ku yalula, to open.
Ku yhmigulTila, to unfold.
Ku bambulula. Idiom i To
take the pegs out of a skin
stretched out to dry.
Ku somonona, to pull out.
En soma, to sheathe.
Illustrative Sentences,
A mu vhumbulule ing*anda ezhi, uncover this house, i. e.
unthatch it.
ITguni owa bambulula isalo P Who unpegged the skin ?
A mu vhungulule ingozhi sheshi, unfold this bark-string.
Ba la sambulula koze, they untwist the string.
8. The Bepetitive flpeoies.
Many verbs having the suffix -ulula, &c., express not the idea
of reversion but that of doing over and over again. These
belong to the repetitive species. The suffix corresponds to our
prefix re-.
Examples,
Ku ululula, to trade a thing
Eu ula, to buy, trade.
Eu nenga, to cut
Eu beza, to carve.
Eu ohita, to do, make.
Eu shanga, to sow.
over and over again.
Ku nengulula, to cut up, i. e.
again and again.
Ku bezulula, to carve over
again, recarve.
Kuchitulula, to re-do, remake.
Ku ishangulula, to resow, i. e.
when the first sowing has
failed.
9. The Persistent Bepetitive Species.
Besides the above repetitive form there is another formed
simply by inserting a before the final syllable of other verbs. It
indicates doing a thing over and over again, to keep on doing, to
be in the habit of doing, to do a thing gradually ; sometimes the
K 2
132 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
meaning is rather intensive and indicates doing something
entirely. Often it is very difficult to tell the difference between
verbs in this species and those from which they are formed*
Examples,
HlXi Botoka, to jump.
Ktt sotaoka, to jump over and over again ; to hop as an
insect.
Kn sandula, to turn over.
Kn sandaula, to turn over and over, as in examining a
blanket before buying.
Ku seluka, to descend.
Ka selaoka, to descend and ascend contmually, as any-
thing cooking in a pot
Ku pepula, to open, as a book.
£u pepaula, to turn over and over, as the pages of a book.
£n nyonkola, to pluck up anything, i. e. in one act.
Kn nyonkaola, to pick out as in thinning out seedlings.
Ku ohebiika, to look round.
Kn chebanka, to keep on looking around, as when a man
is travelling and he fears a wild beast is on his track.
Kn hnndnka, to be dirty, of water.
Kn hnndanka, to be altogether dirty, of water.
Kn fwifiuka, to leave, i. e. altogether.
Kn fwisanka, to leave in companies.
Kn angika, to hang up, fasten up.
Kn angaika, to fasten up, of a lot of things.
Kn andnla, to split, i. e. in one act.
Kii andanla, to split up, chop up, as firewood.
Kn shindila, to ram earth, Ac.
Kn shindaila, to ram earth by a series of actions.
Compound Derivatiye Forms.
These are formed by adding to the verb suffix upon suffix,
thus vastly extending the meaning of the verb. Many examples
will be found in the Vocabularies ; a few will suffice here.
THE VERB 133
Causative^ekUive species^ i. e. the relative added to the causative.
Note that the relSttive suffix is -izha or -ezha when the causative
is -aha.
Examples.
Eu bia, to be bad, £u bota, to be good.
Eu bisha, to destroy. Ku bosha, to make good.
En bishizlia, to destroy for. Ka boshezlia, to gladden.
i^u meua, to grow.
Ku meneka, to cause to grow.
Ku i4enekela, to cause to grow for.
Reversive-stative species^ i. e, the stative added to the reversive.
Examples,
Eu anga, to tie. Ka katala, to be tired.
Eu angulula, to untie. Ku katulula, to refresh.
Eu angoliika, to be untied. Ku katoluka, to be refreshed.
Stative-relaUm species^ i. e. the relative added to the stative.
Examples,
Eu sanduka, to be turned Ku sandukila, to be turned
over. over towards.
Euchinduluka, to be turned Ku chiadulukUa, to be
round. turned round towards.
(The root of this verb is chinda ; chindulula is the reversive,
chinduluka, the reversive-stative ; chinduiukila, the rev.-stat-rel.)
Rectprocal-Causative^ i. e. the caiisative added to the reciprocal.
Examples.
Eu fona, to love, Ku buzha, to ask.
Eu ftmana, to love each Ku bushana, to ask each
other. other.
Eu ftmanya, to cause to Ku bushanya, to discuss.
k)ve each other.
134 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
■Rtlative-reciprocal, i. e. the redprocal added to the relative.
Examples.
"Sjol aba, to divide. Kn abila, to divide among.
Kit abilana, to divide among Kn abilanya, to cause to
each other. divide among each other.
Note. — It is not considered polite to use in a mixed company words
ending in nya, because of the meaning of that snffix when it stands as
a verb by itself. So that abilanya is not always used, the word abizhana
taking its place.
Reverstve-reciprocaly i. e. reciprocal added to the reversive.
Examples,
Ku angolula, to untie. £n ansululana, to untie each
other.
Illustrative Sentences,
Langa, wa angoluka mubwa, look, the dog is loose.
Mn ta tu enzesha, you must not make us go quickly.
A mu bunganye antomwi shintu shenu, gather together
your things.
CM nohindTiliikile, let it turn round to me.
Bazhike ba ka angululana mashikn, the slaves untied each
other in the night.
IT ba abizhane tombwe, cause them to divide the tobacco
among themselves.
Usunn twa bomba ; tu la kattQuka ozona, to-day we are
fatigued ; we shall be refreshed to-morrow.
Before leaving the subject, there remain four things to be
noted. First, while nine different species have been noted
above, it is not to say that these are all that might be found.
There are many verbs ending in -ala, -ama, &c., which may still
after further study be brought into species.
Further, it must be noticed that not every verb can take all
the nine different forms given above*; at least they are not heard
in ordinary speech.
THE VERB 135
Again, there are numbers of verbs which from their appear-
ance belong to the species named ; but either the original roots
are lost or, where still in use, have such an entirely different
meaning that it seems impossible to connect them in meaning
with the derived forms. Numerous examples of this will be
found in the Vocabularies.
Take, for example, the rerbs longelwa, longeKha, and the noun malongo,
aU referring to a corenant of friendship ; the root from whence they are
derived is longa* The word longa in our Vocabnlaries means ' abandon ', and
it is doubtful whether this is the root. They may be derived from lunga,
* join up together,* but why the change in the vowel ? The Kongo verb
longa, ' to cheer, console,' seems to be the root ; if so it is obsolete in Ila.
Again the verb shingulola appears to be the reversive or repetitive form
of shinga, bnt that verb is used only of boys reaching puberty.
The yerb imoka appears to be the stative form of ima, but there is no
snch word in Ila. It evidently is the word ' to stand ', as we see in other
languages: Zulu, Shuna, ma, ema; Suto, ema; Swahili, simama; Luba,
imana ; Nyanja, Ganda, ima ; Lamba, imakana. The Ila word is zhima ;
like the Swahili it has now an initial consonant If imoka is derived
from this root it would signify 'to be in a standing position *, hence, as its
meaning is, ' to delay.* It might be possible to trace back many other Ila
derived words in the same way.
Note, lastly, that derived verbs, when there is no doubt as to
their root, have very different meanings from the verbs they are
derived from, but it is often easy to trace the development of
meaning. See, for example, the development of meaning from
bota to boshezha (p. 133)*
Sect. 2. TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
Ila verbs are either transitive or intransitive. In transitive
verbs the action expressed passes over to an object, e. g. Nda
Bftncla munttt, I like a person. Intransitive verbs simply in-
dicate a state of being or an action which has reference to no
object, e. g. Kda fwa, I am dead ; Nda luka, I vomit.
Transitive verbs may be made intransitive by being put into
stative species, e. g. trans., ku tulola ; intrans., ka tuluka.
136 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Intransitive verbs may be made transitive by being put into
the causative species, e. g. intrans., ku enda ; trans., ku enzha.
Intransitive verbs put into the rejative species also become
transitive in a way, e. g. ku lemana ; ku lemanina.
Sect. 3. CONJUGATION,
By conjugation we mean the changes which take place in
a verb in order to express differences or changes as to persons,
time, or conditions, and also to show whether the agent is active
or passive. Such changes are denoted by pronouns, tenses,
voices, and moods.
a. By Pronouns.
In English the form of the verb often varies according to the
person of the subject pronoun, thus : — I do, thou dost, he does.
In Ila it is not so ; the verb remains unchanged and only the
pronouns vary according to the idea to be expressed, thus : —
K da Chita, I do ; wa chita, thou dost ; wa chita, he does.
3. By Tenses.
By tense we mean the change in the verb to express differences
of time. The tenses are many and need not be enumerated
here, as they are given in the next chapter. They may be
divided into simple and compound, the latter being formed by
means of auxiliaries.
c. By Voices.
By voice is meant the change in the verb to express whether
the subject of the sentence is acting or is acted upon. There
are two voices : the active, denoting that the nominative of the
verb is the person or thing which performs the action ; and the
passive, denoting that the nominative is the person or thing
acted upon.
The passive is formed from the active by suffixing -wa or -iwa
to the verbal root. When the verb ends in e or i the passive
suffix becomes -we, -wi; or -iwe, -iwi.
THE VERB 137
Examples.
Verbs ending in -sha, -sha^ -ya, -nya, take -iwa.
Active. Passive.
En bosha, to raise* Ku bti3hiwa» to be raised.
En enzha, to lead« Ku enzMwa, to be led.
En yaya, to kiU. Ku yayiwa, to be killed.
En lemekisha, to honour ^u lemekishiwa, to be
greatly. honoured greatly.
En Imubusha, to tax. Ku lumbuzMwa, to be taxed.
En mwaya, to scatter. Ku mwayiwa, to be scattered.
En njizha, to put in. Ku igizhiwa, to be put in.
En ponya> to cure, Ku ponyiwa, to be cured.
Other verbs take -wa; and certain exceptions to the above
rule also take -wa instead of -iwa.
Eu bisha, to destroy. Kn. bishwa, to be destroyed.
En bonya, to show. Ku boaywa, to be shown.
Eu bungany a^ to gather. Ku bunganywa, to be gathered.
Eu amba, to speak. Ku ambwa, to be spoken.
Eu leugaila, to lead astray. Ku lengailwa, to be led astray.
Other verbs, again, take either form of suffix.
Eu binga, to drive, Ku bin^a, or biugiwa, to
be driven.
Eu kwata, to hold. Ku kwatwa, or ku kwatiwa,
to be held.
Notice the verb ku tewa, to be said, from ku ti, to say.
From these examples it appears that the passire voice is very similar in
meaning to the stative species. Indeed some Bantn grammarians (e. g. Tor-
rend) n^ard the latter as a form of the passive ; while others (e. g. Bentley)
term it the Middle voice. The difference between the two must be care-
folly distinguished. What, e.g,, is the difference between Isamo di' auduka
and Isamo di' andalwa, both meanmg the tree is split ? The difference is
that in the passive an agent is named or at least implied, whereas in the
>tative it is not so. Thus in the example just quoted, Isamo di' andulwa
implies the idea that somebody has split the tree. Isamo di* andnka, on
the other hand, rivets attention on the tree itself; the tree is simply split,
t38 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
in a split condition, whether by the agency of man or the elements is not
indicated.
This is one of the points to which attention mnst be paid if one desires
to speak correct Ila.
Prepositions tised with the Pa49sive.
The passive may be followed by two indirect objects, the one
denoting the agent who performs the action, the other denoting
the instrument with which it was performed. Thus : He was
killed by a man with a spear.
In Ila, to express the agent, often no preposition is used.
Thus :—
Kda chengwa mxtntu, I am deceived by a man.
Remember also the use of the indicative substantive pronoun.
The preposition ka or kwa denotes the agent.
Inshi ya ka btimbwa kwa Leza ktl kukanka, the earth was
formed by God in the beginning.
To express the instrument the preposition o is used. Thus : —
Muntti wa angwa kwangu o koze, the person is tied by me
with a cord.
Notice in this connexion the use of the causative form of the
verb.
When a verb has two objects, a direct and an indirect, it is the
indirect object which becomes the subject when the verb is made
passive. Thus : —
Active : Nda udila bananga shidyo, I buy food for my children.
Passive : Banangn ba udilwa kwangu shidyo, my children
are bought-to food by me.
The Baila use the passive much more than we do, for the
reason that they seek to make the person speaking, or the sub-
ject of conversation, the subject of the verb. This causes an
idiom which often sounds strangely in English ears, for i^
necessitates intransitive verbs taking the passive. Thus : —
Munganda momo ta mu igilwa bana, pele bakando, thi3
house is not entered by children, only by elders.
THE VERB 139
d. By Moods.
By mood we mean variation in the form of the verb to
express the manner in which the action or fact denoted by the
verb is conceived in connexion with the subject, i. e. whether it
is expressed as a fact or possibility or command. We admit
five moods in Ila.
I. — The indicative mood simply states or affirms or indicates
that an act is done or not done. Thus : —
KdA ka bona, I was seeing.
Nixia ku bona, I was not seeing.
2. — The subjunctive mood expresses condition, or doubt, or
purpose. It is preceded, in thought if not in fact, by a conjunc-
tion, in order that. It is also used in some cases as a command.
It is readily distinguished, as generally the final vowel is e«
Ea mu ya, mu ka tole shidyo, go ye (that) ye may carry food.
3. — The potential mood expresses power, possibility, or
liberty. Thus : —
Tn la ka dya nzhi ? What are we to eat ?
4. — The imperative mood expresses command or entreaty.
Chita, do thou. Na mU ehite, do ye.
5. — The infinitive mood simply names the act or fact without
expressing affirmation or request or purpose, or anything. It
therefore requires another verb to complete it in a sentence.
The sign of the infinitive is the particle Ku.
Nda zanda ku dya, I want to eat.
We may say that there are two conjugations in Ila, suffi-
ciently defined by their names: (i) the Affirmative; (2) the
Negative.
Sect. 4. AUXILIARY PARTICLES.
Various auxiKaries are used in conjugating the verb.
LA : This is used in the immediate future indicative ; also in
the present potential.
140 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
KA: This is used (i) in the indicative to denote the past
tense; (2) in the potential mood, of which it is the sign; (3) in
the imperative as equivalent to * let '.
NA : This is used in the imperative, equivalent to * let \
IN A : This is the verb kwina (ku ina), to be not, have not ;
used as auxiliary in certain negative tenses.
TA : This is used in the negative conjugation, equivalent to
* not '.
SHI : Used in the negative conjugation, in place of ta, in the
I St pers. nng.
CHI : Used in certain tenses, equivalent to * still '.
BU : Used with similar meaning to Chi.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER VI.
Exercise 1.
Translate into Ha : —
Am I to cut the meat here ? Go and ask for a garden for
me. Cook this meat for me in your pot. Leave off just there.
Help me to some food. Tie the clothes on that rope that they
may dry there. Come and sell me two cattle. Why do you
delay ? Here are two boys who want to serve you. All right,
let them wait for me, I will set them to work. Why have you
cut up all the meat ? Why do you talk so much ? He goes to
buy honey for me. Why did you carve the stick like this ? Go
and recarve it. They allow us to cut wood in their garden.
You must not defile your clothing. He gave me to taste of his
beer. We are going to meet them to-morrow. The chief tabooes
this thing, it is not to be done. This food satiates us. I have
nothing to draw water with. Drop this medicine into your eye
every day, it will cure you. He wanted to shoot the bird, but
missed. You must not anger me. This is the axe to cut
mopani with. Go and dry your clothes. He gave me beer to
drink. Moisten this clay. We will converse together in the
morning, I am busy now» The men understand each other.
Their aifairs are capable of being understood. Why do you
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER VI 141
hate each other? The beeswax is molten. Who is it melted
the beeswax ? The cup is broken* Who is it broke the cup ?
The calf is weaned. The girl is marriageable. It is not possible
to do this thing. This food cannot be swallowed, it is very
hard. His power is visible to all to-day. He is a trustworthy
person ; he does not lie, he does not steal. We travelled swiftly
yesterday; to-day we shall refresh ourselves. You must not
pull out grass from the roof. Unfold your tickets that I may
mark them. Take out the pegs from the skin, it is dry now.
We are going to resow our fields ; all the seed is dead.
Translate into English : —
Wezo muntu wa ka nkuzhizha mwana* Bakaintu ba ya ku
nkumbila funku. Wezo muntu wa ka nwa funku, inzho wa ba
mukolwi, wa kunauka. Leta menzhi manjimanji, u kupanye
mitiba yesu yonse. A mu kweleshe kabotu isamo ledio. Wa
labukulula tulabi twesu. Tu la mu lambizha mwami. Uwe ko
nampizhizha ntipa yangu. A mu landulule buzane : bwa bizwa
nzho. A mu dilangile. Twa ka landukila mwitala modia.
Maila esu a lebuka : a tu tebule. A mu lapulule ivhu. Balomb wana
ba bezesha ; ba tu langidizha midimo yabo* Ko ya, u nindidizhe
bwato. Ba la ndukila chitendele. Twa lumbila mwami shintu
nsha tu pa. Mwami wa tu lutidila, anokuti twina kambo. W^e,
wa ndweza. Shimwina bantu babo ba mane midimo mani nka
ba leshe. Kweza, ndo, manwina keembe kangu. Mukalo wa
zuminina. Mwami wa nyansha muzhike. Ko ya, u ka mu
ombolozha makani. Ngompolwela mwanangu. Tu la mu pazha
isalo ledi, u la konzha ku padisha. Usunu nda pakasha, nina
chindi cha ku bandika aze. A mu mpandulwile makani azo.
Bantu babo ba la tu penzha. Twa pengela maila esu. Mu shim-*
wine a pesulule masuso akwe. Kweza musama, mpesulwila
masuso. Ndumbana wezo wa pumpila kutwala. Bantu ba munzhi
ba ya ku pupumina mwenzu. Wezo muntu wa potanya makani :
ta teleleka. U tu pompomwene makani ngu a tu ambila. Mubwa
wa ka mu sotekela. Mwa mu sudila nzhi ? Udi mubiabe : wa
i4« GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
sudika budio. Ba la tambuzhanya infuko. Twina cha ku
tesha. U ba tu teshizhe menzhL Bulwazhi bu la twetanya
bantu ba munzhi.
Exercise 2.
Explain the following derivative verbs: —
Umanya. Ululuka. Umpuka. Vhundamikila. Nvhum-
bulwila. Njalwila. Njizha. Nzambulwila. Zambaila.
Zhadisha. Zhanina. Zhiminganya. Zhimbulusha. Zhoke-
lanya. Zhibanya. Dizhibya. Zudisha. Lukankisha. Lusha.
Nimbila. Nembela. Nengelezha. Ndetela. Nangidizhau
Ndazha: Katazhiwa. Kadikila. Kalabisha. Kalazha.
Ambulula. Inya. Inisha. Ibusha. Ibizha. Fumpuluka.
Funika. Fufumushiwa. . Ebela. Embelela. Dizisha. Dimbu-
lula. Diatikizha. Diidila. Chitulula. Zapauka. Tekunya.
Lumbudila. jChabizha. Bulunganya. Budizha. Minzha.
Mingisha. Binzhanya. Manzeshisha. Nganzhizha. Ngan-
zhikila.
Exercise 8.
What is the passive of the following verbs : —
Uma. Tuma. Etnbda. Binga. Chaba. Amba. Yayila.
Inya. Telela. Mata. lya. Sowa. Fua. Tizha. Towa.
Sha. Zhia. Shia.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
The Hyena and the Moon.
Kabwenga a bone ^ mwezhi ku tuba mangolezha, wa ya ku
mulonga ku nwa menzhi. Wa yana mwezhi ku tuba u menzhi,
* wa amba : * Chifua.' Ngonao, ' u le bila. We bile kunshi wa
ya ku zhinzhilika ku menzhi. ^ Wa yana chifua, ku chi bona,
pe. Wa fumpuluka. Odimwi wa bwela, we bila, wa ya ku
zhinzhilika : ku chi bona, pe. Ngonao bushiku ^ bwa mu chela,
wa ya budio mu kasaka, wa ya ku ona.
Notes. — * Mwezhi ku tuba, the full moon. *Wa amba, 'Chifua*, he
said, or thought, ' A bone.' ' U le bila^u la ibila« * Did he find a bone^
did he see it? No. ' Bwa mn chela, it (the day) dawned upon him.
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 143
The Hare and the Moon.
Mwezhi o sulwe ba ka Iwa : ^ ba ka Iwila a nyemo. Sulwe
ati : ' ' Nda ku dya inyemo.' Mwezhi wa amb'ati : Ome, nda
ya ku chita mumoni/ Sulwe wa amb*ati: *Tu andane,
mukwesu/ Mwezhi wa amb'ati : ' E.' Bu che budio ba fuma
budio, sulwe wa ya ku buzha ku mwezhi, ati : " Sena u chi
bandika makani a 'zona ngu wa ka amb'ati : Tu la andana ?
* Tu be fu diomwi. Inzho usunu tu andane. Uwe u ka chite
mumoni: ome nda shala 'nshi.' Ngonao ba andana. Umwi
sulwe wa shala ku mwezhi : umwi wa ke za 'nshi.
Notes. — ^ Ba ka Iwila a nyemo, they fought about groimd-nuts. ' Nda
ka dya, I am going to eat. ' Do you still speak the affairs of yesterday,
which you said. * Tu be fn diomwi •■ Tu ba ifn, Let us be one stomach.
This tale gives the explanation of how the hare came to be in the moon; we
talk of the man in the moon, the Baila of the hare.
The Leopard and the Cheetah.
Ushiluwe ba ka andana o malama. Ushiluwe wa ka luma
ngombe ya mwami, ^ e lume budio wa lambaizha buloa bwa
ngombe ku malama. Bu che budio ba hula: ba yana ati
ing'orobe imwi te o, ba amba: 'A mu ompolole malama o
munina shiluwe, tu ba buzhe ku yaya ng'ombe ya mwami.' • Ba
shike budio ba ba buzha, ba amb'ati : ' Shiluwe.' Wa ingula,
ati : ' Wa amba nzhi, mwami ? ' Ati mwami : ' Ing'ombe yomwi
te o imwi.' Ushiluwe wa amb'ati : * Ome, mwami, * shi bwene.'
Aze malama ati : ' Ame mwami shi bwene.' Ushiluwe chi be
chindi odimwi wa ingula, ati: 'Mwami 'bukadi bobo ^u la
bona u kwete buloa ku mulomo o ku matashi ngu bwene
ing'ombe yaka' Ngonao mwami wa langa ku mulomo wa
shiluwe o ku matashi. A zhole budio dinso kwa malama wa
bona buloa ku mulomo o ku matashi : ngonao wa tuma nguwena
munina shiluwe, wa mu kwata, wa amb'ati: 'Inzho uwe,
ushiluwe, * ka be mukadi ku bantu o ku banyama. Uwe uma-
lama, ku ka luma bombe^ ba ka ku yaye beni ngombe.' Ngonao
obudisunu malama a yana ngombe u la mu luma. Nikuba
X44 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
bobo aze shiluwe u chi luma bombe o bantu. Ta ba andana
chinichini. * Bubona mbu ba ta andana ku mabala a malama a
shiluwe, wa amb'ati : * Tia, malama/ — ku la tia shiluwe. Wa
amb'ati : ' Tia shiluwe/ — kwa tia malama. Ukuti ba la kozhana
shianza shabo* Ka mana.
Notes. — ^ £ lame budio a i + i, as soon as he bit it. ' Shi bwene »
shi i bwene, I have not seen it. ' Bukadi bobo, as it is so, if so. ^ Yon will
see who has blood on his mouth and hands it is who has seen your beast.
' Ka be mukadi, or u ka be, you may be fierce, or be you fierce. * Just as
they do not differ in colour.
The Hare and Momba.
Sulwe o momba ba ka ya ku nwa mukuku: ba amb'ati:
* Bukoko * ta bu nwi u ina meya.' Sulwe a telele bobo, wa
dibuixibidila bunvuka ku mutwi, ati ' ba ambe meya. Ba ya ku
bukoko. A shike, sulwe wa kadila ku mudilo. Momba wa
kala ku mudiango, Ba ba pa bukoku. Momba ati : ' Di enzunuka
imvuka.' Usulwe wa ingula, ati : ' Momba u la kumbila buse.'
Ba mu pa. Wa langidila kwa sulwe, wa bona bunvuka mbu a
dibumbidila bwe enzunuka, bwa kanka ku kunka. Momba wa
amb'ati : ' Di enzunuka imvuka.' Usulwe odimwi wa amb'ati :
* Momba u la kumbila buse.* Ba mu pa. Wa nwa. Odimwi
imvuka dia enzunuka odia sulwe : ' ku kulukanka wa lukanka
sulwe, wa vhwa mo munganda* * Mbwa ka ba chenga sulwe.
Notes. — ^ Ta bn nwi n ina meya, he may not drink it who has no horns.
' Ba ambe meya, that they may say horns, i. e. that they may take them
for horns. ' Ku kulukanka wa lukanka (an emphatic expression), by
running he ran, i. e. he ran hard. * That is how Sulwe deceived them.
The Hare and the Jackal.
Sulwe wa amb'ati : * Tu ya tu ka dye inyemo, mwaba.' Ba
ya ba shike ku chinyemo, ba fumba inyemo. ^ Shi ba kole, bo
ona ; kangasulwe ka buka, ka sha chidindi, ka zhika muchila wa
mwaba. Ka shindaila ko. Ka mane ku shindaila ka mu
busha, ka amb'ati : ' Buka, ndo, ba shika bantu. Ba la tu yaya.
' Tu ku ya.' Kalo ka lukanka. Mwenzhina wa kachilwa ku
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 145
lukanka ba mu yana babo bantu obadi inyemo. Ba yaya wezo
mwaba. Mbwa ka mu chenga bobo mwenzbina.
NoTftS. — ^ Shi ba kole, when they, i. e. the ntits, had made them drank.
The idea is that nuts affect them as beer does men. ' Tu ka ya, let's be
going.
Th& Hars and the Lion.
Kangasulwe ka yana shumbwa, ati : 'A tu ende tu ka sobane
^bu twa ku sobana o bachisha bamuzovu/ Shumbwa wa
ingula, ati : ' A tu ende.' Ba shike, shumbwa wa diza kwisamo :
sulwe wa langa ibwe ikando ikando. Ibwe ledio wa di tola
shumbwa kwisamo. Ushumbwa ' ni a ti a fusile afwafwi, sulwe
wa amb'ati : ' Pe, ko ya chinichini kodia ku matovu, ame ' nchi
dibamba mono munshi.' Sulwe wa chela matovu, u la tafuna.
Aze shumbwa ^ wa leka ibwe, sulwe wa lakama. A bone budio
ati dia shika afwafwi sulwe wa sotoka o, wa lea, dia wila anji.
Di we budio ibwe, sulwe wa lapwila o matovu * ebwe awo, wa
shimwina shumbwa, ati : ' To bwene ntu tubiabe totu/ Ushumbwa
wa vumina, ati : ' £. Ame inzho nda lakamsu Aze inzho u
di dizike ibwe kwizeulu kwisamo.' Sulwe wa di tola : ushumbwa
munshi wa lakama, sulwe wa ya ku matovu ku mpela, wa ya ku
di leka ibwe koko. Shumbwa wa lakama, a bona ati, dia shika
afwafwi ibwe, wa lakamisha chinichini. A lakame bobo, ibwe
dia shikila a meno, meno onse a mana ku fwa. Shumbwa aze
wa fwa. Sulwe a seluke budio, wa amb^ati : ' Ame nda zowa.
Baba bamuzesu ba lakama buti ? Ome, nda ba ambila, ati : na
mu lakamishe chinichini. Balo ba la lakama kashonto budio.
Kambo kako inzho ba diyazha beni. Komwi nda chenga baba
bachisha.' A mane bobo, wa lukanka, wa ya.
Notes. — * As we were playing with my uncles the elephants. * When
he was aboat to throw near. ' I am still arranging, or placing, myself
here below. *He threw the stone. 'Ebwe awo^^a ibwe awo, there on
the stone.
CHAPTER VII
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB
In the following paradigm the essential tenses of the verb are
g^ven. Many of them are given in full, not only with the pro-
nouns in the first, second, and third persons, but also with nouns
of the various classes in the third person. While this plan
involves a considerable space in the grammar, it will, it is hoped,
render the study of the verb easier to the student.
No separate paradigm is necessary for the passive voice, as no
change takes place except the insertion of w, as explained in the
previous chapter.
Sect. i. AFFIRMATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
I. Present Tense.
Prtmoun form,
Kdi bona, or mbona, I see. Tu bona, we see.
XT bona, thou seest. Mu bona, you see.
XT bona, he sees. Ba bona, they see.
Noun form.
1. Muntu u bona, the person sees.
Bantu ba bona, people see.
2. Mudilo u tenta, fire burns.
Midilo i tenta, fires burn.
3. Isamo di mena, the tree grows.
Masamo a mena, the trees grow.
4. Buzune bu ulnka, the bird flies.
Maziine a uluka, birds fly.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB M7
5. Slutwi ka ohisa, the ear pains.
Matwi a chisa, ears pain.
6. Kashimbi ka sobana^ the girl plays.
Tushimbi ta sobana, girls play.
7. Chinta ohi bonwa, the thing is seen.
Shinta shi bonwa, things are seen.
8. Impongo i dila, the goat bleats.
Impongo shi dila, goats bleat.
9. Lumo lu koBola, the razor cuts.
Imo shi koBola, razors cut.
9a. Lupidi lu budika, the bill appears.
Mapidi a bndika, the hills appear.
N.B. — ^lliis tense is found only in relative clauses ; Mantu « bona, &c.,
will also read * the person who sees '. Generally the immediate fnUre, Ndi
Is bona, or the aorist Nda bona is osed with a present meanin^^
2. Present Tense: Another Form.
Pronoun form,
Kdi di mu ku bona» I am Tudi ma ku bona, we are
seeing. seeing.
Udi mu ku b<ma, thou art Mudi mu ku bona» you are
seeing. seeing.
ITdimukubona^ he is seeing. Badi mu ku bon% they are
seeing.
Noun form.
1. Muntu udi mu ku bona» the person is seeing.
Bantu badi mu ku bona, the people are seeing.
2. Mudilo udi mu ku tenta, the fire is burning.
Midilo idi mu ku tenta, the fires are burning.
&c., &c.
N.6. — This tense indicates that the subject of the verb is at present
actually engaged in doing or sufTering the action. It means literally,
'I am in to see* or '^ I am in seeing* — the mu bemg the preposition in.
Jut as we say^ ' He k in the mA cS doing sa*
L 2
148 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. Present Progressive Tense.
Pronoun form,
Kchi bona, I still see. Tu eM bona, we still see.
XT chi bona, thou still seest. Mu chi bona, you still see.
XT chi bona, he still sees. Ba chi bona, they still see.
Noun form,
1. Montu a chi bona, the person still sees.
Bantu ba chi bona, the people still see.
2. Monzhi u chi budika, the village still appears.
Minzhi i chi budika, the villages still appear.
3. Isamo di chi mena, the tree still grows.
Masamo a chi mena, the trees still grow.
4. Buzune bn ohi uluka, the bird still flies.
Mazune a ohi uluka, the birds still fly.
5. Kutwi ku ohi chisa, the ear still pains.
Matwi a ohi ohisa, the ears still pain.
6. Kashimbi ka ohi sobana, the girl still plays.
Tushimbi tu chi sobana, the girls still play.
7. Ghintu chi chi bonwa, the thing is still seen.
Shintu shi chi bonwa, the things are still seen.
8. Impongo i chi dila, the goat still bleats.
Impongo shi chi dila, the goats still bleat.
9. Lwizhi lu chi yosa, the flood still abates.
Inyizhi shi chi yosa, the floods stiU abate.
9a. Lupidi lu ohi budika, the hill still appears.
Mapidi a ohi budika, the hills still appear.
4* Past Imperfect Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nda ku bona, I was seeing. Twa ku bona, we were seeing.
Wa ku bona, thou wert seeing. Mwakubona, you were seeing.
Wa ku bona, he was seeing. Ba ku bona, they were seeing.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 149
Noun form.
1. Muntu wa ka bona, the person was seeing.
Bantu ba ku bona, the people were seeing.
2. Mnnzhi wa ku bonwa, the village was being seen.
Minahi ya ku bonwa, the villages were being seen.
3. Isamo dia ku mena, the tree was growing.
Masamo a ku mena, the trees were growing.
4. Buzune bwa ku uluka, the bird was flying.
Mazune a ku uluka, the birds were flying.
5. Eutwi kwa ku ohisa, the ear was being painful.
Matwi a ku chisa, the ears were being painful.
6. Kashimbi ka ku sobana, the girl was playing.
Tushimbi twa ku sobana, the girls were playing.
7. Chintu cha ku bonwa, the thing was being seen.
Shintu sha ku bonwa, the things were being seen.
8. Impongo ya ku dila, the goat was bleating.
Impongo sha ku dila, the goats were bleating.
9. Lwimbo Iwa ku imbwa, the song was being sung.
Inyimbo sha ku imbwa, the songs were being sung.
9a. Lupidi Iwa ku budika, the hill was appearing.
Mapidi a ku budika, the hills were appearing.
N.B. — This tense denotes what was being done at some past time. It may
also indicate something that will take place shortly. It is formed by placing
the aorist before the infinitive of the verb.
5. Imperfect Progressive Tense.
To form this simply place chi before the verb in the above
examples. Thus : Kda ku chi bona, I was still seeing.
6. Imperfect Habitual Tense.
Pronoun form.
Nda ku ya bu bona, I was Twa kuyabu bona, we were
going seeing. going seeing.
Wa ku ya bu bona, thou Mwa ku ya bu bona, you
wert going seeing. were going seeing.
Wa ku ya bu bona« he was Ba ku ya bu bona, they were
going seeing. going seeing.
ISO GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Noun form,
I. Munta wa ku ya bu bona, the person was going seeing.
Bantu ba ku ya bu bona, the people were going seeing.
&c., &c.
N.B. — ^The meaning of this tense is best expressed in the English eqniva*
lents given above. It indicates that the two actions of going (in thooght)
and seeing were carried on simultaneously. This tense would be employed
in translating such sentences as : He was going about collecting taxes, wa
ka ya bu lumbuzha.
7. Aoriat Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nda bona, I saw. Twa bona, we saw.
Wa bona, thou sawest. Mwa bona, you saw.
Wa bona, he saw. Ba bona, they saw.
Noun form,
1. Muntu wa bona, the pers(m saw.
Bantu ba bona, the people saw.
2. Munzhi wa budika, the village appeared.
Minzhi ya budika, villages appeared.
3. Isamo dia mena, the tree grew.
ICasamo a mena, the trees grew.
4. Buzune bwa uluka, the bird flew.
Mazune a uluka, the burds flew.
5. Kutwi kwa chiBa, the ear pained.
Matwi a chisa, the ears pained.
6. Eashimbi ka sobana, the girl played.
Tushinibi twa sobana, the girls played.
f . Chintu oha bonwa, the thing was seen.
Shintu sha bonwa, the things were seen.
8. Impongo ya dila, the goat bleated
Impongo sha dila, the goats bleated.
9. Iiwimbo Iwa imbwa, the song was sung.
Inyimbo sha imbwa, the songs were sung.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 151
9a.Iiupidi Iwa budika, the hill appeared
Mai»di a budika, the hills appeared
N.6. — ^Following the example of Kaffir grammartaDS we call this tense
the aozist, hot in Ila it does not always denote what is absolutely past In
Uadt, with slight cha|iges in acoen^ it may express anything, past, present, or
fatnre.
I. It sometimes answers to the English perfect, expressing an action
accomplished, thns : Wa ya, he has gone, i» e. and is still away.
3. Hence it is commonly used with a present meaning. Nda bona,
I see.
3. It is used as an historical past and in narratives follows the preterite
or imperfect ; e. g. Nda ka ma fona, nda ma yovwa, I loved him, I helped
him.
4. With a slight change In accent it has a fnttire meaning : Nda ya, I am
going, or I will go. The explanation of this usage seems to be that the
action though not yet accomplished in fact is accomplished in thought.
8. Aorist FrogressiTe Tense*
To form this simply place ohi between the pronoun and the
verb, thus : Nda ohi bona, I still saw.
9. Aorist Habitual Tense.
This is formed by placing the particle bu between the pro-
noun and verb, thus : Nda ya bu bona, I went or I go seeing.
xo. Fast or Freterite Tense.
Pronoun form*
Hda ka bona, I saw, I did see. Twa ka bona, we did see.
Wa ka bona, or ko bona, Mwa ka bona, you did see.
thou didst see.
Wa ka bona, m- ka bona, he Ba lea bona, or ka ba bona,
did see. they saw, they did see.
Noun form,
1. Muntu wa ka bona, or ka bona, the person did see.
Bantu ba ka bcma, or ka ba bona, the people did see.
2. Mudilo wa ka tenta, or ka tenta, the fire did burn.
Lo ya ka tenta, or ka tenta, the fires did burn.
152 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. Isamo dia ka mena, or ka di mena, the tree did grow.
Masamo a ka mena, or ka mena, the trees did grow.
4. Busline bwa ka iiluka, or ka bu uluka, the bird did fly.
Mazune a ka uluka, or ka uluka, the birds did fly.
5. Kutwi kwa ka chisa, or ka ku chisa, the ear was painful.
Matwi a ka chisa, or ka chisa, the ears were painful.
6. Kashimbi ka ka sobana, the girl played.
Tusbimbi twa ka sobana, (^r ka tu sobana, the girls
played.
7. Cbintu cha ka bonwa, or ka chi bonwa, the thing
was seen.
Shintu 8ha ka bonwa, or ka shi bonwa, the things
were seen.
8. Impongo ya ka dila, or ka dila, the goat did bleat.
Impongo sha ka dila, or ka shi dila, the goats did bleat.
9. Lwimbo Iwa ka imbwa, or ka lu imbwa, the song
was sung.
Inyimbo sha ka imbwa, or ka shi imbwa, the songs
were sung.
9a. Lupidi Iwa ka budika, or Isa Vol budika, the hill did
appear.
Mapidi a ka budika, or ka budika, the hills did appear.
N.B. — This teose denotes what was completely done at some time past.
Notice the two forms according as the particle ka precedes or succeeds the
pronoun. No rule can be given as to when to use the one or the other ; they
can be used alternatively as desired, except that in the relative clauses the
first form is employed. When the verb begins with a vowel changes take
place according to rules given in Chapter II. •
II. Fast Tense: Another Form*
This is formed by means of the particle ka, and the perfect
form of the verb.
Pronoun form,
Chi mbwene, I did see. Ka tu bwene, we did see.
Eo bwene, thou didst see. Ka ma bwene, you did see.
Ka bwene, he did see. Ka ba bwene, they did see.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 153
Noun form.
1. Mttntu ka bwene, the person did see.
Bantn ka ba bwene, the people did see.
2. Munzhi ko bwenwe, the village was seen.
lOnzhi ke bwenwe, the villages were seen.
3. Isamo ka di menene, the tree did grow.
Masamo ka menene, the trees did grow.
4. Buzane ka bu ikilwe, the meat was cooked.
Mazane ka ildlwe, the meats were cooked.
5. Kutwi ka ka ohisile, the ear was painful.
Matwi ka ohisile, the ears were painful.
6. Kashimbi ka ka sobanine, the girl did play.
Tushimbi ka tu sobanine, the girls did play.
7. Chintu ka ohi ehikile, the thing did arrive.
Shinta ka shi shikile, the things did arriv^e.
8. Impongo ka didile, the goat bleated.
Impongo ka ahi didile, the goats bleated.
9. Iiumo ka lu koeolele, the razor cut
Imo ka shi kosolele, the razors cut.
9a. Lupidi ka In budikile, the hill appeared.
Mapidi ka budikile, the hills appeared.
12. Fast ProgressiYe Tense.
This is formed by merely placing ohi before the verb in
No. lOy thus : Nda ka ohi bona, I did still see.
13. Fast Habitual Tense.
The form for this is : !Nda ka ya bu bona, I went seeing.
Muntu wa ka ya bn bona, the person went seeing, &c.
14. Ferfect Tense.
Pronoun form.
Ndi bwene, I have seen. Tudi bwene, we have seen.
Udi bwene, thou hast seen. Mndi bwene, you have seen.
ITdi bwene, he has seen. Badi bwene, they have seen.
154 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Noun form.
1. ICunta udi bwene, the person has seen.
Bantu badi bwene, the people have seen.
2. Mudilo udi tentele, the fire has burnt.
Midilo idi tentele, the fires have burnt
3. Isamo did! menene, the tree has grown.
Masamo adi menene, the trees have grown.
4. Bazune budi ulnkile, the bird has flown.
Mazune adi ulukile, the birds have flown.
5. Eutwi kudi ohisile, the ear is psunful.
Matwi adi chisile, the ears are painfuL
6. Eashimbi kadi sobanine, the girl has played.
Tushinibi tudi sobanine, the girls have played.
7. Chintu chidi bwenwe, the thing has been seen.
Shintu Bbidi bwenwe, the things have been seen.
8. Impongo idi didile, the goat has bleated,
Impongo shidi didile, the goats have bleated.
9. Lumo ludi kosolele, the razor has cut.
Imo shidi kosolele, the razors have cut.
9a. Iiufu ludi shikile, death has arrived.
Mafu adi sbikile, deaths have arrived
N.B. — The perfect tense and those tenses formed from it are the only
ones that are formed by means of suffixes. The general rule is that the
suffix -ile or -ele is suffixed to the root of the verb, but, as in the case of the
relative suffix which it resembles, it undergoes some modification.
Verbs ending in -na take -ine or -ene or -wene,
,, „ -mba take -ene,
„ „ -ama change -ame into -eme,
M „ -ata change -ata into -ete,
,, „ >ala change -ala into -ele.
Intransitive verbs in the perfect tense denote being in a certain state.
Thus, above, kutwi kudi chisile means that the ear is painful. Bantu badi
bambene, the people have arranged themselves side by side and axe now in
that position. Isamo didi chieme, the tree is across.
It will be noticed that the particle di is appended to the pronoun. In
relative clauses this is dropped. Muntu 11 bwene, the person who has
seen, Ace.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 155
See Chapter IV, SectioBS i, 2, lor the uses of verbs is this tense as
adjectiTes.
Certain verbs are used mostly in the perfect form, e.g. kwete (from
kwata), when used in the sense of ' have ' ; fwine from ku fona, to love, &c.
15. PluperflBot Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nda ku bwene, I had seen. Twa kn bwene, we had seen.
Wa ku bwene, thou hadst Mwa ku bwene, you had
seen. seen.
Wa ku bwene, he had seen. Ba ku bwene, they had seen.
Noun form.
1. Muntu wa ku bwene, the person had seen.
Bantu ba ku bwene, the people had seen.
2. Mudilo wa ku tentele, the fire had burnt.
Midilo ya ku tMitele, the fires had burnt.
&c., &c.
N«B.^ — ^This tense indicates something that had taken place before some-
thing else had happened, thns: Chi nta na kn shika nda kn ma bwene,
before I arrived I saw him. It is formed out of the imperfect and perfect
tenses.
16. Perfisct ProgressiYe Tense.
This is formed merely by inserting chi before the verb in the
perfect tense. Muntu u chi bwene, the person has still
seen, &c.
17. Immediate Future Tense.
Pronoun form.
ITdi la bona, I am about to Tu la bona, we are about to
see, I shall see. see, we shall see.
U la bona, thou wilt see, &c. Mu la bona, you will see.
XT la bona, he will see. Ba la bona, they will see.
Noun form.
I. Muntu u la bona, the person will see.
Bantu ba la bona, the people will see.
• 2. Mudilo u la tenta, the fire will burn.
Midilo i la tenta, the fires will burn.
156 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. Isamo di la mena, the tree m\\ grow,
Masamo a la mena, the trees will grow.
4. Buzune bu la uluka, the bird will fly.
Mazune a la uloka, the birds will fly.
5. Kutwi ku la chisa, the ear will pain.
Matwi a la chisa, the ears will pain.
6. Eashimbi ka la sobana, the girl plays.
Tnshimbi tu la bobana, the girls will play.
7. Chintu cM la bonwa, the thing will be seen.
Shintu shi la bonwa, the things will be seen.
8. Impongo i la dila, the goat will bleat.
Impongo shi la dila^ the goats will bleat.
9. Lumo lu la kosola, the razor will cut.
Imo shi la kosola, the razors will cut.
9a. Lupidi lu la budika, the hill will appear.
Mapidi a la budika, the hills will appear.
N.B. — This is a very extensively used tense. It is used with three meanings,
I am about to see, 1 shaU see, I am seeing, &c.
18. Immediate Future Habitual Tense.
The form of this is : Kdi la ya bu bona, I shall go seeing,
I am going seeing, &c.
19. Future Tense (1).
Pronoun form.
Nka la bona, I shall see. Tu ka la bona, we shall see.
IT ka la bona, thou shalt see. Mu ka la bona, you will see.
U ka la bona, he will see. Ba ka la bona, they will see.
Noun form,
1. Muntu u ka la bona, the person shall see.
Bantu ba ka la bona, the people shall see.
2. Mudilo u ka la tenta, the fire will bum.
Midilo i ka la tenta, the fires will burn.
3. Isamo di ka la mena, the tree will grow.
Masamo a ka la mena, the trees will grow.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 157
4. BnzTine bu ka la uluka, the bird will fly.
Maziine a ka la uluka, the birds will fly*
5. Kutwi ku ka la ohisa, the ear will pain.
Matwi a ka la chisa, the ears will pain.
6. Kashimbi ka ka la sobana, the girl will play.
Tushimbi tu ka la sobana, the girls will play.
7. CMnta ohi ka^ la bonwa, the thing will be seen.
Shintu shi ka la bonwa, the things will be seen.
8. Impongo i ka la dila, the goat will bleat.
Impongo shi ka la dila, the goats will bleat.
9. Lumo lu ka la kosola, the razor will cut.
Imo shi ka la kosola, the razors will cut.
9a. Lupidi lu ka la budika, the hill will appear.
Mapidi a ka la budika, the hills will appear.
20. Future Tense (2),
This tense is the same in form as the preterite Kda ka
bona, but with a slightly different pronunciation. The action
to be done is regarded as already done. So, when Baila attempt
to speak Suto, they often say Be tsamaile, we have gone,
when they mean Bea tsamaea, or re tla tsamaea, we are
going, we shall go.
21. Future Tense (3).
This is the same as the aorist, with a slightly different pro-
nunciation, Nda bona, I shall see, &c. The same remarks
apply as above.
22. Future Tense (4).
Pronoun form.
Ndi la ya ku bona, I shall Tu la ya ku bona, we shall
S66. see*
n la ya ku bona, thou wilt Mu la ya ku bona, thou wilt
see. see.
U la ya ku bona, he will see. Ba la ya ku bona, they will
see.
158 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Noun form.
I. Muntu u la ya ku bona, the person will see.
Bantu ba la ya ku bona, the people will see.
&c., &c.
N.B. — ^The literal mesning of Ndi U ya kn bona is, I am going to see.
It indicates something about to happen Texy soon. ,
23. Future Frogrenive Tense.
This is formed by inserting chi before the verb in the first
future tense, thus : Muntu u ka la chi bona^ the person will
still see.
24. Future Habitual Tense.
This is formed from the first future tense by inserting bu
before the verb, thus : Muntu u ka la ya bu bona^ the person
will go seeing.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
I. Fresent Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nka bona, I may or can see. Tu ka bona, we may see, &c.
n ka bona, thou mayest see. Mu ka bona, you may see.
U ka bona, he may see* Ba ka bona, they may see.
Noun form.
1. Muntu u ka bona, the person may see.
Bantu ba ka bona, the people may see.
2. Mudilo u ka tenta, the fire may burn.
Midilo i ka tenta, the fires may burn.
&c., &c.
N.B.~This corresponds to the indicative present ndi bona, ftc, and like
it is fonnd mostly if not solely in relative clauses.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 159
2. Immediate Fature Tense.
Pronoun form.
ITdi la ka bona, I may be Tn la ka bona> we may be
seeing. seeing.
U la ka bona, thou mayest Mu la ka bona, you may be
be seeing. seeing.
XT la ka bona, he may be Ba la ka bona, they may be
seeing. seeing.
Noun form.
1. Muntn u la ka bona, the person may be seeing, or may see.
Bantu ba la ka bona, the people may be seeing, or may see.
2. Mudilo u la ka tenta, the fire may burn.
Midilo i la ka tenta, the fires may bum.
3. Isamo di la ka mena, the tree may grow.
Masamo a la ka mena, the trees may grow.
4- Busnne bu la ka olnka, the bird may fly.
Mazune a la ka oluka, the birds may fly.
5. Eutwi ka la ka ohisa, the ear may pain.
Matwi a la ka ohisa, the ears may pain.
6. Eashimbi ka la ka sobana, the girl may play.
Tnshimbi tn la ka sobana, the girls may play.
7. Chintu obi la ka bonwa, the thing may be seen.
Shintu shi la ka bonwa, the things may be seen.
8. Impongo i la ka fwa, the goat may die.
Impongo shi la ka fwa, the goats may die.
9. Ltuno In la ka sweka, the razor may be lost.
Imo shi la ka sweka, the razors may be lost.
9a. Lupidi lu la ka bndika, the hill may appear.
Mapidi a la ka bndika, the hills may appear.
N.B. — ^This corresponds to the indicative immediate future tense, and like
it, as shown in the above examples, is often used with, a present meaning.
3. Imperfect Tense.
This is formed by inserting the particle ka before the verb in
the indicative imperfect. Thus : Nda ku ka bona, I might or
could see.
i6o GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
4. Perfect Tense.
This is formed by inserting the particle ka before the verb in
the indicative perfect. Thus: Kdi ka bwene, I should or
would have seen.
5. Future Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nka ka bona, it may be I Tu ka ka bona, it may be we
shall see. shall see.
IT ka ka bona, it may be thou Mu ka ka bona, it may be
wilt see. you shall see.
IT ka ka bona, it may be he Ba ka ka bona, it may be
will see. they will see.
Noun form,
I. Muntu u ka ka bona, it may be the person will see.
Bantu ba ka ka bona, it may be the people will see.
&c., &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
For notes on the use of the subjunctive mood, see Chap. XL
t. Present Tense.
Pronoun form.
Mbone, (that) I see. TU bone, (that) we see.
n bone, (that) thou see. MtL bone, (that) you see.
A bone, (that) he see. Ba bone, (that) they see*
Noun form.
1. Muntu u bone, (that) the person see*
Bantu ba bone, (that) the people see.
2. Mudilo u tente, (that) the fire burn.
Midilo i tente, (that) the fires bum.
3. Isamo di mene, (that) the tree grow.
Masamo a mene, (that) the trees grow.
4. Buzune bu uluke, (that) the bird fly.
Mazune a uluke, (that) the birds fly.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB i6i
5. Kutwi ku ohise, (that) the ear pain.
Matwi a chise, (that) the ears pain.
6. Kashimbi ka sobane, (that) the girl play.
Tushimbi tu sobane, (that) the girls play.
7. Chintu ohi bonwe, (that) the thing be seen.
Shintu shi bonwe, (that) the things be seen.
8. Impongo i fwe, (that) the goat die.
Impongo shi twe, (that) the goats die.
9. Lmno lu kosole, (that) the razor cut.
Imo shi kosole, (that) the razors cut.
9a. Lupidi lu budike, (that) the hill appear.
Mapidi a budike, (that) the hills appear.
2. Present Tense: Another Form.
Pronoun form,
Ndu ku bona, (that) I see. Tu ku bona, (that) we see.
U ku bona, (that) thou see. Mu ku bona, (that) you see.
A ku bona, (that) he see. Ba ku bona, (that) they see.
Noun form,
I. Muntu a ku bona, (that) the person see.
Bantu ba ku bona, (that) the people see.
&c., &c.
3. Future Tense.
Pronoun form,
Nka bone, (that) I may see. Tu ka bone, (that) we may
see.
XT ka bone, (that) thou may Mu ka bone, (that) you may
A ka bone, (that) he may see. Ba ka bone, (that) they may
see.
Noun form.
1. Muntu a ka bone, (that) the person may see.
Bantu ba ka bone, (that) the people may see.
2. Mudilo u ka tente, (that) the fire may bum.
Midilo i ka tente, (that) the fires may bum.
1 62 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. Isamo di ka mene, (that) the ti'ee may grow.
Masamo a ka mene, (that) the trees may grow.
4. Buzune ba ka oluke, (that) the bird, may fly.
Mazmie a ka ttluke, (that) the birds may fly.
5. Kashimbi ka ka sobane, (that) the girl may play.
Tushimbi tu ka sobane, (that) the girls may play.
6. Kutwi ku ka chise, (that) the ear may pain.
Matwi a ka chise, (that) the ears may pain.
7. Chintu chi ka bonwe, (that) the thing may be seen.
Shintu shi ka bonwe, (that) the things may be seen.
8. Impongo i ka fwe, (that) the goat may die.
Impongo shi ka fwe, (that) the goats may die.
9. Lumo In ka kosole, (that) the razor may cut.
Imo shi ka kosole, (that) the razors may cut.
9a. Lupidi lu ka budike, (that) the hill may appear.
Mapidi a ka bndike, (that) the hills may appear.
4. Future Temie : Another Fomr.
Pronoun form,
Nka ku bona, (that) I may Tu ka ku bona, (that) we
see. may see.
U ka ku bona, (that) thou Mu ka ku bona, (that) you
may see. may see.
A ka ku bona, (that) he may Ba ka ku bona, (that) they
see. may see.
Noun form,
I. Muntu a ka ku bona, (that) a person may see.
Bantu ba ka ku bona, (that) people may see.
&c., &c.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
I. Present Tense: Simple Form.
Singular : Bona, see thou. Plural: (wanting).
Augmented Form.
This is formed with the help of the auxiliaries Sa> Na> A.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 163
The first is followed by the pronouns and by the verb in its
simple fonn. The two latter particles are followed by the verb
in its subjunctive form.
First form : Ka.
Pronoun form*
Ka nda ya, let me go. Ka ta ya, let us ga
Ko ya (ka u), go thou. Ka mu jra, go ye.
Ea ya (ka a ya), let him go. Ka ba ya, let them go.
Noun form.
1. Muntu ka bona, let the person see.
Bantu ka ba ya, let the people go.
2. Mudilo ko tenta, let the fire burn.
Midilo ke tenta, let the fires bum.
3. Isamo ka di rnena^ let the tree grow.
Masamo ka mena, let the trees grow.
4. Buzone ka bu oluka, let the bird fly.
Mazune ka ulnka, let the birds fly.
5> Eashimbi ka ka sobana, let the girl play.
Tushimbi ka tn sobana, let the girls play.
6. Eutwi ka ku chisa, let the ear pain.
Matwi ka chisa, let the ears pain.
7. Chintu ka chi bonwa, let the thing be seen.
Shintu ka sbi bonwa, let the things be seen,
8. Impongo ke fwa, let the goat die.
Impongo ka shi fwa, let the goats die.
9. Lumo ka In kosola, let the razor cut.
Imo ka shi kosola, let the razors cut.
9a. LupiddL ka lu budika, let the hill appear.
MapiddL ka budika, let the hills appear.
Second form : Na, A.
Pronoun form.
Ki mbone, let me see. Ka, or a, tu bone, let us see.
Ko bone, see thou. Ka, or a, mu bone, see ye.
Ifa 0r a bone, let him see. Ka, or a, ba bone> let them ^ee.
M 2
1 64 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Noun form,
1. Muntu na, or a, bone, let the person see.
Bantu na, or a, ba bone, let the people see.
2. Mudilo no tente, let the fire burn.
Midilo ne tente, let the fires bum.
3. Isamo na, or a, di mene, let the tree grow.
Masamo na, or a, tente, let the trees grow.
4. Buzune na, or a, bu nlnke, let the bird fly.
Maznne na, or a, nluke, let the birds fly.
5. Kutwi na, or a, ku chise, let the ear pain.
Matwi na, or a, chise, let the ears pain.
6. Kashimbi na, or a, ka sobane, let the girl play.
Tnshimbi na, or a, tu sobane, let the girls play.
7. Chintn na, or a, chi bonwe, let the thing be seen.
Shintu na, or a, shi bonwe, let the things be seen.
8. Impongo ne fwe, let the goat die.
Impongo na shi fwe, let the goats die.
9. Liuno na In kosole, let the razor cut.
Imo na shi kosole, let the razors cut.
9a. Lupidi na lu budike, let the hill appear.
Mapidi na, or a budike, let the hills appear.
2. Future Tense.
This is formed by means of the future subjunctive preceded
by the particle a. Thus : A tu ka bone, let us see ; a mu ka
bone, do ye see, &c.
Sect. 2. NEGATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
I. Ftesent Tense.
Pronoun form,
Shi boni, I do not see. Ta tu boni, we do not see.
To (ta u) boni, thou dost not Ta mu boni, you do not see.
see.
Ta boni (ta a), he does not see. Ta ba boni, they do not see.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 165
Noun form.
1. Muntu ta (ta a) boni, the person does not see.
Bantu ta ba boni, the people do not see.
2. Mudilo to (ta u) tenti, the fire does not bum.
Hidilo te (ta i) tenti, the fires do not bum.
3. Isamo ta di meni, the tree does not grow.
Masamo ta meni, the trees do not grow.
4. Boztme ta bu uluki, the bird does not fly.
Maziine ta uluki, the birds do not fly.
5. Kutwi ta ku chisi, the ear does not pain.
Matm ta ohisi, the ears do not pain.
6. Kashimbi ta ka sobani, the girl does not play.
Tushimbi ta tu sobani, the girls do not play.
7. Chintu ta ohi bonwi, the thing is not seen.
Shintu ta shi bonwi, the things are not seen.
8. Impongo te (ta i) fWi, the goat does not die.
Impongo ta shi fwi, the goats do not die.
9. Lomo ta lu kosodi, the razor does not cut
Imo ta shi kosodi, the razors do not cut.
9a. Lupidi ta lu budiki, the hill does not appear.
Mapidi ta budiki, the hills do not appear.
2. Present Tense : * Not Yet ' Form.
Pronoun form.
Shi na ku bona, I have not Ta tu na ku bona, we have
yet seen. not yet seen.
To na ku bona, thou hast not Ta mu na ku bona, you have
yet seen. not yet seen.
Ta na ku bona, he has not Ta ba na ku bona, they have
yet seen. not yet seen.
Noun form,
1. Muntu ta na ku bona, the person has not yet seen.
Bantu ta ba na ku bona, the people have not yet seen.
2. Mudilo to na ku tenta, the fire has not yet burnt.
Midilo te na ka tenta^ the fires have not yet burnt
166 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
3. Isamo ta di na ka mena, the tree has not yet grown.
ICasamo ta na kti mena, the trees have not yet gtown.
4. Buzune ta bn na kn uluka, the bird has not yet flown.
Mazune ta na ku uluka, the birds have not yet flown.
5. Kutwi ta ku na ku ohisa, the ear has not yet pained.
Matwi ta na ku ohiBa^ the ears are not yet painful.
6. Kashimbi ta ka na ku Bobana, the girl has hot yet played.
Tushimbi ta ta na ku sobana, the girls have not yet
played.
7. Chintu ta obi na ku bonwa^ the thing is not yet seen.
Shintu ta shi na ku bonWa, the things are not yet seen.
8. Impongo te na ku fwa, the goat is not yet dead.
Impongo ta Bhi na ku fwa^ the goats are not yet dead.
9. Lumo ta lu na ku kosola, the razor has not yet out.
Imo ta shi na ku kOBOla, the razors have not yet cut.
9a. Lupidi ta lu na ku budika, the hill has not yet appeared.
Mapidi ta na ku budika, the hills have not yet appeared.
N.B. — This tense indicates that the action etpressed by the verb is
incomplete and still going on, e. g. Keinbe kangu kadi kwi? Shi na ku ka
bona, where is my axe ? I have not yet seen it, i. e* I am still locking for it.
So that while by the English equivalent it seems to be a perfect tense^ it is
really a present incomplete tense.
3. Perfect Tense.
Pronoun form.
Shi bwene, I haSre not seen. 47atubwene,'^ehavenots^en.
To bwene, thou hast not seen. Ta mu bwene, you have not
seen.
Ta bwene, he has not seen. Ta ba bwene, they have not
seen.
Noun form.
I. Muntu ta bwene, the person has not seen.
Bantu ta ba bwene, the people have not seen.
&c., &c.
N.B. — This tense is formed from the affirinati've perfect indicative by
placing before it the negative particle ta, the copula di being omitted.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 167
4. Perfect Tense: Second Form.
Prtmaun form.
Ndina (pr nina) kn bona, t *!Fwina kti bona, we have not
have not seen. seen.
IT ina kn bona, thou hast not Mwina ku bona, you have
seen. not seen.
IT ina ku bona, he has hot Ba ina ku bona, they have
seen. not seen.
Noun form,
1. Mnntu u ina ku bona, the person has not seen.
Bantu ba ina ku bona, the people have not seen.
2. Mudilo u ina ku tenta, the fire has not burnt.
Midilo i na ku tenta, the fires have not burnt.
&c., &c.
N.B. — Literally Mnntu n ina ku bona means ' the person has no seeing*,
the particle ina being the verb kwina, ' to be not, to have not.* The tense
carries either a perfect or a present meaning, < the man has not seen, he does
ndt iee^* Notioe tllc coalescence of vowels.
5. Aorist Tense.
This is formed frotn the affirmative aorist indicative by
placing ta before it. But in the ist per. sing, we have Shi bona,
not Ta nda bona, and the pronouns throughout are not the
long -a forms but the short u, di, &c. Coalescence of vowels
takes place just as in the present negative.
6. Imperfect Tense.
Pronoun form.
Ndi na uku bona, I was not Twina uku bona, we were
seeing. not seeing.
U ina uku bona, thou wert Mwina uku bona, you were
not seeing. not seeing.
TJ ina uku bona, he was not 3a ina uku bona, they were
seeing. not seeing.
i68 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Noun form,
I. Muntu u ina uku bona, the person was not seeing.
Bantu ba ina uku bona, the people were not seeing.
&c., &c.
N.B. — This tense is very similar in fonn to the second form of the
perfect, ndina kn bona, &c., the only difference being that u is placed before
the infinitive particle, ku. This u is probably a form of ku.
7. Past Tense (i).
This is formed similarly to the imperfect, the only difference
being that instead of the particle uku before the verb we find
uka. Thus : Ndi na uka bona, I did not see ; Twina uka
bona, we did not see.
8. Fast Tense (2).
Pronoun form.
Ndi ne nda ka bona, I did Twina nitwaka bona, we did
not see. not see.
IT ina ni wa ka bona, thou Mwina ni mwa ka bona,
didst not see. you did not see.
IT ina na a ka bona, he did Ba ina ni ba ka bona, they
not see. did not see.
Nounform,
1. Muntu u ina na a ka bona, the person did not see.
Bantu ba ina ni ba ka bona, the people did not see.
2. Mudilo u ina ni wa ka tenta, the fire did not burn.
Midilo i na ni ya ka tenta, the fires did not burn.
3. Buzune bwina ni bwa ka uluka, the bird did not fly.
Mazune a ina ni a ka uluka, the birds did not fly.
4. Isamo di na ni dia ka mena, the tree did not grow.
Masamo a ina ni a ka mena, the trees did not grow.
5. Kutwi kwina ni kwa ka chisa, the ear did not pain.
Matwi a ina ni a ka chisa, the ears did not pain.
6. Kashimbi ka ina ni ka ka sobana, the girl did not play.
Tushimbi twina ni twa ka sobana, the girls did not play.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 169
7. Chintu ohi na ni cha ka bonwa, the thing was not seen.
Shintu shina ni sha ka bonwa, the things were not seen.
'8. Impongo ina ni ya ka fwa, the goat did not die.
Impongo shi na ni Bha ka fwa, the goats did not die.
9. Lumo Iwina ni Iwa ka kosola, the razor did not cut.
Imo shina ni sha ka kosola, the razors did not cut.
9a. Lnpidi Iwina ni Iwa ka bndika, the hill did not appear.
Mapidi a ina ni a ka budika, the hills did not appear.
9. Past Tense (3).
Pronoun form.
Chi nta boni, I did not see. Ka tu ta boni, we did not see.
Eo ta boni, thou didst not Ka mn ta boni, you did not
see. see.
E!a ta boni, he did not see. Ka ba ta boni, they did not
S>C6.
Nounfortn.
1. Muntu ka ta boni, the person did not see.
Bantu ka ba ta boni, the people did not see.
2. Mudilo ko ta tenti, the fire did not burn.
Midilo ke ta tenti, the fires did not burn.
3. Isamo ka di ta meni, the tree did not grow.
Masamo ka ta meni, the trees did not grow.
4. Bazime ka bu ta ulnki, the bird did not fly.
Mashine ka ta nlnki, the birds did not fly.
5. Kntwi ka ku ta chisi, the ear did not pain.
Matwi ka ta chisi, the ears did not pain.
6. Kashimbi ka ka ta sobani, the girl did not play.
TxLshimbi ka tu ta sobani, the girls did not play.
\* Chintu ka chi ta bonwi, the thing was not seen.
Shintu ka shi ta bonwi, the things were not seen.
B. Impongo ke ta fwi, the goat did not die.
Impongo ka shi ta fWi, the goats did not die.
9. Lumo ka lu ta kosodi, the razor did not cut.
Imo ka shi ta kosodi, the razors did not cut.
170 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
9a. Lupidi ka lu ta bndiki, the hill did not appear.
Mapidi ka ta bndiki, the hills did not appear.
10. Past Tense — 'Ifot Yet' Form.
Pronoun/arm.
Chi nta na ku bona, I had Ka tu na ku bona, we had
not yet seen. not yet seen.
Ko ta na kn bona, thou Ka mu ta na ka bona, you
hadst not yet seen. had not yet seen.
Ka ta na ka bona, he had Ka ba ta na ka bona, they
not yet seen. had not yet seen.
Noun/orm.
1. Monta ka ta na ka bona, the person had not yet seen.
Banta ka ba ta na ka bona, the people had not yet seen.
2. Madilo ko ta na ka tenta, the fire had not yet burnt.
Midilo ke ta na ka tenta, the fires had not yet burnt.
3. Isamo ka di ta na ka mena, the tree had not yet grown.
Masamo ka ta na ka mena, the trees had not yet grown.
4. Bazune ka ba ta na ka olaka, the bird had not yet
flown.
Mazime ka ta na ka tilaka, the birds had ^ot yet flown.
5. Katwi ka ka ta na ka ohisa, the ear had not yet pained.
Matwi ka ta na ka chisa, the ears had not yet pained.
6. Kashimbi ka ka ta na ka sobana, the girl had not yet
played.
Tashimbi ka ta na ka sobana, the girls had not yet
played.
7. Chinta ka chi ta na ka bcmwa, the thing had not yet
been seen.
Shinta ka shi ta na ka bonwa, the things had not yet
been seen.
8. Impongo ke ta na ka fwa, the goat had not yet died.
Impongo ka shi ta na kafwa, the goats had not yet died.
9. Lamo ka la ta na ka kosola, the razor had not yet cut.
Imo ka shi ta na ka kosola, the razors had not yet cut.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 171
9a. Lupidi ka In ta na ka bndika, the hill had not yet
appeared.
Mapidi ka ta 2llk ka bndika, the hills had not yet
appeared.
N.B. — This teiot indicate* an action that in the part Was not yet com-
plete but still going on. It can often be best translated by means of the word
' before % e. g. Nda ka shika wezo ka ta na ka badika, I arrived before he
appeared, lit. he had not yet appeared.
11. FlajMrftet Tens*.
Prondun/brfit.
Shi na ka bwetid, I had )iot ¥a ta Ha ka bWen^, we had
seen. not seen.
To na ka bwene, thou hadst Ta mn na ka bwene, you
not seen. had not seen.
Ta na ka bw^e, he had not Ta ba na ka bwene, they had
seen. not seen.
Noun/brm.
I. Muntu ta na ka bwene, the person had not seen.
Bantu ta ba na ka bwene, the people had not seen.
&c., &c.
N.B. — A native will say that Shi na ka bwene, &c, expresses inrprise ;
Std na ka bwene chintn chidi bodlft, I had not seen Ikueh a things I have
never before seen such a thing.
12. Tntiu^e Tense (i).
Pronounform,
Shi nti mboni, I shall not Ta tu ti tu boni, We shall
see. not see.
To ti a boni, thou shalt not Ta mn ti mu boni, you fihall
see. not see.
Ta ti a boni^ he shall not Ta ba ti ba boni, they shall
see. not see.
Noun form.
I. Mnnttt ta ti a boni, the person shall )iot see.
Bantu ta ba ti ba boni^ the people shall not see.
172 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
2. Mudilo to ti u tenti, the fire shall not burn.
Midilo te ti i tenti, the fires shall not burn.
3. Isamo ta di ti di meni, the tree will not grow.
Masamo ta ti a meni, the trees shall not grow.
4. BuLZtme ta bu ti bu uluke, the bird will not fly.
Mazune ta ti a meni, the birds will not fly.
5. Kntwi ta ku ti ku chisi, the ear will not pain.
Matwi ta ti a chisi, the ears will not pain.
6. Kashimbi ta ka ti ka sobani, the girl will not play.
Tushimbi ta tu ti ta sobani, the girls will not play.
7. Chinta ta chi ti chi bonwi, the thing will not be seen.
Shintu ta shi ti shi bonwi, the things will not be seen.
8. Impongo te ti i fwi, the goat will not die.
Impongo ta shi ti shi fwi, the goats will not die.
9. Lnmo ta lu ti lu kosodi, the razor will not cut.
Imo ta shi ti shi kosodi, the razors will not cut.
9a. Lupidi ta lu ti lu budiki, the hill will not appear.
Mapidi ta ti a budiki, the hills will not appear.
13. Future Tense (2).
Pronoun/orm,
Ndi na ni nka bona, I shall Twina ni tu ka bona, we
not see. shall not see.
IT ina ni u ka bona, thou Mwina ni mu ka bona, you
wilt not see, will not see.
U ina ni a ka bona, he will Ba ina ni ba ka bona, they
not see. will not see.
Noun form,
1. Muntu u ina ni a ka bona, the person will not see.
Bantu ba ina ni ba ka bona, the people will not see.
2. Mudilo u ina ni u ka tenta, the fire will not bum.
Midilo i na ni i ka tenta, the fires will not bum.
3. Buzune bwina ni bu ka uluka, the bird will not fly.
MaziLne a ina ni a ka uluka^ the birds will not fly.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 173
4. Isamo di na ni di ka mena, the tree will not grow.
Masamo a ina ni a ka mena, the trees will not grow.
5. Kutwi kwina ni ka ka chisa, the ear will not pain.
Matwi a ina ni a ka chisa, the ears will not pain.
6. Kashimbi ka ina ni ka ka sobana, the girl will not play.
Tnshimbi twina ni ta ka sobana, the girls will not play.
7. Chinta ta chi na ni ohi ka bonwa, the thing will not be
seen.
Shintu Shi na ni 8hi ka bonwa, the things will not be
seen.
8. Impongo i na ni i ka fwa, the goat will not die.
Impongo shi na ni shi ka fwa, the goats will not die.
9. Lumo Iwina ni la ka kosola, the razor will not cut.
Imo shi na ni shi ka kosola, the razors will not cut.
9a. Lapidi Iwina ni la ka badika, the hill will not appear.
1 Mapidi a ina ni a ka badika, the hills will not appear.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
I. Present Tense.
Pronoun form.
Shi ka boni, I may not see, Ta ta ka boni, we may not
&c. see, &c.
To ka boni, thou mayest not Ta ma ka boni, you may not
see, &c. see, &c.
Ta ka boni, he may not see, Ta ba ka boni, they may not
&C. see, &c.
Noun form,
I. Monta ta ka boni, the person may not see, &c.
Banta ta ba ka boni, the people may not see, &c.
&c., &c.
N.B. — This tense is sometimes used as a future indicative, I shall not see.
174 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
a. FatQve Texme^
Pronoun form^
Shi ka ka boni, it may be^ I Ta ta ka ka bom, it m^i^ be
shall not see. we shall not see.
To ka ka boni, it may be tl^ Ta mu ka ka boni, it may be
shalt not see. you will not see.
Ta ka ka boni, it may he he Ta ba ka ka bonl^ it may be
will not see. they will not see.
Noun form,
I. Muntu ta ka ka boni, it may be the person wiU not see.
Bantu ta ba ka ka boni, it may be the people will not see.
&c.| &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
I. Pir^ae^li Texiae,
Pronoun form.
lEfl'ta boni, (that) I see not. Ta ta boni, (that) we see not.
U ta boni, (that) thou see not. Mu ta boni, (that) you see not.
A ta boni, (that) he see not. Bata boni, (that) they see not.
Noun form.
I. Muntu a ta boni, (that) the person see not.
Bantu ba ta boni, (that) the people see not.
%. Future Tense.
Pronoun form.
19'ta ka boni (that) I may not Tu ta ka boni, (that) we may
see. not see.
U ta ka boni, (that) thou Mu ta ka boni, (that) you
mayest not see. may not see.
A ta ka boni, (that) he may Ba ta ka boni» (that) they
not see. may not see.
Noun form,
I. Muntu a ta ka boni, (that) the person may not see.
Bantu ba ta ka boni, (that) the people may not see.
&c., &c.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB 175
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Preaent TenciQ: Simple Form.
U tft boni {or u ta bona), thou must not see.
Mu ta boni {or mu ta bona), you must not see.
Augnunted Form,
XT ta ku bona, you must not Mu taka bona, you must not
see. see.
A ta kn bona, he must not Ba ta ku bona, they must not
occ see.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Ein t% boni, not to see.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER VIL
Szeroise 1.
Translate into Ila :^^
Come and tell me all the news which you were hearing yester-
day. We did not hear any news. He has not yet arrived ; as
soon as be arrives I will tell him what you say. Why did you
lie to me ? Did you not know that I find out all you do ? Your
ddngs will be known abroad^ You cannot deceive me or any
one else. We built this house last year. It is not yet plastered
because I have had much other work. That grass of yours will
all rot if you leave it outside. When will the rain arrive ? It
may come next month. Have you not yet finished your fields ?
We have not yet finished, the women are still working there
now. We may finish when the moon is seen. Before he came
here he was a bad man, now he has abandoned his evil ways.
I saw him when he was still a child, he has now grown much.
Go ye and work much ; if you work hard I will give you much
Jnoney, but if you are lazy you will find only a little money.
I don't give lazy folk much money. The people I want to work
176 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
for me are they who are clever. I don't want those who can
only carry. You must not hurry over your work, do it very
nicely indeed. This is where you will dig ; when you have
done, come and tell me. Do you see this Stick ? Measure the
hole with it ; when you have arrived so far stop digging. We
are going to the forest to gather firewood.
Exercise 2.
Translate into Ua : —
My house is not far off ; come ye all and let us eat some milk
together. That child has the pot which I want. Bring it here
to me. Let me take your child with me. The police have
found the man whom they have been seeking ; he was hiding in
the forest. We will not do this work, it is troublesome. He
got up very early and went to look for his goat which was
lost. If you leave very early you may arrive l)efore sunset. If
you don't bend down very much the game will see you. We
are still sitting here in the shade because the sun is very hot to-
day. I have not yet seen the thing which you told me to find.
Let us see who can do this work. Approach closely that I may
see you well. That man does not see ; he is blind. The herd-
boy was not watching his flock yesterday, he left them and sat
by the fire all day. Before the men had arrived we built a house
for them. Go ye into my garden and hoe ; you must not pluck
the fruit of the trees. The chief is in the act of eating ; we
cannot disturb him now. The gun did not break as you said.
They did not beat me. We will go to-morrow morning. You
must learn that you may not grow up a fool. We were going
visiting everywhere among our friends. He does not understand
that if he does not work he will get no wages.
Exercise 3.
Translate into English : —
Ing ombe shonse a shi vhwe mu chimpata. Nchi nda ka langa
nchi chechi ; kambo nzhi kwina ku ndetela ? Muntu wezu u
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 177
ina uku miana kabotu midimo yakwe. Ko ya ku abele : u ka
mu shimwine ati, a ta chita kabotu ta ti a yane madi akwe. Wa
amb'ati nda ka mu lemezha, anokuti wa pewa chintu chishonto
budio. Bantu babo ka ba ta na ku shika kono ka ba shiti kwi ?
Mwami nda mana ku sha roadindi azo ngu wa nshimwina. Ko ya,
uwe, u ka bwele ku midimo yako ; u ka la sha mani nku leshe.
Uwe, ko swezha mozo ku diiya mu chikolo : wa ta chita bobo u
la ba muntu mudimbushi budio. Chi nta ma shimwini bobo.
Bantu ba ina ni ba ka shika mwezhi weno : antela ba la ka shika
mwezhi umwi. A mu zhingashile bubona mbu twa ma lazha kale
kale : usunu a mu chite bubona bobo. A mu pele chinichini ati
nta ka boni itomba na kashonto.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
A Tale of a Fool.
Wa ka ita mwenzu ku chishi chimwi. A shike a munzhi
umwi wa buzha ati : ' Ezhi inzhila i la ya kwi ? ' Ba ingula ati :
' Ila ya koko ku minzhi.' ' Sa ku ku vhwa basazhima ? ' Bamwi
ba ingula, ati: '£.' *No inzhila pele ezhi idi yomwi?' Ba
amb'ati: 'Pe, shidi shobili. We enda, we enda, wa shika a
mampanda a nzhila, u ka tole ya chimonswe, u ka pinuke,^ u ka
tole njiyo.' Wa ya, a shike budio a mampanda a nzhila wa pinuka,
wo ona. * Bwa ko onena, bwa ko onena, dimwi bamwi bantu
ba shika, ba yana udi lele, ba amb'ati : * Wezo muntu wa fwa,
na u la langa, ' na wa ba nzhi ? * Dimwi ba umbusha, ba yana
kamwi ku Iwiya ^ wa bumbwa o mulanzhi. Ba umbuzha ati :
* Kambo nzhi nku onena mwinzhila V Ati : ' Nda ona ukuti ba
amb'ati : wa ka shika a mampanda a nzhila, u ka pinuke u ka
tole ya chimonswe : oya chidio ' u ke leke.' Ngonao basongo
ba umbuzha, ati : * No ya chidio njidi kwi o ya chimonswe ? '
Walo wa ingula, ati: 'Shi zhi mazhila.' Ngonao ba mu
shimwina, ati : ' Oya chidio nji ezhL Oya chimonswe nji ezhi.'
Ngonao ba amb'ati : * Zhimoka tu ku ya.' Ni ba shika ku
nuinzhi ku bantu ba ka ba shimwina, ati : ' Wezo muntu mu«
N
178 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
diinbushi ngu mwa ka shimwina inzhila, a shike budio a mam-
panda a nzhila walo wa pinuka wo ona, mbu mwa ka atnb'ati: wa
ka shika a mampanda a nzhila u ka pinuke/ Ngonao obu«
disuno obudisuno ta ba mu luba wezo muntiL Banichi o
bana o bakando ba amb*ati : 'Wezo muntu kadi mudimbushi.'
Ngonao inshi yonse wa ya impuwo, ati : ' Weso muntu kadi
mudimbushi mwihimwini. Mudimbushi owa ka tewa atit
wa shika a mampanda a nzhila u ka pinuke u ka tole i ya
chimonswe. Walo a shike, wa pinuka, wo ona mani wa bumbwa
o mulanzhi. Budimbushi bwalo/
Notes. — * The point of this tale hangs upon the two meanings of the
word pinuka; the man was told to turn and take the road to the right,
whereas he took them to mean he was to turn aside and sleep. 'Bwa
ko onena, as he was sleeping, ' Na wa ba nzhi? or what is he? lit. what
has he become ? ^ Wa bumbwa o mulanzhi, he was moulded by white
ants, i. e. they had built their tunnels upon him. ' U ke leke a u ka
i leke.
The Elephant and the Wart-Hog.
Shankde mwiwa wa muzovu. Chi be budio chindi ba ya ku
menzhi : ba shike budio muzovu wa amb'ati : * Nguni u ka
tanguna ku nwa menzhi ? ' Ushankole wa amb'ati : ' Ndime
nka tangune achisha.' Ngonao shankole we njila mwizhiba ku
nwa menzhi. A mane ku nwa menzhi, * muzovu udi zhimine
a muma, wa kanda menzhi : Wa mana ku a kanda wa amba :
^ Kweza inzho, u nwe, achisha.* Muzovu * wa nwa o ku nwa.
A mane ku nwa musundu wa mu luma kwitashi. A lange bodia
wa amb'ati : ' Chechi cha nduma chi kushe.' Musundu to vh wi ko^
A kakutula, a kakatule, musundu to vhwi. Dimwi wa ka kanka
ku uma kwisamo : musundu to vhwi ko. U la umputa, musundu
to vwi ko. Dimwi dia kanka itashi ku vhwa buloa. Muzovu
u la umputa. Walo musundu mbwa ka lumina dimwi itashi dia
konoka. U la umputa. Dimwi itashi dia zhimba. Musundu
to vhwi ko. Dimwi muzovu wa zowa, wa amb'ati : * Wezo
mupuka ta ku vwi kwitashi diangu.' Dimwi itashi dia bola«
Muzovu u la umputa. Shi vhule inshiku budio, dimwi muzovu
ILA TALES FOR tRANSLATlON 17^
ii^fwft. Ushankole wa amb'ati: 'Uachisha wa fwa. *Ndiine
mokando inzho mbwa fwa achisha.' Odimwi wa sowa, wa
amb'ati: 'Na ndime nda ka bisha inenzhi nda ku tanguna ku
nwa ? Musondu ngu a ka mu liuna, nambuti ? ' Ngonao ba
andana. Muzovu wa tola meya makando : ushankole wa tola
meya a kozhana a muzovu. Ngonao shankole wa amba : * Ngu
achisba u zbalwa o bama*' Ngonao ba andana. Muzovu wa
kula, shankole wa fwimpa. Kwalo kukozhana ba la kozhana :
mubidi o boza ^ i^ shankole na ngu muzovu chintu chomwL
Wa langa meya a shankole a muzovu onse a la tuba« O boza
bu la kozhana o mubidi chintu chomwi.
Notes. — ^ The elephant standing on the bank. * He drank and drank.
' I am the elder now as my nncle is dead. * It is the wart-hog or it is
the elephant one thing, i. e. they are the same.
The Woman who wanted a Husband.
Inzho mukaintu wa bula mulombwana, wa amb'ati : ' Nda bula
mulombwana a ntwale/ Inzho ba mu shimwina,ati : ' Mbu wa bula
mulombwana u ka teme tusamo tushontoshonto, u ka luke izhizhi.
Wa ka mana ku luka u ka ye ku mulonga. Wa shika u ka zele
ku mulonga. Inzho u la ka yaya mubondo. Wa rou yaya, * mu
lete ku munzhi. U lange intesho inkando, u ka mu bike mo, u ka
hunike o. Wa ka hununa ^ u la yana wa ba muntu. Inzho u la
bona mulombwana.' Mukaintu wa ya ku zela mubondo. Wa ka
bona bantu ba vhwa a munzhi, wa ya ku hununa : muntesho wa
langa mo, mubondo wa ba muntu. Wa amb'ati : ' U ta njika.
' Ndi muntu. ^ Bodia mbwina mulombwana twala ome. Odimwi
ome kudya kwangu 'shi dyi maila, nda dya michelo ya bapombo.
We dya aze nda bwela u menzhi, to ka mboni dinji.' Ngonao
mukaintu wa vumina. Chi be budio chindi mukaintu we ba
michelo yakwe. A zhoke budio mulombwana wa hula, wa
amb'ati : * Michelo wangu te zudile. We ba mukaintu.' Wa
lutila, ati : *Mbu wa dya chidyo changu ome nda bwela u menzhi.'
Inzho pele mukaintu bwa cha wa bweza iamba diakwe, wa shia
mulombwana a munzhi. Mukaintu wa zhoka mu kudima, wa
N 2
i8o GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
shika wa hununa 'mwa kala mulombwana, inzho wa yana
mulombwana wa vhwa mo muntesha Inzho wa amb'ati:
' Nda bwela kwakwesu, mbu wa dya shidyo shangu/ Mukaintu
wa amb'ati : * Tu la ya aze.' Inzho wa shika ku menzhi,
mulombwana we njila mo* Wa amb'ati : * Nda bwela. Uwe
mukaintu u la bona banji balombwana.' Walo wa ya mu
menzhi a kwabo. Mukaintu a lange a lange, to mboni dinji.
Notes. — ^ Ma lete a ma lete, bring him. * You will find he has become
R man. * I am a peison. * As yoa have no man mairy me. * I do not
eat. * Where he sat.
CHAPTER VIII
IRREGULAR VERBS; THE VERBS *TO BE'
AND *T0 HAVE'; VERBS USED
IDIOMATICALLY
Sect. i. IRREGULAR VERBS.
Therk are certain verbs beginning with a vowel which it is
necessary to regard separately from others on account of varia-
tion in form and conjugation. They are as follows : Ku ita,
to call ; ka eza, to come ; ka iba, to steal; ku izhi, to know.
In the infinitive of these verbs the u of the particle coalesces
with the initial short vowel to form w. Thus, instead of the
above, we write : Kwita, kweza, kwiba, kwizkL
The same form is found in the imperative : —
Ka u ita becomes ko ita which becomes kwita.
ka u eza „ ko eza „ kweza.
ka u iba „ ko iba „ kwiba.
ka u izhi ^y ko izhi „ kwizhi.
When these verbs are preceded by any particle or pronoun
ending in u, the u becomes w as above, and the two words are
written as one. Thus : —
Ba la mu ita becomes ba la mwita.
Shi mu izhi „ shi mwizhi.
When, however, the preceding vowel ends in a, the process of
contraction takes place, i.e. a+i = e* The resulting word is
written as two not one. Thus : —
Ba la ita becomes ba le ta not ba leta.
Ba la izhi „ ba le zhi „ ba lezhi.
Ta ba izhi „ ta be zhi „ ta bezhi.
Mu ta ibe „ mu te be „ mu tebe.
Kabaiza „ kabeza„ka beza.
i82 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The verb kn ina, to be not, to have not, is an exception to
this. In the infinitive it is written and pronounced kwina, but
when preceded by a particle ending in a no contraction takes
place. Thus: —
Ba ina ahidyo, tb^ have no food; noi^ be na shklyo*
The Y^bs kwita and kwiba require no further remarks, but
kweza and kwizhi are so irregular in conjugation that we give
their principal tenses here. The peculiar thing about them is
that they have. more than one Ibrin.
Kwisla or k^pnzhislu or ku zltiba or kwishiba, to know.
Kwesa or kwiza or ka wt% to come.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS KWIZHI AND KWEZA.
Indioatiye KLood.
Preu$U Tensi.
Aff. ist p. NdisM, or ndizhiihL Nde za^ or nde eiaa.
3rd p. U di Bhiy W0 Shi, or W& aa, or we zisa.
udixliizlii.
Neg. ist pi. SM zhi or shi zhizhi. Shi zi, or shi zisi.
3rd p. To zhi, or te zhizhL Te zi, oriA zizi.
Present Tense.— ' Not Yet:
Neg.xiX^. Shi na kwizhiba. Shi na kwiza.
3rd p. Ta na kwizhiba. Ta na kwiza.
Perfect Tense*
^/: istp. Ndi zhibile. Hdi zile.
3rd p. TJdi zhibile. TJdi zile.
Neg. ist p. Shi zhibile. Shi zile.
3rd p. Te zhibile. Te zile.
Aorist Tense.
Aff. ist p. Nde zhiba. Nde za, or nde ziza.
3rd p. We zhiba. We za, or we ziza.
Neg, ist p. Shi zhiba. Shi ziza.
3rd p. Te zhiba. Te ziza.
IRREGULAR VERBS 183
Imperfect Tense,
Aff. 1st p. Kdakwizhi. Kdakwiza.
3Fd p. W% kwishi. Wa kwisa.
Neg.1^1^ Ndi na ukwiehi, or Ndinaukwisa, oruku
uku zhiba. lisa.
3rd p. IT ina ukwizM, or U ina ukwiza, or
tiku shiba. oka siBa.
Putt Tense.
Aff. ist p. Nda ke zhi, or ahiba. Kda ke za, or liia.
3rd p. Wa ke zMt or ihiba. Wa ke aa, or ziza.
Neg. 1st p« Ohi nte ahi, or ikiihi. CM nte si. or ohi nte
ziza.
3rd p. Ea te ihii Ka te si, or ka te siza.
Future Tenie.
Aff, I St p. Nde zMba, (?r nda ka 19'de siza, or nda ke
zhiba. ziza.
3rd p. We zhiba, or wa ka We ziza, (tt wa ka ziza.
zhiba.
JVeg. I St p. Shi ka ishibi, or shi Shi ke ziza, or shi ke
ke zhi. zi.
3rd p. Ta ke zhibi. Ta ke zi.
Subjunotiye Mood.
Present Tensi*
Aff. I St p. Nzhibe. Nze, nzize.
3rd p. E zhibe. E ze, e ziza
Nieg. ist p. Nte zhibi Nte zizi.
3rd p. A te zhibi. A te zize.
Imperative Mood.
Present Tense.
Aff. 2nd p. Eo zhiba. Eo ziza.
3rd p. Ee zhiba. Ee ziza.
A^^. 2nd p. XJ ta kwizhiba. XJ ta kwiziza.
3rd p. A ta kwizhiba. A ta kwiziza.
i84 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Notice that the 2nd person plur. imperative of kweza is zeni,
come ye. This is the only verb in Ila which takes a suffix to
denote this tense. In other Bantu languages it is the rule for
all verbs : so Zulu : hambani, go ye ; Suto : tsamaeang, go ye ;
Swahili : pendani, love ye.
Sect. 2. THE VERB ' TO BE '.
The verb ku ba means to be^ or 'rather, to become. As it is
conjugated Hke other verbs there is no need to give a separate
paradigm. The following sentences will show how it is used,
and further examples are given in the next chapter of its use in
forming the copula.
A mu zake ng'anda imwi shi be sbobili, build ye another
house that they be two.
Inzho oha ba chibanda, then there was peace.
IT la yana wa ba muntn, you will find he has become
a man.
Na wa ba nzhi P How is he ? ///. he has become what ?
Mbe muzhike wake, let me be thy slave.
Tudi elele ku ba basongo, we must be wise.
Miaka yako i be Tninjiminji, may thy years be many.
Ni mba mudimbushi mu ta ku xijaya^ although I become a
fool you must not kill me.
tfumoni no be o, let there be light.
The particle di also largely represents our verb * to be '. Its
use is fully illustrated in the next chapter. For convenience'
sake it is appended to the personal pronoun.
Sect. 3.— THE VERB * TO HAVE '.
The particle di is often used to express the verb to have^
especially in relative clauses. Thus : —
Wezo muntu udi insana, that man has strength,
Badi kwi bantu babo badi milandup Where are those
people who have faults ?
THE VERB «T0 HAVE' 185
In other sentences di is used with o. Thus : —
Usunu ba di o oholwe : To-day they have good luck, UL they
are with.
The negative of this is the verb kwina, to have not, to he not.
This is used in a limited way, not in all tenses. Thus : —
Nd'ina shidyo, I have no food.
Sa ba ina shidyo, they had no food.
Again, the verb kwete, perfect of kn kwata, to hold, is used
in the affirmative, and the verb ku bola, to be without^ to lack,
is sometimes used in the negative.
Kdi kwete shidyo, I have Nda bula shidyo, I have no
food. food.
Kda ku kwete shidyo, I had Nda ka bula shidyo, I had
food. no food.
These verbs are conjugated like other regular verbs.
Sect. 4. VERBS USED IDIOMATICALLY.
There are certain verbs which when used with other verbs
have an idiomatic meaning, and are generally best translated in
English by adverbs. The following are the most common of
these.
1. The verb ka ti, to say, is used with other verbs to give
the idea of * about ', ' nearly,' * almost.' The following verb is
put into the subjunctive mood. Thus : —
Ktl mu me inzho nda leka, I was about to strike him, then
I forebore.
Hi a ti a yaye shumbwa, ushumbwa wa mu luma, as he
was about to kill the lion, the lion bit him.
Bantu ka ba ti ba mane iknmi, the people were about ten.
2. The verb ku amba^ to speak, is used in the same way as
ka tL Thus : — (Sentences from Ila tales).
Mubwa a ambe a vhwe mutwi wa patila mu chibia, when
the dog was about to come out its head stuck in the pot.
Xwaba a ambe a chebuke munshi, when the jackal was
about to look behind.
186 GRAMMAR OF TH5 ILA LANGUAGE
Sulwe wa shika $ a aml^e a nwe menzhi« falwe wa f oma,
wa mu luma meno, the hare arrived ; when he was about
to drink water, the tortoise snorted and bit him.
Muzoyn a aaaabe a angnle wa wila umbwina, when the
elephant was about to unfasten (it) he fell into the hole.
3. The verb ku bwelela, io return to^ is used as equivalent
to our ' again'. The verb following is either in the 8ubjunctt1^e
or infinitive.
Nda bw^lela ngambe, I speak again.
Bantu ka ba bwelela ku njila^ the people entered again.
4. The verb ku foramba, /^ hasten^ is used as equivalent to
our * quickly '. The verb following is in the infinitive.
Ba ka ftramba ku xijlla, they entered quickly.
A mu fwambe ku yaya ng*ombe, do ye kill quickly the
beast.
5. The verb ku yliwa, to come out^ is used in the sense of
* just '. The verb following is in the infinitive mood.
Kda yliwa ku ahika, I have just arrived.
Wa mu yana ni a yliwa ku sbika, be found him when he
had just arrived.
6. The verb ku kachilwa is used to give the idea of ' unable '.
It is followed by the infinitive verb.
Nda kachilwa ku ohita cheoho, I was unable to do that.
7. The verb ku konzha, to overcome, gives the idea of
'able', or, in the negative, 'unable'. It is followed by the
infinitive verb.
Sa u la konzha ku bala P Are you able to read ?
Pe, shi konzha ku bala, no, I am not able to read.
8. The verb ku tanguna gives the idea of ' first '. It is
followed by the infinitive verb.
Nguni owa ka tanguna ku zaka P Who is it who built first ?
Tu bone ati ngnni u ka tanguna ku shika P Let us »ee
who can arrive first.
VERBS USED IDIOMATICALLY 187
^ The verb ka mana^ h Jlmsh^ is often used to express
'altogether \ It is followed by the infinitive verb,
Keno onse % ka mana ka fwa, all the teeth died together.
Kapopure anga a mana ka diwa, my mealies are altogether
eaten.
ID The verb ka leka, to abandon^ Is often used with other
verbs. Thus : —
Ldka ka dila awe, leave off crying, you.
Leka ka chita bobo, leave off doing thus.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER VIII.
Ezeroise L
Tr^mslak into Ha:-^
The people were stealing mealies in my field. Go ye and
call the people, that they may assemble together to-morrow. I
don't know you. Do they say I must come ? I refuse : I won't
eome. I did not know your name. I came to your village
yesterday. I have not yet seen the chief, tell him to come to*
morrow to see me* I don't yet imow your customs. You say
jrott don't know me. Why is that? I worked for you long ago.
Yoa must not come here at night. Let me be your herdboy«
Bring me two more fowls that they be three. I have no food.
When he was about to hit me I ran away. As he was about to
chop the wood the axe fell on his foot. They quickly returned
to me. Who will be the first to be able to read ? To him who
is first I will give a present The missionary tells us that we
must abandon our evil ways. Your calves have entered my
field : they have altogether eaten my mealies.
Ifzeroise 2.
TramiaU into English : —
Shi konzha ome, ndime mushonto budio. Nda kachilwa ku
shika ko ukuti wa nkasha. Twa vhwa ku mana usunu midimo
joose. A vhwe ku shika wa fwamba ku dya : a mane budio
1 88 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
ku dya wa bwelela ku enda. Muntu wezo ta zhimi : u la konzha
chinichini ku enda. Ku katala, pe, ta katadi. Uswe twa ka
bula shidyo. Mwami ngu tata: kwina nchi nka bula. Ba amb'ati,
nze ? Pe, shi zi. Mu shimwine e zize kono, tu ka bandike aze.
Muntu wezu te zhibile shianza shesu. Shi ke ziza 'zona, ndi
kwete midimo minjiminji : obwadimwi nda ke ziza« Mwem-
bezhi ta na kwiza : ing'ombe wa shi shia kwi ? Ka mu yz umwe
mu ka shi late kono. Twina ukwizhi mazhina abo. Shi zile
ku dya maila ako. Ka tu te zhi inzhila eno. Ta mu ke zhibi
midimo ezho.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
The Lion and the Hare.
Ushumbwa wa zhala bana ; a zhale budio bana aze sulwe we
ziza ku lela bana. Shumbwa wa ya ba chela, sulwe wa dya
mwana shumbwa. Wa isha inkidi ku mafiitila : a zhoke budio
wa mu chenga shumbwa ati : ' Kwa ita bazovu, mbo ba mu djra
mwanako.' Wa kusha mwana umwi wa ya ku nonka kwa
baina. Shumbwa wa ya ku weza, a zhoke budio wa yana bana,
wa ba mana sulwe ku ba dya. Wa ya bu enda sulwe, wa ba
yana banyama ku munzhi wabo badi zakile, wa ba yana ba la
sobana. Wa ba chenga, ati : ' Ozona nda ka leta mubwangu,
mwize ku mu bona.' Wa zhoka, we za ku mu anga shumbwa,
wa mu anga munshingo, wa amb'ati : * Shumbwa, nda yana oba
ka dya banako. Nda ba chenga ati, Ozona nda leta mubwangu,
mwize ku mu bona.' Bu che budio ba ya : usulwe wa funga
shumbwa lozhi munshingo, wa mu tola ku munzhi wezo, wa mu
shimwina, ati : ' Nku tole kudi ba ka dya banako. Nda ka shika
kodia nka amb'ati, A mu bone mubwangu, u ka ba yaye abo/
A shike budio wa amb'ati : ' A mu bone mubwangu.' Banyama
bonse be ebela, ba amb'ati : * Wa bota mubwa.' Chi be chindi
wa mu kusha lozhi munshingo, wa lukanka, wa luma banyama
bonse, a ba lume budio, wa ba funda buzane : ba mane ku funda
buzane ba bu temeka ; bu zume budio ba kudika. Usulwe wa
kudika, o shumbwa, ba la ya bu enda. Ba shika akati muzhiu
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 189
wa shmnbwa wa konoka, sulwe wa amb'ati : ' Ko ya ku tema
unji/ Chindi cha chi ya, sulwe wa tola buzane bonse bwa
shumbwa. Ushumbwa a zhoke wa yana buzane ta bwi o, wa
zhinzhilika, ta mu boni sulwe, wa ya ku sonda kwa shibombolwa,
wa amb'ati : * Ko ya u ka lange u menzhi, u la ka mu bona
sulwe/ Wa ya ku menzhi: a shike, wa langa, wa bona
chingvhule u menzhi, odimwi we bila u menzhi, wa bula o ku mu
bona sulwe. Wa bwela kwa shibombolwa, wa amb'ati : ' Ko ya u
ka lange kwisompe, u la ka mu bona sulwe/ Wa ya ku langa
kwisompe, wa mu yana sulwe. A mu bone budio sulwe, wa
amb'ati : * Shumbwa, lakama, nji ezhi inshima/ Wa bumbidila
jbwe mu nshima: ushumbwa wa lakama sulwe wa wala mu
kanwa. Meno onse wa mana ku a yaya : usulwe wa lukanka,
wa ya«
A Tale of a Fool.
Mashimashi, kwizeulu kudi komwi. Ka ba ile balombwana
ka ya ku swaya. 6a shike budio ba kala, ba ba ikila inshipia.
Ba mane budio ku ika, ba dya o ya kubwenga : shimenzo wabo
wa amb'ati : ' Ka mu dya, beenzu. Mwa mana ku dya ezhi mu
kandile.' Beenzu ba la dya : ba mane ku dya, ba bweza masumo
ba ya ku dila. Bantu ba zowa, ba amb'ati : ' Baba beenzu ba la
dila nzhi ? ' Inzho ba be ta, ba ba buzha, ati : ' Mu dila nzhi ? '
Ba amb'ati : ' Tu la dila kaini mwa amb'ati : mwa mana ku dya
ma ka ndile.' Ngonao, ba zowa bonse, ba amb'ati : ' Baba
bantu mbadimbushi/ Nku ku ti, ba ba shimwina ati: Tu
amb'ati, mwa mana ku dya o ya kubwenga mu kandile. Ku
kandila ta kudi ku dila. Twa amb'ati, tu ma pe mabeshi mu
kandile nshima.
CHAPTER IX
THE COPULA
In English the copula is fonned by mesuxs of the various
parts of the verb * to be '-^* I am a man/ • thou art just,' * bow
are they ? ' In Ila the verb ku ba, /a ie, io became, does not
form the cc^ula except in the future. The copula is formed
largely by means of the particle di, but it is complicated by the
use of other particles. As this is one of the most puzzling
points in the Ila grammar we give in this chapter tables showing
the use of the copula in the following instances : —
(i) When a pronoun is connected with another pronoun or
a noun.
(2) When a pronoun or noun is connected with a noun. *
(3) When a noun or pronoun is connected with an adjective.
(4) When a noun or pronoun is connected with an adverb.
(5) When a noun or pronoun is connected with an interroga^
live.
And, to complete the matter here, examples are given of the
use of the copula in indirect clauses. Some repetition in this
chapter is unavoidable, and may be forgiven for the fullness
which is the result
Sect. i. THE COPULA IN THE PRESENT.
I. Pronoun connected with another Fronotm or a
Noun.
When a pronoun is connected with another pronoim the sub*
stantive pronoun simply is used. When a pronoun is connected
with a noun, the copulative particles are used. In the negative
the alternative use of the particles ta . . di is to be noticed.
THE COPULA
191
Ndime, it is I.
Ndiwe, it is thou.
Ingawe, it is he.
1. Ngamuntu, itisaperson.
2. TS[ga munzhi, it is a
village^
3* Kd' isaioo, it is a tree.
4. Mbuzanej^^rmbubuzane,
it is meat,.
5. Nkn kutwi, it is an ear.
6. mntkashimbijitisagirl.
}. Hchi chinta, it is a thing.
AfirmaHvt.
Ndiswe, it Is we.
Ndimwe, it is 70U.
Imbabo, it is they.
Mbo bantu, they are people.
Nji rninshi, they are villages.
Ngu masamo, they are trees.
Ngu mazaue, they are meats.
Hga matwi, they are ears.
NttL tushixnbi, they are girls.
Nflhi shintu, they are things.
NBhimpongo, they are goats.
8. KimpongO) it is a goat.
9. Kdu lumo, or ndnmo, it Ushixno, they are razors.
is a razor.
9a. Kdu lupidi, or ndupidi, Ngu mipidi, they are hills,
it is a hill.
Negative.
Indime, it is not I. Indiswe, it is not we.
Indiwe, it is not thou. Indimwe, it is not you.
Ingwe, it is not he. Imbo, it is not .they.
Smgular,
I. Ingwe muntu, or tadi (ta a di) muntu, it is not a person.
<• Ingwe muzLzhi, or todi (ta u di) munzhi, it is not a village.
3. Indip isamo, or tadidi isamo, it is not a tree.
4. Imbo buzane^ or tabudi buzane, it is not meat.
5' Inko kutwi, (?r takudi kutwi, it is not an ear.
6> Inko kashimbi, or takadi kashimbi, it is not a girl.
}. Incbo chintu, or tachidi chintu, it is not a thing.
S> Injo impongo, or tedi (ta i di) impongo, it is not a goat.
9« Indo lumo, or taludi lumo, it is not a razor.
9a.Indo lupidi, or taludi lupidi, it is not a hilL
1.92 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Plural
1. Imbo bantu, or tabadi bantu, they are not people.
2. Injo minzhi, or tedi (ta i di) minzhi, they are not villages.
3. Ingo masamo, or tadi (ta a di) masamo, they are not trees.
4. Ingo mazane, or tadi (ta a di) mazane, theyare not meats.
5. Ingo matwi, or tadi (ta a di) matwi, they are not ears.
6. Into tushimbi, or tatudi tushimbi, they are not girls.
7. Insbo shintu, or tashidi shintu, they are not things.
8. Inslio impongo, or tashidi impongo, they are not goats.
9. Inslio imo, or tashidi imo, they are not razors.
9a. Ingo mapidi, or tadi (ta a di) mapidi, they are not hills.
2. Pronoun or Noun connected with a Noun.
In this case the copulative particles connect noun with noun,
but it must be noticed that the particles agree with the second
nouns, not with the first. Thus : —
Not Isamo ndi mwani, the tree is a mopani.
But Isamo ngu mwani.
In connecting a pronoun with a noun^ either the substantive
pronoun or the copula di is used.
Affirmative,
Ndime nmntu, or Ndi Ndiswe bantu, or tudi
muntu, I am a person. bantu, we are people.
Ndiwe muntu, or udi Ndimwe bantu, or mudi
muntu, thou art a person. bantu, you are people.
Inguwe muntu, or udi Mbo bantu, or badi baaita,
muntu, he is a person. they are people.
1. Muntu ngu muteu, the person is a thief.
Bantu mbo bateu, the people are thieves.
2. ICwezhi ngu mumoni, the moon is a light
Miezhi nji mimoni, the moons are lights.
3. Isamo ngu mwani, the tree is a mopani.
Masamo nji miani, the trees are mopani.
&c., &c.
THE COPULA 193
Negative,
Indime mnnta, or shidi Indiswe bantu, or tatudi
muntu, I am not a person. bantu, we are not people.
Indiwe muntu, or todi Indimwe bantu, or tamudi
muntu, thou art not a person. bantu, you are not people.
Ingwe muntu,ar tadi (taa di) Imbobantu,(?rtabadi bantu,
muntu, i e is not a person. they are not people.
1. Muntu tadi muteu, the person is not a thief.
Bantu tabadi bateu, the people are not thieves.
2. Mucbelo todi muchanka, the fruit is not nice.
Miclielo tedi (ta i di) michanka, the fruits are not nice.
&c., &c.
3. Pronoun or Noun connected with an Adjective.
The substantive pronouns may be used when a pronoun is to
be connected with an adjective. With the noun there is a
variation : some simply taking the adjective without a link,
while others take the copulative particles. In the negative
ta . . di are used.
Affirmative,
llTdime mubotu, or ndi Kdiswe babotu, or tudi
mubotu, I am good. babotu, we are good.
ISTdiwe mubotu, or udi Ndimwe babotu, or mudi
mubotu, thou art good. babotu, you are good.
Inguwe mubotu, or udi Mbo babotu, (^badi babotu,
mubotu, he is good. they are good.
I. Muntu mubotu, the person is good.
Bantu mbabotu, the people are good.
2- Munzhi mukando, the village is big.
Minzhi mikando, the villages are big.
3. Isamo ndilamfu, the tree is tall.
Masamo malamfu, the trees are tall.
4. Buzane mbubotu, the meat is good.
Mazane mabotu, the meats are good.
o
194 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
5. Kutwi nkushonto, the ear is small.
Matwi maslionto, the ears are small.
6. Kashimbi nkabiabe, the girl is bad.
Tnshimbi ntubiabe, the girls are bad.
7. Chintu nohibongvhu, the thing is soft.
Shintu nshibongvliu, the things are soft
8. Impongo ninjinu, the goat is fat.
Impongo shinjinu, the goats are fat.
9. Iiumo ndupia, the razor is new.
Imo ushipia, the razors are new.
9a. Lupidi ndushonto, the hill is small.
Mapidi malamfa, the hills are high.
N.B. — Note that the copulative particles are used when the
classifiers do not begin with a nasal ; that is why when the
classifier begins with m, the adjective has no link with the noun.
Negative,
Shidi mubotu^ I am not good. Tatudi babotu, we are not
good.
Todi mubotu, thou art not Tamudi babotu, you are not
good. good.
Tadi (ta i di) mubotu, he is Tabadi babotu, they are not
not good. good.
1. Muntu tadi mubotu, the person is not good.
Bantu tabadi babotu, the people are not good.
2. Munzbi todi mukando, the village is not big.
Minzhi tedi mikando, the villages are not big.
3. Isamo tadidi ilamfti, the tree is not tall.
Masamo tadi malamftL, the trees are not tall.
4. Buzane tabudi bubotu, the meat is not good.
Mazane tadi mabotu, the meats are not good.
5. Kutwi takudi kusbonto, the ear is not small.
Matwi tadi mashonto, the ears are not small
6. Kashimbi takadi kabiabe, the girl is not bad.
Tushimbi tatudi tubiabe, the girls are npt bad.
THE COPULA
195
7. Chinta taohidi ohishonto, the thing is not small.
Shintu tashidi shishonto, the things are not small.
8. Impongo tedi njinu, the goat is not fat
Impongo tashidi njinu, the goats are not fat.
9. Lumo taludi lupia, the razor is not new.
Imo tashidi impia, the razors are not new.
9a. Lupidi taludi lulamfu, the hill is not high,
i tadi malamfa, the hills are not high.
4. Noun or Pronoun connected with an Adverb.
We take the locative adverbs, mono, kono, ano, here. The
idiomatic use of these must be carefully noted. Thus : —
Muntu mwadi mono (muntu mu a di mono), /r'/., person
in-he-is in-here.
Muntu kwadi kono (muntu ku a di ku-ono)^ ///., person
to-he-is to-here.
Muntu ngadi ano (muntu ng-a-di a-ono), /i/., person on-he-is
on-here.
Notice the phonetic change of a into ng in the last example.
In the following table the nouns are omitted and also the
English equivalents ; they may be readily supplied by the reader.
MONO.
Sing.
1. Mwadi
2. Mwodi
3. Mudidi
4. Mubudi
5. Mukudi
6. Mukadi
7. Muchidi
o. JILWICII
9. Muludi
9a. Muludi
Plur.
KONO.
Sing. Plur.
Mwidi
Mwadi
Mutudi
Mushidi
Mushidi
Mushidi
Mwadi
o 2
Kwadi
Kwodi
Kudidi
Kubudi
Kukudi
Kukadi
Kuchidi
Kwidi
Kuludi
Kuludi
Kubadi
Kwidi
Kwadi
Kwadi
Kwadi
Kutudi
Kushidi
Kushidi
Kushidi
Kwadi
196 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Sing.
1. Ngadi
2. Ngodi
3. Ngudidi
4. Ngubudi
5. Ngakudi
Plur.
Ngubadi
Ngwidi
Ngadi
Ngadi
Ngadi
ANO.
6.
7-
8.
9-
Sing,
Ngiikadi
Nguohidi
Ngwidi
Nguludi
9a. Nguludi
Plur.
Ngutudi
Ngushidi
Ngushidi
Ngushidi
Ngadi
Kwindi
Kudi
Ngutudi
Ngumudi
Kutudi
Kumudi
In the case of pronouns, ist and 2nd persons sing, and plur.,
the following are used : —
I St p. Mwindi Mutudi
2nd p. Mudi Mumudi
I St p. Ngwindi
2nd p. Ngudi
Examples of the use 0/ these.
Mwindi mono munganda, I am here in the house.
Kwadi kodia, he is yonder.
Mbudi kwi buzane P Mubudi modia. Where is the meat ?
It is in yonder.
Ing'ombe ngwidi ano, the cattle are here.
Minzhi kwidi kodia, the villages are yonder.
Negative.
In the negative the idiomatic form above is not used, simply
the particle ta followed by the adverb. Here, however, two
other things must be noticed. A shortened form of the adverb
is used, thus : mo for mono, momo, modia ; ko for kono,
koko, kodia ; o for ano, awo, adia. These may be followed
by the full forms for the sake of emphasis. The other point is
that the pronoun ending in a becomes e ; that is to say there is
an i which coalesces with the a to form e. This i is probably
the remnant of the particle di, here apparently omitted. Thus : —
Muntu te ko kono = Muntu ta a i ko kono.
Minzhi te ko kono = Munzhi ta i i ko kona
Note. — I notice that in the Ganda language the di is retained in full in
such cases. Thus: tadiwo, he is not here; tadimu, he is not inside—
answering to the Ila tio (-> ta-i-o), temo (= ta-i-mo).
THE COPULA
1
MONO.
KONO.
Siftg.
PUir.
Sif^.
Plur.
ist p.
ShimiS
Tatwimd
Shik6
Tatwikd
2nd p.
Twim6
(ta u i)
Tamwimd
Twik6
Tamwikd
3rd p.
I.
Tem6
Tabem6
Tek6
Tabek6
2.
Tom6
Temd
Tok6
Tek6
3-
Tadim6
Tem6
Tadik6
Tek6
4.
Tabwimd
Tem6
Tabwik6
Tek6
6.
Takwimd
Tem6
Takwikd
Tek6
6.
Takem6
Tatwimd
Takek6
Tatwikd
7.
Taohimd
Tashimd
Taohik6
Ta8hik6
8.
Tem6
Tashimd
Tek6
Tashikd
9-
Talw1m6
Ta8him6
Talwikd
Tashikd
9a.
Talwimd
Tem6
ANO.
Talwikd
Tek6
Stftg.
Plur.
Sing.
Flur.
ist p.
8hi6 Tatwi6 5.
Takwi6
Te6
2nd p.
Twi6 Tamwi6 6.
Take6
Tatwi6
3rd p.
I.
Te6 Tabe6 7.
Taohi6
Tashid
2.
T06 T06 8.
Te6
Tashi6
3-
Tadi6 Te6 9.
Talwid
Ta8hi<S
4.
Tabwi6 Te6 9a.
Talwid
T06
197
N.B. — The locatives are accented.
Examples of the use of these.
Bnsaae tabwimd mung'anda, the meat is not here in the
house.
Sa bavumini kubadi konoP Fe, tabekd. Are there be-
lievers here ? No there are none.
Ndetele makuzu. Te6 ano, bring me wild figs. There are
none here.
Usiiiiu shimd muohikolo, to-day I am not in school.
198 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
5. Noun or Fronoxm eonneoted with an
Interrogative.
In the case of pronouns, the simple form is used with the
copula dl With nouns the same form may be used, or, more
properly, the copulative particles. The interrogatives illustrated
below are: KwiP Where? BntiP How? What sort?
Ongai P How many ? English equivalents may be supplied by
the reader.
I.
2.
5.
6.
7.
8.
NdidikwiP
UdikwiP
UdikwiP NgudikwiP
Muntu ndi kwiP
NgudikwiP
MunzM ndi kwi P
NgudikwiP
Isamo didi buti P
Ndidi buti P
Buzane budi kwi P
Mbudi kwi P
KutwikudikwiP
NkudikwiP
Kashimbi kadi kwi P
NkadibutiP
Chintu chidi kwi P
Kchidi buti P
Impongo idi kwi P
Njidi kwi P
9. Lumo ludi kwi P
Ndudi kwi P
9a. Lupidi ludi kwi P
NdudikwiP
TudikwiP
MudikwiP
IP
Bantu badi buti P
MbadikwiP
Minzhi idi kwi P
Kjidi kwi P
MaMuno adi buti P
Kgadi ongai P
Masamo adi kwi P
Kgadi kwi P
Matwi adi ongai P
Kgadi kwiP
Tushimbi tudi kwi P
Ktudi tongaiP
Shintu shidi shongai P
Kshidi shongai P
Impongo shidi shongai P
Kshidi kwi P
Imo shidi kwi P
Kshidi kwiP
Mapidi adi kwi P
Kgadi kwi P
THE COPULA 199
Sect. 2. THE COPULA IN THE PAST.
I. Pronoun connected with a Pronoun or Noun.
The particle ka is used in the affirmative followed by the
pronoun and the copula di. In the negative ta is inserted
between the pronoun and di.
Affirmative.
Chidi ome, it was !• Ka tudi uswe, it was we.
Kodi awe, it was thou. Ka mudi umwe, it was you.
Kadi nguwe {or wezo) it Ka badi babo, it was they,
was he.
I. Kadi muntu, it was a Ka badi bantu, they were
person. people.
2. Kodi munzhi, it was a Kedi minzhi, they were
village. villages.
3. Ka didi isamo, it was a Kadi masamo, they were
tree. trees.
&c., &c.
N^aiive,
Chi ntadi ome, it was not I. Ka tutadi uswe, it was not we.
Kg tadi uwe^ it was not thou. Ka mutadi umwe, it was not
you,
Ka tadi nguwe» it was not he. Ka batadi babo, it was not
they.
1. Ka tadi muntu, it was not Ka batadi bantu, they were
a person. not persons.
2. Kotadi munzhi, it was not Ke tadi minzhi, they were
a village. not villages.
3. Ka ditadi iaamo, it was Ka tadi masamo, they were
not a tree. not trees.
&C.9 &C.
To express our impersonal ' there was a man ' ; ' there was
not a man' the forms are : Ka kudi muntu ; Ka kwina muntu.
200 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
2. Pronoun or Noun connected with a Noun.
There are two forms used in the affirmative, the first being
the past tense — kadi muteu; the second the imperfect — Muntu
wa kudi muteu. In the following table the reader may supply
what is omitted.
Affirmative,
Nda kudi muntu, I was a Ku tudi bashimbi, we were
person. girls.
Wa kudi muteu, thou wert Ka mudi bateu, you were
a thief. thieves.
Wa kudi muntu, he was a Ka badi bantu, they were
person. people.
1. Muntu kadi muteu, the person was a thief.
Bantu ka badi bateu, the people were thieves.
2. Muohelo kodi shidyo, the fruit was food.
Mlchelo kedi sbidyo, the fruits were food.
3. Isamo kadidi mwani, the tree was a mopani,
Masamo kadi miani, the trees were mopani.
&c., &c.
Negative.
Shi nda kudi muteu, I was Ti twa kudi bateu, we were
not a thief. not thieves.
Tiwa kudi muteu, thou wert Ti mwa kudi bateu, you
not a thief. were not thieves.
Ti a kudi muteu, he was not Ti ba kudi bateu, they were
a thief. not thieves.
1. Muntu katadi muteu, the person was not a thief.
Bantu ka batadi bateu, the people were not thieves.
2. Muohelo kotadi shidyo, the fruit was not food.
Michelo ketadi shidyo, the fruits were not food.
3. Isamo ka ditadi mwani, the tree was not a mopani.
Masamo katadi miani, the trees were not mopani
&c., &c.
THE COPULA 20 1
3. Pronoun or Noun oonnected with an Adjective.
Affirmative,
Chindimubotu, I wasgood. Ka tudi baboto, we were
good.
Eodimubota, thou wert good. Ka mudi babotu, you were
good.
Eadi mubotu, he was good. Ka badi babotu, they were
good.
1. Muntu kadi mukando, the man was big.
Bantu ka badi banjibaziji, the people were many.
2. Munzhi kodi mukando, the village was big.
Minzhi kedi mibiabe, the villages were bad.
3. Isamo ka didi ikando, the tree was large.
Masamo kadi makando, the trees were big.
&c., &C.
Negative,
Shi nda kudi mubotu, I was Ti twa kudi babotu, we
not good. were not good.
Ti wa kudi mubotu, thou Ti mwa kudi babotu, you
wert not good. were not good
Ti a kudi mubptu, he was Ti ba kudi babotu, they
not good. were not good.
1. Muntu ti a kudi mubotu, the person was not good.
Bantu ti ba kudi babotu, the people were not good.
2. Munzhi ti wa kudi mubotu, the village was not good.
Minzhi ti ya kudi mibotu, the villages were not good.
&c., &c.
4. Noun or Pronoun connected with an Adverb.
The locative adverbs mono, kono, ano may again be illus-
trated. They appear in their shortened forms mo, ko, o, and
are connected with the noun or pronoun by means of the copula
di in the affirmative. In the negative the same remarks apply
as in the present tense. See above, sect, i, 4.
202 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
In the following tables the English equivalents may be sup-
plied by the reader.
Affirmative,
MONO. KONO.
Plur, Sing. Plur,
Ka tudimd Chi ndik6 Ka tudik6
Kamudimd Kodik6 Kamudikd
Ka badimd Kadik6 Ka badikd
Kedimd Kodik6 Kedik6
Kadidikd Kadik6
Ka budikd
Sing,
ist. p. Obi ndimd
2nd p. Kodimd
3rd p. I. Kadim6
2. Kodim6
3. Ka dicLim6 Kadim6
4. Ka budimd Kadim6
5. Ka kadim6 Kadim6 Ka kndikd Kadikd
6. Ka kadim6 Ka tudimd Ka kadikd Ka tudikd
7. Ka ohidimd Ka shidimd Ka ohidikd Ka shidikd
8. Kedixnd Ka shidimd Kedik6 Ka shidLkd
9. Ka ludim6 Ka 8hidim6 Ka ludik6 Ka shidikd
9a. Ka ludim6 Kadim6 Ka ludik6
ANO.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
ist p.
Chindia
Katudid
5. Kakudid
Kadid
2nd p.
Kodi6
Ka mudi6
6. Kakadid
Katudid
3rd p. I.
Kadid
Kabadid
7. Ka ohidid
Ka ahldid
2.
Kodi6
Kedi6
8. KodiA
Ka 8hidi6
3-
Ka didi6
Kadi6
9. Ka ludid
Ka 8hid16
4.
Ka budid
Kadi6
Negative
9a. Ka lndi6
•
Kadid
MONO.
KONO.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
ist p.
Ohi ntem6 Ka tutemd Ohi ntekd
Ka tatekd
2nd p.
Kotemd
Ka mutemd Kotekd
Kamutekd
3rd p. I
. Katemd
Ka batemd Katekd
Ka batekd
2.
. Kotemd
Ketem6
Kotekd
Ketekd
3
. Ka ditemd Katemd
Ka ditekd
Katekd
4. Ka budimd Katemd Ka budikd Katekd
THE COPULA
203
•Snif • Pimr, Sing. Pbtr,
5. Ka ]ciitem6 Katem6 Ka katek6 Katek6
6. Ka lnitmn6 Ka tatemd Ka katekd Ka tntek6
7. Ka chitemd Ka shitemd Ka ohitekd Kashitekd
8. Ketamd Kashiten
16 Katem6
Kashitekd
9. Ka lutem6 Ka shitemd Ka lutek6
Ka8hitek6
9a. Ka Intemd Katem6
Kalutek6
Katek6
ANO.
Sing. Plur.
Sing.
Pbir.
ist pu CM nte6 Ka tate6
5. Kakate6
Kate6
2nd p. Kote6 Ka mute6
6. Kakate6
Katate6
3rd p. I. Kate6 Ka bate6
7. Ka ohited
Ka8hite6
2. Kote6 K6te6
8. Kete6
Ka8hite6
3. Kadite6 Kate6
9. Kalute6
Ka8hite6
4. Kabate6 Kate6
9a. Ka lute6
Kate6
N.B. — ^The locative particles are accented.
Examples of the use of these.
Oscma cbi ntem6 mono mnng*anda, yesterday I was not
here in the honse.
tndikd kodia ku xnunshi, we were yonder at the village.
ahidid imi>oxigo ahinjishinji, there were there many goats.
mtidimd muchikolo, you were in the school.
Katek6 masamo, there were no trees there.
5. Hoan or Pronoun connected with an Interrogative.
Chi ndi kwi f Where was I ? Ka tndi kwif Where were we?
Kodikwif Where wert thou? Kamndikwif Where wert thou?
Kadi kwi P Where was he ? Kabadikwif Where were they?
I. Mnntu kadi buti f How Bantu ka badi buti P How
was the man ? were the people ?
UnnzhikodibutiP How Minzhi kedi kwiP How
was the village ? were the villages ?
IsamokadidikwiP How Masamo kadi kwiP How
was the tree ? were the trees ?
&c. &c.
2.
204 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Sect. 3. THE COPULA IN THE FUTURE.
This is formed by means of the verb ku ba, to be^ to become.
In the affirmative three forms are found of the future tense of
this verb : —
a. Muntu u la ba muteu, the person will be a thief, i.e.
presently.
b. Nda ba muteu, I shall be a thief, i. e. soon.
c. Nda ka ba muteu, I shall be a thief, i. e, at some distant
time.
I. Pronoun oonneeted with a Pronoun or Ifoun.
Here we distinguish two forms, corresponding to the English
* it will be a thief and ' he will be a thief. The former is im-
personal.
Affirmative.
Ku la ba ome, it will be I. Ku la ba uswe, it will be we.
Ku la ba uwe, it will be thou. Ku la ba umwe, it will be you.
Ku la ba wezo, it will be he.
I. Ku la ba muteu, it will
be a thief.
tr la ba muteu, he will
be a thief.
Ku la ba babo, it will be they.
Ku la ba bateu, it will be
thieves.
Ba la ba bateu, they will be
thieves.
Negative,
Ta ku ka bi ome, it will not Ta ku ka bi uswe, it will not
beL
Ta ku ka bi uwe, it wi]l not
be thou.
Ta ku ka bi wezo, it will not
be he.
I. Ta ti a ka bi muntu^ he
will not be a person.
Ta ku ka bi muteu, it will
not be a thief.
be we.
Ta ku ka bi umwe, it will
not be you.
Ta ku ka bi bale, it will not
be they.
Ta ba ti ba ka bi bantu,
they will not be people.
Ta ku ka bi bateu, it will
not be thieves.
THE COPULA • 205
2. To ti n ka bi munzhi, it Te ti i ka bi minzhi, they
will not be a village. will not be villages.
Ta ka ka bi mtiiuihi, Ta ku ka bi minzhi, there
there will not be a village. will not be villages.
&c. &c.
2. Pronoun or Noun connected with a Noun.
Affirmative,
Nda ka ba munta, I shall Twa ka ba bantu, we shall
be a person. be people,
Wa ka ba muntu, thou wilt Mwa ka ba bantu, you will
be a person. be people.
Wa ka ba muntu, he will be Ba ka ba bantu, they will be
a person. • people.
I. Muntu u la ba muteu, the person will be a thief.
Bantu ba la ba bateu, the people will be thieves.
&c., &c.
Negative,
Here we may use the future tenses as given in the previous
chapter : —
Shi nti mbi muteu, I shall not be a thief.
Ta ti a bi muteu, he will not be a thief
Ndi na ni nka ba muteu, I shall not be a thief.
TI ina ni a ka ba muteu, he will not be a thief.
Or often the potential future tenses are used : —
Shi ka bi muteu, I shall not, or may not, be a thief
Shi ka ka bi muteu, I shall not be a thief.
3. Pronoun or Noun connected with an Adjective.
Affirmative,
Here again are the three forms : —
Nda ba mubotu, I shall be good.
Ndi la ba mubotu, „ „
Nda ka ba mubotu,
» >>
2o6 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Negative.
Here also the forms mentioned above are in use : —
Shi nti mbi mabotu, I shall not be good.
Ndi na ni nka ba mubotu, I shall not be good.
4. Nonn or Fronoxui oonnected with an Adverb.
The same forms are used as above in affirmative and negative.
Ba la ba kono, they will be here.
Ba ba kono, „ „ *
Ba ka ba kono, „ „
Ta ba ti ba bi kono, they will not be here.
Ba ina ni ba ka ba kono, „ „
5. Noun or Fronoxin connected with an Interrogatiye.
The same forms are used in this case as above : —
Ba la ba buti P How will they be ?
Ba ba buti P ,, „
Ba ka ba bongai P How many will there be ?
Sect. 4. THE COPULA IN INDIRECT CLAUSES.
In indirect clauses the copula takes the form of kudi in the
affirmative and takudi in the negative. Notice that in the
negative indirect clause the particle ta always takes its place
after the pronoun.
Examples.
Masamo a kudi miani nda ula, if the trees are mopani I will
buy them.
Masamo a takudi miani sha ula, if the trees are not mopani
I won't buy them.
Nda ula buti a takudi mabotu P How can I buy them if
they are not good ?
Buzane bwa takudi bubotu bu sowe, if the meat is not good
throw it away.
THE COPULA 207
Nda ka dya bnti bwa kudi bnzumo P How can I eat if it
is hard?
Wa takudi kono nda ka yovwa but! f If you are not here
how can I help you ?
A ka ohidi mong'anda nke njile bati P If he is still in the
house how can I enter ?
Nda kadi a moahinie nda ku bona bati P If I am in the
dark how can I see you ?
Ka takadi mwami nda ma yaya, if he were not a chief
I would kill him.
Wa kadi mabota nda ka yovwa, if you are good I will help
you.
A kadi mabiabe ma me, if he is bad, hit him.
Lomo Iwa kadi lafkimpia nda la kwanga, if the razor is
blunt I will sharpen it.
Monzhi wa takwiko nda shoka, if the village is not there
I shall return*
Hda ka lela bati tadyo twa takwid P How can I feed you
there being no food ?
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER IX.
Exercise 1.
TranslaU into Ila: —
Yesterday he was in the field. Why were you not here ? It
is not a ram that I want ; I want a she-goat. We are not
people who travel much on the water. That child troubles me ;
he is a thief, a liar ; I don't know what I shall do with him. I
am not a good carpenter. The goats are in the kraal. The
cattle are here. The hoes are in that house yonder. In which
house? I am here in the house still eating. There are no
cattle there in that country. How is that abscess of yours which
I lanced yesterday ? How many people were in church yesterday?
It was we who drove your cattle away. It was that village he
burnt because the people did not pay their tax. They were very
good trees which we brought. It was he who stayed behind.
2o8 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
It was not I. There was no man in the village when we passed
yesterday. If you do not go at once I shall fine you. They
were not goats which ate your mealies ; they were cattle. That
man was not a thief when he was a young man, he has changed
much. The fruit which you were eating was not food. The
people were not many. I was there in the field when you called
me. They were not here at my place ; I have not seen them.
The men you speak of were in the forest yesterday cutting down
trees for me. We were not there, we did not see the dancing.
Where were your children yesterday, they were not in school ?
They will be there to-morrow.
Exercise 2.
Iranslaie into English : —
Ba ina ni ba ka ba banjibanji kaini ba fwa bamwi. Bafiilwe
ngubadi ano. Bachiwena tabemo mu mulonga wezu. Tashiko
shintu nshu ambila. Ngadi buti masamo ngu wa ndetela ? Ma-
pidi teko kodia ku banaisha. Inshima ka shiteko ozona. Lu-
kona ka ludimo mwitashi diakwe. Munkomo ka shitemo
shintu. Minzhi minjiminji kediko. Ome chi nteko koko, pele
wezo. Katemo masamo adi bodia. Ku la ba wezo we ba
shintu shako. Wezo u ina insana, ta ti a bi mwami. Bodia
mbwi ntadi mwami nda ku koswela buti makani ? Muntu atakaudi
muteu u la mu njizha buti mu ntelongo ? Na to luleme nda ku
uma. U ina ni wa ka lukanka u la hola buti ? Na indiwe we ba
kambo nzhi nku wa lukankila ? Ndi la ka ya buti ku tata mulom-*
bwana wezo a takwio ? Nda takwiko kodia nda ku bona buti ?
Insho sheshi nshi nzanda, nda langa pele impongo inkando.
Ka kwina muntu koko ni twa ita ko ozona. Ka badi kwi?
Muzhikenina kadi mo.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
The Bird which swallowed People.
Muzune mukando mukando wa ka ya mwinzhila, wa bona
bantu be enda wa ba mina. Inzho bamwi ba amb'ati : ' A tu ka
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 209
sonde/ Inzho ba ya ku sonda. Inzho musonzhi wa amb'ati :
' Wezo muzune mu ka mu letele mahuba inchelwa. Wa ka shika
ko ku muzune wezo aze u la ka ku mina. A ka ku mina budio
mwifu diakwe u ka ku hukuta mahuba. Bantu mba ka mina
bonse ba la ka vhwa.' Inzho ba ya ku muzune. Muzune wa
mina muntu. Inzho mwifu dia muzune wa hukuta. Inzho
wezo muzune wa telela mahuba inzho wa fwa. Bantu mba ka
mina ba vwila ansengwe bonse. Ba vhwe budio bantu ba
amb'ati : ' Inzho musonzhi u la bona bu twa vhwa mwifu dia
muzune.' Dia mana ikani dia muzune.
The Hippo, and the Rhino.
Shempela o chivhubwe ba ka Iwa. Chivhubwe wa ka bweza
lumo Iwa shempela, inzho ba Iwa. Shempela wa amb'ati:
' Lumo Iwangu nguni wa lu tola ? ' Chivhubwe wa ingula ati :
'Ndime. Nda ku shiza mwinangu.' Shempela wa amb'ati:
* Leta kono.' Ati chivhubwe : * Shi lu bwene.' Ngonao ba
Iwa. Ati inzho shempela : ' Tu andana. Ome nda ka ku dya
mulundungoma.' Aze chivhubwe ati : * Pele u menzhi.' Ku
ambwa'ti : ' Tu andana mbu ba ka andana shempela o
chivhubwe.'
Why the Zebra has no Horns.
Banyama ba ka bungana antomwi, — muzovu o shankole o
munyumbwi o chibizi o musefu o munyati o luengu o nakasha
0 naduvwi o shichisunu o mukulo o mutubiakalomo o shasubila o
nanja o nakasotokela o shombololo, bonse banyama ba mikumo
mikumo ba ka bungana antomwi ba la chela. Chi be chindi
cha shika chindi ocha ku ya ku sala meya. Banyama bonse ba
amb'ati: 'A tu ka sale meya.' Ngonao banyama bonse ba
luicanka, ba mikumo mikumo bonse ba lukanka ba ya ku sala
meya. Be zudila bonse, munyama nzhi o mushonto o mukando
udi buti. Bonse ba mikumo mikumo meya be zudila. Kwa
shala chibizi pele. Chi be budio chindi ba amb'ati : ' Chibizi
ba kwima ku sala meya.' Na ka amba a zhibaluke wa lukanka
a ka ahike ko kwa ku salwa meya. Wa usa budio wa yana na
p
210 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Iwiya, onse ba a mana. Wa yana ko mwala o matwi mal^mafu
o mabala o mulomo mukando. Ngonao beenzhina ba mu seka,
ba amb'ati : ' Uwe, kudya kwako udi buti ? Bona, meya ba a
mana, o bana bashonto bonse mey^L : uwe, pele mabala o mwala
o malwi o kulengezha mnlomo kwa ba ku bweza o. Bona uswe
tonse meya o mukando o mushonto.' Ngonao beenzhina ba mu
sampaula, ba amb'ati : ' Uwe udi shindya, kudya kwako kwa
kwimya meya.' Ngonao chibizi wa usa chinichini mbwa ka budila
meya. Ngonao pele kudya ku disha chinichini, obudisunu obu-
disunu chibizi ngu shindya. Antela u la bazha banyama bamwi
ku kudya. Pele.
The Honeybird and the Bees.
Solwe wa ka ya ku sesa ku nzuki. A shike kodia wa amb'ati :
' Nda langa mukaintu.' Banzuki ba mu pa mukaintu. Chi be
chindi ba mu nanga. Ba mu nange budio, solwe wa amb'ati :
' Bu mwa nkasha mwinangu pele nda ku ma chechelela ku bantu
oba ita mwinzhila.' Bwa ka ambila bobo obudisunu a bona
muntu owa ita wa mu tola, wa ya ku mu lezha inzuki.
The Crab and the Jackal.
Ba ka chita chikani mwaba inkala. Inkala ya amb'ati : ^ Nda
ku shia lubilo.' Mwaba wa zowa, wa amba : * Pe. Nodi ma-
tende achieme to nshii lubilo, udi mwanichi.' Inkala ya
amb'ati kwa mwaba: 'U ka fume ozona tu ze ku lukanka.'
Mwaba wa ya ku munzhi wakwe : ayo inkala yo ona a munzhi
wayo. Bu che chifumo mwaba wa shika ku nkala, ati : ' A tu
ende inzho, tu lukanke.' Inkala ya zhima ku muchila wa
mwabn. Mwaba a ambe a lukanke, inkala ya mu luma ku
muchila: mwaba u la lukanka ayo inkala ya bu ya ku mu
lumina ku muchila. A lukanka chindi chilamfu chi ya. budi
kodia ku mulonga. Mwaba a ambe a chebuke munshi inkala
ya ku sotekela kumbele. Mwaba wo ompolola inkala, inkala ya
ingula kumbele : mwaba wa zowa odimwi, wa amb'ati : * Inkala
ya ingula kumbele/ Odimwi chi be chindi ba ya ka zhima
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 211
ambde, odimwi inkala ya luma ku muchila, odimwi ba lukanka
chindi ochi ya budi kodia ku mulonga. Mwaba wa chebuka
munshi, inkala ya sotekela kumbelc. Mwaba wa jsowa, ati:
' Uwe, ankala, udi mukando, shi kwiti dinji odia bwana inzho
nda beba kwako/ Mwaba wa bwela ku munzhi wakwe, wa ya
ku kala. Ayo inkala ya bwela ku munzfai wayo. Ngonao ka
mana kambo kako.
A Tale op Two Men.
Ba ka lEhimoka balombwana badi bobili, umwi wa bweza
mubwa, umwi wa bweza chibia. Ba shike mwisokwe, wezo owa
ku kwete mubwa wa yaya munyama. Owa ku kwete chibia,
ad : ' A tu ike, tu dye.- Ba mane ku ika, ba dya. Wezo mubwa
we njila mu chibia ku komba. A ambe a vhwe mutwi wa
patila mu chibia. Wezo udi chibia, ati : ' Ndo, chibia changu
chi ka la fwa. Mubwako wa patila mu chibia changu. Kweza,
u mu kushe mo.' Udi mubwa wa kaka, ati : ^ Ome shi mu
konzha mubwa.' ' Sena mbwa ku kachila a tu mu kosole
mutwi chibia chechi chi vhwe kabotu mutwi.' Ati : ' Uwe, ndo,
nodi chibia chibotu nchi chidie o mubwa o chibia ? ' Umwi wa
ingula, ati : ' Chibia changu nchi chibotu.' Ati : ' Mbubo, ko
kosola budio.' Wezo udi chibia wa bweza keembe, wa kosola
mubwa. A mane ku kosola, wabweza chibia chakwe, wa yana
china ku fwa, wa leta mehzhi wa sanzha mo buloa. A mane ku
sanzha, wa leta ingozhi, wa anga, wa kudika, u la ya bu enda
ku munzhi. Aze udi mubwa wa ya ku munzhi. A shike ku
munzhi wezo udi mubwa wa yana mwanakwe u la sata, wa te-
laika ati: *Wedia u kwete chibia mwanakwe wa ke tolela inshipi
yangu.' Wa lukanka lubilo, wa ya ko. Ku ka shika, ati: ' Uwe,
mwenzuma, mpa inshipi yangu.' Bo ompolola mwana wezo,
inshipi ezho ya kaka ku vhwa kwitashi dia mwana wezo, ukuti
ya ke njila kale kale ka chidi mwana, usunu wa kula, wa ba
kamwale. Ati : ' Bodia mbwi ya kaka a tu kosole itashi.' Ati :
' Ndo, to kosodi itashi ; a tu ku pe budio inji inshipi.' Wezo
munto wa kaka, ati : ' Shikwe inji, njiona ezhi inshipi yangu.'
p 2
212 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
* Chibotu nchi chidie, inshipi, itashi dia mwana ? ' Wezo muntu
wa kaka, ati : * Ome inshipi yangu ezhi nji nzanda/ Ushe wezo
mwana, ati : ' Bweza keembe, u kosole itashi/ Wa kosola,
inshipi ya ku vhwa. Wa tola inshipi yakwe, ati : ' Inzho, ndi
ledio itashi dia mwanako, u lunge, tu bone na u la lunga buti.
Ome mubwangu wa ka mu kosola.' Wa tola ezho inshipi, wa
ya ku sonda mwanakwe owa ku sata. A ka shike kwa wezo
munganga, wa ku sonda, ati : ' Ka she budio musamo, mwana
u la ka pona/ Wa zhoka, we za ku sha musamo. Wa mu
shidika, mwanakwe wa pona. A mane ku pona bobo, wa mu
kumbila mukuku, wa mu paila. A mane ku paila, ba kala, ba
nwa mukuku wezo. A mane budio mukuku, abo bantu ba
leka, ba mana. Ngukgla, a mana makani.
CHAPTER X
THE ADVERB, PREPOSITION, CONJUNCTION,
AND INTERJECTION
Sect. i. THE ADVERB.
Besides adverbs proper, the Baila have other ways of express-
ing adverbial ideas. , The simple adverbs are as follows : —
Hi, or Wdi, when. UkUTi P Where ?
Fele, only, simply. KwiP Where ?
Budio, merely. Ukwi-ukwi, wherever.
AntomiiTi, together. Chani P Koohani p How ?
lohe, alone. Kale, already.
Mani, until. Kale-kale, long ago; in the
Ka, not, not even. future.
On ni or ndi see the note below.
Fele and budio have a similar meaning, but pele is used
largely with nouns and pronouns, e. g. Kdime pele, I is only,
or merely, I. Ba xnu yasa budio, they simply speared him.
Budio is also used with the subjunctive to indicate ' as soon as '.
A ka shike budio, as soon as he arrives.
Fele and mani probably are of verbal origin. The latter
may be connected with ku mana, to finish. Fele is perhaps
connected with the noun impela, extremity ; there is no current
verb ku pela, to end, but the root is probably that found in the
Zulu ukupela, to come to an end. For just as Zulus say
kupela, that 's all, there 's nothing more, so do the Baila use
pele at the end of a narration.
XJkUTi P is used when the question is asked without naming
anything, while kUTi P follows a verb or copula.
214 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Chani, or koohani, is the same word as the Suto yuang;
Zulu, igani, kanjani ; Nyanja, tshiani. Its use is very like
that of batiP e.g. Wezo mmita u la amba koohani P
How is that man talking, i. e. what is he saying ? XT la amba
buti seems rather to refer to the manner of speaking.
Kale is also a common Bantu word. In Zulu it takes the form
of kade ; Suto, khale ; Swahili, kale ; Bemba, kali. It is used
in the sense of * already ' : Twa chita kale, we have done it
already ; in its duplicated form, kale-kale, it refers to distant
time, either past or future.
Noiiins used as Adverbs.
The foDowing are examples of nouns used as adverbs without
any change of form. They are mostly expressive of time.
Chiftimo, early morning. Mashiku, at night.
Mangolezha, late aflemoon. Chikasadizhi, forenoon.
Chifatenuma, backwards. Chami, purposely.
Besides these adverbs are formed from nouns by prefixing the
locative particles. Among these are the following : —
From inshi, the ground.
From kati, middle, ohol.
From izeulu, the sky.
From imbadi, side, odsai.
From imbele, front, odsoL
From insengwe, outside, odsoL
Munahi, afterwards, behind.
Eunshi, below.
Anshi, on the ground
Mukati, within, inside.
Akati, among, between.
Mwizetdu, in the air, above.
Kwiaeulu, above.
Eaeulu, above.
Mumbadi,
Eumbadi, aside.
Ambadi, ^
Eumbele, in the front, before.
Ambele, afore, before.
Kunsengwe, outside.
Ansengwe, outside.
THE ADVERB 215
From iwe, the east. Kwiwe, towards the easL
Ewe, in the east.
From imbo^ the west. Kumbo, towards the west.
Ambo, in the west.
It 18 interesting to trace the presence of some of these adverbs in other
Bantn languages. Some languages have lost the regular use of the locative
prefixes, but yet retain many words which indicate that at one time they
were used.
Thus conesponding to anahi we find in Zulu, pansi, below; Xosa, pantsi.
In Suto this becomes fttsei In languages retaining the use of the locatives,
we have Kongo, munshi, kunshi, vanahi ; Nyanja, pansi ; Ganda, wansi.
Kongo seems to come nearest to Ila in this respect.
The root kati seems to be obsolete in Ila, i. e. it is not used by itself,
though it so far retains its noun form as to be followed by the genitive
particle ka when used as a preposition, akati ka, &c. The word kati is
in use in Kongo and Bemba where it means middle, interior. The word
appears in Zulu in the locative form; pakati, among; Swahili, katika,
among ; Ganda, wakati, in the middle. In Suto it takes the form of hare,
kahare.
The root iaoulu means the space above ; it also is a widely prevalent
Bantu word. In Zulu the word is isula, and the loc eaeulu takes the form
of pezulu ; Kongo, eatilu ; in Swahili it is contracted to juu : cf. Tonga,
jjnla ; Ganda, wagulu.
The roots imbadi and imbele and insangwe are obsolete in Ila. Imbele
appears in Swahili as mbele, before, in front. Imbadi appears in Ganda
as ka *badi, at the side ; and in Ganda as in Ila it has also a plural form,
ma'bali. Insengwe does not seem to be used elsewhere ; but in Bemba we
have nse, kanse, outside.
In addition to the above, adverbs are also formed from nouns
by prefixing oba. These express manner.
Examples,
Noun, Adverb,
Insana, strength. Chansana, forcibly.
Inkole, cruelty. Chankole, cruelly.
Bwanga, kindness. Chabwanga, kindly.
ImpuwOy fame. Champuwo, publicly.
laubilo, swiftness. Ghalubilo, swiftly.
Iinse, mercy. Chaluse, mercifully.
2i6 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Intenda, pity. Chantenda, pitifully.
Bnsn, sorrow. Chabnsu, sorrowfully.
Iiwengn, notoriety. Chalwengu, notoriously.
Mano, cunning. Chamano, cunningly.
Other IiooatiTe Adverbs.
Besides forming adverbs by being prefixed to nouns, the
locative prefixes are the basis of other adverbs.
Those formed from Mu have the general idea of rest within,
motion into or out of. They therefore answer to our adverbs :
wherein, herein, therein, hither, thither, hence, hither, in where ?
just in here, &c.
Those formed from Ku have the general v\tz.'oi position at a
place, motion to or from a place : here, there, yonder, hither,
hence, thither, thence, to where ? from where ? just there, &c.
Those formed from A have the general idea of rest on or
upon^ motion on to ox from off: here, hereon, thereon, on whete ?
just on there, &c.
The following are the forms of these locative adverbs : —
a. ITie simple forms: — Mu, Ku, A.
b. The contracted forms : — Mo, ko, o (see Chap. IX, sect, i, 4).
c. The demonstrative forms : —
Mono, in here. Momo, in there. Modia, in yonder.
Kono, to here. Koko, to there. Kodia, to yonder.
Ano, on here. Awo, on there. Adia, on yonder.
d. The demonstrative forms emphasized: —
Mumona mono, just in here ; Mumona momo, just in there ;
Mumona modia, just in there. Kukona kono, just to
here ; Kukona koko, just to there ; Kukona kodia, just
to there. IN'gon'ano, just on here ; IN'gon'awo, just on
there ; IN'gon'adia, just in here.
e. The interrogative forms : —
Mudie P In where ? Kudie P To where ? Adie P On where ?
THE ADVERB 217
f. The firms derived /ram -nji, different: —
Mnigi, in a different place ; Kunji, at a different place ; Anji,
on a different place.
g. The /arms derived /ram -lue, all: —
Mouse, everywhere inside ; Konse, everywhere (to or from) ;
Onse, everywhere upon.
h. The indicaiwe /arms : —
Imnmo momo, &c., (it is) in there, &c. ; Inkuko koko, Sec,
(it is) there, &c. ; Ingao awo, &c., (it is) on there.
L The n^aiive /arms: —
Imo momo, ftc, not in there, &c. ; Inko koko, &c., not there,
Ac ; Ingo adia, &c., not on there, &c.
Examples a/ the use a/ theu,
Uwe, ko ya u ka kiuhe mo shinta shako, I say, go and
take out firom there your things.
Ghibota; insho mliike mndief Right, now wherein shall
I pot them?
U ka sld i^jislrishe mmnona momo, yon can pot them jost
in there
Jmo momo, luisha mod]% no, not in there; pat it in yonder.
Ko -vliwa awo : n kale ngon'aiio, get off there, come and sit
just here.
Shi aaada kooo; nda ja km^ji, I don't like here, I am going
Adverbs hosed am Ba asid VL
The abstract dasnfier BU- is the hasis of a nmnber of adfcrbs
ofmamicr, asloDovs: —
BByMbii. as Taandana mlm ba ka andana shenqiehi o
Ail hubiPB, let as separate as did the rfaiiia and bcppa
Bmyi, diflcicmli. Mn la kn ddla bobo. a wool eUdta
haajpi, foa wool not dothns: do difiterentir, m a di&rent
■J-
2i8 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
• demonstrative forms.
Bobo, thus,
Bodia, so,
Mbubo, it is so,
Imbobobo, it is not so^
demonstrative forms with copulative
prefix.
Bubona, just as, just so. Emphasized demonstrative form.
INikubabobo, nevertheless, i. e. although it is so (conj.).
Bukadi bobo, in that case, if it is so.
Buti P How ? lit. it says ?
Bodia mbu, as (conj.).
XJbtidi, as (prep.).
Mbukabele, it is so.
Imbo bokabele, it is not so.
Bubona budi, just as (prep.).
Several preps, and conjs. are included in this list, so as to
show all the forms derived from bu.
Similarly from DI-, the third classifier, other adverbs are
formed. These refer to time, so that they may be said to have
reference to the word izuba, sun, day.
IN'di, ni, when, it is when.
Ni is a contraction for ndi : cf. nina ku bona, I have not
seen, for ndina ku bona. It is used simply as ' when ', but
its proper meaning seems to be : * it is when,' * it is then.' Thus :
XT ka Djayile a bwina, ni nka ka fwa, kill me on the burrow,
it is then I shall die.
DimiiTi, afterwards, i. e. another (day).
Dinji, afterwards, i. e. a different, another (day).
Udidie P didie P didi P When ?
XJdidie is used when it stands first in the sentence, or alone ;
didie is used to follow a verb. These forms mean : On which
(day) ? Bidi is evidently a corruption from these, and there is
a slight difierence in meaning. Didie refers to a day, i.e. to-
morrow, or another time ; didi may mean when, this day.
XJdidie ni mwa mu bona P When is it that you saw him ?
Mwa mu bona didie P When, or what day, did you see him ?
THE ADVERB 219
Mwa mu bona didl P When did you see him to-day ?
Kdidiona, just then, at once.
Kdidiona ni, it is just then that; e.g. mwami wa mu tuna,
ndidiona ni a mu yaya, the chief beat him, (and) it
was just then that he (i. e. the one beaten) killed him.
Odimwi, again.
Bionse, always, i. e. the whole (day).
Adyerbs formed from AdjectiTes*
Adverbs are formed from adjectives by prefixing ka. Thus : —
Eanjikanji, often. From -i^i-nji, many. A shortened form
of this, S^anji, means frequently, sometimes.
Eabotu, welL From -botu, good. Chibotu is heard fre-
quently instead of kabotu.
Kabiabe, badly. From -biabe, bad. Chibiabe is often heard
instead of kabiabe.
Kaahomto, little. From -shouto, smalL Ashonto is used
often for kaahonto.
Kongftif How many times? how often? From -ongaiP
How many ?
Komwi, once. From -mwi, one.
From the adjective -fWafwi, short, come the adverbs aiwafwi,
kofWafM, near, formed by prefixing the locative particles a, ku.
InterrogatiTe Farticlee.
The adverbial particles used in asking questions are 8a, na,
aena, and kaL Ka also appears as no.
8a mu la ya kwi balombwana P Where are you going, men ?
Ha mwa chita but! P What have you done ?
8ena ige kn mwita P Shall I not go and call him ?
Kai is used to express. Is it not ? Kai ome P Is it not I ? Kai
ng'ombe eshi P Is it not this ox ?
Adrerbial Ideas expreeeed by Verbs.
First, adverbs are expressed by the various verbal species.
See Chap. VI, sect i.
«20 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Thus, our adverbs * reciprocally ', * together/ are expressed by
the suffix -ana of the reciprocal species.
Ba la fnnana, they love each other, reciprocally.
Ba la Iwana, they fight together.
• The adverb * intensely ' is rendered by the suffix -isha of the
intensive species. This suffix is to be translated by different
adverbs according to the meaning of the verb. Thus : —
Ba la angisha, they tie tightly.
Ba la fonanisha, they love each other intensely.
Ba la endesha, they travel swiftly.
The adverb * over again ' is rendered by the suffix -ulnla of
the repetitive species.
Wa chitulxila, he does over again.
Secondly, the verbs kn ti, ku amba, ku bwelela, &c., express
adverbial ideas in connexion with other verbs. See Chap. VIII,
sect. 4.
Adverbs are also expressed by the various verbal auxiliaries,
<jhi, ta, bu, &c. See Chap. VII.
Finally, there are adverbial phrases formed by verbs, &c., and
often the idea of subordination of time is expressed by a differ-
ence in tense only. Thus : —
Ku kmnana ba xnu yaya, in the end they killed him.
Ku kukanka ba ka chita kabotu, in the beginning they
did well.
Chi be chindi ba ka sanduka, after a time they changed.
Twa ya tu la mwita, when we go we will call him.
Imvula ya wa nda dima, when the rain has fallen I shall dig.
Sect. 2. THE PREPOSITION.
Iiocatiye Prepositions.
The three simple locative prepositions are Mu, Ku, A.
Mu expresses rest wiihitiy motion into or out from. Its
THE PREPOSITION 221
equivalents are : in, among, inside of, within, out of. In
expressing time : in, during, through.
Examples,
Wa kala mu Ibakaintn, he sits among the women.
Imbuto aha ka wila mu mabwe, the seed fell among stones.
Kukainta wa ka yhwa mu kndima, the woman came from
hoeing.
Kka cbi sobole mu nkomo yangu, I can keep it in my bag.
Weso udi shiti mu ug'aiida, that (person) sits in the house.
The preposition kn expresses rest aty motion to or from. It
also indicates the agent of an action. Its English equivalents
are : at, bj, toward, from, to.
Ku changes into kwa when it comes before a personal name,
or before a noun expressing relationship.
Examples.
Ome nda yhwa ku lutauga, I myself come from the catde-
post.
Hgodi kwi mwananguf Udi ku munshL Where is my
child? He is $tt the village. (Cf. the English provin-
cialism : He is to the village.)
Tata udi shiti kwa Leselo, my father is staying at Leselo's.
laamo dia ka beswa ku mulombwana weao o kembe, the
tree was carved by that man with an axe.
Tola maila asa kwa ubo, take this grain to thy father.
The preposition a expresses restup<m^ motion on to or /ram off.
Its equivalents are : on, upon, at (on), off from, on to, off. It
is also used to express, because^ on account 0/ following the verb
in the relative species. Further, to express about, concerning.
Examples,
Weao mimtu wa ka wila a luludi, that person fell off
the roof.
Twm mu i"wi«^ a mulandu wakwe, we beat him on account
of lusfiuilt
2 22 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
Twa mu landila a kndisanta kwakwe, we fined him on
account of his sitting down when he should have been
working.
A mu kale a shuna shesho, sit ye upon those stools*
A mu vhwe a shuna shesho, come ye off those stools.
IN'da zanda ku bandika ase a shianza shenu, I want to talk
to you about your customs.
Compound LoeatlTe Prepositions.
In the last section we found a number of adverbs formed fix>m
nouns by prefixing the locative particles. These adverbs become
prepositions when they are followed by certain other particles ;
these are generally merely a repetition of the locative particles,
but sometimes they are the genitive particles of the original
nouns from which the adverbs were formed. The following
are in general use : —
Kunshi ku, below.
Bika chechi kunshi ku ntafole, put this below the table.
Munshi dia, after, behind.
Bantu ba ke za umwi munshi dia umwi, they came one
after another.
Kwizeulu ku, above, to the top of.
Tola shintu kwizeuhi ku lupidi, take the tfiings to the
top of the hill.
Ezeulu a, above, on the top of.
Bika sonkoto ezeulu a Uganda, put a pinnacle on the top
of the house.
Kunsengwe ku, outside, to the outside of.
Tola ing'ombe kunsengwe ku chimpata, take the beast
outside the kraal.
Ansengwe a, (at the) outside of.
Bantu na ba kale ansengwe a Uganda, let the pec^le sit
outside the house.
THE PREPOSITION 223
Kumbadi kn, by the side of.
Bantu ba le enda kmnbadi ku mtdonga, the people walk
by the side of the river.
Ambadi a, (at the) side of.
Ba la kala ambadi a mnlonga, they sit at the side of the
river.
Mumbadi u, by the side of, in the vicinity of.
Ba la kala xnnmbadi mwisamo, they sit in the vicinity of
the trees.
Mukati mu, or mukati ka, within, inside of.
Mwa cbita nshi mukati mu ng*andaP What are you
doing inside the house?
Akati ka, or akati ka, between, among.
Kda ke enda akati a miunda, I walked among the fields.
Mufwafwi mu, near to, in the vicinity of.
A tu one mufwafwi mu munzhi, let us sleep in the vicinity
of the village.
Eufwafwi ku, near to.
Ko ya kufwafwi kn ng'anda, go near to the house.
Afwafwi a, near by.
Kg bika shintu afwafwi a ng'anda, put the things near
the house.
Eumbele ku, in front of.
Ka mu ya kumbele ku mbishi, go ye in front of the horse.
Ambele a^ in front of.
Wa ka ahimoka ambele a bami, he stood up before
the chiefs.
Mumbele djjiy in the presence of.
Ba ka amba makani mumbele dia mivami, they spoke
the affairs in the presence of the chiefs.
Mnnuana ya, after, behind.
Umwi u chi chidila muniuna yangu, another is still
following behind me.
224 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The Preposition o.
The preposition o expresses the instrament with which any-
thing is done. Thus: Twa ka tema masamo o keembe
kaka, we cut down trees with this axe.
Phrase Prepositions.
Kamko ka, on account of.
Nda ku tuna kambo ka ku chita kwako, I will hit you on
account of your doings.
Bubona budi, like, just as.
Bashikale ta ka ba zaka bubona budi bantu oba sunu,
the ancients did not build like the people of to-day.
Ku chindi cha, ku busena bwa, in the place of; in the stead of.
Kwina muntu u yumina ku umwa ku busena bwa
umwi, there is no person who assents to being beaten in
the place of another.
Sect. 3. THE CONJUNCTION.
Conjunctions are somewhat rare in Ila. The following are
used: —
Ni, although.
Wa chi chita ni nda ku shimwina ati u ta chi chiti,
you have done it although I told you not to do it.
Kikubabobo, nevertheless.
Wa chita chibiabe chinichini; nikubabobo nda ku
kwatila, you have done very badly : nevertheless I forgive
you.
Ansha, unless, except.
XT ta Thwi mono ansha wa nshwimina makani ako, you
do not leave here unless you tell me your affairs.
Anokuti, whereas.
Twa bona bintu biebi okoya mbishonto, anokuti
mbikando chinichini, we see these things as if they were
very small, whereas they are very large.
THE CONJUNCTION 225
Aid, that, in order that
Ba ka mu letela mukalra. at! a nwe, they brought him
beer that he might drink.
At! na, whether.
Shi zbi ati na a la ka shika sonu, I don't know whether he
may arrive to-day.
Euti, that.
Nda ka telela kuti wa fwa, I heard that he was dead.
Kgonao (ngonawo), then, just then.
Ifgonao wa yhwa a mnnzhi, just then he left the village.
Inzho, now, then.
Inzho ati, tu andana, then he said, let us separate.
0, with, and
Kdetela menahi o bwizn, bring me water and grass.
XTkuti, because,
Mwana a la dila ukati wa umwa, the child cries because
it is beaten.
Nl . . . ba> either . . or; neither . . . nor.
Between ni and ba the personal pronouns are inserted, so we
get the following forms : —
Kimba, nor I, &c. Kituba, nor we, &c.
Kiuba, nor thou. Nimuba, nor you.
CL I. Niaba, nor he. Nibaba, nor they.
2. Koba, nor it. Niba, nor they.
3. Nidiba, ,, Kaba, „
4. Ifibuba, „ Naba, „
5. Nikuba, „ Kaba, „
6. Kikaba, „ Nituba, „
7. Kiohiba,,, Kishibi, „
8. Niba, „ Nishiba, „
9. Niluba, „ Kishiba, „
9a. Kiluba, „ Naba, „
Ex. — H ta ohiti midimo noba omwi mwiznba ledio ;
Q
.j826 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
niuba uwe, niaba mwanakb mulombwana, niba ing ombe
yako, thou must do no work on that day, neither thou, nor
thy son, nor thy ox.
Wa, either, or.
Nohi ohidie noha zanda, na cheohi na oheoho ? Which
do you wish, either this or that ?
Ambwene, perhaps.
Ambwene nda ya ozona, perhaps I will go to-morrow.
Ukuba, if, perhaps, supposing that.
TJkuba mwa zhinzhilika mu la ka yana, if you search
you may find.
Atela, lest.
Mu ta dyi atela mu la fwa, you must not eat lest you die.
Antela, it may be, perhaps.
Antela ba la ka shika obwadimwi, it may be they will
arrive the day after to-morrow.
Eaini, because.
Nda shika kaini wa ka nsliiinwina, 1 have come because
you told me.
Inji, but.
Kale ka ba bia» inji nsunu pe, they were bad ^before, but
to-day, no.
The conjunction o is used to join together nouns and may be translated
by 'with' rather than 'and'. When nouns of Class 8 and 9 pi. are to be
joined, instead of using o, the initial vowel of those words is lengthened, or
the copulative particle is used. Thus, Ukuti bwami mbu bwabo, insana
{or ninsana) o busweyo, thine is the authority, the power, and the glory.
There is no conjunction corresponding to our * and ' joining sentences. In
a series of sentences, or in a compound sentence expressing consecutive
events, the place of 'and' is taken by the aorist or preterite tense of the
verb. Thus, Muwezhi wa ka ya ku weza, ka fusa munyama, ka mu yaya,
ka mu funda, the huntec went hunting, he shot an animal, and he killed it,
and he cut it up.
It will be noticed that several conjunctions are formed from the verb ku
ti, to say: knti, thiat; ati, that; nkati, because; anoknti^ whereas; kuti
THE INTERJECTION 227
amply expresses the indicatiTe, that ; at! U used to introduce a direct quota-
tion, generally, not always following the verb amba. It is also used with
the subjoactiTe.
Sect. 4. THE INTERJECTION.
S! Eya! Yesl
Fe! No!
Aima I Not I ! Not so 1 No fear!
XTma! Really!
Mama ! expresses sorrow, distress.
We ! expresses surprise, disgust, reproof.
Shangwe! Thanl&s, sir. To a chief (introduced from the
Marotsi).
Ingoi ! Sir! Expresses assent to a chiefs remarks.
She! That's it I Expresses agreement with a person speaking.
Mawe ! Dear me I Expresses surprise, distress.
Mawe bndio ! Expresses great distress.
Hi! Expresses disgust (a peculiar nasal sound).
Ai! Expresses a sudden feeling of pain.
Ifti mama ! Phew I It's hot !
Yeye ! Yeye ! Women's cry at funeral.
£-na ! Really I
Hi! Hi! Expresses disappointment, disgust.
Te I Ye ! Ye I Ye ! Expresses reproof as on the return of a
delaying messenger.
Tchita 1 I don't know.
Akaka ! Expresses reproof, disgust.
EXERCISES ON CHAPTER X.
Bxeroise 1.
Translate into Ila : —
If you dig for me a whole day I will give you a shilling. The
slave troubled his master much, then the master cursed him.
When I go I will call you. When you arrive ask where he lives.
When rain falls I will plough. He loved him unto death. I will
keep the book until I die. What do you call this thing? Sit
Q2
228 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
wherever you please. They have already arrived. Yes, let us
go together. I have told you all the news. Yes, that's all.
Where shall I take this thing to ? Take it towards the west.
Climb up the tree. Where is your village ? It is in the east.
Treat your slave mercifully and then he will serve you gladly.
Don't take things from people forcibly. Ask them simply to
give you what you want : they will give as soon as you ask.
Take these boxes out of here and put them in elsewhere. Take
the cattle elsewhere : there is no grass here.
Exercise 2.
Translate into Ha : —
It is not so, you are merely lying. As you have no food,
come and work for me, then I will give you food. I pay you
just as I pay all the boys who work for me. In that case, let us
go away. I want money like that boy. Afterwards we will go
and hunt. When is it you saw the game ? We heard the guns
frequently, but we did not see the hunters. We walked the
whole day but we did not see even one head of game. You
have done very ill, nevertheless I will forgive for I see you
are sorr}'. We didn't get even a litde food there. How many
times have you done this thing? After a time we went to
Bulawayo to work. We are going to-day to the village. They
hit us on account of our laziness. He is living at our place.
You must not stop work until I tell you. I thought he was telling
the truth, whereas he was merely lying. We must not do it,
either I or you. Perhaps we shall find game there. Is it not
thou who didst so ?
Exercise 8.
Translate into Ha : —
Remain here until he comes. Wait until the rain stops. I
cannot eat until I am well. When did he die ? When did the
chief arrive ? When did he give you that cow ? When will you
begin work ? How much money have you ? How will you go ?
How much does it cost } How many sheep have you ? The
EXERQSES ON CHAPTER X 229
goats alsa, how many are they ? How often do you pray ? As
soon as he comes let us eat. As soon as the sun sets it is cold.
As soon as I hear I will tell you. It is for that reason I went
away. I found my knife under that tree. There is a snake
among the stones. There will be prosperity next year. Is
there a man there? There is no man here. Are there children
there ? Are there hoes in the garden ? Is it so ? Yes, it is so.
Were there people in this house yesterday ? Were there horses
in the field to-day ? No, there were only oxen. He eats like a
wild beast. He croaks like a frog. He runs like a horse. We
will work hard just as they did. Beat the drum as I do. He
ran after him because he had stolen his calabash : he almost
caught him, but a stone tripped him and he fell. When he got
up again the boy had disappeared already and he did not see
him again. That is not the reason. Is it not his laziness ?
Whereas he says he is sick. He is not sick : he is merely
shamming.
TranslaU into English : —
Ndidiona wa vhwa mo, wa lukanka, ka ba to mboni dinji.
Umwe mwa ka bona didie ing'ombe shangu ? Imbo bobo mbu
nda ku shimwina. E, mbukabele, wa chita kabotu. Bodia
mbwina mushtdi, ko ya ku Kalomo, u ka ule ko. Banangu mu
ta chiti bobo, a mu chite bunji ; mwa chita bobo mu la dipenzha.
Twina ni twa ka bona munyama na omwi. Umwe nonse mu ta
ku chita bobo, nimba ome nimuba umwe : chechi ta chi chitiki.
(J la banda kochani muchelo wezu ? Sa kwa mana makani ako
onse ? E, mbukabele ; pele aza. Mwami nkwatile luse : nina
ku chita chami. A mu sotoke chimfutenuma. Mwami wesu wa
chita chabwanga shikwense. Inko koko nku u elele ku chita.
Nku kambo kako nku nda ku umina. Imbo mbukabele, mwa
bea budio. Kai ku chita chibotu ? Ing'pmbe shako shidi kwi ?
Kushidi kodia kwa Malalu. A mu nchidile munshi diangu.
Bantu babo ta be zhi ati na udi kwi. Nda ku shia kaini wa
230 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
nchitila chibiabe. Nda ku umina a bukata bwako. A tnu
dindile mani imvtila ya mana ku wa. Chi be chindi chilamfii tu
ka la ya kodia kwa Kalomo tu ka beleke. Sa tu la yana kwi
tnadi a kulumbula ? Nda amba, wa shinizha, anokuti wa bea
budio. Mu ta ba nangi budio shintu: mwa shi pumpa mu la
pewa chakubotelwa. Nku kako nku nde zila. A mu zake bubona
mbu nda zaka kale. U ta zumanani o muzhikenoko. A mix
lukanke mbwa ka lukanka wezo. Bakaintu ba zemuna mabukiti
a mutwi. U la kozhana o mukua. Bushu bwakwe bu la kozha
izuba. Babo ba le enda ku kanka chifumo, ansha mashiku.
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
The Honey Bird and the Bee.
Inzuki ya ya ku langa musamo kwa solwe. I shike kwa
solwe, ati : * Solwe, utnwalo wangu, mpa ko musamo, nka shidike
mwanangu.' Solwe wa katazha, wa mu somwena ipepe diakwe
odia ku cheyeye, wa mu pa, wa bwela. Kodia wa ya ku shidika
mwanakwe, mwanakwe wa pona. Chi be chindi chishonto, aze
mwanakwe solwe wa sata, wa ya ku nzuki solwe. Ati : * Inzuki,
mpa ko musamo, nka shidike mwanangu, wa sata.' Wa kusha
musamo budio. Solwe wa amb'ati : ' Ome, shikwe aza, nda
zanda ipepe odia ko aze/ Inzuki ya kaka ya amb'ati : ' Ome,
ndina mapepe manjimanji, ndo : adi obili pele angu. Wa kusha
ledi dimwi ku shale diomwi^ nfwe nambuti ? Ndi ku bula o ku
chela.' Solwe wa amb'ati : ' Chibotu. Nda tola musamo wezu
nguwena ngu wa kusha.' Wa tola wezo nguwena, wa ya ku
shidika mwanakwe. Mwanakwe wa pona. Pele: ka manina
koko kako kambo.
The Jackal and the Dog.
Kabwenga wa ka tuma mubwa, ati, ' Ka lape mudilo, tu ze tu
zote.' Mubwa wa ya. A shike ku munzhi wa yana oba ika
inshima o buzane. Kabwenga wo ompolola, ati : ' Mbiza, no
wa ka ya ku mudilo wa ya ku kala.' Mubwa wa kaka ku ingula ;
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 231
wa kaka ku ingtda mbu ba mu pa inshima. Kabwenga wa bwela
mu kasaka, udi ka shiti iche budio ku mpeyo. Mubwa wa kaia
ku munzhi.
The Hare and the Jackal.
Sulwe wa ka ya kwiba ingoma ya kabwenga. Ka ba uma
chikani, ati : * Usunu tu la bona u ka shala mo.' Kabwenga wa
ya mashiku ku ya ku langa shifua. Walo sulwe wa shika, wa
kusha ingoma ya kabwenga. We uma sulwe, kabwenga wa
telela, wa amb'ati: 'Ngu wedia wa ku uma chikani owa ka
amb'ati : Tu ka bone u ka shala mo.' Wa lukanka kabwenga,
wa shika a munzhi wakwe, wa yana ingoma te mo munganda;
Ku ka telela obudi kodia kwa Leselo. Sulwe wa ya ku um^
ingoma, wa amb'ati : * Kabwenga sunu ndiwe u dibea.' Kabwenga
wa lukanka, wa ya ku shika kwa ku umwa ingoma, ke telela ya
didila obudi kona Munshi wa vhwa kabwenga, odimwi wa ya
ku lungvwenuma. Odimwi kutelela ya didila ku munzhi kwa
vhwa kabwenga. Kabwenga wa bula lubilo, wa kachilwa ku
lukanka, wa katala. Wa zhoka a munzhi sulwe nga yana
ingoma : a shike kabwenga, sulwe wa amb'ati : * Ndiwe owa ku
dibea, ati, ndi kwete lubilo.'
CHAPTER XI
SYNTAX
This part of our subject is divided into two parts : the syntax
of sentences generally, and the particular use of certain gram-
matical forms. Many matters properly belonging to this chapter
have been conveniently disposed of under the heading of the
various parts of speech ; repetition is avoided as much as possible,
but the idea of this chapter is to sum up everything of a syn-
tactical nature.
N.B. — The sentences used as illustrations in this chapter are
almost wholly taken from Ua tales.
Sect. i. THE SYNTAX OF SENTENCES.
I. The Simple Sentence.
In every proposition two things are necessary, i. e. a subject,
that of which something is affirmed, and a predicate, that which
contains the affirmation.
In English it is not common to find a proposition consisting of one word
only, bnt in Ha it is common enongh. The indicative forms of the sub-
stantive prononn, e.g. are all proper sentences, containing within them-
selves subject and predicate, e. g. Ndime nda ka chita. This, to us, is a
complex sentence, it is I who did (it); ndime standing as the principal
clause, the rest a relative clause.
The first rule of syntax is very important, viz. the subject of a
sentence is always a personal pronoun. This rule admits of no
exception. The only apparent exceptions are in such proposi-
tions as Jfdime, and in certain constructions with the subjunc-
tive, where, however, the pronoun is understood. Thus : —
Chechi oha nduma ohi kushe.
SYNTAX 233
The subject of the sentence here is a understood, and the sen-
tence might equally correctly read : U ohi kushe oheohi oha
ndnxna, take away this which bites me.
The predicate may be : —
a, A noun connected with the subject by means of the
copula.
Udi mtmtu, thou art a person.
Or without a particle : —
Shankole mwiwa wa muzovu, Shankole (is) the nephew of
muzovu.
In this, udi, he is ; or kadi, he was, is understood.
h An adjective connected with the subject in the same way: —
Udi mubotu, he is good.
c. An adverb connected in the same way: —
Kadi memo, he was there.
d, A verb : —
Wa ke za, he came.
When the sentence is expressed impersonally as in the
English, there came a man^ there is a man^ the particles ku, kwa
(pronouns of CI. 5) are used.
Kwa ita bazovu, there have passed elephants.
Kwa mana makani a shumbwa, it is finished the story of
the lion.
Eu vhwa buloa, there comes out blood.
The subject and predicate may be enlarged or extended.
a. — Enlargement of the Subject,
I. By means of a noun called the Nominative in Apposition
(for short N.A.) agreeing with the subject in person, number,
and class. Thus : —
Shumbwa wa ya bu ohela, the lion went feeding.
Here wa is the subject, shumbwa the N.A.
234 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
The position of the N.A. is not always before the subject as in
the above sentence ; it may be placed after the verb, but never
between the pronoun and the verb.
Ba Inkanka banyama, the animals ran; ///. they ran, the
animals.
We ba mukaintu, the woman stole ; //'/. she stole, the woman<
Wa ya bu enda sulwe, sulwe went on ; ///. he went on, sulwe.
2. The N.A. may be enlarged by means of a substantive,
possessive, indefinite, or demonstrative pronoun ; a noun in the
genitive ; or by another noun in apposition.
The demonstrative may precede or succeed it
Wezo sulwe we ziza ku lela bana, that sulwe came to feed
the children.
Muntu wezo wa ka zowa, that man was astonished.
The substantive and indefinite pronouns may also precede or
succeed.
Bonse banyama ba lukanka, or banyama bonse ba
lukanka, all the animals ran.
Banyama bonse be ebela, ba amb'ati : wa beta mobwa,
all the animals gazed and said : it is a good dog.
Dimwi bamwi bantu ba shika, afterwards other people
arrived.
Shumbwa ace wa fwa, the lion also died.
Aze muzovn wa wa, the elephant also fell.
The possessive pronoun follows the noun.
Chibia ohangu chi ka la fwa, my pot will die.
The noun in the genitive also follows the N.A. : it may be
even at the end of the sentence, thus : —
Odimwi imvnka dia enznnnka odia sulwe, again the wax
melted of sulwe.
The noun in apposition with the N.A. may precede or succeed.
Munyati, aclusha, a mu lete chanza, munyati, my uncle,
do you bring (your) forehead.
SYNTAX 235
3. The N.A. may be a substantive pronoun when it is treated
in just the same way as a noun.
Abalo ba la dya, they also eat
Ome nda ka ka dya mtLlaiidiiiigoma, I am going to eat
mulundungoma.
4. The N.A. may be more than one noun joined or not by ,
the conjunction o. If the two nouns are of the same class,
the plural pronoun of that class is used ; if not, the pronoun of
the latter noun may be used.
Shempela o chivhubwe ba ka Iwa, the rhinoceros and
hippopotamus fought.
5. The N.A. may be extended by means of a relative clause,
in which case, of course, the sentence is no longer simple but
complex.
Mwana Fnlwe, [owakudi kumbadi ka menzhi,] wo
ompolola, the child Fulwe, who was by the side of the
river, called.
The relative clause is included between the brackets.
The true logical subject of a sentence is therefore : —
Pronoun (grammatical subject) + N.A. + enlargements of N.A.
The sentence, Umwi mtmtu mnkando shinsana wa ko
sa may be thus analysed : —
Umwi (enlargement of N.A.).
mnnta (N.A.).
Subject.-! mnkando ^^^J* ^i^^argement of N.A.).
shinsana (noun enlargement of N.A. in apposition).
wa, subject.
Predicate, Ke sa.
b. — Extension of the Predicate.
The predicate may be completed by a direct or indirect object
and extended by adverbial adjuncts*
2836 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
1. Transitive verbs are completed by a direct object which
may be a noun or pronoim. If a personal pronoun, its place
is immediately before the verb : if a noun it generally follows.
Nda langa mukaintu, I want a wife.
Sulwe wa chela matovu^ Sulwe plucked leaves.
Wa mu shimwina, he told him.
2. For the sake of emphasis the object may be a noun
placed at the beginning of a sentence, in which case a corre-
sponding pronoun is inserted before the verb. This pronoun is
to be regarded as the proper object, the noun standing in apposi-
tion with it.
Umwi mwana wa mu zhika koxnbadi ku menzhi, ///. one
child he him placed by the side of the water.
•
Subj. wa ; pred. zhika ; obj. mu ; obj. in app. umwi mwana.
Fulwe tu la mu shia lubilo, we will leave Fulwe by swiftness.
Subj. tu; pred. la shia; obj. mu; obj. in app. Fulwe.
3. The object, direct or indirect, may consist of more than
one noun connected or not by means of the conjunction o.
Wezo muzune mu ka mu letele mahuba inohelwa, that
bird you may take for him the bellows and spout
Subj. mu; pred. ka letele; dir. obj. mahuba inohelwa;
indir. obj. mu ; indir. obj. in app. wezo muzune.
4. When the object, direct or indirect, is a personal pronoun,
I St pers. sing., it is prefixed to the verb. See Chap. V, sect. i.
5. The object may be enlarged in the same way as the
subject.
Fele dimwi wa ba mana bonse bana, but afterwards he
finished all the children.
Obj. ba ; obj. in app. bonse bana.
Nda dya miohelo y a bapombo, I eat fruit of baboons.
Obj. miohelo ; enl. of obj. ya bapombo.
Aze nda ku yaya, you also 1 will kill you.
Obj. ku ; enl. of obj. aze.
SYNTAX 237
Insho mweiuiliina sulwe wa ba yana bana ba sulwe, then
the friend of Sulwe found them, the children of Sulwe.
Obj. ba ; enl. of obj. bana ba sulwe.
6. When there are two objects, direct and indirect, the
indirect is placed before the direct. If the object is a pronoun
it is placed inunediately before the verb. The verb in the
relative and causative species has this construction^ See
Chap. VI, sect, i (i).
Be ziuha lubono ezhi nganda, they fill (with) goods this house.
Indir. obj. lubono; dir. obj. ezhi nganda.
Imwi i Bunhe maila, another fill with grain.
Dir. obj. i: indir. obj. maila.
ITmwe, mu tu twile biifa. Ba ba twila. You, stamp meal
for us. They stamped for them.
Dir. obj. bufa ; indir. tu, ba.
Mwana ftilwe wa ba letelela menzhi mu kanwa, the child
Fulwe brought for them water in (his) mouth.
Dir. obj. menshi ; indir. obj. ba.
IXgoBfo wa ba lapwila menzhi, then he spat out the water
for them.
Dir. obj. menzhi ; indir. obj. ba.
7. In the passive construction the subject is the indirect
object of the active verb. See Chap. VI, sect i (i) ; sect, 3 (c).
8. The object may be an infinitive clause.
Ame nda zanda ka ma dya, I also want to eat you.
Obj. ka ma dya.
9. The predicate may be extended by means of adverbial
conjuncts.
(a) Of Htm: —
Ta ba ch' umboni dinji, they did not see him again.
Dimwi bamwi bantu ba shika, afterwards other people
arrived.
Kgonao baaongo ba nmbuzha, then the wise asked him.
238 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
(b) Of place: — By means of adverb or locative noun.
Inzho mwifa dia mtunme wa hoknta, then in the belly of
the bird he worked the bellows.
U ta Bjayila ano, you must not kill me here.
Ko njasrila a bwina, kill me on the burrow.
(c) Of manner: —
Mbwa ka ba ohenga, how Sulwe deceived them.
Mbwa ka mu ohenga bobo mwenshina, how he thus
deceived his friend.
Banyama ba ka bungana antomwi, the animals gathered
together.
(d) Of purpose: — By means of the infinitive.
Subwe wa ka ya ka aha bwina, Sulwe went to dig a burrow.
(e) Of reason or cause : —
Inzho nchi nda ke zila, now that is why I came.
2. Compotmd Sentences.
Two or more propositions connected together are called a
compound sentence.
a. — Co-ordination.
When two propositions are each in a manner independent of
the other and yet so related as to form one thought they are
said to be connected by way of co-ordination.
I. Two independent clauses are sometimes connected by
means of a copulative conjunction or some equivalent. Copula-
tive conjunctions are rare in Ila ; substantive pronouns are largely
used in sentences of this kind ; generally sentences are placed
following each other, with a logical but not grammatical con-
nexion.
Mnzune mnkando mnkando wa ka ya mwinzhila, wa
yana bantu be enda, wa ba mina, a very large bird
went along the road : he saw people walking (and) he
swallowed them.
Inzho wezo mnzune wa telela mahuba, inzho wa fwa
muzune, then the bird felt the bellows, and then he died.
SYNTAX 239
2. Sometimes the two clauses tmited to form one thought
aie contrasted with each other forming an adversative co-ordinate
sentence.
Mnzora wa kula, shankole wa fwimpa, the elephant grew
big (but) the wart-hog small.
Eale kale nda ka mu fana : inji usnna ndi mu swile, long
ago I loved him, but to-day I hate him.
3. The sentences may be so arranged and connected that
one shall denote a cause or reason of what is expressed in the
other, giving a causal co-ordinate sentence.
Ta mu na ka bomba ; nohi twa ma yayila, you have not
yet become humble ; that is why we kill you.
Inshipi ezho ya kaka ku vhwa kwltashi dia mwana wezo,
ukuti ya ku ojila kale kale, ka chidi mwana, that
bracelet refused to come off the hand of that child, because
it had been put on long ago when she was still a child.
b. — Subordination,
When two sentences are so related that one is dependent
upon the other, as when one defines and explains the other, or
as when one member of a sentence is modified and expanded
into an additional sentence, they are connected by way of sub-
ordination. Subordinate clauses are of three kinds : substantive,
adjective, and adverbial.
Subordinate clauses are put between brackets.
I. Substantive clauses are those which form objects of the
verb. They include direct quotations introduced by the con-
junction ati.
Banyama bonse ba ka fwe nyotwa, ba amb'ati : [' A
tu Inkanke lubilo '.]
All the animals were thirsty, and they said : ' Let us run
swiftly/
Wa ka hununa u la yana [wa ba miintu.]
When you have uncovered you will find it is become a
man.
240 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
2. An adjective clause is one in which an adjective is
expanded into a sentence and employed to give a more exact
definition of a noun or pronoun. Adjective clauses are intro-
duced by relative pronouns. They may be connected with the
subject or the object.
For the rules for forming such clauses see Chap.V, sect. 7.
(a) Connected with the subject : —
U la njaya [banakwe mbo nda dya.]
He, whose children I have eaten, will kill me.
[Lumo Iwanga] nguni [wa lu tolaP]
Who is it who has taken my razor.
Ba shike mwisokwe, wezo [owa ka kwete mubwa]
wa yaya munyaina.
When they arrived in the forest he, who had the dog, killed
an animal.
The antecedent may be omitted.
Owa ka kwete chibia, ati, who had the pot said.
(b) Connected with the object : —
Ushumbwa wa ka zhala bana [ba di ikomi]
Lion had children who were ten.
Inzho wa ba yaya bonse [oba ka dya banakwe.]
Then he killed all who ate his children.
5. An adverbial clause is one used in place of an adverb. It
may express : —
(a) Place: —
Shumbwa, [koko nku nda yhwa,] ka kadi ba ka
dya banako.
Lion, there where I come from, are those who ate thy children.
Wa honuna [mwa kala malombwana.]
She opened where the man sat.
(b) Time : — ^The relation of time is often expressed not by an
adverb but by moods and tenses of the verb. Thus, the follow-
SYNTAX 241
ing sentences will show how the preterite indicative, and the
subjunctive are used.
[A shike kn cliishi chimwi] ba amb'ati : ' Wa londa
nzhiP'
When he arrived at the other country, they asked him :
* What do you want ? '
[Wa ka mana ku luka,] u ka ye ku mnlonga.
When you have finished weaving, go to the river.
[Wa mu yaya,] mu lete ku miinBhi.
When you have killed him, bring him to the village.
[Bu ohe bndio,] wa amb'ati shumbwa:
As soon as it dawned, lion said :
Inzho [a shike budio,] wa kumba bukoko.
Then as soon as he arrived, he brewed beer.
[Ba inane ku mwita,] ba amb'ati :
When they had called him, they said :
[A shike a mtinzhi iimwi,] wa buzha ati :
When he arrived at one village, he asked saying :
(c) Manner : —
Inzho musonzhi n la bona [bu twa Yhwa mwifti dia
miiznne.]
Then the seer will see how we have come out of the bird's
belly.
Tu andana [mbwa ka andana shempela o chivhubwe.]
Let us separate as did the rhino, and hippo.
A tu ende, tu ka sobane, [mbu twa ku sobana o
bachisha bamuzovu.]
Let us go and play as we played with our uncles, the elephants.
(d) Cause, reason, or purpose : —
Ngonao shumbwa wa amb'ati : [' libu mwa ndila
bana] nda leka ku zhala.'
Then lion said: 'As you eat my children I leave off
begetting/
R
i42 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
[Bodia mbu nda kumba bukoko] a mn ka mwite
shiluwe iimwL
As I have brewed beer, go ye and call the other leopard.
[Bodia mbwina molombwana J twala ome.
As you have no husband, marry me.
[Mbu wa dya ohidyo chaugu] ome nda bwela u
menzhi
As you have eaten my food, I shall return. to the water.
[Bodia xnbu ya kaka,] a tu kosole itashi.
As it refuses, let us cut off the hand.
Sect. 2. SYNTAX OF PARTICULAR FORMS.
I. Syntax of the Noun.
The leading rules under the noun apply also to the pronoun.
1. The noun used as the N.A. is in the nominative case.
2. A noun placed after another signifying the same thing to
explain, describe, or qualify it, is in the same case as the other
noun, denominated apposition in the same case.
libu twa sobana o baohisha bamuzovu.
As we played with our uncles the elephants.
3. A noun used to limit another noun by denoting origin,
ownership, or designation, is put in the genitive case, when the
latter signifies a different thing from the former.
(a) In respect to origin, source, or cause.
Dia mana ikani dia muzune.
It is finished the story of the bird.
{d) In respect to ownership or possession.
Kangasulwe ka zhika muchila wa mwaba.
The hare buried the tail of the jackal.
{c) In respect to designation, object or fitness.
Chashika chindi ocha ku ya ku sala meya.
The time arrived for going to select horns.
SYNTAX 243
4. The limiting or governing noun is frequently omitted, or
implied in the use of the particle alone.
lEf gonao basongo ba mnbuzha^ at! : ' No ya chidio njidi
kwi, o ya chimonswe P '
Then the wise asked him, saying : ' Which is the right and
which the left ? ' Lit, of the right it is where, and of the left.
Oya ohidio nji ezhi : oya ohimonswe'nji eshi.
Of the right it is this. Of the left it is this.
The reference is to inzhila, road.
5. There is a nice distinction between the genitive subjective
and the genitive objective. The genitive is termed subjective
when it denotes that which has or does something, e. g. Kubona
kwa bantu, the seeing of people, i. e. the people see. The
genitive is termed objective when it denotes that which suffers
something, or that which is the object of what is expressed by
the noun limited ; e. g. Kubonwa kwa bantu, the being seen
of people, i. e. the people are seen.
In the English New Testament the phrase ' The love of God * may mean
two qoite different things, and is not always understood ; e. g. ' The love of
Christ constraineth us * (a Cor. v. 14) ; here the idea is of Christ's love for
US. But in a John ii. 5 ' In him hath the love of God been perfected ', it is
the Christian's love to God. In Ila no misunderstanding could happen ;
the first would be translated, knfuna kwa Kristi ; the second, Kufunwa kwa
Leza. In the first case kufuna denotes the love with which Christ loves ; in
the other, kufunwa is the love with which God is loved.
6. When several nouns in the genitive follow each other,
each must have the sign of the genitive. '
7. The noun depending upon an active transitive verb is in
the accusative case. The noun depending upon a preposition
is also in the accusative.
8. But a noun may be in the accusative without a preposition : —
(tf) When it is the efficient agent of an active verb in the
passive voice.
Ing'anda ezhi ya ka zakwa mulumi angu.
This house was built by my husband.
R 2
244 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
{b) Some neuter verbs also take the accusative without a
preposition.
Wa Inkanka lul^ilo, he ran (with) swiftness.
XJshnmbwa wa kanka ku pia mtileyu wakwe.
Lion began to burn (at) his beard.
{c) The place of a preposition is often supplied by some
specific modification of the verb. See the remarks on relative
and causative verbs in Chapter VI,
{d) Nouns denoting duration of time are generally put in the
accusative without a preposition. They therefore may be called
adverbs.
Kabwenga a bone mwezhi kutuba mangolezha.
When the hyena saw the full moon in the evening.
2. Syntax of the Adjective.
1. The adjective agrees with its noun in class, number, and
person.
2. When two or more adjectives belong to one noun, they are
put in juxtaposition one after another without a conjunction.
Nda ka bona ing*ombe inamfti inkofti.
I saw a tall lean ox.
3. Where an adjective belongs to two or more nouns, if they
are personal nouns the pronoun ba is used, if neuter the pro-
nouns of cl, 7 pi.
Bana babo o bashimbi bad! bakoftu
Those children and girls are thin.
Ing*ombe impongo shesho shidi inkofa.
Those cattle and goats are lean.
3. Syntax of the Pronoun.
I. The pronoun agrees with its subject, the noun or pronoun
which it represents, in class, ntunber, and person.
The exception to this is when the plural of the 2nd person is
used as a mark of respect.
Achisha, a mu shime kodia.
My imcle, do you stand yonder.
SYNTAX 245
2. Where the pronoun stands for two or more nouns or pro-
nouns in Class i, ba is used.
Banichi o bana o bakando ba amb'atL
The youngsters and children and elders say.
Or the pronoun may agree with neither noun in particular,
but with the- two taken together and considered as plural, either
as persons or things.
Ba ka chita chikani mwaba inkala.
They disputed, the jackal and the crab.
Or the sentence may be put in another way.
Wa ke enda mwaba, ayo inkala ye enda.
The jackal and the crab went.
Lit, — The jackal went : he also the crab went.
3. The personal pronoun of the third person is used not only
as a substitute for a noun but as a complement to it. As a
substitute it is required really only when the noun is omitted.
As complement it is most important, as showing relation of the
noun to other words in the sentence.
The Ila pronouns used as substitutes for nouns do not differ
from the English pronouns : he, she, it, they.
They may be the subject or object of the sentence. The
personal pronoun is not used after a preposition : or as object
after a verb. Substantive pronouns must be used in such
cases.
We enda, we enda, wa ka shika a mampanda a
nzhila, u ka tole ya chimonswe, u ka pinuke,
u ka tole njiyo.
Going on and on you will come to the dividing of the roads :
take the left, turn aside and take that.
Wa ka amba kudi babo, he said to them.
4. The possessive pronoun follows the noun it limits.
5. The possessive pronoun is often used without a limiting
246 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
noun, but its form shows clearly what manner of noun is under-
stood.
Owako ngn wezo ; owangu nga wedia.
That is yours : yonder is mine.
(With any singular noun of cl. i and 2.)
5. When used as object the personal pronoun is placed before
the verb : sometimes, according to rules already discussed, it is
joined to the verb. It is frequendy in its place to form a kind
of double object, i.e. with a noun elsewhere in the sentence.
See above, p. 236.
Ngonao obudisuno ta ba mu luba wezo munta.
Now even to-day they do not forget that man.
Ibwe ledio wa di tola shiimbwa kwisamo.
That stone, the lion took it up the tree.
4. Syntax of the Verb.
1. It must be noticed that very often Ila requires a fullness of
expression where in English we can make a short cut. Thus,
when there are two subjects in a sentence and one predicate.
IJmwi wa bweza mubwa, umwi wa bweza chibia.
One took the dog and the other the pot.
Particles expressing <?r, &c., also require an extended form.
Na u langa, na wa ba nzhi P Is he alive, or what ?
2. The infinitive mood is used :
{a) As a noun either accusative or nominative.
(3) It may be used as an adverbial adjunct to express purpose.
Wezo mubwa we njila mu chibia ku komba.
That dog entered the pot to lick it out.
Inzuki ya ya ku langa musamo kwa solwe.
The bee went to look for medicine from the honey bird.
{c) To express emphasis.
liuzovu wa nwa o ku nwa.
The elephant drank and drank.
SYNTAX 347
3. The subjunctive mood is used:
{a) To give a command or express desire.
A tu ende inzho ta lukanke. Let us go now and run.
IT ka fame ozena, ta ze ku lukanka.
Rise early to-morrow and come and run.
A tu ike, tu dye. Let us cook that we may eat.
Kweza u mu kushe mo. Come and take him out.
Ndo, to kosodi itashi, a tu ku pe budio inji inshipi.
Friend, don't cut off the hand : let us give you another
bracelet.
{d) To express subordination of time.
A ka shike kwa wezo munganga wa ku sonda.
When you arrive at that doctor's he will divine for you.
(f) To express purpose.
A tu ende tu lukanke. Let us go now that we may run.
A tu fumbe mukalo tu ka nwe.
Let us dig a water-hole that we may drink.
Sect. 3. ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
As an illustration of the foregoing rules of syntax, let us take
the following sentence and analyse and parse it : —
Wa usa budio, wa yana na Iwiya, onse ba a mana, wa
yana ko mwala o matwi malamfu o mabala o mu-
lomo mukando.
A compound sentence made up of four simple sentences in
co-ordination.
wa Subject.
I. Jusa Predicate.
budio Extension of predicate.
wa Subject.
2 .yana Predicate.
na Extension of predicate.
Jwiya Object.
\
\
248 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
H
ronse Enlargement of object.
ba Subject.
a Object.
\mana Predicate.
4.1
/wa Subject.
yana Predicate.
ko Extension of predicate*
mwala o matwi o ) ^v .
, , , > . . . Object,
mabala o mulomo J
\malamfu, mukando . . . Enlargements of object.
Parsing : —
Wa, pers. pro., ist cl., 3rd pers. sing., nom. to usa.
iisa, verb, intr. act. indie, aorist, 3rd pers. sing., agreeing with
its nom. wa.
budio, adverb of manner modifying usa.
wa, pers. pro., ist cL, 3rd pers. sing., nom. to yana.
yana, verb, trans, act. indie, aorist, 3rd pers. sing., agreeing with
its nom. wa.
na, adverb of negation modifjdng yana.
Iwiya, noun, ql. 9 a, 3rd pers. sing., accusative governed by
yana.
onse, indefinite adjective, cl. 3, 9 a (refers to meya).
ba, pers. pro., 3rd pers. plur., cl. i, nom. to mana.
a, pers. pro., cl. 9 a, 3rd p. plur., accusative governed by mana.
mana, verb, trans, act. indie, aorist, 3rd pers. pi. agreeing widi ba.
wa, as above, nom. to yana.
yana, as above.
ko, adverb of place modifying yana.
mwala, noun, cl. 2, sing., 3rd pers., accusative governed by
yana.
o, o, o, conjunctions.
matwi, noun, cl. 5, 3rd pers. pi., accusative governed by yana.
malamfa, adj. of quality, agreeing with matwi, cl. 5, pi.
SYNTAX 249
mabala^ noun, cl. 3, 3rd pers. plur., accusative governed by
yana.
mulomo, n., cL 2, 3rd pers. sing., accusative governed by yana.
mnkando, adjective of quality, agreeing with mulomo, cl. 2,
sing.
FINAL EXERCISES.
These exercises will serve to test the student's knowledge of
the grammar.
1. In the Grammar locative particles are given under the
heading of nouns, pronouns, &c. ; let the student now make for
himself a table showing all these forms together and their mean-
ings. Then they should be applied to nouns chosen from the
vocabularies, such as: ibwe, inkomba, impako, bwina, chim-
pata. Sec.
2. Explain carefully the meanings of the following : — landa,
landwa, landila, nandila, landula, landulula, landuka, landudika,
landukila, landusha, landulwa, nandwila, landukile; langa,
lanzha, nanzha, dilangila, langidila, langisha, langidizha, lan-
zhizha ; tamba, tambula, tambila, tambika, tambikizha, tambu-
zhanya tambala, tambuzha; tila, tidila, tika, tikaisha, tikaika,
tikula ; zamba, zambaila, zambila, zambuhila.
3. Turn to the Eng.-Ila vocabulary and learn what is said
under : account, ought, like, equal, fellow, first, since, side.
4. Explain the following forms and contractions : — Nch'ona'no,
to mboni, todi, tedi, ngadi, ngwidi, ngodi, ngudi, temo, tomo,
teo, shimo, ntudi, njidi, kedio, kotemo, koteo.
5. What is the force of the following sufl^es and prefixes ?
Wh^e they involve any phoneticcbangesexplain what these are: —
di-, -ika, n-, Hii, -ine, -ile, -ya, -eka, -ulula.
6. What are the diflferent meanings of: o, ku, a, na ?
7. When the following letters undergo phonetic change what
do they become ? Give examples : — a, u, w, 1, j.
8. How are augmentadves and diminutives formed in Ua?
Give ten examples of each.
250 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
9. How do the Baila express : more, most, very, really, just,
first, again, before, as soon as ?
10. What is the difference between kdio and ka16, shdlo and
shal6, ddio and adi6, mbo and imbo, ndime and indime, ngao,
ingao and ingo, into toto and intuto ?
11. What are the meanings of: nchi bamba, shi bambi,
ndina ku bamba, shi bambile, shina ku bamba, chi nta bambi,
ndi ne nda ka bamba, chi nta na ku bamba, shi na ka bambile,
shi nti bambi, ndi na ni nka bamba, shi ka bambi, shi ka ka
bambi, nta bambi, nta ka kambi ?
12. Translate: mu ta ngumi. Explain the change in the
verb, and cite the rules governing changes of the same kind in
other verbs.
1 3. What is the passive voice of the following : — dya, iya, ti,
ita, leta, lanzha, selusha, iba, uzha ?
14. Analyse the following : —
'Wezo muntu mudtmbushi ngu mwa ka shtmwina inzhila, a
shike budio a mampanda a nzhila walo wa pinuka wo ona, mbu
mwa ka amb'ati : wa ka shika a mampanda a nzhila u ka pinuke.'
Parse the words in italics,
15. Explain the formation of the following words: — chipaidilo,
shilwengu, chalwengu, nikubabobo, mudiezhina, chichezho, chab-
wanga, chilombwana, shichimbembe, diakomboka, inkambidizho,
kufwinsha.
16. Translate the following into Ila : —
The Tortoise said to the Ape: *My friend, let us go and
gather fruit in the forest.' The ape agreed and they went off.
It was the tortoise who arrived first, and picked up some of the
fruit from the ground. When he had finished eating them he
called his friend, saying : * Ape, my friend, I have found fruit :
come here.' The ape came and climbed up the tree: the
tortoise tried to climb but always fell back again. As he was
unable to climb, he said to the ape : * Gather me some fruit;
I am imable to climb.' The ape answered : * It was you who
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 251
came first : how can you beg of me ? ' The ape then went on
eating. When he was satisfied they went off home. The
tortoise did not arrive until sunset. He took a stick and split it
down the middle, then, when the ape was still asleep, he cut
a number of sharp pegs and put them in a bag. Next morning,
while it was still early, the tortoise went to the ape and said :
' My friend, let us go again and eat fruit.' ' To-day,' he said
again, ' I shall put fruit in my bag.' When they arrived at the
tree, the ape climbed up first ; the tortoise stayed below. The
ape laughed very much and despised his friend because he could
Dot climb. But it was the tortoise's cunning only. The tortoise
sat talking and smoking and making the ape laugh. At last the
ape was satisfied, and said, ' let us go home.' Now before this,
the tortoise had hammered the pegs around the tree ; so when
the ape jumped down, he fell upon a peg and was killed. The
tortoise then skinned him, cutting off the paws, the head, and the
tail. He put the meat on his shoulders, and went home. That
is how the tortoise deceived the ape.
This IS pari of a Suto taU,
ILA TALES FOR READING AND TRANSLATION.
The Hare and the Lion.
Sulwe wa mwita shumbwa, ati : ' Achisha, a mu ka zhime
kodia. Ome nda ya mululu modia.' A shike wa ya ku njila, wo
ompolola shumbwa, ati : ' Uwe, shumbwa, tenta koko mudilo, u
zbingulushe bodia lulu lonse, ome nd'ona'no.' Ushumbwa wa
tenta mudilo : mudilo u la zaka, u shike budio afwafwi, sulwe we
njila mu bwina. Lulu lonse Iwa pia, kangasulwe mbu ka ke njidila
mu bwina. Lu mane budio ku pia lulu ka vhwa ansengwe
kangasulwe. Ka alabana mu mimbi, ka ya ku lezha shumbwa,
ati: 'To bwene ome, musama, ndina ku pia. To bwene
imimbi ezhi ? ' Ushumbwa ati : ' Ame mpa ko musamo, ndu ku
ya.' Wa mu chelela matovu, wa mu- pa. Wa lu langa lulu
lukando oludi bwizu bunjibunji, wa ya ku ona shumbwa momo
252 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
mukati ka luliL Sulwe wa zhingulusha mudilo u mabadi; u
mwenzhe shumbwa afwafwi mudilo wa dila. Sulwe wa ingula,
ati: 'U to didila mudilo wezo, u la pia/ Mudilo wa shika
afwafwi, ushumbwa wa kanka ku pia mulevu wakwe. Odimwi
wa shika mudilo a mubidi, boza bwakwe bwa kanka ku pia.
Dimwi wa pia chinichini, wa fwa. A fwe bobo kangasulwe ka
lukanka, ka amb'ati : ' Nda mu chenga mwalo wangu/ Ka ka
shika kodia ka ya ku kala. Pele ; ka mana.
The Elephant and the Hare.
Ba ka yana muchelo munjebele muzovu o sulwe, ba ka yana
ko muchembele u zakile ku chanda. Kwaka ita shumbwa,
wa yana wezo muchembele, wa ka chela ko munjebele ku mu
yumbula, ati : * Nshi shidyo nshi ndya kono ome/ Ushumbwa
wa buzha, ati : * No wezo muchelo izhina nd'izhina nzhi ? ' Wa
mu shimwina, ati : * Munjebele/ Ati : 'Ko ya ku amba bobo
mwinzhila, u ka shimwine beenzhinoko, mu ka dye wezo ngu
mwa yana koko.' A shike akati shumbwa a batezhi, wa wa : a
shike ku beenzhina ba buzha ati : ' Muchelo nzhi ngu wa ya ku
dya ? ' Wa amb'ati : * Nda wa akati, nda luba izhina.' Ku
kuya muzovu wa ya ko, ati, nka buzhe izhina. Miizovu a shike
ku muchembele, wa mu shunwina, ati : * Muchelo wezo munjebele.
Ko ya bu imba : Munjebele, munjebele. U ta luba.' A shike
ngona a ka wila shumbwa, aze muzovu wa wa, wa di luba izhina
dia munjebele. A ka shike muzovu kwa ya sulwe, a shike ku
muchembele wezo, wa buzha, ati * No izhina dia musamo ngu ba
ti ka ba luba be ziza kono, nd'izhina nzhi ? ' Wa mu shimwina,
ati : ' Munjebele.' Wa mu pa o kalangu. Wa mu anga mu-
shingo kalangu, ati : ' No ya ku wa u ka ambe : munjebele,
munjebele.* Wa shika awo a butezhi, wa wa, wa amba : * Mu-
njebele.' Wa shika sulwe awo ngu ba ku shiti o beenzhina, wa
chela wezo muchelo munjebele, wa dya. Beenzhina ba mu
buzha, ati : ' Sa u zhiba izhina ? ' A dye, a dye, wa ba shimwina,
ati : ' Mimjebele : ka mu dya budio.' A mane ku dya, sulwe
wa amb'ati : ' A tu ende ku menzhi, ome ndi kwizhi, tu ka nwe
ILA TALES FOR TRANSLATION 253
menzhu Ba mane kiinwa, bo ona munshi mwizhiba ledio. • . /
{A short parHon of the story is best omitted here. It describes
a nasfy trick paid by Suhoe upon the elephant ^ which led to the latter
being put to death by the other animals, Sulwe is afterwards found
out^ and another elephant seizes him), . . . Muzovu wa mu kwata,
ad : * Ndiwe wa beesha budio mukando.' Sulwe wa amb'ati :
* Qme ni mu nkwata bodia, mu ta ka ngumi ebwe, shi fwi. A mu
ka ngmnine a bwina bwa namunkwize : ngwinti nka fwe.' Ano-
kuti ka la ba chenga. Ba shike a bwina, ba ambe ba ka ume,
ke npla umbwina. Umwi we njizha itashi umbwina, wa ka
kwata ka mwendo, ka amba umbwina, ati : ' Indime wa kwata,
wa kwata izanda.' A telele bobo, owa ka ka kwata wa leka,
ati : ' Atela cbebeni, nda kwata muzanda/ Ba leta iamba, ba
sha, kalo kodia ka yaku vhwa, ke zila ku nzhila, ka peswa isuso,
ka sanduka, ka ba muntu. Ka shike, ka buzha muzovu, ati :
' Mu sha nzhi momo, achisa ? ' Ati : ' Tu la sha kangasulwe,
ka ka tu sbia momo umbwina.' Ati : ' Mu lete kono : nshe ko/
Ka sha ko, iamba dia kuka. Ka amb'ati: 'Tu kankamine
kwi iamba? Twa kankamina kwisamo tadi kwatidi. A mu
lete mwindi, tu kankamine ngao/ Ka kankamina lushonto-
shonto, ka sha, odimwi iamba dia kuka. Ati: 'A mu teye
chanza, achisha, tu kakamine awa.' Ka mu yasa : ka mu yasa.
Ke njila mumona momo umbwina. Munyati e njizhe itashi, wa
ka kwata. Ka imba Iwimbo Iwa kako, ndulona lolo, ati : 'Indime
wa kwata, wa kwata izanda.* Ba amb'ati : ' A tu ka sonde/ Ba
ya ku sonda kwa shimunyeu. Shimunyeu wa amb'ati : ' Inzho
mwa ka bona, mu ka ka kwate budio.' Ba zhoka. Ba shike
budio ba la sha. Ka budika kwinzhila, ka le za bu uma kanko-
bele, ka shika, ka buzha, ati ' Mu la sha nzhi ? ' Ati : ' Tu la
sha wezo owa ka chisa mwenzhinokwesu owa ka mu yaya.'
Ngonao balo ba luba, ba bula o ku nra kwata : ka ba nanga
iamba* Ka sha ko. Iamba dia kuka. Ati : ' Munyati, achisha,
a mu lete chanza, tu kankamine ngao.' Wa mu yasa odimwi
Dgona, ke njila umbwina. Ba ka kwata, ka imba Iwimbo Iwako,
ati : ' Indime wa kwata ; wa kwata izanda.' Odimwi shumbwa
254 GRAMMAR OF THE ILA LANGUAGE
wa amb'ati : ' A tu ka fumbe mukalo, mu ka kwate fulwe, tu ka
bike budimbo a mubidi wa fiilwe, tu la ka mu yana/ Ba ya ku
fumba mukalo. Ba bika fulwe budimbo, ba mu bika u menzhi.
Sulwe wa shika, a ambe a nwe menzhi, fulwe wa foma, wa mu
diata itende, wa kakatila o, wa mu luma meno, meno a kakatik
o ; ba shika, ba mu yana o sulwe, ba mu yaya sulwe.
END OF PART I
PART II
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
REMARKS
I. The student is not to expect that he will find every Ila word in these
vocabularies. There are bound to be still thousands of unrecorded words.
Nor is he to expect to find every possible modification of those words which
are recorded. Rules are given in the Grammar for the formation, e. g., of
the plural of nouns, and, therefore, excepting a few which are inserted for
spedal reasons, he will not find plural nouns in the vocabularies. Many
of the modifications of the verb are inserted, but there are many more that
are in use. Having, however, mastered the rules for the formation of the
verbal species, the passive voice, &c, he should have no difficulty with
such words.
3. Words are recorded in alphabetical order, according to the first letter
of the words themselves, not of the roots.
3. The student may often come upon words which, apparently, are not in
the vocabularies, but which really are there only disguised through some
phonetic change. Having mastered what is said in Chapter U and else-
where on these changes he ought to experience no difficulty in tracing these
words ; but the following hints may be helpful :—
If you cannot find a word b^;inning with Afw, Kw^ Bw, look under the
vowel following the w. Thus : —
For Kwimba look for Imba.
,, Kwisamo „ „ Isamo.
„ Mwivhu „ „ Ivhu.
„ Bwimba „ „ Imba.
When yon cannot trace a word b^inning with e, look under t , because
e = a •¥ i. Thus, for Evhu look under Ivhu.
When you cannot find words beginning with Mu, Kuy A, remember that
many nouns of cL 8 lose an i when they take those prefixes ; therefore look
under 1. Thus, for Munganda, Kunganda, Anganda, look under Inganda.
Similarly with verbs beginning with if or m, if you cannot find them in
their place, look under t .
Thus, Npla is entered under i « injUa,
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Acc.
signi(i<
» Accnsative case.
Adj.
f>
Adjective.
Adv.
n
Adverb.
Aff.
99
Affirmative.
Alt.
»9
Alternative.
Aor.
99
Aorist tense.
Cap.
1)
Capable spedes.
Cans.
))
Causative species.
Cf.
99
Confer (Compare).
CI.
»
Class.
Conj.
9t
Conjunction or con-
junctive.
Cop.
}}
Copula.
Dem.
)>
Demonstrative.
E.g.
»
For example.
Emph.
♦ >
Emphatic, empiui'
sized.
£sp.
99
Especially.
Fig.
»
Figurative.
For.
»
Foreign.
Le.
)>
That is.
IndeC
))
Indefinite.
Indie.
»
Indicative mood.
Inteij.
>>
Interjection.
Interr.
>»
Interrogative.
Lit.
If
Literally.
Loc.
99
Locative.
N.
})
Noun.
N.3,&c,
>> »
Noun of class 3, &c.
Nom.
»
Nominative.
N. prop.
signifies Proper noun.
Neg.
))
Negative.
Num.
tf
Numeral.
Ord.
it
Ordinal.
P.
»»
Person.
Part.
))
Particle.
Pass.
t9
Passive voice.
Perf.
»)
Perfect tense.
Pers.
))
Persistent.
Phr.
t9
Phrase.
PI.
))
Plural.
Poss.
»}
Possessive.
Pref.
>)
Prefix.
Pro.
))
Pronoun.
Prov.
})
Proverb.
Q.v.
»>
Which see.
Rel.
»
Relative.
Rep.
>)
Repetitive
bpecie&
Rev.
>»
Reversive.
Sp.
>>
Species.
Stat.
»>
Stative.
Snbj.
»
Subject ; subjunc-
tive mood.
Subs.
»
Substantive.
T.
1)
Transitive.
V.
)>
Verb.
V.i.
>)
Verb, intransitive.
Voc-
»
Vocative.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
A What-is-it, a tbing the name of
which yoa do not know or cannot
call to mind, n, 7. ohinini; e,^.
bring the what-do-yon-call-it,
leta ohinini. Other classifiers
may be added to the root -nini
according to the subject of conver-
sation ; e.g: in making of trees,
mnnini, a what-do-yon-call-it
tree.
What's his namk, a person whose
name yon do not know or cannot
call to mind, nini, i ; pi. ba-
nini ; ^.^. call so-and-so, kwita
muninia
Abandon, to, v,t, kn leka, kn
longa, ku lokeab*. To a. an
old village, ka kmsa nmnshi
wa kale. To a. a custom, kn
leka ohiansa. To a«, desist
from a porpose, kn leka, kn
lekeaha ; ^.^. I intended to kill
him, but I desisted, B'da ka
hnpula ka nra yaja, inaho nda
lekesha. To forsake, desert, kn
ahia.
Abase, to, to cast down, phr. ka
wisha 'nahi. To hnmble, ka
bonsha^ To abase or hnmble
oneself, ka dibonsha.
Abassment, If . 5. kabanaha, ka-
bonxhiwa, kabomba.
Self-abasement, n, 5. kodibonaha.
Abate, to, v. t. ka yoaa, ka oba-
loka, ka ahimbolaka. Of a
flood, ka yoaa, ka pompa. Of
a river, ka obaluka. Of a
swelling, ka ahimbalaka. v. /.
to abate pain by appljring medi-
cine, ka ahimbalola. To a. or
decrease, v. i, ka twetana ; v, /.
ka twetanya.
Abbreviate, to, 9./. to shorten,
knfirinaliA.
Abbreviation, n. 5. kofwinaha.
Abdomen, below the navel, if. 3.
ibomba. Above the navel, if. 3.
. ifti. When distended with food,
If. 7. chifti.
Abhor, to, v. t. ka sadisha.
Abhorrence, if. 5. kasadisha.
Abide, to, v, i, ka kala. To a.,
or remain behind, ka shala.
Ability : power, if. 8. insana.
Able, to be, pAr. kadi nsana; e.g.
he b able to do all things, adi
naana aha ka ohita ahonse. To
be able to do, v.i. ka konaha,
ka koma ; e.g. 1 am not able to
do this, Shi konzha chechi; I
am able to build, Nda koma
kaaaka.
•ABLE. The English suffix -able is
represented by the suffix -ika or
-eka of the capable species. See
Gram., chap, vi, sect, i, 5,
Ablution, if. 5. kaaamba.
Aboard : to go aboard,embark, v. i.
ka ohila. To put aboard, load
a canoe, v. /. ka chiaha.
Abolish, to, v. t. ka manya.
Abolition, if. 9. lamanyo.
Abominable, to be, v.t. ka
aadika.
Abominable, adj. -sadiahi.
Abomination, abominable conduct.
If. 3/. mafiinaL A person who
does such things, if. i a, ahima-
fdnaL
Abort, to, v.t. ka sowa. To
cause alxntion, v. /. ka sosha.
Abortion, if. 6. kaaowe. Used as
an imprecation, ndiwe kaaowe.
Abound, to, to be rich, v.u ka
vhaba. To possess, v. t. ka ftia.
To be in abundance, v. i. ka vhala.
ABOXJT,prep. around,manibadinia;
e,g, they are sitting around
258
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
him, ba la kala mumbadi
xnwakwe.
prep, concerning, a. I speak to yon
concerning your customs, Nda
ma ambila a shianza shenu.
Expressed also by the relative
suffix merely.
On the point of. Use the verb ku
ti, to say; e^g, I was about to
hit him, but did not, inti mu
me, inaho nda leka; he was
on the point of death, but re-
covered, a ti a fwe ixiBho wa,
pona ; when he was about to
kill the lion, the lion bit him, ni
a ti a yaye shumbwa, ushum-
bwa wa mu Inma.
To go about, or round a thing, v. t .
ku zhinguluka.
Above, adv, mwiseulu, kwi-
seulu, ezealu ; prep, kwiseolu
ku, eseulu a ; $,g. Lewanika is
above all the chiefs, Ii. udi eaeolu
a baami bonse ; I put iron above,
or, on top of my house, Nda
bika chela eseulu a nganda.
Surpassing. Use the verb ku basha ;
e.g, I like this above all things^
nda Kanda oheohi ku baaha
bintu bionse.
Abrade, to, to mb off skin, v. /.
ku ku Bupula; v.i. ku bu«
puka.
Abreast, to sit or stand abreast,
ku bamba, ku bambana; e,g,
the people sit abreast, bantu
badi bambene, or, badi bam-
bile. Fig. ku bamba isasa.
Abridge, to, to shorten, v. /. ku
fwinsha.
Abroad : to go abroad, to another
country, ku ya ku ohishi
ohimwl. To be noised abroad,
V, i, ku ibuka, ku ya impuwo.
To noise abroad, v, i, ku ibusha.
Abscess, n. 3. iute. To open an
a., ku anda ; the abscess is sup-
purating again, bwa tumbila
bushila odimwl mwiute.
Abscond, to, v, i. ku loboka.
To cause to a., v. t. ku lobosha.
Absconder, n, i . muloboshi.
Absent. He is absent,. te6y tekd.
temd ; he is absent from school,
temd mu ohikolo. See Gram,,
ch, tr, sect, 1,4 ; sect, 2,4 ; sect,'^, 4.
Absorb, to, v,t, ku nwa, ku
nwina.
To dry up, v, /. ku zumya.
Abstain, to, v. i, ku dilesha ; e, g.
Christians abstain from drinking
strong beer, Bakxisti ba la di-
lesha ku nwa mukuku.
Abundance, n. 4. bwala.
Abundant, ad/, -nji-nji, with noun
prefixes; e.g. abundant food,
bidyo binjibinJL To be a.,
sufficient, v. i, ku ludila.
Abuse, to, by using abusive lan-
guage, V, t, ku tuka.
Accept, to, to receive, v.t. ku
tambula. To accept tidings,
believe, v, /. ku vumina.
Accident, if.3.//.malowe, malele.
Accidentally, adv, ohamalowe.
Accompany, to, v, /. ku shindi-
kila. You will accompany me,
/it, we will go with yon, tu la ya
ase ; to accompany any one who
goes to give thanks or to salute,
V. /. ku sekeleaha.
According, according Xo^prep, ku ;
e.g, we will do according to his
will, tu la ohita ku kuianda
kwakwe.
Account, reason, affair, matter,
iu 6. kambo. It is on that
account, for that reason, nku
■kambo kako, nku kako ; e,g,
it is on that account I came here,
nku kako nku nde zila kono ;
it is not on that account, for that
reason, inko kako; on that
account, kambo kako ; on ac-
count of what? why? kambo
nahi?
Accumulate, to, v,i, ku bu-
ngika, ku bunganya; v,i, ku
bungana.
Accurately. Use the intensive
form of the verb ; $, g. read ye
accurately, well, a mu badishe.
Accuse, to, phr, ku bika kambo,
ku tolela mulandu, ku oheche-
lela ; e, g, they accuse him to the
chief, ba mu tolela mulandu
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
259
Icn mwami, bamn bika kambo
ka mwami, ba mu oheehelela
ku mwami, ba mu ihimwinina
kxL mwami. To a. falsely, 9. /.
ku lengelela, ku lengeleaha.
Accustomed, to be, v,i, ku ihibi-
dila, ku BOloka; €,^. I am
accnstomed to speak the truth,
ndi ahibidile ku ahinliha. I
am accustomed to do as I tell you ,
ndi ahibidile ku chita bu nda
ku shimwina ; they are not yet
accustomed to the laws, ta ba na
ku ahibidila imbeta; ku ao-
loka seems to have also the idea
of being habituated to a thhig and
likmg it ; e,^. I am used to moot-
ing, nda aoloka ku Aisa : i, e.
I can shoot and I like shooting.
Ache, to, v, i, ku chiaa.
Ache, n, 4. bulwaahi. Toothache,
If. 9. lushinga. See Pain.
Acid, to be, v,L ku papa;^.
muohelo u la latela buu.
Acknowledge, to, v,t. ku vu-
mina.
Acquaint, to, 9. /. ku ahibya.
Acquit, to, v. /. ku leka.
Across, to go across a river, ku
landnka mulonga. To take a
person across a river, v,t, ku
landuflha. He goes across by
the bridge, wa landukila a
bulalu. To place across, as a
thing across the road, v,t, ku
ohiamika. To put across, one
thing across another, v,t, ku
ishanya.
Act, to, V, t, ku ohita.
Act, ccmduct, n, 8. inkani ; work,
n, 3. mudimo.
Action, doing, n, 5. kuchita;
lawsuit. If. 2. mulandu.
Adam's Apple, n, 8. imbozoboso.
Add, to, to a full pot, v. /. ku
songa. To add up, as figures,
9. /. ku Bungizha, ku swanga-
nya. To add to anything, v,t,
kuBungidila. To add one state-
ment to another, as different wit-
nesses, also of £Eilse accusations,
ku aongelela.
Addled, to be, v, i, ku-uwa.
Address, to, in public, ku ahi-
muna makani mumbale dia
bantu, or, ku buahu bwa
bantu.
Adhere, to, to stick to, v. /. ku
kakatila, ku Bhama; e,g. they
adhere to their bad wa3rs, ba la
kakatila ku shianaa aliabo;
the clay sticks to me, bulongo
bwa nshaminina; the affair
sticks to him, he can't get rid of
it, is always talking about it,
kambo ka mu Bhama; not to
leave, persist in, v. /. ku suma-
nana; e.g. they adhere to their
disputes, ba sumanana shikani
■habo ; to stick together, v. i. ku
kamantana; v.t, ku kaman-
tanya.
Adherence, n. 5. kukakatUa.
Adherent, adj, -kakatile.
Adhesive, adJ, -lamaushi; Jig,
this medicine is sticky, lit. is
birdlime, miiaamo weau mbu-
dimbo.
Adieu, to bid farewell, v,t, ku
laaha.
Farewell salutations : To the one
remaining : Remain well ! Still
stay! shala kabotu! ko obi
shiti!
To the one leaving : Go well !
Still go ! ko ya kabotu ! ko chi
ya!
Admirable, to be, v, i, ku ebeka.'
Admirable, adj\ -ebeshi.
Admire, to, to gaze at, v.t, ku
eba, ku ebela; e,g, I admire
tiiat fine woman, nde eba mu-
kaintu wezo mubotu. To a.
oneself, ku dieba. To cause to
a., V, t. ku ebezha.
Admonish, to, z^. /. ku bula.
Admonition, n, 5. kubula.
Admit, to, v, /. to cause to enter,
ku njizha.
Adorn, to, by dressing, v.t, ku
samika, ku samikisha. To a.
oneself, ku disamika. To orna-
ment, V, t, ku ebeBha.
Adopt, to : To take an infant from
its mother and adopt it, ku ftin-
gula. To adopt an older child.
S 3
26o
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
ku lela. Recompense paid by
parents if they resume charge of
their child after it has been
adopted, n, 2. mulelwe.
Adore, to, to love very much, v. t.
ku fiinisha. To honour, v,t,
ku lemeka. To worship, v,t.
ku laxnbila.
Adult, n, i. mukando.
Adulterer, Adulteress, n. i a,
referring to one act only, shibu-
mambe ; referring to more than
one act, shimamambe.
Adultery, n, 3/. mamambe. Of
a single act, n, 4. buxnambe.
Partner in, n. i a, umaxnba. To
commit a., ku ohita mamambe,
ku ba ahimamambe. Child of,
mwana omaJiuna; pL bana
bomahuna. Partner in, his,
ohimaswakwe, kasua kakwe,
umambakwe. Permitted, ar-
ranged adultery, n. 9. lubambo.
Advance, to, to go forward, /Ar.
ku 7a kuznbele. To go in a.,
precede, v. i, ku aolola. To a.,
be promoted, v, i. ku sumpuka.
To a., promote, v.t. ku sum-
pula.
Adversary, n, 1 a. my, ahinko-
ndoma; thy, ahinkondonoko,
&c. See Enemy.
Advice, n, 5. kubula. Mutual a.,
n. 5. kubulana.
Advise, to, v.t, ku bula. To
advise eadi other, ku bulana;
ku bula is used of a messenger
going from village to village
spreading tidings ; cf, our English
idiom, to advise of some news.
Adviser, n. i. xnubudi. The
word is applied to an old woman
who instructs girls before their
marriage.
Adze, n. 3. ibeso. To adze, v, /.
ku beza.
Affair, n. 6. kambo ; n. 3. ikani ;
n, 8. inkaxii.
Affection : love, n. 5. kuftma ;
mutual a., n. 5. kufanana.
Affirm, to, strongly, v,L i. ku
pinga.
Affliction, n, 4. bulwaihi.
Afoot : to travel afoot, ku enda o
matende.
Afore, adv, ambele.
Aforetime, tuiv. kale, kalekale.
Afraid, to be, v, i, ku tia. To
tremble with fear, v.t. ku aha-
ngama, ku tutuma. To make
afraid, v. L ku tiaha. Of a per-
son who is afraid to go when sum-
moned because of a fault, v. i. ku
leyauka. To be a coward, ku
ba mukandu, ku ba nawala.
After, cuiv. munahi ; prep, xnu-
nshi dia, mununa ya, xnwiaule
dia; e.g. they came one after
another, ba ka shika umwi
munahi dia umwi. To go after,
follow, V. i. ku ohidila.
Afternoon : about 3 p.m., aka-
bonzhabembeahi ; later, diau-
ngaunga, mangoleaha. To start
a journey in the afternoon, v.t,
ku iaukila.
Afterward, adv. munahi.
Again, adv. odimwi. Again and
again, odimwi, odixnwi. Use is
also made of the verb : To return
to, bu bwelela; e.g. he again
entered the house, wa bwelela
we njila munganda. To do a
thing over again, v. t. ku auxmi-
nana, ku lolola. See chap, vf ,
sect. I, 8, 9.
Age, years, n, 2. pi. miaka. What is
your age ? udi niaka yongai P
Aged, to be, v, i. ku ohexnbala ;
v. /. to age, ku chembaaha.
Aged, adj. -ohembele.
Aged Person, n. i. muohembele ;
very aged, weak, n. i. xnupami.
Agedly : like an aged person, n. 7.
ohipami; e.g. he walks like a
mupami, u le enda ohipami.
Agent : one who does on behalf of
another, n. i. muchitidi.
Aggravate : make greater, v. /•
ku komeaha.
Agitate, to : to stir up people,
V. t. ku ahinikiaha ; to shake,
V. t. ku Bunganya, ku tapasha.
Ago, adv, kale; long ago, kale-
kale.
Agree, to, v, t. ku vumina. To
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
261
agree to, allow, v.t, ka vnmi-
xdna. To agree together, v, /.
kn vumininana.
Ahead, ado, ambele, kninbele.
To go ahead, v.i, kn solola, ku
7a knmbele. To send ahead,
V, t, ka solosha^
Aim: to take aim, ka shina menso.
To miss an aim, ka iaha. To
aim at, to intend to go to a place,
9. /. ka hapola.
Air, n. i. xnosa. To spread things
in the air to dry, v, t. ka aanika.
Ajar, to be ajar, v.p, ka ohdkwa.
To leave ajar, shut partially, v, t.
kaohdka.
Alarm, n. 2. mokanga. To raise
an a., ka oma mokanga.
Alas! inierf. Mawel mawe ba-
diol
Alike, to be, v. i. ka koshana.
To cause to be, v. t, ka koshanya.
Alike, adj, -koahene.
Alive, to be, 9. i. ka pona, ka
All, adj. -onse prefixed by personal
proooons. See Gram.^ chap, iv,
sect. 3. All the men, baLomb-
waiut bonse; all the country,
ehiahi ehonae. Is this all!
Fele haP
All right I mbabo I
Allegiance, to own, v.t. ka
lemeka. See note, Ila^Eng.
Vocab. 00 ditaja.
Allot, to, v. /. ka aba. To allot
to, distribute among, v. t. ka
abiUi.
Allotment : share, pottioo, n. 7.
fthahilo.
Allow, to, 9. /. ka innrinlna.
Almighty, THE, n. lo. Uahinsaii*-
Alone, ado. ich«; e.g. I went
alone, nds k» enda iebe. A
man who tiafds aboot alone,
n-io. alriniwiaiMtaicbii.
Aloud, to qxak aloud, v. i. ka
ambidia* ka poaonmka*
Already, ado. kale ; t.g. I have
already done it, ndi eld ehit»
forms of the subs. pro. See Gram.,
chap, V, sect. 2,e\e,g.l also, ame;
they also, abo, abalo.
Alter, to, v. t, ka sandula ; v, i,
kusandaka.
Alterable, to be, v. i, ku san-
dudika ; adj, -sandudiahi.
Although, conj. nl.
Altogether, see above, all ; e. g,
altogether they were ten, bonse
ka badi ikruni ; ach. konae,
konsekonse; unitedly, antomwi.
Always, cuiv. shikwense, dioniie.
Am, expressed by the copula. See
chap. ix.
Amaze, to, v. t, ka Iwesa. ku
Bosha. To be amazed, v, i. ku
Iweswa, ku aowa. To be very
greatly amazed, ku fwa intu-
ntwa.
Ambassador, ff. i a, ohinkombwa ;
pi. baahinkombwa.
Ambush : to lie in ambush, as
around a village, ku onenena.
To hide in ambush, v. i. ku suba.
Amid, amidst, prep, akati ka.
Amiss, cuh, kabiabe.
Among, amongst, prep, mu, akati
ka ; e.g. he sits among the men,
wa kala mu balombwana.
Amputate, to, v. t. ku koaola.
Amuse, to: to make laugh, v.t.
kuaaaha.
Ancestor, n. i a., ahikale ; //.
baahikale.
Ancient : as an adjective use kale
kala and gen. part. ; e.g. ancient
customs, ahiansa aha kala kale*
And, amj. o ; joins together noons.
Expressed also in conj. form of
subs. pro. Ama, and I, &c.
Angel^ If. i«. far, anjala; pi.
banjale.
Anger, n. 4. bukadi.
Angle, n. 7. chikokola.
of a house, n. 2. mwako.
Angrily, ado. cbahnlradi
Angry, to be, v.i. ka lemana,
ku kalala, ku lapukila, ku ba
Also is CApitMcdintheconioMtiTe
to anger, make angry, v.t.
lamaaha, ku kalaihaj kn
Jntiahis.
262
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
to be angry with, v, /. ku lema-
nina, ku kaladila.
Animal, n. i. munyama.
Animal nature, n. 4. bunyama.
Manner, custom of animal, n, 7.
ohinyama.
Female animal. munyama muBha-
Bhi. Little a., n, 6. kanyama.
List of Animals.
{Fcr birds, insects, fish, see under
those headings^
Domestic animals^
Bull, muohende,//. ba-.
Calf, mombe,//. bombe. A weaned
calf, imfiinguslii.
Cat, kase, pi. bakaze.
Cow, s, and //. impwizhi.
Dog, mubwa, //. babwa.
Draught ox, musune, pi. ba-^
Goat, s, and//, impongo.
Head of cattle; cattle, s. 9SiA.pL
ing'ombe.
Kid, kaponso, pU tu-.
Lamb, kambelele,//. ta-; mwa-
nambelele.
Pup, small dog, kabwa.
Ram, shembwe,//. bashembwe.
Sheep, X. vtApL imbelele.
Wild animals.
Ant-bear, ohinengwe, pL baohi*
nengwe.
Ape : monkey, sokwe,//. basokwe ;
dim, kanga-sokwe. Baboon,
pombo, pi, bapombo ; dim, ka-
nga-pombo.
Buffalo, munyati, //. banyati, or
bamunyati ; dim, kanga-mu-
nyati. Herd of, inyati.
Bushbuck, shicliibabala,//. bashi-
ohibabala ; shioliibaiigo, //.
bashiohibango ; dim, kaDga-
shiohibabala.
Bush-pig, kantnla,//. bankuntula ;
ngulube, //. bangolube.
Cerval-cat, inBuzhi,//. banzuBhi ;
dim, kanga-nBiiBhi.
Chameleon, nanundwe, //. bana-
nusdwe ; naluntambwe, //.
banaluntambwe ; dim. kanga-
nanundwe.
Cheetah, maliuna, pi, bamalama;
//. ma-itntuluwe.
Coney: rock-rabbit, ohibila, //.
baohibila.
Crocodile, ohi wena,//.baoliiwena ;
dim, kanga-ohiwena.
Duiker, nakasha, pi, banakaaha ;
dim, kanga-nakasha.
Eland, musefti, pi, basefd, ba-
musefti; dim. kanga-museftL.
Elephant, muBovn, //. basoru,
bamuBovu.
Giraffe, intutwa, pi, bantutwa.
Gnu, mtmyambwi, //. bamunyu-
mbwi ; dim* kanga-xnonyu-
mbwi.
Grysbuck, timba,//. batimba.
Hare, solwe, pi, basulwe; dim,
kanga-solwe.
Hartebeest, konBe, //. bakonae ;
dim, kanga-koziBe.
Hippopotamus, ohivhubwe, pi,
baohivhubwe ; dim, kanga-
ohivhubwe.
Jackal, mwaba,//.bamwaba; dim,
kanga-mwaba.
Klipspringer, n. i a, ngombani,//.
bangombani.
Kudu, namutentatila, pi, bana-
mutentanla ; moBiilumatwi ;
shombololo; dim, kanga-namu-
tentanla.
Lechwe,iiainja,//. banainja; dim,
kanga-nainja.
Leopard, shiluwe, pi, bashilu'W'e ;
dim. kanga-ahiluwe.
Lion, shumbwa,//. bashombwu.
Lynx, n. i a. Iiubo ; pi, Balubo.
Muircat, kabwinde, pL baka-
bwinde.
Oribi, nakafwifwi, //. banaka-
fwitwi ; nakasotokela,//. bana-
kasotokela ; naohindwa, //.
banaohindwe ; dim, kanga-
nakai\vlfwl.
Otter, ohibawe, pi, baohibawe;
dim. kanga«ohibawe.
Pallah, nanBeli, pi, bananseli;
lubondwe, pi, balubondwe ;
aha8ubila,//.ba8ha8ubila; dim,
kanga - nanBeli. (N.B. This
animal should not be called
Impala.)
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
363
Poicnpine, (diaminnligwe, pL ba-
ehftTnlnnTigwe.
Poku, shiohirana, //. bashiohi-
mmn ; dint, kanga-ihiohianxiu.
Ratel, honqr-bear, ohibvla, pU ba-
ohibule.
Reedback , nalUTwi ^//.banaluTWi ;
dim. kaAga-naluFwl.
Rhinoceros, shempela, pL bashe-
mpela; ahilanffwa, pi. bashi-
langwa ; dim. kanga-shempela.
Roan antelope, ohilumbulnmbu,
pL baohiluxnbiiliiznbu ; xnulu-
mbulambu, //. bamultunbala-
mbu; dim* kanga-chilnmbulu-
inbu.
Sable antelope, kaftimbwi, pi. ba-
kaftunbwi; kantanta, pi. ba-
kaatanta; laengo,//.baluexigo;
dim, lcanga*kaflciinbwi.
Sitntimga antelope, shiohlnsobe,
//.baablohinsobe insobe (Lnm-
bn) ; dim, kangashichinBobe.
Sknnk, kanyimba,//.bakan7i]nba.
Spring-hare, xuununkwiBe, pi. ba-
n amnTi Icwiae,
Sqninel, ahikonao, pU bashiko-
nso ; poloiigwe,//.bapolongwe.
Tortoise, falw«, /iC baftilwe ; dim.
kaaga-ftilwe.
Wart-hog, shankole, pi. basha-
nkole ; dim. kanga-skankole.
Waterbnck, mokulo,//. bamukulo;
dim, kanga-mokulo.
Water*rat, xnasanshi.
Wild-cat, inahipba, ohanga, pL
baehanga. Ohifvri, //. ba*
ohifiri ; shimatuya, //. ba-
ahimatiiya ; mwalangane, pi.
bamwalangane ; fwididila, pi.
bafirididila.
Wild-d<^9 musaka, pi. bamnsa-
ka ; mnpi, pi, banmpi ; dim.
Zdna, chibisi, //. bacbibiai; na-
mbwenga ; nalawawa ; dim,
kaaga-ohibisi, &c.
Ankle, n. 7. ohipokoto.
Anklet, n. 8. inshipi, ingondo.
Announce, to, v. i, ka shimuna ;
very londly, ka posomtika.
Annoy, to, v, t, ku kataaha.
Annoyance, n. 5. kukatatha, kn-
katashiwa.
Annually, every year, miaka
yonse.
Anoint, to, to anoint oneself, v. t.
ku nana. To anoint another,
V, t, ku nanika.
Another, adj. -mwl, prefixed by
pers. pro. ; another, dinerent, adj,
-Dji.
Answer, to, v. t, ka taba, ku
ingula.
Ant, n. 8. mupuka ; n, 4. bu-
puka. Termite, lumoma, mu-
lanzhi; black, biting, bashi-
munyau; the semyi ant, busu-
lubi ; red, biting, shimwenaha-
lubilo ; another kind of red,
biting ants, manjenji; another
kind, bumbuswa.
Antbear, n. I a, chinengwe ; //.
bachinengwe.
Ant-heap, n. 8. lulu, //. ingulu ;
n, 7. chulu.
Antelope, n. i. munyama. ^<;^
list above, under Animal.
Anus, n. 8. inyo ; it. 7. chandanyo.
Anvil, n. 3. itako.
Any, adj. -mwi ; anywhere, konse-
konse, ukwi tikwi.
Apart, cuij, -andene.
Ape, monkey, n. 1 a. eokwe ; //.
basokwe. Baboon, n. la. pom-
bo ; //. bapombo.
Aperture, opening, doorway, n. 2,
mudiango ; hole, n. 7. chipolo ;
gap, as in fence, n. 2. musena.
Apex, summit, n. 8. impela.
Apostle, n. la. chinkombwa ;
n. i.mutumwa; n.far, la. apos-
tele, pi. ba-apo8tele.
Apparent, to be, v, i. ku boneka.
Of affairs, tf. i, ku teleleka.
Apparent, ad/, -boneshi, -tele-
leshi.
Appear, to, v. i, ku budika, ku
I>ompa. To cause to appear, v. t,
ku budisha. To appear for, v. i,
ku budikila.
Appearance, n, 5. kubudika.
Ontward appearance of a person,
n. 7. chiwa.
Appease, to, v, t, ku kambidiiha.
264
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Appoint, to, ». /. ku bika, ku
kadika.
Approach, to, v. i. ku sena, ku
swena (Lumbu). To approach
each other, ku senana. To ap-
proach closely, V. i. ku senenena.
To approach crawling, as after
game, ku benda. To approach
stealthily to, in order to surprise,
V, t. ku sobelela.
April, month of, n, 5. kukubwe
ohisomo.
Apron, woman'8,wom in front, n, 2.
mulapi ; ditto of men, n, 8. in-
kuti. Apron worn behind, of
women, n, 7. ingubo ; of men,
inkuti ya makato.
Are, expressed by the copula. See
Gram.f chap. ix.
Aright, adv, ohakululama.
Arise, to, v, i, from sleep, ku
buka. To stand up, v, i. ku
zhimoka. Of the sun, v, i. ku
vhwa, ku pasa.
Arm, n, 3. itashi. To carry any-
thing under the arm, v. i, ku
pakata.
Armlet, n, 8. inohoko. Put on
upper arm, n, 8. intasa.
Armpit, n, 8. inkwa.
Army, n. 8. impi.
Around, prep, mumbadi dia. To
sit around the fire, ku zota,
ku engela mudilo. To go round
an obstacle, to go around, v. i, ku
znguluka.
Arouse, to, v. t. ku busha.
Arrange, to, v, /. ku bamba.
To arrange for somebody, v, t, ku
bambila. To arrange grass for
inspection, ku bamba bwizu.
Arrange yourselves in line, fall in,
a mu dibaznbe. To put in order,
V. /. ku lulamika.
Arrest, to, to seize, v,t. ku
kwata.
Arrival, n, 5. kushika.
Arrive, to, v, i, ku shika. Of a
canoe, v, i, ku shoka.
Arrow, n, 2. muvhwi ; shaft o^
n, 9. luxnpute ; feather of, n. 8.
intangwa. Sheath for arrows,
n, 2. muntemba. Barbed arrow,
n. 8. inkungwa. Large arrow-
head without barbs, n. 2. mun-
senda.
As, conj. bu, bodia bu ; prep.
ubudi, bubona budi.
Ascend, to, v. t. ku disa ; of a
bird, V. i, ku uluka, ku sumuka;
of smoke, v. i, ku faka.
Ash, n, 3. itwe; of burnt grass,
n. 8. imimbi ; to put to roast in
ashes, v, t. ku fukuma.
Ashamed, to be, v,u ku usa
insoni.
Aside, adv, kumbadi ; secretly,
adv. kunao ; to turn aside out of
a path, V, i, ku ambuka z, t, ku
ambuaha.
Ask, to, a question, v, t, ku busha ;
to ask each other, v.t, ku buz-
hana ; to ask persistently, v, /.
ku buzhiaha; to ask for, to
beg, V, t, ku kumbila, ku puxn-
pilA.
Ass, ». 8. imbongolo.
Assemble, to, v. i, ku bungana,
ku zoboloka ; v, /. ku bungika,
ku bunganya.
Assembly, ». 8. imbungano;
meeting for judging cases, n. 9.
lubeta; place of, n. 7. ohibu-
nganino.
Assent, to, v,i, ku vumina;
by nodding the head, v,u ku
guna.
Assist, to, v, t, ku yovwa.
Astonish, to. See Amaze.
Astonishingly, Adv. ohankanka.
Astonishing Person, n, 1 a.
shimalweza.
Thing, n. 3. //. xnalweza.
Astonishment, n. 5. kuzowa;
great, n, 8. intuntwa.
Astray, to be, v. i, ku aweka.
•^*^' to go astray, to turn from
path of rectitude : v, i, ku am-
buka ; to cause any one to go
astray, v./. ku ambusha. To
lead astray, entice, v, /. ku
lengaula; ku lengauzhs; ku
lengawila.
Asunder, to cut asunder, v,t. ku
kosola ; to burst asunder^ v, i. ku
pasauka.
ENGLISH-ILA VCXTABULARY
365
At, prep, ku, kwa ; at once, iniho
inzho ; at night, mashikn ; e.g,
he is at the "village, udi ku
mnnshi, kwadi ku mnxiBhi.
Attack, to, v, t. ku Iwiaha.
Attain, to, to arrive at, phr, ku
shikaku.
Attempt, to, v. /. ku solaka.
Attempt, i». 5. kuBoleka.
Attend, to, on a journey, v, /. ku
ahindikila; to listen, v./. ku
teltfla, ku telelisAis; to serve,
phr. ku manina midimo.
Audible, to be, z^. i. ku teleleka.
Audible, adj. -teleleshi.
Aught, n. 6. kantu; e,g. I have
not heard aught, nina ku telala
kantu.
Augur, n. 7. ohituluaho.
August, month o^ kaaangabimbi.
Aunt, one's maternal or paternal
aunt is called bama, my mother.
Authority, n. 4. bwami; head-
man's, n. 4. bunkoahi; kingly,
«. 4. bnoneki ; one with au-
thority, n.\a. ahabwami.
Autumn, ado. knnkoaoko.
Avoid, to, to a, a missile by jump-
ing aside, v. i. ku lea.
Await, to, v. t. ku dlndllfc
Aware, to be, v. /. ku shiba ; to
make aware, v. t. ku shibya.
Away, to get a., v. i. ku aeanka ;
todrifea.,9./. kutanda; to run
a., V. i. ku tia ; to abscond, v. i.
ku loboka; to take away, v.t.
ku kiMiba>
Awful, to be, v. u ku tika ; to
fii^tcn, V. L ku tisha.
Awvix, a^. -tubi.
AZEy fior cnttii^ wood, &c, n. 6.
\mnlm. pL twembe; battle-axe,
sr.4.1nikaiia; dd, #r. 7. chUauuk
For dffrncT; ». 7. ehlbaoga;
large ditto, sr. 3, ibanga; with
dialt oofcfcd with copper, n.\a»
AxTT.i.A, n. 8. Inkwa,.
Booox. IK. I
BiBT, U. I.
A
just bom is called manihi
budio.
Babyhood, n. 4. bucheohe.
Bachelor, n. i a. shikatanda, //.
bashikatanda.
Bachelorhood, n. 6. katanda.
Back, of the body, n. 8. inuma;
small of the, n, 4. bukome ;
between the shoulders, n, 9. luwe-
Bu, n, 8. indalo ; to go or
come, V, f . ku bwela, ku shoka ;
to go back or return again, v. f.
ku bwelela; to take back, t/./.
ku Bhola, ku bwaaha; to turn
back, v.i. ku piluka; to torn
one's back to, ku futamina; to
look back, ku chebuka munsbi ;
to lie on the back, v. i. ku
salama ; phr. he lies on his back,
udi lele buaashi ; to put some-
body down on his back, v, t, ku
aalamika.
Backbite, to, v. t. ku vwlya ; of
one who goes about speaking evil
falsely of another person, vA, ku
fweta.
Backbiter, slanderer, n. i. muv-
wiahi; mufweti.
Backbone, n. 2. mongo.
Backslide, 10^ phr. ku shokal*
munahi.
Backwards, adv. chimftitenuina,
chimfate, lungrwenuina. I'o
go backwards and forwRtdi be-
tween two places, v. i, ku 9mm^
panka. To iaX\ backwards, phr,
ku wa inaala buaashi. To
walk backwards, ku endala
ehitnfhtenuina. To jump back-
wards when yoo see a snake in
front of yoo, v. i. ko tldlmnka>
Bad, to be, v. i. ku Wa. To make
bad, v.t. ku biaha.
Of a good man who loses bts
charaftfT through KAie bad deed,
v.u ku aampoka* Same word
med of gron&d that loses itnUity
through nnch pbrntiDg.
To aaae to be hsA, or loae cbafac
ter, V, t. ku aampuxha.
Adj. '^aiaibe ; t.g. a lad sua, mn^
ntu mnbiaba.
Badly, a^. kafafate; the aoca
266
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
babi is also used, e,g, ka lele
bubi, he slept badly.
Badness, n, 4. bubiabe, bubi.
Bag, n. 8. inkomo ; small bag fot
money, purse, n, 8. impatana;
made of bark, n, 8. inteba.
Bait, n, 4. bupo.
Bake, to, v, /. ku zooha.
Balance^ to, a spear in taking
aim, V. t. ku snknma.
Bald, a baldheaded person, n,
I a. shilubala. One altogether
bald is called, n, la. utubia-
mutwi ; he is bald, udi kwete
lubala.
Baldness, n. 9. lubala. This
refers especially to baldness on
the crown.
Bale, to, v. /. ku kupa.
Ball, n. 8. impila. Balls of earth
wrapped in grass and tied to the
fishing-mats (Iwando) to prerent
their rising, n, 3.//. manda.
Ballad, little song, n. 6. ka
imbo.
Bamboo, n, 2. xnusununu.
Band, belt, ». 9. lutambo. For
tying around the waist, when
hungry, or after giving birth, n. 2.
xuwajubo.
Bandage, to, v. /. ku zambaila.
Bangle, n, 8. inshipi.
Banish, to, v, /. ku tanda.
Bank, of a river, n, 2. muma;
steep bank, n, 8. inkomwe. To
bank up a small stream, v, /. ku
yadila.
Banner, flag, n, 8. imbftkini.
Baobab-tree, n. 3. ibuau; pods
of, n. 3. //. mabuzu.
Baptism, n. 9. lubapatizo.
Baptize, to, v.t. ku bapatisa. To
baptize with, cause or help bap-
tize, ku bapatizha.
Baptizer, n. I. mubapatizhi.
Bare, a bare place, n. 7. ohibuwe ;
to bare the head, ku kusha
inkuane ku mutwi ; to be bare,
clean of dirt, v, i, ku sweya.
Bargain, a good bargain, good
fortune in selling or buying, n, 3.
isambwe.
Bark, to, v. i. ku kua.
Bark, outside bark of trees, n, 3.
pi. mapapo ; inside bark used
for string, n, 9. lozhl. To strip
off bark, v.t, ku umpula. To
strip oif lozbi from the mapapo,
V. L ku fundula.
Barrel, of a gun, n. 2, muludi ; a
cask, n. 3. ipopa.
Barren, a barren country, desert,
ft. 5. kuxnanizha ; a barren
woman, n, i. musundl; a barren
cow, n. 8. insundi ; a barren or
impotent man or bull, n. 1.
mombo. A barren cock, xno-
mbankuku.
Barrenness, of woman, if. 4.
buBundi ; or impotence of a man,
n, 4* bombo.
Barter, to, to exchange, v,l. ku
shintana.
Basin, n. 2. mutiba; a small, n. 6.
katiba.
Basket, n. 8. intumba; n. 8. in-
tundu ; a shallow basket used as
a plate, n. 8. impudilo ; winnow-
ing basket, n. 9. lukwi; an old
lukwi, n. 7. ohikwi; an old in-
tundu, n. 7. ohitundu ; an open-
work-basket used for carrying
potatoes, fish, &c., n, 7. ohizungo.
A small basket used as a funnel
on calabash, n. 4. buaaka.
Basket - work fishtraps, u. 3.
izhizbi, ivhumbo ; u. 9. lu-
shiko. To weave baskets, v.L
kuluka.
Bastard, n. 1. xnwana omahujia.
Bat, n. i a. ahikampafwa; wooden
bat used in a game, n. a. xnu-
bango ; old ditto, n. 7. ohibango.
Bathe, to, v.^. ku supa, ku
kanda, v. i. ku samba.
Bathing-place, n. 7. ohisambilo.
Bayonet, of police, n. 3. icheba.
Be, to, v,t. ku ba, ku di. See
chaps, via and ix.
Beads, n. a. bulungu; a great
many beads, n. 4. //. malaiisu ;
a single bead, n, 8. inungu;
a small bead, n, 6. kalungu;
small quantity of, n, 6. //.
tulungu ; a string of beads
around loina^ n. 8. iiuapo ; neck-
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
267
laoe 6f beads, n, 8. inkonde, n.
6. pi, tunyoni, n, 7. ohinkonta,
It. 3. mwnahambwa.
Different kinds of heads.
Pink, lai^ge, kalnkolww kaahia.
Red, namnndilo.
Large white, lukolwe.
Small white, iaapo.
Smaller white, kabwlbwi.
White and black, kankanga.
Di£ferent kinds of coloured : kama-
nmohipwiohipwi, kanuimena,
kaahimftdamwamTu.
Beak, of bird, n. a. molomo.
Beam, a cross-beam, n, 3. mutanti;
beam or xay of snn, if. 3. mun-
aha.
Bean, n, 8. imbwila, intalaba-
nda; pod of, if. 5. ipapa; a
bean is called, mushimbila-ba-
mwika, because of its filling,
constipating qualities.
Bear, to, to carry, v, /. ku aam-
pola, ka aemuna. To bear or
carry 00 head without holding, as
women do water, v. /. ku tenge-
neaha. To bear fruit, v,L ku
eahft; e»g, the tree bears fruit,
iaamo didi eshile michelo. To
bear, give birth to, v. t. ku zhala ;
€,g, the woman bears children
for her husband, mukaintu wa
ahadlla mulumi akwe bana.
Beard, if. 3. mulsTu.
Bearer, carrier,- if. i. muaempu-
ahl, muiemuni ; hammock-
bearer. If. I. mufeembeshi.
Bearing, child-, adj, -Bhaahi.
Beast, if. i. munyama.
Beat, to, a drum, ku uma ingoma ;
with a hammer, v, /. ku kanka-
mina. To b. out a piece of
metal thin, v. t. ku pampamika.
To b. out in order to sharpen,
v.U ku aamuna. To hit, v.L
kn uma. To hit severely, v./.
ku umiaha. To b. with fist, ku
uma imftinahi. To b. with open
hand, ku uma lukombaahi.
To b. in a mortar, v, /. ku twa.
To b. as the heart, 9. /. ku tun
tauka.. To b. violently, as after
running, v. i. ku bidintika. To
b., overcome, v, t, ku Bunda.
Beautiful, adj\ -botu, -ebeshi;
to be beautiful, v, i. ku ebeka.
Beautify, to, v.t, ku ebeaha.
Because, conj, ukuti, kambo ka,
kaini. For ess. see chap, jt,
sect, 3.
Beckon, to, v, /. ku labiaha.
Become, to, v,i, ku ba. See
chap, via.
Bed, Bedstead, if. 4. bulo; to
prepare a bed,/iir. ku aala bulo.
Bedroom, place for sleeping.
If. 7. choneno.
Bee, If. 8. inauki, if. i a. kan-
aama, //. bakanaama ; bees'
nest in tree, if. 7. ohibangu.
Beer, strong, «. la. Funku,
Namansi ; n. 4. bukoko, if. 3.
mukuku (Lumbu); small quan-
tity of mukuku, if. 6. //. tukukiu
Mild beer, if. 3. ibwanfcu. Strong
beer made from honey, if. 8. Im-
bote. A quantity of ibwantu.
If. 3.//. mabwantu ; small quan-
tity, n, 6. pi, tubwantu.
Note. — Beer is made from maize,
kaffir com or mansi. The grain is
first soaked in water for two days,
then taken out (ku nuna), and
shelled (ku polola); it is then moist-
ened with water (ku aanaa) and
beaten up (ku twa); it is then
cooked (ku ika), and left for a time
(ku oaha). The yeast (bumena)
is then made and mixed with the
prepared grain Daass, and left for
three days or so. Some more grain
is then prepared, and mixed with
bumena ; then it is all put together,
and after a time is ready to dnnk.
Beeswax, if. 4. bunvuka.
Beetle, if. i. mupuka.
Varieties : borer, n. i a, ahika-
busumpwe ; scavenger, n, la,
ohitolamatuai, kafomba-fti-
mba, kanondanonda, ahafu-
mbula ; another kind which is
often tied by people in their hair
to catch lice, ingombemuka. A
kind of flying beetle, if. 8. in-
yenae. A kind that miJces a
2g8
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
loud singing noise in rainy season,
n. 6. kankontyonkontyo.
Before, prep, kumbele ku; e.g,
I send him before you, nda xnu
turns kumbele kwako, adv,
ambele, kumbele ; e,g. go ye
before, ka mu ya kumbele. The
* not yet ' tense of the verb is used
to express before \ e,g, before I
was bom, lit. when I was not yet
bom, ni nta na ku zhalwa.
Beg, to, v,t. ku lomba, ku ku-
mbila, ku pumpa.
Beget, to, v, t, ku zhala.
Beggar, a person who is alwa3rs ask-
ing for things, n, i. mukumbizhi.
Begin, to, to commence, v. U ku
kanka ; to be first, v, i, ku tang4,
ku tanguna.
Beginning, n, 5. kukanka; e,g,
in the beginning, ku kukanka.
Behalf, the £ng. phr. on bekalf of
is expressed by the relative suffix
of the verb. e,g. to speak on
behalf of, ku ambidila.
Behold, to, v, t. ku langa.
Belch, to, v. i, ku tikula.
Belief, n, 4. buvum.ino; an article
of, n, 7. chivumino.
Believe, to, v, t. ku vumina.
Believer, n, i. muvumini.
Bell, m. 2. mulangu ; dim, n, 6.
kalangu. A European bell is
called, n, 8. inshipi. A kind of
double bell, which is struck with
a stick, and used to call people
together, n, 8. ingonji.
Bellow, to, v. i. ku dila ; of a
person, or beast, giving a cry or
bellow when mortally wounded,
V, i. ku boba ; of a cow calling
for its calf, v, i. ku bingila.
Bellows, n, 3. //. mavhuba ; to
blow bellows, v, t. ku hukuta.
Belly, n. 3. See Abdomen.
Below, prep, kunshi ku ; e.g.
below the stool, kunshi ku
ohuna ; adv, kunshi, anshi.
Belt, n. 9. lutambo, n, a.
mwambo.
Bend, to, v, t, ku oba, ku lema ;
to bend a bow or other thing
straight, v,L ku olola; to be
bent, warped, v,i. ku konko-
mana; to bend, or warp, v,t,
ku konkomeka ; to be bent,
crooked, v, i, ku sendama ; to
bend under a weight, v. i, ku
eta. Fig, the person goes with
bended head, muntu we eta.
Of a thing bent and slightly
broken at the bend, v. i, ku funu-
kila. To bend a thing so that it
breaks slightly, v,t, ku funu-
kizha.
Bendable, pliable, v, i, ku obeka.
Beneath, o^v.and/r^. .S>« Below.
Bent. See Bend.
Berry. See Fruit.
Beside, prep, kumbadi ku; adv.
ambadi, kumbadi.
Between, prep, akati ka; e,g,
plant it between the stones, ohi
shimpe akati ka mabwe ; adv.
akatl
Beverage, n, 7. pL shakunwa.
Beware, to, v,t. ku dilangila,
ku langidila.
Bewitch, to, v,t. ku loa; e,g.
wa Iwewa, he is bewitched.
Beyond, to pass beyond, v.t. ku
bala ; to be distant, v, i, ku
sakana.
Bible, n, \a,for Bibele.
Bicycle, n, \a, namutendele,//.
banamutendele. The name has
been adopted by the Baila from
that of a plaything of theirs.
Bifurcation, of road, n, 3. //.
mampanda a nshila.
Big, adv, -kando ; e.g, a big thing,
chintu chikando. A very big
thing, n,\a, nyabo, n, \a, bunsu-
lulu ; e,g, this person is very big^
muntu wezu ngubung^ulu, or
nyabo. To be big, v,i, ku
komena. To make big, v, i. ku
komezha.
Bile, n. 8. indulwe ; to be bilious,
ku fwe ndulwe.
Bin, for grain, made of grass, ». 3.
isumpila; of wattle and daub,
n, 4. butala ; of clay and grass,
n, 7. chumbwa. Hole in, for
taking out grain, n, 8. inkwanto.
Bind, to, as a broken stick, v,L
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
269
kxL BumhlU; to !»id wattles in
bfoildiiigSy 9./. ka baoji]*. To
bmd over again, L e. repair bind-
ing of wattles, v./. Ini IwDjidilA.
Bird, «. i. mnsane ; a large, n. 5.
iaime; a small, «. 6. kaiun*.
Small birds wfaidi eat the grain,
If. 4. Imsane. To ensnare birds,
v.t ka tea. Nest of, n. 7.
ehitftnto.
List of Birds.
A kind of snake-eating bird, mom-
BnsUrdy sihiehibwabs, //. b*-;
ahloliainpami», pL ba-.
Crested crane, namawmne,//! ba-.
Different hawks, bozzaids, miahika,
Umbe (or, bimbila), lubanae,
hmca, ahiQiidio, lukomba,
ahikakonse, Innga.
Domestic fowl, s. and/, inknko.
Domestic hen, s, and p. inaeke.
Cock, miikoinbwe.
' Go-away-lnid,' ahimowa, pL b*-.
' Gninea fowl, s. and/, inkanga.
Honey-biTd, aolwa, pL basolwe.
Kanbont storic, mankonBe, pi,
bamuxikoiiae ; shikabUa, pi.
baahikabil*.
Owl, ahiaWaMnf, pi. bMhiahi-
shini.
Pelican, siUAindwe, //. ba-.
Pbeaiant, kwale, pL bakwale,
ehiknka-chHiiUMi.
QaaH, kftnehele, pL bakanohele ;
ehlngaohalala, pL baohinga-
Ssnd-groiise, ahljlngongo, pi. ba-.
Secretary bird, nakansakwe, pL
ba*; nnikobelaiiBoka.
Spar-winged goose, naohiaekwe,
/tba-.
Stofk, nakakodio,//. ba-.
Valtnre, aliikiibe,/il ba*.
White-necked crow, ohikwangala,
pL lTafth1kw#"gft1<^-.
Wild dock, ineluMw; bwididi,//.
ba*; ahlohinkotwe (the 'knob-
nosed goose*).
WoodpedECTy riilmnkonkomona,
>^ba-.
The following are found by the
riverside, mostly fish-eaters : —
Changwe, ahiluntaba (nalu-
ange, ahilnnyange), milondwe,
ohibongelele, ahikwaae, ahiko-
ndwindo, mose, itongola, dia-
konokaitelOjlongolo-mnswana,
ahibulebole.
Birth, n. ga, luahalo, n. 5. ku-
ahalwa, n. 5. kushala.
Birth, to give, v, t. ku zhala ; for
firit time, v, t. ku iya.
Birth-pangs, «. 3.//. miiTi^vi^
Bite, to, v, t. ka lama ; one who
is bitten, n. i. malome ; one
who bites, n, i. malami ; as a
snake, v./. ka konka; to bite
off a piece of bread, v.U ka
komona.
Bitter, to be, 9. tl ka lala.
Black, to be, v.i, ka shia; to
be very black, ka ahisha; ka
shia ohiniohini; a very black
person, if. i. maahietongo.
Blacken, to, v.l ka babila; to
make black or dirty, v.t, ka
ahisha*
Blacksmith, n. i. mafbshi ; way,
manner, custom of, n, 7. ftTi4fti«iii ;
to work as, tr. /. ka fhla.
Bladder, urinary, n, 3. iaabilo;
gall-bladder, iaabilo dia ndalwe.
Blade, of spear, n, 4. babamba ;
of knife, ». 4. bacheai ; fiist
small blade of cereal, n. 4. ba-
songa.
BLAME,TO,/iir.ka bika kambo ka.
Blanket, If. 8. ingabo ; a coloured
cotton. If. 3. iiMu; a woollen.
If. 8. indamba ; a large heavy
woollen. If. 8. indamba in-
kando ; a large white heavy.
If. I tf. manale,//. bamanale ; a
smaller white, with led stripe.
If . I a. manalft mashonto ; a
white cotton, if. la. makwati,
pi, bamakwati ; a fringed blan-
ket. If. 1 0. ohadi, pi, baohadi.
Blaspheme, to, v.t. ka bislia-
biaha; kaiokaliesa.
Blaze, to, v, i. ka aaka ; to blaze
much, V. f . ka ■^vi^h^
270
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Bleed, to, at nose, v. i . ku nokola ;
ku vhwa buloa.
Bless, to, v, t, to make happy, ku
longezha, ku pa oholwe ; to
thank, praise, v. t, ku lumba.
Blessed, a blessed, happy person,
n. I a. shiohoba.
Blessedness, n, 7. ohoba.
Blind, to, to dazzle, v.t ku
towa; to be blind, v.i, ku of-
wala.
Blind person, n. i. mofii, //.
bofu ; wife or husband of, n. i.
mukazuofu.
Blindly, adv, ohabdfu.
Blindness, n, 4. bofu.
Blister, n. 3. ituza.
Blood, n. 4. buloa ; clot of, n, 3.
itumpata.
Blot out, erase, v. t. ku Bhimin-
ganya; to be blotted out, v.i,
ku zhimingana.
Blow, to, v, u ku unga ; e. g. the
wind blows, u la unga Iieaa.
To b. hard, v, i, ku pupula. To
be blown about, v. 1. ku pepu-
luka; e.g. the papers are blown
about by the wind, xnapapelo a
pepuluka o znowo. To be
blown off, V. i. ku ululuka ; e.g,
the roof is blown off by the whirl-
wind, ing*aiida ya ululuka
kaxnbizhi. To b. a trumpet,
phr. ku shiba impeta. To b.
with the mouthy v. /. ku folafula.
To b. the fire, v.t. ku fudila
mudilo. To b. the nose, v.t,
ku pemba. To b. the bellows,
phr. ku hukuta mavhuba.
Blue, called black, n, 5. kuBhia.
Blunt, adj. -fumpiu ; e.g. a blunt
knife, intipa imfumpiu.
Blunt, to be, v. i. ku fumpa ; to
make blunt, v, t. ku fumpya.
Boast, to, v.i. ku fumba, ku
diteznbaula. Of a man dancing
about and boasting of his deeds
after a fight or hunt, v.t, ku
dikalaukila.
Boat, canoe, n. 4. bwato; Euro-
pean boat, n. 3. for. ibote, //.
mabote.
Body, n. 9, 9 a, luseba, pL inseba
and maseba, n. 2. mubidi; a
dead body, corpse, ». a. mutunta.
List of Anatomical Terms.
Abdomen, below navel, ibumbu;
above, ifu.
Ankle, ohipokoto.
Arm, itashi.
A sinew, buzbixigo.
Axilla, inkwa.
Back, inuxna; lumbar region, bu-
kome ; base of back, phikato.
Beard, znulevu.
Big toe, ohilulome.
Bladder, isubilo ; gall b., iaubilo
dia ndulwe.
Blood-vessel, kashinga.
Bowel, bula, mala.
Bram, bongo.
Breast, lukolo.
Bridge of nose, mombombo we
nango.
Buttocks, matako.
Cheek, itama.
Chest, chamba.
Chin, ohilerlLU.
Clitoris, mukongo.
Diaphragm, luambanyama.
Ear, kutwi.
Elbow, lukokola.
Eye, dinso, //. menso.
Eyebrow, chikowe.
Eyelash, inkowe.
Face, biuhu.
Finger, munwe.
Fist, imfunshi.
Foot, ohifumba.
Forearm, mukono.
Forehead, inkumu.
Glans-penis, museke.
Gullet, mumino.
Hair, of head, nuunuo ; a single, in-
suki ; body, bosa ; on abdomen,
mulalabongo ; on pubes, masha.
Hand, itashi ; palm of, lukom-
baahi; right, ludio; left, ohim-
onswa.
Head, mutwi.
Heart, mozo.
Hip-joint, kasolo.
Inside the mouth, kanwa.
Jawbone, mwezhi.
Kidney, insa.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
•J»
Knee, irbwL
Knudde, inimso.
Labia majon, mMhIno.
Leg, kola, mwando, Mads.
Liver, mnni.
Long, ifatwB,
Mouth, lip, mtilomo.
Nail, IwaU.
Neck, JnaMngo ; front of, mtuli-
in^ ; back of, miikoahi.
Nose, inanffo,//. mananso, nostrils.
Penis, intoni.
Prepnce, ipapa.
Rib, luTwabuti,
Shin, mwindi.
Shoulder, obiftuiBhi.
Shoulder-blade, iknko; space be-
tween, indole, InwMU.
Spine, monffo.
Spleen, ibanibi, mubenibi.
Stomach, ifti.
Teat, ksntinkela
Tendo Achillis, muflhita.
Testicle, ibdo.
Thigh, ohibelo.
Thoracic cavity, kaagp.
Thumb, ohiknmo.
Toe, kaltOoma.
Tooth, dinOfP/. mana
Tongue, mnlaka.
Tonsil, iLMpapo, kakolo.
Trachea, iknlnmixio.
Umbilical coid, ludila^
UmbiUca% Ivkambou
Vagina, intolo.
Votebsa promiaeafy inkatl.
Waist, ehibmni.
Womb^ iahadila
BoG^ BoGCT Place, «. 4. botoprio,
■scd as si^\ ; e g. this road is
BML,TO,9.i:k«rlks'lEB ika,; a»
itt,«.«.lniaaatps; i;./.inb<Ia;
tobotl^icr^a.i,!
Boil, au 7. ckfleadi
Bold, bcxae. m^,
woii wmtd aa fee ao^rf.
Bolt, To^a./, ks ta^a.
Bolt, JaaBrning ix -iatir^ «. x
M. 4^
BoKE, M. 7. ohiAia ; UritSi m« jt*
iAia; small, a, 6. kalUa; lanra
kg*bone of animal, a. 8, ittdt«
a, a. mwindi. Breast -iKme of
bird, a. 3. ipanco. Divining*
bones, a. 3. /A makakata.
BoNPiRK, a. 3. ibila.
Book, a. 8.y^r. imbuka ; a. 3.ySrr.
ibuka.
Boot, sandal, a. 8. iadiaaho, ika-
tulo, impato.
BoRDKR, boundary, a. H. inyiniai
fringe of blanket, &o., a. 4.
bwaya.
Bore, to, v, /. ku tulula. To Im;
bored, pierced, v./. ku tuluka.
Of the borer insect, v, /• ku
•umpa.
Boring-tool, n. 7. ohituluiho.
Born, to bk, v,pais, ku ihalwa.
Borrow, to, /^r. ku putnpila
muta.
Both, expressed In different wavs.
We will Ijoth go,iu U jra toblH.
Yon will go both of yoti, mu la
7a noblli. I will Ixitb 1/aat ami
fine yon, nda ku uauk, odimwl
nda ku landa.
Bc/Tff KR, TO, V. t. ku kalaaha*
Bc/iTLk, n, %,f0r, Inbotolo \ n, %,
for, ibololo*
B</TToM, of aaylbinKf, n. %, ltak««
lkjt:finf », t, aniiatrl,
hf}vnuAkr, n, K injrimMk
Jk^;mtnyt, to n%f v, t. ka f^Mfka
lr^ifi:^i\fn:iA/tt ado. steko^MM.
l5<fT«r, t% tr, /, kfl k44aa»a, t'f
t>yw 'tW* V,^ V* L ka k/4aa»^/ira.
trai^ji»a^ %,//, aiala^ f'4k/ji^ v/va^,
a, ^ila^
h^rm;., n, t^ «^>tMba^
l^/sr , a. ^ ifkwail. ^fmM- V«qr, a. ^.
^i^r, ir4m'0'»ahi, nHviTr^awHauKM.
A.- i*vv»r M*i^«yw -vf J(v>f««Ma^ jm»
MmbnrciiM. Aa ^^M^r IM^
272
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
mweznbezlii. A young man is
called kakubushi.
Elangashikembeshi is a some-
what scornful name to give a boy,
something like * Kid *, A boy
(or girl) who has not passed
through the initiation ceremonies,
If. J a. chivhuntula. An ignorant
youngster, chinkunka. A young-
ster of either sex is called Mwan-
iohe.
Boyhood, youth, n, 4. bwaniche.
Boyish, n. 7. chaniche.
Bracelet, of ivory, n. 8. inkaya,
inyanga. A child's grass b.,
n. 6. kankungwa ; if. 7. chin-
ktmgwa. Armlet, n, 8. inchoko.
Grass bracelet, n, 8. intasa, im-
pumpa.
Brackish, to be, v. i, ku lundu-
znuka.
Brackish, adj, -lundumuahi.
Brains, if. 4. bdngo (no pi.).
Bran, if. 8. impolo. Of maize,
If. 3. pL mapepa.
Branch, of a tree, if. a. mutabL
Branch, to, of a road, v, i. ku
andana, ku pam,bana.
Brass, if. 8. inshipL
Bread, if. 8. inshima. Loaf of.
If. 2. mukamu. Bread of new
soft grain, iTtBhima ya chin-
tembwe. To break bread, v.L
ku siinuna.
Breadth, n, 4. bwamba.
Break, to, v. t ku konona. To
b. off, as a piece from lump of
bread or tobacco, v.t, ku ko«
mona. To b. up, as a lump of
tobacco, V, t, ku shamuna. To
b. in, train, v, t, ku bonzha. To
b., transgress a law, v» t, ku so-
toka. To b. out, of an eruption
on the body, v. u ku fukuluka.
To b., as darkness, v. i. ku ko-
soka. To b. in two, v. t, ku
andanya, ku andula. To b.
wind, V. i. ku inshikila. To b.
wind downwards, ku chita znus-
hizhL
Breakfast, to, to eat in early
morning, v. i, ku disuka, ku
lapula mate.
Breast, of man or woman, if. 9.
lukolo. Chest, if. 7. ohamba.
Of animal, the part sent to the
chief, If. la. shiViakaba, katiti,
shinabwaswi.
Breath, if. 3. mosa. To be out
of, V. f . ku fundidila.
Breathe, to, v. i. ku zoza. To
b. stertorously, v. u ku foma.
To take a deep breath, v, i, ku
dishishimukila. To b. hard,
moan, as in sickness, v,i, ku
tongela. To b. quickly, pant (of
an animal), v, u ku fwekema,
ku Bekezna.
Breeze, a light b., if. 9. luwo.
Brew, to, v, /. ku kumba. To b.
for, V. t. ku kumbila.
Brick, if. "j.for, chitini.
Bride, n. la, nabwinga ; //. ban-
abwinga.
Bridegroom, if. la, naohibinde.
Bridge, if. 4. bulalo. A large b..
If. 3. ilalo ; old, broken, if. 7.
chilalo.
Bridle, if. S./ar, intomo.
Bright, to be, of metals, v. i, ku
beka.
Brighten, to, to shine up, v, /. ku
bekenya.
Brimfull, to be, v. f. ku ftmdi-
dila.
Bring, to, v.t. ku leta. To b.
back, V. /. ku zhola, ku bwezha.
To b. off chickens (of a hen), v. t.
ku tentumuna, ku konkwela.
To b. forward the hands, &c.,
ready to receive, v, t, ku tea. To
b. up, rear, v. /. ku kuzha.
Brittle, to be, v. i. ku komo-
neka.
Broad, adj, -kwazeme, -saleme.
Broad, to be, v. i, ku kwazams.
Broaden, to, v. /. ku kwazamika.
Broken, to be, v. i, ku konoka,
ku komoka, ku ohokauka.
Phr. the basin is broken, mutiba
udi kwete ibende.
Brook, if. 6. kalonga.
Broom, brush, if. 3. ipezho. Old,
useless, if. 7. chipezho.
Brother, if. i. muchizhi.
This word is used for brother and
^
/
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
^73
sister; if the sister speaks it meins
brother; in the month of a brother
it means sister. Elderbn>ther,if. i.
mnkftndo. His younger brother,
mnnina. My yonnger brother,
mwrnniohtaiga.
Brotherhood, n, 4. bnnina.
Brother-in-law, n. i. mulamu,
//. balamu or bamulamo.
Brotherly, adv. ohabunizia.
Brown, light b. colonr, n, 3. ifa-
mbalnshi. Dark b. colonr, n. 3.
iahishi.
Brush, h. 8. impeiho. Large, n, 3.
ipeaho. Small, n.6, kapeaho.
Old, useless, if. 7. chipezho.
Brush, to, to sweep, v, t. ka pdla.
Bubbles, n. 3. //. mambwambwa-
diahi ; if. 4. bwintL
Bucket, n, Z'for, ibukiti.
Bud, to, v. t. ku sonsa.
Buffalo, h. i. i a. munyati ; //.
banyati, bamimyati.
Said of the buffalo: uwaobik-
wapi ; uwambesa ; bnndabu-
nda ; mwensu o mangvliale.
Bug, If. 8. injina.
Bugle, n. 8. impeta.
Build, to, v. t. ka aaka.
Bunj>ER, If. I. mosaahL
Bulb, of water-lily, n, 8. imbe.
Bull, n. i. mnohiende.
Bullet, n. 8. insolo.
Bullock, m, i. mnaona.
Bunch, oif wild grapes, n. 3. iaaaaa.
Bundle : Of spears, n. 8. inkama.
Of grass, IV. 8. Inkama ; larger,
n. a. nmlau Of fish, n. 3. ikoka.
Of firewood. If. 7. chila. Of dried
meat, baik, or fidi, n. 7. ehlkate.
Burden, to, v. t. ka lemima To
be budcocd, tf.pm Im lameitwa.
BuRi^ TO. v.L ka tenia ; v. i, ka
pia» To bom a dide of grass
aiDOBd a village so that gxaaiHfiics
■ayaotieaAtliehoiistSyV./* ka
bafaOaw To be bunt, of kxA^
«. u ka. lonciala. To be bBper-
fecdy bant, at vet gaas, 9. r. ka
tyankila; £,g. tbe ooastrr b
bant m ymUhts cbIt, dia taitO'
kOainkwat
Burrow, n, 4. bwina.
Burrow, to, o. L ku ftunba.
Bury, to, o. a ku abika.
Bush, n, 7. chihuna. A small b,,
If. 7. ohiaoko.
Varieties of bnshes: kamwaya,
ahikameba, mundambe, mu-
nkoyo.
Bush-pig, If. I0.ngulaba,kuntula.
But, prep, except, only, pele.
conj,^ inJL
Butcher, n, i. muAindi.
Butt-end, of spear, if. 8. inshinka ;
of gnn, If. 3. itako.
Butter, if. 3. pL maumba. To
churn butter, ku suka maumba.
Butterfly, if. 8. Inkongolokwa,
inkongolo.
Buttermilk, if. 3. pi, masuke.
Buttocks, n, 3. pL matako.
Button, if. 8. imbuta.
Button, to, v, /. ku ngomena.
Buy, to, v, t, ku ula.
Buzz, to, as bees, v. u ku ngoka.
By, prep, near by, afwafwi a. Ex-
pressing agent, ku, kwa.
Byeway, If. 6. kasbilambadL
Cage, for fowls, n. 7.ohtnkalaaga>
Calabash, the vegetable, if. 3.
ipuahi ; a kiml of, not eaten, n, %
ilunda ; a small, if. 9. laiika«lil.
For carrying water, n. %, inteaho ;
a large, if. 8, inkodi ; a small,
II, 3. mnnkodi ; old, useless, n, 7*
ehlnkndi, Va^yct^n.iyXvlkomM,,
Old, If. 7. ohikoma. For hold-
ing milk, n. 8. inaawa. Mostc^l
instmment made birgely with
calabashes, n, 4, bndifliba. A
pipe made M a small calabash.
If* 9« imbokoflia.
Calf, «.f« momba; //.bomb*;
a wcaaed, if« H, iMoitut^fatOii ; a
newly tMn, if. i. nraboio^ Calf
of tbe kg. If. 9. inaa/a ; hoU fJ,
M» 1. BIWilMlL
Cali cci, n. > iaaai i tuba*
Cali^ to, v. t. kwlla ^ka Ita^, k«
ompdLfAM. Tv ^i '>vS m tuoam
w&ea frtr^zeri, vA, ks bfl>ba. T//
ca^y sf^sau alM«i> ^./. k« 9««6^
274
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
moka. To call, give a name to,
V. t, ku banda.
Calm, n, 9. ludinso.
Calumniate, to, v. /. ku bteha,
ku lengelela umwi kambo.
Calve, to, v, t. ku shala.
Camelthorn tree, n. 3. ihunga.
Camp, n, for, 8. inkambe. The
word is applied to a Government
camp or station.
Can. This is expressed by the verb,
ku konzha, to overcome; e,g. I
can do this, Nda koazha <^echi.
Candle, n, %,fir, inkandele.
Candlestick, n. 7. ohikadikila
Cannibal, n. 3. idyabantu.
Canoe, n, 4. bwato.
Cap, n. 6. kakuane. Gun-cap, n, 8.
intopislio.
Capital, a chiefs village, n. ^
luchena.
Capsize, to, v.i, ku 15ba; v.t,
ku Idbya.
Captain, n, la, for, kapoteni ;
//. bakapotenl
Captive, to take, v. /. kuftimpa.
Captive, a slave, n, i. musbike.
Carcase, n, 2. mutunta.
Care, anxious trouble, n. 3. ipensbi.
Careless, to be, v.i, ku fwa-
nsbafwaiiEba.
Carelessly, adv, ohakufwiuislia-
fwanBha.
Carelessness, n. 5. kufvraxiEha-
fwBiuiha.
Caress, to, v, t. ku kumbata.
Caretaker, one who looks after a
house, &c. during owner's absence,
n, I a. kadlndisbi, pi. batudi-
ndiBbi.
Carpenter, n, i. mubesbi.
Carrier,!^, i. musempusbi; «. i a,
sbimakwati; shimusempula.
Carry, to. .S>^ To bear. To a
anything away, v. /. ku susa. To
c. a load between two people, as
a hammock, v. t, ku tembeka.
To c one thing upon another, v. i,
ku kambika, ku zbidika. To
c. on the head without holding,
as women carry water, v./. ku
tengoneBha. To c. under the
arm, v. /. ku pal^kta. To c. on
the back, v, t, ku bala. To put
a child on another's back, v, t, ku
badika.
Cart, n, %,for, inkaliki.
Cartilage, n, 7. obilekete. The
c. at the base of the sternum, n, 6.
kambamba.
Cartridge, n, 2. mushosbo, xnu-
sbongo.
Carve, to, v. /. ku besa. To c.
for, V. t, ku bezela. To c again,
recarve, as when a walking-stick
is too thick at first, v, t. ku besu-
lula. To c carefully, well, v, /.
ku beBesba. To c. with, cause
or help to c, v, /. ku bezha. To
c. or turn ivory, v. t. ku obeka.
To Ci with, cause, or help to c,
V. /. ku obesba. To c. for, v, t,
ku cbekela. To c. well, care-
fully, V. /. ku ohdkesba. To c,
engrave, v.t, ku lemba, ku
sbLnba.
Carving, engraving, as of table-leg.
If. 3. //. xnayanBa ; in wood, it. 4.
bulambo.
Cask, n. 3. ipopa.
Cassava, n, 3. ikamba. A variety
of. If . I a. shakanjungo. Leaf of,
n. 1 a, ahombo, obisbu cba ma-
kamba.
Cast, to, to throw, v. /. ku wala.
To cast about, scatter, v,t. ku
mwaika. Of trees casting leaves,
v,i, ku tikumuka. To cast,
throw away, v, /. ku sowa. To
cast nets into water, v./. ku
Bdla. To be cast down, v* i, ku
etezba.
Castor-oil plant, n, 3. ibono-
ntelemba.
Oil is made from the beans. The
pods are first shelled (ku Bujm),
and the beans spread out to d^
(ku sanika). When dry they are
beaten up in a mortar (ku twa),
and boiled (ku zenga). As the
refuse rises to the top it is skinuned
off (ku ibula). The oil is used
to anoint the body.
Castrate, to, v. i, ku tatula.
Cat, n. i a, for, kaze ; pi, bakaae.
Wild cat, K. 8. InwuBhi.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
375
Cataract, water&ll, u. 7. ohign-
mo. In tbe eye, «. 3. itab«.
Catch, to, v, t. Ini kwata ; v. t
ku ksp*. To c. foot in sttiinp,
stumble, v, t. ku diftunpala. To
c, of a sickness, 9. t. ku samba-
kishs; e.g, I caught small-pox
from another person, "S^ ka
aambnklBhaohlmbeinba ku mu-
nta omwl. To cfidi with a hook,
V. /. ku loba; with a net, v,i,
ku Bela. To c. fish, v.t, ku
oha.
Catechism, n. 8. />r. inkatektsi-
ma.
Cattle, head of, n* 8. ing'ombe.
A herd of, ii. 4. bntanca. Cattle
ontpost, M. 9«. lotaaga. A horn-
less beast, n. 8. ingThnina, inko-
tolo. A beast with one horn np
tnd the other down, n, 8. imbaba.
Names given U cattle according te
cehur.
Black-and-white, Mack spots, bu-
bala, mabala.
Bladc-and-white, maaekwa.
BladE head and hnmp, white body,
moma-balitmbo*
Blade head, white and black body,
Claiet, insmnn.
Light red, incrkamba.
R^-and-white, nralala.
Red-aiid>whtte qiedded, dUfti-cha-
tnabiil»
Red with idiite stripe roond body,
Ikoaola.
White, with black back, mnlala-
buiariL
White, with red spots, inaau.
Caolx, to, a caaoe, v.t, ku
Cavk, n. J. mofmbe.
Cease, to, to leave off, v./l ka
laka^ To finish, 9. /. ka mana.
CiUBACT, n. ^ katanda.
Celibate, jk. i «. aidkataiida.
CEHnpgJE, j». 3. flmnahamiawe.
Cesttee, at the centre, ado, akatL
hi Ike centre, iimkati.
Ceetaist, a certua pcnoo, aumta
Chafe, to, v. t. kukumbola ; v. t.
ku kumbuka.
Chaff, when grain is beaten out,
If. 4< bungUi
Chain, n, S./or. inketanl
Chair, n. 7. chuna.
Chalk, n. *i.for, ohoko.
Chameleon, ». io. nanundwe,
xialuntambwe.
Change, to, v. /. ka aandula ;
9. f. ku sanduka. To change
one*s conduct, v, u ku sanduka
kukuohita. To change or barter,
9. /. ku ahinta, ku abintaaa.
To change the mind, v. 1. ku
leka.
Change, a c. in one*s character.
If. 7. chibuko ; n, 6. habuko.
Changeable, fickle, v, i, ku aa-
ndauka; adi, -aandausAii
Chap, a crack in the flesh, n, 3.
//. mang^a ; n, 4. bwanda.
Chapter, n, 7. ohandano.
Character, n. 6. katombo.
Charcoal, n. 3.//. maabimbL
Charge, to, to accuse, v.t, ku
bika kanibo ku. To command,
enjoin, v, /. ku lasha. To c. or
load a gun, v, t, ku abonm. As
a lion, or man in anger, 9. i, ku
laimka.
Charity, love, n. 5. kuftina.
Charm, n. 7. ohinda^ The word
is used of sundry things wliich are
worn to protect the wearer from
sickness, witchcraft, accident.
Among others we find :
lauaentfo, a small ham filled with
medidDe, hnng roond the neck.
Mufkiko, a small bag made of
snake-skin, and wom round the
Imamba, a small button-like thing
wom in the hair.
Chase, to, v.t. ku eliidila, ku
tobela.
Chaste. TO 'KE.jpkr. kwina ftomba.
Cheap, to be, v. i. fer. ka chfpa
To naake cheap, lower pdoe, v. t»
ku cfaipiaha.
Cheat, to, v. t. ka dionca
Cheek, n. 3. itama.
Cheer, to, to gladden, v.t. ka
T 2
\
276
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
botezha, To encourage, v, t, ku
kotamuna. To comfort, v,t,
ku sozha.
Cheerful : a joyous, cheerful per-
son, muaumaxnenso, shima-
sesho.
Chest, box, n, 3. ikwati. Of the
body, If. 7. chamba.
Chew, to, v. t, ku taftina. To c
hard things, as maize, v,t, ku
lukuta. To c. noisily, phr. ku
tafuna znuolianku.
Chicken, n. i. mwanankuku.
Newly hatched, n, 6. kansho.
Chief, n, i. znwami. Petty chief,
headman, n. la, unkoshi ; //.
bankoshL
Chiefdom, n, 4. bwami.
Chieftainship, n. 4. bwami.
Chignon, the head-dress of the
Baila, made of hair plastered to-
gether in a cone. When small, it
is called, n, 8. impumbe, insuku.
When made very tall and finished,
n, 8. impwidi, isusu. Balumbn
speak of these derisively as In-
ganda aha injina : lice-houses.
Child, ^. i.znwana. Specifically,
one's own child, n, i. xnuzhale.
A small child, (. e, innocent, n, 7.
chishinshi. A very small child,
n. 6. kansho. A still-bom child,
If. 6. kasowe. To be with child,
early stages, kudi kwete ka-
tomba; later, kudi kwete ifu.
A pregnant woman, n, 1 a. umi-
shi. To have a child for the first
time, ku diiya znwana. To be
delivered of a child, v. u ku tu-
mbuka.
Childhood, n. 4. bwana.
Childishly, adv. chanaohana.
Chili, n. 3. ing*ombs ;//. mang'o-
xnba.
Chin, n, 7. chilevhu.
Chip, if. 7. chipampasha, ohibala-
bala; if. 3. ibslabala.
Chip, to, v.t, ku bendula, ku
benduj^ ; v, i, ku benduka.
Chisel, if. 8. imbezo.
Choke, to, v, t. ku shina ; v.p. ku
shikwa.
Choose, to, v»t. ku tala, ku no-
mona. To c. for, v. t. ku sadila.
To c for oneself, v, /. ku disadila.
Chop, to, down a tree, v, t, ku
tezna. To c. up meat, v, t. ku
yasaula. To c. up firewood, v. /.
ku andaula.
Christ, n,for, KBISTI.
Christian, n, i. mukristi.
Christianity, n, 4. bukristi.
Christmas, n,for, Chismasi.
Church, an ecclesiastical building.
If. ^.for, Inkeleke. The collec-
tive body of Christians, n, 1 a, for.
Uklesia.
Churn, if. 8. insuws.
Churn, to, v. /. ku suka.
Cicatrice, scar remaining after the
healing of a wound, if. 2. mukdftu
Cinders, if. 3. itwe.
Circle, to describe a, v. t. ku fu-
ndulula ; v. u to go round in a
circle, ku zhinguluka.
Circulate, to, to cause to pass
from one to another, v.t. ku
tambuzhanya.
Circumcise, to, v. t. ku palula.
Circumcision, if. 5. kupalula.
City, large town, if. 3. inzhi.
Civility, if. 5. kulemeka.
Civilly, adv. ohakulemeka.
Clamorously, adv. ohakusaba.
Clamour, to, v. i. ku saba.
Clan, if. 7. ohilu ; n. 2. xnukoa.
Clap, to, v. t. ku kamba. To c.
for, salute, v. t. ku kambidila.
Clarify, to, by pouring gently,
leaving dregs at bottom, v, t. ku
anzulula.
Class, as in school, n. 8. inkamu.
Claw, if. 9 a. Iwala.
Clay, if. 4. bulongo. A quantity
of. If. 3. ilongo ; larger quantity.
If. 3.//. malongo. Whitish, used
for smearing bodies in time of
mourning, if. 2. znulaznbQ. Pot
clay. If. 2. znuntanango. Red
clay, used for smearing the body,
If. 7. ohiahila. A lump of dry
day. If. 3. ikoznwe ; a small ditto,
If. 6. kakomwe.
Clean, to be, v. /. ku sweya. To
make clean, v. /. ku swezha.
Cleanse, to, to wash, v./. ku
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
277
nftTighft. To c. by scraping, v. t.
ku palapala. To c by iubbing,
V. /. ku ahnls. To c. hands by
brushing ofif dirt after working,
v./. ku dishobaahoba. To. c
grain by removing dirt, v. t, ku
pepeta, ku Bimgnlft, To c,
purify, V. t, ku njolomya.
Clear, to, to c. away grass by hoe-
ing, V, /. ku aebula. To c as
mist, donds, v.i, ku mwaika.
To c, as the night, to dawn, v, u
ku cha. To be c., as water, v. i.
ku njoloma, ku telekela.
Cleave, to, to cleave to, adhere to,
v,t. ku kakatila. To part by
splitting, V. /. ku andula.
Clench, to, to c the fist, v. /. ku
fombatila. To c. the teeth, in
anger, phr, ku luma inkwino.
Clever, to be, skilful, kudi mano.
To be c or quick in learning, so as
to saipass others, ku lung^tila.
Cleverness, n, 3.//. mano.
Climb, to, v. /. ku disa. To c. by
cnrling ronnd, as plants, v, i, ku
ismbaila.
Clitoris Feminae, n, 2. mu-
kongo.
Clock, it. *i,for, chikatiL
Clod, lump of earth, ikomwe.
Close, to, a door, v. t. ku yala.
To c the eyes, v, i, ku vhula-
lata. To c. a pot, or book, v, t.
kuThunika. To c. a hole, crack,
v,t. ku shinka. To c. a door
partly, V. t, ku chdka. To c the
fist, V, /. ku fombatila.
Close, adv, afwafwl
Clot, of blood, n, 3. itumpata,
ikaiigaloa.
Cloth : print, calico, n, 3. iaani ;
n, 4. buluba. Tweed, &c., n, 7.
for, ctaitofo. A loin-cloth, n. 2.
mubinda. A long stretch of,
». a. mubululu. A shorter
stretdi of, n. 7. chitango.
Clothe, to, v.i. ku sama; v.t.
ku samika.
Clothes, n. 8. ingubo ; n. 7. //.
^thaknmuna; ahisomwa. Euro-
pean clothes, n. 7. //. shikobelo.
White ditto, n. 7.//. shitukulo.
Cloud, m. 3. IkumbL
Clout, to, to beat with the hand,
pAr. ku uma lukombashi.
Clout, a cloth for wiping with,
worn-out rag, n, 7. chisanL
Club, ft. 8. inkodi.
Clump, cluster of trees, fruit, n. 7.
chivhutula.
Cluster, of fruit, tt. 7. chivhutula.
Coagulate, to, to thicken as blood,
V. t. ku angana, ku ba makang-
aloa. To curdle as milk, v, i. ku
dianga, ku angana.
Coat, n. %,for, imbaiki.
Cob, of maize, n. 8. inkoshi.
Cobweb, n. 9. lutangatanga.
White spider's nest, n. i a, namu-
ndelele.
Cock, n. mukombwe. Comb of,
n, 9. Iwala, Iwimbididi. Spur of,
n. 7. chimbi.
Coil, to, as wire round spear, v. t.
ku sambila, ku zambaila. As
a rope, v. /. ku zhinga.
Coil, n. 3. ikata ; n. 8. inkata ;
e.g. the snake coils himself up,
inzoka ya dizhinga makata.
Cold, to be, v. i, ku tontola, ku
fwempeyo (fwa impeyo). To
tremble with, v. i. ku tutuima.
Cold, of wind, n. 8. impeyo.
Catarrh in head, n. 3. ishini. C.
in chest, n. 3. ikolokolo.
Collect, to, v. t. ku bunga, ku
bungika, ku bunganya; v.i.
ku bungana. Of pus in an
abscess, v.i. ku tumbila; e.g.
the pus collects, bwa tumbila
bushila. See To gather.
Colour, n, 3. ibala. There are
only three colours expressed by
verbs, viz. ku tuba, to be white ;
ku shia, to be black ; ku aubila,
to be red. To express other colours
use is made of the names of various
things, e.g.
lahudiangombe, lit. cow*s urine,
yellow.
Injanjabizhi, something found in
stagnant water. A kind of green.
See under Cattle.
Slightly coloured, n. 3. ibalabala ;
e.g. my ox is only slightly coloured.
378
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
insomba yangu idi kwete
ibalabala budio.
Colonr, paint, n. 2. mabaso.
To colour, paint, n, 5. ku basa.
Comb, to, the hair, v. i. ku sukula.
Comb, n, 7. chisukulo. Of cock,
n. 9. Iwala, Iwimbididi.
Come, to, vJ, kweaa (ku esa),
ku Eiaa. To c. after, follow, v, t.
ku obidila. To arrive, v. u ku
shika. To c. back, v, i, ku
shoka. To c. down, v.u ku
seluka. To c. for, v. i, ku zUa.
To c. in, V, i, ku Bjila. To c.
out, of a handle, v. i, ku kuka.
To c. np, of plants, v, /. ku vhwa
busonga. To c. near, approach,
V. i, ku sena.
Comfort, to, v. t. ku sosha.
Comforter, n, i. muaoahi.
Command, to, to order, v.t, ku
laaha. To lead soldiers, v, /. ku
(nm^ula.
Command, a law, order, n. 9. lu-
beta ; n. a. mulazho.
Commandant, n, i. muaunffudi.
Commandment, n, 9. lubeta ; n, 2.
mulasho.
Commence, to, v, i. ku tanguna.
Commingle, to, v. u ku aangana,
ku vwelana.
Commit, to, v, t, ku ohita.
Communion, n» 5. kuyanana.
Companion. See Friend.
Company, small company of people,
n, 8. inkamu ; n. 8. for, inku-
mpani.
Compare, to, to c. one thing with
another as to likeness, v. L ku
koahanya. To place alongside
each other, to c. size, vj, ku ba-
mbanya.
Compassion, n. 8. intenda.
Compassionate, to, phr. ku ohi-
shilwa muntu moBO, ku fwila
muntu intenda.
Compassionately, adv. ohan-
tenda.
Compel, to, to force, do with
strength, ku ohita chansana.
Complain, to, z/. /. ku tenga.
Complete, to, v, t. ku maaa, ku
manya.
Completely, adv. chakumana.
Compress, to, to squeeze, v, t, ku
shina To make small, v,t. ku
ohesha.
Comrade, ». i. ninlongo. My
comrade, mulongwMigiu ; thyc.,
jnulongwako ; his c., muloug-
wakwe.
Conceal, to, to hide, v.i, ku
Buba; V, t, ku sosaika, ku
seseka, ku zubika.
Conceited, to be, v,u ku di-
nunika.
Conceited person, it. i. mudi-
nuniahi.
Conceive, to, in the womb.
Phr, the woman conceives, mu-
kaintu wa ko0ola. To become
pregnant, v, i, ku imita. To
cause to conceive, v* t, ku iiniaha.
To give medicine to canse con-
ception, V, t, ku kandainikft^
Concerning, /fv/. a; e.g, let ns
speak concerning his conduct, a
tu bandike a knohita kwa-
kwe.
Conciliate, to, v, t, ku bonaha,
ku kambidiaha. A present given
to c, n. 7. ohikambidialio.
Conclude, to, v.hlca, manina.
Phn Here it ends ; this is the end,
Ngukela.
Concubine, one with whom a man
has Intercourse but is not properly
married to her, n, 7. oldkulu-
bwilo ; n. la, nachiaandula.
Conduct, to, to direct, guide, v, /.
ku enaba. Custom, n, 7. chi-
anza.
Coney, ». i a, cbibila ; pi. bachi-
bila.
Confess, to, to own a lault, v.L
ku dlwhlinuTia.
Confession, n. 5. kudishixnuna.
Confide, to, v. t. ku shoma.
Confidence, if. 5. kualioma.
Confirm, to, v. /. ku shiuiaba.
Confiscate, to, v. t. ku landa.
Confiscation, n. 5. kulauda.
Conflict, n. 5. kulwana.
Confluence, of rivers, n. 5. ku-
yanana kwa milonga.
Confuse, to, perplex, v./.ku ahi-
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
»79
ngnlusluk To be oooiiised, v» t .
Confusion, disorder, n. $, kupi*
dlngana. To create disorder,
conftisioii, v./. ku picHngany.
To be in a state of confasioD, dis-
order, 9. f . ku iiidingana..
Congeal, to, v. /. ku diang*, ku
Congregate, to, v,i. ku bun-
gana.
Congregation, n, 8. imbungana
Connect, to, v. /. ku lunga.
Conquer, to, v, /. ku sunda.
Conqueror, n. i. muaundi. A
conquered person, if. i.muBunda.
Conscience, to be conscience-
stricken, ku Thwa moBO.
Consecrate* to, to set apart for,
V, t, ku sadila ; 4, g. This tbing is
consecrated to God, Ohintu ohe-
Chi oha aadilwa Iieaa.
Consent, to, v. /. ku irumina..
Consider, to, v. f. ku telaika.
Console, to, to comfort, v. A ku
soaha.
Consume, to, to waste, eat up, v. /.
ku dya. Of fire, v, t. ku tenia.
Contagious, v, i, ku sambukila.
Contain, to. To express this nse
is made of other words ; i^g. This
bag contains grain, Inkomo eohi
idi kwete maila, or, munkomo
mono mudi maila.
Contemn, to, to despise^ v.i, ku
sampatila. To aUise, v.t, ku
tuka.
Contemptible, adj, -aampuahi.
Continually, adv, shikwenae,
dionse.
Contract, to, to shorten, v. /. ku
fvnnaha.
Contradict, to, v.t, ku kasha,
ku aeulula.
Contradiction, n. ^.pl, maaau.
A person who contradicts, n. la.
shimaaeu ; n. i. muaeuluahi.
Convene, to, to gather together,
V. t, ku bunganya, ku aobolola.
Conversation, n, 5. kubandika.
Convert, to, v. /, ku aandula ;
v.u "kVL sanduka; n, i, musa-
aduahi.
Convince, to, v.t, kn'vuminya.
Cook, to, by boiling, v, t. ku ika;
by roasting, v. /. ku Booha. To
cook for, V, t, ku ikila, ku so-
chUa.
Cool, to be, v. i, ku tontola. To
cool, V. t, ku tontoBha,
Copper, n, 2. mukuba.
Copulate, to, of mankind, of the
man, v. /. ku kunda, ku teba.
Of the woman, ku kundwa, ku
tabwa. Of animals, of the male,
V, t, ku sampa ; of the female, ku
aampwa.
Eupk, of the male, ku sotoka ; of
the female, ku aotokwa.
Copy, to, v.y. ku idila, ku idi-
aha.
Cord, string, if. 9. loshi. A c.
used for tying fish, n, 6. koae.
Cork, stopper, ». 7. chiahinaho.
Corn. Set Grain.
Corner, n, 2. mwako.
Corporal, n, ia,for. kopolo; //.
bakopolo.
Corpse, n, 2. mutunta.
Corpulent, to be, v. i. ku iniaha.
A corpulent person is nicknamed
IbuBu, f . e, a baobab.
Correct, to, to amend, v. i. ku
boaha.
Corrupt, to be, to be rotten, v. 1.
ku bola. To make corrupt, v, t,
kuboleka.
Corruptible, to be, v. i, ku bo-
leka.
Cost. This must be expressed in a
different way; e,g. What is the
cost of this? lit. How is this
bought, Oheohi chi laulwa buU ?
This thing is costly, oheohi oha
ulwa busumo. In the sense of
precious, costly is to be rendered
by the verb ku aandika, or the
noun buaandi.
Cotton, wild, ». 4. butongi.
Cotton-bushes, n, 4. //. matongi.
Cough, to, v.i. ku kola. To
clear the throat by coughing, tr. /.
ku koma.
Councillor, n, i. mubudi.
Counsel, advice, if. 5. kubula;
V. /. to advise, ku bula.
28o
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Count, to, v. t. ku bala.
Countenance, n, 7. chiwa ; n, 4.
bTuhu.
Country, n, 8. inshl A c. with
trees, and only short grass, n, 2,
musweya ; n, 3. itwentwe ; n, 3.
//. mabua. A c. with no grass,
only a few trees, hard ground,
water scarce, n. 8. inkanda. A
c. with tall grass, scattered trees,
n, 3. isokwe. A c. open, few
or no trees, a plain, n, 3. ibanda ;
a large plain, n. 8. inyika. An
inhabited c, n. 4. bwande.
The prefix Bu- indicates names of
conntries ; ^.^. Bukubu, the coiin-
tnr of the Marotsi; Bwila, that
ol the Baila.
Courage. Same word as for anger^
fierceness, n, 4. bukadi.
Court, to. There is nothing
answering to our custom of conrt*
ship before marriage. If the pro-
spective bridegroom be young, the
parents take charge of the busi-
ness, and arrange a marriage be-
tween the young people. If he be
an adult, the man goes to the girFs
parents and asks for her (ku sesa).
If they agree, then the amount to
be paid as dowry is fixed (chiko).
If the girl is still a child, the mar-
riage may be arranged to take
place when she reaches puberty ;
m that case the man, during the
time of waiting, gives her presents.
This is termed ku badddla> or,
ku samika.
Court-house, house of chief where
cases are heard, n, 6. kalonga.
Court- yard, n. 8. inkanzo ; n. 9.
lubanBa.
Covenant, «. a. mtdongo. To
make a covenant, v. t, ku tanga ;
e,g. I make a covenant with him,
Nda mu tanga mulongo. To
make a covenant mutually, v./.
ku tangana. See Ita-Eng. Vocab,
Inkwela.
Cover, to, a pot, v. /. ku vhuni-
ka. To c. anything over, v, t,
ku vhumba. To c. in a hole or
grave, v, t, ku lapaila.
Covering, lid of a vessel, n. 7.
ohivhunisho.
Covet, to, v. t. ku dikumbuzba,
ku dielezha ; e,g, I covet his
things, Nda dikumbuzha shintu
shakwe.
Co^^ETOUSNESS, 91. 5. kudikumbu-
zba.
Cow, n, 8. impwizhi. A heifer
ready for the bull, inanga mu-
ohende. A barren c, n, 8. in-
sundi.
Coward, n, i. mukandu.
Cowardice, n. 4. Bowa (boa).
Crab, n, 8. inkala.
Crack, to, nuts or lice, v, /. ku
ponda. To c, split, v,t, ku
andula. To c. the finger-joints,
ku chita impongolwa.
Crack, in wood or wall, n. 9. luta ;
in foot, or in path, n. 3. //.
mang'a.
Craftily, adv. cbamaiio.
Crafty, to be, kudi mano.
Cram, to, food into the mouth, v, /.
ku toznwena.
Cramp, used in carpentry, «. 7,
chikwatisho. To have cramp in
leg, itende dia minwa.
Crane, crested, if. i a. namuwaae;
//. banamuwane.
Crave, to, to ask for earnestly, v, t,
ku pumpisba.
Crawl, to, v, u ku kalaba.
Crazy person, n. i a, shikalalu ;
//. baahlkalalu.
Creak, to, v, i, ku tetema.
Cream, n. 9. lukungu.
CREAM-OF-TARTAR tree, If. 3,
ibuzu.
Create, to, v. /. ku bumba.
Creator, n, i. mubumbi. Name
given to God as Creator, it. i a.
Iiubumba.
Creature, n. 7. cbibumbwa.
Credulous, to be, v./. ku bdka,
ku ohengeka.
Credulous, culj, ohengeshi.
Creek, used in fishing, kaunga-
konzhl
Creeper, kasamo ka zambaila.
A kind of creeping plant said to
have neither beginning nor end^
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
281
n. la, BSBambe. A kind of
creeper of which the root is nsed
to suffocate bees, if. a. mutindL
Crest, n, 8. ingala.
Crime : ^Eiiilt, if. 6. ksmbo, n. a.
malandti.
Crimson, to be, vJ. ku subi-
diaha.
Cripple, n, la, ohihole, //. baahi-
hole.
Crocodile, n, la, ohiwena, //.
bachiwexia.
Crook-back, when bent inwards,
n, la, shichimiiii ; when bent
outward, hnmp-back, n. la.
ahintunda.
Crooked, to be, carved round at
one end, v,t. ku kombomana;
warped, v. 1. ku konkomana ;
twisted in one place, v, i. ku
sendama; twisted all through,
V, i. ku pitana.
To make crooked, as above^ v.t,
kn kombomeka, ku konko-
meka, ku 8endainika» ku
pitanya.
Crooked, adj, special meanings as
above, -kombomene, -konko-
mene, -sendeme, -pitene.
Crooked Thing, a thing which
corves, bends back, n. 7. chimini ;
a smaU ditto, n, 6. kaxnini.
Crop, of bird, if. 7. chiaugilo.
Cross, to, v,u a river, ku lan-
duka ; to c. a river, v, t, ku
landusha; to c, put one thing
across another, v.t, ku chin-
kanya, v. i. ku ohinkaaa.
Cross, n, 7. chichinkano.
Crouch, to, down in hiding, v. i.
ku bamb^ala.
Crow, h. i o. ohikwangala.
Crow, to, of a cock, v. u ku koko-
. loka.
Crowd, to, of a number of people
pressing, v. f . ku vhumpa ; to be
crowded, without room, v. f. ku
ata.
Crowd, a crowd of people, ii. a.
makamu-makamu.
Crown, of beads put around the
head, if. 3. mushinl
Crucifixion, if. 5. Subambulwa.
Crucify, to, »./. ku bambula.
The word is applied originally to
the stretching out and pegging of
anything, such as a hide.
Cruel, to be, kudi inkole.
Cruelly, adv. ohankole.
Cruelty, if. 8. inkole; a cruel
person, if. \a, shinkole.
Crumb, h. 6. kapansha, if. 4.
bufa-bufix.
Crumble, to, v, t, ku pondaula.
Crush, to, v, t, ku shanyansa, ku
shanshaula.
Cry, to, v, i, ku dila ; to cry much,
loudly, V. f. ku didiaha ; of a
wounded animal or person, v. u
ku boba; of a child, v,u ku
kuwaila ; of a child, angrily, v, i,
ku pimba; of the shrill cry of
women when playing, v. i. ku
wela; of women when saluting,
V, i. ku ulubwizha, ku uma
tunchelenchele.
Cucumber, wild, n, 3. ikoa,
makoa.
Cud, to chew, v. /. ku aelula.
Cultivate, to, ». t, ku dima.
Cultivator, if. i. mudimi.
Cunning, if. 3. //. mano.
Cunning PERS0N,«if. i a, shimano.
Cunningly, adv, chamano.
Cup, drinking-utensil, if. 7. chin-
wino. If. 6. kanwino, if. 6.
kayenge, if. %.for, inkomiki.
Cup, to, v.i. ku sumika; horn
used in cupping, if. a. musuku.
In cupping the &m is first scarified,
then the hoin is placed over the
spot, and through a hole in the
end a person sucks; blood then
flows. Of this it is said, The
musuku draws blood, Musuku
wa kwela buloa.
Cure, to, v. t, ku ponya.
Curl, to, round, v, i, ku Bamba-
ila.
Curry, to, a skin by scraping, v, t.
ku pala.
Curse, to, v.t. ku ombwesha,
ku ahinganya.
Examples: — May the lion bite
you, XTshumbwa ngu wa ku ku
luma. May the mulala bite you,
282
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Mulala nga wa ku ku konka.
May yoa die before you are
grown, XT old alele wa ku fwa
a buyi bu te edi. May Leza
strike you, ITwe u ohi elele
kono Leaa wa ku anda.
To swear, take an oath, v, f . ka
pinga.
Examples ofoatks: — By Leza, ngu
Iieza. By the ash, nd'itwe.
As we may forget those who are
dead, bu twa ka ba lubila oba
ka fwa. By the ash, which the
dead say, nditwe ndi la amba
ba fwa. May I cnrse my elder,
I have not got it, Nda mu tuka
weao mukando, shi ohi kwete.
By the ground, nd' ivhu. May
I be cut np into pieces, Nda
pasauka. May you be split up,
17 la andauka.
To curse, to call foul names^ ku
tuka; such abnsings are called
znatushi.
Examples : — You have eaten your
mother, Wa ba dya banoko.
Wa ba twala banoko, You have
married your mother. Wa ba
kunda banoko, You slept with
your mother. Su tuka is con-
sidered a very serious thing.
Curtain, ». 7. ohidishitidialio.
Custom, n, 7. ohianaa.
Cut, to, n, 7. ku kosola ; to c. the
skin, tatoo, v. t, ku lemba ; to c.
oneself, v. /. ku nenga ; to c. up
firewood, v, /. ku andaula ; to c.
the hair, v, /. ku shisa ; to c.
even the poles of a roof, or thatch,
V. t, ku konkolola ; to c. round,
as a hide in making reins, v,t.
ku nengulula; to c. np into
pieces, v.t, ku pasaula; to c.
across with knife or saw, v, /. ku
tenda ; to c. down trees, v. /. ku
tema ; to c. open belly of animal,
V, t, ku talula ; to c. with adze,
V, t. ku beaa ; to c. up meat, v, t,
ku yasaula; to c. up an animal,
V. U ku famba ; to c. a tree
above, i.e, to cut off branches,
v.t, ku kunka; to c. np meat
into strips for drying, v./, ku
sama; to c grass dose to the
ground, mow, v, t. ku ixhesa.
Cut, adj. chopped-np, -andausbl.
Daily, each day, bushiku bumwi
bumwi. Every day, all the days,
iiudiiku shonae; e,g. our daily
bread, inshima shesu aha inshi-
ku shonae.
Damage, to, v.t, ku biaha.
Dam, bank of earth across a stream,
n, 8. insenda.
Damp, moist, acy\ -teke ; t.g. damp
or moist mealies, mapopwe
matake. Damp, dampness, «. 3.
mushu, mushiwe ; 4.g. the
ground is damp, inslii idi
mushu.
Dance, if. 7. ohiBhano. Varieties of:
chipelu, ohiBhimbo, dinguya.
Lewd dances are, ohingande,
ohisungu.
Dance, to, v, i, ku ahana ;
dancing-place, n, 8. inkanao.
Dare, to, to try, v. t, ku aoleka.
DANGEROUS,of a road, adj, -lumine,
-sokobele ; e.g. this road is dan-
gerous, inahiia eahi idi lumine.
The word is applied to a road
when lions are upon it, or when
the people near it are on the look-
out to kill travellers.
Dangerous, to be, v, i. ku soko-
bala.
Dark, to be, v. u ku ahia ; to be
very dark, v. i, ku ahiaha-
Darkness, n, 2. mushinae, mun-
ahinaew; darkness is falling, wa
tuluka, or wa koaoka mu-
shinae ; darkness is breaking,
mushinae wa ombuluka.
Dash down, to, v.t. ku kankata;
to dash or sweep down as a hawk,
V, i. ku kwempa.
Dart, to, out upon any one, as lion
or dog, V. /. ku sotekela.
Daughter, n. i. mwana mn«
shimbL
Dawdle, to, v. i. ku imoka.
Dawn, to, v. i. ku oha. At the
time of the second cock-crow, ku
manoha, ku manchela ; time
before sunrise, shimbundn; of
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
283
tbe daikness breaking, v.i. ka
baloosalft, ka ombolnka.
Day, h, 4. BnflhikOi biunba; i». 3.
iiuba.
Bnflhika indicates the whole
twen^-fonr hours; btusaba, or
isuba* the daytime only.
To-day, usiina; to-morrow, uso-
aa. The day before yesterday, or
the day after to-morrow, ubws-
dirnwi.
JIfiw tk£ day is divided :-^ht first
cock-crow, ka busbika ; at the
second cock-crow, ka manohela,
ka mimoha ; before snnrise,
•hlmbonda, chifhmofiuao,olii-
ftuno ohiniohini ; at sunrise,
nidiiMaa; early morning, soon
after sunrise, ohiAimo ; about
breakfast-time, ohikaaadishl ;
midday, akalendebwe. Noon is
monsa; the name is also given
to the whole period of daylight.
Just at noon, manaa mwini-
mwini ; early afternoon, kaboa
shabembeBhi ; later, 4Uaanga-
onga; late afternoon, mango-
leaha; at sunset, diakomboka,
dJbabila ; just after sunset, when
the sky is red ; diaaubidiaha ;
erening, aohialdaho; at night,
maahika.
Days of the week : — Sunday, In-
•anda ; Monday, Muahimbu-
lako; Tuesday, BwabiU; Wed-
nesday, Bwatata ; Thursday,
Bwase ; Friday, Bwaaano ;
Saturday, Imbelekelo.
Dazqje, to, V, /. ka towa.
Dead, to bb, v. i, ka fwa. JSupk.
ka koaoka. A person who has
died, n, i. mafU; n, la. shi-
kafwa.
Deadly thing, a thing which will
cause death, ». 7. obifo.
DSAF PERSON, If. I. mula ;
maahinkematwi ; n. la. ohi-
mpama.
Dear, to be, to be loved, v,p, ku
funwa. To be lovable, v. i. ka
fanika. To be dear, costly, v. 1.
ka Boma ; e,g'. this grain is very
costly, mailaaaaaalwabaaamo.
Death, m,*g a, lafa ; n, 5. kafwa.
Deathly, adv, ohalafa.
Debate, to, to follow one another
in speaking, ka ohidiahanya ka
amba.
Debt, fault, n, a. malanda.
Decay, to, v,i. ka bola; to be
much decayed, rotten, v.i, ka
bodiaha ; to decay or fail as an
aged person, v,i, ka ela; v.i.
ka ahinoLpa.
Deceit, n. 5. kaohenga.
Deceitfully, adv. ohakaohenga.
Deceivable, to be, V, i. ka che-
ngeka, ka beka.
Deceivable, adj. .-ohengeahi.
Deceive, to, v. t, ka ohanga, v. i.
ku diaataoka.
Deceiver, n. i. maobengi. One
who promises and does not do,
n. I. mudibeahi.
Decline, to, of the sun, v. i. ka
komboka.
Decorate, to, by clothing, v.t.
ku samika ; to ornament, v, /.
ka ebezha.
Decrease, to, v.i. ka twetana;
V. t. ku twetanya.
Decreased, adj. -twetene.
Deep, v. i. ka lampa, adj. -lamfa,
n, 4. balondu, used as o^*. ; e.g,
this river is deep, weza mulonga
wa lanii>a ; weza malonga nxu-
lamfa; weaa malonga adi
bulonda.
Deepen, to, v.U ka lanaha; to
deepen a fountain by taking out
the mud, v. t, ku kololola.
Defaecate, to, v. I. ku nya, ku
aala. Phr, Have you been to
the bush to-day ? 8a wa ya
kunae aaunu?
Defeat, to, v. t. ka zanda.
Defeat, n. 4. bazunde.
Defend, to, to defend oneself, to
parry, v./. ku kobela, ku kobe-
zha; to defend another, v.t. ku
kobelela.
Defile, to, v. t. ku sofwazha ; to
make black, dirty, v. t. ku
ahizba.
Defiled, to be, v. i. ku sofwala,
kuahia.
284
ENGLISH4LA VOCABULARY
DEFORMED) TO BE, V, t. IcU shislli-
bala. The same word is used of
a misshapen pot ; e.g. this man
is deformed, muntu wezu udi
shiahibele.
Deformed, adj. -shiahibele.
Deject, to, cast down in spirits,
V. t. ku etezha.
Dejected, to be, v. i. ku etezha,
ku etezhiwa.
Delay, to, v. i. ku imoka, ku
poposha. To delay or take a
long time in doing anything, v. i.
ku ohezha ; e.g. ushimpoflo wa
chezha, the postman has taken a
long time ; mudimo wa oliezlia,
the work has taken a long time in
doing. One who delays, n. i.
mukoko ; e.g. why do yon delay?
mwa imokilanzM ?
Deliberately, slowly, without
haste, adv. ohabunonga.
Deliberation, in work, or eating,
n, 4. bunonga; a deliberate per-
son, n. I a. shibunonga.
Deliver, to, from difficulty,
danger, v.t. ku vhuna; to be
delivered of a child, v. i. ku
tumbuka.
Deliverance, n, 5. kuvhuna.
Deliverer, n. i. muvhuxiL
Demolish, to, a house, v. t. ku
inwaya.
Demon, n. i. for znudemona.
Evil spirits, spirits of the dead,
whom to see is to die, shikazwa,
kanchinya. A spirit or some-
thing supposed to live in the
forest ; if one chances to see it he
will die, n. i a. shiohobochobo.
Denial, n. 5. kukazha.
Denier, n. i. znukazhL
Deny, to, ku kazha.
Depart, to, to leave, v. t. ku shia;
to start, V. i, ku unka, ku zhi-
znoka. •
Deprive, to, v.t, ku imya; to
deprive by fining, v. /. ku landa.
Depth, n. 4. bulondu.
Deride, to, v.f. ku seka; to
deride veiy much, v. t. ku se-
kesha.
Descend, to, v. i. ku seluka ; to
descend into a pit, ^ku z^ila mu
kalaxnbwe ; to descend a hill, or
bank of river, v.i, ku kunku-
luka.
Desert, to, v. /. ku leka ; to
desert or leave one alone, especially
a friend, v. t. ku imbizha ; to be
left, deserted, v. p. ku imbilwa.
Desert, a wide plain, n. 8. inyika.
The word komanizha is used by
some to mean a desert; but it
seems that this word is simply a
mistranslation of the Snto lefee-
leng. The Suto word is derived
from feela, and means a place
where there is nothing; whereas
the Ila word is derived from ku
xnana, to finish, and means die
end of something. The mistake
has arisen by confounding the Sato
word feela with ku fela, to end.
Deserted village, the place
where a village stood at one time
is called, n, 3. itongo; the
whole locality, with the old fields,
n. 3. iyundo.
Deserve, to, to be fit for, kudi
elele ; e.g. he deserves to die,
udi elele ku fwa. We deserve
to be beaten, tudi elele kn
umwa.
Desire, to, to wish for, v, t. ku
zeza; to desire, covet, v.t. ku
dikuxnbuzha ; to desire, par-
ticularly food, lit. to swallow
spittle, ku mina mate ; ku fwB
lunyaunya; ku fwu ohimlna-
znate.
Desire, for food, if. 7. ohimina-
mate, n. 9. lunyaunya; other
desire, n. i. znuzezo ; evil desire,
especially sexual, n. 7. ohiimwhi.
Desist, to, v.t. ku ahilrila, ku
lekezha.
Desolate, to lay, v, t. ku sfila.
Despicable, to be, v. i. ku sa-
mpaudika.
Despise, to, v,t, ku sampaula,
ku cbata, ku dimbausha.
Despised, adj. -sampaushi.
Destroy, to, v. t. ku zonaula^ ku
yaya.
Destroyed, to be, v. i. ku
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
285
Bonaokab Impaired, destroyed
as to utility, as gunpowder when
soaked, v. f . ku tunduka.
Destroyed, €Ldj. -sonaashi ; a
destroyed thing, ». 8. ingftu
Details, small facts, ». 6. //.
tukani; to tell a story in full,
with details, v. t. leu kololola.
Devil, n. 10. Diaboloai; Satan,
It. itf. Shatani.
Devour, to, to eat, v, t. ka dya ;
to eat much, rayenously, v. t,
ku dialia.
Dew, n. 2. xnuin^.
Dewlap, n. 3. ibovhu.
Dialect, ». 2. mw&mbo. See
Language.
Diarrh(ea, to have, v. i. ku
suIuUl
Die, to, v, i. ku fwa.
The word is used with a wider
meaning than in English, hence
the following words : Tod. much,
altogether, zf. fl ku fwiaha, ku
fwididila ; to d. for, v. i, ku
fwila ; to d. suddenly, without
apparent cause, v,i, ku mansu-
ka.
Different, to be, v.u ku an-
dana, kudi andene; e.g, these
stories which you tell me differ,
tulabi totu ntu wa xuBhimwina
tudi andene. They are different
from each other, badi andanine.
How are they different? Ba la
andana buti? The idea of
other, different, is expressed by
the adj, -nji; e,g, I want other,
different, food, Nda kapula
ahidyo shinji.
Dig, to, v.t. ku aha; to dig
much, v.t, ku shisha; to d. or
hoe, in cultivation, v, /. ku dima ;
to d. or hoe deeply, v.t, ku
chinka ; to d. out a fountain,
v./. ku kololola.
Dignified, to be, v, i, ku lemia.
Dignity, »• 4. bulemu ; with
dignity, adv, ohabulemu ; a
dignified person, ». i. mulemu.
Diminish, to, to make small, v, /.
ku ohesha; to make less, de-
, cxease, v./. ku twetaaya.
Dining-room, a place for eating,
n, 7. chidilo.
Dip, to, v,t, ku teka; calabash
dipper, n, 9. lukoma ; small
ditto, n, 6. kakomia.
Direct, to, to instruct, order, v, t.
ku laaha; to d., show, v,t. ku
leaha ; to d. or send, v, t, ku
tuma.
Direction, ». 4. buluzhilushi ;
e.g, to point out the direction
where he lives, ku tondeka
buluzhilushi mbwa shitL In
all directions, adv, AnkiJTika.
Directly, adv. inzho, inaho-
inzho, ndidiona. In the sense
of as soon as, use budio, with the
subjunctive; e.g. directly upon
his arrival he began to eat, a
shike budio wa kanka ku dya.
Dirge, funeral song, n, 9. Iwimbo
Iwa ku diaha.
Dirt, ». 3. itomba; sweepings of
a house, n. 3. //. makwaahanyi.
Dirtily, adv, cdietomba.
Dirty, adj. -aofwele ; of water,
-hundaushi; to be d., v.i, ku
ahia, ku sofwala ; of water, ku
hundauka ; to make dirty, v. t.
ku ahizha, ku sofwazha ; of
water, by stirring up, ku hun-
daula.
Disagree, to, v, u ku andana.
Disagreeable, a disagreeable,
quarrelsome person, n, la. ahi-
bwanzhi.
Disagreeableness, quarrelsome-
ness, n. 4. bwanahi.
Disagreeably, ad;, chabwanahi.
Disappear, to, v, i. kupetuka ;
e.g. he disappears into the forest,
V, u wa petiika ku isokwe.
Disappearance, n. 5. kupetuka.
Disappoint, to, to make sorry,
V. /. ku uaha.
Disbelieve, to, v.t, ku dimbu-
lula.
Discharge, to, a gun, v.t. ku
fusa; to discharge or dismiss a
workman for a fault, v,U ku
tanda.
Disciple, one taught, n. i. mwi-
yiwa (mwiwa).
286
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Disclose, to, an affair which has
been hidden, v, t, ka subulula ;
to point out a man in fault, v. t,
ku anza.
Discord, n. 5. kupyopyongana.
To be in discord, tumultuons, v. i,
ku pyopyongana ; to create dis*
cord, tnmult, v. t, ku pyopyon-
ganya.
Discourage, to, v,l ka etesha.
Discourse, to, to talk, v,L ku
bandika, ku shimuna ; of a set
discourse, speech, or sermon, of
one person speaking at length,
V, f. ku kambauka. One who
discourses, a preacher, iu i.
mukambaushi.
Discover, to, to find, v,t, ku
yana; to discover, invent, intro-
duce something hitherto unknown,
V. /. ku lenga.
Disease, n. 4. bulwashi, if. 7.
ohilwaahi; a sick person, n, i.
xnulwaBhi ; any contagious
disease, which spreads quickly, as
rinderpest, or small-pox, ». 7.
ohSka.
List of diseases^ tfc.
Bronchitis, ikolokolo.
Cataract in eye, itube.
Catarrh in head, ishini.
Haematuria, ishinga.
Itch, bwele.
Leprosy, chinsenda.
Madness, kalalu.
Malarial fever, nrwaasa.
Mange, ohilongwe.
Measles, ohibombwe.
Pleurisy, kamuchamba.
Quinsey, tupopo.
Rinderpest, kankolomwena.
Small-pox, chimbembe, naohin-
kwa, mukolotila, mudimaku-
bushu.
Syphilis, mananaa. Others : — ohi*
bondo ; ohalutente ; buaono ;
ohikuba; ohinzovwe; isho-
kola; isuba.
Disentangle, to, a tangled string,
v.t, ku potonona; to untwist,
V. t. ku sambulula.
Dish, n, 2, mutiba.
Dish-up, to, v./. ku pampula;
to turn out porridge, or bread,
V. t, ku pula.
Dishonest, to bb, v, >. kudi sen-
deme.
Dishonest, ad/, -sendeme.
Dishonour, to, v.t, ku ubaula;
to treat an elder, or superior, with
disrespect, ku nyanBha, ku te-
ngula.
Disjoin, to, v, t. ku lungulula ;
of pieces of wood mortised to-
gether, V, t, ku kula.
Dislike, to, v./. ku fw«mba;
e,g, I dislike him, ndi mu
fwembele. To mutually dislike,
V, t. ku fwembana.
DiSLIKEABLE, TO BE, V,i, kU
fwembika; (ulj, 'fwexnbiabi.
Dislocate, to, v,u ku leyuka,
V, t, ku leyula.
Dislodge, to, an animal from its
den, V, t, ku sokonya ; anything
from up in a tree, v, /. ku onsa.
Dis&nss, to, an assembly, v,t, ku
mwaiaha.
Dismount, to, v, i, ku seluka.
Disobey, to, v,t, ku kaka, ku ba
sihlkisapi.
Disobedience, n, 7. ohisapi.
Disobedient person, n, la,
shiohisapi, diiikisapi.
Disorder, to be in, v,i, ka
pidingana; e,g', the house is in
disorder, munganda xnudi pi-
diiig«iie. To cause to be in dis-
order, V, t, ka pidingaaya.
Disown, to, to deny, v,t. ka
kasha ; e,g, he disowns the dog,
saying. It is not mine, wa kasha
mubwa, ati, Tadi irango.
Dispensary, n, 7, ehiithidlkilo.
Disperse, to, to drive away, v,t.
ku tanda; to scatter, of people,
v,t, ku sangaula; to be dis-
persed, scattered, v,i, Yxi san-
gauka.
Dispersion, n, 5. kusaagaoka;.
Dispute, to, v,i, ku zumanaiia,
ku ohlta shikanL
Disrespect, n, 5. iuboba ; to
treat an elder with disrespect, o« /•
ku nyaniha, katengola.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
287
DiSRSSPECTFUL PERSON, fi, lO,
shiubabo.
DissATiSFiiCTiON, If. 5. kutenga.
Dissatisfied, to be, v.i, ku
tensa; e.^. he ig dissatisfied with
his money, wa tenga madi akwe.
Dissolve, to, v.t. ka enitintuha,
v.u leu enBrmtika. Of dods
breaking np under the rain, v,i,
ka bomboloka. Said of two
who dissolve a prerioas friendship
and fip[ht, or of two who made a
bargam and one became dissatis-
fied and it is broken, v,i, ka
bokana.
Distant, to be, v. i, ku lakaaa.
Distant, a^*. •«akena,a<ft^. kalale.
Distribute. See To allot.
Ditch, a long ditch to keep off
locnats from, a field, n, 9. lata.
Dive, to, v.i. ka ibila; e.^. the
man di^ed and came ap, monta
ke bidile, wa ftunpoka.
Divide^ to, v. /. ku aba, ka abil%
ka aadanya ; e. g, he divided the
food among his people, wa abila
baatn bakwe shid^o. The
Creator divided the day and the
ai^^t, Iiabomba wa ka an-
duiya monaa o maahika. To
divide among each other, ka
abUana; v.i. Ym andana; of
roads, v, i, ka pambana.
Divine, to, by casting bones, v, t.
ka sonda, ka waaha.
Diviner, m- i* moaonahi.
Divinity, Godhead, n, 4. Ba-
Iiasa.
Divisible^ to be, 9. i, ka abfka.
Division, n. 7. ohipaQaha, ohaa-
danoy ohabilo>
Divorce, to, v,t, ku leka mu-
kaintu.
Do, to,, v.t. ku Chita; to do
hnniedly, carelessly, v. t ku
iha; to do quickly,
ka fwamba ka ohita; to ao
over again, v.LIkxl lolola; to do
for somebody, v./. ku chitila; to
do something new, v. t, ku lenga;
to do earnestly, ku mana o moso
omwi y to do, or work well, v. t.
ka londda; to keep on doing a
thing, adhere to it, v. /. ku suma-
nana.
Doctor, 0. i. munganga, mushi*
dishi.
Doctor, to, v, /. ku ahidika,
Dodge, to, v. /. ku lea.
Dog, ff. I. mubwa; a small dog,
n, 6* kabwa ; a dog is also
named mbiaa; to eat as a dog,
v. t. ku kapa.
Dominion, n, 4. buoneki.
Donkey, n, 8. imbongolo.
Door, n. 7. chitendele ; doorway,
gateway, n. 2, mudiango; door
listening, n. a. mwinaho ; n, 7.
ohiyaalLo.
Doubt, to, ku ta ahoma.
Doubt, n. 5. kutashoma.
Dove, Turtle, n. 8. inahiba.
Down, adv, anahi.
Dowry, things given to parents of
wife, n. 7. ohiko ; to pay a dowry,
V. /. ku kwa.
Doze, to, v, i, ku fakula.
Drag, to, v. /. ku kwela.
Draw, to, v.t. ku kwela; to d.
water, v. /. ku teka; to d. water
with, V. L ku teaha ; to d. water
for, v,t. ku tekela; to d. knife
from sheath, v, t, ku aomona ; to
d. tight, v.t, ku kweleaha; to
d. out, V, /. ku tandabula ; to d.
out by the roots, v. U ku shim*
pula, ku ahula ; to d. near, v, t,
ku aena ; to d. out hairs from the
pubes, V, t. ku menaa, ku maaa ;
to d. out as grass from thatch,
V. t. ku popomona.
Dread, fear, n. 3. //. mampuba ;
e,g, he will take it in dread, u la
ohi kwaaha mampuba.
Dread, to, v. t, ku tia.
Dreadful, to be, v, i, ku tXka.
Dream, to, v. t, ku lota.
Dream, n, 7. ohiloto.
Dregs, of beer, n, 4. bu86.
Dress, to, v.t. ku aama; to d.
much, v,t, ku samisha; to d.
another, v,t. ku aamika; to d.
skins by scraping, v, t. ku pala ;
to d. the hair, v, t, ku disokula.
Dress, n. 2. muahinshi. See
Clothing.
288
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Dribble, to, v. i, ka londauka.
Drift, to, v, i. leu kunka.
Drill, to, to pierce, to bore, v, /.
ku tulula.
Drill, boring-tool, n, 7. ohitu-
luzho.
Drink, to, v. t. ku nwa ; of dogs,
ku kapa, ku sabinta ; to give to
drink, v. U ku nwisha ; to drain
the last drop in a cup in drinking,
z'./. ku anzwila, ku anzulula;
to drink just a little, v,L ku
pwita.
Drip, to, z/. u ku londauka, v, /.
ku londausha.
Drive, to, v,t. ku binga; to
cause or help to drive, v,t, ku
binzha ; to d. fast, v, t, ku
bingisha ; to d. towards, v. /. ku
bingila ; to d. away, v. t. ku
tanda ; to d. a waggon, v. L ku
ensha nkoloi; to d. away flies,
V, U ku kuwaola ; to d. in pegs,
V, /. ku kankamina.
Driver, n, i. mwenzhi.
Drizzle, to, v.t, ku londauka;
of a drizzling rain, Iioza u la
londauka ; a misty drizzle, n, 3.
ifufu, n. I a, shikunku.
Droop, to, as leaves and flowers in
heat, z/. i. ku nyata.
Drop, n, 3. Hondo.
Drop, to, as medicine, v,t, ku
londau^ia, v. u ku londauka ;
to let fall, v.t, ku wisha; to
fall, V. u ku wa.
Drought, n, 7. chiwa, n, 9.
Iwanga ; an interval of drought
in the rainy season, n, 9. lulanga.
Drown, to, v, i, ku fwa u men-
zhi.
Drowsily, adv, chakuftikula.
Drowsy, to be, v,%, ku fukula;
to make drowsy, v, t, ku fukuzha ;
a drowsy state, as when one is
half awsike in the morning, n, 8.
indolo; a person in this state,
n, \a. shindolo.
Drum, native, n, 8. ingoma.
Drunk, to be, v, i. ku kolwa ; to
make drunk, v,t, ku kozha.
Drunkard, n, i. mukolwi.
Drunkenness, n, 5. kukolwa.
Dry, adj, -zumo; very dry, -ku-
kutu.
Dry, to be, v, t, ku zuma, v. t. ku
zumya ; to wipe dry, v. t. ku
shula ; to dry fish or green com
at a fire, v. t, ku umpulula.
Duck, wild, n, 8. inohoza, n, 1 a,
bwididi.
Dug, teat, of cow, &c., n. 6. kanun-
kelo.
Duiker, n. 10. nakasha; Dim,
kanga-nakasha.
Dull, blunt, adj, -fumpiu.
Dull, to be, stupid, z/. s. ku zhi-
luka.
Dumb, to be, v, i, ku tamba.
Dumb person, n, i a, ahatambe.
Dung, n, 4. bufnmba, mafnmba ;
very dry, n, 2. muautelo ; faeces,
ft. 3. //. mazhi ; a bundle of
dung tied up in grass and burnt
in burrow to scare out an animal,
ft, 2. muzenge.
Dusk, to be, v, i, ku shia.
Dust, ti, 9. luftiko ; large quantity
of, ti, 3. ifiiko ; a dust-heap, »• 7.
ohitantala.
Duty, a, ft, 7. ohSlelo. Derived
firom ku ela, to be fit : it means
something that is fit or proper to
be done. There seems to be no
nearer word to express our idea of
obligation.
Dwarf, stunted person, ti, i. muf-
wafwi, mufubio.
Dwarf, to, to make short, v, t, ku
fubia, ku fubya ; v, i, to be
dwarfed, short, v, i. ku fuba.
Dwell, to, v, i. ku kala.
Dwelling, ft, 8. Inganda ; a tem-
porary dwelling made of branches,
ft, 7. ohilao.
Each, all, adj, -onae, -mwi -mwi ;
e,g, each person, muntu umwi
umwi. Each thing, ohintu
ohimwi chimwi.
Each other, expressed in the in-
tensive suffix of the verb, -ana ;
eg, to love each other, ku Ai-
nana.
Eager, to be, v.fL ku tempana,
ku fwa ohiminamate ; e,g* I
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
289
ftm eager to see him, nda fwm
ohiminamato ku ma bona.
Eagekness, strong desire, fi. 7,
ohiminamate.
Eagle, Fish, n. la, shikwaae.
Ear, ff. 5. kntwi ; ear-ache, n. 8.
impogoloao.
"Wax in ear, ff. lo. ahimpolu-
katwi. It is supposed that there
is an insect in the ear which pro-
duces the wax ; this name is given
to both wax and insect.
A person with part of ear cat off,
n. I. mukosole-kutwi ; an ox
ditto ditto, n. 8. inkosole-kutwi ;
hole in ear for ear-ring, n. 4. bu-
Ininba; earofgrain,M.3. ikunka.
Early, early in morning, chifomo ;
very early, chifamofamo ; to be
up early, v. f . ku fUma ; to be up
very early, v. i. ku fnmisha.
Earnest, to be, ku ba ahimdao-
xnwi.
Earnest person, one with a single
heart, n. J a, ahimdsomwi.
Earnestly, adv. ohamoadmwi.
Ear-ring, n, 6. kaaeka, n. 4.
buaeka. Boaeka is used of many.
Earth, m, 8. inahi; black hard
groond, n, 8. inkanda ; soft,
sandy ft. 3. iaenga; a place with
dry ground, and old unbumt
grass. If. 7. ohondti; earth, soil,
n. 3. ivhu.
Earth-worm, n. la. namula.
Earwig, n. la. ■hamuaoaha, sha-
lnnumo.
Ease, to be at, v. i. ku diba, ku
dileahA.
Easily, without difficulty, adv.
kabongvhu ; slowly, adv, kabo-
ngvhwa.
East, is. 3. iwe; in the east, /oc.
adv* owo.
Eastward, adv. kwiwe.
Easy, to be, v.f. ka bomba, adj.
-bongvbu; e.£^, easy work, mu-
dimo mabongvhu.
Eat, to, v. t* ku dya ; to e. much,
V. /• ku diaha ; to e. ravenously,
tf, t, ku ftikftlala ; to e. little,
v.t. ku sola; to e. early maize,
v.t. ka aoma; to e. bread with-
out relish, v.t. ku bnaa; to e.
as a dog, v. t. ku kapa, ku aab-
inta ; to e. food left over, to
scrape out a pot, v. t, ku komba ;
to eat rapidly, v.t. ku fukaula;
to e. dry meat with bread, v.t,
ku luminiaha ; to e. soft things
such as eggs, potatoes, v.t, ku
dankununa ; to e. apart from
others, /^r. ku dya xnambumbu.
Eatable, to be, v. i. ku dika.
Eatable, n. 2. mudyo; n. 7.
ohidyo.
Eater, a great, n. i. mudiahi,
n. I a. ahindya, n. 1 0. ahintafu.
Eaves, space under, verandah, n. 3.
iluse; e.^, to sit under the eaves,
pAr. ku kala mwiluae.
Edge, sharp edge of spear or knife,
ff. 4. buoheai; blunt edge, or
back, n. 2. mongo ; edge or
fringe of blanket, &c., n. 4.
bwaya ; to turn up at edge, as a
hat-brim, v.t. ku pepenyana,
V. t. ku papenyanya.
Educate, to, to teach, v.t, ku
iya ; to bring up, train, v. t. ku
kuaha; to l^ educated, v.t. ku
panduluka.
Educate, adj. -pandultushi.
Efface, to, v.t. ahiminganya,
V. i, ku zhixningana.
Egg, n, 3. ii, or iyi, //. mal;
white of e., n. 7. chilekete ; yolk
of e., If. a. muahinda ; to sit on
e., v.t, ku kuniba; addled e.,
mai a uwa ; to lay e., ku ahala
n^ ; egg-shell, n. 3. ipapa ; un-
formed e., ft. 4. buyi.
Eight, ftum. Itusele.
Eighteen, ttutn. ikumi diomwi o
mu nteiEdia ahidi lusele.
Eighty, ftutn. makumi adi lusele.
Either . . or, canj. na . . na ; e, g,
take which you like, aala nchu
aanda, na oheohi na cheoho.
Either you or I must go, ndiwe
na ndime nda ya. Either go or
stay, it is your affair, ko ya na u
la kala, ndiwe umwini.
Elastic, to be, to be capable of
being stretched, v.t. ku tandu-
budika.
290
ENGLISHJLA VOCABULARY
Elastic, adj. -tandubudishi.
Elbow, n, 9. lukokola. A dam-
aged e., n, 7. ohikokola.
J^LDER, n, I. mwalu ; //. balu.
Elderlike, way^ custom, manner
of elder, adv. chabalu.
Elect, to, to choose, select among
others, v. /. ku nomona. To e.
or place in office, ku bika, or, ku
kadika, a bwami.
Election, n. 5. kunomona.
Elephant, n, i., ijtz. musovu ; //.
baaovu, bamusovu.
Elevate, to, to lift up, v,i. ku
katula. To exalt, promote, v. t,
ku sumpula, ku aumpusha;
V. f . ku sumpuka.
Eleven, num, ikumi diomwi o
mu ntesha yomwi.
To say eleventh, use the above pre-
ceded by gen* part.\ e.g, the
eleventh person, muntu wa
ikiuni o mu ntesba yomwi.
Elsewhere, adv. kunji, anji,
muDji.
Elucidate, to, to make plain, v, U
ku pasulula.
Emaciated, to be, v. i. ku swa.
Emancipate, to, to release by pay-
ing for one, v. /. ku nununa.
Embark, lolphr, knobilaumbwa-
to.
Embers, live coals, n, 3. //. mia-
kala.
Embrace, to, v, t, ku kumbata.
Emetic, n, 2 ' musamo wa ku
luBha.
Empty, to be, kudi budio. It is
best to express this more fully ;
say, there is nothing in the pot,
mwina chiptu mumbia, imbia
i ina ohidi mo.
To express the trans, verb to empty,
say, e. g, drink all the beer in the
pot, i. e. empty it, ko nwa ib-
wantu dionse did! mo mumbia,
or use the verb, ku ansulula, to
drain by drinking.
Encircle, to, to go round, v, /, ku
shinguluaha. To sit round, en-
circle, as a fire, v. i. ku engela.
Enclosure, n, 7. chimpata. A
large, n. 5. impata.
Encouraged, to be, pkr, ku
kadika moso.
Encrustation : salty encrusta-
tion. If. 3. itundila; n, a. mu-
shika.
End, to, v. f. & /^ ku mana. To
bring to an end, v. /. ku manya.
End, ». 5. kumana.
Fhr, here it ends ; this is the end,
Nfi^kela.
Endeavour, to, v, /. ku ooleka,
ku somba, ku sukualuk
Endless, to be, v, u ku ta mana.
Endure, to, to bear anything
courageously, v, i. ku kola, v, /.
ku kolela.
Enemy, i». i a. My enemy, shin-
kondoma ; //. ba. Thy e., ahin-
kondonoko; //. ba. His e.,
shinkondouina ; //. ba. Our e.,
shinkondonokweau ; //. ba.
Your e., ahinkondokwenu ; //•
ba. Their e., shinkondokwabo ;
//. ba.
Engrave, to, v, t, ku lemba, ka
ahimba.
Enjoy, to, v, t, ku aekela ; e.g, I
enjoy my life, nda aekela bumi
bwangn.
Enlarge, to, in size, v, t, ku ko-
meaha ; in number, v. /. ku sun-
gisha.
Enormous, to be, v,u ku ko-
menesha.
Enough, to be, v.f. ku sudila;
e^g, the food is enough, aha
Budila ahidy o. To have enough
of anything, to be sick kA a thing,
v./jjj.kuchimwa; eg, lam sick
of work, Kda ohimwa mudimo.
Enquire, to, to ask, v, /. ku buaha.
To enquire into a matter, v. /• ku
omboloaha.
Enrage, to, to make angry, to./.
ku lemaoha, ku lutiiha.
Enrich, to, v. /. ku vhubya.
Enslave, to, to seize, 9./* ku
fumpa.
Phr. ku bonya muntu buihike.
Ensnare, to, v, /. ku toa.
Entangle, to, v. t, ku potanya;
p. f . ku potana.
Entangled, adj. -potMM..
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
291
£NTERyT0,9.f.lmnJil». To cause
to enter, v. /. kn njiaha.
Enticb, to, to lead into doing
wrong, 9./. ka lengaoBha, kn
lensawila. To tempt one into
wrong-doing, cr. /. Ira. tepanla.
Enticer, ff. I. multtngaaahL
Entrails, n. 3. //. mala.
Entrance, to an enclosore, n. a.
mwatoaho ; doorway, n, 2, mu-
diango.
Entrap, to, v. /. ka tea.
Entreat, to, v,t. ka kombila,
kn piiinpa.
Enviously, adv, ohabnfwi.
Envy, ff . 4. bofWi ; n, 3. ibivhwe.
Equal, to be, p. il ku ingaina.
Equality, n, 4. bwingaino.
Equalize, to, tu /. ku ingainya.
Erase, to, to effiiMe, v. t. ku ahi-
minganya.
Erased, to be, v,t. ka ahimi-
ngana.
Erect, to, to build, 9. /. kn saka.
To set up, V, t. ka shimika; e.g.
the cat erects the fiir on its back,
kaae wa shimika Iwala. The
lion erects its mane, TTshombwa
wa ahimika misnkwa. To be
e., of tHe penis, v. i, ka Innda ;
V, t, kn lanaha.
Err, to, same word as to forget,
V, /. kn Inba.
Eruption, on skin, n, 7. ohiloa.
To break out, of e., v, f . kn fuku-
Inka.
Escape, to, v, i, kn lea ; e.g. the
crocodile tried to seize him, bnt he
escaped, ohiwena wa mn
fwampa, inaho wa lea.
Establish, to :
To be established, of a custom,
V. f. kn 8oka; e.g, the customs
were established by Leza, shlanza
aha ka soka bobo kwa Iiesa.
To first e. anything, v.t ku
lenga; e,g, Leza established this
custom, Iieaa wa ka lenga ohi-
ansa chechi.
Esteem, to, v,t, ku lemeka.
Eunuch, n. i. mushibe.
European, m. i. mukna. Many
Europeans., makna.
European, the manner, custom,
way, speech of, ff. 7. ohikna.
Evade, to, a missile, 9. i, kn lea.
To dodge, v. /. kn onga.
Evangelist, writer of one of the
Gospels, n. i. Miievaiigele.
Evaporate, to, v, i. kn anminina»
Evasion, n, 5. knahimba, kusan-
saika. To evade by hiding some
part of a matter, /^r. kn ahimba
makani. To evade by prevari-
cating, V, /. ku aanaaika.
Even, to be. See Equal.
Even, expressed in the conj, mds.
pro, ; e.g, even I, even me, ama,
amebo.
Even As^conJ. bnbona bo, or, mbu.
Evening, adv. achishiaho.
Every, adj\ -onae, -mwi-mwl
Every person, all the people, ban-
tu bonse. Every person, taken
individually, muntnumwiumwi.
Everywhere, adv, konae, konae-
konae. Everywhere inside,monae,
monae-monae. Everywhere upon,
onae, onae-onae.
Evidence, makani a knsanga.
Evil, n. 4. bnbi, bubiabe. See
Bad.
£wE, n, 8. impongo inahaahi, im-
belele inzhashi.
Exaggerate, to, v, t, make laige,
ku komesha. To tell lies, «. L
kn amba ahakubea.
Exalt, to, promote, v, t, kn anm-
pnla, kn aumpnaha ; v, i, kn
anmpuka. To extol, praise, «. /.
ku tembanla, ku Inmba.
Examine, to :
To e. by turning over, v.t kn
aandaula, kn alanla. To e. any-
thing to see if part has been stolen,
■ tf . /. kn vhula. To e. into a case,
v.t. kn omboloaha. To e. a
witness by asking over and over
again, v* t. ku ahombwelela. To
e., work, or school, v, t, kn din-
gula.
Examiner, n, i. mudingudi.
Example, to follow, to be like
another, ku mn koaha. To
imitate, copy, v*t, kn idila
idisha.
U 2
292
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Excavate, to, v, t, leu fumba.
Exceed, to , v, t, ku bala, ku bazha.
To exceed very much, ku badisha.
Exceedingly, adv, ohakubazha.
Excel, to, v.t. ku bala, ku
baaha.
Excellently, adv. ohakubazha.
The adv, is expressed also in the
intensive species of the verb; e*g*
to carve very nicely, excellently,
ku bezesha.
Except, prep, pele ; e,g» Let them
all go except Shamatanga, Na ba
ye bonse pele Shamatanga.
conj, unless, ansha ; e. g. You shall
not leave here except you pay me,
. XT ta Thwi moxno anidia wa
ndia.
Execrate, to, v,t. ku tuka.
Execrations, n, 3. //. matushi.
Exhausted, to be, tired, v. i, ku
bomba, ku fwa makatalo.
Exile, to, v,t, ku zangadisha;
V* i. ku zangadika.
Exile, n, i. muzangadishi.
Expect, to, to look for, v.t, ku
langila. To hope, trust, v. t, ku
shoma. To trust for, v, /. ku
shomena ; e.g.l trust him for my
money, f . e. I expect he will pay,
Nda mu shomena madi angu.
To look out for, expect visitors,
V, t, ku sompela.
Expectorate, to, v,t. ku lapula
mate.
Expectoration, n, 3. //. mate.
Expend, to, to pay, v, t, ku dia.
Expert, one who knows his busi-
ness, as a blacksmith, n, i. muza.
Expertly, adv, chabuza.
ExpERTNESS, n, 4. buza.
Explain, to, v.t. ku pandulula,
ku pasulula; e.g. Let us explain
this to you, A tu ma pandulwile
oheohi.
Extend, to, in length, v.t, ku
lansha; in size, v.t, ku ko-
mezha*
Exterminate, to, to finish, v.t.
ku mana, ku xnanya.
Extinguish, to, a fire, &c., v.t,
. kti zhima. To be e., v.t, ku
ihUuka.
Extract, to, v, t. ku kusha. To
e. a jigger, ku zepaula iundu.
To e. a tooth, v. t. ku kula. To
e. a thorn, v.t. ku bangula. To
e. charge from gun, v. t, ku so-
mona. To e. grain from a bin,
V. t. ku banza ; ditto, for another,
V. t. ku banzela ; ditto, in quan-
tity, V. t, ku banzisha.
Eye, n. 3. dinso ; //. menso. To
have dust, &c., in e., v. pass, ku
twewa. To put out e., ku
tulaula menso. To open the
eyes, v. t. ku tutulula. To open
and shut the eyes, v. t., ku hula-
hula, ku kopaula. To roll
the eyes about, ku bilaola
menso. To gaze intently in one
direction, v.t. ku tunama. To
wink the eye, ku shina-
shina dinso. To look out of
comer of eye, ku langila kunyo
ya dinso. To eye anjrthing, v. t,
ku chendaula. To open eyes
very wide, v. t. ku bwamuna.
Comer of eye, n. 8. inyo.
Eyebrow, n. 7. chikowe.
Eyelash, n, 8. inkowe.
Pupil of eye, n. 8. imbone.
Fable, n. 6, kalabL
Face, n. 4. bushu. To lie on the
face, V. i, ku Thundama. To
lay on the face, v, t, ku yhunda-
mika.
Fact, kambo ka ahiniiha,
kambo kenikeni.
Fade, to, as grass on a hot day, v, i,
ku zuma. To £ as colours, v, i.
ku kunkumuka. To f. in strength,
v.i. ku ela; e.g. the old man is
failing, mnpami u le ela. The
traveller does not fjail, mwensu
teedi.
Faded, adj. -kunkuxnuahi.
Faeces, n. 3. pi. xnazhi.
Faint, to, to become nnconsdoiu,
V. i. ku diftisa, ku zuminina.
To be faint with hunger, v, i, ka
wizuka.
Faith, n, 4. bnvumino, kuTumi-
na. These words are to be used
for < iiuth', in the sense of 'belief*;
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
293
in the sense of ' tnist ', ' confidence
in,' use ka shoma.
Faithful, to be, tnutworthy, r. u
"ka. 8h.oxn,ekA.
Fatthfully, iuh. ohakoflhome-
Fall, to, V, i. txL wa. To let fall,
v.t, ku wisha. To f. off as
feathers, v,$. to nyonkanlra.
To t short, V. f . ka lela. To f.
off as leaves, or fruit, v. i, ka
tlknmnka, ka pulomuka. To
be ready to fall, to be tottering, as
a tree cut nearly through, v. i, ka
nensesela. To f. backwards,
/Ar. ka wa insala btusaahi. To
t, into the dust, so that when you
rise dust cleaves to you, pAr, ka
wa ohiboiisalula. To £ down
from a height, v,i, ka laka*
Family, generation, ir. a. muk-
washi; n, 3. ohila, ohlBongu.
A person of our family, ma-
xnbonyokwesa ; a p. of your f.,
mambonyokwena ; a p. of their
f., mambonyokwabo. ^.f. are
they of one £Eimily ? 8a ba banta
mninbonyokwikbo ? Yes, they
are ; iif, they are of one stomach
(womb), Sya, mba ifa diomwL
Famine, n, 8. inzala.
Famish, to, to die of hunger, to be
hungry, /^r. ka fwa insala.
Famous, to be, pAr. ka ya im-
pawo; e.^. his strength was
famous^ i,e, noised abroad, InBana
shakwe sha ya impawo.
Fan, to, to winnow, v. t, ka seba.
To fan grain or anything by waving
something over it, v,t. ka pe-
paola. To fim away fUes, v,t.
kahapaola.
Fan, n, 7. obipepaasho.
Fang, of tooth, n, 2, muaanda; of
snake, n. 3. dino dia naoka.
Far, to be, v. i, ka sakana. To
be f., long, V, u ka lampa. To
be very L, v,u ka lampisha ;
adv, kalale.
Far off, adj, -aakene ; e.g.z. &r-
off, distant conntry, chishi chisa-
Farewell. See Adieu.
Farm, n, a, manda.
Fast, to be, v. i, ka kwatila ; e,g,
the pole is fast, firm, chisamo oba
kwatila.
€uij, -kwatile.
Fast, to, to abstain from iooA, phr,
ka dileshaka kadya, ka diima
ahidyo. To break one's fast, phr,
ka disaka, ka lapola mate.
Fasten, to, to tie, v,t. ka anga.
To f. eyes upon, gaze intently at,
V. t, ka tanamina.
Fastening, for door, n, a. mwin-
8ho.
Fat, n. ^,pl. mafata.
The Hng, ifata, is used in a special
sense ; e, g,\ have not even a little
fat, Ni na ifata budio. Par-
ticles of fat swimming on top of
a liquid, n, 3. //. manyinyeBhi.
Oil or liquid fat, n, a. mung-
wimba. A lump of hard fat, suet,
n. 7. ohisazo. A receptacle for
fat, n, 8. impaa. F. surrounding
intestines, n, 7. chizhlngabola.
To fizz as boiling fat, v,i, ka
chuohonia. To anoint a dead
person with fat, phr. ka shoba
mafti mafata. The fat congeals,
mafata a dianga, or, a angana.
€uij. -ina ; e.g. a fat person, ma^
ntu mwina. A fat beast, in-
g'ombe injina.
Fatal, a fatal sickness, accident, or
other deadly thing, n, 7. ohifo.
Father can only be expressed
united with a pronoun. Thus :
My father, Tata (in address, Ta).
Thy father, oso ; thy fathers,
batuso. His father, aslie; his
fathers, baoshe. Our father,
ushesa, or, tatesa ; our fathers,
baoshesa. Your father, ashena;
your fathers^ baoshena. Their
father, ushabo; their fiithers,
baushabo.
Father-in-law. My father-in-
law, mokwanga; thy father-in-
law, mokwako; his father-in-
law, mokwakwe ; our father-in-
law, makwesu (makwa ecu);
your father-in-law, makwena
«94
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
(iiiiikw» enu); their iktlier-iii-
law, nmkw&bo (nmkw* abo).
Fatigue, n. 5. knbomtm ; n. 3. //.
Otlicr wofds nsod in the
way
are:
Fatness, n. 4, bwinn.
Fatten, to, v. t, kn inya.
Fault, n. 2, nralanda.
Favourite, child or wife, n. la.
Fear, to, v, i. kn tia.
Fear, n, 5. katia. Fear or dread,
as in approadiiog a superior, n, 3.
pi, mampnba.
Fearful, to be, terrible, v. i. kn
tika.
Feast, n. 3. ipobwe. A wedding
f.» n, 3. //. TnadlanBhlma, A
fnneral f., n, 3.//. madidila. A
beer-drinking, n, 3. ikubL
Feast, to, v, i. ka pobola. To
meet for drinking beer, v.i. kn
•enga.
Feather, n, 3. ipepe. Tnft of f.
on bird*s head, n, 6. kala; //.
twala. Downj feathers, as on
jonng chicken, ». 7. cfaintyo-
mbwe. Feathers on arrow, n, 8.
intangwa. Long tail feather, ». a.
mnniinba.
Feed, to, v. t. ka lela, ku sanina.
Feel, to, v. i. & /. ku telela.
Feeling, n. 5. kutelela.
Feign, to, v.uta chenga.
Fell, to, trees, v, t, ka tema.
Fellow, an equal, friend ; mj, ma-
longwangu, &c.
There is a series of suffixes which
answer to our yiot^ fellow in such
words as fellow man. These are :
My, -ma ; thy, -noko ; his, -nina ;
onr, -nokwesa ; your, -nokwenu ;
tiieir, -nokwabo.
Examples : —
My fellow initiate, maaama; thy f.
i. , maaanoko ; his f . i. , muaanina ;
our f. i., muaanokwesu; your f. i.,
maaanokwenu ; their f. i., mu-
sanokwabo. My fellow initiates,
basama ; thy t i., baaanoko ; his
f i., basanina; our f.i., baaanok-
weaa ; your f. i., baaanokwenu;
their f. i., baaanokwabo.
nmfoshima, my iidlow blacksmith.
mnkaxhima^ my fellow wife ; used
by the wi^es ii a polygamist.
xnolatima, my fellow missionary,
my colleague.
mantama, my fellow man.
mapenBhlVna, my fellow sufferer ;
used by people who have been
through some difficulty together.
nmtwaalilma, one who is married
into the same family as myself — ^my
brother-in-law, my sister-in-law.
mawestdiiia, my fellow hunter.
nnmhaahlma^ my fellow parent,
used by people who are connected
by the marriage of their children.
moshichema, my fellow slave.
mwftnimma, my fellow traveller.
»
Female, adf, -shaahi, -tombe*
Fence, n, 9. lonlcolo, Ixiba. An
inner fence of reeds, &c., n, 7.
ohimpinda. A place thus fenced
off, If. 7. ohilw&. A fence for
a chief, it. 3. idinga.
Ferment, to, v. i. ka yaoma.
Ferment, malt, 0. 4. bomena.
Applied also to yeast.
Bumena is used by the natives in
making beer. It is made from
grain by soaking until it sprouts.
It is then put aside to dry, and is
then boiled up with the beer.
Ferry, crossing-place, n, 3. ilaado.
Ferry, to, to take across a river,
V, t. ka landoaha.
Ferryman, n, i. molandoahi.
Fertile, to be, v, t. ka ina.
Fetch, to, v. t, ka leta. To come
to receive aujrthing, v.U ka
londa.
Fetter, for feet and hands, n* 7.
chidiba ; ibr the neck, if. 8. in-
kabo, impangati.
Fever, ague, if. 2. mwansa. To
have ague, ka ahangama mva-
nsa.
Few, adj. -ongeana; e.g. a few
people, banta boogeana.
Fickle, changeable, v. tl ka san-
dadika.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
295
Field, cultivated land, n. 2, mtiiida;
//. miunda. A deserted f., n. 3.
itonffo. A f. where the grain has
been gathered, the stalks left
standing, n, 7. ohikaba. A C of
gronnd-nuts, n, 7. ehinyemo. A
small £, garden, n. 7. ohikuti.
A f. cultivated three years in suc-
cession, and then left fallow, n, 7.
ohilala. A f. hoed up in dry
season before spring, n. 4. bu-
konlnu A f. partly prepared at
end of wet season, n, 4. buahinde.
To go to make new fields, v, /. kn
panda.
Fierce, aify\ -kadi.
Fierceness, n, 4. bukadi
Fifteen, num, ikumi diomwi o
mu nteaha shosanwe.
Fifth, mim. -aano, prefixed by gen.
parts.
Fifty, num. maknmi osanwa.
Fig, wild, n, 8. inkoni.
Fight, to, w. *. ku Iwa. To f.
for, p. /. ku Iwila. To f. against,
V, t, ku Iwisha. To f. together,
V. /. ku l-wana.
Fig-tree, wild, n. 4. bnknzu.
Figure, image, picture, parable,
n, 7. ohikoBhano.
File, n» ^. ibeleko.
File, to, to f. teeth, v, /. ku p^pen-
yeka. To walk in single f., pAr,
ku enda mulongo.
FiLLy TO, tf, /. ku Buaha. To fill up
a grave or hole, v. t, ku vukaila.
Filth, h, 5. itomba.
Filthily, €ukf, chetomba.
Fin, side f. of fish, n. 3. itende ; f.
on back of fish, n, 9. longo ; //.
in^ngo ; longololo, pi, ingo-
lolo.
Final, to be, v.u'kXL mana.
Find, to, v.t, ku yana.
Fine, to be, v, u ku bota,ku ebeka.
Fine, to, v, t. ku landa. To im-
pose a fine for, v, t ku landila ;
e.^.1 fine you for your laziness,
Nda ku landila a bukata
bwako. Of a lot of people pay-
ing one man's fine, if* /. ku enga.
To pay a fine for somebody, tf, t,
kudidila.
Finger, n. 2. munwe. Names
given to fingers and thumb by
diildren : (i) Little finger,kanten.
geaa; they say, Kantengeaa,
kantengesa banako badibon-
gai? (a) namunwemunwe ;
(3) shimulalakati ; (4) nangan-
damulesa; (5) ehikombokom-
boka.
Finger-nail, n, 90. Iwala.
Finger- ring, n, 8. inwenwe.
Finish, to, v. /. ku mana.
Fink, n, 4. busokoshi.
Fire, n, a. mudilo. Flame of f.,
n, 3. ibangabanga. Firebrand,
n, 8. insama. Hot earth under
the fire, n, 3. ifokusi. Big fire
in cattle kraal, n, 2, mukwashi.
Fireplace, n. 7. chiko. To set
on fire, v, /. ku tenta. To re-
plenish a fire, v. /. ku sesela. To
beat out a fire, v, t. ku hupaula.
To produce fire by friction, v, /.
ku pika.
Firefly, m. 6. kamweshimweshi.
Firewood, n, 9. lukuni; //. in-
kuni. A log of f., lukuni. A
bundle of f., n. 7, chile. T6
gather f., v, /. ku chaba.
Firm, to be, of a stick, &c., v,i,
ku kwatila. To be firm, tough,
hard, strong, of a person, v, i. ku
kdla, ku suma.
First, adj. -tanahi ; n, 9. lutan-
zhi ; e.g, the first person, muntu
mutanzhi; the first child, first-
bom, mwana mutanshi.
First, to be, v. i, ku tanguna.
Fish, n, 8. inawi. A bundle of
fresh f.. If. 3. ikoka; ditto, of
dried f., n. 7. chikata. Fish-spear>
n. 2. mumba; //. miumba.
Fish-hook, n, 6. kalobo ; n. %.
iwezhi ; n, 8. impute. Bait for
fish, n. 4. bupo. Fishing-net,
n. 9. lutele, luyaba. Traps for
fish, n. 3. iBhi2hi,ivhumbo; #1.9.
lushiko. A fish-basket, n, 7.
dhizongo. A fish-string for
threading, n, a. moze. Poison
put in river to kill fish, n. i a,
tinde ; n. 6. kanyangalakata ;
n, 7. ohiweaese. Roe of fish,
296
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
n. 4. buyi. A midnight fishing,
n, 3. ikuo. A reed stockade
stretched across a river for catch-
ing fish, n. 9. Iwando. To catch
fi£ with hook, v. t, ku loba. To
catch fish by trap, or net, v, t, leu
sola. To poison the river, v. t,
ku twilft. "Fo get a draught of
fishes drawn to the bank, v. t. ku
fWika. To get fish, v. /. ku
cba ; e,g. How many fish did yon
get? "Wa ya ku oha shongai
inswi?
List of Fishes.
Imbavu (kind of bream), Chiae-
kele, Intungu, Ealongwe, Mu-
lopwe, Mulumbu, Muzonzwe,
Secbokochoko, Mubondo (bar-
bel), Shalusuke, or, Shimbe-
mbe, Shimulele, Inkungwe,
Fata, Izanshl
Fisherman, n. i. muEezhi.
Fist, tu 8. imfunshi.
Fit, to be, v, t, ku ela, ku elela ;
e.g. these clothes fit me, Shiko-
belo aheshi a a njelela.
Five, num. -sanwe ; e, g, five fish,
inawi shoaanwe.
Fix, to, to t spear-head in shaft by
means of a glae made of root of
the musese tree, v. t, ku pomba.
Fixed, adj, -kwatile.
Flag, n, 8. imb&kani.
Flame, n. 3. ibangabanga.
Flap, to, as a bird £ wings, v. t.
ku ditikumuna.
Flat, to be, v. i. ku pampamana.
Flat, adj. -pampamene.
Flatten, to, v. t. ku pampamika.
Flea, ». 8. injina.
Flee, to, v. i. ku tia.
Fleetly, adv. chalubilo.
Fleetness, n. 9. lubilo.
Flesh, n. 4. busane.
Float, to, v. i. ku ibauka.
Flood, to, v. i. ku paya; e.g. the
river is full and floods, Iwenge
Iwe aula, Iwa paya.
Floor, to stamp a f.,ku ahimbila.
A threshing-floor, n. 9. lubanza.
Flour, n. 4. bufu.
Flow, to, v. i. ku kunka.
Flower, n. 9. luluba ; //. induba;
n. 3. //. malangalanga. A
cluster of flowers, n. 4. buluba.
Female flower of maize, boza,
ohoza, buzunde.
Fly, to, v. i. ku uluka. To fly
very high, v. i. ku zumuka.
Fly, common, n. 8. inzhi. Cattle-
fly, n. 8. inzMmbwa. A large
biting f.. If. 8. impobe. Sand-
flies, n. 4. bumpuausu; one
single fly, n. 6. kaxnpususu.
Tsetse fly, n. 1 a, ahiluka ; //.
baahiluka. Of many tsetse, n. 9.
luka.
Fly-whisk, made of an animal's
tail, n» 2. mwiko.
Fog, mist, n. i a. ahikunku ; n. 8.
ingnibi.
Fold, to, v. t. ku vhunga. To f.
the arms,kudikunibataiaata8hi.
To f. up as a folding-table, v. t.
ku shikaula. To f. over, hem,
V. t. ku lundlla.
Follow, to, v. t. ku chidila. To
f. spoor,/^r. ku tobela mikondo.
Folly, n. 4. budimbushi.
Food, n. 7. //. ahidyo, bidyo,
ahakudya. An article of food,
n. 7. chidyo. A small quantity
of food, n, 6. //. tudyo. Food
for a journey, n. 4. budilo. Some-
thing to give relish to food, n. 7.
chidiaho.
Fool, n. i. mudimbushL Other
names given to a fool are, namu-
zhiwe, shikazwa, shikuizinze.
Fool, to be, v. i. ku dimbuka.
Foolish, adj. -dimbushi.
Foolishly, adv. chabudixnbuahi.
Foolishness, n. 4. budimbushi.
Foot, n. 3. itende; n. 7. ohi-
fumba. F. or paw of a cat-like
animal, n. 7. ohituta. F. or hoof,
n. 9. lufumba.
Footstep, -mark, n, 2. mukondo.
Noise of footsteps when walking,
n. 2. muchinohi.
For, ^ep. Expressed in relative
species of verb; e.g. to receive
for somebody, ku tambwila. To
come for, ku zila.
Cifft/, because, ukuti.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
297
Forbear, to, to f. to act, v, L ka
lekeaha.
Forbid, to, v.t, ku kasha. See
Taboo.
Force, strength, n, 8. inaana.
Forcibly, adv, chanaana. To
take things from one by force, v, t.
ka anjila.
Ford, n, 3. ilando ; n, 7. chito.
Forearm, n, a. mukono.
Forehead, ». 8. inkumu.
Foreleg, n, 5. kolu ; //. mania.
Forenoon, early, n, 7. chikaaa-
diahi.
Forerunner, n, i. moaoloahi.
Forest, n, a. muaanza. A dense
£, If. 6. kaaaka.
Forge, place where blacksmith
works, n, 8. inaaka.
Forget, to, v. t. ka ahinaoka, ka
laba.
Forgive, to, v, /. ka kwatila. He
forgives him in mercy, wa ma
kwatila luae.
Forgiveness, n, 5. kakwatila.
Fork, table f., n. 3. for, ifoko.
Forked stick, n. 7. ohanda;
ditto, for tying slaves in, if. 8.
impangati, ix^cabo.
Form, to, v, t, ka bomba. To
form for somebody, v. /. ka bu-
mbila. To f. carefully, nicely, z^. /.
ka bumbiaha. To f. into a ball,
V, t, ka bamba-bamba.
Formerly, adv, latanzhi.
Fornicate, to, ka ba mwamu.
Fornication, ». 4. bwama.
Fornicator, n. i. mwama.
Forsake, to. See Abandon.
Fortunately, (tdv, chesambwe.
Fortune, good, n, 3. iaambwe,
n, 7. ctaolwe, choba.
Forty, num. makumi one.
Forward, adv. ambele, kumbele.
Forward ! forward ! Imbele-
mbele !
Found, to, establish, v,t. ka
lenga.
Fountain, n, 3. mwinzo.
Four, num. -ne ; e.g. four things,
ahinta shone.
Fourteen, num, ikomi diomwi o
ma nteaha shone.
Fourth, num. -ne, prefixed by gen.
parts.
Fowl, domestic, n. 8. inkoka.
Fragment, broken piece of cala-
bash, n. 6. kapapa ; broken piece
of spear-shaft, n. 7. chipipila.
Free, to, to f. a person by getting
him off, or pajring his fine, v. t. ka
pasala. To be freed from one*s
fault, V. i. ka pasoka.
Freely, adv. chabadio; t.g. I
give you this freely, i. e. without
payment, Nda ka pa ohecbi
ohabadio.
Frequently, adv. kanji.
Friend, my, n. i. malongwanga;
thy, molongwako ; his, malong-
wakwe.
Friendship, n. a. malongo. To
form a friendship, covenant, phr.
ka tanga mulongo.
Frighten, to, v. t. ka tiaha.
Fringe, n. 4. bwaya.
Frog, n. 1 a. bombwe ; a small,
n. I a. kabombwe ; //. ba-.
From, prep, ka, kwa.
Front, n. 4. boshu. To go in
front, ahead, v. i. kn solola. In
front, adv. kambele, ambele.
Frost, n. 7. chandwa.
Froth, on milk or beer, n. 3. iovo.
Frown, to, phr. kn zhinga tnn-
kaaa, kn zhinga twimba.
Frozen, to be, v. i, kn andwa.
Fruit, n. 2. mnohelo. To bear fruit,
ka ezha,ka ela. To gather, pluck,
V. t. ka chela. To have almost
ripe fruit, of a tree, v. t. ka olozha.
Names of Fruits.
All eaten by the people,
Iwi, Ita- (wild orange), Inko-
.mona, Inghnma (of palm trees),
Chongola, Intnmbnlwa, Ifambo,
Chingvnbika, Isane^-sangu (snuff-
boxes made of shell), Isansa (bunch
of wild grapes ; single fruit is called
Mnsansa), Mtusompe, Ibungo,
Itobo, Shikameba, Ohibnmbn,
Shikisn, Ibnmbu, Chibnlan-
shi, Chibwebwe, lannka, Mu-
shibi, Imbula, Inkuzn, Injenje,
Chenjekotwe, Montamba, Maya.
298
ENGLISH.ILA VOCABULARY
Fugitive, adj, -loboshi.
Full, to be, v, u ku izula (kwi-
zula). Of the moon, v» i, ku
zhuka. To be brim full, v. u ku
ftindidila. To be half full, phr,
kudi inusa. To be very full, of
a river, v. i, ku pimba.
Funnel, basket-funnel of calabash
churn, n. 4. busaka.
Fur, n, 4. boza.
Furrow, on forehead, n, 8. inkusa.
Gain, to, v. t, ku fua.
Gale, a strong wind, »• 3. ikunku,
ipupululwa.
Gall, n. 8. iiidulwe;^. 2. mululwe.
Gall-bladder, ». 3. isubilo dia
mululwe.
Gallop, to, of cattle and horses,
V. i. ku kalata.
Game, animals of chase, n, i. mun-
yaxna; //. banyama. See Hst
under Animal.
Names of games : n. 7. chisolo ;
n. 8. intela \ n. la. namuche-
chadi ; ». 5. kushanga ; n. i a.
uchinemunemu ; ». 6. kata;
n, I a. shimunyeu, kafumba-
bombe-bombe ,* n. 5. kupwa;
If. 4. bungo; n. i a. namuzun-
gula.
Game-path, n, 2, mukula, mu-
lenga.
Game-pit, fu 2, mulambwe.
Gaol, prison, n. %,for intelongo.
Gap, n» 2. xnusena.
Gape, to, to yawn, phr, ku dya
mwao , ku fwa mwao. To gape,
be open, of wound, &c., v, i, ku
lakuka.
Gaping, adj. -lakushl
Garden, n, 6. kaunda ; n, 7. dii-
kuti. A field, n, 2. munda. A
large field or garden, n, 3.
iunda.
The //. maunda, used of forest
where people go to gather fruit in
time of famine.
Gardener, n, i. mudimi.
Garden hut, erected for the season
for use when watching gardens,
n. 7. ohitungu ; i». 6. kf^udi.
.Gargle, to, v, U ku diaukulula.
Garment. See Clpthing. An old
garment, n* 2. mukula.
Garrulous, to be, phr, kudi
ohibwanta.
Garrulousness, n. 4. bwanta.
Garrulous person, n. 1 0. ohib-
wanta; //. bachibwanta.
Gash, to, v, /. ku nenga.
Gasp, to, to breathe with open
mouth, V, f. ku fwekexna.
Gate, n, 7. chitendele.
Gateway, of kraal, ». 2. mwa-
tuzho. Poles to close g., placed
yertically, n, 2. pL TniBhinko ;
ditto, placed horizontally, n, 4.
bumpingidi.
Gather, to, v,t. ku bunga, ku
bungika, ku bunganya, ku
kunga-kuDga. To g. up dung
into heaps, to g. weeds hoed up
in field, z/. /. ku bunga. To g.
stones, &c, into a heap, v. /. ku
lundika. To g. by raking,
sweeping, v,t, ku p61a. To g.
firewood, v, t, ku ohaba. To g.
people together, v, t, ku bungika,
ku bunganya. To make a
gathering in cloth, blanket, &c.,
V, t, ku fonka. V, i, ku bun-
gana, ku zoboloka.
Gathering, assembly, n, 8. imbu-
ngano ; n, 9. lubeta.
Gathers, made in cloth, &c, n, 2.
munkonya ; //. minkonya.
Generation, n. 2. musela.
Genial, to be, phr. kudi ahib-
wanga.
Genial person, n, la, sliib-
wanga.
Geniality, n. 4. bwanga.
Genitals. See under Body.
Words beginning with Bu- denoting
quality, status, are also used to
express the genitals euphemistic
cally. Thus :
Buchende, quality of a bull, genitals
of a bull.
Bukalntu, feminine quality, geni-
tals of a woman.
Bukazhi, female quality, genitals of
female animal.
Bulombwana, quality of a man,
genitals of a man.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
299
Gently, adv, kabotn-lEabota.
Genus, kind, n. a. mukomo.
Get, to, v, i. ka bwema. To g.
wealth, to gain, v. /. ka ftuk To
g. up, V, f . ka buka. To g. out
of the way, v, i. ka sefloka.
Ghost, spirit of departed, n, 2,
moBhimo ; n. la, ahikaswa,
kanchinyft.
These names axe given to the spirits
of the dead. They are belieyed
to be in the power of the mun-
ganga and balozhi, who can send
tiiem to kill people. It is also
said that if any living person,
except he has medicine to protect
him, sees one of these, he will die.
Ghost, Holt, Mosa a Sweya.
Giant, n, i. mimgwala. A very
tall person is nidcnamed a palm
tree, kalala ; a tall, stout person,
a baobab, ibiuo.
Gift, See Present
Gill, of fish, n. 3. ilakula.
Giraffe, n. i. a, intutwa. Not
found in Bwila, but tiie name is
known.
Gird, to, v, /. ka ahingasha ; to
be girded, v. i. ka Bbinguka. To
g. oneself, ka dishingasha.
Girdle, n, 9. latambo; n. 2.
mwambo. Women's g. of beads,
n, 8. insapo.
Girl, before puberty, ir. i. ma-
shiinbi. A big girl, n. 7. ohi-
shixnbL A young girl, n. 6.
kashimbL At and after puberty,
n. I a, kamwale.
Girlhood, before puberty, n. 4.
bashimbi ; after puberty, n. 4.
bamwi^e.
Girlish, Girlishly, adv, chaba-
ahimbi, chakashimbi, chaka-
mwale.
Give, to, vJ, ka pa. To g. a
present at close of a sale, v, U ka
shidikila. To g. a present, phr,
ka pa mpasela. To g. one food
left over in pot, v, t, ka pasha,
ka kombya. To g. to one to take
to another, v. t. ka tambikizha.
To g., to offer, 7. / ka tambika.
GlzzARD,#f.8.imfti2iyanga,imfadi.
Glad, to be, v. i. ka botelwa,
ka tangala.
Gladden, to, v, L ka botealia,
ka tangasha.
Gladly, ath, chakabotelwa,
dhakatangala.
Glass, n, 7. chimbone. Name
applied to window or mirror.
Glean, to, v, t. ku papula.
Glitter, to, v. i. ka beka.
Glorify, to, to praise, »./. ka
lamba, ku tembaula.
Glory, brightness, cleanness, n. 4.
buaweyo. Honour, dignity, n, 4.
bulemu.
Glow-worm, ». 6. kamweshim-
weshL
Glue, to, v. /. ku pomba.
Glutton, n. 1 a. shindy a.
Glutton, to be a, phr. kudi
shindy a.
Gluttony, ». 8. indya.
Gnash, to, the teeth, />&r. ku luma
inkwino.
Gnaw, to, as a dog a bone, v, t. ku
lukuta. As a rat a piece of wood,
V, t, ku papumuna.
Gnu, n, i a, munyumbwi ; //.
bamunyumbvTi; a small, young,
kanga- munyumbv^
Go, TO, v,u ku ya. To go for,
V. L ku ila. To go ont of a village
in numbers, v. i, ku pupuma ; e.g,
they go out to a traveller, ba la
pupumina mwenzu. To go one
behind another, ku tunga mu-
longo, ku enda mulongo. To
go stooping, as after game, v, i,
ku benda. To go stealthily, as
a cat, V. i, ku nanamba. To go
quickly, v, i, ku fwamba, ku
fwambana. To go down as a
swelling, v.i. ku zhimbuluka.
To go down as a flood, v, i, ku
yosa, ku pompa. To go round
in a circuit, v. i. ku zhinguluka.
To go round, v, i. ku zhinguka.
To go to bed hungry, phr, ku
ona ayo ; v. i. ku ihupika. To go
out as fire, ku zhiluka. To go
about, V, I. ku endenda. To go
aside, v, i, ku ambuka. To go
out of sight, disappear, v, i, ku
300
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
petuka. To go ahead, v, i, ku
solola.
Goat, n, 8. impongo. Male goat,
n. I. mOngo.
Goblet, «. 7. ohinwino.
God, Xieza. Other names given to
the Supreme Being are :
Babulaladiwila, the one who
throws down for himself the
imbula fruit.
Chilenga, the one who institutes
customs, &c.
Ipaokubozha, the one who gives
gifts and rots them.
Ijubolekamasiiko, the one who
rots the masuko, a fruit which goes
rotten in the rainy season.
Ijubumba, the Creator.
Mangwe, the sender of so much
water that there is no place left
dry.
Muninde, the giver of thunder and
much rain.
Mutalabala, the one who does what
no other can do.
Ifamese, the rain-giver.
Shakemba, the rain-giver.
ITshatwakwe, that all things are
his, and he can do as he wishes.
Ila ideas concerning God are of the
vaguest description : it is very
difficult to discover what they
actually, apart from Christian
teaching, think about God. From
the names given above, which may
be said to sum up the Ila theology,
it is seen that Leza is closely iden-
titied with nature, but as Lubumba,
the Creator, He is above nature,
and as Chilenga He is regarded as
the grand institutor of customs.
So close is the connexion of God
and Nature that rain is given the
same name, Leza. Yet it is not
plain that they regard rain and
God as one and the same; but
rather that, rain being considered
as God's chiefest and best gift, it
has come to pass that giver and
gift have been given the same
name ; but the identification is in
name only. That they are not
considered as one is shown by the
people ascribing to God whatever
they cannot understand. Thus of
the lightning they say, ' God is
angry, and of a tree struck by
lightning they say it is split by
Leza. So of thunder, they say,
* God is hoeing deeply,' * God is
shaking His skins.*
The Baila seem to regard Leza as
their own particular tribal God,
and imagine that each nation has
its own deity. They do pray
to Him on occasion : prayers
are also addressed to the Miz-
himo, the ancestral spirits, the idea
seeming to be that the Mizhimo
act between God and man. God
has little influence over their lives,
none at all over their morals. The
name Ushatwakwe indicates a
more or less fatalistic belief, f . e,
that God will do as He lists, apart
from us : that we are in the hands
of fate. In connexion with this
idea there is the saying that when
a person dies God has plucked His
fruit, f . e. He has a right to do as
He will with His own.
It is interesting to note that Leza
is a widespread name for God in
the centre of Africa. In the west
the general name is Nyambi or
Nzambi; in the east Mulungn.
Between these there is a large
number of languages which con-
tain the name Leza, or some slight
phonetic modification of it. Thus:
Iiesa in Lamba, Sodi, Luba,
Bemba,Bisa; while Luba (Congo),
Subia, Tonga, and Ila.have JLess;
and Karanga has Beja, and
Mbunda, Bedza. In Nyanja,
where the word for God is Ma-
lungu, Leza or Resa is found;
according to Laws, uta-wa-lesa,
the rainbow, means bow of spirit,
bow of God. (Cf. Ila, buta bwa
Ijeza.) Rebman says Mwana
wa Besa means the Rainbow.
Godhead, n. 4. buleza.
Gold, n, %.for, ingolida.
Good, to be, v. ^ ku bots. Of a
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
30I
roady v.i, ka sslala. A good
man, phr. montn suso.
Good, adj. -botu ; e, g, good fruit,
micdieio xnibotu.
Good-bye, to say, v, i. kn lasha.
Goodness, n. 4. bubotu.
Goose, wild, n. i a. nachisekwe.
Gospel, «. 3..^. Ivangele.
Govern, to, v, /. kn endela.
Governor, n, i. mwendeBhi.
Grace, mercy, m. 9. lose.
Grain, n. 3. //. msila. Inyanti
grain, n. 3.//. mansi. Kaffir com,
maoheme, kolwe, matuba.
Maize, n. 3. pL mapopwe. Late-
grown maize, n, i a. namutompo.
A stack of maize, n. 8. inknngo ;
n,\a. ahikule. G^ain-bins, n. 3.
iatunpila ; n, 4. butala ; #f . 7.
ohnmbwa. Sheath of maize, n, 3.
' ikwelele. Earofmacheme, if. 3.
ikunka. Bare maize cob, n. 8.
inkoahi. Cob of maize without
sheath, n, 3. ipumbulu. Maize-
flower, n, 6. kalani; female ditto,
bosa, choza, bturande. Plat-
form for storing grain or nuts,
n. 4. bnsanaa. Grain first show-
ing above the ground, n, 4. bu-
songa. A single grain, if. 8. in-
seke. A small quantity of grain,
If. 9. Itmga. To eat young maize,
v./. kn soma. To stack up
maize,/^r. ku anghika inkungo.
To harvest g., v,t. ku tebula.
To stamp com, ku chokola, ku
j>olola, ku andanla, ku twa
(different stages). To take maize
off the cobs, v, /. ku bulula.
Grandchild, my, if. i. musu-
kushangu ; thy, muaukuzha-
ko ; his, muzuknahakwe, &c.
Grandparent, if. la. kaka,
nkambo.
Grapes, wild, if. 2. musanaa;
bunch of. If. 3. iaansa.
Grasp, to, with both hands, v,t,
ku fukatila. To g. firmly, v. U
kn AxkatiBha. To cause to g.,
V. /. kn ftikatiaha.
Grass, if. 4. bwisu. A kind of
grass used for mats, if. 2 . musems ;
another kind, if. 3. //. znanyan-
Bha, mauongwe. Thatching-
grass, If. 2. muntende. Used by
natives for thatching, if. 6. ka-
vhumbe, kalalatimba. Quitch-
grass, If. 9. I070. Old dry un-
bnmt grass, if. 7. chant. A kind
of running grass, if. 6. kaleba-
bodi. Young juicy grass, if. 2.
mwemvu. A kind of tall, rough
grass, If. 8. impolwe. A sharp,
three-edged grass, if. i a. nya-
mbaula. A kind of thin, tough
grass, very suitable for thatching.
If. 9. luaange. A very tough
grass, used to make rope, if. 4.
bunahinde. Grass by the side of
a river, if. 3. iaale. A patch of
old dry grass, if. 7. ohizu. Grass
seed, which adheres to clothing,
If . 8. inaoki. To clear away grass,
V, t. ku sebula. A small bundle
of grass, If. 8. inkama. A large
bundle of grass, if. 2. mule.
Grasshopper, if. i a. bimba ; if. 8.
impaso.
Grave, if. 7. ohilendi. Other
names given tog., if. 7. ohifWene,
ohumbwe; if. 2. mulenda. A tree
planted by a grave, if. 3.ibwabwa.
A grove of trees planted around
a grave, if. 3. //. mabwabwa.
Grateful, to be, v, i. ku lumba.
Gratefully, adv. chakulumba.
Gravel, if. 4. btibwebtibwe ; if. 7,
ohisokobwe.
Gravy, if. 2. muahinaa.
Gray hair, if. 8. invhi.
Graze, to, v,t, ku kupula; v.i.
ku kupuka. Of cattle, &c., v. i.
ku chela
Great, adj. -kando.
Great, to be, v.i. ku komena.
To be very great, big, v. i. ku ko-
menesha. To make great, v.t.
ku komezha.
Greatly, adv. ak&ndo. So greatly,
how greatly, adv. chanyabo.
Greed, Greedjiness, n. 8. indya.
Green, colour, if. 3. itubuzhu.
Grief, sorrow, if. 4. biisu.
Grieve, to, v. i. ku usa. To weep
for, V. t. ku didila. To g., or be
snlky, because made to do some*
302
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
thing against one's will, v, f . kn
pisauka ; v. t, ku pisaiisha.
Grind, to, as knives, v, t» ku
kwanga. As com, tobacco, v, t,
ku shila.
Grindstone, for knives, &c., phr,
. ibwe dia kukwanga. Upper
stone for grinding com, n, 8.
impelwe. Another stone used
in connexion with above, n, 8.
ingvhula, imanzho.
Groan, to, v, i, ku tongela, ku
boba. The last dying groan of
man or animal, n, 2. munkanga.
Grope, to, to g. about in dark to
find anything, v, i, ku ampasha.
Of a blind man, v. i. ku ofwala.
Ground. See Earth.
Ground-nut, «. 8. inyemo. Varie-
ties, n. 8. impute, impumpu;
n, a. muninga.
Grove, around grave, n, 3. pi.
mabwarbwa.
Grow, to, as plants, vegetation,
V. i. ku xnena. As people, v. i,
ku kula. To cause to grow, v. t,
ku meneka, ku kuzha.
Growl, to, v. i, ku huluxna.
Growth, of plants, n. 5. kumena.
Of a child, n, 5. kukula.
Grub, found in maize-stalk, n, i a.
ugougwa.
Grudge, to, to be gradging, un-
willing in giving or working, v, f.
kunyonyonoka, ku nyonauka ;
f. g. He gives us food gradgingly,
"Wa tu nyonauklla. To cause to
be grudging, unwilling, v, t, ku
nyonausba ; as when you make
one work against his will.
Grumble to, v,i. ku tongauka,
ku sholauka. To speak aside in
a grambling way, v, u ku vwiya.
Grumble, n, 8. intongo ; e,g, stop
your grumbles, a mu leke in-
tongo shenu.
Grumbler, n, i a. shintongo.
Grunt, to, v» i. ku fwemba.
Guard, to, v. t. ku dindila.
Guess, to, as a riddle correctly, v, t,
ku labukulula.
Guest, n. 2. mwenzu.
Guide, to, v.t, ku enaha.
Guide, n. i. mwenshi, musolozhi.
Guile, n, 3. //. mano.
Guilty, to be : to be found guilty
after examination, v, i. ku sulwa.
To find guilty, v, /. ku sula. To
be ashamed because of guilt, v, i.
ku fulaika ; e. g. We are ashamed
of our sin before God, Twa
fulaika ambele dia Iiesa. To
express * to be guilty of so and so '
one must say, he is guilty of
murder — he has killed somebody,
wa ya^a muntu.
Guinea fowl, n, 8. inkanga.
Gullet, n. 2. mumino.
Gulp, to, to swallow in a gulp, ku
kukumwina,kungunguniwina.
To gulp down food without chew-
ing it, phr, ku mina mukunku-
mbele.
Gum, of teeth, n. 7. cMshishini ;
exuded from tree, n. 8. impompo.
Gun, n. 8. intobolo ; n, 3. itangu-
la. Stock of, n. 3. itako. Wood
at back of barrel, chiaamo cha
ntobolo. Sight of, n, 3. dinso.
Trigger, n. 2. munono ; n, i a.
nalunkalamba. Barrel, n. 2.
muludi. Hammer, n. 7. ohi-
pani. Nipple on which cap is
put, n. I a, suko. Gun-cap, n, 8.
intopisho.
Habit, custom, n, 7. cbianaa.
Haematuria, n, 3. ishinga.
Haemorrhage, blood, n. 4. buloa.
To bleed at the nose, 9. f. ku
nokola.
Hail, n. 7. chivliulamabwei
Hair, n. 3. isuao, maauso. Single
hair, if. 8. insuki. Hair or wool
or fur of animals, also body-hair
of people, n, 4. boza. Hair,.&c.,
on animals* back, which can be
made to rise, mane, mwala,
musukwe. Grey hair, n, 8.
j^vhi. Bunch of hair left on head
when rest is shaved off, n, 7. ohi-
aumpa. Hair on abdomen, H. 3.
mulalabungu. On pubes, in
armpit, n. 3. //. mazha. Rought
uncombed hair, n, 3. Ikanka.
Straight hair, such as European's,
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
303
n, 2. //. miepo. A hairy person,
n, I. mutundtu To dress hair,
v.t, ku aukula. To cut hair,
V, /. ku shisa.
Hairy person, n. i. mutundii;
If. 3. iknlsbuahiktu
Half, n. 3. /or. Ihafo. Half or
piece of broken spear, n, 7. chipi-
pila. To be half full, kudi
xnnaA.
Hallow, to, to choose, set apart,
v./. ku saUu To honour, v.t,
kulemeka.
Halo. When the people see a halo
around the sun or moon they say,
* To-day there is judgement above^*
TJsunundu lubeta kwiseulu.
Halt, to, to be lame, v,i, ku
Bunkuta. To stand or stop, v, 1.
kushima.
Hammer, h. 8. inTundo; n» 7.
chikoms.
Hammer, to, v. /. ku kankamlna.
Hand, n. 3. itashi. Right hand,
n, 9. ludio. Left hand, n, 7.
ohimonswe. To grasp with both
hands, v, /. ku fukatila, ku shi-
katila. To hold out the hand to
give, V. /. ku tambika ; ditto to
receive, v, /. ku tambula. A left-
handed person, n, 1 a, Shiohi-
monswe.
Handle, or sheath of knife, n, 7.
ohilalo. Of axe or pick, n, a.
mwini. Shaft of spear, n» 9.
lusako. Handle of cup, n, 7.
cMkole. Of a door or tool, n. 7.
ohikwatilo; n» 3. //. makwa-
tilo. To come out (of handle),
V, i. ku kuka. To put in a handle,
9. /. ku kwika.
Hang, to, to h. up as on a nail,
v,i, ku xuanika, ku anahika.
To h. down or be suspended, v. i,
ku lengelela. To h. or suspend,
«./, ku lengelezha. To h. a
chain round neck and under one
arm, v^L ku pakata. To h.
clothes out to dry, v, t, ku
aanika. To 1l up carefully,
well, V, t, ku anzhikiaha. To h.
up for somebody, v^ U ku anshi*
kila.
Happiness, n, 7. cholwe, choba.
Happy, to be, phr. kudi cholwe,
kudi choba. To be made happy,
v.pass. ku longelwa. To make
happy, V. /. ku longesha.
Hard, to be, v. i. ku auma. To
make hard, v, t. ku aumya. A
very hard thing, such as heart of
mopani, n. 8. iiijelu.
Hard , adj. -auxno. Very hard, dry,
adj. -kukutu. e.g. dry, hard
meal, bufu buaumo. The meat is
very hard, it isnot cooked, buzane
mbukukutu, bwina ku biawa.
Hard man, as in bargaining, &c.,
n. I . xnukukutu.
Hardness, M.4. buzumo; extreme
h., n. 4. bukukutu; e.g. this
man is quite insensible, weau
muntu wa zuma bukukutu.
Hare, n. i a. sulwe ; a young,
small, kanga-sulwe.
Harm, to, v.t, ku biaha, ku
zonaula.
Harmless, to be, v. i. ku bomba.
Of an animal which does not
spring upon you when wounded,
I. e. is easily killed, v. i. ku yayika.
Harp, n. %.for. inkalepa.
Harshly, adv. chalusunau.
Harsh man, n. i a, shilusunsu.
To be harsh, phr. kudi ahilu-
aunsu.
Harshness, n, 9. luaunau.
Hartebeest, n. i a, konzo ; pL
bakonze. A small, young kanga-
konze.
Harvest, to, v. t. ku tebula. To
reap, cut off the macheme, V. t,
ku konka.
Haste, n. 9. lubilo. To make
haste in going, phr. ku tola lu-
bilo ; ditto, in coming, phr. ku
leta lubilo.
Haste, to, to be in a hurry, v. i.
ku binda. To hasten one, v. t.
ku fwanzha, ku binzha. To
make haste, travel quickly, v.i.
ku bilana. To hasten, cause to
travel quickly, v. t. ku bilanya.
To make haste, v. 1. ku fwam*-
pauka. To come or go or do
quickly, v. i. ku aansavSca.
304
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Hat, n, 8. inlcuane, imftisi
Hatch, to, to sit on eggs, v. t, ku
kumba. To bring off eggs, v, /.
ku konkwela.
Hate, to, v. t, ku aula. To hate
each other, v, t. ku sulana.
Hateful, to be, v, i. ku sudika.
Hateful, adj. -sudishi.
Have, to, kudi kwete, kudi. See
chap, viiiof Grammar,
Hawk. See list under Bird.
Haze, iu \a. shikunku.
He, pers, pro. O, A, wa, &c. See
chap, V of Gramtnar,
Head, n, 2. mutwi. Head of a
class, party, &c., n. la, shi-
mutwi.
Headache, n. 2. xnwanza.
FAr. I have headache, Nda fwa
xnwanza, or, mutwi.
Head-dress. See Chignon.
Head-man, n, 1 a. ITnkoshi ; pi.
bankoshi.
Heal, to, v.t. ku shidika, ku
ponya ; v. i. ku ola.
Heap, of grass, clay, sticks, n. a.
mulwi. Rubbish-heap, n, 7.
ohitantala ; a large ditto, n. 3.
itantala. A heap of grass or
rubbish, n, 3. ikuka. A big heap
of earth or grass, n. 3. ilunda.
Heap of firewood, n, 2. mwata.
Heap of grain when divided into
lots, n. 2, mwela.
Hear, to, v, t. ku telela. To hear
clearly, plainly, v,t. ku tslelisha.
Heart, n, 2. moao ; pi, mioso.
Hearth, fireplace, n, 7. ohiko.
Heat, heat of sun, n. 9. lumwi.
Great heat, h. of fever, n, 9.
lungulu.
Heat, to, to warm, v, /. ku kasa-
sba.
Heathen, h. i./or. muhedene.
Heavy, to be, v, i, ku lema. To
load person heavily, v.f, ku
lemena. To be heavy laden, v, /.
ku lemenwa.
He \VY, a{fy\ -lemu,
Heel, n. 7. ohishindi.
Heifer, one ready to calve, n, 8.
inanga-baohende.
HeighTi If. 4. bulamftu Heighti
stature, n. 7. ohimo; e,g: that
person has no stature, i.e» he is
short, 'Wezo muntu u ina
ohimo.
Heir, n. i. mudiezhina.
Help, to, v,i, ku yovwa, ku
vhuna.
Helper, h, i. muyovwi, muv-
huni.
Hem, or seam, n, 2. muluko. To
turn a hem, v. t. ku lundila.
Hemp, Indian, for smoking, n. 9.
lubange. Pipe used for smoking,
n, 8. inzwani.
Hen, n. 8. inseke.
Her. No difference is made betvreen
htm and ker. See chap, v of
Grammar,
Herd, of cattle, &c., f». 4. bu-
tanga. Herd of game, n, 2, mu-
ftinzi. A large herd, n. 2,
mundindi.
Herd, to, v,t, ku embela. To
herd for, v, t, ku embelela. To
cause or help herd, v, t, ku embe-
Bba. To herd well, v,i, ku
embelesha.
Herdsman, n* i.mwembeBhi.
Here, mono, kono, ano.
Hesitate, to, to delay, v,%. ku
imoka.
Hiccough, n, 8. inshikila.
Hiccough, to, phr, ku fWa inshi-
kila.
Hide, soft, n, 3.. isalo. A dry hide,
n, 7. chikanda.
Hide, to, v, i, ku zuba ; v,t, ku
Bubika, ku seaeka, ku sosaika.
To hide a matter, v, t, ku shimba,
ku sosaika. To hide in grass
through fear, v, i. ku bantaz&la.
High, adj, -lamfu; high ground,
n, 7. ohuma.
Hill, n, 9 a. lupidi.
Hillock, n, 6. kapidl.
Him, pers.pro, mu. S^chap, v of
Grammar,
Hinder, to, v, t, ku kasba. To
check, prevent, v. t, ku ohinjila.
Hip, hip joint, n, 6. kasolo.
Hippopotamus, If. i a, ohivhubwe.
His, poss, pro. kwe. Prefixed by
gen, parts.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
305
Hiss, to, of green firewood, v* f . Im
shima. Of a snake, &c., v, 1. ku
foma.
Hit, to, v,t, ku tuna. To hit
hsurl, v,t, ku nmiaha. To hit
with a hunmer, v. i, kn kanka-
mina. To hit with a spear with-
out pierc&ig, V, /. kn funknnya.
Hither, to this place, adv, kono.
Hoe, n. 5. iamba. An unfinished
hoe-head, n, 7. ohibimbL An old
hoe, n, 7. ohamba, chikata.
Hoe, to, v. /. ku dima. To hoe a
new field at end of rainy season,
V. /. ku shinda. To hoe deeply,
V, t, ku chj-nka.
Hold, to, v, /. ku kwata. To hold
carefiilly in hands, v, /. ku tumba-
tila. To hold out hand to offer
something, v. U ku tambika. To
hold for, V, t, ku kwatila.
Hole, f». 3. idindi; n, 7. chi-
dindL Animals* burrow^ n, 4.
bwina. A very deep hole, pit,
n. 6. kalambwe. Hole in wood,
also wound, n, 7. ohipolo. Hole
in corn-bin for taking out grain,
n, 8. inkwanto. &cape hole
from bwina, n, 8. impo. Hole
made in ground by rain, if. 3. idi-
bila. Hole in river-bed where
fish live, n, 3. isengo. Hole in
a tree, n, 8. im,pako. Hole in
ear for ear-ring, n. 4. bulumba.
Old hole in ground, n. 7. chishe.
Holiness, iu 4. busweyo.
Hollow, to, v, t, ku kolola.
Hollow, adj\ -kolwelwe.
Holy, to be, dean, firee from dirt,
V, i, ku sweya.
Home, my h., in my place, mwangu.
I am going home, ue. to my
people, ITda ya ku banaiaha.
Homesick, to be, v, i. ku sokama.
Honey, n. 4. bwiohi, buchi, n. i a.
kanaama. To go seeking h., v, i.
ku enaa.
Honey-bee, n. 8. inzuki.
Honey-comb, full of honey, n. 8.
impuma ; without honey, n, 1 a,
shipupuza.
Honey-guide, ff. i. a. Solwe. This
bird calls travellers in the forest,
and if they follow, leads them to
where the bees have a nest in a tree.
Honour, to, v, /. ku lemeka.
Honour, dignity, n, 4. bulemu ;
esteem, n. 4. bulemeko.
Honourable, to be, v,i, ku
lemekeka.
Hoop, n, 9. luftunba.
Hook, fish-, n. 6. kalobo ; n. 3.
iweahi; n. 8. impute.
Hoop, n, a. mubalo.
Hop, to, pkr, ku enda sunkutile.
As insect, v. i. ku sotaoka.
Hope, to, to trust, v, i. ku shoma.
Horn, n, ga, Iwiya; pi. meya.
Horn containing medicine, used as
a charm, n, 9. luaengo. Horn
fixed to skull, n, 7. chanza.
Hornet, n, 3. ingvhti; //.
mangvbti.
Horse, n, 8. imbizhi.
Host, n. i a. shimenzo. Our host,
shimenzo esu.
Hot, to be, v. i. ku pia. To be
hot to taste, as pepper, v. i, ku
b&nga-b&nga.
FAr, The sun is hot, lumwi
Iwa badisha.
Hour, n. i a. /or, Ora ; pi, baora.
House, n. 8.ing'anda; //. ing*anda
and manda. H ouse of unmarried
men, umbalombwana. A very
large house, n, 3. ianda. A house
without a roof, n. 9. luampa. Old
tumble-down house, n, 7. ohanda.
House with gable ends, n,g. longo ;
pi, ingongo. Temporary house
built in a field, n. 7. chitungu.
Processes in building.
To describe a circle in laying out a
hut, V. t, ku fundulula.
The trench dug for the upright
poles, n. 2. mwimbi.
The upright poles, n, 3. pi. maz-
hilo.
Doorway, n, 2. mudiango.
Threshold, n. 8. chikunguzho.
Piece of wood placed above doorway,
n. 7. chikotamino, chilungamo.
Short poles stood on top of chiko-
tamino, n. 4. bulebo.
Partition wall, n. 2, mdmbe.
3o6
ENGLISH-ILA . VOCABULARY
Oatside wall, #f . 4. bwanda.
Wattle used for binding, n, 9. lu-
balo, //. imbalo.
The Inbalo put on top of wall to
which roof-poles are tied, lubalo
Iwa ohilongolongo.
To put roof on, v, t, ku tongika.
First poles of roof, n, 3. //. ma-
tungisho.
Poles put next, n. 3. pi. masondo.
To put in masondo, v.t, ku
soxnena.
To cut roof*poles even, v,t. kn
konkolola.
Kind of basket-work made at the
apex, into which masondo are
pushed, n, 4. bunyoni.
To thatch, v, /. ku vhumba.
Pinnacle of grass put on top, n,ieu
sonkoto.
To put on iirst coat of clay, v, t,
ku xnata.
To finish-off smearing, v. /. ku
shingulula.
How ? adv. Buti ? Koohani ?
How MANY? adj\ -ongai? e,g.
How many people? Bantu
bongai ?
How OFTEN? adv. Kongai?
However, nevertheless, canj, niku-
babobo.
Hum, to, as people, v. i. ku vhu-
vhuta; of insects, 9. f.kungoka.
Human nature, also virtue, n, 4.
buntu.
Humble, to be, v. i, ku bomba.
To abase, reduce, v, /. ku
fwinaha, ku bonzha.
Hump, n, 8. intunda.
Humpback, n. 1 a, shintunda.
Hundred, n, 2. mwanda.
Hunger, n, 8. inzala. Severe
hunger, n. 9. Iwizu.
Hungrily, adv. chanzala.
Hungry, to be, phr. ku fwa
inzala. To be very hungry, v, i,
ku lenguka, ku fwa Iwizu. To
be weak with hunger, phr. ku
zhunza ku xnenso. To go to
bed hungry, pkr. ku ona aye ;
V. t. ku ihupika ; phr. ku di-
vhunga, ku lenguka o mavhwi.
Hunt, TO , z^. /. ku weza, ku Twima.
Hunter, n, i. muwezbi, muvwi-
mi.
Hurriedly, adv, ohalubilo, eba-
kubinda.
Hurry, TO, 9. /. ku binzha. To
hurry over work, doing it badly,
V. t. ku fwanzha-fwanzha. To
be in a hurry, pressed for time,
V. i. ku binda, ku bindana. To
be in a great hurry, v, i. ku
bindanisha. To hurry each other,
V. t, ku binzhanya.
Hurt, to be, v. i, ku ohisa ; v, L
kuchisha.
Husband, n, i. mulumi.
Hush I Dinza! Tontolanet
Hut. See House.
Hyena, n. 1 a. kabvrenga ; a
small, young, kanga-kabwenga.
Hymn, n, 9. Iwimbo; //. inyimbo.
Hypocrisy, n. 5. kupaupa.
Hypocrite, n. la. shikupaupa.
To be a hypocrite, phr. ku
upaupa xnenso.
Hypocritically, adv. chaku-
paupa.
I, pers. pro. IVdi, Nda, n, &c. See
chap, V of Grammar,
Idle person, an, n. i. mukata,
mutolo ; If . 1 a. bololo ; //.
babololo. Said of an idle person,
' In opening his mouth to eat, tiiat
is where hk strength lies,* Mula-
kumune ku ku^a kwalo udi
kwete insana.
Idleness, n. 4. btikata.
Idly, adv, ohabukata.
If, conj. ni ukuba. See chap, x
of Grammar.
Ill, bad, adj. -biabe.
Ill, to be, v.-i. ku sata; phr.
kudi mulwazhi.
Ignorant, to be, not to know, phr.
ku te zhi. Said of a child, igno-
rant or innocent, n. 7. chik^nku.
Ignite, to, to light a fire, v. t. ku
kunka.
Iguana, n. i a. bulwe ; //. ba-
bulwe.
Illegitimate child, n. i.mwana
omahuna.
Illumine, to, to give light, v. t. ka
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
307
mimilca. As a firefly, intennit-
tently, v. i, kn mweka-mweka.
Image, n. 7. cihllr<Mihiwio.
Imitate, to, v,i, ka idila; kn
idisha, kn kobesha. To imitate
each other, v,f, kn idllana. e.g^.
That person is not to be imitated,
'Weao ta idiahiwa.
Imitation, am, n, 7. ohikobesho.
Imitator, n. i. mwidiahi.
Impatient, to be, in the sense of
short-tempered, fkr, kadi ahilu-
tuahi.
Impatiently, with short temper,
adv, ohalutoriii.
Impatient person, short, quick-
tempered, ft. I a, atdlutoahL
Impediment, in speech, #f. 6. ka-
lenda.
Implore, to, v, t ka pompisha.
Importunate, to be, of a person
who retnms again and again to
ask for a thing, v,u ku ohin-
ohila^ ka chinda.
Impossible, to be. Use the cap.
sp. with the n^;atiye ; e. g. This
thing is impossible, i, e, it is incap-
able of being done, Ohaohi ta old
ohitiki.
Impotence, n, 4. boxnbo.
Impotent, an impotent person or
animal, n, i. mombo.
Imprecate, to, v, t, ku tuka.
Imprecation, n, 3.//. matoahl
Impress, to, to impress upon one*s
mind, v. t, ku pompomwena.
Improve, to, to make good, v. t,
ka boaka. To i., get better in
health, v, i, ku pona-pona.
Impudence, n. 6. kasapalasapala,
iububu, kaaankweaankwe, ka-
Impudent person, n, i a, shika-
sapalasapala, ahikamikami,
shikaaankwesankwe, shiubu-
bo.
Impudent, to be, pkr. kadi shi-
kasapalasapala, dec.
Impure, of water, adj\ -hundaushi.
In, prep. xno. On the uses, &c., of
Mu, see cAap. x of Grammar.
Inactive person, an, n. i a. ahi-
kancbimwa.
Inch, n. %.for. inohi.
Incision, in the skin, n, 4. bwa-
nde.
Incline, to, the person, bow, v. %.
ku kotama. To i. or lean a pole,
&c«, V. /. ku selebeka ; ditto, v. i.
kuselebala.
Increase, to, v. i. ku paka ; v, t.
ku pasha, ku vhuaha.
Indent, to, as a tin vessel, v, t, ku
fobola, ku tiftOa, ku tifwaula.
To be indented, v. i. ku foboka,
ku tifuka, ku tifauka.
Indentable, to be, v. i. ku fobo-
dika, ku foboleka, ku tifwBu-
dika.
Induna, If. I a, unkoshi. Way,
custom, manner of, ohinkostai.
Inert, to be, strengthless, of drugs,
V. i. ku sampuka.
Infancy, n. 4. buoheohe.
Infant, n, i. muohaohe.
Infanticide, to commit, phr, ku
sowa xnwana.
This is a common custom among
the Balumbu. Should a child be
bom feet foremost, it is immedi-
lately killed, either by burjring it
alive or in some other way. Such
a child is called Ohimpini. If a
woman who has never menstruated
bears a child it is also destroyed.
It is called, mwana a ta selwa,
or, mwana wa xnfuuahi.
Infectious, to be, v, i. ku aambu-
kila.
Infirm person, aged, n. i. mu-
pami.
Infirmity, old age, n. 4. bupami.
Inflate, to, v, t ku tukumuna ;
V, i. ku tukumuka.
Inform, to, to tell to, v.t. ku
Bhimwina. To tell about, v.t,
ku ohechelela.
Inherit, to, lit. to eat the name,
phr. ku dya izhina.
Inheritance, n. 3. izhina. That
is, ' name,* so termed because
when a person inherits anothei^s
property or position he takes the
name of the deceased.
Inheritor, n. i. mudyeahina.
Initiate, to, to do a thing for the
X 2
3o8
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
first time, to establish a custom,
V, t. ku lei]«a. To be initiated,
V, f . ku shinga.
This word is applied to the initia-
tion of youtns into manhood.
When boys reach puberty they are
sent to a cattle outpost, or kraal,
where they stay five or six days
herding cattle. The initiation con-
sists in the boys, one at a time,
beating a bull, ku ujna mu-
ohende. At the end of that time
they are sent home, a feast is made,
and the youngsters' teeth are
knocked out, Ira banga zneno.
This completes the initiation.
"With regard to girls reaching
puberty (bakamwale), a number
of them leave their homes and
gather in the forest around a
munto tree; they clear a space
and sleep there. When they are
found there they are taken back to
their villages and put into huts, or
sometimes together into one hut ;
here they must stay a month or
two, and all the time are instructed
by the old women as to the duties
of womanhood. Any girl who
has given trouble may come in for
a severe beating to knock the non-
sense out of her, or she may be
taken down to the river, put into
the water, and almost throttled.
During this time of seclusion the
girls are allowed out only at night,
and they must appear covered
from head to foot; if otherwise,
they may come in for a beating.
At the end of the time a feast is
made, and the girls are decked
out in beads, &c. They are carried
into the village on the backs of
elders, and a dance is made for
them, ku shanina bakanxwale.
A good deal of immorality goes
on during these initiation cere-
monies.
Injure, to, v. t. ku biaha.
Ink, «. 8. for, inki.
In order that, conj. ati.
Innocence, childish, n, 4. buahi-
nsht
Inquire. See Enquire.
Insane, to be, kudi shikalalu,
kudi mugrabushi.
Insane person, n, i a, shikalalu ;
n. I . xnugabushi.
Insanely, cuiv. ohakalalu.
Insanity, n, 6. kalalu.
Insect, n, i. mupuka ; n, 4. bu-
puka.
List of Insects.
See also Ant, Beetle.
A kind of insect which bites and
hangs on, n, i a. ohenje.
Bee, inzuki, kansama.
Butterfly, iukongolokwa.
Firefly, kamweshiniweshi.
Flies. See Fly.
Grub found in maize-stalk, ngong-
wa.
Hornet, ingvhu ; pi. znangvhu.
Jigger, iundu.
Locust, ohikwikwi, ohiute, shin-
ohuta, inzhie.
Mantis religiosa, lulukwati, na-
mutekamenzhi.
Mosquito, imwe.
Moth, ipempe.
The mason wasp, namushingi-
didi.
Inside, adv, mukati.
Insolent. See Impudent.
Inspect, to, v. /. ku dingula.
Inspiration, breathing, n, 5. ku
zoza. To breathe upon something
or somebody, v,t, ku fudidizha.
Instal, to, v. t. ku kadika.
Instantly, adv, inzho-inzho,
ndidiona.
Instead of, prep, ku busena bwa.
Instruct, to, to teach, v, /. ku iya.
To i. by giving advice, v, U ku
bula.
Instructor, if. i. mwiyi, znubudi.
Insurrection, to be rebellions, to
refuse to obey commands, v. u ku
papa,kupapala. To turn against,
V, t. ku sandumukila.
Intend, to, v. i. ku hupula.
Intent, to be, upon work or eat-
ing, V. i, ku Aikalala.
Intercede, to, to speak on behalf
of, v,t, ku ambidila.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
309
Interpret, to, v. /. kn sandnla,
ku pindiila.
Interrupt, to, to break in when
another is speaking, phr, ku xnu
njila xnu kanwa. To stop one
from speaking, pkr, kn xnu lesha
ku amba.
Intestines, n. 4. bula; //. mala.
A large intestine, n, 3. ila.
Into, prep, mu.
Intoxicate, to, v. /. ku kola. To
be intoxicated, z'.^zjj. ku kolwa.
Introduce, to, to make two people
(or more) known to each other,
V. /. ku lubulula, ku zhibaxiya.
Invent, to, v, /. ku lenga.
Invert, to, v, t, ku sandumuna.
Invite, to, v. t. ku taxnba.
Iron, n . 7. chela ; rough, unwronght
iron, n. 4. butale ; n, 6. katale.
The word is applied to any metal.
A large iron tool, n, 3. ibulo,
A small piece of flat iron, if, 6.
kanjei^ema.
Prisoners* irons, n, 8. inshimbi.
Is. See chap, viii of Grammar,.
Island, n, 7. ohilwa.
It, pers, pro. See chap, v of
Grammar.
Itch, to, v, u ku baba, ku babwa ;
e.g. My body itches, Mubidi
wangu wa baba. I itch, Nda
babwa.
Its, poss, pro. See chap, v of
Grammar,
Ivory, bracelets made of, n, 8.
inkaya.
jACKALy n. la, mwaba ; pi, ba-
mwaba.
Jacket, n, 3.y&r, ibaiki.
Jag, to, to notch, v, t, ku lomaula.
To be jagged, v. i, ku lomsuka.
January, month of, kulumi.
Jaw, lower, n, a. mwezhi.
Jealously, adv, ohabufwL
Jealous person, n, i a, shibufwl
Jealousy, n, 4. bufwi; n, 7.
chifwi ; n, 3. ibivhwe.
Jehovah, n. i a, for. Jenova.
Jest, to, v, t, ku sesha.
Jest, n. 3. //. masesho.
Jester, n, i a. shimasesho.
Join, to, to meet, v, i, ku swa-
ncana; v.t. ku swanganya.
To j. end to end, v, i. ku lunga.
To J. side by side, v, t. ku yan-
yanya ; v. i. ku yanyana.
Joint, n, 3. ingo. Finger-joint,
n. 8. inungo. Hip-joint, n, 6.
kaaolo. To break a reed at the
joint, V, U ku kombola, ku ko-
nona.
Jomts of meat : hind-leg, mwendo
wa bukomi ; shoulder, mwendo
wa ohiftmzhi, uwebesho ; a cut
through an animal, uchakati,
chunsru ; breast (chiefs portion),
shinakaba, ahinabwaawi.
Joke, n, 3. pi, miasealio.
Joke, to, v, t, ku sesha.
Jolt, to, as a hammock, v. t, ku
aexupauBha ; v, i, ku aempauka.
To j. or shake from side to side,
of hammock, v, /. ku sumbanya ;
V. f . ku Bumbana.
Journey, n. a. muahinzo ; n. 9 a.
Iwendo.
JOY, n. 5. kubotelwa, kutangala.
OYFULLY, adv, ohakubotelwa,
ohakutangala.
Judge, n, i. mubsteshi.
Judge, to, v, t, ku beteka. To j.
on behalf of, v, t, ku betekela.
To j. carefully, at length, v, t, ku
betekisha.
Judgement, n. 9. lubeteko. Meet-
ing for trying cases, n, 9. lubata.
Juice, of tree, fruit, n, 3. pi,
menzM.
July, month of,Ki^pukupuku, Ka-
zhalakonae.
Jump, to, z/.i. ku aotoka. To j.
aside to escape a missile, v, i, ku
lea. To j., be startled, when a
gun is fired unexpectedly, v. i. ku
tidimuka. To j. as locusts, v. i,
ku sotaoka.
June, month of, Chiteke-oha-
bwila.
Just, to be, v, i, ku lulama.
Just, cuh. Expressed by the verb
kuvhwa,to come out ; e,g. He has
just arrived, "Wa vhwa ku shika.
He has just finished, Wa vhwa ku
xnana.
3IO
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Justice, v, 5. kululama.
Justly, ach, oliakubosha^ ohaku-
lulama.
Kaffir corn, n. 3. pL maoheme,
matuba.
Keep, to, to preseryey save, v, U ku
zobola. To k. for somebody,
9./. ku Bobwela. To k. out,
v,t, ku shinka. To k. a law,
v,t. ku kwata lubeta, ku
bamba lubeta.
Keeper, n, i. muiobodi; a
watcher, caretaker, n* i. mudin-
dizhi.
Kernel, of not, n, a. xnuaeke.
Kettle, n, %,for, inketale.
Key, n, T*for, ohinotolo.
Kick, n. 2. muleuahi, mulensliay
mubambala.
Kick, to, phr, ku diatamilanzhi,
ku sansa xnilenBhi.
Kid, n, 6. kapongo, n, i. mwana-
mpongo.
Kidnap, to, v, /. ku fiimpa.
Kidnapper, n, 1, mufumpi.
Kidney, n, 8. insa.
Kill, to, v. /. ku yaya. To k. by
throttling, v. /. ku shina. To k.
a weak, helpless animal or person,
V. /. ku saulula. To k. or crack
lice, V, U ku ponda. To k.
insect by nibbing between fingers,
V. L ku shokota. To k. a fowl
by twisting round its neck, v. t.
ku nyongolola. To k. many
game at a time, v, t, ku poaaula ;
V, f . ku poaauka. To be killed,
V. /. ku yayiwa.
Kind, species, n, a. mukumd.
Animals of various kinds, banya-
ma ba mlkiifno-iTiikuiTio.
Kind person, if. i a. shimanga,
shibwanga.
Kindle, to, a fire, v, t, ku kuuka.
Kindly, adv. ohamanga^ oha*
bwanga.
Kindness, n. 4. bwanga, manga.
King, n, i. muoneki.
The Baila seem to have no idea of
a king or kingdom ; the term mu-
oueki is derived from the verb
ku oneka, to make sleep, 1. «. to
give peace. It is not a widely
used word, probaUy only lately
coined by them.
Kingdom, n, 4. buoneki; n, 2.
for. mubuso.
Kiss, TO, v.t. ku shonta. Tok.
each other, v. /. ku shontana.
Kitchen, n. 7. ohikilo.
Kitten, n, 6. kakaae, kanga-
kaze.
Kloof, n, 2. mwako.
Knead, to, dough, v. /. ku huba.
To k. clay in making mortar,
&c., V, t. ku ahanyanga.
Knee, n. 3. ivhwi.
Kneel, to, v. i, ku suntama, ku
ftikama. To k. down to, v, /.
ku suntamina, ku fakamina.
Knife, n, 8. impoko. European
knife, n. ^.for. intipa. Point of
knife, n, 8. insonga. Handle or
sheath, n. 7. ohilalo.
Knock, to, v.t. ku uma, ku
kankamina. To k. at a door,
v./. ku uma-uma, ku konko-
mona. To k. each other, as
knees, v. t. ku umana, ku dyo-
nbengana. To k. against each
other, V. t. ku umanya. To k.
one's foot against a stone, v. /. ku
difumpula. To k. or rap with
knuckles, phr. ku uma ohinko-
nya. To k. out teeth, v. t. ku
banga.
Knot, n. 7. ohikoto. A small
knot, n. 6. kakoto. A slip-knot,
n. 4. bufwiahl To tie a slip-
knot, V, t. ku fwiaika.
Know, to, v. t. kwishi^ kwishi-
Bhi, ku ahiba. To k. each other,
v.t. ku abibaxla. To make
known, v. t. ku lesha, ku ahi-
bya.
Knowledge, n. 5. kwiahiba.
Known, to be, to be spread abroad,
V. f . ku ibuka ; e. g. The thing is
known, is notorious, Ke buka
kambo, ka ya impuwo.
Knuckle, n. 8. inungo, ingo aha
minwe.
Kraal, n. 7. ohimpata.
Kudu, n. i a. namutentaula, mu-
Bulumatwi, shombololo. A.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
3"
young, small, kaEnga-namaten-
taula, &C.
Labour, it. 2. mudimo, m, 2. fir.
mubelffko.
Labour, to, if. i, fir, ka bal^ka,
pkr. ku mana midimo.
Labourer, n. i,fir, mubelald.
Lack, to, v, /. ku biil% ku budila,
ka bndjgha*
Lad, n. 6. kalombmum.
Ladder, in. 7. cbidiiilo.
Laden, to be, v. pass, ka lama-
nwa; v,i,kxL paknahft.
Lady, the wife of a chief, n. i.
modi, //. bodL
Lake, n, 3. iahiba.
Lamb, if. 6. kambalala, n, i.
mwana-mbelela.
Lame, to be, v.i. ka sonkata;
with fatigue, v.Kta babata ; to
lame, v, /. ka sunkoaha.
Lameness, it. 5. koaonknta.
Lamp, h, z-fi*"* ilainpL
Lance, to, an abscess, v./. ka anda.
Land, ground, if. 8. inshi.
Land, to, v. L ku landuka, v. t.
kalandoaba.
Landing-place, if. 3. ilando.
Language, If . 2. mwfimbo. Names
of languages have the prefix ohi- ;
e.g. ohikubo, the 1. of the
Bakubu or MarotsL
Languid, to be, from weakness,
v. f. ku lengaoka.
Languid, adj. -langauahi.
Lap, to, v. t. ku sabiuta.
Large, to be, v.i. ku komana;
to make 1., v.t, ka komeaha,*
to be very 1., v. i. ku komenasha.
Large, adj. -kando ; e.g. a large
thing, chintu chikando.
Last, last month, pkr. mweahi
owa ka ita, or, owa kudi ko ;
last week,/^r. iviki dia ka ita,
or, odia kudi ko ; last year, n. 2.
mwakadi; the last child a woman
will have, n. 8. inkomba.
Late, to be, v. i. ku imoka.
Lathe, for turning ivory bracelets,
If. 3. iclieaho.
Lather, n. 3. iovu.
Laud, to, v. t. ku tembaula.
Laugh, to, v. f. ku saka ; to laugh
long, loud, V, i, ku sakaska.
Laugh, n. 5. kuaaka.
Launch, to, a boat into the water,
phr. ku chiaha bwato ku Iwa-
nge ; to push off, v. t. ku tonka.
Law, If. 9. lubata, n. 2. mulaaho.
Lawful, to BE,/ir. kudi alala.
Lawsuit, n. a. mulandu.
Lay, to, to 1. eggs,/^r. ku shala
mal ; to 1. a thmg down, v. t. ku
oneka, ku onya; to 1. oneself
down, v.i. ku aalama, ku pi-
nuka ; to 1. one thing across an-
other, v,t. ku ohiatnika, ku
ohika ; to 1. any one down, v. t.
ku pinuna ; to L by, save, v. t.
ku Bobola ; to 1. hold of, v. t. ku
kwata.
Lazily, adv. ohabukata.
Laziness, if. 4. bukata.
Lazy person, if. i. mukata,
bololo, mutolo, mulenga.
Called also in derision, ohikata,
xuulakumuna.
Lead, to, v. t. ku enaha; to 1. or
command soldiers, v.i. ku sun*
gula; to 1. by going ahead, v. i.
ku solola; to 1. astray, v.t. ku
lengauzha.
Leader, if. i. mwanshi, musolo-
zhi; coomiander, n. i. musun-
gudi.
Leaf, n. 3. itovu ; edible leaf, if. 7.
chishu; leaf of a book, if. 3.
ipapa; dry, fallen leaf, if. 8.
inkwaya; young leaf, if. 8. in-
delema ; of reed or maize, if. 3.
//. malekaleka ; to strip leaves
off branch, v.t. ku pulula;
shed leaves in autumn, v. i. ku
kunkumuka ; to sprout, of leaves,
V, i. ku sonsa; to turn leaves over
in book, v. t. ku pepaula.
Leak, to, v. i, ku swdka ; e,g, the
house leaks, v.i. ing'anda ya
swaka. The canoe leaks, bwato
bu la vhwa menzhi.
Lean, to be, v. i. ku koka ; to be
lean, emaciated by sickness, v.i.
ku pupungana.
Lean, adj. -kofti.
Lean, to, v.t. ku salabaka, ku
312
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
seka ; to 1. against, v, i, ku sele-
bala ; to 1., of a person leaning
against a tree, &c., v,u ku
zaxnina.
Leanness, n. 4. bukofa.
Leap, to, v. i. ku sotoka.
Learn, to, v,i, ku diiya, ku
diya.
Learner, n, i. xuudiiyl
Leave, to, to depart, v.i. ku
unka, ku zhimoka, ku fwisuka,
ku fwisauka ; to 1. behind, v» /.
ku shia ; to 1. a place after rest-
ing, V. i, ku sunduka ; to 1. off,
V. /. ku leka, ku shikila.
Leaven, n, 4. buxnena.
Leavened, to be, v, i, ku netuka;
e.g. the bread is leavened, inshi-
ma ya netuka buxnena.
Leavened, adj, -netushi.
Leavings, as food in a pot, n. 3.//.
makalambia.
Leech, n. i. musundu, munsu-
ndu.
Lees, dregs, sediment, n, 4. buse.
Left, n. 7. ohimonawe. Left hand,
itashi dia chunonswe. The left
side, Iwiya Iwa ohimonswe.
Left-handed person, n, la. shi-
ohimonswe.
Leg, n. 5. kulu ; hind-leg of animal,
n. 2. mwendo; fore-leg of aninud,
n. 5. kuboko.
Leglet, n, 3. iseka, n, 3. ilanda;
of women, n, 8. inyinga.
Lend, to, to give a loan,/^r. ku
pa xnuta.
Length, n. 4. bulamfu.
Lengthen, to, v. /. ku lansha.
Leopard, n. i a. shiluwe.
Leper, n. i a. shiohinsenda.
Leprosy, n, 7. ohinsenda. Natives
regard leprosy as being not con-
tagious, but inherited. A leper
is not allowed to eat the flesh of
eland, zebra, bush-pig (ohulube),
or the barbel (mubondo), nor
ipushi. They say that these
things have leprosy; others say
that the flesh of these* is white
and similar to leprosy, and if a
leper eat them he will soon die.
Less, to become, v, i. ku ohea.
Lessen, to, v, t. ku oheaha.
Lesson, reading, n, 7. ohibalo.
Lest, conj. antela ; e.g. You must
not do so lest you die, 17 ta ku
ohita bodia antela u la fwa.
Let, aux, a, na; e.g. Let us go, Jl
tu ende. Go ye, Na mu ye.
Letter, ». 9 o. lungwalo ; of the
alphabet, n* Z'f(^* iletele.
Level, to, v.L ku bambasika;
to 1. for somebody, v,t, ku ba-
mbasikila ; to be 1., v. i, ku ba-
znbasala ; the road is 1., inzhila
idi bambasele ; to 1. or smooth,
V. t, ku eabezha.
Lewd person, n, la. ahinyauwe.
Lewdness, n. 8. inyauwe.
Liar, n, i. mubeahi. One who
promises but does not act, n, i.
xnudibezhi.
Liberally, adv, chakupdsha.
Lick, to, v. /. ku miansha ; to 1. a
dish, of a dog, v. t. ku pela, ku
komba; to 1. the lips in eating
anything nice, v, /• ku dimi-
ansha.
Lid, n, 7. ohivhunisho.
Lie, £dsehood, phr, kambo ka
kubea.
Lie, to, to tell falsehoods, v, 1. ku
bea, ku pepesha ; to 1. down,
v.i, ku ona, ku pinuka; to 1.
down, of animals, v. i. ku buta ;
to 1. with head on arm, v, i, ku
dishikila; to 1. stretched out,
V, i, landabala ; to 1. on belly,
V. i, ku vhundama ; to 1. on
back, v.i, ku salaxna; to 1. in
wait for, v, t, ku ftunpa ; to tell
lies about somebody, v./. ku
besha.
Life, h. 4.bumi.
Lift, to, v,t. ku katuls; to L
high, V. t, ku katulisha ; to 1. up
the head, stand erect, v.i, ku
kotamuka.
Light, n. 2. mumoni.
Light, to be, not heavy, v. i. ku
uba.
Lighten, to, a load, v. /. ku ubya.
Of lightning, v.i. ku laba; to
show light, V. t. ku munika.
Lightj^ing, If. 9 a. lulabo. It
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
313
ligbtens, "Wa laba Iiess, w»
kalala !••■&. Tlie tree is struck
by lightning, iBamo dia andwa
Like, to, v. t. kn ftma.
Like, to be, v, /. ku koaha ; to
be like eadi other, v,i. ka ko-
Liken, to, v. /. ku koahanya.
Likeness, image, pictmei n. 7.
ohikoshano.
Lily, water*, root of, n. 8. imbe ;
stem o^ Mk a. mndidima.
LiiCE, BIED-, ft. 4. Imdinibo.
Limp, to, v,i, ka nmkata; to
limp with fiitigne, v.i, lax ba-
LiNE, string, n, 6. koahL A line
stretched in a house upon which
blankets, &c^ aie hung, ik. 3.
mulenga*
Link, to, as a plank for sawing,
V, /. ka ftmdaliila.
Lion, m, la. shambwa. Other
names given to the lioo are: —
Kapompa, Shamangana, She-
twi, flhanaa, Shanaa-mokolo,
Indavo, Mwanda-banyamau
Said of a lioo : — ^XTahombwa a le
enda inahi i la tongelay When
the lion travels the earth groans.
Xaaokwe manaa, maahlka ya
ba indavo. In die daytime a
patch of gnm, at night he be-
comes a lion. latombola ka-
mine ya miniika i dya monto.
Ka wansa maniaala. Shaba-
faola ba langwa kamaanba.
Lip, n. *3. malomo ; to move lips
without speaking, 9. £. ka lakaa-
ka, /^. ka tapaaha malomo,
ka takol aihakawba
Listen, to, v. /. ka papalala.
Little, aiff. -ahonto. Expressed
also in die diminndve prefixes,
ka-t ta-.
Live; to, to live well, be well, v. i.
ka pona; to be alive, v.t. ka
lanca ; to live or reside, v. i, ka
«. la.
■hikabwekatanBhi, ahaohika-
oka, bulabe (different varieties).
Load, to, to pnt a load on one's
shoulder, v. t. ka twika ; to load
any one heavily, v. t. ka lemena ;
to support a load on shoulder by
putting a stick under it and over
the other shoulder, v. t. ka dinga-
diaha ; to load a canoe, v. t. ka
chiiha ; to carry a big load, v, t.
ka kambika.
Load, carried on a stick upon the
shoulder, n. a. moahio.
Loaf, of bread, n. a. makama.
Loan, n, a. mate.
Loathe, to, v. t. ka sala.
Lock, to, v. t. for. ka notala.
Locust, n. 7. chikwikwi ; a large
number, n. 3. ikwikwi ; the voet-
ganger, n. i a. sbinchato ; varie-
ties, n. 7. chiute, n, 8. inahie ;
to appear, as locusts, v.i. ka
sbintaka.
Lodge, a place for spending a night.
If. 7. chonaalo, n. 7. chidioko-
aheaho.
Lodge, to, v. i. ka onaa.
Log, of wood, n. 7. chiaamo.
Loins, n. \. bakome; die waist,
n, 7. chibano.
Loin-cloth, n. a. mabinda.
Long, adj. -lamfti.
Long, to be, v. i. ka lampa ; to
be very long, v. i. ka lampi-
aha; to make long, v.t. ka la-
LivER, «. a. monL
LiZAKO, n. 8.
Long ago, adv. kale-kale.
Long, to, to long ioft^phr. ka fwa
chimin am atft. I fcHig to see
him, Hda fwa chiminamate ka
ma bona. To look at a thing
longing for it,- but not asking,
V. t. ka ehfwiidania. Of doing
this, they say, Menao, menso,
nkombidila, malomo wa
aowa; Eyes, eyes, ask for me,
the mouth is astonished (afraid).
Look, to, v. /. ka langa, ka ebala;
to L around intently and fre-
quently, V. i. ka chebaaka ; to L
around, v.i. ka oheboka; to 1.
ahead intently, gaze, v. i. ka ta-
nama ; to L out, expect people,
314
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
v.t "kxL soxnpela; to L into, as
into a grain-bin, tf. t, ku sondela ;
to 1. upwards, v.u ku dialala;
to 1. around upon people seated in
circle, v. i. ku ohen^oluka.
Looking-glass, n, 7. ohimbone.
Loop, n, 4. bufwisu.
Loose, to, v.t, ku angulula; to
loosen a pole by swaying it to
and fro, v, t. ku 8uns;unya, ku
Eunganya ; to be loose, of a hoe-
handle, &c., v. i, ku zunguna ;
to come loose of a cord or string,
V. i, ku aenzela.
Lop, to, to cut branches off a tree,
V. t. ku kunka.
Lop-sided, of a muzhia heavier at
one end than the other, 11.7.
chifalaila. Fhr, Mushiu wa
lexua Iwiya, The load is heayy at
the side.
Lord, chief, n, i. mwaml
Lordly, manner, custom of a lord,
chami-ohami.
Lordship, n, 4. bwini, bwami.
Lose, to, to throw away, v, t, ku
sowa. yiE//^m:ku8wekelwa; e,g,
I have lost my knife, lit, 1 am
lost to my knife, Nda swekelwa
impoko yangu. To throw away,
waste, v,U ku sowalla; to lose
one's skill, v,t. ku bulula; to
lose by dispersing tilings, v, t. ku
umbtQula.
Lost, to be, v,t. ku swoka; to
be lost by dispersion, v*i, ku
umbuluka.
Lot, to be a lot, v, i, ku vhula ; an
allotment, share, n. 7. ohabilo ;
a lot or division of grain, n, 2,
mwela.
Lot, the only approach to throwing
lots, except in the throwing of the
bones in divining, seems to be in
the children*s game, ohisolo, ku
wala ohisolo, ku dya ohiBolo.
Loudly, to talk, v, t. ku ambi-
sha.
Louse, n, 8. injina, n, 6. kadunta.
Lovable, to be, v, i. ku funika.
Lovable, adj\ -funishl
Love, n. 5. kufuna ; mutual love,
. n, 5. kuftinana.
Lover, one who loves, n, i. mu-
ftini.
Lovingly, cuh. ohakufona.
Low, adv. kunkudiko. He lives
in a low place, i. e, not elevated,
*Wa kala ku kunkudiko.
Lower, to, to let down, v.t. ku
seluBha.
Luck, good, n. 7. oholwe.
Lull, to, to sleep as a child, v. t.
ku butika; to subside as wind,
V. i. ku batamina.
Lump, of earth, &c., n. 3. ikomwe.
Lumpy, to be, of mortar, &c., phr.
kudi kwete makomwe.
Lunacy, n, 6. kalalu.
Lunatic, if. i a. shikalalu.
Lung, n. 3. ifafwe.
Lurch, suddenly, of a canoe, v. 1.
ku kunauka ; to roll from side
to side, of a canoe, v,i, ku
tekana.
Lust, sexual desire, n. 7. chiaushi.
Lying, n. 5. kubea.
Mad, to be, v. i. ku sondoka^
phr. kuba shikalalu.
Madden, to, v. t, ku sondoaha.
Madman, n. i. mukabushi, muga-
bushi ; n. la. shikalalu ; f». i •
znusondoshi.
Madness, n. 6, kalalu; in dogs,
n. 7. ohilongwe.
Maggot, in meat, n. 3. iumba.
Maid, girl till puberty, n. i. muahi-
mbi ; at and after puberty, n. 1 a,
kamwale ; old maid, unmarried
woman, n. 1 a. nabutema.
Mail, post, n. S./ar. ImpoBO.
Maim, to, v. t. ku holofiMiha.
Maimed, to be, v. i. ku hoiofiEkla.
Maimed person, n. i a. ohihole,
//. baohihole, n, la. ohi&nga.
Maize, n. 3. //. mapopwe.
Make, to, v, t. ku ohita ; to make
over again, remake, v. t, ku ohitu-
lula ; to help or cause to make,
v.t. ku ehisha; to make for,
V. t. ku ohitila ; to be makeable,
doable, v. t. ku ohitika ; to form,
mould, v.t. ku bumbai Ex-
pressed also in the causative
species. Thus: ku lutila, to be
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
315
angrjr; kn faitlahft^ to make
angry, cause to be angij.
Maker, n. i. mneUti, nnilniiiibi.
Malice, n, 8. iakole.
Maliciously, adv. ehankolo.
BfAN, penoii. If. I. mimta ; a male,
n. I. amlomb^ajm ; a big man,
n. ^ ilombwBiift ; a yoong man,
n. la, kaknlnulil, ndnmbaaa.
A stroi^ man, a bad maa, manner
or costom of a man, ohUomb-
Mahe, n, a. mcwialA, mnunkwo.
Manhood, m, 4. balombwaiuk
Manner, n, 7. dhidUo.
Manner, n. 7. oWanBft Manner,
custom of a pecMo cxpresBcd by
the prefix dhl-. Thns: manner,
way, custom of a chie^ cliami-
ohami ; of a woman, ohikaintu.
Mantis, n. in. namntokftmenahl ,
InlvkwftkL
Manure, dang; maftuaba, bu-
fdmba.
Many, o^. -uji-xiji; g,^. many
people^ bantu ban jiba^L
March, to, ka ends; to march
«p and down carrying spears as
at limeral, v, i, ka lembA.
Mark, to, v. /. ka lemba ; to mark
tickets, V. i./or. ka tikita.
Mark, foot-, n. a. mokondo.
Market, place for baying, n, 7.
ohiiKfflo.
Markiage, m, in. bwings, n. 9^.
Jntwalow This girl is taken to
her fstore fansband's place by
women : this is ka kokola, mu-
kaintu wa kokolwa, the woman
is taken thns ; or they take her to
the wedding, ba mu leta ku
bwrlnga. The bridegroom gives
presents to the bride's sisters, this
is ka fwenesba. The marriage
feast is, Tnadlanahi-mA. Ku
aangana indicates the custom of
the bridegroom and bride par-
taking of food together, each
handing a portion to the other;
it signifies that henceforth they
are to live and eat together.
After the feast, the parents of the
bride bring her presents, ku mu
aangfla; the porpoae of this is
expressed by ahintu aha ku mu
lumbwila. The bride is given a
new name by her husband, Ku
udika.
Marriageable, to be, v,i, ku
twadika.
Marrow, n, 4. buaesa; a large
quantity of, n. 3. iaeaa.
Marry, to, of the man, v.t. ku
twala ; of the woman, ku twal-
wa ; oif them both, 9. i. ku twal-
ana ; to marry more than one
wife, V. t, ku adika.
Marsh, n, 5. iaaba, n. a. mulondo.
Marvel, to, v. pass, ku Iweiwa.
Marvel, a wonderful thing, if, 3.
pi. malweaa.
Mash, a dish of nuts crushed up,
seasoned with salt, cooked or not,
katongola, kayobe. A mixture
of mealies, beans and nuts cooked
up together, n, 4. budyodyo.
Mass, a large quantity of any-
thing, n. 7. nhi^ma.
Massacre, to, v.t. ku poaaula,
kuposauaha.
Master, n. 1. mwinl My — ,
ahimatwangangu ; pi. ba-.
Thy — , ahimatwangako ; //.
ba-. His — , ahimatwangakwe;
//. ba-. Our — , ahimatwan-
geau ; //. ba-. Your — , ahimat-
wangenu ; //. ba-. Their — ,
ahimatwangabo ; pi. ba-.
Masticate, to, v. t. ku tafnna.
Mat, of grass, n. a. muaeme;
laige mat made of impolwe grass,
n. 3. iaaaa.
Matches, n. 3. pi. for. mankisi.
Matted, or towzled hair, n. 3.
ikanka.
Matter, pus, n. 4. bushila ; case,
business, n. 3. ikani, n. 8. in-
kani. Fhr. What's the matter
with him ? VTtk ba nahi ?
Mattress, n. 4. bula
May, month of, Busangule.
Me, n, m. See chap, v of Grants
mar. With me, even me, Ame,
amebo.
Meal, n, 4. bufu ; coarse, n, 3. pL
mandu ; fine, if. 4. bulamu.
3i6
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Mealies, n. 3. //. mapopwe.
Measure, to, v,t, ku eleka; to
cause to measure, to measure
with, V. t, ku elesha.
Measure, a rule, n. 7. oheleslio.
Meat, n. 4* buzane ; meat boiled
much, nice and soft, n, 8. inkanzo
(eaten by elders only).
Mediate, to, to speak on behalf
of, V. /. ku ambidila.
Mediator, n. i. Mwambidizhi.
Medicine, n, 2. muaaxno.
Some kinds of native medicines,
Buvhumo. This is put around a
village and elsewhere to scare
away lions.
Ohipezhabazhike. A short shrub
the root of which is used in
leprosy and syphilis. The root is
pounded, wrapped in cloth, and
soaked. The bundle is then
applied to the sores.
Kabwengwe. Leaves and twigs
of a small bush. They are
crushed, soaked in water, and
applied to the eye, when a snake
has spat into it. The immediate
result is a profuse watering of the
eye, which relieves the pain and
washes out the poison. It is also
said to be applied to snake bites.
Kaxnankamala. The leaves or
root of this shrub are chewed ; said
to be a cure in case of diarrhoea.
Mubondo. The dried head of
this fish is crushed up and mixed
with the fat of the same ; this is
said to be a cure for the disease
Chibondo.
Mubumbu. Bark of this tree
used as a cure for dysentery and
diarrhoea. The bark is soaked
in water which turns a red colour;
the decoction, which is bitter to
taste, is either drunk or cooked
with porridge.
Mudyadya. The root of this
shrub is cooked in beer or por-
ridge ; said to stimulate the
appetite.
Mufofiima. From the root of
this tree is made a decoction
which is supposed to cause chil-
dren to grow big. The root is
crushed and soaked, and the child
is washed in the decoction and
made also to drink some of it.
Mufwebabachazi. The root of
this tree evidently contains a
strong narcotic. The bark is
taken and broken up, and natives
say that if these are smoked in a
pipe unconsciousness is quickly
caused, death following. This is
not an uncommon way of com*
mitting suicide.
Mululwe. Root of this tree used
as a cure for leprosy or syphilis.
Deep incisions axe made in the
root, which is then soaked in
water; the decoction, which is
bitter to taste, is taken either
locally or used as a lotion.
Munto. The leaves of this tree
are soaked or chewed and then
placed on the head, in case of
headache.
Mutongabofo. The root of this
small shrub is soaked in water,
and the decoction is drunk three
or four da3rs in succession by
women in order to produce fer^
tility.
Mwazhi. This is used in the
ordeal by the Baltunbn ; it is
said not to be found in Bwila, but
brought from the Butonga. It is
given to suspected witches, &c :
if they vomit, they are declared
innocent; if they die, they are
declared guilty.
Ifamudilakuahobwa. A beetle.
This is taken and rubbed on the
gums of a child to facilitate the
cutting of the teeth.
Ifgombi. A shrub, the root of
which is used as an emetic The
root is soaked in water, and the
decoction taken internally
Meek, to be, v. i, ka bomba.
Meekly, adv. ohakubomba.
Meet, to, v. i. ku swangana^ kix
chinga ; of strangers meeting,
v» f . ku tintana ; to meet, v. /•
3eu swanganya, ka ohlnuba ;
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
317
to gather together, v, u ka bun-
gana, v.t. ka buzki^anya, ka
bimgika.
Meeting, n. 5. kabungana, ka-
Boboloka; an assembly, n, 8.
imbongano ; a meeting of people
for play, n, 2. masalo; a meeting,
class of catechumens, n, 8. /or,
imputao.
Meeting-place, n, 7. ohibon-
ganino, ohiohlTigaTilTio.
Melon, n, 3. itanga; the inside
of, ff. 4. boAiiuBo.
Melt, to, v.i^ta ensonaka, v. t.
ku ensanasha ; to melt slightly,
get soft, of a candle in the heat,
&c., zr. i ka emoka.
Mend, to, by sewing, v. /. ku sasa,
ku sasidila; by i>atching, z/./.
ku tumbika.
Menstruate, to, v,i, ku sea;
for the first time, v, i, ku sa-
luka.
Merchant, n. i. musambazlil.
Mercifully, adv, ohaluse,
Mercy, n. 9. luse.
Merciful person, n, \a. shi-
luse.
Merciless person, m. i. musu-
muniOBO*
Message, if. 8. inkombe.
Messenger, 11.1a. chinkombwa,
n, I. mutumwa.
Metal, n, 7. ohela.
Micturate, to, v, u ku suba.
Midday, ado, akalendebwe.
Middle, adv, akati, mukati.
Middle, or half-way, inengane-
nga ; e,g* we arrived in the
middle of the plain, twa shika
anenganenga ebanda.
Midnight, n. 2. mulungashiku.
MiGRATEy to, of game, v,u ku
santa.
Mildew, n, 8. invhundi.
Milk, finesh, iu 2. xnukupa ; sour,
If. 3. pL mabishi ; curds, thick
milk, If. 4. b wanda, if. 7. ohanda ;
buttermilk, if. 3. //. masuke.
Milk, to, v, /. ku kama.
MiLK-PAiLy If. 2. muleu.
Milk-way, the, if. 8. mulala-
bungn.
Millet, n, 3. //. maoheme, ma*
tuba.
Millipede, if. io. shongolwe.
Millstone, the upper, n, 8. im-
X>elwe; the lower, if. 3. ibwe,
izhiwo.
Mimic, to, v, t, ku idila.
Mince, to, to cut meat into small
pieces, ku kosaula ahitudi; to
mince very small pieces, ku ko-
saula bunengele.
Mind, intellect, n, 3. pL maaesela.
Mind, to change, v,i, ku sa-
nduka.
Mine, pass, pro, -ngu, prefixed by
gen. parts.; e,g, this thing is
mine, ohintu cheohi nchi
cbangu. There is also a series
of pronoun (see Grammar ^ chap,
v)f such as chinakwangu, it is
mine, used with all nouns of cl.
8, and so on.
Mingle, to, v, i. ku sang^ana, v, t,
ku sanganya, ku vwela ; of
cattle or people so intermingling
as to be indistinguishable, v, i. ku
dyombengana, v.t, ku dyo-
mbenganya.
Minister, missionary, if. i. for,
muluti.
Ministry, office, status of minister,
If. \,for, buluti.
Mire, if. 8. intimba.
Mirror, if. 7. chimbone.
Miss, to, an aim, v, t. ku iaha ; to
miss or pass each other on road,
V, t, ku isihanya.
Misser, one who misses in shoot-
ing, If. I. mufunka.
Mist, if. \a, ahikunku, if. 8.
ingubi.
Mistake, to, v. i, ku luba.
Mistress, wife of master, my, if.
la, namatwangangu, &c.
Mix, to, v,t, ku sanganya, ku
vwela ; to be mixed, v. i, ku
sangana ; of affairs mixed up,
entangled, v.i. ku potana, v.t,
ku potanya.
Mixed uf, adj. -sangene, -potene.
Moan, to, v. i, ku tongela.
Mock, to, v, i, ku sabula ; to
mook at, v. t, ku sabwila.
3i6
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Mealies, n, 3. //. mapopwe.
Measure, to, v.L ka eleka; to
cause to measure, to measure
with, V. t, ku elesha.
Measure, a rule, n. 7. oheleslio.
Meat, n. 4* buzane ; meat boiled
much, nice and soft, n, 8. inkanzo
(eaten by elders only).
Mediate, to, to speak on bebalf
of, V. t. ku ambidila.
Mediator, n. i. Mwambidizhi.
Medicine, n, 2. miiaaxno.
Some kinds of native medicines.
Buvhiimo. This is put around a
village and elsewhere to scare
away lions.
Ohipezhabazhike. A short shrub
the root of which is used in
leprosy and syphilis. The root is
pounded, wrapped in cloth, and
soaked. The bundle is then
applied to the sores.
KabweiifiTW-e. Leaves and twigs
of a small bush. They are
crushed, soaked in water, and
applied to the eye, when a snake
has spat into it. The immediate
result is a profuse watering of the
eye, which relieves the pain and
washes out the poison. It is also
said to be applied to snake bites.
Kaxnankamala. The leaves or
root of this shrub are chewed ; said
to be a cure in case of diarrhoea.
Mubondo. The dried head of
this fish is crushed up and mixed
with the fat of the same ; this is
said to be a cure for the disease
Chibondo.
Mubumbu. Bark of this tree
used as a cure for dysentery and
diarrhoea. The bark is soaked
in water which turns a red colour ;
the decoction, which is bitter to
taste, is either drunk or cooked
with porridge.
Mudyadya. The root of this
shrub is cooked in beer or por-
ridge ; said to stimulate the
appetite.
Hufafmna. From the root of
this tree is made a decoction
which is supposed to cause chil-
dren to grow big. The root is
crushed and soaked, and the child
is washed in the decoction and
made also to drink some of it.
Mufw-ebabachazi. The root of
this tree evidently contains a
strong narcotic. The bark is
taken and broken up, and natives
say that if these are smoked in a
pipe unconsciousness is quickly
caused, death following. This is
not an uncommon way of com-
mitting suicide.
Molulwe. Root of this tree used
as a cure for leprosy or syphilis.
Deep incisions are made in the
root, which is then soaked in
water; the decoction, which is
bitter to taste, is taken either
locally or used as a lotion.
Mtmto. The leaves of this tree
are soaked or chewed and then
placed on the head, in case of
headache.
Mutongabofo. The root of this
small shrub is soaked in water,
and the decoction is drunk three
or four da3rs in succession by
women in order to produce fer^
tility.
Mwazhi. This is used in the
ordeal by the Balumbu ; it is
said not to be found in Bwila, but
brought from the Butonga. It is
given to suspected witches, &c. :
Sf they vomit, they are declared
innocent; if they die, they are
declared guilty.
Ifamudilakuahobwa. A beetle.
This is taken and rubbed on the
gums of a child to facilitate the
cutting of the teeth.
Ifgombi. A shrub, the root of
which is used as an emetic The
root is soaked in water, and the
decoction taken internally
Meek, to be, v, i, ka bomba.
Meekly, adv. chakabomba.
Meet, to, v. i. ka swangana^ ka
chinga ; of strangers meeting,
V, f . ka tintana ; to meet, v. /•
ka swanganya, ka ohinaba;
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
317
to gather together, v, u ka bun-
gana, v.t, ka bunganyay ka
bimgika.
Meeting, n. 5. kabungana, ka-
BOboloka; an assembly, n. 8.
imbangano; a meeting of people
for play, n. 2. mosalo; a meeting,
class of catechumens, n. 8. far,
impateo.
Meeting-place, n, 7. ohibon-
ganino, ohiokinganino.
Melon, n, 3. itanga; the inside
of, M. 4. boAlIUBO.
Melt, to, v. i, ka enaanoka, v. i,
ku ensanaslia ; to melt slightly,
get soft, of a candle in the heat,
&c, V. u ka emaka.
Mend, to, by sewing, v. t, ka sasa,
ka saaidila; by patching, v./.
ka tambika.
Menstruate, to, v,u ka sea;
for the first time, v, i, ka sa-
laka.
Merchant, n. i. masambaahi.
Mercifully, adv, chaluse,
Mercy, n, 9. lose.
Merciful person, n, la. shi-
lase.
Merciless person, n, i. moaa-
momoaou
Message, n. 8. inkombe.
Messenger, n, la. chinkombwa,
n. I. matumwa.
Metal, n, 7. chela.
Micturate, to, v. i, ka saba.
Midday, <uh, akalendebwe.
Middle, adv, akati, mokati.
Middle, or half-way, inengane-
nga ; e,^, we arrived in the
middle of the plain, twa shika
anenganenga ebanda.
Midnight, n. 2, malangashika.
Migrat£| to, of game, v, i, ka
aanta.
Mildew, n. 8. invhundi.
Milk, fresh, n. 2, makapa ; sour,
n. 3. //. mabishi ; curds, thick
milk, n, 4. bwanda, n, 7. chanda ;
buttermilk, n. 3. //. xnasuke.
Milk, to, v, t, ku kama.
MiLK-PAiLy n, 2. maleo.
Milk-way, the, n, 8. molala-
bongo.
Millet, n, 3. //• znaoheme, ma-
taba.
Millipede, 11.1a. shoiigolwe.
Millstone, the upper, n, 8. im-
X>elwe; the lower, n, 3. ibwe,
izhiwo.
Mimic, to, v, t, ka idila.
Mince, to, to cut meat into small
pieces, ka kosaala ahitudi; to
mince very small pieces, ka ko-
fiaala banengele.
Mind, intellect, n, 3. pL masesela.
Mind, to change, v,i, ka sa-
ndaka.
Mine, pass, pro, -nga, prefixed by
gen. parts.; e.g, this thing is
mine, ohintu chechi nchi
cbangu. There is also a series
of pronoun (see Grammar^ chap,
v), such as chinakwangn, it is
mine, used with all nouns of cl.
8, and so on.
Mingle, to, v, i. ku sangana, v, t,
ku sanganya, ku vwela ; of
cattle or people so intermingling
as to be indistinguishable, v, i. ku
dyombengana, v,t, ku dyo-
mbenganya.
Minister, missionary, n, i. far,
muluti.
Ministry, office, status of minister,
n, j^,far. buluti.
Mire, n, 8. intimba.
Mirror, n, 7. ohimbone.
Miss, to, an aim, v. /. ku islia ; to
miss or pass each other on road,
V, t. ku ishanya.
MissER, one who misses in shoot-
ing, n. I. mufunka.
Mist, n, la, ahikunku, n, 8.
ingubi.
Mistake, to, v. i, ku luba.
Mistress, wife of master, my, n,
la, namatwangangu, &c.
Mix, to, v,t, ku sanganya, ku
vwela ; to be mixed, v, i, ku
sangana ; of affairs mixed up,
entangled, v,i, ku potana, v.t,
ku potanya.
Mixed uVyadj. -sangene, -potene.
Moan, to, v, i, ku tongela.
Mock, to, v, i, ku sabula ; to
modL at, V, t, ku sabwila.
3i8
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Moist, adj. -teke ; e.g, moist
mealies, mapopwe xnateke ; a
moist place, n, 2. mutamfu.
Moisten, to, to sprinkle water,
V. t ku sanaaila, ku sansa-
dizha.
MoisTNESS, If. 2. mushiL
Mole, n. la, shilufiikwe.
Moment, a very small space of
time, n. 6. kalndi.
Monday, n, a. for, miuhlxnbu-
luko.
Money, ». 3. pi, for, madi.
Monkey, n, la, sokwe.
Month, n, 2. mwezhi.
Names of the months. Many of
these names are given according
to the season, and do not seem to
be fixed.
January, Kulumi.
Febmary, Kuyoba.
March, Itano (» Ita ano, 'pass
here'; Koya, Pitahano).
April, Kukubwe.
May, Busangule.
June, Inkonaulamasanga, Fnfa-
la, Ohiteke-^ha-Bwila.
July, Kapukupukiiy XaBha-
lakonze.
August, Elasane^abimbi.
September, Katu, Kavhumbi
kashonto.
October, Ivbumbi ikando.
November, Mwenje, Sbiznwesije.
December, Kukashi.
Moon, n, 2. mweelii. The moon
is full, mwezhi wa shtUca. Full
moon is also called, oboiia-
nobecbe, because it rises when
the children go to sleep. Moon
in first quarter, xnwei^ mwi-
tuba. When it first appears,
mweshi u ohidi muoheohe.
Of the moon on the wane, oboHa-
nkando, because it appears when
the elders go to sleep.
MoPANi, n, 2. mwani; a mopani
forest, n, 4. bwani.
Morass, swamp, n, 4. butinti.
Morning, before sunrise, chifa-
mofumo, shimbundu. After
sunrise, chiftmio.
Morning star, n, 8. intfinda.
Morose, to be, of a man keeping
to himself gloomy, v, u ka un-
sumana, ku pokomana.
Morsel, oif bread, n. 2. xnukusu;
a small morsel, n, 6. kakusu.
Mortify, to, v, i, ka cliukiuna.
MosQuiTOy n, 3. imwe, //.
mamwo.
Moth, n. 3. ipempe.
Mother, found only connected
with pronouns, thus : —
Bama, my mother (in address.
Ma).
Banoko, thy mother.
Baina, his mother.
Banokwesu, our mother.
Banokwenu, your mother.
Banokwabo, theu: mother.
Mother-in-law, same as father-
in-law, q, V,
Mould, to, v,t, kn bnmba; to
mould bullets, v. U ku salfulxila.
Mould, for bullets, n, 8. intelo.
Mouldy, to be, as bread, v, f. ka
-vhtmcUla.
Moult, to, of fowls, v, i, ka
nyoskaiika ; of a snake, z'. f. ka
diubula.
Mound, n, 7. chilandulandu ; a
smaller, n, 7. ohilundo.
Mount, to, v,t, ku disa; to
cause, help mount, v, t, ka
dizika.
Mountain, n, 3. ilundu.
Mourn, to, v, i, ku dila; to mourn
for, V, t, ku didila.
Mourner, n, i. mudishl
Mournfully, ^dly, udv, ohabu-
8U.
Mouse, n, 1 a, ohikoswe.
Mouse-trap, n, 3. idiba.
Mouth, outer part, lips, n, a.
mulomo ; the cavity of the
mouth, n. 6. kanwa ; bill of
pelican and stork, n, 9. luyaba.
Move, to, to m. things out of the
way, V, t, ku sestQa ; to shift
things to a place near by, v, t,
ku tantninuna ; to m. one's
residence near, v.i. ku %unka,
ku panda; d^tto, far, v,i, ka
pola.
Mow, TO, V, t, ku ohesa.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
319
Much, adj. -nji-nji ; e,g, mnch
honey, bnohi bunJibuD^
Mucus, from nose, n, 3. pi, mami-
na.
Multiply, to, v,t. ku vhosha,
ku paaha.
Multitude, of people, «. a. mn-
ftmsL
Murder, to, v, /. ku yaya.
Murderer, m. i. xnuyayL
Murmur, to, v. i, ka tonga ; to
grumble, complain, v, i. ku ton-
gauka, kn aholauka.
Murmuring, n, 8. intongo.
Musical instruments : —
Budimba. Formed of a number
of wooden notes, fixed upon a
board, above a number of cala-
bashes of different sises; played
by means of a stick.
Impeta. Homofreedbuck, puku,
or pallah used as a trumpet
Tndandala. A small kind of
drum played by beating with a
stick.
Ingoma. Drum formed out of
hollowed piece of wood, and a
piece of skin stretched tightly
over one end ; played by strOung
with the hand.
Injua, insakalala. Consists of a
tin upon a stick and containing a
number of small stones or grain.;
this is used as a rattle bv travellers
when approaching a village, or in
summoning their fellows to start.
Intimbwa. Consisting of one or
two bows, upon a bowl. Used
only by balcamwale at their
initiation.
Ipopa, maumwakodi. Large
drum, played in pairs by men.
Saltunbu. A monochord across
a bow, with a resonating calabash.
Kankobele. Consists of a num-
ber of metal notes upon a small
basis of wood, and a calabash
below ; the notes are played with
the fingers.
Mwandu. A stamping-block has
a skin stretched tightly over the
top ; a reed is then nicely
smoothed, stood upon the block.
and a person witiii a wet hand rubs
his hand up and down the reed,
producing a sound.
Muscle, of arm or leg or back,
n. I a, shikamufume ; of calf of
leg, n. 2, mubondo.
Mushroom, n. ^. boa, n. lo.
kambuamboa.
Must. The nearest to this is the
verb kudi elele. Thus : — You
must do this, ITdi elele ku chita
checbi. In the negative the im-
perative is used: — You must not
do it, IT ta ku chi obita.
Mustache, n. 8. intomeno.
Mustard, m, 2, for, mustada.
l/iYf pass. pro. -ngu prefixed by gen.
parts; e.g. my slave, muaMke
wan go.
Nail, peg, n. 8. inembe ; of finger
or toe, n. 9 a. Iwala.
Naked, adv, ohintanda. He goes
naked, IT le enda obintanda.
Nakedness, n. 7. ohintanda.
Naked person, n, la. sbiohin-
tanda^
Name, n. 3. iohina. What is your
name ? Ndiweni iahina diako P
To give a name to, v.t, ku
udika.; to name, v.t. ku banda;
to call anybody by his old name,
V. t, ku ahokolola.
The latter word refers to the fact
that a person will have more than
one name during his life, first that
given in infancy, and later others.
To call a person by an old name
is reckoned a fault, and the de-
faulter is supposed to become
weak and thin by reason of it. A
man is also prohibited from sp>eak-
ing his own name. He is not
allowed to speak his wife's maiden
name, but must give her a new
one. He is also prohibited from
speaking his father's, mother's,
and sister-in-law's names. If a
man is speaking with another
having the same name as himself,
he will not address him by name
but will say, Musediangu, My
namesake. If he has a child
320
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
named after its grandfather, he
may not address it by name^ but
will say, MuBediata, My father's
namesake. And so on with other
names. See Ila-Eng. Voc, under
Musedi-.
Nap, to, to have a short sleep, v,u
ku huluBlia, ku hulola.
Nape, of neck, n. 2. mukoshi.
Narrow, to, v. i, ku shankana.
The doorway is narrow, xnudi-
angfo adi shankene.
Narrow, adj, -shankene.
Narrowness, n, 5. kuahankana.
Nation, n, 7. ohishi.
Nausea, n, 6. kasese ; a person
liable to nausea, n. 1 a, skikasese.
Nauseate, to, v,t, ku sesemya.
My heart is nauseated, Mozo
wangu wa sesema. I am nause-
ated) Nda sesemwa. The words
are applied to a feeling of nausea
caused by anything very nasty. It
is also used,y!]f., in a moral sense,
of deep disgust at an unclean
action.
Navel, n. 9. lukombo* a big,
swollen n., umbilical hernia,
ikombo. Navel-cord, ludila.
Nay, pe.
Near, adv. afwafwi, kufwafwi;
to draw near, approach, v. i. ku
sena; to draw nearer, closer, v. i,
ku senenena.
Near to, prep, afwafwi a, kufwa-
fwi ku.
Neck, n. 8. inshingo ; nape of,
n, 2. mukoshi.
Necklace, n. 8. inkonde, n. 6. pi.
tunyoni, n. 7. ohinkonta, n. 2.
munshambwa.
Need, to, to lack, v.f. ku bula;
to want, V. t. ku kapula.
Needle, n. 6. kasonde, n, 8. inye-
nda, n. 8. indongra (Lumbn).
Neighbour, n. i. My — , mwen-
Euma; //. bdnzuma. Thy — ,
mwenzhinoko ; pi, bSnzhlnoko.
His — , mwenzhina ; //. b§n-
zhina. Our — , mwenzhinok-
wesu ; //. bdnzhinokwesu.
Your — , mwenzhinokwenu ;
//. bdnzhinokwenu. Their -^^
mwenzhinokwabo ; //. bSnzhi*
nokwabo.
Nephew, niece, n, i. mwiwa.
My — f mwiwangu ; //. bewa
bangu. Thy — , mwiwako ; pi.
bewa bako. His — , mwiwf^-
we ; //. bewa bakwe, &c., &c.
Nest, of bird, n, 7. ohitanto ; of
bees in tree, n. 7. ohibango ; of
hen, n, 7. ohiftikofuko.
Net, n. 9. lutele, luyaba.
Nettle, n. 6. kalokananundwe,
//. tulotwananundwe.
Nevertheless, conj. nikubabobo.
New, adj. -pia ; e.g. a new house,
ing*anda impia.
New, to make, to renew, is ex-
pressed in the repetitive species
of the verb ; e.g. to renew a house»
rebuild it, ku zakulula.
News, n. 3. //. makani. Phr.
What 's the news ? Kwa ambwa
nzhiP
Next, saj^, which comes ; e. g. next
year, mwaka u ziza (or mwaka
tunwi).
Nice, n. 2. muohanka. The food is
nice, Tudyo tudi muohanka.
Nicely, adv. kabotu, ohamu-
ohanka.
Niggard, n. i. mutuni, mutavhu.
Night, n. \.pl. mashiku.
Nine, num. ifuka.
Nineteen, num. ikumi diomwi
o mu ntesha shidi ifuka, ikumi
odi twesha ifuka.
Ninety, num. makumi adi ifuka.
Nipple, of breast, n. 6. kanunkelo;
of gxm, n. I a. suko.
Nit, egg of louse, n. 2. muyi, //•
miyi.
No, adv. pe.
Nod, to, to assent by nodding the
head, v. i. ku gui^a.
Noise, to make a, v. i. ku yoba,
ku saba.
Noise, n. 5. kusaba, knyoba; a
great noise, n. 3. izwanga.
Noise, to abroad, v.t. ku ibu-
aha. Phr. to be noised abroad,
ku ya impuwo.
None, say, there is not a thing,
kwina ohinta«
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
321
Nonsense. Phr, He speaki non-
sense, IT la axnba o ahi te o.
Noose, n, 4. bafvriBii.
North : this is expressed ambiga-
OBsly. In the south they say,
ka xnbalSy or ka bwila, i.e,
towards the Mbala country, or
towards the Bwila country.
Nose, n. 3. inango. Bridge of,
muombombo wenango. Inside
cartilages of nose, n, 8. in-
shonya.
Nostrils, n, ^.pL manango.
Not, neg. aux. ta, ahi, Sec.
Notch, to, to cut a notch on a
stick, v,t, ku lemba; to notch
an ox's ear, v. t. ka anda.
Nothing : say, there is not a thing,
kwina chintcu What do you
want ? Nothing. IT londa nshi P
Notify, to, v. t. ku shibya.
Notoriety, n. 9. Iwengu.
Notorious person, n, la, shil-
wengfo.
Notoriously, adv. chalwengu.
Notwithstanding, conj, nikuba-
bobo. The sentence must be
rearranged ; thus, I forgive you,
notwitl^tanding your fault, TJdi
kwete kambo, nikubabobo nda
ku kwatila luse.
Nourish, to, v, t. ka lela.
November, month of, Mwesije.
Novice, n. i a. shikiya.
Now, adv. inslio, ngonao.
Number, ». z. pi. for. inumbelo.
Number, a small number of people,
n. 8. inkamo; a great number,
n. 3. //. makamo, moftinzl
Numerous, to be, v. i. ku vhola.
Nut, ground-, «. 8. inyemo;
varieties of, n. 8. impumpu, n. 8.
impute, n. 2. muninga.
Oar, paddle, n, 8. inkashi.
Oath, to take an, v. i. ku pinga.
Obediently, adv. chakutelela.
Obey, to, v, t. ku telela.
Object, to, v. i. ku kaka.
Obliterate, to, v. /. ku zhimin-
ganya.
Observe, to, to see, v.t. ku bona;
to look attentively at, v,L ku
tunamina.
Obstacle, something in path
jumped over, n. 7. ohisotokwa ;
something gone round, if. 7.
ohiahin^ilv^wa.
Obstinacy, ». 7. ohinguni.
Obstinate person, n. \a. ahi-
ohinguni.
Obstruct, to, v.t. ku ohinjila.
Obtain, to, as pay, v.i. ku hola;
to reach to, phr. ku ahika ku.
Occasion, n. 7. ohindi.
Ochre, red-, n. 7. ohishila.
OcTOBER,monthof,Ihumbiikando.
Odour, n. 2. munko; a pleasant
odour, n. 4. bwema ; body smell
of people, n. 2. mumwe ; odour
of burning meat, k. 8. //. ahilo ;
odour, scent of a snake, n. 3.
izambula; a putrid smell, n» 7.
ohikuno ; smell of people, n. 7.
chibeaha. Banyama ba tu
telela chibesha. The animals
have our scent.
Odorous, to be, v. i. ku nunkika.
Ov¥y prep, a. Come off that stool,
Ko vhwa a ohuna ohecho.
Off, to take, v. t, ku kusha ;
to take a pot off the fire, v. t. ku
iyula, ku yula.
Offend, to, v. t. ku lemasha.
Offer, to, v. t. ku tambika. To
offer for, on behalf of, v. U ku ta-
mbikizha. To offer payment
doubting -whether it will be ac-
cepted, V. t. ku somba. To offer
a gift at grave of one*s ancestors,
V. t. ku paizha.
Offering, at graves, »• 7. ohipa-
izho.
Offerings at graves are numerous.
The £ings that may be offered
are beer, maize, tobacco, im-
pemba, mukangabishi, hemp,
cloth, hoes, cups, ingonji, im-
pande.
These are given in connexion with
prayers ; to pray at graves is.ku
paila, though not altogether con-
fined to graves.
Thus when there is no rain the
324
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
people go to the grave of a chief,
put beer or grain on the gratre,
and then pray, So-and-so give us
Tain, or water; IT tu pe lesa, or,
TJ tu pe menshi. If a person is
sick the relatives go to the mu-
sonzhi about it ; he tells them
to pray, saying, the spirit wants
beer, &c., muzhixno n langa
mukuko. He may tell them to
pray ku mudiango, at the door
of the house (ju^ in»de), or an-
tumba, ue, in the house; then
they make their offering there,
and say : Munta weBn na a
pone ; t=w» komba, twa ka-
mbidila; a kadi ndlwe na a
pone, i.e. Let this person live,
we pray ; we salute by clapping,
if it be thou let him live. An-
other ^>coasioB for offering is
When a person has killed a beast
in hunting. Cutting off four
pieces, he throws one to the east,
and says : ITwe u muire mbobu
buzane : You in the east, here is
meat ; then to the north, ITwe u
mwila ; then to the south, TJwe
n mnbishi ; then to the west,
tXwe u mumbo. Having thus
offered to the spirits in all direc-
tions, he kneels and claps, and
then says : Ozona ozona n mpa
bnzane : To-morrow and to-
morrow give me meat (his way of
expressing thanks).
Offering-place, n. 7. ohipai-
dilo.
Offspring, n, i. xnwana.
Often, adv, kanji, kanjikanji.
Ogle, to, to look with side-glances,
phr, ka lang» maohenchela.
Oil, n, 2, mmigwhnba, n. 3. //.
mafata.
Oil-can, n. 8. impam.
Old, to be, of persons, v, i. ka
chembala ; of things, v. i. ku
Inmpala ; to cause to be old, v, U
ku dhembazha, ku lumpazha.
Old, very, adj, ^kulakoln.
Old age, n, 4. bupami.
Old person, an, n, i. nkoohe*
mbele; of a £eeble, old person,
n, I. mnpamL
O^.prcp. A, Bzeulu a. On ! Let
us on ! Tu yeni !
Once, adv. komwi ; at once, adv,
inzho.
One, num. -mwi; indef. adj.
-mwi. As a numeral -mwi is
prefixed by the particles o, yo,
&c. ; as an indef. adj. by u, i,
&c. ; e. g. Muntu omwi, one
person; muntu umwi, one out
of several people, one, other,
certain one.
ONEONLY,«»vf.-anwinana; e.g. one
person only, muntu omwinaoa.
Open, to, v.t. ku yalula; to o.
a door for somebody, v.t. ku
yalwila. The door is open,
Mndiango udi yalwilwe ; or,
Mudiango udi bukwazhi; or,
Udi bulaahi. To o. or lance an
abscess, v.t, ku anda; to o. a
bin, V. /. ku matola; to o. a box,
bag, v,t. ku shinkula; to o. a
book, pot, V. t. ku hununa, ku
hunukula ; to a a |;nn, v.t. ka
lakula ; to o. wide a split in any-
thing, v.i, ku lakumnna ; to o.
the mouth, z^/. ku lakama; to
40. the mouth wide in eating, v. /•
ku laba ; to a slightly, v. /. ku
mwenuna; to be open^ slightly,
v.u \xi mwenufca ; to o. the
eyes, v. t. ku tntulula:; to be o.,
of tiie eyes, v.i. ka totfoluka ;
to o. the hand, v,t. ku fkunba-
tiila ; to o. the hand widely with
fingers outspread, v. t. ku aanana ;
to be o.^ of the hand, v.i. ku
fumbatitka ; to o. up an animal,
». /. ku tidula.
Open, adj. -faunukile, -lakeme,
-lakushi. Special meanings as
above.
Opening, n. a. mudian^ro; in
fence, fi. 2. musena.
Openly, adv. ohampuwo.
Opportunity, n. 7. ohindl
Opposite. The village is opposite,
MunaM u di bwenema.
Or, na.
Orx»ain, to, to appoint, establidi a
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
323
custom, 9./. Ieu lenca; to set
apart to office^ v. /. ku kxiilrfti
Order, to, to command^ v.t. ku
layA, knlaidiUt; to pat in order,
arrange, v. t. ka bamba ; to put
straigbt, v./. ku engoaha, ku
nonoBha; to be in order, v,u
ka non<d» ; «. g, Munganda
ta mn nonokele, The house is
not in order.
Ornament, of feathers for head,
M. 8. ingsJa^
Ornament, to, v,t, ka aamika,
ka ebeaha.
Orphan, is. i. moshala.
Orphanhood, n, 4. boabala.
Other, mtUf.pro. •mwi; €,g* the
other man, mulombwana omwi.
Otherwise, adv, ukuziji, buBji.
Otter, is. iol ohibawe, //. baohi-
bawe. A yonng, small, kanga-
ohibawe.
Ought, Yon ought to do so, Udi
elele ku chita bobo.
OuR,/arf./ri9.-iau. Prefixed by gen.
parts. See chap, v 9fGrammar»
Out, to comb, v, i. ku irhwa.
Outcast, m. i. muaangadichi.
OuT-DO, to, V, t. ku baaba.
Outside, adv, anaangwa.
Outside of, prep, anaaxigwe a,
knnaengwe ku.
Over. : the adverb is expressed in
the relative species of the verb ;
§.g!. to cross over to the other
side, kn landukila mwitala
media.
Overcome, to, v. /. ku konaha ;
e,g. I cannot do, or, overcome,
this work, Shi konsha naudimo
weau. To overcome or conquer,
V, t. ku aunda.
Overflow, to, of a pot in boiling,
sr.f. ku fdftuna; of a full cup,
V, f . ku kupana ; to fill to over-
flowing, V. t, ku kupauya ; of a
basket filled to overflowing, v,u
ku mwamwatika; of a river,
V. i. ku paya ; to cause to over-
flow, V, i, ku ftifnmima.
Overhang, to, of trees overhang-
ing a path, V, t. ku kotamina ;
of a tree, &c.» cut nearly through
and likely to fall, v, i, ku nenge-
■ela.
Overspread, to, to cover over,
V, /. ku vhumba ; as an eruption
on the body, v, t, ku ftikuluka.
Overtake, to, to catch up to, pMr.
ku shika ku ; to meet, v, f, ku
awanganya.
Owl, n, la. ahiahlBblnl.
Owner, n. i. mukamwini.
Ox, n, I. musune.
Pace, fast pace, n, 9. lubilo ; to
travel a fast pace, phr. ku enaha
lubilo.
Pacify, to, an infant, v,f. ku
umbudiaha. To pacify or com-
fort an adult, v, t, ku soaha.
Pack, to, load up a canoe or
waggon, V, t, ku chiaba.
Pack, as of wild dogs, ». 4. bu-
tanga.
Pad, of leaves or grass used in
carrying a load on the head, «. 8.
inkata.
Paddle, n. 8. inkaahi.
Page, of a book, n, 3. ij>epa.
Pail, n, z^for, ibukiti.
Pain, to, v,u ku ohiaa; v,t.
ku obisha.
Pain, n, 4. bulwaahi; n, 7. ohi-
Iwaahi.
In spealcing of pains in different
parts of the body, some have
special names, but others are de-
scribed by saying, I am sick so-
and-so ; I am dead so-and-so — the
part affected being named.
To have pain in the teeth, ku sata
jkupa mono.
To have faceache, with swelling,
ku fwa lushinga.
To have pain in the head, headache,
ku fwa mwanza, ku fwa mu-
twi; ku sata mubiabe.
To have pain in stomach, ku aata
mwifo.
To have birth-pangs, ku aata mi-
shika.
To have throbbing pains, as in
abscess, or in breast, ku aii;te
mupujca; ku fwa kuvhunta;
mupukA u U vbuAta.
Y 2
324
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
To ha^ne stabbing pains in chest,
ku sata kaxnuohAxnba, or, ku
sata kabiabe.
To have pain in the side, ku fwa
ohiteko.
To have a stiff neck, ku fwa
inshingo.
To have pain in loins, ku fwa
ohibunu; ku fwa ohi-banda-
bakando. The latter name is
given to this because it is sup-
posed to be a pain for older
people ; if young people have
pains in the loins they are sup-
posed to keep silence about it.
To have pains all over the body, as
in fever, ku sata xnubidi, ku
fwa xnubidi.
Painfully, ado. ohabulwasht
Paint, n. a. mubaso.
Paint, to, v, U ku basa.
Palate, the hard palate, n, 9. ludi-
abema.
Palatable, to make, v,t. ku
ikusha, ku bosha.
These words are applied to certain
things which are put into food to
make it palatable and which have
the common name, n. 7. ohidislio ;
e.g, Ohidisho chi le kusha
inahima, The relish makes the
bread palatable. To make palat-
able by dipping into gravy, ku
bwenga.
Things employed as shidislio, are
meat, fish, milk, leaves (shishu)
of certain plants, of which the
following may be named : ipu-
bubu, impululwa, impoko,
namunkulungu, umpampa*
ohubo, ibabamu, namukalaka-
nyemo.
Palm-tree, n, 6. kalala, kanghu-
ma; fruit of, n, 8. inkomona,
iugiiuina ; the inside of a small
palm, eaten, n, 7. ohinshaSnahal.
Pant, to, v. i. ku foma ; of a dog,
V. i. ku hekema, ku zekema.
Palpitate, to, v. i. ku bidintika.
Pap, n. 7. ohele.
Paper, n, %*for. ipapelo.
Parable, ». 7. ohikoshano.
Paralysis, to have, phr. ku sumi-
nina mubidi.
Paramour, partner in adultery, of
man or woman. My — , uma-
mbangu; chimaswang^ Thy
— , mnambako ; cbiiuaswako.
His — t umambakwe ; ohima-
swakwe.
Parch, to, v,t, ku alaula ; e.g,
Mushinzo wezu wa tu alaula,
This journey parches us, i, e. We
get little or no water. To be
parched, v. i, ku alauka.
Parent, n. i. muztaAzhi. My
fellow parent (applied to those
whose children have married),
xnuzhazMina.
Parry, to, v,t, ku kobela.
Part, to, v. i, ku andana ; v, t,
ku andanya.
Part, division, piece, «. 7. ohipi-
pila.
Partition, dividing-wall in house,
tt, 2. mombe.
Partner, in initiation dance (ohi-
shimbo), kasua, mwana-kasua.
My — , mwana-kasua, or kasua
kangu. Thy — , mwana-kasua-
noko, or kasua kako. His — ,
mwana-kasuanina, or kasua
kakwe.
Pass, to, v, U ku ita ; to p. by, go
beyond, v. /. ku bala; to p. under
by stooping, vA, ku fubidika,
Ini onga, ku ongoleka ; to p. at
a distance, ku ita ansansa; to
p. from one to another, v, /. ka
tambuzhanya ; to p., of the
night, V, i, ku cha ; to p., of
rain, Bwa oha leza, wa bu ku-
mpaula.
Passionate, a passionate, irascible,
quick-tempered person, n, la.
shilutuzhi.
Patch, n, 7. chitumba; to patch,
v,t, ku tumbika.
Path, n. 8. inzhila ; a broad path
or road, n. 2, mukwakwa; the
path is roundabout, /^r. iTiwK^la
i la zhumbwela ; a game-path,
n. 2. mulenga, mutala.
Patient, a patient person, n» la.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
325
BhisweshamoBO. To be patient,
ku sweBha moao.
Patrol, to go on, v. i. ku kata.
Paw, of dog or ravenous beast, n, 7.
chituti.
Pay, to, wages, v, /. ku hoaha ; to
p. fine or fee, v. /. ka dia ; to p.
for somebody, v, /. ku didila ; to
p. a tax, v,u Yji liunbula, ku
aanga, ku tela.
Payment, of wages, n, 5. kuhola.
Peace, n, 7. chibanda.
Peacefully, a€h, chaohibanda.
To sit peaoefnlly, at ease, with
nothing to tronble yon, v, i. ku
diba.
Peck, to, as a fowl, v, /. ku so-
mona.
Pedlar, n. i. musambaBhi.
Peel, to, v, t, ku aupa. To p., as
potatoes, v.t, ku benda, ku
lenga. To p. for, v, t. ku ben-
dela. To p. carefully, v,t, ku
bendeaha. To p. o£f, as skin,
V. t, ku Bupulula ; ditto, v, f . ku
supuluka.
Peg, nail, n, 8. inembe, n, 3.
ilembe. Peg driven into the
ground, as tent-peg, ». S.inkanka.
P^, to, out a skm, phr, ku bamba
iaalo.
Peucan, n.ia. shiAindwe.
Pen, n, ^for. ipene.
Pencil, n. ^.for, ipensile.
Peninsula, n, 7. chikobo.
Penis, ». 8. intoni. Circumcised
glans-penis, n, 8. impala.
Penitence, n, 5. kubeba.
Penitent, to be, v, i. ku beba.
Penny, «. z»for. ipeni.
People, n, i .//. bantu. Our people,
our friends, relations, countrymen,
n, I.//, banaiaha.
Our countryman, &c., munaiaha,
//. banaisha; your — , muna-
muaenu, //. banamuaenu ;
their — , munamuBhabo, //. ba-
namuzhabo.
Perceive, to, v. /. ku tweluka.
Perfect, to be, complete, finished,
V. i, ku xuaninina, ku londoka.
Perfectly, adv, chamushilo ; e. g.
He has built perfectly, i, e, every
part of the work is finished, Wa
aaka ohamuahilo.
Perforate, to, v. t. ku tulaula.
Perfume, sweet smell, i». 6. ka-
auuaL
Perhaps, conj, ambwene, antela.
Perish, to, v, i, ku fwididila.
Permit, to, v. t. ku vuminina.
Perpetually, adv, omuya-miaka.
Perplex, to, v. t, ku zhinga.
Perplexed, to be, v. pass, ku
ahingwa.
Persecute, to, v. t, ku pansha.
Persecution, If. 5. kupenBha,ku-
penzhiwa.
Persevering, to bb, phr, ku awe^
aha moso.
Persevering person, n. 1 a,
XTahisweshamoao. A persistent,
persevering person is also named,
Mutanda-chilaahi ; i,e, a wild
dog.
Person, n, i. muntu.
Descriptive names of persons are
largely formed from other names
by means of the prefix Shi- ; thus :
An angry person, n, 1 a. Shin-
kole. A short-tempered person,
n, la, Shilutuzhi. A wicked
person, n. 1 a. ShimafUnai. A
kind person, n, 1 a. Shimanga.
A jealous person, n, la, Shi-
bufWi. A dumb person, n. i a,
Shatambe. The custom, manner,
way of a person, Chintu-ohintu.
A despicable kind of a person is
called Chintu.
Perspiration, n, 3. ibe.
Perspire, to, v. i, ku fwaibe.
Persuade, to, {/./.kukombeleaha.
Pervert, to, v. t, ku lengauaha.
Pestilence, n, 7. ohika.
Pestle, n, 2. munaha.
Pet, pet wife or child, n,ia, naku-
funwa.
Petticoat, n. 2. muahinahi.
Phlegm, n. 3. ikolwa ; small
quantity of, n, 6, kankolwa.
Physician, n, i, munganga, mu-
ahidiahi.
Pick, to, to choose, v. t, ku aala,
ku nomona. To p. a bone, v. t.
ku kunkutula. To p. out any-
^26
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
thing, as with pohit of a knife,
V. t, ku tongola. To p. np one
thing out of others, v. /. ku son-
tola, ku soxnpola. To p. one*g
teeth, V. U ku ditongola. To
pick, pluck, ff nit, v, t, ku ohela.
Pickaxe, «. ^>for. ipiki.
Picture, yi. 7. ohikoBhano.
Piece, of broken stick or spear, n, 7.
ohipipila. P. of broken pot, n, 7.
oiiipampaslia. A small p. of a
broken pot, n, 6. kangalukai,
kangadibwa^ A long p. or strip
of meat for drying, n, d. mu-
tendu.
Pierce, to, v, t ku tulula.
Piercer, boring-tool, n. 7. ohitu-
luzho.
Pig, bush-pig, i». i tf. kunttda, ngu-
lube, oiiulube.
Pigeon, dcnnestic, n. 8. inkwi-
dimba. Woodpigeon, 9f. 8.
inshiba ; n, 6. kalungiuushiba.
Pile, n^ 7. ohilundo. A pile of
wood cut down in forest in making
fields, yi. 3. ibibi.
Pile, to, v, t, ku lundika.
Pillow, n. 2. musakamino,
mudisakamino.
Pimple, on face> &c., n. 8. infiila.
Pin, ft. 8./?r, ipini.
Pincers, of blacksmith, nr. 9. lu-
kwaslio ; used for taking up fire,
It. 9. lumano.
Pinch, to, v, U ku shamba.
Pinnacle, put on top of house,
n, 7. ohisuwa \ n,\u, sonkoto.
Pip, n, 8. iuaeke^ Of fruit spewed
out in eating, #f. 2. miia]iliuihi»
Of pumpkin, melon, calabash, n, 8.
inungu.
Pipe, n. 8. ini\ako. A large pipe,
If. 3. iAiko. Another kind, IS^ 2»
muteile. A kind of calabash pipe^
n. 8. imbokoma. A pipe used
for smoking bhang, n, 8. inawani*
Pit, If. 6. kalambwe^ A water*
pit, i». 2. mukalo. Game-pit,
IT. 2. mulambwe.
Pitcher, n. 8. intesbo.
Pith, it. 2. moao, mushiuda. Pith
of sweet reed, spewed out, it. 7.
ohikampi.
Pitifully, ado, ohantenda. "
Pity, n, 7. intanda. To have pity
upon a person, /An ku mu fwila
intenda.
Place, n, 4. busena. A bare place.
If. 7. ohibuwe. A resting-place.
If. 7. obidiokeaheBho. A place
where one sits, abides, it. 7. ohi-
kadilo. A place of abode, n, 7.
cbishitilo. A place where clothes
are stored, wardrobe^ it. i <t. ahi-
kole. A place for prayer, 11. 7.
cbikombelo. A place for offer-
ing to ancestors, it. 7. cbipaidilo.
A place for paying a tax, if. 7.
cbilumbudilo. A place for
putting anything, cupboard, &&,
If. 7. chibikilo.
Place, to, 9. /. ka bika, ku ka-
dika, ku ahitikizlia. To place
crosswise, v, t. ku obianilkft.
Placenta, human, ». i a, aohaba-
ohembela ; of animal, it. 3.
iseshi.
Plain, n, 3. ibanda; n, 8. inyika.
Plait, to, v, t, ku luka.
Plan, stratagem, n. 6. kaAimba
fumba.
Plank, «. z*for, ipalanka. -
Plant, to, to sow, v, t. ku ahaiiga»
To plant trees, plants, &&, v. /.
ku shimpikila.
Plant, n, 7. ohisoko. A kind of
plant from which string is made,
If. 2. mukuaa. A kind of weed*
plant with small thorns^ which
cause itching, n^ 8. iiixi>e8e.
Another kind, with yellow flowera,
blade adhering seeds, 11. 3. ipu-
bubu. A cUinbing, endless plant>
If . I if. aaaambe.
Plaster, to, to fill up the inter-
stices between the poles of a hut»
the first operation in plastering,
9. /. ku mata. To finish-off by
smoothing the wall, «./« ku
•bingulvda.
Plate, if. }t*for, ipeleto.
Platform, for storing grain, nvta,
&c., If. 4. buaansa. Built in a
house for firewood, it. 9. la-
pango.
Play, to, v.U ku lobans. To
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
327
cause to plaj, help to play, play
with, V. /. ka aolNuaiya. To play
for, 9. iL ka ■otmnitia.
Plaything, diildren's, made of
glass, n. 3. TuniihiTiahi. Used in
Sie game of kupfwa, u, 8. impwi-
sho.
Plead, to, v, t. ku pumpiaha. To
p. on behalf of another, v. /. ku
pumpiahiaha.
Please, to, v. /l ka boteoha.
Pleiades, the, i». 4. buleBbi.
Plenteouslt, ado. ohabwala.
Plenty, to have, to be well paid,
to be given abundantly, v. u ka
f on kola, v. /• ka fonkosha.
Plenty, abmidance, n, 4. bwala ;
e,g. Ljist year we were dying of
&mine, this year there is plenty,
Mwakadi twa ka fwe oaala,
a kono mbwala.
Pliable, to be, v. a. ka ftinakika,
kaobeka.
Pluck, to, np by the roots, v. /. ku
nyottkola. To p. a fowl, v./.
ka nyonkaola. To p. oat the
hair on the pubes, v, t, ka xnensa.
To plock, gather frnit, v, t, ku
ehela.
Plug, of chnm, n, 8. inahlbo. The
ping or ' show * in childbirth, ft. 8.
inraa.
Pod, n, 3. ipapa.
Point, of knife, n, 8. inaonga ; of
a stick. If. 7. ohiaongoaho.
Point, to, v./. ka tondeka, ku
tendeka. To sharpen a stick to
a point, ka ehita ohiaongoaho.
To point ont, to p. towards, v, /.
ka tondekela, ka tendekela.
Poison, fish poison, n, 7. kanya-
ngalakftta (the root of a plant) ;
n. I a, tinde (roots of a plant) ;
n, 7. ehilalwe (fruit of a tree so
named); n, 2, moyu (fruit of a
tree of same name). Put on arrows,
balembe, kababa. Used in
ordeal, if. 2. mwaahi.
Poke, to, with finger, v,L ka
chonka.
Pole, n. 7. ohiaamo. A pole for
- shutting a gate, n, 2. xnaahinko ;
n, 7. chishinko. For supporting
roof in house, if. 2. moaemu.
Upright pole in wall of hut, it. 3.
iiiiilo. A cross-pole, it. 2. mu-
tantl Poles placed horizontally
for closing a gate, n. 4. bompi-
ngidi.
Policeman, n. j, for, mapoliaa;
name used as epithet, n, la. ahi-
poliaa.
Polish, to, v, /. ka takola, kabe-
kenya.
Pollard, the first product in stamp-
ing grain, n, 3. iunse. A quantity
of. If. 3. //. maunso.
Ponder, to, think over anything,
V. t, ka aesa, ka bombabamba.
Poor, to be, v. i, ka pata.
Poor person, n, i. mupoahi.
Porcupine, if. i a. obaminga-
ngwa; quill o(, if. 2. manu-
ngwe*
Porridge, if. 7. ohele; n, 3. //.
mele.
Portion, share, ». 7. ohabila An
equal portion, hali^ if. 7. obi*
pansba.
Possess, to, v. /. ku fUa. To
possess much, v, t, ku foiaba.
Possible, to be, v, i, ka ohitika.
Post, mail, n, S,/or, impoao.
Postman, it. i a. abimpoao.
Pot, n, 8. ixnbia; n, 7. <^bia. A
small pot. If. 6. kabia. Pot for
drawing water, if. 8. inteaho.
Large earthen pot, n, 8. inko-
mba ; if. 7. ohiiikomba. Newly
made, un burnt pot, if. 7. obi-
X>empa. Large ditto, it. 3.
ipempa.
Potato, sweet, it. 8. imbata. Other
kinds, n. 2. moaeaa; n, 3. //.
mankalwe.
Pouch, of stork, n, 9. latele ; it. 6.
kankolenkole. Latter word also
applied to the fold of skin on neck
of eland.
Pound, to, in mortar, v, t. ka twa.
Pound, n. %,for» impondo.
Pour, to, ». /. ka tila. To p. out,
or into, v./. ka tidila. To p.
grain on to the ground or into a
basket, v, /. ka kanuna. To p.
water, v^t. ka tontolala. To
328
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
p. water on to plants, &c, v, t,
ka tuntudwila.
Powder, n» 2. mushidi.
Power, n, 8. insana.
Powerfully, adv. ohansana.
Practise, to, v, t. Ini soleka.
Praise, to, v, t. ku tembaula, ku
banda.
Prance, to, as a warrior at a dance,
V, i, ku fiixnba.
Pray, to, v, t ku komba, ku
enzela, ku alala. To pray for,
V, U ku kombela, ku enselelela.
To ask or pray on behalf of, v» t,
ku kumbidila. A place for
prayer, n, 7. chikoxnbelelo ohi-
kombelo. See Offering.
Prayer, ». 5. kukomba; n, 9.
Iwenso.
Preach, to, v, t. ku kambauka.
To preach to, v, t. ku kambau-
kila.
Preacher, ». i. mukambau-
8hi.
Precede, to, v,u\xi solola.
Precious, to be, vA, ku sandi*
ka ; V, i, ku zuma.
Precious person, n, i. muzandi-
shi. People, Balunzandi.
Precious, adj, -zandishi.
Preciousness, n, 4. buzandl
Pregnant, to be, v, i, ku imita^
In early stages, phr, kudi kwete
katomba. A pregnant woman,
n, I. umishi, mi:S'uxnba. Said
of a p. woman, phr, ITdi shiti
bubi.
Prepare, to, v, U ku ludika, ku
lulamika. To p. or arrange, v, /.
ku bamba. To p. food, v, t, ku
lata. To p. food for somebody,
V, U ku tatila.
Prepuce, n, 3. ipapa.
Presence, ». 8. imbele ; phr, ku
bushu; e,g. They speak in the
king*8 presence, Ba la amba mu
mbele dia muoneki, or, Ku
bushu bwa inuonekL
Present, to, v, t, ku pa.
Present, n, 8. for. impasela. A
p. given to conciliate or thank,
n, 7. ohikambidizho ; n, 8.
inkambidiBho. A p. given on
close of sale, n, 4. buzhidi. A
p. taken when going to a fimeral,
». 7. obidizho. A p. given as
return for sexual intercourse, n. 7.
obipo. A p. of food given to
traveller, n. 3. iumbu. To take
a present to a chief, v, /• ku
tula.
Presently, adv. inzho. After a
time, phr. chi be obindi.
Preserve, to, v. t. ku zobola.
Press, to, v. t. ku dimba. To p.
down com into a bag or basket,
V. t. ku shindaila. To p. down
bushes with a stick, v. t. ku pe-
pula. To p. matter out of a sore,
also to see if ready for lancing,
V, t, ku chankachanka, ku
timbatixnba. To p. or crowd,
V. /• ku huxnpa. To p. oneself
into a crowd, v. t. ku diatikizha.
To keep on pressing, v.i. ku
dimbausha. To be pressed, v, u
ku dimbauka.
Pretend, to, v. i. ku chenga.
Prevaricate, to, v.t, ku zelu-
luka.
Prevent, to, to forbid, v.t. ku
kasha. To hinder, obstruct, v. t.
kucbiujila.
Pride, n. 5. kudinunika.
Print, to, v. t, ku dimbausha.
To be printed, v. u ku dimbau-
ka.
Prison, n. %.for. intelongo.
Prodigal, n. i. mutaka.
Prohibit, to, v. t. ku tonzha. To
be prohibited or tabooed, v, i, ku
tonda.
Prolific, to be, v,t. ku zhadi-
sha.
Prolific person, n. \a. shilu-
zhalo.
Promise, to, v. t. ku shoxnezha.
Proof, n. 7. cbiahimuzlio.
Prop, to, v. t. ku sakula.
Prop, n. 7. ohisakuzho.
Prophesy, to, v.t. ku shinahl-
ma.
Prophet, n. i. musala, mw&mi;
n. I. for. muproflta.
Propitiate, to, v.t. ku kambi-
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
329
Propitiation, n, 8. inkambidi-
sho.
Prosperity, i». 7. ohoba.
Prosperous person, n. la, shi-
ohoba, shioholwe.
Prosperously, ado. ohaohoba.
Prostrate, to, oneself in saluting,
v,t ku lamba. To p. oneself
before, v, /. ku lambila. To lie
prostrate, phr, ku ona buaale-
me.
Protect, to, v. t, ku kobela.
Proud, to be, v, i. ku dlnuTilka.
Prove, to, v. t, ku ahlmnKha.
Proverb, it. 6. kaahimid.
Examples of proverbs.
Ing'oxnbe intaka i takaaya mu-
chila wayo. The wasteful beast
threw away its own taiU Applied
to a squanderer.
Ka aezna znaao, he was silent with
canning. Said of a person who
does not talk.
Kombekaohe kavhwa ikmni dia
ng'ombe, a small ox produces ten
cattle. Said to indicate that one
making a loan expects interest.
Matako axnwensuma kadikwa,
a traveller is to be made to sit
down ; i, e. if you don't invite a
traveller to stay he will go on.
MuBongo wa ka Inkanka, ta ka
chi dile ; mudimbuahi owa
kwesa xnunahi wa ka chi dya.
The wise man ran on, he did not
eat it ; the fool coming behind ate
it. A rebuke to those who despise
others as fools.
8hi-lete-kambo wa ka tea inso-
ka xnwinahila, Mr. I-have-no-
fault ensnared a snake in the road.
A rebuke to those who say they
have no fault.
Xf kwata-kwata ta budididi. He
who works hard does not lack.
Provoke, to, v, /. ku lemaaha.
Public, a thing that is public, n. 7.
chdbelabensn.
Publicly, euh. champuwo.
Puff out, to, as a snake, v, i, ku
kombola.
Puff-adder, n, la. ohipile.
Pull, to, v. /. ku kwela. To p.
towards, v, i, ku kwelela. To
p. hard, v, t ku kweleaha. To
p. out, V, t, ku somoxia. To p.
sticks out of the fire, v, t, ku so-
•olola. To p. out a tooth, v. t,
ku kula. To p. out a thorn, phr,
ku bangula bwiya. To p. grass
ottt of a thatch, v, t, ku popo-
mona, ku somonoxia. To p., of
a scab, phr, ku papula 1 Tilth am o.
To p. feathers out of a bird, v, /.
ku nyonkaola. To p. up a stick
planted in the ground, v./. ku
shula.
Pumpkin, n. 3. ipushi.
Varieties : n, 2. muugu ; n, 8.
impungu ; n, 1 a, kampande ;
n. 2. muntemba.
Punish, to, to beat, v, t, ku uma ;
V, Lfor, ku puniaha.
Punishment, n, 5. kfima, kumwa.
n, %,for, impunisho.
Pupil, n, 1. mwiyiwa; if. lo.
ahikiya. Of eye, «. 8. imbone.
Purchase, to, v, t, ku ula.
Purchaser, ». i. mudl
Pure, to be, v, i, ku njoloma.
Purge, to, of bowels, v, /. ku su-
luaha.
Purify, to, v, t, ku njolomya.
Purity, n, 5. kunjoloma.
Purposely, adv, chaxni, muye ;
e.g. He came for the purpose of
bating us, Wa shimpikila ku tu
uma.
Pursue, to, to go after, v,t, ku
chidila.
Pus, ». 4. bushila.
Push, to, v. /. ku tonka. To p.
towards, v, /. ku tonkela. To p.
hard, v, /. ku tonkesha. To p.
into a sheath, v. /. ku soma. To
p. one when there b no room,
V, /. ku sunda. To p. mutually
when there is no room, v. /. ku
sundaua. To p. sticks into a
fire, V, t. ku aesela.
Put, to, v, t, ku bika. To p. on
hat or shoes, v, /. ku sama.
To p. away a wife, v, /. ku tanda,
ku leka. To p. thingsinto a box,
330
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
V. t, Yxx. longela. To p. down, as
a load, V, i. ku tula. To p. aside,
V. t leu pwika. To p. a thing on
the top of another, v, t, ku ahi-
dika. To p. an affair on the top
of another, v,t, ku tikila; e,g.
They put affairs upon him, Ba mu
tikila makani.
Putrid, to be, v» < . ku bodisliay
ku ohukuma. *
Quail, n, i a. kanchele.
Quake, to, v, u ku zhangama, ku
tutuxna.
Quarrel, n. 7. ohikani.
Quarrel, to, phr, ku chita ohi-
kani ; v, 1. ku zhingana, ku zu-
manana.
Quarrelsome person, ». i a, shi-
ohikani, shikaminomino.
Quarter, direction, n, 9. Iwiya.
Quench, to, a fire, v,t, ku zhi-
xna.
Question, to, v, u ku buzha.
Quick, to be, v, i, ku fwumba,
ku fWaxnbaua.
Quickly, <id&. obakufwamba.
Quiet, to be, v. i, ku diinza, ku
tontola, ku otobala.
Quieten, to, v. t ku tontozha,
ku otobazha, ku inzlka. To q.
a child by rodcing it in the arms,
V, L ku umbudizha.
Quietness, calm, n, 9. ludiinzo.
Quill, of porcupine, ». 3. mu-
nungwe.
Rabbit, rock-, ». i a. ohibila.
Rafter. See House.
Rag, n. 6. kazapaushi ; n. 7. ohi-
zapauahi.
Rage, n, 4. bukadi.
Raid, to, v, /. ku fiiinpa.
Raider, n, i. muftunpi.
Railroad, n, 8. injanji.
Railway, ». *i*for, ohitemela.
Rain, ». 8. imvula ; n, 1 a. leza.
Note. — The real Ila word is leza,
but as this is the same as the name
for God, it seems better to use
imvula. This is the word in
Tonga, and is quite understood by
the Baila. Indeed, it is, in one
form or another, a very widely
prevalent^ Bantu word for rain.
The other languages which have
Iieza for God all have imvula
(or some modification of it) for
rain. Thus: Tonga, imvula;
Bemba, infula ; Luba (Congo),
nfUla ; Luba, ixnTura ; Bisa,
infula; Karanga,ivuTa; Mbnnda,
nfera ; Lamba, imftila ; Sodi,
ingftila. In the following phrases
the word imvula may be substi-
tuted for Iieza if this suggestion
is adopted. See the. note on
God.
A continuous heavy rain, n. 6. ka-
ohoboohobo. A continuous rain,
n, a. muyoba. A slight shower,
pkr. Iieza wa fwilaila. A driz-
zling rain, n, 3. ifofU. To make
rain,/Ar. ku puka leza.
Rain, to, pkr, ku wa imvula^ ku
wa leza.
Rainbow, />fcr. buta bwa Iieza;
ff. 8. inkongolo.
Rainbush, n. I a, kamwaya.
Rainy season, n. 3. pi, mainza.
Raise, to, v. t, ku katula. To r.
up high, V. /. ku katulisha. To
r. up one lying down, v.t, ku
busha. To r. a price, to demand
a high price, v, /• ku kankatila.
To r., elevate, promote, v*t, ku
sumpula, ku sumpuzha.
Ram, n, i a. shembwe.
Ram, to, earth into a hole, v, /. ku
shindaila.
Ramble, to, to walk abont, 9. i.
ku endenda. To r. in speech or
in delirium, v,u'kxL tamauka.
Ramrod, n, 2. musesezho, mu-
ndeke.
Ransom, to, v, t. ku nununa.
Rap, to, with knuckles, phr, kn
uma ohinkonya.
Rape, n, 5. kuvbumokila. To
commit rape, v. t. ku vhumokila.
Rapidly, to do, v, /. ku aanaaula.
The word is also applied to a per-
son settling without delay any
matter referred to him, as a judge
a case.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
331
Rapidly, ado, ohAkaf^amlw.
Rash, 00 body, «. 7. ohilos.
Rat, If. I o* shikoswa ; watcr-rmt.
If. I. mukoswe.
Rattle, to, phr. ka imiA injua,
kn dUha i^lua.
Rattle, carried by camera, if. 8.
iztjtia, inaakalala.
Ravener, a person who eats raven-
onsly. If. I a. shibutambo.
The word is also applied to a man
who sticks keenly to his work and
won't leave it
Ravenously, ado, ohabutambo.
Ravenousness, If. 4. butambo.
The lions are ravenons, Bashn-
i&bwa mbutainbo*
Ravish, to, v, t, ka biaha.
Raw, oq^'. -biahL
Ray, of son, if. a. mnxiBha.
Razor, if. 9. Inmo.
Reach, to, v, t. kn uTifkila. To
reach as high as possible, standing
on tiptoe and stretching ont the
hand, v, i, ku TiaTiftTniTia.
Read, to, v, t, ku bala.
Ready, to be, v. i. kn ItiUuna, ku
dibakanya. Are you ready?
8a mwa dibakanya ?
Real. adj. -1x11-1x11. A real or true
saying, kambo kenlkenl. A
really good man, mtmtu mu-
botu xnwixilmwlxd.
Reap, to, v» t. ku konka.
Reaper, if. i. xnukoxikl.
Rear, to, to cause to grow, v, /.
ku kusha.
Reason, if. 6. kambo. For this
reason, Kambo kako. That is
the reason, TSTka kako kambo,
or, Nku kako. That is not the
reason, Inko kako.
Rebel, to, to be self-willed, obsti-
nate, V. f. ku papa, ku pa-
pala.
Rebuke, to, kindly, v. t, ku tapa-
tila ; with anger, v, /. ku kala-
dila.
Recarve, to, V, t. ku besulula.
To be recarved, v, f . ku beau-
luka.
Receive, to, v.U ku tambula.
To r. wages, food, v, t, ku hola.
To r. on behalf of, v* /. ku ho-
dila.
Receptacle, of grass, in which is
tied up meat,&c., if. 7. chumpa;
for &t, If. 7. Impau, insaahl.
Recline, to, to lean against, v. /.
ku aamlna. To recline sideways,
V. i. ku aendalala.
Recognize, to, v,t, ku shlmpl-
kila; e.g. I recognize you now,
I had forgotten, If da ku ahlmpi-
kila Ixiabo, nda luba luta-
nahl.
Recollect, to, v.t. ku ahlba-
luka.
Reconcile, to, v,t. ku shoke-
lanya, ku yanyanya. To be
reconciled, v. 1. ku shokelana,
kuyanana.
Rectify, to, v.t, ku bosha, ku
lulamika.
Red, to be, v, i. ku aublla. To
be very red, v, i. ku subldlaha.
Red clay, if. 7. cblshlla.
Redden, to, v. t, ku sublaha.
Redeem, to, v, /. ku nununa.
Redeemer, n. 1. Mununuxil.
Redemption, if. 5. kunununa.
Reed, if. 9 a. lubu. A large r.,
n, 3. Ibu ; a small r., if. 6. kabu.
A young tender r., if. 8. inte-
ngantenga. The tough rind of
r., If. 8. Inevhwa-nevhwa.
Reform, to, to tum from bad to
good, V. f. ku sanduka ; pkr,
ku ba xnuntu.
Refrain, to, v.t, ku lekesha.
Refresh, to, v. t. ku katulula, ku
katulusba. To be refreshed, v. i,
ku katuluka.
Refreshed, adj. -katulushl.
Refuge, if. 3. //. matilo.
Refuse, to, v. t. ku kaka. To r.,
to shake the head in refusing, v, i.
kuknnauka.
Refuse, n. 7. //. bikulukulu.
Regeneration, if. 9. luzbalutulo.
Rejoice, to, v. i. ku tangala. To
rejoice with another in his good
fortune, ku sekelela. To rejoice
with another by taking presents
to show your joy, ku sekele-
sha.
332
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Relation.
To show the exact expressions to be used in calling one's relations the
following table is provided, representing an actual Ila family. Names
printed in italics indicate females ; others are of males :—
Mwanabeni (i)
(marries four wives)
Mwanga (2) Masele (3)
(no children)
Kaiyobe (6) Shamatanga (7)
m. Kambwe (10) m. Kalubi (13)
Nachishimbo (4) Namucheme (5)
I
Mongona (12) Nachiloba (14)
(i) will address his wives by name,
or as *■ Mwinangu *. His wives
will address him as Mulumi
angu, but they may not speak
his name except before the chief.
Either of the wives addressing the
other will say, Mukaahima.
Mwanga is the head wife, nabu-
kando; Namucheme the nsbu-
shonto.
(6) (7) (8) (9), speaking to their
father, will say Ta; they must not
say his name.
(i), speaking to (6) or (8), will say
Mwanangu, or musediama.
The latter name really indicates
that the children were named after
their grandmother, i.e, their
father's mother; but it may be
used in a wider sense, even though
the children are not so named, as
a term of honour.
(3), speaking to (7) or (9), will say
mwanangu or mosediata.
(7), speaking to (6), will say Mu-
ohizhi wangu, or mukando wa-
ngu.
(6), speaking to (7), will say mu-
chizhi wangu, or mwanioha-
ngu ; she must not say his name.
(6) will call (8) mukwesu, or
Yaya ; other people speaking to
(6) about (8) will refer to her as
Miinyoko.
(8), speaking to (6), will also say
mukwesu or yaya.
(7), speaking to (8), or (8) to (7),
will also say muchizhi wangu.
Kaskiashia (8) Mungonze (9)
(9) is older than (7), he will there-
fore call him mwaniohangu,
while (7) will call (9) mukando
wangu.
Each of the wives of Mwanabeni
will be addressed as Ma by the
children, even if they are not her
own.
(10) will speak to (i) as mukwa-
ngu, ( I ) to (10) as mukwe wangu
or mukwangu.
(6) will call her mother-in-law
Ma.
(12) will call (i) Nkaka, or she
may speak his name,
(i) will call (12) or (14) m.u8u-
kuzhangu.
(12) will call (3) Nkaka» or may
speak to her by name.
(3) will call (12) or (14) muzuku-
zliangu.
(12) will call (7) aohisha; she
may not say his name.
(7) will call (12) mwi wangu.
(12) will call (8) Ma, and may not
speak her name.
(6) will call (13) mulamuy and
vice versa.
(10) will call (7) mulamu, and
vice versa.
(13) will call (9) bazhibebesn,
and vice versa.
Release, to, to untie, v./. ku
angulula.
Relent, to, to change the mind,
V, I. ku sanduka.
Reliable, to be, v, i, ku shomeka.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
333
Relieve, to, to r. each other, as
men do in carrying a machila, v. i,
kn baikana.
Relieve, to, to lighten a bnrden,
V. t. ku ubya. To take a man's
burden from him, v, /. ku innna,
ku ubnlula.
Religion, n. 8. inkombelo.
Religious person, ». io. ahil-
wenso, ahinkombelo.
Relinquish, to, v, /. ku leka.
Relish, something to make food
palatable, n, 7. ohidiabo.
Rely, to, v.t, ka shoma; e,g.
Yon mnst not rely upon ns, Mu
ta ku tu shoma.
Remade, to be, z^.il ku chito-
hika.
Remain, to, v. i, kn ahala.
Remake, to, v. t. ku chitulula.
Remember, to, v,t. ku shinga-
8hil% ku ahibaluka.
Remind, to, v. /. ku ahibaluaha.
Remnant, what is left over, n, 8.
intapintapi.
Remorse, ». 5. kuvhwamoao.
Remorse, to suffer, v,i, ku
▼hwa moBO.
Remove, to, to take ont of the way,
V, /. ku seanla; v. i. ku se-
Rend, to, v. t. ku sapula.
Renew, to, an operation or conver-
sation or subject, after an inter-
mption, V. t. ku sunaukila.
Rent, ». 7. chipolo.
Repay, to, a loan, ^kr, ku shola
muta.
Repeat, to, v. t, ku lolola.
Repeatedly, €uiv, odimwi odi-
mwi, chalnilolola.
Repellent person, n. i . mnlema.
Repent, to, v. i. ku beba. To r.
on account of, v, u ku bebela.
To cause to repent, v, t. ku be-
besha.
Repentance, i». 5. kubeba ; n, 9.
lubebo.
Reply, to, to a question, v, t, ku
ingrula. To a call, v. t. ku taba.
Reptile. See Snake.
Rescue, to, v,t, ku Aitula. To
be rescued, v, u ku ftituka.
Rescued, adj, -ftituahi.
Rescuer, n, i. muftitudL One
who is rescued, ». i. muf^toahi.
Resemble, to, v, /. ku koaha, ku
koahana. To cause to resemble,
V. t. ku koahanya.
Resow, to, V, /. ku ahangulula.
Respect, to, v, /. ku lemeka.
Respectfully, adv, ohakule-
meka.
Respiration, n. 5. kuzoaa.
Rest, to, v, i, ku diokeaha. To
cause or allow to rest, v. /. ku
okeaha. To be rested, refreshed,
V, i, ku katuluka. To cease
work, and rest, in master's absence,
V, i. ku diaanta. Of one thing
resting upon another, v. i. ku
kambania.
Restore, to, v. /. ku bweaha, ku
shola.
Restrain, to, v.t. ku ahinkila,
ku kasha, ku leaha ku kakaaha.
Retract, to, anything said, v.L
ku ambulula. To be retracted,
unsaid, v, i, ku ambuluka.
Retreat, to, pkr. ku ahokela
munshL
Return, to, v, i, ku ahoka, ku
bwela ; z/. /. ku ahola, ku bwe*
aha.
Reveal, to, to make known, v. /.
ku ahibya.
Revere, to, v. t. ku lemekesha.
Reverse, to, v. U ku sandumuna.
Revert, to, to a subject under dis-
cussion after interruption, v, u ku
sunsukila.
Revile, to, v» /. ku tuka,ku cho-
kola.
Revilings, n, 3. //. matushi.
Revive, to, after a fit, z;. »1 ku shi-
shimuka ; z/. /. ku shishimuna,
ku shishimusha.
Revolve, to, v.t, ku BhinguLu-
sha ; V. i, ku ahinguluka.
Reward, to, v, /. ku saula.
Rhinoceros, n. i a, shempela.
Rib, n. 9. luvwabuti.
Rich, to be, v, i, ku vhuba, ku
fiia. To be very rich, to possess
much, V, /. ku ftdsha. To enrich,
V, t. ku vhubya.
334
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Riches, n. 3. //. mabono.
Riddle, n, 6. kalabi. To ask a
riddle, z^./.lnilabika. To answer
correctly a riddle, v. /. ka Isbu-
kulula.
The Baila have a great number of
riddles. Two are given below
as examples. They mostly appear
rather £ur-fetched to a European.
Examples of riddles,
Ka-chea-kalombwana ka cbenga
bakando, A very small boy de-
ceived the elders. Ans, Ingfa-
mpu, A stump in the path over
which you stumble.
Ifda wala mwitala» I threw some-
thing to the other side. Ans,
Menso, Eyes.
Ride, to, v. /. ku disa.
Ridicule, to, to laugh at, v, /. ka
seka.
Right, to be, phr. kudi luleme.
Right hand, if. 9. ludio; n, 7.
ohidio.
Right, to the, adv, ku ludio.
Righteous, to be, v. i. ku lulanuk
Righteousness, n, 5. kululama.
Rind, m. 3. ipspa.
Rinderpest, n, in. kankolG-
mwens.
Ring, for finger, if. 8. inwenwe.
Rip, to, v. t, ku andula.
Ripe, to be, v, i, ku biowa.
Ripen, to, v. t ku bizuaba.
Rise, to, v. L ku buka. To r, to
surface as fish, v. i. ku bwa. As
food in cooking, v, i. ku aelauka.
To c from a sitting position, v, u
ku ahimoka. To r. as dust or
smoke, v. i. ku fuka. To r., of
the sun, v, i, ku paaa, ku vhwa.
To r. up for something, v, /. ku
bukila.
River, if. a. muloaga; if. 9.
Iwenge.
River-bank, n, 2, muma.
Rivulet, if. 6. kalonira.
Road, h. a. mukwakwa. See
Path.
Roam, to, v, i, ku endenda.
Roan antelope, if. 1 a. chilumbu-
lumbu.
Roar, to, v. i. ku dila.
Roast, to, v. t, ku aooha.
Rob, to, v. i. ku iba (kwiba).
Robber, if. i. muteu.
Rock, a big, hard stone, ft, 2.
mwfila.
Rock, to, as a canoe, v, u ku ley-
auka.
Rod, fishing, if. 6. kaLobo. This
is the name properly of the hook,
but it is also applied to the whole
outfit — stick, hue, and hook.
Roe, of fish, if. 4. buyi.
Rogue, if. i a, shimaAinBi.
Roll, to, over and over, as in sick-
ness, V. f . ku alabana, ku alauka.
To r. into a ball, v, /. ku bumba-
bumba, ku pekesa. To r. as a
horse, v, i. ku alumuka. To r.
along as a log, v* t. ku kunku-
luka; 2/. /. ku kunkulnsha. To
r. the eyes about, v, U ku bilaola.
To r. up as a bed, v, /. ku vhunga.
To r. over and over, v, U ku ala-
banya.
Roof, if. 9. luludL
Room, n, 6. kanda; or space, if. 4.
busena.
Root, if. a. musanda; a kind of
edible r., if. 4. buaala.
Root up, to, v, t, ku abula, ku
nyonkola.
Rot, to, v. i, ku bola ; v* /. ]<|i
boalia, ku boleka.
Rotten, adj, -boahl.
Rough, to be, phr, kudi masu^
nsunya.
Roughness, n, 3. //. masumnrnya.
Round, to be, v, u ku bumbuBka-
na; e.g. This fruit is round,
Muchelo wezu udi bumbu-
nkene. To make round, 9. /. ku
bumbunkanya. To cut round
a hide in making reims, v. /, ku
neugulula.
Roundabout, to be, v, i, ku ahu-
mbwela^
Roundness, n, 5. kubumbu-
nkana.
Rub, to, with pressure, as in embro-
cating, V, t, ku pikisa. To r. or
ffcratdi when itching, v,t, ku
kw^ya. To x, hands togethisr,
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
335
v.L ku didioiMiiito]% kn disho*
bashoba, ka dliMwila. To r. so
as to pol^ v.t. ka tiiobak To
r. a skin widi a stooe or bone, r. /.
ka mwaila. To i. a sore eye,
v,u ka diahokota. To r. or
cha§e, V. /. ka kombola, ka ka-
nkola.
Rubbish, h. 7.fafkafaikala; bits of
rubbish, «. 5. /f. manta-aiaitta.
RuBBisH-HXAP, If. 7. ohitemtala.
Rule, -Biraiairr, «. 7. eheleaho.
Rule, to, to gofcm, v.t, ka
mdala. To cause to, or assist
to mle, «. /. ka andaaha.
Ruler, n, i . mwandeahl
Run, to, v.i, ka lokaaka, ka
tiiana. To r. towards, v. t. ka
faikankfla, ka tianina. To r.
baid, of animali» v. i, ka dizna.
To r. away, absooad, v, i. ka lo-
boka. To r. away in iear when
one's fftult is found ont, z/. &. ka
othenjela.
Rush, to, to rash out of a place,
9. i. ka palamoka.
Rust, n, la. aenke.
Rut, n. a. mwimbididi.
Sabbath, n.ia. Babata.
Sable antelope, ik. la. kafii-
mbwi.
Saol, If. 8. inkomo; if. 3. for.
Sacrament, Lord's Sapper, Mula-
dilo wa Mwaml
Sacred, to iiold, v,i. kaaadila.
Tke Baila, at thie beg:inning of the
rains, set apart a day upon which
tiiey do no work, believing that if
tbey work there will be no lain.
Of this they say, Ma ta ku yasa
Iieaa, Yon must not spear Leza.
They call this action, ka tonda
Iieaa. This seems to be the only
case t>f their holding any day
sacred.
Sacrifice, offered to tiie ancestral
^nritSy n. 7. ehipaiaho.
Sacrifice, to, v, u ka xiaiaha.
See Offering.
Sad, to be, v.i. ka oaa.
Saddle, if. i,for, iaale.
Sadness, a. 4. baso.
Safe, to be, to be rescued, v. i, ka
ftitoka. To be kept, preserred,
V. i. ka aoboka.
Sail, to, along as a bird, v. <• ka
foma.
Sale, if. 4. bokwebo.
Saliva, n, 3. //. mata.
Salt, n. a. mwino ; small quantity
of, n, 6. //. twino.
Salt-pan, Salt-pool, n, 3. iaho ;
small ditto, if. 6. kaaho; n, 7.
chikula.
Salute, to, v,t, ka anaha. To
s. on behalf of another, v. /. ka
anahiaha. To s. by clapping, v. /.
ka kambidila. A way, manner
of thus saluting, n, 7. ohikambi-
dilo.
Salvation, n, 9. luf^tuko.
Same. To express this use the adj.
-mwi. Thus: Kohi chinta
chomwi. It is one thing; or the
same thing.
Sanctify, to, to separate for, v, t,
ka aadila. To purify, «./. ka
aweaha, ka aalaaha.
Sand, n, 3. iaanga.
Sandal, if. 8. impato, indiasho,
inkwabilo.
Satiate, to, v, /..ka ikaaha.
Satiated, to be, v, i, ka ikata ;
with woxlc, sayings, &&, v, i, ka
chimwa.
Satisfied, to be, by hearing news,
evidence, 8cc,^r, ka ikata ma-
kani, v. pass, ka lamwa ; to satisfy
in this manner,kuikaBba makani^
kulamya.
Saturday, if. S,for. Imbelekelo.
Save, to, to preserve, keep, v, t, ka
aobola ; to rescue, deliver, v, t,
kaftittda.
Saviour, one who preserves, keeps,
if. I. moBObodi; one who de-
livers, rescues, n, i. mufdtudi.
Savour, to lose, v, i, ka loluka,
kasampuka.
Saw, n, %.for. insaha.
Say, to, v, t, ka ti, ka amba.
Scab, if. 8. inahamo ; to pull off»
pkr. ka papula inahamo.
Scaffold, if. 4. boaanaai
33^
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Scale, of fish, n, 9. lukanda.
Scald, to, v, t, Ini tenta. To scald
slightly, 77. /. Ini babula.
Scamp, n, i a, shimaftinzi.
Scar, n, 2. mukofii.
Scare, to, to frighten, v,t ku
tizha. To scare birds from grain,
v,t, ku kwa. To s. game, ku
konga.
Scarify, to, v, /. ku lexnba.
Scatter, to, v, t. ku mwaya. To
be scattered, v, i. ku mwaika.
Scent. See Odour.
Sceptic, disbeliever, ». i. mudi-
mbuludi.
Scholar, n» i. mwiyiwa, n, 1 a.
shikiya.
Scissors, n, 7. obikosozlio.
Scold, to, to rebuke, v, t ku ta-
patila.
Scoop, to, to hollow out in carving,
v,t, ku kolola. To scoop out
earth from a hole, v, t kuilapulula.
Scorch, to, v, i, ku babuka ; v, t
ku babula.
ScoRNER, n, 1. musampauzhi.
Scorpion, n, 6. kapididi, kabanzL
Scoundrel, n, i a, shimafunzi.
Scrape, to, v, t, ku pala, ku pala-
pala. To scrape meat off a bone,
V, t ku kunkutida.
Scratch, to, v.t, ku kwalida.
To s. up ground, v. t, ku kaxnba,
ku kambaula. To s. as fowls,
V. t, ku yaxiga, ku fukumuna.
To s. oneself^ v, t, ku kwanya.
To s. the head, v. /. ku shishina.
Screw, to, to screw up, v, t ku
kwika.
Scream, to, v. i, ku dila ; as
women in saluting, zf, t. ku ulu^
bwizba.
Screen, for keeping off wind, n. 7,
ohishitidizlio.
Screen, to, oneself from the wind,
V. /. ku dishitidila muwo.
Scribe, n. i. mungwadi.
Scum, n, 3. lovu.
Sea, n, g,/or. luatele.
Seam, n. 2. xnuluko.
Search, to, v, /. ku zhinzhilika.
Seasons, the : —
Spring, n. 7. Chidimo.
Summer, rainy season, n, 3. pi.
Mainza.
Autunm, n» 5. Kunkosoko.
Winter, n, a.'Mweto.
Seclude, to, to shut against, v, U
ku yadila.
Second, »«<;//. -bidi. The second
day, bushlku bwabidi.
Secondly, adv, kobili.
Secret, n, 7. chakumbsdi
Secretary bird, n, i. mukobe-
lanzoka \ n, \a, nakansakwe.
Secrete. See Hide.
Secretly, to do anything secretly,
phr^ ku chita kunso, or ku-
mbadl
Seduce, to, v, t, ku lengauzha.
See, to, v, t, ku bona. To s. clearly,
V, U ku bonesba. To s. each
other, V, U ku bonana. To s. for,
after, v, U ku bonena. To s.
indistinctly, v,t» ku mwininsi-
zha.
Seed, n, 8. imbuto. Small s., as
tobacco, n, 8. insangru. Grass s.,
n, 8. insoki. Of melon, &c., ». 3.
inungu. S. already sown, ». 3.
ikanko,//. xnakanko. A kind of
scarlet and black s. used in play,
n. I a, namuohipwiohipwi.
Seek, to, v, t. ku zhinzhilika, ku
langaida. To look for, want, v, /.
ku langa, ku kapula, ku londa.
Seize, to, v, i. ku kwata. To seize
or take away from a person, v. /.
ku nanga.
Select, to, v, t, ku sala, ku no"
mona. To select for oneself, v, t,
ku disadila.
Self. The refi. pro, di- prefixed
to verbs often gives the idea of
'self; e,g, I love myself, ITds
difuna.
The word mwini is also used, as
in the following : —
Ndime mwini : It is I, my own
self.
Ndime ndi mwini : It is I, I am
myself; i. e. It is my own affair.
Ifdiwe u mwini : It is thy own
self; /. e. It is thy affair.
Self-abasement, n» 5. kudibo-
naha.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
337
Self-confidence, n, 5. kudi-
shoma.
Self-conceit, h, 5. kudinimiks.
Self-love, n. 5. kudiftma.
Selfish, to be, phr, kadi mutoni,
kadi xntinya.
Selfish person, n, i. mntoni,
moiiya.
Sell, to, v. /. ka oshs, ka Bamba-
zha, ka tenga.
Seller, n. i . mashi, moaambaBhl
Semen, n. 4. bwenie, bwensens*.
Send, to, v. t, ka tama. To send
to or for, V. /. ka tomina.
Sentry, n, i. xnaBmnbl
Separate, to, v. i. ka ^T^«^^^■Tn^. ;
V, t, ka andanya.
September, month of, kata.
Sergeant, n. 1 a. for, oBejanl
Servant, if. i. matwanga.
Serve, to, phr. ka manina omwi
midimo; zr./.y2T.kabelekela.
Set, to, of the son, v. i, ka ibila.
To s. or settle or become clear, of
dirty water, v,i. ka batamina.
To s. or place, v. t ka blka, ka
kadika, ka shitikisha. To s.
pot on fire, v, t, ka shimpika.
To s. in order, v, t, ka bamba.
Settle, to, v.i. ka kala. To
settle a dispute, v, t ka kosola.
Seven, num, ohiloba.
Seventeen, num. ikomi diomwi
o mn ntesha shidi ohiloba.
Seventy, tmrn, makomi adi ohi-
loba.
Sew, to, v, L ka sasa.
Sex: Of what sex is this child?
Mwana nshi weza ?
Shade, if. 7. ohingvhole. To
shade eyes with hand, phr» ka
IftTigila ohishinshi.
Shaft, of mine, if. 8. impishi ; of
spear, if. 9. losako.
Shake, to, v.i. ka tapala, ka
zhangama. To s. anything, v, /.
ka tapasha. To s. a cloth, v, /.
ka sankamana. To s. up in
mixing, v, t. ka zonganya. To
be shaky, v, i, ku zongana. To
s. a tail, V, /. ka pasha. To s.,
jolt, as man riding ox, v. i, ka
sompaoka. The ox shakes him
up, Mosone wa ma snmpaola.
To 8. a spear in trying it, or in
taking aim, v, /. ka sakozna.
Shallow, adj. -fwafwi; e g. It is
a shallow river, Malonga ma-
fwafWL It is shallow here, Ano
nga^T'afwi.
Sham, to, v, /. ka ohenga.
Sham, n, 3. //. makaohilo.
Shame, if. 8. insoni.
Shamefully, €ulv, chansonL
Shape, to, by moulding, v,t, ka
bamba.
Share, to, z^. /. ka aba. To s.
among, z/. /. ka abila. To s.
among each other, v. t, ka abi-
lana. To cause to s. among each
other, V, t. ku abizhaoa.
Share, if. 7. ohabilo.
Sharp, to be, v. i, ka lampa.
Sharp, adj. -kadi.
Sharpen, to, v, t. ka lampya. To
sharpen by grinding, v,i, ka
kwanga.
Shave, to, v. t ka kulola, ka
sambala. A shaved head, if. 9.
lunkula. A person with all his
head shaved, if. i a, shilankala.
She, pers. pro.^ same as He. See
chap. V of Grammar,
Sheath, of knife, if. 7. ohilalo ; of
mealies, n. 3. ikwelele.
Sheathe, to, v, /. ka soma.
Shed, to : of trees shedding leaves,
V. f . ka kankamoka.
Shed, adj, -kankumashi.
Sheep, if. 8. imbelele.
Shelf, if. 7. ohilala. Really palm-
tree leaf or branch, used as a
shelf.
Shell, if. 3. ipapa. Shell used as
an ornament, if. 8. impande. An
imitation impande, made of
earthenware or something, if. i a.
shamende ; //. bashamende. A
kind of mollusc, if. 9. Iwidi ; //.
injidi.
Shelter, made of tree boughs, n, 7.
ohilao. A refuge, if. 3. //. ma-
tilo.
Shepherd, herdsman, if. i. mwe-
mbezhi.
Shield, if. 8. intobo.
338
ENGLISH-ILA. VOCABULARY
Shield, to, v. t, ka kobela. To
shield another, v, t, ku kobelela.
Shift, to, v,t, ku aesnls, ku
tantumuns ; v, u ku sesuka.
Shin, n. 2. mwindi.
Shine, to, v, u ku beka, ku be-
k6iia, ku bek^ma. To shine up,
v,t, ku bekenya. As a glow-
worm, also of the early sun, v, u
ku mweka. The fierce shining
of the sun at midday, n, a. mute-
ngaauba. To shine intermit-
tently, v. i, ku b6kab6ka.
Ship, a very large canoe, n, i a. na-
dinkwsnzs, namusholonia.
Shirt, if. i (i,for, hem^pi.
Shoe, n, 8. indiaslio.
Shoot, v, /. ku fiisa.
Shop, store, «. 7. chiudilo; n. 7,
for, ohintolo. Workshop, n, 7.
chichitilo.
Short, to be, v, i, ku fwimpa.
Short, euij\ -fwafwi.
Short, to fall, v. i, ku lela.
Shorten, to, v, t, ku fwinsha.
Shoulder, n, 7. chifapghi ; shoul-
der-blade, ff. 3. ikuko ; space
between shoulder-blades, n. 3.
indelo ; shonlder of animal, n, 3.
ibesho.
Shout, to, v. i, ku ompoloU, ku
poBomoka.
Shove, to, v, /. ku sunda.
Shovel, n. zf^* ifosholo.
Show, to, v, /. ku lesha, ku bonya.
Shower : it is a shower, phr, Wa
fwilaila Iieaa.
Shriek, to, v, u ku didisha.
Shrink, to, as garments in wash,
V. i. ku shankana, ku vhun^^ana.
Shrug, to, the shoulders, v, u ku
ditikinya, ku tidimuka.
Shudder, to, as after drinking
bitter medicine, v. u ku tidi-
muka.
Shut, to, a door, v. t, ku yala ; to
s. the eyes, v. /. ku hulalata ; to
8. the mouth, v, t, ku muina ; to
s. and open the eyes, when you
are afraid anything will enter,
v i, ku hulaliula, ku kopaula.
Sick, to be, v. i, ku aata, phr,
kudi mulwaahi.
Sick, adj, -lwaslii«
Sick person, ». i. mulwaahi.
Sickle, n, i.for. isikile.
Sickness, n, 4. bulwaahi, n, 7.
chilwaBhi.
Side, n. 9. Iwiya ; e.g. Sit on
yonder side, Eala koko ku
Iwiya. Side of a river, n, 3.
itala; e,g. Let us cross to the
other side, A tu landukile mwi-
tala modia.
Side, to place side by side, v^ t, ku
bambanya.
Sideways, adv, kambavhwe. To
walk sideways like a crab, /^r.
ku enda kambavbwe.
Sieve, n. 7. ohisekusho.
Sift, to, v. /. ku aebayku sekusha;
siftings of grain, n, 3.//. xnaseke.
Sigh, to, v, i, ku diekela, ku
ekela.
Sight, of gun, n. 3. dinso.
Sight, to be in sight of each other,
phr, kudi bwenene.
Sighted, weak-, to be, v, i. ku
chesha; a weak-sighted person,
n, I a. uclie8ha-0-m,en8o.
Silence, to, 9. /. ku tontoaha, ku
inaika.
Silent, to be, v,i, ku inaa, ku
diinza, ku tontola.
Silver, n, %.for. inshiliva.
Similar, to be, v,t, ku kosha,
V, i, ku kozhana ; e, g. These
things are similar, Shintu aheshi
shidi koabene.
Sin, evil, n, \, bubi; a sin, iu 7.
chibi.
Sin, to, v,u ku bia» ku ohita
shibi.
Sinner, n, i. muobitashibi, shi-
mafunsi.
Since: they knew him since he
was a child, Ba xnwizhi ka
obidi mwana.
Sincerity, n, 4. bwini.
Sinew, used in sewing, if. 4. bu-
Bhingo, n, 3. isaso.
Sing, to, v, /. ku imba ; to sing well,
loudly, V, t, ku imbiaha ; to sing
of, or for, or to, v. /. ku imbila.
Singe, to, v. /. ku tsnta.
Singer, n, i. xnwixnbi.
\
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
339
Singly, one by one. Uie the
nnmeral, -mwi-mwl. Thus : Let
them come singly, one at a time,
If a be liae omwi omwl.
Sink, to, v,i, ka ibila; v,t, Ini
ibisha. Of a canoe lying at the
bottom of the ziver, v.i,lm kata-
xnina.
Sip, to, v./. ka pwitapwita.
Sir, Mwami I In answering a
chief. Yes, sir, Ingoi I
Sister, ft, i. muohiahi. Used
when a brother speaks to or of
his sister ; when one sister speaks
to another, she says Mukweso,
or Yaya.
Sister-in-law, n. i. mushile.
Generally heard in the pi. only,
Baahilebesu, my or our sister-
or sisters-in-law.
Sit, to, v, i. ka kala ; to s. round
in a circle, v, i, ku engela ; to s.
around a fire, v» i, kn aota ; to
s. near, v. i, ku aenenena ; to s.
very near any one, v. t. ku shindi-
baia, ku shindibadila.
Site, of destroyed house, n, 7. chilu.
Six, num. ohiaambomwL Ba-
lumbu say, Kakole.
Sixteen, num, ikmni dlomwi o
muntesha ahidi chiaambomwi.
Sixty, num. inaknmi adi chi-
aambomwi.
Sjambok, n. 3. mntatula.
Skilfully, adv, chabuaa.
Skill, n, 4. busa.
Skim, to, milk, &c., z'. /. ku ibula.
Skin, of person, ». 9. lukanda;
fresh or soft skin, n, 3. isalo ;
a prepared skin, n, 8. ingubo;
a hard, dry skin, n, 7. chikanda.
Fore-legs of a skin, which the
women tie across their chest, the
baby being in the skin behind,
n, 2. mondo, miondo.
Skin, to, v, /. ku fimda.
Skunk, n, la, kanyimba.
Sky, If. 3. izaulu.
Slack, to be, v, u ku tantebela ;
to cause to be s., v, /. ku tente-
besha.
Slander, to, v,t. ku besha, ku
lambaiaha. The latter word
means to smear, defile by smear-
ing dirt on anybody; hence of
besmirching one's character.
Slanderously, adv, chakubeaha.
Slate, n. *j»for, chilate.
Slaughter, to, to kill many, v, /.
ku poaaula.
Slave, n, i. muahike.
Slavery, n, 4. buahike.
Slavish, the manner, custom, way
of a slave, n. 7. ohiahike.
Slay, to, v. t. ku yaya.
Sleep, n. 6. //. tulo.
Sleep, to^ v, u ku ona. To go
and sleep with a friend's wile,
V, i. ku ata.
Sleepily, adv, cliakuftikula.
Sleepy, to be, v. u ku ftikula.
Slip, to, and fall, v, i, ku teau-
muka, /Ar. ku wa buteahi; to
slip without falling, v, i, ku iAia-
shadika.
Slippery, to be, like a fish, v, 1.
ku teahima ; a slippery place,
slipperiness, n, 4. buteahi.
Slop^ n. 9. Iwata. This game-
pit has sloping sides, Mulambwe
weau udi kwete Iwata.
Sloth, n, 4. bukata.
Small, adj. -shonto. Expressed
also in the classifiers of cl. 6.
Thus, a small house, kanda ; //.
twanda.
Small, to be, vA, ku ohea; to
make small, v, /. ku obeaha.
Smallness, n. 4. busbonto.
Small-pox, n, 7. obimbombe,
i». lo. nacbinkwa, n, 2, muko-
lotila, mudimakubufihu. A
man marked by small-pox, n, la.
shichimbembe.
Smart, to, v, t, ku sosoma.
Smear, to, v,t. ku mata, ku
shingulula ; to s. body with clay
in time of mourning, v. i, ku
lamba ; to s. dirt on anybody,
v,t, ku lambaizha.
Smell, to, v, /. ku nufuaba ; to
smell or stink, v. i. ku nunka.
Smelt, to, iron, /Ar. ku tenta
butale.
Smile, to, v. i. ku mwena.
Smite, to. See To hit.
Z 2
340
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Smith, black-, n. i. mufuKlii.
Smithy, n. 8. insaka.
Smoke, to, v, t, ku fvreba ; to s.
with short rapid pnfTs, v. t. ku
fakumuna ; to s. much, v. t, ku
fwebesha ; to be smokeable, v. i.
ku fwebeka.
Smoke, n, 4. buslii ; a great quan-
tity of, n. 3. ishi.
Smoker, ». i. mufwebi ; of hemp,
n, la. sliilubaBge.
Smoothe, to, v. L ku ealieBlia, ku
bulunganya ; to be smooth,
carved nicely without roughness,
v,u ku bulungana; to smoothe
off with a shell pots when made,
V. U ku bumbula ; to smoothe
a road, v, t, ku salazha ; to
smoothe (clothes), v,t, ku bu-
k6sa.
Smoothly, adv, ohakuezhezhs,
chakubulungana.
Snake, n» 8. inaoka, n, i. muzoka.
Some varieties of snakes,
Ohipile, puff-adder, poisonous.
Chisambwe, short, poisonous.
Impushi, non -poisonous.
Ingongoki, this and the previous
one are said to bring good luck to
those who see them.
Xnkombola, very poisonous, some-
thing like the shimakGina.
Itosld, a fabulous water-snake.
See note in Ila-Eng, Vocab.
Kakune, a green tree-snake,
poisonous.
Muoheka, a kind of python, swal-
lows animals.
Mulala, or lumanyendo, a large
tree-snake, said to be extremely
poisonous.
Munkanga. ? kind.
Shibudikila, described by natives
as having two heads; a short,
dark-coloured snake.
Shimakoma, the African cobra;
long, dark-coloured; very poison-
ous, spits.
Shimufulaniweiuyu, a green
snake, non-poisonous.
Snap, to, v, /. ku kombols ; v, i,
ku komboka
Snapped, adj. -komboshi.
Snarl, to, v, i, ku huluma.
Snatch, to, v. t» ku soxnpola ; as
a hawk snatches chickens, v. /.
ku kwempa.
Sneer, to, v, i. ku shinanana.
Sneeze, to, v, i. ku shamits, ku
chislia, ku ditimuna.
Snore, to, v, i, ku kuluzna.
Snuff, n. 8. intombwe.
Snuff, to, v, t. ku fwebs.
Snuff-box, n, 8. ingoma.
Snuff-spoon, n, 7. ohifw-ezho,
n. 3. ibeko.
So, adv, bobo, bodia.
So-and-so, Nini,//. Banini; e.g^.
They were so-and-so, I forget
their names, Ka badi banini,
nda luba mazhina abo.
So-so, not quite right, but almost,
adv, poni poni. This work is
so-so, Mudimo wezu mponi
mponi.
Soak, to, v,t, ku iniks, ku bo-
mbeka.
Soap, n. 2, /or. mulola.
Soar, to, v, i. ku zumuka.
Sober, to be, v. i, ku kololokwa ;
to make sober, v,t, ku kolo-
losha.
Sock, n. z,/or, iaokisi.
Soft, to be, v, i, ku bombs ; to
be very soft, v. i, ku bombesha.
Soft, adf. -bongvhu ; of food,
-dankunushi.
Soften, to, zf.t. ku bonsha; to
make very soft, v,t. ku bonse-
sha; to soften a skin, v,t. ku
suka.
Softness, n, 4. bubongvhu.
Soil, n, 3. ivbu.
Soldier, n, i a. shilumamba.
Solidify, to, zf, i, ku dianga, ku
angana.
Solitary, to be, v, pass, ku im-
bilwa; to leave one alone, in
solitude, V. t. ku imbisha.
Some, adj. -mwi ; e.g, some people,
bantu bamwi.
Something, n. 6. kantu.
Son, n. i. mwana mulombwana.
Son-in-law, n. i. mukwe. My — ,
mukwe wangu, or mukwango.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
341
SoNSHiPy n, 4. bwana.
Song, n, 9. Iwiznbo.
SooN» after a time^ phr» ohi be
chjjidi.
Soot, n, a. mtqre.
Soothe, to, a child, v, /. ka umbu-
diaha.
Sop, to, v. t. ka kandila.
Sorcerer, n, i. muloslii.
Sorcery, ». 4. bnloahi.
Sore, ». 7. oldlonda.
Sore, to be, v, i, ku ohiaa.
Sorrow, iu 4. busu.
Sorrowful, to be, or downcast,
V. pass, ku eteshiwa ; to caase to
be downcast, v, /. ku eteaha.
Sorrowfully, adv, chabuau.
Sorrowful person, n, i. muau.
Sorry, to be, v. u ku uaa.
Sort, kind, n. a. mukumo.
Sound, to, of the intestines ram-
bling, also of a waterfall, v, i. ku
gama; to cause to ramble thns,
V. t, ku ffuxnya ; of drams sound-
ing a long time, v.i. Ini k»l»-
uka; of thunder, v,i, ku indi-
ndima.
Soup, n, a. mushinaa.
Sour, to be, v. i, ku papa. Of a
sour thing it is said, Cha aaku-
muna mate. It increases the
saliva. 29rda aakumuka mate.
My saliva flows, increases. The
feeling when one tastes anything
sour is called, bu, or buu.
South : expressed very indefinitely.
A general way of saying it is, Ku
bubiahi, or ku butonga, i,e.
Towards the country of the Ba-
tonga.
Sow, TO, V. /. ku shanga.
Sower, ». i. musbangi.
Space, n. 4. busena.
Spade, n, i.for. ifosholo.
Spark, n. 3. inaansi.
Speak, to, v,i, ku amba; to s.
to oneself, v. t, ku diambya ; to
s. loudly, V. t, ku amblsha ; to
s. under one's breath, to murmur,
vj, ku tongauka, ku sholauka ;
to s. to, V. /. ku ambila ; to s. at
great length, so as to weary
people, V, i. ku londolola ; to s.
out, hiding nothing, v, t ku pa-
aaiila ; to s. on behalf of, v, /.
ku ambidila; to s. altogether,
making a noise, v, i, ku yo^ola ;
to 8. the trath all through a
matter, v. u ku lungulula.
Spear, ». 3. iaumo; large s. used
in hunting elephants and buffaloes,
n. 3. iyonga, n. a. mwanabo;
shaft of spear, n. 9. luaako; a
large s., n. 3. ibeshi; another
kind of s., n. 8. impula ; fish s.,
ff. 2. mumba. Different kinds of
barbed spears: n, 7. chinkoahi;
n, la, ahikamimbia (so called
because it has two barbs which
are supposed to resemble a swal-
low's tail) ; n. 3. iaholaule ;
». 7. chikwangadi ; ». i a. shi-
kakombo. The part of the spear-
head not hammered out, n. 2.
mushiahi.
Species, n. a. muahobo, mukumo.
Spectacles, n, 7. //. ahimbone.
Speed, n, 9. lubilo.
Speedily, adv, chalubilo.
Spend, to, v, t. ku dia.
Spider, n, 3. ibubi \ n,\a, shilu-
bidila. Spider's nest made by
8hilubidila,namuiidelele. Web
of the ibubi, lutangatanga.
Spill, to, v, i, ku tika, ku tlka-
ika; to spill, v. /. ku tila, ku
tikaisba.
Spin, to, to twist cotton into thread,
V, /. ku pesa.
Spine, n. a. moxigo.
Spirit, n, a. moaa, //. mioaa;
apparition, n, \a, shikazwa; of
ancestors, n, a. muzhimo.
Spit, to, v,t, ku fwila, ku la-
pula ; to spit out, v. t, ku ahipa.
Spittle, n, 3. //. mate.
Spleen, n, 3. ibenzhi, n, a. mu-
benzhi.
Splinter, ». 6. kashamo, kasha-
ahamo.
Split, to, v, t, ku anda, ku andu-
la, ku andaula ; to be split, v, i,
ku anduka, ku andauka.
Spoil, to, v,t, ku aonaula, ku
bisha.
Spoon, n, 2. mungo.
342
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Spoor, n» 2. mukondo, mnlrala;
a faint spoory n, 7. ohiknla.
Spout, of bellows, n. 8. inchela.
Spread, to, v.i, ka aala; to s.
news abroad, v. t. ka ibuaha ; to
s. out extensively in growing, as
pumpkin, v.i. ka ombengans;
to s. out, scatter, of people, r. 1.
ka dyombengana ; to s. out
wings, of a bird, v. /. ka bftma.
Spring, n, 7. chidixno.
Spring, to, to jump, v, i, ka
•otoka ; as seeds, v, i, ka mena.
Spring, of water, n. a. mwinao,
//. minao ; hot spring, n, 3. //.
xnabia; spring of a gun, n. 2,
mdla.
Spring-hare, n. 1 a, naxnan-
kwizo*
Sprinkle, to, v, t, ka aanaails.
Sprout, to, v, i. ka sonaa.
Spur, n, 7. clmnbi.
Spy, to, V, /. ka okela.
Spy, ». I. maokeahi.
Squanderer, n, i. mataka.
Squeeze, to, v»t, ka ahina, ka
kama.
Squirrel, if. ia.8hikdnBo.
Stab, to, v, /. ka yasa.
Stack, oif mealies, n, 8. inkango ;
a big stack, n. 3. ikongo.
Stagger, to, as drunkard, v, i, ka
tekana, ka kanaoka.
Stalk, to, game, v. t, ka benda.
Stalk, of grain, n, 3. isenga ; a
mealie-stalk without any grain,
n, 7. chipapa.
Stammer, to, v» i. ka lendula.
Stammerer, ». io. shikalenda,
shicliilaka.
Stammeringly, adv. chakalenda.
Stamp, to, v.t. ka diata ; to stamp
grain, v, /. ka twa, ka ohokola,
ka polola ; to stamp a floor, vj,
ka ahimbila.
Stamping-block, n, 8. inkidi.
Stand, to, v,u ka ahima, v.U
ka Bhimika; to stand with legs
stretched out, v, i. ka tatanana ;
to stand up, v. 1. ka ahixnoka.
Stand, a thing for placing another
upon, as a candlestick, n, 7. ohi*
kadikilo.
Star, m. 8. intongweahi. The
morning star, intanda. The
evening star, ianLXwiahi. A
shooting star, int&nda. A star
seen very near the moon, inaka-
mweahi. The Pleiades, Bale-
ahi.
Stare, to, v, i, ka tanama.
Start, to, a tune, r. /. ka soiiBa;
to start a journey late in the day,
V. I . ka iaokila.
Starvation, n, 8. inaala.
Starve, to, /Ar. ka fwa inaala.
Stature, n, 7. chiino.
Steadfast, to be, v.i, ka kira-
tila, ka ta aungana.
Steal, to, v, t, ka iba (kwiba).
To steal at time of famine, v. t.
kaoka.
Stealthily, to go, v.i. ka na-
namba.
Stealthily, adv. kafcunpe.
Steep, adj. -zhimikile. The bank
is steep, Inkomw idi ahimi-
kile.
Steer, to, a canoe, v,U ka obi-
ndtdala.
Step, m. 8. intambuko.
Steward, watcher, caretaker, n. i.
madindiahi.
Stewardship, n. 4. badindiBhi.
Stick, n. 6. kaaamo ; walking-
stick, n, 2. maaako. A a. for
beating; n. 7. ohompaaho, oha-
mio. A stick for tying-np slaves,
n. 8. impangati; a forked s.,
n. 7. ohanda, n. 8. inganda. A
8. for taking £Eit out of pot, if. a.
matombio. A s. outside a village
upon which spears, &c., are
placed, If. 9. Iwanga. A pointed
s. for digging, if. a. xnaaongo-
sbo. Short sticks put above
doorway in hut-wall, also sticks
used by women in carrying things
on the head, if. 4. balebo.
Stick, to, to adhere to, v.U ka
kakatila, ka ahaina.
Sticky, adhesive, adj. -lamaoahi.
To be sticky, v. f . ka lamanka.
Stiff, to be, as porridge, v. i. ka
kankabala. To make porridge
sti£f, V. /. ka kankabaaha.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
343
Still, particle, ohl ; #.^. Tliey are
still going, Ba ohi ya.
Stimulate, to, v./. ka ahini-
kiiha.
Sting, to, as a bee, v. /. ka Itixna ;
as a nettle, v. /. ku babym.
Stinginess, h, 4. bntaTlm.
Stingy person, iv. i. mutaTlm.
Stink, it. 4. buniimfti.
Stink, to, v,i, ku niinka, ku
▼Immbiika.
Stir, to, v,t, ku sambika, ku
ipinda. To stir up ¥Fater or por-
ridge, V. t, ku k6pak6pa.
Stock, of gun, if. ^ itako.
Stockade, n, 9. luba.
Stomach, n. ^ iftu The 'first
stomach' of cattle, iftu The
* second stomadi', olminbai ohi-
ndyabombaBhi. The * fourth
stomach ', imftinka.
Stone, n. 3. ibwe, n» 2, mwala.
See Millstone.
Stool, n. 7. ohuna.
Stoop, to, v. i, ka TiamiTia. To
stoop down to drink water, v, /. ku
ftilama. To stoop down so as to
drink directly by the mouth, v, t.
ku kunamlna.
Stop, to, to cease, v,t, ku laka.
To stop, obstruct, v,t. ku ohi-
qjila. To stop anybody from
doing, V, /. ku lesha.
Stopper, n, 7. ohishinaho. Of
snuff-box. If. 7. ohitibio. Of
chum. It. 8. inahibo.
Store, if. T^fir. ohintolo.
Stork, if. i a. nakakodio.
Storm, if. a. muofo, if. 3. iuwo.
Straight, eufy', -luleme.
Straight, to be, v, i. ku lulama.
To put things straight, in order,
V. t. ku engesha. To do so for
somebody, v, t. ku engezheBha.
Straighten, to, v,t ku lula-
mika.
Strain, to, as beer, honey, v.t,
ku ansa.
Strainer, h. 7. ohansilo.
Strait, narrow, adj. -shankene.
Stranger, if. i. mwenau.
Strangle, to, v. t. ku shina.
Strength, if. 8. insana.
Strengthen, to, phr, ku pa
Stretch, to, out the hand, v.t,
ku vhungulula. To s. oneself,
V. i. ku diolola. To be stretched
out like a corpse, v. u ku landa-
bala. To s. out as elastic, v.U
ku tandubula. To s. out as
legs, V, /. ku tandabala.
Stretchable, to be, elastic, v.u
ku vhunguludika, ku tandu-
budika.
Stride, if. 8. intambuko.
Strife, if. 5. kulwa ; wordy
strife, n, 7. ohikani.
Strike, to, v.t, ku uma. Of a
spear striking without piercing,
zi. /. ku limkunya.
String, made of bark, if. 9. loihi,
n, 6. koahL Palm-leaf-string,
If. 7. chibala, if. 9. lubala. A
fish-string, if. a. moae.
Strip, to, off bark, v, t. ku ftmdu-
la. To s. on behalf of somebody,
V. t, ku ftmdwila. To s. leaves
off a branch, v. t, ku pulula. To
s. maize off a cob, v, t. ku bu-
lula. To s. sheath from mealie-
cob, v,t, ku paula. To s. off
clothes, v. /. ku aamnnnna, ku
sakulula.
Strive, to, to wrestle, v.t, ku
kwatana. With words, ku
Bumanana.
Stroke, to, with hands, v.L ku
bukusa.
Strong, to be, phr, kudi insana.
A strong person, if. i a. shinaana.
A strong person who never tires or
gets sick IS called a rock, mwala.
Stumble, to, v. i. ku diftimpula.
STUMBLiNG-BL0CK,if.8. ingftimpo.
Stump, of tree, n, 7. ohishishi.
Stupid, to be, v, i. ku dimbuka;
to be dull, V. I. ku ahiluka.
Stuiter, to, v. i. ku lendida.
Stutterer, n. la. ahikalenda.
Submerged, to be, v, i. ku kata-
mina.
Submit, to, v, i. ku bomba.
Subside, to, v, L ku obuluka, ku
pompa. Of wind, v. i, ku bata-
mina.
344
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Succeed, to, to follow, v.L ku
ohldila, phr, ku dya izhina.
Such, adv, bodia. I don't like
sach people, Shi zanda bantu
badi bodia.
Suck, to, v, t. ku mumuna. As
an infant, v* L ku nonka.
Suckle, to, v, /. ku nonsha.
Suddenly, adv, ndidiona-ndidi-
ona.
Suffer, to, v^ t, ku chisa.
Suffering, n. 5. kuohisa.
Suffice, to, v,i, ku izudila.
Sugar, n, S,/or. insukele.
Suit, to, v. t, ku botela. These
clothes salt me, Shikobelo she-
shi aha mbotela.
Sulky, to be, v. i. ku pisauka.
Sulphur, n, 2, for, musolufiA.
Summer, n, 3.//. Mainza.
Summon, to, v, A ku ita (kwita).
Sun, n, 3. izuba.
Sunday, n, ^,for^ Insunda.
Sunk, to be, v. i, ku katamina.
Sunset, adv, diakomboka, die-
bila.
Sunshine, n, 9. lumwi.
Supper, n, 2, muladilo.
Suppose, to, v. i, ku telalka, ku
zuQga ; e,g, I supposed it was
so, bat no ! Nda zunga mbuka-
bele inji, pe !
Surpass, to, v, t, ku bazha.
Surpassingly, adv^ ohakubazha.
Surrender, to, v, t, ku ditola.
Surround, to, as game, v, t. ku
oba. To sit aronnd, v. t, ku
engela. To surroond a village
in order to seize the people, v, t,
kumuma.
Suspend, to, v, t. ku lengelezha.
Swallow, to, v. t, ku mina. To
cause to swallow, v, t, ku minya.
Swallow, n, \a, shikamimbia.
Swallow ABLE, to be, v,t, ku
zninika.
Swamp, n, 3. isaba, n, 2. mu-
londo.
Swear, to, to affirm strongly, v, t,
ku pinga. To revile, curse, v, t,
kutuka.
Sweep, to, v, t, ku pela, ku ku-
kubula.
Sweet, to be, v, t . ku Iwela.
Swell, to, v. i. ku zhimba.
Swift person, n. la, shilubilo.
Swiftly, adv. ohalubilo.
Swiftness, n. 9. lubilo.
Swim, to, v.t, ku samba. To
float on surface, v. i. ku ibauka.
Swindle, to, v, t. ku ohenga.
Swing, to, dangle in air, v.i, ku
leugela.
Swoop, to, v, i. ku kwempa.
Sword, n, 3. ioheba.
Syphilis, n, 3. //. manansa.
Table, n, %yfor. intafole.
Tabooed, to be, v, i. ku tonda,
ku ila, ku zhila; to be tabooed
for, on account of, vJ, ku tondela;
to taboo, V, t, ku tonzha.
These words are used especially
with reference to certain things
which are forbidden to various
people. Among these the follow-
ing may be named :t—
Young people are forbidden to eat
eggs, mukamu (a kind of bread),
masekeseki (another kind) ; the
sliim.ulele, shibembe, and in-
kungwe, fish ; kansama (a kind
of honey) ; mankalwe (a kind of
potato) ; katongola (a kind of
bread made of ground nuts) ;
miseza (a kind of potato), and fat.
A pregnant woman and her husband
are forbidden to do certain things
for the benefit of the child that is
to be bom. Some of these things
are as follows : — They may not
eat the flesh of the gnu, the reason
being that the gnu occupies a long
time in the actual bringing forth
of its young, and it is supposed
that if the woman or her husband
eat of it the woman will have a
long confinement. They are also
forbidden to eat hartebeest flesh ;
it is said that the young harte-
beest is bom blind, and if the
woman or her husband eat this
meat their offspring will be blind
also. They are also forbidden to
eat food that has been cooked on
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
345
a day previoiis and left over ; this
food is called ohidyo oh'ons, or
ohidyo oha mnlala. They may
not sit on other people's stools,
for fear of inducing miscarriage.
They may not fight with other
people, the reason being that they
may peradventore fight with a
muloBhi, and a miscarriage might
result Neither husband nor wife
may have intercourse with other
people, though if the man be a
polygamist he may go into his
other wives. The woman is also
not allowed to sleep in the day-
time, it being supposed that other-
wise her child will be sleepy-
headed or the confinement will be
a lengthy one. It is also said
that people must never stand about
the door of a pregnant woman's
house, otherwise her confinement
will be lengthy.
Young girls (bashimbi) are for-
bidden to touch the miando (the
musical instruments of the
bakamwale), and they may not
eat btunena, or it will happen
that on the day of their initiation
danceit will rain. Children may not
refuse to go when sent on errands.
And children must never say Nda
sata chibunu, I have a pain in
the loins ; if they do this their
elders may die. Women must not
speak of sexual matters before
men, nor may men before women :
that is to say, they may not speak
of the genitals and such matters.
Women and girls are to be
properly clothed in the presence
of men. Among the Balumbu it
is also forbidden U>r men to appear
improperly clothed before women,
but the Baila proper have no such
prohibition.
It is quite admissible to give these
terms a wider use and apply them
to things prohibited by Christianity
and civilization; e,g. This thing
is not for a believer to do, it is
tabooed, Chechi ta chi chiti
muyxunini, chi la tonda.
Tadpole, k. la. habe, //. baha-
be.
Tail, n, 2. muchila. A large t.,
such as a horse*s, n, 3. ichila ;
t of bird, n, 7. chiyeye ; t. of
fish, n, 2. muyeye, n. 8. impepe.
Take, to, v, t. ku bweaa. To t.
out all food in a pot, v.t, ku
pukula. To t a little food out
of a pot, V, /. ku nembula. To
t. out one piece of food, leaving
the rest, v, t. ku landula. To t.
in both hands, v, /. ku fukatila.
To cause to t. in both hands, v, t,
ku fukatiaha. To t. a thing out
of the way, v, /. ku sesula. To t.
a thing away from a person, v, t,
ku nanga. To t. away from a
person so as to relieve him, v, /.
ku nangila, ku inuna. To t. a
thing out of the water, v.t, ku
fiimpula. To t. a pot off the fire,
V, t, ku yula. To t. to, v, t. ku
tola. To t everything fi-om a
person, v.t. ku kukula. To t.
away or seize a person's things,
v» t, ku anjila. To t., of a man
who takes things from his grand-
children, V, /. ku bombola. To
t. things outside in cleaning up a
house, V, t, ku tutulula. To t.
young birds out of a nest, v, t, ku
zalwila. To t. fat out of a recep-
tacle, V, t, ku tomba.
Tale, folk-lore, n, 6. kalabi, also a
riddle.
Tale-bearer, 11.1. mucliecliele-
zhi.
Talk, to, z^. tl ku bandika.
Tall, adj\ -lamfti.
Tall person, n, i a. shichimo.
Tallness, n. 7. chimo.
Tame, to, v. t, ku bonzha.
Tardy, to be, v. i. ku nyosa.
Tassel, n. 2. muzenaa.
Taste, to, v, t, ku manaha. To
t. or eat just a little, v.t, ku
sola. To cause to eat just a little,
V. t, ku sozha. To t. hot as
pepper, v. i. ku bangabanga.
Tax, to, v. t, ku lumbuzha, ku
ohetesha. To pay a tax, v. t» ku
lumbula, ku chetela.
346
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Tax-gatherer, n.i. mulumbu*
Bhi, muoheteshi.
Taxing-place, n. 7. ohiluxnbu-
dilo.
Tea, n. i a. ti.
Teach, to, v. t. ku iya, ku bula.
Teacher, n. i. mwiyi.
Teaching, n. 5. kwiya.
Tear, n. 2. inusoBhi.
Tear, to, v, t. ku sapula. To t.
to pieces with teeth, phr, ku
Butula o meno. To t. to pieces,
of a wild beast, v. t, ku andula.
Teat, n, 6. kanonkelo.
Teeth, n. 3. //. meno. To file t.,
V. t. ku pepenyeka. To knock
out t. in the manner of the Baila,
V. t, ku banga. To take out t.
as is the custom of the Bandnwe,
ku nomona meno.
Tell, to, v, u ku shimuna. To
t. to, V, /. ku shimwina. To t.
tales, particularly lying tales, v. t.
ku cbechelela. To t. one's
names, v.t, ku tembula. To t.
out, hiding nothing, v, t, kukolo-
lola. To t news, tidings, v,t,
ku ombolola. To tell news to,
to make known things done, v, t,
ku ombolOBha.
Temple, n. %,for, intempele.
Tempt, to, to try, v. /. ko soleka,
ku sukusha. To lead astray,
v,L ku lengauBha. To entice,
tempt, V. t. ku tepaula.
Tempter, n,i. musoleshi, mu-
ohengi, mutepauehi.
Ten, num, ikumi.
Tend, to, to herd, v, t, kuembela.
To watch, v.t, ku dindila.
Tender, soft, etdj, -bongvhu, espe-
cially of meat and food, aJj,
•dankunushi.
Tendon, n, 4. buBbingo ; the
Achilles tendon, n. 2, mushisa.
Tent, n. i^Jor, itenti.
Termite, n, 9. lumoma, mulauBhi.
Terrible, to be, v, i ku tika.
Test, to, v. t. ku sukusha.
Testament, n. 5. Itestamente.
Testicle, n. 3. ibolo.
Testify, to, v.t. ku Banga, used
especially ol testifying to a crime.
Testimony, n, 5. kusanga.
Thank, to, v. /. ku lumba.
Thankful person, n. i. mulu-
mbi.
Thankless person, 11.10. shilu-
mbL
That, dem, pro.^ weao, ledio, &c.
See tabu in chap, v of Grammar,
Conj. ati, kutl.
Thatch, to, v, t. ku rhumba.
Thee, pers. pro. ku.
Their, poss. pro. -bo, &c., prefixed
with genitive particles, thus :
TnJTiBhi ya-bo, their villages.
See table in chap, v of Grammar.
The^, pers. pro. ba, &c See tabie
in chapi v of Grammar.
Then, a^., conJ. insho, ngonao.
There, adv. momo, koko, awo.
Therefore, conj. kambo kako.
These, dem. pro, baba, asa, &c.
See table in chap, v of Grcunmar,
Tws.Yypers.pro. ba, &c.
Thick, to be, as porridge, v. i, ku
kankabala, ku Buma-Buma.
Thicken, to, porridge, &c., o. /«
ku kankabasha.
Thief, n. i. muteu.
Thigh, n. 7. chibelo.
Thin, TO be, or lean, v. i. ku koka,
ku pupungana. To t. out
seedlings, v.t. ku nyonkada.
To beat out thin, v, /• kupampa-
mika. To be beaten out thin,
flat, v.i.'kxL pampamana.
Thin, flat, culj. -pampamene;
lean, adj. -pupungene, -kofo.
Thing, n. 7. chintu ; a small thing,
n. 6. kantu.
Think, to, v.t. ku telaika, ku
BOBa, ku kumbula ; to turn any-
thing over in the mind, v.t. ku
bumba-bumba.
Third, ord, num. -tatu ; e. g. the
third day, buehiku bwatatu.
Thirst, n. 8. inyotwa, n. ^ lu-
pamba.
Thirsty, to be, phr, ku fwtk
inyotwa, ku fwa lupamba.
Thirteen, num. ikumi diomwi o
mu ntesha ehotatwe.
This, cUm. pro. weau, ladi, &c.
See table in chap, v of Grammar.
ENGUSH-ILA VOCABULARY
347
Thithbr, aAt. kdko.
Thorn, it. 4. bwiya^//. meya.
Tho&n-trkb, ' kameddom,' n. 3.
ihuxiga; a clump or wood of
thom^reei, ». 4. bukoka.
Those, dem. pro, babo, aso, &c.
See tabU in chap, v of Grammar.
Tuov, pers. pro, IJ.
Though, eonj, nL
Thought, it. 2, muaaio, n 3. //.
matelaiidiL
Thousand, n, 7. ohuln.
Thread, n, 4. butoii«l.
Thread, to, v.t. kn tmiffa.
Threaten, to, to lift hand
threateningly, v. t, kn aoxiaa.
Three, num, -tatwe.
Thresh, to, phr, m. 9. kn nma
Tn^fifi Inbanaa.
Threshing-floor, n, 9. lubanaa.
Threshold, n. 7. ohiknnguaho.
Thrice, num. kotatwe.
Throat, n, 2, mmniiio.
Throb, to, as a sweUtng, v, i, kn
▼hanta.
Throng, of people, if. a, mnAmii ;
it.3. //. makamo; it. 7. chtuna.
Through, prep, mo.
Throw, to, v.t. kn fhsa, ku
wala. To t. any one on the
gronnd violently, v.t. ku kan-
kata. To t. into the air as in
the game ' intda ', v. t, ku ama.
To t. up gronnd with the feet in
running, v, t. ku kaltUa.
Thumb, n, 7. ohikumb, name given
by children, it. 7. ohdkomboko-
mboka.
Thunder, n. i.pl. makadL Said
of t. that seems to be everywhere,
Iiesa wa tikumana masalo
akwe. Of distant t, Wa chinka
Iieaa. Oflondt.,Kumdindima.
Thus, €uh. bobo, bodia.
Thy, poss. pro. -ko, prefixed by
genitive parts.
Ticket, n. z,for. itikiti.
Tickle, to, v, i. kn tekuna^ v, t.
ku tekunya.
Tie, to, v, t. ku anga. To t. each
other, v.t. ku angana. To t.
oneself, v. t. ku dianga. To help
or cause to t.^ v. t. ku anaha. To
t a slip-knot, v. t. ku fwiaika.
To tie up, as a calf, v. t. kuftmga.
To t. things together, v.t. ku
angidila. To L tightly, v. t, ku
angiaha.
Till, €onj, manl
Time, it. 7. chindi, ohikati.
Tin, name given to a paraffin tin,
If. 9. muntemba ; it. %.for, itini.
Tip, of knife, it. 8. insonga.
Tired, to be, v. i. ku katala, ku
bomba, phr. ku fwa makatalo.
To be very tired, v. i. ku chuku-
luka. To he unable to walk
through weariness, v.t. ku ba-
mbasa.
To, prep, ku, kwa.
Toad, n.\a. kangvhungvwe.
Tobacco, n. i a. tombwe, nalu-
botu. A kind of strong tobac-
co, It. a. mutonga, mukweka.
Another kind, ir. i a. namakati.
To-DAY, usunu, *8unu.
Toe, n, 6. kalulome. The big toe.
It. 7. chilulome.
Together, ado. antdmwi. Ex-
pressed also in the reciprocal
sp. of the verb. Ku Iwana, to
fight together.
To-morrow, osona.
Tongs, 11.9. lumano. Used by
blacksmith, n. 9. lukwasho.
Tongue, n. 2. mulaka, n. 9.
ludimi, lulaka.
Tonsil, it. 6. kapopo, kakoto.
Tool, t. used by blacksmith to
cut barbs, n. 8. inkanslio.
Tooth, n. 3. dino.
Torn, to be, v. i. ku aapuka.
Tortoise, n. i a. fulwe.
Totter, to, to walk slowly, feebly,
ku beleleka. As a child learning
to walk, V. i. ku tambwaila. To
stagger, v. i. ku tekana.
Touch, to, v.t. ku ampa, ku
kwata ; to touch, jog, in order to
remind one, v, t. ku shishixnuna.
Tower, n. %.for. intola.
Town, n. a. munahi, a large town.
If. 3. inzhi.
Trachea, n. 3. ikulumino.
Trade, to, v. i. ku sambala, v. t,
ku sambazba.
348
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Trader, n, i. mwendo,inu8amba-
bM.
Trail, spoor, n, 2, mukondo. Of
a snake, n. a. miifundufandu.
Train, to, to bring up a child, z/. /.
ku kuzha. To train cattle, v, t,
ku bonzha.
Train, n, 7. ohitemela.
Trample, to, v, t, ku diata. To
trample or tread clay, ku
dlataoka.
Transfiguration, 11.5. kusan-
duka.
Transfigure, Transform, to,
V, /. ku sandula.
Transgress, to, phr. ku sotoka
imbeta.
Transgression, n, 9. lusotoko.
Transgressor, n, i. muiiotoslLi.
Translate, to, v,t, ku pilula,
ku pinula.
Trap, to, v, t. ku tea.
Trap, for animals, n, 4. bufwizu ;
n. 7. ohikotamo. For small
game, n, 7. ohifumps. For fish,
n. 3. izhizlii, iyhumbo ; n, 9.
lushiko. For rats and birds,
ff, 3. idiba.
Parts of the idiba trap : — The stick
planted as a spring, n. a. mweto.
The cord, n, 6. koze. The short
stick tied at the end of the koze,
n, 8. imbwa. The stick support-
ing the top, to which bait is nzed,
n. a. munono. The short stick
put in the ground, n. 8. inkanka.
The top of the trap, n. 3. idiba.
Trapper, n, i. mutezhi.
Travel, to, v, i, ku enda. To
t. fast, V. i, ku endesha. To t.
about continually, v,i, ku
poposha.
Traveller, n,i, xnwenzu. A
constant traveller, n. i. mupo-
poshi. A solitary traveller, n, 1 a.
shimuendaiche.
Treachery, of a man who incites
his fellows against another, but is
fearful of that man knowing it, so
that when they come to seize him
he pretends to intercede for him
as a friend, ku ohita ohihuna-
babanga.
Tree, n, 3. isamo. A small tree,
n,6. kasanzhi.
A List of Trees.
Bukuzu, wild fig-tree, fruit is
eaten.
Chikunku, of no use.
Ibula, a large evergreen tree, good
workable timber, fruit eaten.
Ibuzo, the baobaba.
Ihunga, the camelthom-tree.
Indiondionga, grows on the river
banks.
Infumo, fruit eaten.
Isompe (mwalala), grows on
river-bank, fruit eaten.
Isuku, wood good for poles, fruit
eaten.
Iwi, the wild orange-tree.
Kabangalulu, not eaten by borers,
used as medicine.
Kabombwe, fruit said to be used
to kill fish.
Kalala, palm-tree.
Mubanga, hard timber, not eaten
by borers.
Mubombo, good bark, bark used
to make intebe.
Mubuxnbu, medicine made from
the bark.
Mudianswi, hard borer-proof
timber, walking-sticks made of it.
Mufuf uma, root used as medicine
to make children grow.
Mufundi, has good bark, not
eaten by borers.
Mufwebabachazi, bark of this
made into powder and smoked
will kill a person.
Muhubu, a kind of willow.
Mukaka, bark good for string.
Mukololo, it is said that where
this tree grows there is good soil.
Mukomba, a flowering tree.
Mukunku, has no uses.
Mukushi, stamping-blocks and
pestles made of it.
Mukutabulongo, good firewood.
Muleambezo, good timber, not
eaten by borers.
Mulombe, light open-grained
timber with dark heart, excellent
for joinery work.
ENGLISH.ILA VOCABULARY
349
Mulota, something like mupupu,
used as medidne.
Mulabtilulws, fruit eaten.
MTdulwe, hard wood, but not
borer-proof.
Malumiknmi, it is said that the
scent of the boming wood of this
tree scares away snakes.
Mnnkalazikaiiss, kind of thorn-
tree.
Mnnkonono, has a dark heart,
not eaten by borers.
Montembwe, good for wattles.
Monto, with a white sticky sap,
nsed.as glue.
MontokoahiA, fruit eaten, spoons
and basins made of the wood.
Montiintiiinba (mtunbolo), hard
wood, used for making drums.
Mupasopaso, hard like mopaai,
good firewood.
Mujmpii, light fleshy leaves,
white sap very irritating to the
eyes; people mix dried leaves with
tobacco.
Muinuho, seems to be of no use.
Mnwambii, bark used for string.
Muse, dark wood, used for walk-
ing-sticks and spear-shafts.
Musekese, said to indicate good
soiL
Muaeoe, good for charcoal, stamp-
ing-blocks made of it.
Muahibi, grain-stampers made of
the wood, fruit eaten.
Muahikidi, an ereigreen tree.
Mutab* (Bnteba), sap used as
btrdHme, fruit eaten.
Mutentws (liontwa), very thick
bark, intebe made from bark.
Mutombo, good timber, root used
formedjcme.
Motama, has a large peadi-like
fruiL
Motobo, has yellow flowers, fruit
Mutondo, axe-shafts made of it ;
flowen of this tree (intondo) are
taken as a sign that it b time to
go and search for honey.
MatoyA (mnahiwe), bark good
for string.
KujUy frwlcateo.
MaBhtila, long roots used for
beating out grain.
Mwangampande, a tree with
fleshy leaves similar to mupupo.
Mwangula, similar to muse : with
hardheartyWalking-sticksmadeofit.
Mwani, the mopani.
Mwanza, medicine made from it.
Mwanzwa, good workable, hard,
yellowish timber.
Kamatudi, sap used as medicine
for bwele.
Namu8angula,thelily- or sausage-
tree, has huge pods.
Shitantasokwe, good mining
timber, not eaten by borers.
Tremble, to, v, i, ku shangama,
ku tatama, ku bimba, ku kan-
kama.
Trench, n, a. mwimbi, long
trench to keep spring-hares and
locusts out of field, n, a. mon-
kolwe.
Tribe, n, a. nnikoa, mnshobo.
Mnahobo seems to have reference
more to the language.
Trigger, of gun, n. 2. manono.
Trip, to, v. i. kn letm, v, /. kn
lebya.
Trouble, to, v. i. ku penga ; v. /•
ku penaha. To be troubled about
something, v, t. ku pengela.
Trouble, n, 3. ipenshi. Trouble-
some person, n. i. mukomL
Trousers, n. ^.pl. far. malikwe.
Truly, adv. chiniobini. They
say ITditwe, It is ash — appar-
ently an oath. The reference
seems to be the ash put on the
body at frmerals.
Trumpet, if. 8. impeta.
Trunk, of elephant, n. a. mu-
bombo, mukono.
Trust, to, v. t. ku ahoma.
Trusty, to be, trustwoithy, v, L
kn ahJomeka.
Truth, ir.4. bwini. To %peaik
the truth, v. t. ku whlnlahft.
Try, to, v,t. ku aoleka. To try
aftersooin bargaining to see if he
wUl accept a small sum, v. /. ka
35P
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Tuesday, bwatata, bushika
bwatata.
Tuft, of feathers on bird's head.
If. 6. kala, pi, twala.
Tumult, n, 5 kupyopyongana.
Turn, to, v.t, ku sandula. To
t., be turned, v. i, ku sanduka.
To t. any one over, v, /. ku fata-
muna. To t. away from, v.t, ku
futamina. To t. back again,
v.t, ku futuluka. To t. back,
V, i, ku piluka. To turn any-
thing back, V, i, ku piluls. To
t. aside from a path, v,i, ku
ambuka. To t over leaves of a
book, V, /. ku pepaula. To t.
right over, v, i. ku sandumuka,
v,t, ku sandumuna. To t. a
person over and over again, v, t,
ku pUaula. To t. or steer a
canoe, v, /. ku ohindulula. To
t. partly round, v, i, ku chindu-
luka. To t a thing over and
over again, v. /. sandaula. To t.
up at edges as hat-brim, v, i, ku
pepenyana,z'./. kupepenyanya.
To t. away the head, v. t, ku
puka. To t. over and over in
pain, V, i, ku alauka.
Turner, of bracelets, n, i. mu-
oheshi.
Twelve, num, ikumi diomwi o
mu ntesha shobili.
Twenty, num, makumi obili.
Twice, num, kobili.
Twilight,to be,z^.2. kubalangala.
Twin, n.i, mwana wa manga.
Twins, n, manga.
Twirl, to, v. t. ku puka.
Twist, to, v, t. ku pesa.
Two, num. -bill.
Uddeibl, n, 3. ibele.
Ugly, adj, -biabe.
Ugly person, n, la, malukwa,
pi, bamalukwa.
Ulcer, n. 7. ohilonda.
Umbilical cord, n, 9. ludila.
Umbilicus, n. 9. lukombo. A
large swollen umbilicus, umbilical
hernia, n, 3. ikombo.
Unable, to be, ku ta konslia ; I
am unable, Shi konzha.
Unbelief, n, 5. kudimbulula.
Unbind, to, v. t, ku angulula, ku
angununa, ku sungulula.
Uncle, n. la. Uaohisha ; voc.
form, Achisha.
Unclean, to be, v.i.'kfx sofwala.
Uncoil, to, as a snake, v, i, ku
diahingulula.
Unconscious, to be, v, i, ku ahi-
luka.
Uncover, to, v,t. ku vhumbu-
lula. To be uncovered, v, i, ku
vhumbuluka.
Under, culv, kunshl; prep, ku-
nshi ku.
Understand, to, v, /. ku telela ;
to u. clearly, z^. t. ku telelesha. Of
a man who is told, but does not
understand, though he says he
does, and either comes back to ask
again or tells a wrong tale, v, i,
kupujMb.
Understandable, to be, v, i, ku
teleleka.
Undress, to, v, t, ku sakulula, ku
samununa.
Uneatable, to be, v,i, ku ta
dika.
Unequal, to be, v, i, ku ta inga-
ina.
Unfaithful, to be, v, i, ku ta
shomeka.
Unfasten, to, v. t. ku angulula.
Unfold, to, v, i, ku vhungulula.
Unfruitful, to be, ku ta eaha.
Ungodly person, n, i, musumu-
moBo.
Unite, to, v. t, ku lunga, ku ya-
nyanya, v, i, ku yanana.
Unjust, to be, v, i, ku ta lulama.
Unlade, to, v,t, ku knaha, ku
longolola.
Unleavened, bread, Inahima i
ina bumena.
Unless, conj, ansha.
Unlock, to, v, t, ku ingulula.
Unplait, to, V, t, ku aambu-
lulA.
Unplug, to, v, t, ku shinkula.
Unravel, to, v. t, ku aambulula.
Unripe, adj. -bishi.
Unroll, to, v, t, ku Thungulula.
Unsay, to, v, t, kuambulula.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
351
Uif sREATHBy TO, V. t kii aomosa.
Unsuitxd, to be : to be unsiiited
to one, cr. /. ka bOa.
Untie, to, v, t, ka ftncalnlft, ka
Until, c^. nuuii.
Untwist, to. v, /. ka Bambalula.
To be untwisted, v,u lea sam-
boloka.
Unwise, to be, v. tl ka dimboka.
Unworthy, to be, ka ta elele.
Up, adu. kwiseala.
Upon, pr^ %, eaeala a.
Upright, to be, kadi Bhimikile.
Upright, ae^, -shimikile, -laleme
(good).
Urine, n, 2, monaha.
Us, ta, oswe. See List tf Pronouns
in cJkt^. V iff Grammar,
Usage, custom, n, 7. chiansa.
Useless, to be, /«r. ka iaa ma-
dime; vri. ka sopala.
Uterus, iv. ^ iahadilo.
Uvula, n, 6. katambalaTmhlTna.
Vagabond, n, i. mweleiiBe, kaa-
Inn^^wo. Mwaianae also means
a pauper.
Vagabond, to be a, v. i, ka aanga-
dika.
Vagina, n, 8. intoto.
Vagrancy, also poverty, n, 4. bwe-
lenaa.
Valley, n. ^ Ibanda; a small,
narrow, it. 7. chibandabanda.
Valuable, to be, v, i. ka sandika.
Vanquish, to, v. /. ka aonda.
Variety, kind, it. a. mokomo.
Vast, a veiy big thing, n, 7. ohi-
Vaunt, to, v, i. ka dikalanklla,
ka finnba.
Vegetable, n. 7. cMsha, chidiaho.
Veil, to. to bide behind a curtain,
V, /. ka ahitidila.
Veil, cnrtain, n, 7. chidiahitidi-
sho.
Vein, blood-TCSsel, n. 6. kashinga.
Vengeance, he killed him in v.,
wa wca yaya chadiyana.
Verse, n. 8. impaogo.
Vertebra, n, 7. chifoa oha
mongo. Thittfertebraprominens
n. 8. inkoti.
Very, expressed in the intensitive
species of the verb. To be very
good, v^i, yea botesha. Veiy
much, greatly, adv, akando, ohi-
niohini.
There are also the superlative par-
ticles: Ka tontola-nd, to be
very, very cold. Ka taba-bii, to
be very white. Ka aoma-naw^
to be very, altogether dry. Ka
aama-ntii, to be very hard. Ka
pia-pi, to be very hot. Ka aa-
bila-pia, to be very red. Ka
ahia-mbi, to be very black.
Vex, to, v. /. ka kataaha.
Vibrate, to, v, i, ka ahanga, ka
Bongana.
Vice, n. 3. //. mafiinirf.
Victory, n. 5. kuaonda.
Vile, ad/, -biabe.
Village, n, a. monahi. An old
village where the chief has died,
If. 7. chifdahi.
Vine, wild grapes, if. 3. iaanaa.
Violate, to, v, t, ka biaha.
Violently, adv. chanaana.
Virgin, n. i a. nakadindo.
Owing to the immoral ways of the
Baila, it is doubtful whether such
a thing as virginity is to be found
among them, and they seem to
have no word to express the idea.
The word nakadiiido means a
young woman.
Virtue, n. 4. banta.
Virtuous, say, of virtue, -a banta.
Visible, to be, v. i. ku boneka.
Visit, to, v, t, ka awaya.
Visitor, n. i. moawaahi.
Voice, ik. 3. iawi \ n. 2. intilomo.
Vomit, to, v. i. ka luka. To cause
to vomit, V. /. ka lusha.
Voraciously, adv. chabatambo.
Voracity, u. 4. batambo.
Vulture, if. 1 a. ahikobe '; //. ba-
ahikobe.
Wade, to, v.uyox vhoma.
Wag, to, v. i. ka fwiaauka ; v, /.
ku fwiaaola. To wag the head,
pMr, ku aunganya mofewi.
362
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Wages, n, 7. shalmliola.
Waggon, n. S./or. inkoloi.
Wail, to, v. i. ku dila.
Waist, n. 7. ohibunu.
Wait, to, v. i. ku dinda, ku di-
ndila. To wait for something,
some one, v. t, ku dindidila. To
wait a long time, v, i. ku bu-
nduka.
Wale, left by whip or stick in beat-
ing, If. a. mukofu.
Walk, to, v, i, ku enda. To walk
listlessly, through sorrow or weari-
ness, V, i, ku lembaila, ku le-
ngaila. To walk on tiptoe,
stealthily, v. i. ku nanaila, ku
sobelela.
Walking-stick, n, 2. musako.
Wall, ontside-wall of house, n, 4.
bwanda. Division-wall in house,
n, 2. moxnbe. Wall of brick or
stone, ft, 5. ipupi.
Wall- PLATE, n, i a. shamanga.
Wallow, to, v. t . ku kandana.
Wander, to, v, i. ku zhidika.
Wanderer, n. 1. muzhidishi.
Want, to, v. t, ku langa, ku ka-
pula. To like, v, /. ku zanda.
To lack, be without, v»L ku
bula. To be in want of food, v. i.
ku kopoka. To be in need, poor,
V, i, ku ovhulwa, ku puta.
War, n. 8. inkondo. Of continuous
fighting, H. 9. lumamba.
Ward, to, to parry, fend, v, t, ku
kobela.
Ward-stick, a stick used for parry-
ing spears, n. 7. ohikobezho.
Wardrobe, n, 7. ohibikilo. A
box used for storing away clothes
in, n, 7. obianga.
Warm, to be, v. u ku kasala. To
warm, v.U ku kasazha. To
warm up meat, v,L ku enzu-
nuna.
Warm, adj,. -kasazlii.
Warmth, n, 5. kukasala.
Warn, to, v, t, ku bula.
Warp, to, v.u ku kombomana;
V, t. ku kombomeka.
Warped, adJ, -koinbomen«,
-konkomene.
Warrior, n, 1 a, shilmnaiaba.
Was, aux. Ka is the sign of the
past tense; e.g. He was here
yesterday, Kadi ano ozona.
Wash, to, v.i. ku samba; v.t.
ku saxLzha. To wash very tho
roughly, v. t, ku ohokola.
Washing, n. 5. kusamba.
Washing-place, ». a.musambilo,
ft. 7. ohisambilo.
Waste, to, v. t. ku sowaila.
Wasteful person, prodigal, «. i.
mutaka.
Watch, to, v, i. ku dindila.
Watch, n. *i for. chikati.
Watcher, n. i. mudindizhi.
Water, n. 3. //. menzhi.
Water, to, flowers, v^etables,
V. t. ku tandudwila.
Waterfall, n. 2, mwezhi. A
cataract, n. 7. obigumo.
Water-hole, n. 2. mukalo.
Water-lily: stem us^ in making
snuff, n. 2. mudidima. Root
of, n. 8. imb6.
Wattle, used in building, n, ^(u
lubalo. Wattle put on top of
wall before roofing, lubalo Iwa
ohilongolongo.
Wave, on river, n. 8. inkuahita,
inkwishita.
Wave, to, of grass, v. i. ku peka.
Wax, in ear, n. la. shimpuluku-
twi. Beeswax, n. 4. bunvuka.
Way, road, n. 8. Inzhila. Manner,
custom, n. 7. ohianza.
Waylay, to, v, /. ku fiimpa.
We, /^ers. pro, Tu, ITswe. See
chap. V of Grammar.
Weak, to be, v.u ku leng^aka,
ku lengauka, ku bomba ; e.g.,
We are weak with hunger, Twa
lengaukila nzala.
Weak-sighted, to be, v.i. ku
ohesha.
Weak-sighted person, n. \a.
uobesha-o-menso.
Wealth, n. 3.//. mabono.
Wean, to, v.t. ku fttngula. To
be weaned, v. i. ku ftmguka.
Weaned, adj. -ftingushi.
Wear, to, v. i, ku sama. To wear
a cloth to cover the whole body,
v.i. ku yamba. To wear any-
ENGLISH.ILA VOCABULARY
353
thing over one shonlder and tinder
the arm, v, U ku pskata.
Weasel, if . i o. kabwind«.
Wbariness, n, 3. fi, makatalo.
Weary, to be, v. i, ku katala, ku
ftmuka. To wearj, v.t, ku
ftinuna.
Weary, adj, -ftumahi.
Weave, to, v, t. ku loka.
Wed, to, of the man, v,U ku
twala. Of the woman, v. pcLss,
ku twalwa.
Wedding, n. 4. bwinga.
Wedding feast, n, 3.//. madia-
nshima.
Weed, ». 8. insaku.
Weed, to, v, /. ku saila.
Week, n, %*for» iviki, pL maviki.
Weep, to, v, i. ku dila. Weep
for, V, t. ku didila.
Weevil, same name as borer insect,
ff. I a. sfaikabusunipwe.
Weight, it. 4. bulemu.
Well, if. 2. mukalo.
Well, adv. kabotu. Expressed
also in intensive species of the
verb.
Wen, on the head, if. 8. insefu.
It is given this name because it
is supposed that if one grumbles
about his share of eland meat
(musefii) he will be punished by
having an inaefo.
W^EST, If. 8. imbo. Towards the
west, adv. kumbo. In the west,
€utv, ambo, mumbo.
Wet, moist, adj, -teke.
What, inter, pro, Nzhi P What
is this? OhinzhichechlP What
do you say ? VITa amba nzhi ?
Wheel, of waggon, if. 3. itende
dia nkoloi.
When, adv, udidi P didie P udi-
die P Ni.
Where, adv. ukwi ? kwi P
Whereas, conj, anokuti, anu.
W^HEREFORE, coftj. kambo nzhi P
Whet, to, sharpen a knife, v,t.
ku kwanga.
Whey, if. 2. menze, if. 8. intoya
(Lumbu).
Which, -die; e.g. Which thing?
Chintu chidie P The tel. pro.
which will be found fully ex>
plained in chap. v.
Whip, n. 2. mutatula.
Whirlwind, if. i a. kambizhi.
Whiskers, if. 2. mulevhu.
Whisper, to, v, t, ku tepekezha,
ku nongotezha. To whisper to
each other, v. i. ku tepekezhana.
Whistle, to, v. t. ku shiba.
Whistle, if. 2. mulozhi. This
refers to the noise made with the
lips. A kind of manufactured
whistle is, if. 8. ingolwa.
White, to be, v.t. ku tuba.
White of t^%^ n. 7. chilekete.
Who, inter, pro. Ni ? e.g. Who
is be ? Nguni P Who are you ?
Ndimweni P
Whole, -onse ; e.g. the whole
village, munzhi onae.
Whosoever, oni oni, ng^uni
nguni, muntu udi buti.
Why, <idv. This is expressed by
the reL sp. of the verb and the
intern nzhi P Thus : Why has
he come ? "We zila nzhi P It
is also expressed by, Kambo
nzhi P Chinzhi P Thus : Why
do you do so? Kambo nzhi
nkuchitabodiaP Chinzhi nohu
chita bodia P
Wickedly, adv. chamafunzi.
Wickedness, if. 3. //. mafonzi,
n. 4. bubi, bubiabe.
Wide, to be, v. i. ku kwazama.
Wide, adj. -kwazeme.
Widen, to, v. t. ku kwazamika.
Widow, Widower, n. i. muka-
mufa.
Wife, n. i. mukazhi. My wife,
mwinangu. Thy wife, mwinako;
his wife, mwinakw'e. My wives,
benangu; our wives, benesu, &c.
Wife of a chief, n. 1. modi.
Principal wife, n. i a. nabu-
kando. Inferior wife, if. i a,
nabwaniche, nabushonto. A
favourite wife, if. \a. naku-
funwa. My fellow wife, muka-
zhima. See Fellow.
Wild, fierce, adj. -kadi.
Wild-dog, n. \a. musaka, pi.
bamusaka, umpi, //. baumpi.
A a
364
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
Wildebeest, n. i a. munyumbwi,
//. bamunyumbwi. A small,
young kanga-manyuinbwL
Wilderness, n. 8. inyika; n, 5.
kuxnanizha.
Will, n, 5. kuzanda; n, 9. lu-
zando.
Willingly, adv, ohakuzanda,
ohaluzando.
Wind, h, a. muwo. A strong
wind, n. 3. ikunku.
Wind, to, v. t. ku vhiinga.
Window, n. 7. chimbone.
Wine, n. z-fi^- iveni.
Wing, n, 3. ibaba.
Wink, to^ phr. ku ponda dinso.
To winic at somebody, ku mu
pondela dinso.
Winnow, to, v. t, ku seba.
Winter, tu 2. mweto.
Wipe, to, v, t. ku shula.
Wisdom, n. 4. busongo.
Wise, to be, v, u ku sauta. To
become wise, v, i. ku songwala,
ku ba musongo, ku dimbuluka.
Wise person, n, i. musongo.
Wisely, adv. ohabusongo.
Wish, to, v. /. ku aeza. To wish
for, V. t. ku zanda.
Witch, n, i. mulozhi. Way,
custom, manner of witch, n, 7.
chilo-zhi-lozhi.
Witchcraft, n, 4. bulozhi.
With, prep. o.
Wither, to, v.i, ku zuma. Of
things withering in the heat, v. i,
ku ompoka, ku ny ata, ku kusa.
Of things dried np by heat and
destroyed, pAr. ku pia shukutu.
Within, adv. mukati.
Without, to be, to lack, v, i, ku
bula, ku budila. To cause to
be without, v. t. ku budizha.
Without, outside, adv* ansengwe,
kunsengwe.
Witness, n, 1 . muzangi.
Witness, to bear, v, /. ku zanga.
To bear false witness, v,t, ku
tamikizha, ku lengelela.
Woman, n. 1, mukaintu, muka-
zhi. Several women, n,ia, lu*
tsaiipl. balukazi. A pregnant
woman, n. i. umiahi, mufumba.
A bad woman, n, 7. obikaintu.
Small or weak woman, n. 6. ka-
kaintu. A large woman, n. 3.
ikaintu. A woman whose chil-
dren all die, n, la, namantezi.
A young woman, n, la, naka-
dindo.
Womanishly, custom, manner, way
of a woman, ckikaintu.
Womb, n. 3. izhadilo.
Wonder, n. 3. //. malweza.
Wonder, to, v. pass, ku Iwezwa.
Wood, a piece of wood, n. 7. ohi-
samo. Firewooil, n, 9. lukuni.
Woodpecker, n, la, shimuko-
nkomona.
Wool, n, 4. boza.
Word, n, 3. izwi.
W^ORK, If. a. mudixno ; if. a. for,
mubeleko.
Work, to, v. t, ku beleka, phr,
ku mana midizno. To cease
work in master's absence, v, i, ku
disanta. To work without a
will, to be sick of work, v. u ku
ohimwa. To engage in different
kinds of work, v, t, ku adika.
Worker, n, i. mubeleki. A good
worker, if. i. mulondo. A bad
worker, if. i. mudiwo.
Workshop, if. 7. chiohitilo.
World, the earth, if. 7. inshi.
Mankind, if. 1. pi. bantu.
Worm, if. 3. iumba. Found in
meat, maggot, if. 3. iseni.
Worse, to be, v. i. ku satisha.
Worship, to, v. /. ku komba, ku
lambila.
Worthy, v,i. ku ela, ku ezha.
He is worthy of praise, Udi elele
kutembaulwa. I am not worthy,
Shiezhi.
Wound, to, v, t. ku yasa.
Wound, n. 7. ohipolo.
Wrath, ik. 4. bukadi.
Wrestle, to, v, /. ku kwatana.
Wriggle, to, as snake, v,i, ku
endenda.
Wring, to, clothes, v./. ku pisa,
ku nyona, ku nyononona.
Wrinkle, on forehead, if. 8. inku-
Bhila, inkuaa. Between eye-
brows^ If. 6. kaimba,//. twimba.
ENGLISH-ILA VOCABULARY
355
Wrist, n, a. mudhikwatabakoftL
Write, to, v,t. ka ngwala, ku
lemba.
Writer, n, i. munswadi.
Writing, it. 4. bulembo.
Yard, n. 7. ohimpate.
Yawn, n, 2, mwao. The man
yawns, Montu u la dya mwao ;
"w^ ya mwao.
Ye, ^ers. pro, mu.
Yea, adv, e, eya.
Year, it. a. mwaka.
Yeast, it. 4. bmnena.
Yes, ado. e, eya.
Yesterday, adv, oaona.
Yoke, n.\a, for. yoko,//. bayoko.
Yon, Yonder, wedia, &c. See
list of dem, pros, in chap, v of
the Grammar,
Yolk, of tgg^ n, 9. mnahinda.
Young, adj. -pia.
Youngster, n, i. kangashike-
mbeahi.
Your, poss, pro. -inn. See chap.
V of Grammar,
Youth, n. i . mwaniche.
Youthfully, ach. ohaniohe.
YouTHFULNESS, If. 4. bwaniolie.
Zealous, to be, phr, kn ba sbi-
moBomwi.
Zealous ferson^ n. la. shimo-
Bomwi.
Zebra, n.jo, ohibisi.
Zinc, m. 3.^. iaenka.
end of part u
a a 2
PART III
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
A. The Yowel has two sounds — a as
in father, a as in mat For the
modifications which take place
when a comes into collision with
other vowels, see Gram.^ chap, it,
sect, 2.
A. (i) gen, part, cl. 3, 4, 5, 9 a. //.
As a preposition, of^ it is used to
form all the gen. parts.
(2) prefix^ in conj. forms of
subs. pro. it gives the idea of
withy andy even.
(3) pfi^s,pro, 3/., used in past
tenses with nouns of d. i ; also in
snbj. mood; cl, 3, 4, 5, ga,pl,
(4) ret, pro, in d. mentioned
above.
(5) loc, pref, and prep, — on,
upon, from off. Sec
(6) imperative part., with subj.,
let.
Aba, ku (-^kwaba), v.t. to divide
in portions, allot, share, distribute;
perf. abile ; eg. shidyo shidi
abilwe, the food is divided.
Ab&lo, suds, pro, conj, alt, abo,
with them, even they ; e.g, na be
ende abalo, let them go, even
they. Tu le za ab&lo, we are
coming with them.
Ab^le, Tubs, pro. prep. 3 /. s. cl, i ,
him ; e.g. ko ya ku ab^le, go to
him, or, where he is.
Abika, ku, v,i, cap, aba, to be
divisible ; e.g, ob eobi nohisb onto,
ta ohi abika, this is small, it'
cannot be divided.
Abila, ku, v. t, rel, aba, to divide
among, distribute to ; ku diabila,
to allot to oneself; ngabila,
allot to me ; e.g. mwami wa
abila bantu bakwe shidyo, the
chief distributes food to his people.
Abil&na, kti, v.t, rel. rec, aba, to
divide among each other ; perf. abi-
lene ; e.g. bantu ba la abilana
shidyo nshi nda ba pa, the people
divide among each other the food
I gave them.
Abil^ya, ku, v,t, rel, rec, caus,
aba, used of two men who lend
each other their wives for immoral
purposes. Syn, ku senanya.
Abizh&, ku, v. t. rel, caus, aba, to
cause to distribute to.
Abizh&na, ku, v,t, rel, caus. rec.
aba, to caase to share among
each other; e.g. u ba abizhane
tombwe, let them divide the
tobacco among themselves.
Abo, subs. pro. conj. 3 /. pi., cl. 4. j.
with them, even they; with it,
even it.
Achlsha, voc. of uachisha, uncle.
Achizhizho, adv, in the evening;
i.e. when the evening meal is
finished and the people gather
around the fires.
Acho, subs, pro. conj. 3 p. j. cL 7,
with it, even it.
Adia, dem, pro, cl, 3, 4, 5, ^a,pL
yonder.
Adie ? int, pro, cl, 3, 4, 5, 9 a, pL
which?
Adfka, ku, v, t. to marry more than
one wife; to engage in different
kinds of work ; to serve two
masters.
Adio, subs. pro. conj, 3/. 5, cl, 3,
with it, even it.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
35r
Afwifwi, adv, near, close hj.
Al, irUerj, expresses a sadden feel-
ing of pain.
Alma, ifUerj, Not 1 1 No fear !
Akabdnsha-beemb^zhi, cuto, in
the early afternoon, about 3 p.m.
Ak6k6, intefj, expresses reproof.
Akalend^bwe, aijtu, midday.
Akand6, ttdv, greatly, very much.
Akati, ado, between, among.
Akata a, or^ ka, prep, between,
among.
Ako, subs » pro. conj, 3/. s, cL 5, 6,
with it, even it.
Alab&na, ku, v, u to roll over and
over.
Alabinya, ku, 9. /. caus. alabana,
to roll over and over.
Alala, kOy v, /. to pray.
Alatika, ka, v. u to be in pain, to
turn over and over in pain, to be
imable to sleep with pain ; to be
parched.
Alatila, ku, v,t, to turn a thing
over and over ; to parch ; e,g,
miiBhinBO wesu wa ta alanla,
this journey makes us thirsty,
parches us.
-alanflhi, adj» parched, suffering.
Alo, subs, pro, conj, 3/. x. cl, g,ga,
with it, even it; also sub. pro.
simple^ el. 3, 4, 5, 9^. //. they,
themselves.
Alumtika, ka, v.i. to roll, as a
horse.
Azna, ka, v.t, to throw up into the
air as in the game ' intela '.
Amba, ko, v. t. to speak, to say, to
think.
Ambadi, cuh. at the side.
Ambadi ^^prep. by the side of.
Ambele, ado. ahead, before, in front.
Ambidila, ko, v. t, rel. amba, to
speak on behalf of, intercede for.
Ambila, ko, v,U rel, amba, to
speak to, to say to; ngambila,
speak to me. Mwa ambil&
nshi P Why do you speak ?
Ambisha, ka, v.t, int. amba, to
speak much, to speak loudly.
Axnbishlzha, ka, v.t, int. rel,
amba. Mwa ambishizha nshi ?
Why do you speak so loudly ?
Axnbo, adv. in the west
Amboka, ka, v. i. stat, ambola, to
turn aside, to leave a path when
travelling ; hence,^^. to leave the
path of rectitude, to go astray, to
fall away ; also of children going
to the bush. Riddle: Twa ke
enda o ba ch'ambaka-mboka.
We travelled with those who were
continually turning out of the
path. Ans. A dog.
Ambtila, ka, v, t, to put something
out of the road, to take aside.
Ambalaka, ka, v. i, rev. stat, amba,
to be unsaid, altered, changed, of
news, orders ; retracted.
Ambaldla, ko, v. t. rev, amba, to
unspeak, to unsay, to retract ; e.g.
Nda ambolola babonambanda
ka amba ozona, I retract what I
said yesterday. 8h' ambolola,
osono mbobona, I don't unsay ;
to-day it is the same,
-amboloshi, adj, changed, re-
tracted.
Ambusha, ko, v. t. stat. eaus. am-
bola, to cause somebody to turn
out of the road ; Jig^, to lead
somebody away, astray.
Ambwene, conj. perhaps.
Ambya, ko, v. t, caus. amba, to
cause to speak ; ko diambya, to
speak to oneself, nobody being
present ; such a person said to be
a wizard.
Ame, subs, pro, conj. i /, j. with
me, even me, even L
Amebo, emph, ame.
Ampa, ko, v. t. to touch.
Amp&sha, ko, v. i. to grope about
in the dark.
Amwe, subs. pro. conj, 2 p. pi,
with you, even you.
Amwebo, emph, amwe.
-ana, suffix to verbs, forms ree. sp.
Ana, ko, v,t, to narrate a loano
{q, v.).
Anda, ka, v. t, to open an abscess,
to stamp dry mealies without
putting in water, to cut notches
in ear of animal; pass, andwa,
to be frozen ; e.g, menshi a
andwa, the water is frozen ; also,
358
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
split; isamo dia ka andwa
Jjeza, the tree is split by light-
ning ; fig' Nda mu anda lubilo
munyama, I chase and kill an
animal, ue, I run it down.
Andina, ku, v. i, rec, anda, to be
separate, divided, different ; perf,
andene ; e.g. baidi andene, they
are separate, different.
Andanina, ku, v. /. rec, reL anda,
to be separate from, divided ; petf,
andanine, e.g, badi andanine,
they are separate from each other.
Andanya, ku, v. t, rec, caus, anda,
to divide, to separate.
-andaushi, cuij, cut, chopped up.
Inkuni ingandaushi, chopped
up firewood.
Andauka, ku, v. /. per, rep, anda,
to split up, chop up; e.g, ko
andaula nkuni, chop up the fire-
wood.
-andene, adj, separate, different,
. diverse.
Andaula, ku, v, i, per, rep. anda,
to be split up.
Anduka, ku, v. i, stat, anda, to be
torn, split ; e.g, oha anduka
ohisamo, the log is split
Andula, ku, v, t. to tear, split, rip,
divide, to rend (as a wild beast
rends prey) ; e,g. u ta ku andula
isani, you must not tear the
cloth.
Anga, ku, v. t, to tie, to bind, fasten ;
perf. . angile ; ku dianga, to tie
oneself ; nganga, tie me ; e,g.
shintu shidi angilwe chile, the
things are tied into a bundle ; fig,
• . mafuta a dianga, the fat solidi-
fies, congeals.
Angaika, ku, v, i, pers, rep, anga,
to fasten up (of a lot of things).
Ang&na, ku, v.t, rec. anga, to tie
each other; e,g, badi angene,
. they are tied together; fig, ma-
futa a angana, the fat congeals.
-angene, adj. congealed, coagu-
lated ; mafuta angene, congealed
, fat.
Angldila, ku, z/. /. rel, anga, to tie
^ things together, to tie on to ; e,g,
.wa angidila shintu shimwi ku
muzhiu, he ties other things on
to his load.
Angika, ku, v, t. to fasten up.
Angisha, ku, v, t, int, anga> to tie
tightly, firmly.
Anguliiika, ku, v, i, rev, stcU, anga,
to be untied, unfastened.
Angulula, ku, v^ t, rev, anga, to
untie, release.
Angulul&na, ku,z'./. rev, rec, anga>
to untie each other.
Angnilwila, ku, v, t, rev, rel,
anga, to untie for.
Anguntlna, ku, same as angrulula.
Anjele, n, \a,for, an angel.
Anjila, ku, v, t, to take something
from another by force ; e,g, "weBO
muntu u la anjila shintu
shangu, that person takes away
my things, saying they are his.
Ank&nka, adv, in all directions.
Ano, Iqc, dem, adv. here, on this place.
Anokliti, conj, whereas, but; e.g,
twa lamga bintu bedia okoya
mbishonto, anokuti mbikando
ohinichini, we see those things
as if they were small, whereas
they are very large.
Ans^ngwe, cidv, outside.
Ansengwe, ku, or, tkyprep, outside of.
Ansh6, canj, except, unless; e.g,
mu ta Thwi mono ansha
munyokwenu e size kono, you
do not leave here unless your
brother come here.
Anshi, he, form of inshi, used as
adv, down, on the ground.
Antela, conj, perhaps, lest; e.g,.
u ta ku chita bodia antela u
la f wa, yon must not do so lest
you die.
Ant6mwi, euiv, together, altogether.
Root of the wo^ is the obsolete
ntu, seen also in kuntu ; it ap-
pears to mean on onephue,
Anu, conj. but, whereas.
Ansa, ku, v. t. to disclose, open up ;
e.g, ba mu ansa makani, they
disclose the affairs to him, i,e,
after they have been hidden a long
time. Muntu u la ansa kala-
mbwe, the person begins to dig
(open up) a pit.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
359
Ansa, kUy 9. /• to ttnun, as beer or
honey.
Anaha, ka,9.iL cams, anga^ to cause
or help to tie.
ATiaha, ko, v,t. to salute.
Hganaha, salute me.
Anshfta. ka, v, /. to haog up, fix np.
Ku anaMlra inkaoso, to stack
up mealies.
Anahikfla, ku, v. /. rgi, anahlka,
to hang np for, fix np for.
Nganahikila, hang np for me.
Anshikfsha, ka, 9. /. ini. anahlka,
to hang np wdl, fix np strongly.
AnBhfah4, ku, rel, anaha, salute
on behalf of. Hganahiaha,
salute on my behalf.
Ao, s$t6s. pro. 3 p, pi. cl, 3> 4* 5* 9 <»>
with them, even they.
Asho, subs, prm, conj. 3 p. pi. cL 7,
8, 9, with them, even th^.
Aahonto, adv. little.
Aswa, subs, pro. conj. 2 p. pi. with
ns, we also, even we.
Aawebo, emph. aawe, we, even we
ourselves.
Ato, ku, V. f. to be crowded ; e.g,
ahintii aha ata, the things are
crowded. Bantu ba ata, the
people are crowded, they have no
room.
Ata, ko, V. U to go to sleep with a
friend's wife.
Atela, conj. perhaps, but
Ati, conj. that, in order that.
Always used to introduce a direct
quotation, following amba. "Wa
amb' ati, he says diat.
Ati na, conj, whether.
Ato, subs, pro. conj. 3 /. pi. cl. 6,
with them, even they, they also.
Aw&, he. dtm. adv. here, at this
plaice.
Aw6, he. dem. adv. there, on or at
that place.
Awo, subs, pro. conj. 3 /. s, cl, a,
with it, even it, it also.
Ayo, subs. pro. conj. 3 /. s. cl. 8,
also cl, 2 pi. with it, even it, it
also; with them, they also, even
they.
k, dtm. pro. pi. cl. 3, 4, 5, 9*1,
these.
Aae, subs. pro. conj. 2 and 3 p. s,
with thee, even thee, thou also,
with him, even he, he also, him
also.
As6bo, emph. ase.
Aao, dim. pro, cl, 3, 4, 5 cmd^a. pi.
those.
B. Consonant pronounced as ^ in
bone. It has also a slightly ex-
plosive sound as in ku bala, to
read.
BA. (i) //. classr. cl. i.
(a) pers. and rel. pro. cl, i,pl,
(3) ^w»« I^^' cl. I. //.
Ba, ku, V, i. to be, to become ; e.g,
muntu a la ba muteu, the
person will be, or become, a thief.
The subj. form is be; e.g. mbe
mnahike wako, let me be thy
slave. Mumoni no be o, let
there be light. The neg. form is
bi ; e.g. u ta bi muteu, thou
must not be a thief.
Ba, contr. form of iba ; e.g. ba la
ba, for ba la iba, they steal.
Baba, dem. pro, cl. i. //. these.
Baba^ ku, v. i. to itch. Muntu
wa babwa, the person itches.
Mubidi wa baba, the body
itches.
Babata, ku, v.i. to limp, to be
lame with fatigue.
Babele, subs, pro. prep. 3 /• //. f ^ i »
them.
Babo, dem, pro. cl, i. //. those.
Bab^ka, ku, v. i. to be scorched.
Babula, ku, v. i, to scald slightly,
scorch slightly.
Babya, ku, v.t. to sting (as a
nettle).
Badia, dem. pro, cl. i. //. yon,
yonder.
Badika, ku,9./. caus. bfilA, to assist
another in patting a load on his
back, to put a child on the back
of a woman.
Badikila, ku, v. t. caus. rel, bftU,
to give a girl presents with a view
to marriage.
Badisha, ku, v. i, int. bfila, to ex-
ceed greatly.
Balna, n, i. no sing, his mother.
36o
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Bakana, ku, v.i. to relieve each
other, as men do m carrying a
hammock.
Bfil&y kii, v.t, to carry on the
back.
Bala, kn, v, t, to pass beyond, to
pass by, to pass farther.
B&la, ku, V, t. to read, to count.
Balangala, ku, v. i, to break (of the
darkness), to be twilight.
Balo, subs. pro. 3 /. //. cl, i, they
themselves.
Balongo, n. i. pi. friends.
Balu, //. of mwaln, elder; e,g,
MbobanibaboP Mbalu? Who
are those ? They are elders. Balu
ba la amba bobo, the elders say
so. Idiom, my friend ; e,g. ndi-
twe b&lu, truly my friend.
Baxn^, n.i.no sing, my mother, my
aunt.
Bani6 bakando, my mother's
eldest sister.
Bamfi banicbe, my mother's
younger sister.
Bama, ku, v. t. to spread out (as a
bird its wings).
Bfimba, ku, v.t. to arrange, pre-
pare, put in order ; perf. bambile.
Ku baxnba xnapopwe, to stack
up mealies. Ku bamba imbe-
ta, to keep a law. Ku baxnba
bwizu, to put grass in order for
, inspection. Ku bamba isalo,
to peg out a skin. A mu
dlbambe, arrange yourselves,
fall in. Bantu badi bambile,
the people are arranged ; i.e.
they stand in line. — B is elided
when the pers. pro, m is pre-
fixed ; e.g. u la mamba, for u
la mbamba.
Bamb&na, ku, v. i, rec. bamba, to
arrange each other, to be close
together, to sit or stand abreast ;
perf. bambene, e^. bantu badi
bambene ,the people stand abreast.
Bambanyft, ku, v. /. rec, caus,
bamba, to place abreast, to com-
pare.
Bambasa, ku, v. u to be very tired,
unable to walk.
Bambisala, ku^ v, 1. to be level, to
crouch down close to the ground
in hiding; muntu wa bamba-
sala, the person crouches down ;
perf, bambasele; e.g. inzhila
idi bambasele, the road is level.
Bambasfka, ku, v.t, caus, ba-
mbasa, to make level ; e.g. a mu
bambasike inzhila ya mwami,
make ye level the chiefs road.
Bambasikfla, ku, v.t. caus. rel.
bambasa, to make level for ; e.g.
a mu bambasikile mwami in-
zhila, make ye level the road for
the chief. Ba la mambasikila
inzhila, they level the road for
me.
Bamblla, ku, v. t. rel. bamba, to
prepare, put in order, for some-
body; e.g. a mu mambile isalo,
peg out the skin for me.
Bambfsha, ku, v. t, int. bamba, to
put carefully in order.
Bambula, ku, v. t, to crucify. The
word originally applied to the
stretching out tightly and pegging
of a skin.
Bambulula, ku, v.t, rev. bamba,
to unpeg a hide when dry.
Bami, n. i.pl. ^ mwami, chiefs.
Bamwana-kasua, my paramours,
partners in initiation dances.
Bamwana-kasuanina, his para-
mours, partners in initiation
dances.
Bana, //. of mwana, children.
Banaohishfi, n. i. pi. of muna-
ohisha, people of our home,
or country,
Banaishfi, n. i. pi, of munaisha,
our home, people of our home ;
e.g. tu la ya ku banaSshi, we
are going home.
Banakwabo, //. of munakwabo,
their people.
Banakwako, pi, of munakwako,
thy people.
Banakw&kwe, //. of munak-
wakwe, his people.
Banakw&nffU) pl» of munak-
wangu, my people.
Banakw^nu, //. of munakwenu,
the people of your home, family,
or tribe.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
361
Banakwtei, fl, of mtmakwesn,
the people of our fJEunily, tribe, or
nation.
BSiid% kn, 9. /. to name, to call by
name, to speak one's name, to
praise ; e.g, a mu dibande, give
ye yonr names. Ba la banda
nrwami, they praise the chief, i,e,
by speaking his names.
Bftndika, ku, v, t, cans, banda, to
converse, to talk together, to dis-
cuss ; e.g. nda ka bandika aze,
I talked with him. Ku la ban-
dikwa ohiftimo, it will be talked
over, discussed, in the morning.
Bftnga, ku, v./. to knock ont the
teeth (11a feishion).
Bfogabibiga, ka, v. i. to be hot to
the taste, as pepper.
Bangtila, ka, v. t. to extract a thorn.
Baniohe, if. i. //. of mwaziiche,
youngsters, young people.
Banini, so and so ; e,g, ka badi
banini, nda luba mashina abo,
they were so and so, I forget their
names.
BanjidHa, ko, v, t. rel. banjila, to
lebind, as when a fence gets out
of repair.
Banjila, ko, 9. /. to bind the wattles
on a fence with string.
Bandko, n,i,no sing, thy mother.
Banokw6bo, n. i. no sing, their
mother.
Banokw^no, n, 1, no sing, your
mother.
Banokw^sn, i». i. no sing, our
mother.
Bantaz&la, ko, v, i. to hide away
in the grass in fear.
BanBa> ku, v.t. to extract grain
from a bin, leaving the rest.
Banzela, ka, v.t. rel. banza, to
take ont grain for somebody or
something ; e.g. manzela ma-
popwe, take out some maize for me.
Banzfsha, ko, v, t. int. banza, to
take much grain out of a bin.
Bapatiza, ka, v. t. for. (Eng. bap-
tize), to baptize.
Bapatizha, ka, v, t.forcaus. bapa-
tiza, to baptize wUh, to cause or
help to baptize.
Basa, ku, v. t. to colotu', to paint.
Basama, n. J. pi. of mos&ma, my
equals, those who were initiated
with me, my fellow initiates. Tu
di o bas&ma, we are fellow
initiates.
Bas&ndkwfibo, n. i. pi, ^mu8&-
n6kw&bo, their fellow initiates.
Ba8&n6kw6na, n. i. pi. of musa-
ndkw^na, your fellow initiates.
Bas&ndkw^su, n. 1. pi. of masa-
ndkw^su, our fellow initiates.
Baahasuna, n. i a. pi. people of to-
day.
Batamina, ku, v.i. to settle (of
dirty water), to subside (of the
wind).
Baush&bo, if. i. //. of ushabo,
their fathers.
Baushe, if. i. //. of ushe, his
fathers.
Baush^nu, n. i. //. of ushenu,
their fathers.
Baush^su, If. I.//, ^ushesu, our
fathers.
Bauso, If. i.pl.of U80, thy fathers.
Bazha, ku. v.t. caus. bala, to sur-
pass. Used in forming the com-
parison of adjectives. See chap,
iv, sect. 2,
Bazhichema, if. i. pi. of muzhi-
chema, my fellow slaves. Tndi
o bazhichema, we are fellow
slaves.
Bazhichenina, if. i.//. his fellow
slaves.
Bazhichendk^su, if. i. //. our
fellow slaves.
Bazhichendko, if. i. pi, thy fellow
slaves.
Bazhichen6kw&bO| if. i. //. their
fellow slaves.
Bazhichendkw^nu, if. i. pi, yonr
fellow slaves.
Bazhile, if. 1. //. of muzhile,
mostly used in pi., sister-in-
law.
Bazhil^ besu, our sister-in-law, or,
sisters-in-law.
Be, subj.form of ku ba, to be.
Be, contr. subj. form of ku iba
(kwiba), to steal.
Bea, ku, v, t, to tell a lie, to deceive.
362
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ku amba twaxnbo twa kubea,
to tell lying tales.
Beba, ku, v. i. to repent.
Bebela, kn, v.t. rel. beba, to repent
for, to repent about, because of;
e,g. ba la bebela nsuwe, they
repent because of him — i.e. one
was punished for disobedience,
now his fellow workers repent for
fear of also being punished.
Beb^sha, ku, v, t. rel, cans, beba,
to cause to repent, as by making
one an example to the rest by
punishing him.
Beka, ku, v.i. to shine, to glitter,
to be blight as brass, &c.
Beka, ku (or, ku beSka), cap. bea,
to be deceivable, to hp credulous.
B6kab6ka, ku, v. i, redupl, beka,
to shine intermittently.
-beke-beke, adj. shining intermit-
tently; e.g. nda ka bona chintu
chibekebeke, I saw a thing shin-
ing intermittently.
Bek^ma, ku, v. i. to shine brightly,
to be brought to a state of bright-
ness.
Bek6na, ku, v. i, to shine, be bright.
Bek6nya, ku, v. t. to shine np, to
brighten, to polish.
Bela, ku, v. t, rel, ba, to be for,
become for.
Bele, petf, ku ba, to be, to be-
come. Wezo muutu udi bele
mupushi, that person has become
a pauper.
Beleka, ku, v. t,for, (Teb. beleka),
to work.
Belek61a, ku, v. t, rel, beleka, to
work for, to serve.
B61el6ka, ku, v, i, to totter, to walk
slowly.
Ben&bo, n, \,pl. ^mwinabo, their
wives.
Ben6ko, n, 1. pi. ^mwinako, thy
wives.
Ben&kwe, n, \,pl.of mwinakwe,
his wives.
Ben&ngu, n, i. //. my wives.
B§nda, ku, v. i, to creep up after
game, to go in a bending position,
to creep stealthily.
BSnda, ku, v, t, to peel potatoes, &c.
BSndela, ku, v,t. rel, benda, to
peel for. Uwe, mendela imba-
ta slieshi, I say, you, peel these
potatoes for me.
Bend6sha, ku, v. i. int, benda, to
creep very carefully, to stalk very
. quietly and carefully.
BSnd^sha, ku, v, t. int. benda, to
peel very carefully, well.
Bendtika, ku, v, i, to be chipped,
as edge of a basin.
Bendtila, ku, v, t, to chip.
Bendtisha, ku, v. t, cans, benduka,
to cause to be chipped, to chip.
-bendushi, adj.^ chipped ; eg,
mutiba mubendushi, a chipped
basin.
Ben^nu, n, i.pl. your wives.
Ben6su, n, i. //. our wives.
Beni, n. 1. pi. of mwini, masters;
also used idiomatically, others.
Mapopwe aza nga beni, this
maize belongs to others ; also to
mean, yourselves, as in the sen-
tence, mudi o beni, it is to your-
selves, it is your business (not ours).
Binzhina, n. 1. pi. iT/'mwenBhina,
his neighbours, his companions.
Bdnzhin6ko, n. i. //. of mw^en-
Bbinoko, thy neighbours.
Benzhin6kw&bo, n, i. //. of
mwenzhindkw&bo, their neigh-
bours, their companions.
Benzhin6kw6nu, n. 1. //. of
mwenzhindkw^nu, yonr neigh-
bours, your companions.
Bdnzhindkw^su, n, i. //. <if
niwenzhin6kw68u, our neigh-
bours.
Bdnsu, n. i. //. ^T^mwenau, travel-
lers, strangers, guests.
BenBtima, n, i,pl. ^mwenslima,
my neighbours, my companions,
my fellow travellers.
Bdshfi, ku, v,t. to tell lies about
one, to calumniate.
Bet^ka, ku, v.i, to judge, to govern.
Betek^la, ku, v, t, rel. bet6ka, to
judge on behalf of.
Betek^sha, ku, v. t, int, beteka, to
judge carefully, well, at length.
Bet^sha, ku, v, t, caus. beteka, to
help, cause to jndge, to set one
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
363
at lib^ty as innocent after judge-
ment.
BSsa, ka, v, /. to woik in wood, to
carve, to adze, to plane.
BSsela, ku, v. i. ret. beaa, to carve
for, to work in wood for; e.g.
mbesela mutiba, carve a basm
for me.
BSa^sha, ku, v.t. int. beaa, to
work in wood careiiilly, welL
BSsli6, ka, V, t. caus. besa, to cause
to carve, to woik in wood ¥rith,
to help to work in wood; e.g.
bezha imbeio aaho, carve with
this tooL
BSzultika^ ko, v. i. rev, stat, beaa,
to be recarved.
BSzululay ku, v.t. rev. beaa, to
recarve, to carve again ; as when
the head of a walking-stick is too
large, and the worker recarves it
and makes it smaller.
•beaalaahi, adj. recarved ; e.g.
mosako mubeauluahi, a re-
carved walking-stick.
Bi. (i) alt. classr. cl. 7. //.
(2) pers. and rel. pro. cl. 7. //.
Bl, n^. form of ku ba, to be.
Bi, contr. neg. form of ku Iba (kwi-
^t^) f ^*S^ ii^^ ^ ^i» yo^ mnst
not steal.
Bia, ka, v.i. to be bad, spoilt,
destroyed ; e.g. montn wezu wa
bia, this person is bad. Chintu
ohechi cha bia, this thing is
spoilt, destroyed,
•biabe, adj. bad, nasty, ngly ; e.g.
mnntn mubiabe, a bad person.
Bibele, n. i a. for. the Bible.
Bidintfka, ku, v. i. to palpitate, to
beat violently (of the heart) after
exertion.
Bidyo {or^ bidio), n. *l.pL food.
Biebi \
Biebo f dem. pro. cl. 7. //.
Biedia X these, those, yonder.
Bieno /
Bika, ku, v. t. to place, to put, to
appoint.
Bikfla, ku, v.t, rel. bika, to place
for, on behalf of.
Bikultiktilu, n. 7. //. of chikulu-
kulu, a quantity of rubbish, refuse.
Bila, ku, V. i. to boiL
Bila, ku, v.t. rel. bia, to be un-
suited to one, to be bad for ; e.g.
abikobelo aheshi aha mbila,
these clothes are no good for me,
they are unsuitable to me, they
don't fit me.
Bil6na, ku, v. i. to make haste, to
be swift, to travel quickly.
Bilinya, ku, v. t. caus. bilana, to
cause to be swift, to cause to
travel quickly.
Bil&ola, ku, v.t. to roll the eyes
about,
-bill, num. two ; e.g. bantu bobili,
two people. Ord. second ; e.g. Mu-
ntu owabili, the second person.
Bilwa, ku, pass, bila, to be dis-
contented, dissatisfied, unhappy.
Bimba, n. i a. a grasshopper
(Lumbu).
Bimba, ku, v.i. to be afraid, to
tremble, to shiver.
Bimb6, n. la. a kind of hawk.
(Also biznbile.)
Bimbile, n. 1 a. same as bimbe.
Bin da, ku, v. i. to be in a hurry, to
be pressed for time.
Bind&na, ku, v. i. rec. binda, to be
in a hurry, to be pressed for time.
It seems to be used of more than
one person, while binda is of one.
Bindanlsha, ku, v. i. int. bindana,
to be ill a great hurry.
Binga, ku, v. t. to drive (as cattle).
Bingila, ku, v.t, rel. binga, to
drive for, towards ; e.g. a mu
shi bingile kono, drive ye them
hither.
Bingisha, ku, v.t. int. binga, to
drive fast, hard.
Bintu, n. 7. alt, pi, of ohintu,
things.
Binzha, ku, v,t. caus, binga, to
cause or help to drive.
Binzha, ku, v.t. caus. binda, to
cause to hurry, to hurry.
Binzh&nya, ku, v. t. cans. rec. caus.
binda, to cause each other to
hurry, to make haste.
Bisha, ku, v. t. caus. bia, to destroy,
to make bad, to harm, to injure,
to violate.
3^4
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Bishabisha, ku, v, i, redupl, bisha,
to blaspheme,
-bishi, adj, raw, unripe.
Bishizha, ku, v. t. caus, rel. bia, to
destroy, &c., for somebody; e.g.
mbishizha mitiba yedia, destroy
for me yonder basins.
Bizwa, ku, v. i. to be ripe, to be
cooked; e.g. maila a la bizwa,
the grain is ripe. Musozha wa
bizwa, the pap is cooked.
-bo, poss. pro. 3 p. pi. cl. i, their,
theirs. Prefixed by gen. parts. ;
e.g. bazhike ba-bo, Sieir slaves.
Bo, num. part, cl, 4. sing.\ e.g.
bushiku bo-mwi, one day.
BOa, n. 4. mushroom.
Boba, ku, v. i. to call out in alarm
when seized, of the cry of a
wounded person or animal.
Bobili, num. cl. i,pl. two. Banta
bobili, two people.
Bobo. (i^ dem.pro. cl. 4. sing, that.
(2) cutv. thus, so.
Bobu, dem. pro. cl. 4. sing. this.
Bodi, n. 4. qaality, status of a chiefs
wife ; ladyship.
Bodia. (i) dem. pro, cl, 4. yon,
yonder,
(2) adv. thus, so.
(3) conj. as, seeing that.
Bodfsha, ku, v. i. to be very rotten,
putrid.
Bofu, n, 4. blindness.
BOla, ku, v.i, to be rotten, to be
decayed.
Bol6ka, ku, v. i. slot, bola, to be
decayable, to be corruptible ; v.t,
caus. sp. X.0 cause to rot, decay.
Bololo, n. \a.9, lazy, idle person.
BOmba, ku, v, i. to be soft ; to be
fatigued, exhausted ; to be meek,
subdued, bumble ; to be harmless;
to be easy ; to submit.
Bdmbe, n. i. //. of mombe,
calves.
BOmbeka, ku, v. t, caus. boxnba,
to put to soak in water, to soften,
to moisten, to sprinkle.
BOmbela., ku, v. i. rel. bomba, to
submit to, to be meek because of.
B0mbel61a, ku, v. i, rel. bomba, to
be weak on account of -something.
B0mb68ha, ku, v. i. int. bomba, to
be very soft, &c.
Bombo, n. 4. the condition of being
impotent sexually, of a male, im-
potence.
Bombola, ku, v.t. to take away,
applied to a man who takes away
his grandchildren*s things ; e.g,
kaka wa bombola sbintu
sheshu, my grandfather has taken
away our things.
Bombol6ka, ku, v. i. to break up,
of clods after rain.
Bombwe, n. i a, frog.
Bona, ku, v. /. to see ; pass, bonwa.
"Wa bonwa, you are seen (an Ila
salutation) ; perf. bwene.
Bon&na, ku, v, t, rec. bona^ to see
each other ; perf. bwenene.
Bon6ka, ku, v. i. cap. bona, to be
visible, apparent.
Bonela, ku, ) v. t. rel. bona, to
Bonena, ku, { see for, on behalf oC
Bonesha, ku, v. t. int. bona, to see
clearly, well, distinctly.
-boneshi, adj. visible, apparent.
Bdngo, If. 4. brains.
BOngo, If. I. //. of mongo, male
goats.
-bongvhu, adj. soft, easy.
Bonya, ku, v.t. caus, bona, to
cause to see, to show.
BOnz^sha, ku, v.t. caus, int,
bomba, to make very soft.
BOnzha, ku, v,t. caus. bomba, to
make soft, to soften, to humble,
to subdue, to tame (of cattle), to
break in.
Bdsha, ku, v. t. caus. bota, to make
good, to make right, to improve,
to correct, to amend ; e.g. mwami
wa beteka ku kubosha, the
chief judges justly.
Bosh^zha, ku, v. t. caus. rel. beta,
to make good for, to gladden,
please, to cheer.
Bota, ku, V. i. to be good, fine, nice.
Bot&twe, num. cl, i. //. three;
bantu botatwe, three people.
Bot61a, ku, V. t. rel. bota, to be
good for, to suit Makani a
mu botela, the affairs suit him.
Bot61wa, ku, V, pass, botela> to
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
365
be suited, to be glad; e^g, Nda
botelwa ka ka bona, I am glad
to see yon.
Bot^aha, kn, 9. f . int, bota, to be
veiy good, to be very nice.
Botesha, ko, v, /. rtl^ caus, bota,
to gladden, to please.
-bota, adj, good, nice, pleasant,
fine.
Bowa («r. Boa), n. 4. cowardice.
BOsa, ». 4. iftf //. hair, wood, far.
Applied to animals and the body
hair of a person ; also the female
flower of maize.
Boiha, ku, v, /. cam. bola, to cause
to rot.
-boahi, A^'. rotten, decayed, cor-
rupt.
Bu. (i) cleusr. cU 4. nr^.\ pers,
and r^, pro. d, 4. sing, it.
(a) coHJ. if; e.g, bn nda
an^wa ingoshi impia, if I am
bound with new cords.
(3) ado. as, how. Mwina ka
chita ba nda ma shimwina,
yon have not done as I told you.
Bu, particle used with ku tuba, to
be white ; e.g. I tuba bti, it is
very white. Also with pale,
pele \stL ! there is none !
Bu (or Buu), used toexpress the feel-
k^ in the mouth when one tastes
anything sour. Nda tia bu, I am
afiiaid of the bitterness. Muchelo
n la letela bu, the fruit tastes
sour, sets teeth on edge.
Bubala, n. 4. colour of black and
white ox, black spots ; e.g. ing'-
ombe eahi nja bubala, this is
snch an ox.
Bubele, subs. pro. prep. cl. 4, sing.
it (where it is).
Bub^mba, n. 4. the blade of a spear.
Bubi, n. 4. anything bad, such as
sickness, eviL Used as an adj.,
badly, evilly. Muntu ka lela
bubi, the person slept badly.
Mukaintu udi ahiti bubi, the
woman is pregnant.
Bubiabe, n. 4. evil, badness.
Bubiahi, n. 4. raw meat
Bubona, emp. dem. pro. cl. 4, just
that ; adon just so.
Bubona budi, prep, as, like; e.g.
A. mu ngwede bubona budi
uswa. Do ye write like us.
Bubona mbu, adv. just as, how,
as ; e.g. A tu bone bubona mbu
mwa chita, Let us see just how
yon have done.
BubAngvhu, n. 4. softness.
Bubotu, If. 4. goodness.
Btibwe-btibwe, n. 4. gravel.
Buch^olie, n. 4. quality of an infant ;
infancy, babyhood.
Bucbende, n. 4. quality of a bull ;
genitals of a bull.
Bucbesi, n, 4. sharp edge of knife
or spear.
Buchi, If. 4. (Lumbu) honey.
Budie f inierr. pro. cl. 4. sing.
Which? e.g. bufti budie P
which meal ?
Budika, ku, v. i. to appear.
Budikila, ku, v. t. rel. budika, to
appear for, or to.
Budila, ku,9. /. rel. bula, to be in-
sufficient for, to lack. ; e.g. Ba la
budila shidyo. They have not
enough food.
Budilo, If. 4. food for a journey.
Budimba, if . 4. a musical instru*
ment made largely of cala-
bashes.
Budimbo, if. 4. birdlime made of
the sap of the butaba-tree.
Budimbtiahi, if. 4. foolishness, stu-
pidity.
Budindishi, if. 4. watching, guar-
dianship, providence.
Budi6, adv. only, simply, merely.
Query whether this is really a noun
of cl. 4, with the meaning of
' nothingness '.
Budiaha, ku, v. t. caus. budika, to
cause to appear.
Budiaha, ku, rel. caus. bula, to
cause to lack ; e.g. Bukata bwa
ma budiaha shidyo, Laziness
causes you to lack food.
Budyodyo, n.j^a. mixture of maize,
beans, and ground-nuts cooked
together.
Bufu, If. 4. meal, flour.
Btifubtifa, If. 4. crumbs.
Bnfiunba, if. 4. cattle-dung. Ba>
366
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
lumbu say buftunba ; Baila, ma-
fomba.
Bufunzo, If. 4. the inside of a melon
or pumpkin.
Bufwefwelenga, n, 4. crumbs.
Bufwi, n, 4. jealousy ; e, g. baka-
intu ba la Iwa bu^i, the women
fight out of jealousy.
Bu^vizUy n, 4. a slip-knot ; a bird-
trap made with a slip-knot, a loop.
Buka, ku, v, t. to rise, to get up.
Mwa bnka, you are up. Ila
morning salutation.
Buk&di, n. 4. anger, wrath, fierce-
ness, courage, sharpness.
Bukalntu, n. 4. feminine quality,
womanhood, feminine genitals.
Bukana, n, 4. a battle-axe.
Bukana, ku, v, i. to dissolve. Said
of two who have made a friend-
ship and afterwards fight, or who
have made a sale and afterwards
one is dissatisfied, and the bargain
is broken.
Bukata, n, 4. idleness, laziness.
Bukazhi, if. 4. female genitals,
especially of animal.
Bukila, ku, v. t, rel. buka, to get
up for; ^.^. Nda bukila menzhi
a kunwa, 1 got up to drink water.
Bukilwa, ku, pass, bukila, to com-
mit adultery (of the man).
Bukislia, ku, v. t, rel, cans, buka,
to commit adultery (of a woman) ;
e, g. xnukaintu wa mu bukizha,
' the woman made him get up to
sleep with her.
Buk6fu, If. 4. leanness.
Buk6ka, it. 4. a cluster of thorn-
trees, a thorn-forest
Bukoko, If. 4. strong beer.
Bukokole, if. 4. the actual marriage.
See Ku kokola.
Buk6m9, If. 4. the small of the back,
the loins, the lumbar region of the
back.
Bukristi, if. ^.for, (from English,
Christ) Christianity.
Buktibu, If. 4. the country of the
Bakubu or Marotsi.
Bukukutu, If. 4. extreme hardness ;
e. g. muntu wa zuma bukukutu,
the person is dead ; or he appears
as if dead, senseless, as after
strangling.
Buktinku, if. 4. a field hoed up in
the dry season when the ground
is hard.
Buktlsa, ku, v. t. tosmoothe (cloth,
clothes), to stroke with the hand.
Buktizu, If. 4. the wild fig-tree.
Bukw&zhi, n, 4. openness; e,g.
mudianfl^o udi bukwashi, the
door is open.
Bukw6bo, If. 4. a sale, a buying.
Bukwetunga, n, 4. quality, status
of a mukwetunga {q v.).
Bula, ku, V, t, to lack, to need, to
be without.
Bula, ku, V, t, to advise, to teach,
to counsel, to admonish, to warn.
Applied to a messenger going from
village to village spreading news.
Bula, If. 4. bowel, intestine.
Buldlo, If . 4. a bridge.
Bulamfti, If. 4. length, depth,
height.
Bul&mu, If. 4. very fine meal.
Buldna, ku, v, t, rec, bula, to advise
each other.
Bul6bo, If. 4. the short poles put
above a doorway in building a
hut ; also the sticks used by women
in carrying things on the head.
Bul^mbe, if. 4. poison put on
arrows.
Bul^mbo, If. 4. writing, carving,
moulding ; a cutting in the skin,
also the scar left ; tatooing.
Bulem6ko, n. 4. honour, esteem.
Bul6mu, If. 4. heaviness, weight;
honour, dignity.
Bu-l^aa, If. 4. divinity, Godhead.
Bul^ahi, If. 4. the Pleiades.
Bulezhi, if. 4. status of a person who
feeds others.
Bulo, If. 4. a bed.
Buloa, If. 4. blood.
Bulombwana, n, 4. quality, status
of a man ; male genitals.
Buldndo, if. 4. depth, a deep place
in the river.
Bulongo, If. 4. clay.
Buloahi, «. 4. witchcraft
Buluba, If.. 4. a cluster of flowers;
also cloth.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
367
Bultibe, #1. I a. a kind of lizard.
Bulula, ku, V, i. to take maize off
the cob.
Bulula, kOy V. i, to lose skill, forget
what one has learnt.
Bultiinbay n, 4. hole in ear for ear-
ring.
Bulundo, If. 4. a snbstance made
np of roasted groond-nnts and
soot, used to pnt on the drum-
skins ; it is said that it makes the
droms sound well.
Bulunsana, ka, v. i, to be smooth,
to be carved smoothly ; e,g. Mu-
tibft wesu udi bulungene, it is
carved nicely, without any rough-
ness of surface.
Bulunganya, ku, v. t. caus, bulu-
ngans, to carve smoothly.
-bnlmigene, ae^\ smooth; e.g.
mntiba ubnluxigene, a smooth
basin.
Bulunga, n, 4. beads.
Bnluti, If. 4. fifr, (Suto, borati)
quality, status of a missionary;
ministry.
Bnli&BhiltiBlii, if. 4. direction, posi-
tion ; ^.^. ka tondeka buHishi-
ItisM znbwa shiti, to point out
the direction in which he lives.
Bulw&shi, If. 4. pain, sickness,
affliction, disease.
Bul'we, If. I a. the iguana.
Buzn&mbe, if. 4. illicit intercourse,
adultery (especially of one act).
Buznbs, ku, v, t, to work in clay,
to form, mould (as bricks or pots).
Btim.babtim.bs, ku, redupl, bumba,
to roll into a ball, to turn a thing
over in the mind.
Biunbila, ku, v. /. rel, bumba, to
form for somebody.
Bombislis, 9./. int. bumba, to
form, mould, carefully, nicely.
Biunb^a, ku, v, i. to be finished
off smoothly (of pots).
Buxnbula, ku, v.. t. to finbh off pots
by scraping with a shell, thus
niaking them smooth.
Buznblinkana, ku, v, t. to be round,
sphericaL
Bumbunkanya, ku, v, t. caus. bu-
mbunkana, tb make round.
-bumbunkene, adj. round,
•bumbuahi, adj. smooth ; e.g. mu-
tiba mubuxnbushi, a smooth pot.
Buxn^na, if. 4. yeast, leaven, malt.
Bumi, If. 4. life.
Bumpingidi, if. 4. the poles used
for closing a gateway; they are
placed horizontally.
Buxnpuatisu, if. 4. the sandfly (of a
number). One single fly is ka-
mpuauBU.
Bumw&le, if. 4. girlhood (after
puberty).
Bunakwabo, poss, phr. cU 4. sing.
their, of their place.
Bunakwako, poss. phr. el. 4. sing.
thy.
Bunakwakwe, poss. phr, cl. 4. sing.
his.
Bunakwangu, poss, phr. cL 4. ^if^.
my.
Bunakwenu, poss, phr, cl, 4. sing.
your, of your place.
Bunakweau, poss, phr. cl. 4. sing.
our, of our place.
Bunaahichixikudi, if. 4. bow ; the
whole outfit of bow, arrows, and
sheath.
Bundtika, ku, v, i. to wait a long
time, as a person who wishes to
sell, and the buyer is busy about
something else.
Btinga, ku, v, t. to gather up, as
grass, weeds, dung into heaps.
Bung6na, ku, v, i. rec. bunga, to
assemble, to congregate, to collect
together.
Bunganya, ku, v, t, rec, caus,
bunga, to accumulate, to collect,
to gather people together.
Bungika, ku, v. t, caus, bunga, to
gather together, to cause to as-
semble, to accumulate.
Bungfaha, ku, v. t. int. bunga, to
collect carefully, well.
Bungo, If. 4. name of a game.
Bungu, If. 4. chaff.
Bunguka, ku, v.i, stat, bunga,
wait a long time (= bunduka).
Bungrultilu, If. 4. vastness, a very
big thing; e.g. wezo muntu
ngu bungululu, that person is
enormous.
368
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Bunina, n, 4. brotherhood ; e. g.
bonse mbunina, they are sdl
brethren, i, e. all of the brother-
hood.
Bunji, adv, differently, otherwise.
Bunk6shi, n. 4. the quality, status,
authority of a headman.
Bun6nga, n, 4. deliberation, slow-
ness ; e,g, woBu wa dya bu-
nonga, he eats deliberately,
slowly, without hurry.
Biinono, n. 4. yaws»
Bunsene, n» 4. a large grass mat.
Bunshinde, n. 4. a very strong grass
used in making rope.
Btintu, n, 4. status, quality of a
person ; manliness, virtue.
Bunumfa, n, 4. a stink.
Bunvtika, n. 4. beeswax. Musamo
wezo mbunvuka, this medicine
is sticky.
Bunyama, n. 4. inside of a skin ;
animal nature.
Buny&nga, n, 4. the feet, lungs, and
heart of an animal, allowed to be
eaten by men only.
Bunydni, n. 4. the kind of basket-
work at the apex of a hut, into
which the roof-poles are fixed.
Budneki, n, 4. kingly authority,
kingdom.
Bup&nii, n, 4. the infirmity of old
age.
Bupo, n, 4. fishing-bait.
BupiiUca, ». 4. an insect, a collection
of small insects.
Bus&ka, n. 4. a small basket around
the opening of the insua, used as
a funnel ; a funnel.
Bus&la, n, 4. name of an edible
root.
Busangule, n. 4. the moon of May,
when all the food b stored and
winter begins.
Busanaa, ». 4. a platform for
storing grain, &c., a scaffold used
in building.
Biu&zhi, n. 4. ; e.g. kn wa insala
busazhi, to fall backwards. Udi
lele busazhi, to lie on the back
( «■ ku salama).
Bus6, n, 4. the dregs of beer, the
lees, or sediment.
Bus^ka, ». 4. a cluster of ear-rings ;
//. xnaseka, used of the rings put
on legs. Buseka may also be
used of a single ear-ring, but one is
generally called kaseka.
Busena, «. 4. space, room, place,
position.
Busenga, if. 4. grit produced when
grain is first stamped («= iunze).
Bus^za, If. 4. marrow.
Buaha, ku, v. t. cans, buka, to raise,
arouse ; pass, bushiwa.
Bushdla, If. 4. orphanhood.
Blishi, If. 4. smoke.
Bushlku, If. 4. day, i, e. the whole
twenty-four hours ; double plural^
insbiku, days ; mashiku, night.
Ku bushiku, at the first cock-
crow.
Bushila, n, 4. pus, matter.
Bushimbi, n. 4. girlhood (before
puberty).
Bushinde, if. 4. a field hoed up in
the autumn, grass left on it and
burnt later.
Buahinshi, n. 4. childish innocence.
Bushizha, kn, v. t, cans, rel. buka,
to raise for, to arouse for the pur-
pose of.
Bushonto, If. 4. smallness.
Bl^bu, If. 4. the face, countenance,
front; e.g. ka kala ku bushu
bwa ng*anda yakwe, he sat in
front of his house.
Btisokoshi, if. 4. the Fink.
Busdnga, if. 4. first small blade of
. a cereal; e.g. mapopwe a la
▼hwa busonga, the maize is just
coming up.
Bus6ngo, If. 4. wisdom, cunning.
Bu8u, If. 4. sorrow, distress.
Busundi, if. 4. barrenness (of a
woman).
BuBweyo, if. 4. cleanness, bright-
ness, holiness.
Buta, ku, V. i, to lie down, to rest
(of animab).
Buta, If. 4. bow ; buta bwa Iioza,
a rainbow.
But&ba, If. 4. name of a large
evergreen tree, sap used as bird-
lime.
Butala, If. 4. large graia-bia boilt
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
369
of watfle tnd daub, in the same
way as a hot
Batdile, #1. 4. a quantity of native
iion^ not yet woriced.
Buttoibo, If. 4. layenoQsness. Of
a caimvorons beast when eager for
prey, also of a man keen on his
work, or eating, or speaking, &c. ;
€*g. oaanu bashombwa mbu-
tambo, to-day the lions are fierce,
eager for prey. Weio muntn
xnbatambo ku Imdya, that man
is ravenous for food. Muntn
weso mbutambo ka midimo,
that man is very keen on his
work. Montaweao mbutambo
ku kuamba, that man is keen on
talking; he talks mnch. Weao
mbutambo ku buaongo, that
person is very wise indeed.
Butanga, #1. 4. a herd of cattle or
antelope, flock of sheep or goats.
Butavhu, n. 4* stinginess, mean-
ness.
Butemeke, n* 4. dried meat, bil-
tong. Properly the adj. -temeke
in cl. 4, used as a noon.
Buteu, #1. 4. thieving, stealing,
burglary.
But^shi, If. 4. slipperiness, a slip-
pery place. Nda wa buteshi, I
slip smd falL
Butif interr, adv, how?; e^g, TJ
la Chita butfp what are yon
doing, OTy how are yon doing?
Bantu babo ka badi butfp
what sort of people were those ?
Kudi butiP or MbutiP how
is it?
Butika, ku, v, t, caus. buta, to pat
a child to sleep.
Butinti, If. 4. a morass.
Butombo, M . 4. B Butongo q,v,
Butonga, it. 4. the country of the
Batonga or Batoka.
Butongi, It. 4. cotton bush, wild
cotton, thread.
Butongo, If. 4. falseness, deceitfhl-
ness ; a change in a man's way of
doing things, as when a man has
been in the habit of feeding his
employees, and suddenly refuses
to dp so, — ^udi kwete butongo.
Butop61o, If. 4. a boggy place.
Bumbuawa, if. 4. a Idnd of red,
biting ant.
BuThumo, If. 4. a kind of medicine
used to scare away lions.
Buvumino, if. 4. belief faith.
Buya, ku, v. i, to return, to go or
come back.
Buyi, If. 4. roe of a fish ; unformed
eggs of a fowl.
Buyoka, n, 4. name given to a snake
when it is pinned down by a spear
through the head.
Buaa, If. 4. skill, expertness.
Buza, ku, V, /. to eat food without
a relish.
Buzandi, 11. 4. predousness, costli-
ness; e.g chintu chechi mbu-
aandi, this thing is precious.
Busane, if. 4. meat, flesh.
Buzha, ku, v. /. to ask, to enquire,
to question.
Buzh6na, ku, v, t to ask each other.
Buzhanya^ ku, v.t, rec, caus,
buzha, to ask each other, to
discuss.
Buzhidi, #1.4. a present given on
conclusion of a sale.
Buzhike, if. 4. quality, status of a
slave, slavery.
Buzhingo, if. 4. sinew of an animal
used for sewing.
Buzhiaha, ku, v.t, int. buzha,
to ask persistently, carefully.
Buzuba, If . 4. a day.
Buzumo, If. 4. hardness, precious-
ness, costliness.
Buzunde, if. 4. birdlime.
Buzunde, if. 4. defeat.
Buzunde, if. 4. maize flower.
Bwa (i) Gen. part, cl, 4. sing, ; e.g,
busongo bwa-kwe, his wisdom ;
(2) Per s. pro, cL 4. sing, it.
Bwa, ku, V. i, to rise to the surface
(of fish).
Bwa « Bu a : e.g, bubona bwa
chita, as be did.
Bwabili (Obwabili), contr. for
buahiku bwabili, the second
day, Tuesday.
Bwadimwi (Obwadimwi), the day
before yesterday, the day after to-
morrow.
Bb
370
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Bwala, If. 4. plenty; plenteoasness,
abundance. . Mwaka wezu
mbwala, this is a plenteous
year.
Bwalo, subs, pro, simple, cl. 4. sing.
it itself.
Bw&mba, n, 4. breadth, width.
Bwami, n, 4. quality, status of a
chief, authority.
Bwamu, ». 4. fornication, harlotry.
Bw&muna, ku, v, t, to open widely
(of the eyes).
Bwana, ».4. quality, status of a
child, childhood.
Bw&nda, ». 4. bird-trap made of
sticks and cord.
Bwanda, n, 4. the outside wall of
a house, a wall.
Bw&nda, n, 4. curds, thick milk.
Bwande, n, 4. a crack in the skin,
or a lancet-cut in the skin, inci-
sion.
Bwande, n, 4. an inhabited country.
Bwane (Obwane), contr. for
buahiku bwane, the fourth day,
Thursday.
Bwanga, n 4. kindness, geniality.
Bwani, ;r. 4. a mopani forest.
Bwanlche, n, 4. youthfulness,
youth.
Bwtfnta, ku, v, i. to be noisy,
garrulous.
Bwantulula, ku, v, t. rep, bwanta,
to retell old news, to tell people
things they knew long ago.
Bwanzhi, n, 4. quarrelsomeness,
disagreeableness.
Bwatatu (Obwatatu), contr. for
buahiku bwatatu, the third day,
Wednesday.
Bwato, M. 4. a canoe.
Bwiya, ff. 4. a fringed edge of a
blanket or garment, a fringe.
Bw61a, ku, V, t, reL buya, to
return to.
Bw^le, ft, 4. the itch.
Bwelela, ku, v. t. rel. bwela, to
return for a purpose. Used
idiomatically to express ' again ';
e.g, ba bwelela ku njiht, or
be njile, they entered again.
Bwel^nze, n, 4. yagrancy.
Bwelo, n* 4, a place where the river
is banked for the catching of fish ;
a fishing-trap made of reeds.
Bwema, «. 4. a pleasant smell.
Bwene, per£ of ku bona, to have
seen.
Bwen^ne, perf. of ku bonana, to
be in sight of each other; e,g,
minalii idi bwenene, the villages
are in sight of each other.
Bwanga, ku, v,t, to make
palatable; e,g, to eat meat with
bread, or milk and bread.
Bwengeka, ku, v, i, to be eatable
together, — of two things which
agree well, such as bread and meat.
Bwense, n, 4. semen.
Bwensenae, n. 4. semen.
BweBa, ku, v, t, to take up, to take.
Bwea^la, ku, v, t. rel, bwesa, to
take for. Ku dibweaela, to take
for oneself.
Bw^Bha, ku, v, t. rel, caus. buya,
to take back to, to cause to
return to.
Bwichi, n, 4, honey.
Bwididi, n,ia.h. wild duck.
Bwila, If. 4. the country of the
Baila.
Bwina, 11.4. the burrow of an
animal.
Bwinga^ if . 4. a wedding.
Bwingaino, n, 4. equality.
Bwini, If. 4. truth, reality.
Bwinti, If. 4. bubble, bubbles.
Bwintika, ku, v, i. ^^ ku bwenge-
ka, g. V,
Bwinu, If. 4. fatness, stoutness.
Bwiya, if. 4. a thorn.
Bwizu, If. 4. grass.
O. This varies in sound between eh
in church and tue in virtue. It is
closely allied with the sound of k
in keep\ indeed, many words in
this vocabulary are pronounced by
many natives with k instead of ch,
Oha (i) Gen. part. cl. 7. sing, ; e,g,
ohintu oha-ngu, my thing ; (a)
Pers. pro. cl, 7. sing.
Oha occurs as a prefix in many
adverbs formed from noons.
Cha, ku, v,t. to clear op (of the
night), to dawn. Bwa ch% or
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
371
bu che, adv, phr, next day.
"WeBO montu bws ka oha, that
man is wise, f.^. he isas if the snn
had arisen npon him.
Cha, lea, v, t. to answer, reply.
Cha, ku, v.t, to get, catch (fish).
"Wa ya kn oha inswi ahoxigai P
how many fish did yon get ?
Chaba, ka, v,t, to cut or gather
firewood.
Chab&lu, adv, the way of the elders,
in an elderly way.
Ohabfla, ka, v,t, reL oliab% to
gather firewood fot.
KShaSaHo, n, 7. a share, portion,
allotment.
Chabfaha, ka, v. /. int, ohaba, to
gather a lot (of firewood).
GhiEkbislia, ka, v,t, rel. caus.
ohaba, to cause to cut wood for.
Used esp.^ to put a lot of wood
on a fire.
Chabdfti, adv, blindly, in the fashion
of a blind man.
Chabadimbashi, adv. foolishly,
after the manner of a fool.
Chabiidio, adv. freely, without
payment.
Ohabtifwi, adv. jealously.
Chabak^di, adv, angrily.
Chabakita, adv. lazily, idly, in the
manner of a lazy person.
ChabuldmOf adv. in a dignified
manner.
ChabolwaBhi, adv, painfiilly, in a
painful manner.
Chabanlna, adv. brotherly, in a
brotherly fashion.
Chaban6nga, adv. deliberately,
slowly.
ChabaBhimbi, adv. girlishly, in the
manner of a young girl.
ChaboB^ngo, adv. wisely, in the
manner of a wise person.
COLabasa, adv. sorrowfully, in a
sorrowfiil manner.
CSiabotimbo, adv. ravenously.
Ohabatongo, adv. (to speak)
differently, in a changed manner.
Chabuza, adv. skilfully, expertly.
CSiabwala, adv. plenteously, abua*
dantly.
Ghabwanga, adv. geniidly, kindly.
B
.Ohaoli6ba, adv, prosperously.
Chadi, n.ia.SL fringed blanket
Ohakalala, adv. insanely, in the
manner of a madman.
Ohakal6nda, adv. stammeringly,
after the manner of a person with
an impediment in hb speech.
Chakamwale, adv. girlishly, in the
manner of a girl (one past
puberty).
Ohakaahimbi, adv. girlishly, in the
manner of a young girL
Obakubfizha, adv. surpassingly,
exceedingly.
Chakabfnda, adv. hurriedly.
Ohakabdmba, adv. with humility,
humbly, in a subdued manner.
Chakub68ha, adv. justly, in the
manner of one who puts things
right
Ohakabotelwa, adv. gladly, joy-
fully.
Obakabalangana, adv. smoothly.
Chakacbengay adv. deceitfully, in
a deceitful manner.
Cliakafukula»a^^.drowsily,sleepily.
ChakaAma, adv, lovingly.
Ohakufwamba, adv. quickly, in a
rapid manner.
CbakufwanzhafwaiiBha, adv. hur-
riedly, carelessly.
Ohakal^meka, adv. respectfully,
civilly.
Ghakulalama, adv. rightly, in a
right manner.
Chakalamba, gratefully, with
thanks.
Ghakaxnana, adv. completely, in sL
finished manner.
Ohakombadi, n. c/. 7. a secret
thing, a mystery, secret. Food
eaten by woman who is men-
struating; reckoned unclean by
others ; adv. secretly, mysteri-
ously.
Chakiipaapa, adv. h3rpocritically.
Chakapdsha, adv^ bountifully ; in a
free, generous manner.
Ohakoaaba, adv. noisily, boister-
. ously, clamorously.
Chakatangala, adv. gladly, joy-
fiiUy.
Ohakweshesha, adv. smoothly.
b2
373
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
OhAlo, suis, pro, simple cl, 7. jm^.
it, itself.
ChalubllOy adv, swiftly.
Ohalufu, tuh, in a deathlike
manner.
Ohaluse, adv. merdfally.
Chalusunsu, adv, harshly, nn*
kindly.
Chalutuzhi, mdv, in a hasty, short-
tempered fashion.
Ohaluzando, adv, willingly.
Chalw^nso, €uiv^ notorionsly,
openly«
Ohalwiki, adv, persereringly,
patiently, persistently.
qiuunaAmzi, ado. wickedly, profli^t
gately.
Chamanga, adv, kindly.
CSiam^no, adv, cunningly, cleverly.
Oh&mba, n. cl. 7. the chest
Chamba, n, cl, 7. an old, nselesshoe.
Ohfimi, adv. purposely, on pnrpose.
Ohamiohami, adv, in the manner
of a chief, in a lordlike fashion.
Chaininungwe,^. la. a porcupine.
Ohamozdinwi, adv, zealously,
earnestly, with a single heart.
Champango, 19.7. a verse of a
hynm or song.
Ohampuwo, adv, openly, in a
known fashion.
Ghamtikoa, adv, in a friendly,
brotherly manner.
Ohamumya, n. 7. that for which
one is beaten, a fault.
Chamushilo, adv. completely, per-
fectly, in a complete manner.
Chanachana, adv. childishly, in
the way or manner of a child.
Chanda, n, 7. an old tumbledown
house.
Ohftnda, n. 7. thick milk.
Chfinda, ». 7. a forked stick.
Chandano, ^7. a division, a
chapter.
OhAndanyo, n. 7. the Anus.
Chandwa, n, 7. frost
Ch&nga, n.ia, a variety of wild
cat
Ch&nga, n, 7. an old Iwanga (^. v,),
Ohani P adv. How ? Like whom ?
Chani, n, 7. old dry grass, not
burnt.
Ohaniobe, cuh, youthfully, in the
manner of a young person.
Cniankaclianka, ku, v, t, to press
matter out of a sore.
Chankanka, adv, astonishingly,
wonderfully.
Chankole, cuh, cruelly, maliciously.
Chansana, adv, with strength, for-
cibly.
Ohaii80iii,a^zr, with shame, shame-
fully.
Ohantenda, ado, pitifully, merci-
fully.
Ohanyabo, adv, how great !
Chansa, n, 7. the horn of an animal
together with the base of the horn
on the skull.
Chanaala, adv, in a hungry fashion,
hungrily.
Ohansilo, n. 7. a strainer, sieve.
Oh&pa, ku, v,t, to despise, belittle.
Ohauminwa, n, 7. that for which
one is beaten, a fault.
Ohea, ku, v,u to be small, to
become less, to be insufficient
Ohebauka, ku, v,i. pers, rep.
ehebuka, to keep on looking
about one, as when suspecting
danger.
Ohebaukila, ku, v. t, rel, chebaukay
to look round about upon.
OhebelabSnsu, n, 7. a thing that is
public, not hidden, known to all
travellers that pass the place.
Cniebuka,ku,7^. i. to raise one's eyes,
to look round. Ku ohebuka
muBshi, to look back.
Oheohela, ku, v, i, to cluck (of a
hen).
Ch6oh.el61a, ku, v, t, rel, cbeehela^
to tell tales, esp. l3ring tales.
Chechi, dem,pro. cl, 7. sing, this.
Cheoho, dem, pro, cl. 7. sing, that
Chedia, dem, pfo. cl. 7. yon, yonder.
Oheka, ku, v,t, to leave a door
partly open, ajar.
ChSka, ku, v,t, to carve or turn
ivory bracelets.
OhSk^la, ku, v,t, rel, cheka, to
carve (bracelets) for.
OhSk^sha, ku, v.t, ini, oheka,
to carve (bracelets) nicely, or to
carve many.
ILA-EKGUSH VOCABULARY
373
Chekwa* ka, v. pma* dhok% to
be ajar (ofa door).
ChdlAy ff. 7. irao, MctaL
ChSl*, kn, «./. to gitbcr, plnck
(fruit). Of ottde, to gme.
ChSlA, kn, v.iL re^ elio» to riae
upon (of tbe sb), to dam vpoo.
Gholo, n» 7. ponidge, papu
GhSlala^ kn, v./. reL diola» to
plnck, gatbcr (frmt, Ac) lac
Cbelelo, s. 7. a dirtj, obligatioo.
Tlieiracd is derived froai knobk
and Means loiBetliiD^ tibat k fit or
onglit tobedooe.
Ohffloaho, n. 7. a BMaamn^ mstim-
menty a mle, an indi ti^ie, ftc.
Chftma, IK. 7. the potrid aneQ of a
VdA fv» ^oma. I
kii,K/.to
Cmsi>e),to
ko, r. i. to be
anally to
Choinh41% kn, n.^ to be old.
Chwmh^aliB, kn, v./. «nu.diem-
beUy to cuse to be old, aged.
Ghmnhololo, iv. 7. a shdter eiccted
fay a shcpihcid or herAwnaa.
Chwncholeka, kn, 9. s. to go roond
anjrthittg.
OheiHlfaIn, ka, v. /. to look at a
thing, longing for it bot not asldi^
for it; to eye a thing.
Cb^nga, ka, v./. to deceive, to
cheat, to iiejgn, to pietend, to be
niggaxdlj in girii^, esp. wages.
Cheng^ka, kn, v.uiop, ebenga,
to be decetvable, cfedolons.
•ehengeahi, a^I oednloos.
Cafteogaliika, kn, v. i. to tnxn
aside, to look badL 00 any one
ChoBJe, n.\tu name of an inseet
which bitesand hangs on. Idiom.
kn Inma 6hei0e> said of a pole,
&C., which is fixed fast.
Gheqjekotwe, ». 1 a, pi, Ba-,
name of a tree and its froit (» a
big Inj^nji).
CSie^Jela, kn, v. i. to nm away in
fear when fanlt is foimd oat, to
abscond.
Ch^aa^ kn, v.t. to cot grass close
to the ground, to mow.
Chosimbwe, adv. fortmiatcly«
inddly (esp. in
kn, V. /. to choose,
Chelfla, kn, v./. reL ehotay to
cbooae for, select for.
Chotfia, kn, r. /. to pay a tax.
Chat6alia» kn, v. /. iml, eheta, to
sdect caicfiilly, wdL
Chot^siha, kn, v.t. cmmr. ehotola,
to tax.
Choiomha, a^. dirtily, filthily ; in
a dirty, filthy manner.
Gh^aha, kn, v.t, trntts. ehaka, to
cause orassist tocarte (braodcts),
to carve with.
Chi (I) classr. cL 7. siMg. ; (2) pen.
mmireLprwuiLj.simg.i {j^wtriml
rnmriHaiy fmrtUle^ still, just, ftc
€^, nohi bandika mo, I stiU
speak with you. Hi l>a cdii dya,
when they woe still eating.
Chfama, kn, p. £ to be put across to
be across, crosswise, aslant. Perf.
ehiemo, e.g. frhiaamo ehimwi
ehidi ahiinikHo, ohiniwi ehidi
chlmno, one stidc is fJanted up-
r%ht, anodier is put across.
Chfamlka, kn, u, /. emus, ehiama,
to lay one thing across another,
to put aslant.
Chlfaga, a. 7. a box or place for
putting dothes in.
Chlanga, a. la. a lame, maimfd
person (» Ohfholo).
Chiangflo^ a. 7. the crop of a bird.
Ghianaa, a. 7. cnstom, manner,
way, bdiaviour, habit
Chi aaahavwimi, a. 7. a kind of
priddy weed planL Used as
medicine; also pot over food to
keep rats away.
Chibidi, a. 7. the side. IT la dila
ohibadi, he eats with food at the
side of hinu
GhibOabAla, a. 7. a diip. a frag-
Ghibile, a. 7. palm-leaf string used
in braiding the hair.
Ghibalo, a. 7. a reading-lesson.
Chlhalo, a. 7. an old Inbalo.
Chlhanda, a. 7. peace.
374
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ohibandabanda, ff.7. a narrow
valley or vld.
Ohibanffa, ». 7. an axe used for
fighting, hunting, &c. .
Chibango, ». 7. an old bat used in
a game.
Ohibangu, n. 7. a bees* nest in a
tree.
Ohibawe, n.ia. an otter.
Ohibele, subs, pro, prep. cL 7. sing,
it (where it is).
Cbibelo, n. 7. the thigh.
Ohibengelele, n. i a. name of a
fish-eating bird.
OhibSsha, n, 7. the smell emanating
from the human body.
Chib§slia, n. i a. liar, deceiver.
Chibia, n. 7. a pot.
Obibiabe, n. 7. a bad thing.
Properly tea adj. in cL 7, but it is
used as a noun.
ChibikilOy n, 7. a place for putting
anything, cupboard, wardrobe.
Ohibila, ». i a. a rock-rabbit, coney.
Chibimbi, n, 7. an unfinished hoe-
head.
Cbibinda, n. 7. an old, worn-out,
short loin-cloth (mubinda).
Chibishi, n. 7. an unripe, raw thing.
Properly the adj. -bishi in cL 7.
Chibishi, n. 7. the language, man-
ners, customs of the Batoka or
Batonga (» Ohitonga) ; also
used of the Batoka country
( = Butonga, or Bubiahi).
Chibizf, n. i a. the zebra.
Chibombwe, n.j. measles.
Chibondo, n. 7. name of a disease.
The medicine employed in a case
of chibondo is the dried head of
the mubondo fish, crushed and
mixed with the fat of that fish.
Ohibubii, n, 7. name of a tree from
which medicine for catarrh is made.
Chibiiko, n.*j.2i change in character
or action or appearance, applied
to persons or things; e.g. udl
kwete chibuko, he changes in
character.
Chibul&nshi, n. i a, name of a kind
of fruit.
Chibtlznbu, n. i a. name of a kind
of fruit.
Qhibumbwa, ic 7. a creature.
Ghibunganino, n. 7. a place of
assembly, a meeting-place.
Cniibimgu, n. 7. kind of dance per-
formed by those possessed by a
musangushi..
Ohibtizigiiliilii, n. 7. dust, dirt ad-
hering to one. Wa wa chibun-
gululu, he falls into the dust (so
that when he rises dust still
cleaves to him).
Ohibunu, n. 7. the waist.
Chibuwe, n. 7. a bare place, a
space cleared of rubbish.
Ohibwanta, if . i a. a garrulous
person.
Cbibw^bwO; n, 1 a. name of a kind
of fruit.
Chioh^zho, n. 7. anything used for
gathering fruit in.
OhiohinganinOy n. 7. a meeting-
place.
Chichink&no, n. 7. a cross.
Ohi^hitilo, n. 7, a place for work*
ing, a workshop.
Chidfba, n. 7. fetters of wood for
the feet of slaves.
Chidie, interr.pro.cl.*j .sing, which?
e.g. Chintu chidie P which thing?
Ohidfla ku, v. t. to follow, to come
after, to pursue.
Ohidilo, ff.7. a place for eating,
a dining-room, applied also to
such things as a horse*s manger*
Ohidimo, n. 7. spring, hoeing-time.
Ohidindi, if. 7, a hole in the ground.
Ohidio, If. 7. the right hand. Used
also adverbially, to the right, on
the right.
Chidiokezh^Bho, if. 7. a place for
resting.
ChidishitidiahOy if. 7. a cnrtaiuy
veil.
Chidisho, if. 7, a relish, an3rthing
added to food to make it more
palatable.
Cbidiaho, if. 7. a present taken
when you go to mourn at a friend's
place to assuage your friend's
grief.
ChidizHo, If. 7. a ladder.
Chidyo, n. 7. an article of food.
Ohieme,/^. ^knohiajna. (^.«.).
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
375.
-ehimoM, adj. croMwiie, placed
Ohifo, n, 7. something which will
kill a penon ; as a ntal sickness,
or a poisoooiis fruit, or a fatal
accident.
Chifti, If. 7. the abdomen when
distended with food. Vde kute
chifti, I am oompletelj satisfied,
I am ' fiill np '.
Ohiftta, n, 7. a bone.
Ohifti-cha-mabele, n, 7. the colour
of a red and white speckled ox.
Ohifadilo, ». 7. a blacksmith's
worldng-plaoe, shop.
Chifolia, n. 7. a foot.
Ohiffikoftiko, m. 7. the nest of a
domestic fowL
Ghiftilafla, n, 7. a lopsided thing.
Ghiffimba, n, 7. the foot.
Ohifttmo, ». 7* the early morning
after sonrise.
ChiffiTnofttmo, n. 7. irerj early
morning.
Chiffimpa, ir. 7. a kind of trap for
small game.
ChifHinBlii, if. 7. the shonlder.
Ohiftiton^ina, adr., backwards. TJ
le enda ehifatenuma, he walks
backwards.
Chlffiahi, If. 7.* the manner, cus-
toms, ways of a blacksmith.
Chiftiahi, ir. 7. an old village
where a chief has died.
Ohifw^na, if. 7. a grave.
Chifw^sho, If. 7. a snnff-spoon.
Chifwi, If. I a. a kind of wild cat.
Chifwi, If. 7. jealousy.
Chigtiino, n. 7. a cataract.
Ghihole, if . i a. //. baahihole, a
cripple, a maimed person.
Chilitina, if. 7. a buso, shmb.
Ohihiiiuibabanga, treachery (?).'Wa
ohita o. Said of a man who incites
his fellows against another but is
fearfal of that man knowing it, so
that when they come to seize him
he pretends to intercede for the
victim as a friend.
Chika, If. 7. a pestilence ; any dis-
ease which spreads rapidly, as
smallpox, rinderpest
k, ku, vJ, to lay a thing across
another, to put aslant (ska
oliiaiiiika.)
Ohikadfkilo, n. 7. a thing vpoa
which anodier is placed ; a stand,
^9 ^•^•) & candlestick.
Ohikadilo, n, 7. a place where one
rests, sits, abides.
Chikainta, ». 7. a bad woman ;
also the manner, customs, ways
of women.
Ohikambidilo, if. 7. a manner of
saluting.
Chikambidfaho, if. 7. a present
taken to conciliate a chief; also
a present to express one's thanks.
Chikimpi, n. 7. the pith of sweet
reed spewed out after being
chewed.
Cliik&na, n. 7. an old battle-axe.
Ohikanda, if. 7. a dried skin, a hide.
Chik^ni, if. 7. a wordy quarrel, a
dispute. Ohikani oohi ta mana
chi la letela kulwa, a dispute
not finished ends in fighting.
Chikaaadialii, if. 7. the forenoon ;
properly about breakfast time, ue,
the cool part of the day.
Ohikiahi, if. 7. a piece of a broken
pot, or calabash; used for drinking
out of, &c
Chikita, If. 7. a bundle of dried
meat or bark or fish.
Chikata, ». 7. name given in deri-
sion to a lazy person (mukata).
Chik&ti, If. 7./^. (Teb. Isikati)
time : a timepiece, watch or clock.
Ohikato, if. 7. the base of the back
(above the buttocks).
Cblkilo, If. 7. a place for cooking,
a kitchen.
Ohiko, If. 7. fireplace.
Chiko, If. 7. dowry, things given to
the bride's people by the bride-
groom.
C^kobeaho, if. 7. the ward-stick,
a stick used to parry spears.
Chikobeaho, if. 7. an imitation, a
thing made in imitation of another.
Chikdbo, if. 7. a peninsula.
Chikokola, ». 7. a damaged elbow,
an angle.
Obikokola, n. 7. a mealie cob
deformed in growing.
376
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Chik61e, n, 7. handle of a cup.
Chikdlo, n, 7. for. (Eng. school)
a school ; a sdiool-honse.
Chikolo, n, 7. The language of
the Bakola Used of a person
who employs words not known
by other people : TJ la amba
ohikolo.
Chikdma, ». 7. a spoilt, broken
Inkoma {q.v.).
Ohikoma, n. 7. a blacksmith's
hammer.
Chikombeldlo, ff. 7. a place for
prayer, a church.
Ohikombelo, ' n, *j, » Chikom-
belelo {q.v.\
Chikombokomboka, n. 7. name
given by children to the thnmb.
CMko861o, ff. 7. a section of a
joumey, a section of work. Nda
mana chikosolo cha nmnda,
I have finished a part of the field.
Ghikosdzlio, ff. 7. scissors, shears.
Chikotamino, n, 7. a piece of wood
placed above the doorway in a
honse.
Chikotimo, n. 7. a kind of trap.
Chikdto, If. 7. a knot in string or
wood.
Chik6we, «. 7. eyebrow.
ChikoBhino, n, 7. a likeness, a
picture, image, parable.
Chiki&a, If. 7. the speech, manner,
ways of a Em-opean. Also, a bad,
wicked European.
Ghiktiba, n. 7. a disease in which
portions of the skin lose colonr,
beginning in small spots, and
spreading.
Chiktiba, if. 7. a field, especially
one where the grain has been
harvested and tiie stalks left
standing.
Cliikubu, If. 7. the language, way,
custom of the Bakubu or Marotsi.
Chikuku-ohiiniba, name given to
the kwale: Prev. Chikuku-
chumba utauinwa ingftunpu
ni lu bala o maalimisha: the
kwale is not hit with a stick in
the daytime among the grass tufts.
Ohikula, if. 7. salt-pool, salt-pan.
Chiktila, n, 7. a fiunt spoor.
Chiknlubwilo, if. 7. a concubine,
a person who is given one*s old
clothes.
Chikuluknla, if. 7. a very old thing,
rubbish.
Chikumo, if. 7. a thumb.
OhikuBsaBho, if. 7. a threshold.
Ohikunku, n. 7. an ignorant,
innocent child.
Chikonka, if. 7. name of a tree.
Ghikiino, if. 7. a nasty smell, a
Ohikupwilo, if. 7. a person who is
given one's old clothes ; also one
who has a fault falsely put upon
him.
Chikusazho, if. 7. a scraper.
Cbikuta, if. 7. an old hoe.
Chikuti, If. 7. a small field, a
garden.
Chikwangadi, if. 7. a kind of
barbed spear.
Cliikwaiig41a, if . i a. a crow.
Chikwatilo, if. 7. handle of a door,
or of a tool.
Chikwatfsho, if. 8. a cramp, used
in joinery, &c.
Ghlkwi, If. 7. an old winnowing-
basket (lukwi).
Cliikwlkwi, If. 7. locust, a swarm
of locusts.
GMla, If. 7. the language, customs,
manner of the Baila.
Ohlla, ku, V. f . to embark, to enter
a canoe.
Chilaka, if. 7. a stanmiering tongue.
Chilfila, If. 7. branch of a p^m-
tree used as a shelf; a shelf.
Chilala, if. 7. a field cultivated three
years in succession, then left
fallow; food cooked to-day and
kept till to-morrow.
Ohilalo, If. 7. handle or sheath of
a knife.
Ghil&lo, If. 7. an old bridge.
Chilalwe, if. i a, name of a tree ;
fruit used as fish poison.
Chilao, If. 7. a temporary dwelling*
place made of branches, &c.
Ohilapilo, if. 7. something by means
of which fire is conveyed from
place to place.
Chile, If. 7. a bundle of fixewood*
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
377
Chilekete, n, 7. white of an egg;
cartilage.
Chil^ndi, if. 7. a grave.
ChilAiga, If. I a. name given to
God, the great institntor of
customs, the Creator.
Chilenflra, n. 7. a stick broken in
two, so that the pieces are sharp
and can cut into one.
Ghilete, if. 7. /or. (£ng. slate) a
slate.
Ghilevhn, if. 7. the chin.
Ghilos, If. 7. a kind of rash or
eruption on the skin.
Chiloba, num, seven.
Ghiloxnbwana, if. 7. the manner,
customs, wa3rs of a man; also a
bad man.
Chil6nda» if. 7. an ulcer, a sore.
Chil6nfl;ol6ngo, if. 7. Iiubalo Iwa
chilongolongo, the wattle put
round on the top of the wall of
a hut, to which the roof-poles are
tied.
Ohildngwe, if. 7. dog-madness.
Ghil6to, If. 7. a dream.
GhildalLildBhi, if. 7. the custom,
manner, way of a witch.
Chiln, If. 7. site of a destroyed house.
Chilli, If. 7. a family, clan, race.
Chiluloxne, if. 7. the big toe.
Ghiluma, if. 7. something that bites,
wild beast, &c.
Chilumbaluinba, if. 7. name of a
fruit, when ripe it is black, grows
on a bush of the same name.
CSdluinbu, If. 7. language, &c., of
the Balumbu.
Ohilmnbudilo, if. 7. a place for
pa3ring a tax, the < receipt of
custom '.
Chiliunbtilumba, if. i a, the roan
antelope.
Ghilmnbuliiinbu, if. 7. a mocking
way of saying Chilumbu {g»v.).
ChiLxmdvLf n, 7. a pile, or heap, or
mound.
Chilundulundu, if. 7. a big mound,
or heap.
Ohilimgamo, if. 7. = Ohikotamino.
ChiloEhiluzhi, if. 7. == Bulushi-
loshi, the direction, whereabouts
oU ObiluBhiloEhi oha SeEuxigo
kokwi, whereabouts does S.
live ? Used also in asking about
a certain thing, when you don*t
know exactly what it was, or who
did it; e^, IXgaxA chiluzhi-
lushi u konona musako P who
is it (among you) broke the walk-
ing-stick ? STguni akati kenu wa
cUta chUuzhilaBhi ? who is it
among you who did a certain
thing?
Ohilwa, If. 7. an island.
Chilwfohi, If. 7. a bad pain, sick-
ness, disease.
Ohimala, if. 7. the language, cus-
toms, manners of the Bamala.
Ohimaswiko, if. 7. Chimasw^-
kwe. If. 7. Chimasw&ngu, if. 7.
thy, his, my partner in adultery,
paramour.
Chimb^mbe, if. 7. small-pox.
Ghlmbi, if. 7. a spur, of cock or
spurwinged goose; also applied
to a riding-spur.
Chimb6ne, n, 7. a window, mirror.
Chimf&te, ChimftLtentuna = Chi-
fUtennina {q, v,),
Ohimfnamite, if. 7. a strong desire.
Nda fwa chiminamate ku
umbona, I am longing to see him.
Chimini, if. 7. a crooked thing (bent
backwards).
Ohimo, ». 7. stature, tallness.
Chimonswe, if. 7. the left hand;
used as adv. to the left, on the left.
Ohimpima, if. i a. pi, bachimiM-
ma, a deaf person.
Ohimp6ta, if. 7. an enclosure, a
yard, a cattle-kraal.
Ohimpfxida, if. 7. an inner fence,
a reed stockade used for catching
fish.
Ohimpfni, if. 7. a child bom feet
foremost, by Ila custom it is
destroyed.
Ohimpaluintika, if . i a. a kind of
insect.
Ghimwa, ku, v. pass, ku chima, to
be sick, tired of anything, as work,
instruction. Nda cliimwa, I've
had enough.
Chimwe, n, 7. Muntu udl kwete
cluinwe, said of a man who has
3r8
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
eaten fat and has not washed his
month and fingers.
Chinakw6bo, pass, phr, cU 7. sing,
something belonging to their
family or village.
Chinakw6ko, /^jj. //ir. cl. 7. sing,
thy thing.
Cliinakw6iicn,/&5J. phr, cl, 7. sing.
my thing.
01iiiiakw&-we,^5J./Ar. cl, 7. sing,
his thing.
Chinakwinu, poss. phr, cl, 7. sing.
something belonging to your
family, &c.
Chinakw^su, n. 7. something be-
longing to onr family, &c.
Chinchfla, ku, v, i. to be impor-
tunate ; of a person who returns
again and again to ask for a thing.
Chinda, ku, v, i. to go about much,
to wander about.
Chinda, n. 7. experiment, a thing
done as a triaL "Wa ka aaka
chinda, he built as a trial ; e.g.
to see if his material would hold.
Ohinda, n. 7. a charm.
Chindi, n, 7. time, occasion, op-
portunity. Ohi be ohindi, after
a time.
Ohinduluka, ku. v, i. rev. stai.
chinda, to be turned partly round,
to turn round.
Chindulukila, ko, v. i. rev, stat.
rel. ohinda, to turn, or be turned
towards.
Chindulula, ku, v, t. rev, chinda,
to turn about, to steer (a canoe).
Chindulwila, ku, v, U rev, rel,
chinda, to turn or steer towards.
Chindy4bemb6zhi, n, 7. See
Chnmba.
Ohin^ngwe, n. i a, the ant-bear.
Ghinga, n, 7. a fragment of a
broken pot
Chfnga, ku, v, i, to meet.
Chingaohalala, ». i a. a quail.
Ching&na, ku, v. i, rec. chinga, to
meet each other.
Ghinginde, n, 7. a kind of dance.
Chinginya, ku, v, t, rec, cans,
chinga, to cause to meet each other.
Chinganyibo, n. 7. a very big
.. thing, what a big thing 1
Ohinguni, n, 7. disobedience,
obstinacy.
OhingvhTde, n, 7. a shadow, shade.
Chlniohini, adv, much, very much,
greatly, truly.
Chinini, n. 7. a thing of which yon
don't know the name or don't
wish to speak it. See NinL
OhinjfLa, Ini, v. t, to chedc, obstruct,
to hinder, to prevent.
Chinka, ku, v. t. to dig or hoe
deeply, to hoe soft ground. Wa
oh^iika leza, sa^ of distant
thunder.
Ohinkalanga, n. 7. a cage for fowls.
Chinkana, ku, v, i, to be placed
across.
Chinkanya, ku, v. i, caus, chi-
nkana, to put across.
Chinkomba, n. 7. a large earthen
pot.
Ohinkombwa. Sometimes treated
as of cl, 7 ; sometimes as cl, i a,
pi, baahinkombwa, an am-
bassador, messenger, apostle.
Ohinkonta, n. 7. a necklace.
Ohinkonya, n. 7. the set of knuckles.
Ku uma ohinkonya, to rap with
the knuckles.
Chink6shi, n, 7. the manner, way,
custom of a headman. Used as
an adv., headman-like.
Chinkoshi, n. 7. ^ Inkoahi, q, v.
Ohinkdahi, n, 7. a kind of barbed
spear.
Ohinkudi, f». 7. an old useless
calabash. Idiom. Bamnyayila
ohinkudi, when a man is over-
come with fear or astonishment,
the people break a calabash behind
his back so that he starts and
recovers.
Chinktingwa, n. 7. a children's
bracelet made of grass.
Chinotolo, n, ^,far, (Suto, aenot-
lolo ; Dutch, sleutel) a key.
Chins^nda, n. 7. leprosy.
Ohinshalnshal, n, 7. the indde of
a palm, eaten by the people.
Chint^nda, n. 7. nakedness. Used
as adv. ; e,g, u le enda ohinta-
nda, he goes naked.
Ohintembwe, n, 7. soft new grain.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
379
Ttmhlnia jm ehintembw, bread
made of soft new grain.
Cihintimbwi, n. 7. half (of the
head). Ba peswa ehintimbwe,
said of people who have their
heads braided like the Mankoya,
bnt only half done.
Chixxtu, n. 7. a thing ; also applied
to a despicable person.
Cbinta-chfntiif n, 7. tiie manner,
costom, ways of a peison.
Ohintyombwe, n, 7. downy
feathers, as on a young chicken.
Also fresh first leaves of grain.
OhiBuntuilio, n, 7. a ransom price.
Ohinwinoy n. 7. a cup, a goblet, a
drink ing-yessel.
Ohinyto^, n, 7. manner, custom of
an animal.
Chiny^xno, n. if, sl field of ground-
nuts.
Chinaha, kn, v, /. earns, chinga, to
meet.
Ghinaovwe, if. 7. name of a disease.
Chion^no, n, 7. a place for sleeping
in ; a bedroom.
Ghipa, ka, v, 1. /or. (Eng. cheap)
to be cheap.
ObiiMddilo, n. 7. a place for pray-
ing to the mizhimo ; place for
making offerings to the mizhimo.
ChipalBho, n, 7. an offering made
to the mizhimo.
Ghipamp^bha, n. 7. a chip of wood.
Ohipande, if. 7. joint of the neck.
Ku konona ohipande cha
Xkahingo, to twist the neck — a
favourite way of killing people in
former times.
Ohip^ni, If. 7. the custom, manners,
ways of an aged, infirm person.
Used as adv., like an aged person.
OhipAni, if. 7. hammer of a gun.
GhipAnBlia, If. 7. a part, dmsion,
portion.
CMp^lOy If. 7. a kind of dance.
Ohjp^znpa, if. 7. a newly-made pot,
not yet burnt.
Ohipepatialio, if. 7. something for
fanning ; a fan.
GhipeBhabashiko, if. 7. a short
shrub, the root of which is used as
medicine for leprosy and syphilis^
Ohiptebo, If. 7. an old brush,
broom.
Chipfle, If . I a. puff-adder.
Chipipfla, If. 7. a piece or fragment
of something broken, especially
of a spear.
Ohipisba, ku, v. Ufor. cam. ohipa,
to cheapen, to lower a price.
Ohipo, If. 7. a present given to a
woman when a man has cohabited
with her.
Ohipok6sho, if. 7. a joint ; of the
elbow, wrist and ankle-joints.
Ohipok6to, If. 7. the ankle-bone.
Ohip61o, If. 7. a hole in a wall or
garment ; a wound.
Ohiptipa, If. 7. a mealie or mabele
stalk with no grain on it.
Ohlsa, kn, v, i, to be painful, sore.
Chisakabale, if. 7. a palm-tree.
Chisaktislio, if. 7. a prop.
Chioambilo, if. 7. a bathing^place ;
a washing-place.
Chiaambdmwi, num. six.
Chia&mbwe, n.ia. z. kind of snake.
OhiaAmo, if. 7. a tree cut down, a
log, piece of wood, a pole.
Ohisiimwa, if. 7. clothing ; in pi,
euph. the testicles.
Chiaanaamwe, if. 7. early morning,
when it is still cool.
Chiaipi, if. 7. disobedience, wilful-
ness.
Chisaulo, if. 7. gift, present.
Chisekele, if. 7. a small whitish
kind of fish ; ? whitebait.
Ohisenaa, if. 7. bare patch of
ground, without grass.
Chisha, ku, v.t. caus, ohisa, to
cause pain, to pain.
Chisha, kn, v.t, caus, ohita, to
cause, help to do, to do with, to
make with.
Chishe, if. 7. an old hole in the
ground.
CMahi, If. 7. an inhabited country
and its people, a nation. The
regular//, is ahiabi, but generally
mashi is used.
Chishldikflo, n, 7. a place for deal-
ing with sick people, a dispensary,
a hospital.
Chiahfla, if. 7. red clay used by
38o
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
people to smear themselves
with.
Chishfmbi, » • 7. a big girl (before
puberty).
Ohishfmbo, n, 7. a kind of dance.
Ghishfndi, n. 7. the heel.
Ohiahfnko, n, 7. a pole for stopping
up a gateway.
Chialiiiishi, n. 7. a young, ignor-
ant, innocent child.
Chishinahi. Ku langa mu chi-
shlnahi, to shade the eyes from
the sun in looking.
Chiahinaho, n, 7. a stopper, cork.
Chishlshl, n, 7. a stump of a tree.
Idiom. Mnkainta wa kala ku
ohiahiahi, said when a woman
bears a child which defaecates in
its birth. Such a child is de-
stroyed.
Chishiahini, n. 7. the gum, gums,
of the teeth.
Chiahitidizho, ». 7. a screen, some-
thing to screen or shade you from
the wind.
Chishitilo, n, 7. a place of abode.
Chfahu, n, 7. an edible leaf, vege-
table. Chiahu cha makamba,
leaves of the cassava.
Ohiaila, ku, v. i, reU chiaa, to feel
pain for, to be pained on behalf
of. Nda mu chiailwa moao, I
have compassion upon him.
Chiamaai, n, *j*for, £ng. Christmas.
Ohisoko, n, 7. a small bush, shrub.
Chiaokdbwe, n, 7. gravel.
Ohiaolo, n, 7. name of a game
played by girls.
Chiadmo, n, 7. an old worthless
iaomo.
Oh''86mo, n. 7. the month of April.
Chiaongdaho, if. 7. a pointed stick
used for digging ; the point is
also called chiaongoaho.
Chiaotokwa, n. 7. an obstacle,
something in the path which must
be jumped over.
Chiatimpa, n, 7. round top-knot of
hair left when all the rest is
shaved off.
Chiatingn, if. 7. a kind of dance,
danced at the girrs puberty
festival.
Chisnalii, n, 7. evU deare, especially
sexual ; lust.
ChiatLswa, n, 7. a pinnade of grass
put on the top of a hut
ChiatLws, i». 7. a calabash for hold-
ing milk, chum, an old inana.
Ohi^iso, n, 7. a lump of hard frit.
Chita, kii, V, t, to do, to make.
Chit&ntfila, n. 7. a rubbish-lump. 1
Chit^nto, n. 7. a bird's nest.
Chi-toke-oha*bwila, n, 7. the
month of June.
Ohit^ku, If. 7. the place just] under
the ribs which is ticklish.
Chit^mela, n, 7. /or. (Eng. steam,
through Suto aetamela), the rail-
way, engine or train.
Chitendalo, n, 7. a door.
Ohitibio, n. 7. stopper of a snuff-
box.
Ohitika, ku, v, i. cap, chita, to be
doable, to be possible to be done.
In the negative it expresses ' im-
possible '.
Ohitila, kn, v,t, rel. dhits, to do
to or for another.
Chitini, n. 7. for, ^Suto, aetene ;
Dutch, steen) a bnck.
Chit6, n, 7. a crossing-place, ford.
Chitofo, n, 7. for, (Suto, aetofo ;
Dutch, atof) European doth,
tweed, &c.
Chitolamattizi, if. la. a scavenger
beetle.
Ohitulukar, ku, v- i. rep, stat, chita,
to be remade.
Ohitulula, ku, v,t, rep, ohita, to
do over again, to remake.
Chituluma, i». 7. uneven piece of
country, ridge. Inahi ya ahitu-
luma, hilly country.
Ohitultizho, if. 7. a boring-tool, bit
and brace, auger, See
ChittunlMt, If. 7. a patch.
Chittinda, if. 7. an old basket.
Chittingu, n, 7. a temporary house
built in a field, occupied by
workers.
Ohittita, If. 7. foot, paw, of animal
of the cat tribe.
Ohiudilo, If. 7. a place for boying
and selling, a shop.
Gbiut0, If. 7. a variety of locust.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
381
CntiiThtibwe, if, la. a hippopota-
mus.
GhiThiilamibwe, n, 7. hail.
OhiThnnisho, n. 7. a lid, cover,
GhiThuntola, n. la, a boy or girl
who has not yet been through the
initiation ceremonies.
Ghivhntula, if. 7. a cluster of trees,
garden bed, gronp.
OUviiiiiino, If. 7. a thing believed|
an article of belief.
Ghiwa, n. 7. drought
GhiwA, If. 7. the outer appearance
of a man, countenance.
GhiwenA, if. i a. a crocodile.
Ghiwesese, if. 7. a kind of fish
poison.
CbiyiMho, if. 7. a door-&stening,
anything to close a door with.
Ghijeye, if. 7. tail of a bird.
Ghisapsoflhi, if. 7. a rag, a ragged
thing.
Chisha, ka, v.t, caus, ohila, to
load up a canoe or waggon.
OhialUino, if. 7. a dance.
Chighfke, if. 7. the way, custom of
a slave.
GhiBMngabula, if. 7. the fat sur-
rounding the intestines.
OhiBhingnlnkwa, if. 7. something
that is gone round; e,g, a tree
fallen across the path or an island
in the river.
GhlBU, If. 7. a patch of dry, long
Ohistiiigo, If. 7. an open basket of
reed used for fish, potatoes, &c.
Ghisrdngiiy if. 7. a family, genera-
tion.
Cho, (i) poss, pro, cL 7. sing, its.
Prefixed by gen. parts.; e.g.
mwizii ws-cho, the master of it.
(a) Num. part, cl, 7. sing. ; e,g,
ohdntu olio-mwi, one thing.
Cli6ba, If. 7. happiness, prosperity,
blessedness.
Ghokauka* ku, v^ u of things,
broken; of people, tired, worn out.
Cnioko, If. *l'for. (£ng.) chalk.
Chok61a, ku, v. t, to stamp grain.
Ohokdls, kn, v,t, to wash very
much; also to revile, curse very
strongly.
Oh61we, If. 7. good fortune, good
luck.
Ghongdla, if. 7. name of a finit,
red when ripe,
Cli6iika, kn, v, i, to poke with the
finger, or a stick ; also of an ox.
Ohoaa, ir. 7, => bosa, the female
flower of the mealie.
Cboaa, if. 7. Munta wa ahima
ohosa, said when any one is very
cold, or very weak. '
OhoxiBelo, If, 7. a lodging-place,
place for spending the night.
Chuohoma, ku, v. i, to fizz, as boil-
ing fat.
Ohukuluka, kn, v,i, to be over-
ripe, soft, rotting; to be very
tired.
Ohnkama, kn, v. i, to mortify, to
be putrid, to be over-ripe.
Chtdn, If. 7. an ant-heap.
Chtilu, n. 7. a thousand.
Ghultibe, If. I a. a bush-pig.
Ohilma, n. 7. a mass, of things, also
of people.
Ohiania, if. 7. an elevated position,
high ground.
Chomba, if. 7. The so-called
*• second stomach *, the reticulum
or honeycomb of cattle and sheep.
Chtimbwa, if. 7. a grain receptacle,
moulded with clay and grass.
Chtunbwe, if. 7. a grave.
Chnniio, if. 7. anything used to beat
a person with ( s Ohumpiifliho).
Ghiunptiaho, if. 7. b Chomio.
Chuna, if. 7. a stool, a chair.
Chundu, If. 7. dry ground, ground
that has old unbumt grass upon it.
Chungu, n. 7. a cut through the
middle of an animal, taking in
two or three pairs of ribs and cor-
responding vertebrae.
Chtiiigwe, If. I a. name of a bird.
D, pronounced as in English. D is
very closely related to 1; thus
when 1 is preceded by n, or fol-
lowed by i, it becomes d ; e.g.
nda lezha, I show; ba ndeahia
(not nlezha), they show me ; ku
dila, to cry ; ku didila (not ku
dilila), to cry for.
382
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
DanlmntLka, Im, v.i, to be soft
and nice (of food snch as
potatoes)^
Dankuntinay ku, v,u to eat soft
things, snch as eggs and potatoes).
-dankunushi, adj\ soft and nice;
e.g, bidyo bidanknnt^hi, soft)
nice food.
Dexnona, n. i a, for. (Eng. demon))
a demon.
Di iX), full form of classifier^ cl, 3.
sing. In most words the class
appears as i, bat the full form is
seen in dine, dinoo; and it
appears in the pronouns of this
class.
(2) Pers, and rel.pro, cl, 3. sing,
it.
(3) Refl, pro, prefixed to verbs;
e,g, ku dilela, to feed oneself.
In the following vocabalary some
verbs appear with di prefixed,
either because of some special
meaning or because they are
generally used in that way. These
will be indicated, so that no mis*
take may be made as to their
origin.
(4) Found as a kind of classifier in
certain adverbs of time ; e,g, dia-
komboka. In such cases the
adverb is really a clause made up
of a pronoun and verb, the word
iziiba being understood. Thus :
diakomboka stands for izuba
dia komboka.
Dia {i)gen. part, cl, 3. singn ; e,g*
dine dia-ngu, my tooth.
(2) Pers.pro. cl. 3. sing. it.
I>ia> ku. See ku dya.
Dia, ku, V, t, to pay, to spend.
Diabolose, n. la, for, (Greek,
diabolos), the deviL
Diakomboka, adv, at sunset, or just
before the actual setting.
Dia-konoka-itelo, if. lo. name of
a river-bird.
Dialala, ku, v. i. to look upwards.
Dialo, subs, pro, simple cl, 3. sing.
it, itself.
Diantauka, ka, v* i, of a man who
refuses a request, alleging he has
no time, or is too busy ; also of a
man who promises to do, but
doesn't : in any case a deceiver.
Diasubidizha, adv, sunset; just
after, when the sky is red.
Diata, ku, v, t, to kick, to trample,
to stamp.
Diataoka, ku, v. t, to tread, as day.
Diatikfgha, ku, v, t, fr, diata, to
press oneself into a crowd; to
overtake anybody.
Diaungaunga, adv. in the middle
of the afternoon.
Diba^ ku, v,i, to sit at ease with
notiiing to trouble one; to rest
peacefully.
Diba, ku, v, t. from kn iba, to
rob, especially of people robbing
each other, i.e, A robs B, and B
robs A.
Dib&kanya, ku, v. t, to get oneself
ready; e.g. Sa xnwa dibaka*
nya P are you ready (to start) ?
Dibaxnba, ku, v.t.fr. ku bamba^
to arrange oneself; e.g, a mu
dibambe, arrange yourselves,
fall \xu
Dibele, subs. pro. prep. cl. 3. sing.
it (where it is).
-dibile, adj. peaceful, at rest*
Didi, Didie P adv, when ?
DidieP interr. pro. cl, 3. sing.
which? e.g. Wa dima o iamba
didie P which hoe have you
hoed with?
Didila, ku, v, t, rel, dila, to weep
for.
Didilana, ku, v, t, rel. rec. dila, to
weep for each other.
Didisha, ku, v, i, int. dila, to weep
loudly, at length ; to duiek.
•die P prefixed by pros, which ?
e.g. Muntu udie P which
person.
Di6ba, ku, v. t, fr, kn eba, to
admire oneself.
Diebila, acbf. at sunset.
Diekela, ku, v. i.fr. ku ekela^ to
' sigh.
Dielasha, ku, v, t. to covet.
Difumpula, ku, v,i,fr. ku fiimpa,
to stumble.
DiAina, ku, v. i. fr, ku ftma, to
love oneself.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
383
Difwlshafwiaha, ku, v, i, fr, ku
fwa, to pretend to be dead.
Diidila, Ini, v.U rel, dift, to pay
for, on ^behalf ot
Diin«;adil», ku, v, i.fr, kn ingnla,
to answer for oneself, to be re-
sponsible.
Diinza, ku, v. t,fr, ku insa, to be
qniet, silent \ e,g, a mu diiiiB»,
be qniet
Diiya, ku (or, ku dlxa), fr, ku
ija, to leain.
Iliiym, ku (or, ku diya), v. U to
have a child for the first time ;
e.g, Wedia mwana ngu a
kwete ka akelo odixnwi naP
Pe> ngu a ka diiya, that
child she has, had she given birth
to another? no, that is the first
one.
Dika, ku, v. u cap, dya, to be eat-
able.
Dikalaukila, ku, 9. i, fr, ku ka-
lauka, to boast, to vannt; espe-
cially of a man jumping about
and boasting of his deeds after a
fight or hunt.
Dikumbtislia, ku, v, t, fr, ku ku-
mbula, to desire, to covet.
Dila, ku, V, i, to cry, weep, mourn ;
of animals, to call, bellow, sing.
Dila, ku, V, t, rel, dya, to eat for,
&c
Dilangila, ku, v,i, fr, ku langa,
to look out for oneself, to beware.
Dileaha, ku, v. t, fr, ku leka, to
leave off work, to abstain from
doing or eating.
Bima, ku, v, t, to hoe, to cultivate.
Dima, ku, v, i, to run very hard (of
animals).
Dimba, kn, v,i, to press, to touch
firmly; of a sorcerer changing the
dead. TJ la dimba, nku kuti,
wa buaha bakafwa ati ba be
baahike bakwe, that is to say,
he raises the dead to be his slaves
(said of a doctor).
Dimba, ku* v, i, of people going in
numbers, as all the people in a
. village, to fetch or take anything.
Ba la dimba ku chela, they idl
go to gather fruit.
Dimbauka, ku, v,u pers, rep,
dimba, to be printed, pressed;
also of one person sleeping upon
another for lack of room.
Dimbauaha, ku, v, t, to print, keep
on pressing ; also to despise any-
one.
Dimbuka, ku, v.i. to become
foolish, to be a fool, to be stupid.
Dimbulnka, ku, v,i. rev. dim-
buka, to become unfoolish, to
become wise.
Dimbulula, ku, v. t, to disbelieve,
to reject advice, instruction.
•dimbulushi, cufj. unfoolish, wise.
-dimbushi, adi, foolish, stupid.
Dimiansha, ku, v, i, to lick the
lips when eating something nice.
Dinakwabo, poss, phr, cl, 3. sing,
their, of their place.
Dinakwako, poss, phr» cl, 3. sing,,
thy.
Dinakwakwe,/^J5./Ar. cl, 3. sing*
his.
Dinakwangu, poss, phr, cl, 3. sing,
my.
Dinakwenu, poss, phr, cl, 3. sing,
thy, of thy place.
Dinakwesu, poss, phr, cl, 3. sing,
our, of our place.
Dinankumuna, ku, v,i, to lick
round one's mouth inside, so as to
remove food from teeth, &c.
Dinda, ku, v, i. to wait.
Dindidila, ku, v,t, rel, dindila,
to wait for, watch, guard for.
Dindila, ku, v, i, to wait, to await,
watch.
Dingatfsha, ku, v,t to put a pole
on one shoulder, in order to sup-
port a load carried on the other.
Dingula, ku, v, t, to inspect, to go
to one's field to see how it is, to
go and visit a trap to see if any-
thing is caught.
Dingn^ula, 1^, v.i. of a person
whom you tell something and he
understands, but nevertheless re-
turns and asks again; then you
say to him, u la ningulula, wa
telela kale.
Dingtiya, n, 3. a kind of dance.
Dino, n, 3. a tooth, fang of snake.
384
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Dinso, n, 3. //. menso, eye, also
sight of a gnn.
Dintinika, Im, v, u to be proud,
conceited.
Dio {i),poss. pro. cL 3. sing^. its;
e,g, matovu a»dio iaamo, the
leaves of it, the tree, (a) Num,
part, cl, 3. sing. ; e.g. isamo dio*
mwi, one tree.
Diok^zha, ku, v, u to rest.
Diomwi, num, cl, 3. sing, one.
Dionse, adv. always, continually.
pipa, ku, V, i, fr, ku pa, to give
each other something ; also, to
take something belonging to an-
other person, tmknown to him, bnt
with the intention of telling him.
Disadila, ku, v. i. fr. ku sala, to
choose for oneself.
Dis^nta, ku, v,i. to cease work
when the master is away.
Diaha, ku, v.U int. dya, to eat
much, ravenously.
Dishikila, ku, v. i. to lie with the
head on the arm.
Dishimuna, ku, v.t. Jr. ku shi-
muua, to confess.
Dishishimukila, ku, v,t. to take
a long breath, to breathe deeply.
Dishobashoba, ku, v. i, to cleanse
hands by brushing off dirt after
working.
Dishokota, ku, v, i. to rub a sore eye.
Disuka, ku, v.i. to break one's
£cist, to breakfast.
Disukula, ku, v. i, to dress the hair.
Pisukulula, ku, v. i. to gargle the
mouth.
Ditexnbaula, ku, v. i. fr. ku to-
xnbaula, to praise oneself, to boast.
Ditikinya, ku, v. i. fr. ku tiki-
nya, to shrug the shoulders,
pitikumuna, ku, v. i.fr, ku tiku-
muna, to flap, as a bird its wings,
to shake the head.
Pitimuna, ku, v. i. to sneeze.
Ditola, ku, v.i. to surrender, to
give oneself up.
Diubula, ku, v.i. fr, ku ubula,
to moult, to cast skin, as snake.
Diya, ku = ku diiya, to learn.
Diya, ku = ku diiya, v. /. to have
a child for the first time.
Di2a, ku, V. t, to dimb, to mount,
to ascendy to ride (a horse or ox).
I>izha, ku, v.t. caus. ku dila, to
cause, or help to mourn, as when
people go to a village where a
person has died, to weep with
their friends ; ku diaha ixijua, to
rattle.
Biahinguaha, ku, v, i.fr. ku stai-
nga, to gird oneself.
Dizika, ku, v.t. caus. diza, to
cause or help to climb, mount.
Diziaha, ku, v.t. int. diaa, to
climb swiftly, hard, much.
Dya, ku, v. t. to eat, to waste, to
consume, to devour; ku dya
izhina, to eat a name, to inherit ;
ku dya makani, to eat affairs, to
discuss matters ; ku dya inaun-
da, to eat Sunday, to spend Sun-
day, to attend church:
Dyombengana, ku, v.i. to be
mixed up, indistinguishable, as
when more than one herd mixes,
or when loads lie scattered about
and no one can tell his from an-
other, also to be knock-kneed ; of
people, to scatter.
Dyombenganya, ku, v.t. to scat-
ter, mix up.
E. The vowel has two values, § as
in there, 8 as in th3n. See cho^. iiy
sect. 2 for the changes which take
place when e is in collision with
other vowels.
Eba, ku, V, /. to gaze, to admire ;
ku dieba, to admire oneselL
Eb^ka, ku, v.i. cap. eba, to be
admirable, fine.
Eb^la, ku, V. t, rel, eba, to look at,
contemplate ; ba la njebela, they
gaze at, admire me.
Ebel&na, ku, v. t. rel. rec. eba, to
gaze at, admire each other,
•ebeahi, adj. admirable, beautiful.
Eb^zha, ku, v. t, rel, caus. eba, to
cause to gaze at, to ornament, to
decorate,
^hel intery. expresses agreement,
assent.
Bkela, ku, v. i. to sigh.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
385
Xklesia, m. i a, for, (fir. ekklMa)
the Church, the collective body
of Christians.
SUby kn, V, u to fail, to get weak
as old person, to fail in strength,
to come to an end ; Ijeza te edi
(for ta edi), God does not fail ;
xnuntu we ela, wa ba mnpami,
the person fails in strength, he
becomes an old person ; mwenau
wesu te edi, ue traveller does
not fail, does not get weary.
Ma, kUy V, U to bear fruit.
Xla, ku, V. f . to be fit, to fit exactly.
The p€rf» of this verb, elele, is
used to express our ideas, ought,
must. Thus, ndi elele kii chita
bobo, yon are fit to do so, yon
ooght or must do so ; bantu ta
be elele ku chita bobo, the
people must not do so. See also
the causative form, eaha.
BKka, ku, V, t, to measure.
Slelela, ku, dble, reL ku ela, to
be fit for, sufficient for ; wa lete
nehima 07a mu elelela, he
brings bread which is sufficient
for him.
Xleaha, ku, v,t cans, eleka, to
measure with, to cause or help to
measure.
Xmba, kUy 9./. to do a thing to
any one in fun ; to invite to
play.
Smb^la, ku, v, t to herd, to guard a
captive that he does not run
away.
SmbelAa, ku, v, /. reL embela, to
herd for ; e, g, nda langa muntu
u nyembelela, I want a person
to herd for me.
Embel^sha, ku, v. t, int. embela,
to herd well, carefully.
Xmb6sha, ku, v.t. cam. embela,
to cause, help to herd.
Bm6ka, ku = ku imoka.
Emtika, ku, v. i. to soften, partially
melt, as a candle.
Z-na 1 interj. really !
Snda, ku, v.i. to walk, travel,
march ; ku enda mulongo, to
walk in single file; ku enda
flonkutile, to hop.
End^la, ku, v.t. rel. ends, to
travel to.
End^la, ku, v.t. to rule, govern,
judge.
XSnd^nda, ku, v.i. redupl. enda,
to walk or wander about.
Xlnd^aha, ku, v.i. int. enda, to
travel fieist, well.
XSnd^Bha, ku, v. t. caus. endela, to
cause or assist to govern, to rule
with.
XSnga, ku, v. i. of a number of peo<
pie paying one man's fine.
Xng^la, ku, v. i. to sit around ;
bantu ba le engela ku chiko,
the people sit around the fire-
place.
JBngezha, ku, v. t. caus. engela, to
surround, to put things around
the wall inside a house, to put
straight, in order.
Bngeah^zha, ku, v.t, caus. rel,
engela, to put in order for some-
body.
XInu, pass. pro. a p. pi. « a-inu ;
e.g. manda enu, your houses.
Enza, ku, v. i. to go seeking honey.
Bnzana, ku, v. i. to be all there,
complete, perf. enzene ; muntu
udi enzene, he is all there, f . e.
has no sickness or physical defor-
mity, also, in a moral sense,
blameless, &c
Enz^la, ku, v. t. to pray.
Snzelela, ku, v. t. rel. enzela, to
pray to or for.
Bnzha, ku (kwtaiha), v.t. caus.
enda, to guide, to lead, to con-
duct ; ba la nyenzha, they guide
me ; ku enzha nkoloi, to drive
a waggon.
Enzha, ku (kwSnzha), v.t, to
find.
Enzhfaha, ku, v. t. caus, int, enda,
to cause to travel well, swiftly,
safely.
Enzuntika, ku, v.i, stcU. enzu-
nuna, to be melted.
Enzundna, ku, v.t. to melt, to
warm up meat.
Enzunt^ha, ku, v.t, stat, caus,
enzununa, to cause to melt, to
dissolve.
CC
386
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Esu, poss, pro, I /. //. formed by
prefixing a to isu ; 6,g, manda
esu (for a-isu), our houses.
Eta, ko, v,u to bend under a
weight ; mabalo a le eta (for a
eta), the hoops bend under the
weight.
Xt^la, ku, V. i. rel, eta, to be sorry
for somebody ; liU to bend under
a weight for him.
Et^Bha, ku, v,t, caus, etela, to
cause to be downcast, to be de-
spondent; wa dietesha, he is
troubled.
Eteahiwa, ko, pttss, of etezha, to
be grieved, sorry on account of
somebody, or something.
Ewe, adv. lot. form of iwe (a iwe),
in the east.
Bya, €uiv, yea, yes.
Esa, ku (kweaa), vA, to come.
Also appears as ku isa (kwisa)
and ku siza.
Ezeulu, adv, above; loc, form of
izeulu = a-izeulu.
Ezeulu a, prep, upon, above, on
top of.
Ezha, ku, v,t, caus, ela, to bear
fruit, to produce; insua i le
ezha, the chum produces ; petf,
ezhile, e.g, isamo idi ezhile, the
tree bears fruit.
Ezha, ku, v. i. caus, ela, to be
worthy, to be fit. See Ku ela ;
ezha has the same idea of ought.
Shi ezhi ku xnu bona, I am not
worthy to see him. TJ diezhe ku
ta ohita bobo, you are worthy
not to do so ; i. e, you ought not
to do sa Bantu ka ba te ezhi
ku ohita bobo, the people ought
not to have done so.
Ezhezha, ku, v, t, to smoothe, level.
Idiom, wezu muntu te ezhezha,
that person is habitually bad.
F, pronounced as in English.
Fisa, ku, v,t, to hide ; 9. i, to wag.
Fisauka, ku (or fwisauka), v.i,
pers, rep, fisuka, of people who
leave a place in companies, not in
one body ; v.t, to wag (a tail).
Fisuka, ku (or fwi8uka>, v, i, of
people leaving in a body.
F6ba, ku, v, t, to indent.
Fobodika, ku ( » ku foboleka)
v,i, cap, fobola, to be indentable.
Foboka, ku, v,i, stat, fobola, to
be indented.
Fob61a, ku, v. t, to indent.
Foboleka, ku ( « fobodika), v, i.
cap, fobola, to be indentable.
Fdma, ku, v, i, to breathe deeply,
to breathe stertorously in sleep, to
pant in running, to hiss, as a snake.
Fonkola, ku, v, i, to have plenty,
to receive plenty. Said by a per-
son who has received good wages,
a big price or large presents, nda
fonkola^
Fonkdzha, ku, v, /. cctus, fonkola.
to give plenty, to pay good wages,
give presents, a high price ; e,g.
ohintu chechi oha nfonkozha,
my thing has got much for me.
Fua, ku, V, t, to have, to possess,
to gain, to be rich ; petf, ftiile ;
e.g, wezo muntu udi ftiile zna-
bono, that person is rich.
Fuba, ku, v, i, to be dwarfed, short,
small.
Fubia, ku ( B ku fnbya), v, t,
to dwarf, to shorten.
Fubidfka, ku, v, i, to stoop down
in passing under anything, to
crouch doiwn in running away;
e,g, muntu wezo wa fabidika
u musanza upatile, be stoops
down (in passing through) the
dense forest.
Fubya, ku, z^. /. «* ku fdbia {q, v.),
Fudidlsha, ku, v, t, rel. caus, fula,
to blow upon, breathe upon, to
inspire.
Fudfla, ku, zr. /. rel. ftila, to blow ;
e.g, uwe fddila mudilo, blow
the fire.
Fufala, the moon of June.
FufVima, ku, v. i, to overflow (of a
boiling pot).
Fuftuniika, ku, v, i, to boll over
(of food), also of bread rising;
idiom, of a man whose rage over-
comes him, and he lifts his hand
to strike.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
387
Foftiintila, ku, v, /. to cause to rise
and overflow, as yeast does to
bread.
Pnfnmnaha, ka, v,i. caus. ftifti-
xnuka, to cause to boil over.
Shidyo ahashi aha ftiflnnnwhi-
wa, this food is caused to boil
over — as when a pot overboils
before the food is properly cooked.
Foiaha, ku, v.i. int, Aia, to
possess much, to be rich; v./.
caus, tuA, to cause to be rich ; e,^.
xnudimo wakwe wa xnu fuiaha,
his work enriches him.
Fnka, ko, v,i, stai, ftila, to rise
(of smoke).
Foka^ ku, v./. to build a house,
pntdng grass in the walls instead
of clay.
Pnkalala, ku, v,i. to be intent
upon something, of a person
bending over his work, working
intently without looking up, of a
hungry man eating ravenously,
and not looking about him.
FokimA, ku, v. t, to kneel.
Vnkomina, ku, v.t, rd, fokama,
to kneel before.
Vnkita» ku, v, i, to be half full
Pukatila, ku, ? rel, Aikata, to re-
ceive a thing with both hands, to
grasp firmly with both hands.
Vnkftiialia, ku, 9./. ^int, Aikata,
to grasp firmly.
Vukatiaha, ku, v,t, ^rel, caus,
ftikata, to cause to take with two
hands (as when giving anybody a
quantity of beads).
Ti^^a, ku, V, t, to eat or drink
quickly.
Pnkula, ku, v,t, to be sleepy,
drowsy, to doze ; ^.^. uda fiikula
ku kuamba kwakwe, I am
drowsy with his talking.
Vuknluka, ku, v,i, to break out
(of a rash or eruption on the
body).
Vukdma, ku, v, t, to rake out ashes
from a fire, to put maize in ashes
to roast, to put a stick in the fire
to straighten it ; e,g. wa fukuma
mapopwe mu ohiko, he roasts
maize in the fireplace; weao wa
ftikuma mudilo, he rakes out
the ashes and spoils the fire.
Fukumiiia» ku, v. /. rel. Aikuma,
to roast for somebody; nftiku-
miua imbata a mudilo, roast
for me potatoes in the fire.
Fukumtbia, ku, v, t, to scratch up
(of a fowl), of a person smoking
with quick short, puffs, emitting
much smoke.
Fuktiaha, ku, v. t, caus, Itikula, to
cause to be drowsy ; e,g, ya mu
Aikuzha inzala, hunger makes
him drowsy.
Fula, ku, V, t. to blow, to work in
iron, as a blacksmith ; €,g, fkkla,
nda twewa, blow, I have dust in
my eye.
Fulafnla, ku, v, t, redupl, Aila, to
blow with the mouth.
Fulalka, ku, v, t, to regard with a
lowering countenance ; also to be
afraid of looking one in the fiacc
because of a fauh.
Fulalkila, ku, v, t, rel, ftilaika, to
lower one's countenance against
another; e,g, mwami wa mfii*
laXkila bushu, the chief regards
me with a lowering countenance,
i. e. on account of some fault.
Fulama, ku, v, i, to stoop down to
drink water, &c.
FtUwe, n, i a, the tortoise.
Ftuna, ku, v. i, to be early astir, to
be up early, to start early on a
journey.
Fuma, ku, v, i, of a bird, to sail
along in the air without moving the
wings ; of a person, to go along,
too angry to speak.
Ftimba, ku, v, t, to burrow, to dig
a deep hole.
Fumba, ku, v. i, to boast, vaunt ;
of a man dancing and praising
his own deeds after a battle or
hunt.
Fumb6ta, ku, v, t. to close the fist,
perf, ftimbete ; e.g, weao muntu
udi fumbete, that man has his
fist closed.
Fumb6tila, ku, v,t, to dose or
clench the fist.
Fombattika, ku, v,i, rev, slot.
C C 2
388
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
fambata, to have the fist un-
clenched, to be open, of the hand.
Pumbattila, ku, v. t. rev, fambata,
to open the fist, nnclench the fist.
Fumina, ku, v, u rel. fuma, to be
up early for something; e.g. wa
ka fumina kudya, he got up
early to eat.
Fumfaha, ku, v. t, int. ftuna, to be
up very early.
Fumpa, ku, v, u to waylay and
rob, to kidnap, to take captive, to
raid.
FtiLinpa, ku, v. i, to be blunt.
Fumpia, ku ( s ku fumpya), v. t,
caus. fiixnpa, to blunt, to dull.
-ftunpiu, adj. blunt, dull ; e.g.
kexnbe kaftunpiu, a blunt axe.
Fumptika, ku, v. i. stai. ftunpula,
to come up out of the water ; e. g.
chivhubwe wa fumpuka, the
hippo, comes up.
Fumptika, ku, v. i. to be nearly
full.
FumptUa, ku, v.t. to take things
out of the water, also to nearly fill
a basket. Idiom, inoao wangu
wa ftimpula, i.e. I understand,
but my heart does not want to
do it
FumptUuka, ku, v. i. rep. fumpu-
ka, to come up over again out of
the water.
Fumpulula, ku, v. t. to take things
out of water again and again.
Fumpya, ku *= ku fuinpia (^. v^.
Funa, ku, v, t. to Xos^^perf. fwine ;
e.g. miikaintu wezo ndi mu
fwine, I love that woman.
Fun&na, ku, v. t, rec, funa, to love
each other.
Funanfsha, ku, v. t. rec. int. funa,
to love each other exceedingly.
Fun&nya, ku, v. t. rec. cans, funa,
to cause to love each other.
Flinda, ku, v. t. to skin an animal,
to cut up an animal.
Fundidila, ku, v. i. to be brim-
full, to be out of breath, to be
unable to breathe ; e. g. cha fun-
didila chibia, the pot is brim-
full. Nda fundidila bukadi,
I am brim-full of anger, i. e. 1 am
Tery angry indeed. HTda fiindi-
dila mi dime, 1 am full up with
work, i. e. 1 am tired of work.
Fundila, ku, v.t. rel. Ainda, to
skin or cut up for.
FundtUa, ku, v.t. to strip off
(bark).
Fundulula, ku, v. t. ? rev. fnnda,
to mark out, to describe a circle
when setting out a hut, to mark a
line on a plank for sawing.
Fundwila, ku, v. t. rel. f^dula,
to strip off (bark) for.
Funga, ku, v.t. to tie up; ku
funga bombe, to tie calves by
the leg at milking-time.
Funga, ku, v.t. ku Ainga im-
pumbe, to grow a top-knot (Baila
head-dress).
Fungiika, ku, v. i. stat. ftrngula,
to be weaned, to be adopted.
FungtUa, ku, v.t. to wean, to
adopt.
Fungulfila, ku, v. /. rev, ftmga, to
untie.
Fungumana, ku, v. i. to sorrow.
Fungumanina, ku, v. i, to sorrow
because of, for.
Fungusha, ku, v, t. caus. fonguka,
to cause to be weaned or adopted.
-funguahi, adj. weaned; e.g.
mwana mufunguahi, a weaned
child.
Funlka, ku, v.u cap, ftina,
lovable.
Funlaha, ku, v.t. tnt, ftina, to
love exceedingly, to adore.
-funishi, cuij. lovable; e.g.
mwana mufuniahi, a lovable
child.
Funka, ku, v. t. to shorten, abbre-
viate, to make a gathering in a
cloth, blanket, &c.
Funku, n, i a, strong beer.
Funktlnya, ku, v.t. to strike
without penetrating; isumo dia
mu fnnkunya, the spear strikes
him without penetrating. Fig. of
affairs. Makani a muluti wa
mu funkunya, the teachings of
the missionary reach him but do
not penetrate, i,e. they have no
effect.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
38!)
Ftmtika, ko, v, i, to be 'weaiy after
a long margh, or long toil ; to be
broken slightly (of a stick).
Funuldla, ku, v, t, ? re/, fiinuka,
of a thing beut and slightly broken
at the bend.
Funuklzha, ku, v,t, 7 re/, caus,
fonuka, to bend anything so as
to break it slightly at the bend.
Fununa, ku, v.t. to weary, tire;
e.^, mudimo wakwe wa ma
ftmoDa, his work wearies him.
•fanuahi, ai(/\ weary, tired; e,£,
mwexiEU muftinnahl, a weary
traveller.
P68a, ku, V, /. to shoot, to discharge
a gnn, to throw at Ku difiiaa,
to faint
Fusila, ku, v, t, re/, fusa, to shoot
for, to shoot at.
Kta, ku, V, /. to be rotten, to smell
badly.
The root idea of this word is * to
tarn ' ; of. our English idiom of a
thing that begins to go bad : * it
is tamed.* The idea of taming is
common to the following words
derived from ftita : —
Futama, ku, v. f . to tam roand.
Futamlna, ku, v, /. to tam one*s
back upon, to tam aside, away
from, to abandon.
Futamtika, ku, v,i, to tum, be
tamed.
FutAmnkfla, ku, v,t, re/, fata-
muka, to tam against, to rebel
against
Futamtma, ku, v, t, to tam any one
over.
Futaula, ku, v. t. per, rep, ftitula,
to tie a person's hands behind his
back.
Fut^ka, ku, v,i, to be rescaed,
saved.
Futtila, ku, V, t, to rescae, to save,
to tam ; e,g, I nte ngangwe wa
nftitula, when I was about to be
tied he rescued me.
The original meaning of this word
seems to be ' to tum altogether ',
as is seen in the phrase, ku fa-
tula nkomo, to tum a bag inside
oat
Futtiltika, ku, v,i, to torn back
again.
Futultila, ku, V, t, to bring back a
person.
Putusha, ku, v, t, caus, ftituka, to
cause to be rescued, saved.
•ftitushi, €u/j, rescued, saved ; mu-
ntu muftituahi, a saved, rescued
person.
Fuzha, ku, v, t. caus, ftila, to help,
or cause to blow, or work in iron.
Fwa, ku, V, i. to be dead, to die, to
be destroyed.
The verb ku fwa is used in a great
many idiomatic expressions, for,
with an exaggerated way of speak-
ing, the Baila are always saying
they are dead; e,g, ku fwa bu-
Iwazhi, to have pain, to be sick.
Ku fwa insala, to be hungry.
Ku fwa nyotwa, to be thirsty.
Ku fwa ibe, to perspire. Ku
fwa makatalo, to be dead-tired.
Ku fwa lushinga, to have tooth-
ache (with a swollen face). Ku
fwa mwanza, or mutwi, to have
headache. Ku fwa ohiteku, to
have pain in the side. Ku fwa
mwiAi, to have pain in the
stomach. Ku fwa itende, to
have a sore leg. So with other
parts of the body.
Fwuba, ku, v, i, to travel very fast.
Fwafwadika, ku, v. i, to be weak.
-fwafwadishi, ac/j\ weak.
-fwafwi, cuij, short, shallow.
Fw&mba, ku, v, i, to hasten, to be
quick.
Fwamb&na, ku, v, i, rec, fwamba,
to be quick, to hasten.
There appears to be no difference
between fwamba and fwambana,
except that properly fwambana
seems to be applied to more than
one person, fwamba to one only.
Fw&mpa, ku, v, i, to attempt to
seize a thing or a person, but in
vain.
Fwam.p&na, ku, v. i, rec. fwampa,
of two people attempting to seize
each other's things.
Fwampdnya, ku, v, i, rec. caus, to
cause to attempt to seize*
390
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Fwunpatika» ku, v. i, to be always
quick, to be rery quick.
Fw&nshay ku, v, /. cans, fwumba,
to hasten, to hurry one.
Fw6nahafW&nBhayka,z;. /. redupU
fwansha, to do a thing hurriedly
and badly, to be careless.
]*i}v^ba, ku, V. i. to smoke, to take
snufT; ku fweba tombwe, to
smoke tobacco; ku fweba lu-
bange, to smoke hemp; ku
fweba intombwe, or ku fweba
mwizuingo, to take snuff.
Pweb^ka, ku, v, i, cap, tweibt^, to
be smokeable.
Fweb^ha, ku, v. i. int. fweba, to
smoke much.
]*i}vek6may ku, v. i, to breathe hard,
to pant as a dog, to gasp.
]*i}v6znba, ku,?'. f . to grunt, as a pig.
Pw^mba, ku, v. t, to dislike ; perf.
fwembele. Badi fWembele,
they dislike each other.
Pwemb^jna, ku, v, t, rec, fwemba,
to dislike each other.
Fwembeka, ku, v, i. cap, fwemba,
to be unlovable, to be dislikeable.
'fwembeshi, adj, dislikeable, un-
lovable.
Fwenfeha, ku, v,t, to give pre-
sents to the sisters of one's bride.
Fw^sha, ku, v, t. caus, fweba,
to give to smoke, to cause to
smoke.
Fwididfla, ku, v. i, double rel, fwa,
to be altogether dead, perish.
Twididila, if . i a. a kind of wild cat.
Fwika, ku, v. L to draw a draught
of fishes to the bank.
Fwfla, ku, V, t, to die for, to be
dead to. Idiom, nda fwilwa ba-
nangu, my children are dead.
Fwfla, ku, v,U to spit upon ; e,g,
u ta ku nfwila mate, yon must
not spit upon me.
Fwilaila, ku, v, i, pers, rep, fwila,
to keep on spitting. Wa fwl*
laila Lesa, there is a shower.
Fwlmpa, ku, v. i. to be short.
Fwlnaha, ku, v. t. caus, fwimpa, to
shorten, abbreviate, to summarize.
Fwisauka, ku, v, i, to wag.
IVisaula, ku, o. /. to wag.
Twiaha, ku, v, i. mt fwa, to be
much dead; e,g, nda fwishA
naala, I am very much dead of
hunger, i,e, I am very hungry
ind^d.
Fwiaika, ku, v, t, to tie a slip-knot.
Giima, ku, v, i. to sound. Applied
to the sound of a water&U, also
to that of the intestines.
G6mya, ku, v./. caus, guma, to
cause to sound. Musamo wu
ngumya mwifti, the medicine
causes my intestines to sound.
GtLna, ku, v, t, to assent by nodding
the head.
H, pronounced as in English.
Hek^ma, ku, v, %, to pant (of a dog).
Hempi, n, \a. for, a shirt
(«■ chempi, q,v^.
Hi I (a peculiar nasal sound) inter j,
expresses disgust.
H61a, ku, V. t. to receive, obtain,
payment or rations.
Holela, ku, v, /. rel, hol», to re-
ceive on behalf of another.
Holofala, ku, v, i, to be maimed.
Holofaaha, ku, v, /. caus, holofala,
to maim.
HoBha, ku, v, t. caus. hola, to pay
wages, give rations.
Hube, n,ia.vi tadpole.
Hultima, ku, v,i, to growl, to snarl.
Hundauka, ku, v, i, to be dirty, of
water, f . e, ihll of sand, grass, &c
Hundaula, ku, v, t, to stir up and
make water dirty,
-hundaushi, adj, dirty; menahi
mahundaushi, dirty water.
Hupaula, ku, v,t, Ku hupaula
mudilo, to beat out a fire. Ku
hupaula mamwe, to drive away
mosquitoes.
HupuU, ku, v,i, to sleep just a
little, to have a nap.
Hupula, ku, v,t, to aim at, to
intend to go to a place. U hu>
pulakwiP where are yon going ?
I. The vowel has two sounds: i
as in ravine, and I in pity. For
the changes which take place
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
391
when i comes into collision with
other vowels, see chap, it, sect, 2,
I (i) classifier^ cl, 3. sing, where it
represents di-. (2) Pers. and rel,
pro, cl, 8. sing,, and cL a. pL
(3) Shortenedform of the adv, ni,
iefore the pers, pro, ip,\ eg,!
nda kn ya koko, when I was
going there. I nti Dgaxnbo,
when I was abont to speak.
lamba, n, 3. a hoe.
linda, n, 3. a very large house.
Iba, ku (« kwiba), v,t, to steal.
When a pers. pro. or particle pre-
cedes iba, the i coalesces with
the 8. Thns : Mu te bi (« mu
ta ibi), yon must not steal.
IbAba, n. 3. wing of a bird.
Ibaiki, n, 3. a big coat. See
Imbaiki.
Ib&la, n, 3. a colour.
Ib^lab^Xa, n, 3. a chip.
Ibalabala, n. 3. a slight colour;
e,g, ing'ombe yangu idi kwete
ibalabala, my ox is only slightly
coloured.
Ib&nda, n. 3. valley, plain, open
country.
Ibftnga, n, 3. a large dLibanga, q.v,
Ib&ngabinga, M. 3. flame.
Ibaiika, kn, v, i. to float on the
surface of water.
Ibe, n, 3. perspiration; kn fwaibo,
to perspire ; //. is mibe.
IbALO, n, 3. a snuff-spoon.
Xbele, n, 3. a single grain of mabele.
Ib^le, n, 3. udder of cow or ewe ;
applied also to a big, protuberant
belly.
Ibel6ko, ». 3. a file.
Ib^nde, n, 3. a broken thing, a
crooked thing (of a person not
hoeing straight in a field).
Ib^nde, n, 3. a kind of rat.
Ib^nahi, n, 3. the spleen.
Ib^ho, n, 3. shoulder of animal.
Ib^hi, i». 3 a large spear.
Ibibi, n, 3. a pile of wood just cut
down in a new field ; //. mabibi.
Nda ya ku mabibi, I am going
to the new fields.
Ibila, n, 3. a bonfire, a big fixe such
as that of the mabibi.
Ibila, ku, V, i, to sink, to dive, to
set (of the sun) ; e, g. isuba dia
bila (dia ibila), the sun sets.
Perf, ibidile ; e,g, montu ke bi-
dile, wa ftunptdut, the man dived
and came up.
Ibivhwe, n, 3. jealousy, envy. Ba
mu ohitila ibivhwe, th^ are
envious of him.
Ibisha, ku, v. t, caus, ibila, to sink
a thing in water.
Ib61o, n. 3. a testicle.
Ibdmbwe, n, 3. a rash, eruption on
the skin.
Ibdndwe, n, 3. an edible leaf.
Ibon6ntel6mba, n, 3. the castor-
oil plant.
Ibdshi, n, 3. a rotten thing. Pro-
perly the adj. boBhi in cl, 3.
Ibu, n, 3. a large reed.
Ibtibi, ;f. 3. a long-legged spider.
Ibtika, n, 3. for. (&ig.) a book,
especially a large book.
Ibuka, ku, v, i, to be known, to be
noised abroad ; muntuwebuka,
the person is notorious, is known ;
ke buka kambo, the affair is
known abroad.
Ibukiti, n, 3. fifr, (Eng. bucket) a
pail, bucket.
Ibtila, ku, v,t, to akim, to take
things out of water.
Ibtila, H, 3. a large evergreen tree,
its timber very good for joinery
work, has an edible fruit.
Ibtilo, n, 3. any large iron tool.
Ibulukwe, n, 3. for, (Suto, buru-
kwe ; Dutch, broek) trousers.
Ibtimbu, n, 3. the ab<k>men below
the navel.
Ibliaha, ku, v.t, cans, ibuka, to
spread news abroad; e,g, ba ke
buaha makani akwe, they spread
abroad his affairs.
Iblizo, n, 3. the baobab-tree. A
big stout person is called an
ibuao.
Ibwabwa, m. 3. a tree planted by a
grave ; //. mabwabwa, used of a
grove of trees planted around a
grave.
Ibwinta, n, 3. a large house.
IbwAntu, n, 3. light beer; //. ma-
392
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
bwantu, indicates a large qnan*
tity.
Ibwe, n, 3. a stone.
lohe, adv, alone ; we ziza iohe, he
comes alone, bj himself; iche
nana, quite alone, all by himself.
Ich^ba, If. 3. a bayonet, sword.
loh^zho, If. 3. a lathe for turning
ivory bracelets.
Ichlla, ff. 3. a large tail, as of a
horse.
Idiba, If. 3. a trap for birds or rats.
Idle P interr, pro, which ? IT la
langa mitiba idle f which
basins do you want ?
Idila, ku, V. t, to imitate, to copy ;
also to credit or believe lying tales.
Idil^bia, ku, v,L to imitate each
other.
Idibila, if. 3. a hole made by water
washing out the soil.
Idimba, if. 3. a cloudy, cold time ;
e,g, mweshi wezu nd' idimba,
this month is cold, cloudy.
Idindi, if. 3. a hole in the ground.
Idfnga, If. 3. a fence erected for a
chief, a fortress.
Idfzha, ku, v, t, cans, idila, to copy,
imitate; ^.^. nda mu idizha, I
will imitate him ; wezo ta idi-
zbiwa, that (person) is not to be
imitated.
Idyabdntu, if. 3. a cannibal.
Ifoko, If. 3.y5>r. (Eng.) a fork.
Ifosholo, If. Z'f<^. (Zulu, ifotyolo)
a spade, shovel.
Ifu, IS. 3. the stomach, abdomen
(above the navel), the so-called
' first stomach *, the rumen, or
paunch, of cattle and sheep, the
(pregnant) womb. Mukaintu
udi kwete ifu, the woman is
pregnant ; bantu baba mba ifa
diomwl, these people are of one
family.
Ifii mama I inUrf, phew t
Ifua, If. 3. a large bone.
Ifofu, If. 3. a slight rain, a misty
drizzle.
If6fwe, If. 3. a lung.
Ifdka, If. 3. num, nine.
IMko, n. 3. a big pipe, a lot of
dust.
Ifdktisi, If. 3. a lot of hot earth
under a fire.
Ifombaldshi, is. 3. a light brown
colour.
Ifum.bo, If. 3. the finit of the mn-
ntokoshia bush.
Iflinefdne, is. 3. cool, overcast
weather ; e, g, nsunu nd' ifune-
fane, to-day it is cool, cloudy.
Ifdta, If. 3. usually in pi. mafuta,
fat. Used in reply to a request
for fat ; ^. ^. ni na ifata budio,
I have not even a little fat.
Ihafo, If. 3. for, (Eng.) a half.
Ihempi, if. 3. for, (Suto, hempe ;
Dutch, hemd, hempie) a shirt.
Ihupfka, ku, v, i, to go hungry to
bed.
Ika, ku, V, t, to cook, to boil.
Ikalntu, If . 3. a very large woman.
IkAla, If. 3. a coiL
Ik&mba, if. 3. cassava.
Ikdnda, if. 3. soft skin of an animaL
Ikangaloa, if. 3. a clot of blood.
Ik&ni, If. 3. an affair, saying, conduct.
IkAnka, if. 3. rough, towsled hair,
like that of a Munkoya.
Ik&nko, If. 3. seed sown in the
ground.
Ikasadizbi, if. 3. the cool of the
morning.
Ikatdlo, If. 3. sandal, boot,
-iki, adj, cooked; e.g. buzane
bwiki, cooked meat ; mapopwe
maiki, cooked maize; shishu
shiki, cooked leaves; ikamba
iki, cooked cassava.
Ikila, ku, V' t, rel, ika, to cook for ;
e,g, Ba la njikila, they cook
for me.
Ikisha, ku, v. t, int, ika, to cook
well, to cook much.
Ikizha, ku, v. t, to stick to a thing,
to persist in doing, especially in
advising, teaching ; to keep law or
custom ; nda mu ikizha, I stick
to him, I persist in my attentions
to him.
Ik6a, If. 3. a wild cucumber, applied
also to a European cucumber.
Ik6ka, If. 3. a kind of thorn-tree.
Ikdka, If. 3. a large bundle of fish
on a string.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
393
Ik61ok61o, n. 3. a cold in the chest,
bronchitis.
Ik61wa, n. 3. phlegm ; //. mako-
Iwa, used of a quantity of phlegm.
Ik6mbOy n. 3. a large navel, an
nmbilical hernia.
Ik6inwe, n. 3. a large clod, lump
of earth ; kudi kwete makomwe,
to be lumpy, of mortar, &c.
Ik6to, H, 3. a large knot.
Ik6ba, n. 3. a large field.
Iktibi, n, 3. a beer-drinking feast.
Ikubi = shikubi, a vulture.
Iktika, ». 3. a lump of rubbish
gathered up in a field.
n^ko, n, 3. the shoulder-blade.
Ikiilabtiahfku, n, 3. a name given
to a hairy person, one who grows
quickly.
Xknluxnino, n. 3. the trachea.
Ikamba, n. 3. a hard, dried-up skin.
Iktimbi, n. 3. a cloud.
Iknxni, n. 3. num. ten; makumi
obili, twenty.
IktiDgo, n, 3. a big stack of mealies.
Iktmka, n, 3. an ear of grain, ear
of macheme.
Ikunkalwishi, n, 3. anything car-
ried down a stream by the current,
applied also to a person who is
always travelling about.
Iktmku, If. 3. a gale, a strong wind.
Tkdo, ft. 3. a midnight lishing.
Ikapam^no, is. 3. toothache, not
of one tooth, but when all seem
to be aching ; neuralgia.
Iktisha, ku, v, t, caus, ikuta, to
feed up anybody, to make food
palatable.
Iktita, ku, V. 1. to be satisfied,
satiated, with food ; perf, ikutile.
Ikuta, n, 3. a large chikuta (q.v.).
Ikutidils, ku, v. i, dble. rel. ikuta,
to be quite satiated with food.
Ikutisha, ku, v. i, int. ikuta, to
be very satisfied, quite satiated.
Iktizu, n. 3. fruit of the bukusu
tree, wild fig.
Ikwdti, ». 3. a box, tin.
Ikwel61e, ». 3. sheath of the
mealie.
Ikwfld, n. 3. a big cloud of locusts,
a great number of locusts. A
cloud of locusts is regarded as one
thing. SeeChikwikwl
Ila, ku, V. i. rel. ku ya, to go
for, to go to ; bantu mbo ba
ka ila koko, the people that
they went there for.
Ila, ku, V. i. to be tabooed ; e.g,
chi la ila ohechi, ta ohi chit-
wa, this thing is forbidden, it is
not done.
Ha, n. 3. a large bowel.
Ila (ila), n. 3. a single grain ; //.
maila, used of a lot of grain.
Ilala, If. 3, a large palm-leaf.
Il&lo, If. 3. a large bridge.
Ilampi, If. 3. for. (Eng.) a lamp.
U&na, ku {or, ku wilana), v. i. of a
person who goes on perseveringly
in spite of illness.
Il&nda, If. 3. a leglet, ring of wire
worn below the knee.
Il&ndo, n. 3. a ford, landing-place.
Ilandu, If. 3. (? Tonga) a fault.
U&ngaldnga, if . 3. a flower.
Usually used in pL maJanga-
langa.
He, perf. ofkxL ya, to go.
lie. If. 3. a large ohile {g. v.).
Ilembe = inembe, if. 3. a peg,
nail.
Iletele, if . 3. far, (Eng.) a letter
of the alphabet.
Ilombwina, if. 3. a big man.
I16ndo, n. 3. a drop.
I16ngo, If. 3. a large quantity of
clay.
Ilumabanduwe, n. 3. a centipede.
Htimbu, If. 3. a variety of maize.
Uumbu, If. 3. a big person of the
Lumbu tribe,
ntinda, if. 3. a kind of calabash.
Iltinda, if. 3. a big heap.
Ilundu, If. 3. a mountain.
Iluse, If. 3. an overhanging roof,
verandah. "Wa kala mwiluse,
he sits under the verandah.
Iiubalo Iwa iluze, the wattle
put round at the extremity of the
roof-poles,
Im, classifier cl. 8. sing.^ 8 and 9.//.
Ima, ku, V. t. (kwima), to deprive.
Imamba, ». 9. //. of lumamba,
wars.
394
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Imftmba, n, 8. a small button-like
object worn in the hair, a charm.
ImambAla, if. 3. the woman who
accompanies a girl on her first
visit to her husband's house.
Im&no, n, 9. //. of luinano,
pincers.
Im6naa, n, 9. //. 0/ lubanaa,
threshing-floors.
ImAnzho, n, 8. = ingvhiilay a
stone used to sharpen or roughen
a grindstone.
Imba, n.^, pi, of luba, fences,
stodcades.
Imba, ku, v, t. to sing.
Imb&ba, n, 8. an ox with one horn
horizontal, the other vertical; e.g.
ing'ombe ezhi nimbaba, this ox
is of such a kind.
Imbabo, s$ibs, pro. indie, cl. i. //.
it is they.
Imbadimbadi, n.%. the Kafne
plain.
Imbaiki, n. 8. for, (Suto, baki ;
Dutch, baaiji) a coat, jacket.
See Ibaiki.
Imb&k&ni, n. 8. a flag, a banner.
Imbalo, n. ^.pl. ^lubalo. Wattles
used in building.
Imb&ta, n. 8. a sweet potato.
Imb&vn, n. 8. name of a fish, a
kind of bream, very good eating.
Imbe, n. 8. the bulb of the water-
lily.
Imbele, n. 3. presence ; e.g. ba la
kala mumbele dia mtioneki,
they sit in the presence of the
king,
Imbele, subs, pro, prep, i /. sit^.
and cl. 8. sing, and cl. 2. //. me
(really, where I am), it, them ; e.g.
kweaa kwimbele, come to me.
Imbele-mbele I forward !
Iinbelekelo,M.8.y^r. Saturday. This
word is derived from the Zulu
(through Tebele), Umgqibelo, the
nnishing. Owing to the impossi-
bility of pronouncing the clicks
the word has been changed so as
to appear derived from ku bele*
kela, to work for. (Or perhaps
it is from the Teb. impegelo.)
ImbeUle, n, 8. a sheep.
Imb^ta, n, 9. //. of lubeta.
Meetings for trying cases, laws.
Imbeteko, 11.9. //. of lubeteko,
sentences, judgements.
Imb^Bo, imb^aho, n. 8. a tool for
working wood; a plane, adze,
chisel.
Imbidila, n.%. the rough outside
bark of trees, the rough exterior
on some horns.
Imbila, ku, v.t. rel, iniba. To
sing to, to sing of or about.
ImbUa, ku, v, t. to weep very mndi
so that tears flow down on to the
body. Imbilwa, pass, to be left
alone in solitude with nobody to
talk to.
Imbflo, n. 9. //. of lubilo. In the
sing, the word means swiftness, a
fast pace ; in the pi. it means great
swiftness, a very fJEist pace.
Imbiaha, ku, v. 1. int. jLmba. Te
sing loudly, to sing well.
Imbizha, ku, v.t. caus. imbila,
to desert one, to leave him alone
in solitude.
Imbizhi, n. 8. a horse.
Imbo, subs. pro. indie, cl. 4. sing.
and cl. I. pi. it is not it, it is not
they.
Imbokdma, n. 8. a pipe made from
a calabash.
Imbol^zhi, n. 8. manure.
Imbombo, n.B. the Machabel tree.
Imbongolo, ik.8. an ass, donkey,
mule.
Imboni, n.S. the pupil of the eye ;
the pupil is associated with the
sight of the eye, thus imboni
means also sight.
Imbono, n. 9. //. of Inbono,
loads.
Imbotolo, u, 8. for. (Eng.) a
bottle.
Imbdaobdzo, n» 8. Adam's apple.
Imbubo, si^s. pro. indie, cl. 4. sing.
it is it, it is so.
Imbuka, n. 8. for. (Eng.) a
book.
Imbtila, n. 6. the fruit of the ibula
tree.
Imbultilu, n. S. the last quarter of
themoon«
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
395
ImlmBginOi «i.8. a meeting, an
assembly.
Imbdts, M. 8. a small white object
worn in the ear, a button.
ImbtitOy n. 8. seed.
Imbws, M.8. a short stick tied at
the end of the kOBO in the idiba
trap.
Imbweoh^ohe, ».8. the river
pheasant.
Imbwffngins, n, 8. tick of dog or
fowl.
Imbwila, n. 8. a round edible bean.
Imf&di, f^ 8. gizzard of a bird.
Imftiklisi, If. 9. //. 0/ Inftikiiai,
Imffimba, n, 9. //. 4ff luftunba,
hoofs of animals.
ImAimfwe, i». 8. a fish that has
been killed and partly eaten {e.^,
by a crocodile) and found in the
water.
Imftmgnahiy n, 8. a weaned calf ;
properly the adj. -fungashi in
cl. 8.
ImAinke, n. 8. the so-called fourth
stomach of cattle and sheep.
Imftuishi, n, 8. the fist. Ku nma
imfdnshi, to strike with the fist.
Imftmynnga, n. 8. « imftidi, giz-
zard.
Imimbi, n, 8. the black ash of
burnt grass.
Inrfnhft, ka, v./. caus, imita, to
cause to conceive, to become
pr^nant.
Iinita, ka, v, 1. to become pregnant,
to conceive.
Imo, n, 9. //. ^lumo, razors.
Imo, n, 3. a very tall person.
Imoka, ko, v. i. to delay, to be
late.
Imokila, ku, v./. rel. imoka, to
wait for, to delay on account of;
we mokUa nahi? why did
you delay ?
Iflaomba, n. 8. the black genet.
Impaka, n, 8. something which i^
alike all through, as a suit of
clothes.
ImpAko, n, 8. a hole, crevice, in a
tree. Menahi a mu xnpako,
water in a tree-hole.
Imp61a, If. 8. the glans penis when
circumcised. Circumcision is
practised by Mankoya and some
Baila : the prepuce is eaten by the
one circumcised.
N.B. — This word is commonly
used for the Pallah antelope, it
being the Sekololo name for that
animal : owing to the meaning of
the word in Ila it should not be
used among Baila.
Imp&nde, if. 8. a large shell used
as an ornament and much es-
teemed by the Baila.
Impang&ti, if. 8. a fork-stick used
for tying up slaves, a neck fetter.
Imp&ngo, If. 8. a line or verse of a
hymn.
Impasela, if. 8. fir, a present.
This word has an interesting
history : we trace it to the Dutch
word baas ; from this is derived
the Kaffir word uku basela, to
give a present, ue, show me by a
present that you are my baas, my
master or lord ; also the noun
ibaao. In Suto the word appears
as paiela, a present. Hence the
form impasela.
Imp&BO, If. 8. a grasshopper.
Imp&ta, If. 3. a large enclosure, kraal.
Impat&na, n. 8. a small bag, pouch,
purse.
Imp&to, If. 8. sandal, boot.
Impau, If. 8. a receptacle for fisit,
an oil-can.
Impaula, ku, v.f. of one who
frowns and doesn't look upon
another, i.e. he is angry with him
or disgusted at his doings — ^u la
impaka bukadi.
Imp61a, If. 8. the extremity, end of
anything^ summit of a tree, tip of
a knife, apex of a house ; the
conclusion of an affair, speech,
discourse, or book.
Imp^lwe, If. 8. the top grinding-
stone.
Imp6pe, If. 8. tail of a fish.
Impose, If. 8. a kind of plant with
small thorns upon it which cause
irritation if handled.
Imp6ta, If. 8. a horn of reed-buck,
39^
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
pnkn, or pallah, used as a trampet;
a bugle.
Imp^yo, n,S, a cold wind, cold.
Ku fwa impeyo, to be cold.
Ixnpezho, n. 8. a broom, brush.
Ixnpi, n.S. an army.
Ixnpfla, ft. 8. a ball.
Impishi, n. 8. a mine-shaft
ImpO) ft. 8. the escape hole from an
animal's burrow.
Imp6be, ft. 8. a large biting fly.
Imp6kOy If. 8. a knife.
Imp6ko, ft. 8. a plant used to give
relish to food.
Imp61o, ft. 8. bran.
ImLpologdso, ft. 8. earache.
Impdlwe, ft, 8. a kind of tall,
rough grass.
Imp6mbo, ft, 8. gum exuded from a
tree.
Impondo, ft.S. for, (Eng.) a
pound, a sovereign.
Imp6ngo, ft, 8. a goat.
Impongolwa. n. 8. the sound pro-
duced by cracking the 6nger-joints.
Ka chita impongolwa, to crack
the finger-joints.
Imp68o, ft. %,for, (Eng.) post, mail.
Impudilo, ft. 8. a shallow basket
used as a plate.
Imptila, ft. 8. a kind of spear, used
. among other things to dispatch a
wounded animal.
Impultilwa, ». 8. a kind of plant
eaten as a relish with food.
Impdma, ft, 8. honeycomb with
honey in it.
Impumba, n, 8. a heart-shaped
thing. Ndi kweta impumba ya
moEO, I am grieved, unhappy.
Imptimbe, ft, 8. the chignon of the
Baila when not fully grown.
Imptimpa, ft, 8. a grass armlet.
Imp-dmpwa, ». i a. the cheetah.
Impumpa, n. 8. small ground-nut.
Impungu, ft, 8. a variety of small
pumpkin.
Impunisho, ft. 8. for, (Eng.) a
punishment.
Imptishiy ft, 8. name of a kind of
snake, non-poisonous; belts made
from the skin.
Impute, ft, 8. a large fishing-hook.
Impute, n, 8. a variety of ground-
nut.
Imputeo, ft, 8. for, (Suto, phu>
theho) a meeting, a class of
catechumens.
Impati, ft. 8. a small band of iron
put round the spear-shaft to hold
in the blade.
Impawo, ft, 8. a thing known,
spread abroad ; famous thing.
Shianza shabo usuna nim-
puwo, to-day their customs are
famous. Insana sliakwe aha
ya impuwo, his strength is
famous.
Imipwidi, ft, 8. the tall head-dress
of the Baila when fully grown.
Impwisho, ft, 8. a plaything used
in the game of kupwa.
ImpwizM, If. 8. a cow.
Imvtila, ft, 8. rain. (See note in
Eftg.-Iia Vocabulary.) Ku wa
imvula, to rain.
Imwe, ft. 3. a mosquito.
Imwe, ft, 8. s chimwe {q, v,),
Imya, ku, v,t, caus, ima. To
deprive. Bukata bwako bwa
kwimya kudya, thy laziness has
deprived thee of food.
In, classifier cl, 8. sing, and //.
Ina, ku (kwina), v, i, to be fat,
to be fertile.
Ina, ku (kwina), v, t, to be not, to
have not ; e, g. nina ( » ndi ina)
tudyo, I have no food. Ba ina
ku mana, they have not finished.
Ba ina uku mana, they were not
finishing. Kwina muntu, there
is no person. Ka kwina muntu,
there was no person.
Inakwabo,/0jx. phr. cl, 8. a thing
belonging to their people.
Inakwako, poss, phr, cl, 8. a thing
belonging to thee.
Inakwakwe,/0fx. phr, cl. 8. a thing
belonging to him.
lnakwangu,/0jj./^r. cl,%, a thing
belonging to me.
Inakwenu, poss. phr, cl, 8. a thing
belonging to your people, your
place.
Inakwesu, poss* phr. cl, 8. a thing
belonging to our place^ our peopl^
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
397
Infingabaoh^nde, n, 8. a heifer
ready for the bull, old enough to
calve for the first time.
Inangabadya^ n, 8. the evening star,
indicates, 'that which sees the
eaters.*
In&ngo, n, 3, a nose. The pi.
manango, used of the nostrils.
Inch^bxioh^bu, n, 3. a small beetle,
supposed to give good luck.
InohJls, n, 8. the spout of the
blacksmith*s bellows, that part
which is in the fire.
Inohi, n, S,/or (£ng.) an inch.
Inohicho, suds, pro, indie, cl, 7
sing, it is it.
Inoho, subs, pro, indie, cl, 7 sing.
it is not it
InclL6ko, n. 8. armlet or leglet.
Inchdaa, n. 8. a kind of wild duck.
Inchwa, n. 8. a dangerous disease,
as small-pox, &c.
Inda kn, v. t. to try, to experiment.
Ind&ka, n. 9. pi. ^lulaka, tongues.
IJdi kwete indaka shobili, he
has two tongues, i.e. he says one
thing now and another afterwards.
Indanddla, n, 8. a kind of musical
instrument.
Ind&vu, n, 8. (?from Totela) a
lion. Kasokwe munsa, mashi-
ku ya ba ndavn, a bit of grass
in the day, in the night he becomes
a lion. (Said of the lion.)
Indel^ma, n. 8. a new, young leaf.
Indole » n, 8. the space between
the shoulders. "Wa mu yasa a
ndelo, he speared him between
the shoulders.
Indi, ». 3. a large mwindi, shin-
bone.
Indiasho, n. 8. sandal, shoe, boot.
Indidio, subs, pro, indie, cl. 3. sing,
it is it.
In dime, suhs. pro. indie, i /. sing,
it is not I.
Indixni, n, 9. pi, of ludimi,
tongues.
Indimwe, subs, pro, 2 p, pi, it is
not you.
Indindima, ku, v, i. to thunder,
of the sound of thunder; wa
indindima leza, it thunders. If
you ask a native for an explanation
of this word he will say it means,
Iiesa wa chita ndi-ndi-ndi«
ndi. . .
Indio, subs, pro, indie, cl, 3. sing,
it is not it.
Indiodionga, n. 3. name of a tree
growing by the river-bank.
Indiswe, subs, pro, indie, i /• pi.
it is not we.
Indiwe, subs, pro, 2 p, sing, it is
not thou.
In do, subs, pro. indie, cl. 9, 9 a.
sing, it is not it.
Indolo, If. 3. drowsiness, sleepiness.
Ind6nga, n, 8. a needle (Lumbu).
Indtiba, n, 9. //. ^Inluba, flowers.
Induba sha buchi, flowers from
which bees take honey^
Induba, ». 8. a bird, the red
feathers of which are used as a
head-dress by warriora.
Indulo, subs. pro. indie, el. 9, 9 a.
sing, it is it.
Indiwe, If. 8. bile, gall. Nda fwa
ndulwe, I am bilious.
Indlimo, 11.8. fame.
Indlimba, if. 8. a woollen blanket ;
indumba inkando,a large, heavy
woollen blanket.
Indw&Bhi, If. 8. a sick animal ; of
cattle, sheep, goats. Properly the
adj. -Iwazhi, in. el, 8. sit^. or pi,
Indya, if. 8. gluttony, greed,
greediness.
In^mbe, n. 8. a peg, naiL
In^ngan^nga, m. 8. middle, or half
way; e.g. twa shika anenga*
nenga ebanda, we have arrived
half way across or in the middle
of the plain.
Inevhwan^vhwa, if. 8. the outside
covering of a reed, or maize-stalk.
Infdko, If. 8. a pipe.
Infdla, If. 8. a pimple, especially
on the face.
Infi^mo, If. 8. name of a tree, fruit
eaten.
Infwembilo, if. 8. that part of the
abdomen which swells when one
shouts or shrieks; in certain
animals a gland.
Ingal interj. expressing surprise,
398
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
reproo£ Inga! "We mokal
well, you have delayed.
Inga, isMjV.t, to bolt a door, to lock.
Ingalnai ku, v. i, to be equal,
-ingalne, adj, equal ; e,g, Shintu
shingaine, equal things.
Ingalnya, leu, v. t, cans, ingalna,
to equalize, make equal.
Ingala, n, 8. a crest, head ornament
of feathers.
Ing*anda, n, 8. irregular pi,
manda, a house.
Inganda, m. 3. a large man.
Ing'anda, ». 8. a long, large forked
stick.
Ingando, n. 9. //. of Iwando, q* v,
Inganyabo, n, 3. a very big thing.
Ing&o J suds, pro, indie, cl, 3, 4, 5,9 a.
it is they.
Ingashf , n, 8. a platform erected in
a field, with a hut built npon it.
IngAi, n. 8. a thing dead, destroyed,
rendered of no use.
Ingflunpo, If. 8. anything which
causes one to stumble, a stumbling-
block.
Inghuma, n, 8. fruit of palm-tree.
Ingila, ku « ka injila, q, v.
Inge, subs, pro, indie, cl, 3, 4, 5, ga,
pi, it is not they.
Ingo, If. 8. joint, especially of hand
and foot. Inge aha zuinwe,
finger-joints.
Ingot I inter), used to express deep
respect when speaking to a chief,
especially to express assent to
what he says.
Ingolida, n,i,for. (Eng.) gold.
Ingol61o, If. 9. //. of longolola,
q.v,
Ing61wa, If. 8. a kind of whistle.
Ingdma, if. 8. a snuff-box.
Ingomi, If. 8; a drum.
Ingomantambwe, if. 8. a kind of
musical instrument
Ing'6niba, if. 3. a chili.
Ing6mbani, if. i a, th& klipspringer.
Ing'ombe, if. 8. a head of cattle ;
in the pL, cattle.
Ing'ombe-muka, i». 8. a kind of
beetle. This beetle is used by
the Baila to tie into their hair to
catch lice.
Ingondo, if. 8. a heavy ring of
metal worn by women.
Ing'ongo, It. 9. //. ^longo, q,v,
Ing*ongoki, i». 8. a kind of snake
said to bring good fortune to
those who see it ? Fabulous.
Ing6nji, if. 8. a native bell, used to
call people together.
Ingoshi, n, 9. //. of lozhi, bark
string in quantity; applied also
to other string, rope, cord.
Ingubi, If. 8. a mist.
Ingtibo, If. 8. a prepared skin for
wearing ; a blanket, clothes.
Ingtila, kn, v, t, to answer. Ba la
ingula, they answer. Ba la
nyengnla, they answer me.
Ingultila, ko, v, t, rev, inga, to
unbolt, to unlock.
Ing*unsiLn8ii, n, 8. lawlessness.
Ingao, subs, pro. indie, el, 2, sing, it
IS It.
Inguwe, subs, pro, indie, eL i.sing,
it is he.
Ingvhu, n. 3. a hornet, wa^.
Ingvhnla, if. 8. a stone used in
connexion with the lower grind-
stone » imanaho.
Ingvhtinia, if. 8. a hornless beast,
ox or cow.
Ingvhumba, n, 8. the colour of
a light-red ox, also an ox of that
colour.
Ingwe, suds, pro, el. i cmel 2, sing.
it is not he, it is not it.
Ingrw^qihi, If. 8. a kind of fish ? the
tiger fish.
-ini, adj. expresses ' of itself, self'.
Cha anguluka ohini, it came
untied of itself,
-ini-ini, adJ, real, true; e, g,
miinta mwinimwini, a true
person ; kambo kenikeni, a
true saying.
Infka, ku, v, t, to put to soak, as
mealies, &c.
Iniska, ku, v, i, int, ina, to be very
fat, corpulent.
Inj&njabizhi, if. 8. a Idnd of green
substance found in stagnant water,
green.
Inj&nji, If. 8. railroad.
Ixijiltt, If. 8. a very hard thing
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
399
such as the heart of the mwani
tree.
InjADj^ma, n, 3. a piece of flat iron
or metal — sndi as a sheet of zinc.
Injenji, n, 8. name of a fruit.
Inji, conj, bat Kale ba ka bia,
inji usTiiiu pe, they were bad, but
to-day, no.
Injidi, n. 9. //. of Iiwidl, q, v,
Injila, ku ( * njila), v, u Xo enter.
The initial vowel coalesces with
a preceding vowel ; ۥ g, ba le
x^ila mn ohimpata (ba la Ixijila),
they enter the kraal. The prep.
ma or ku must always follow the
verb ; the idiom is thus different
from onr own ; we say, they enter
the bouse; Baila say, they enter
into the house.
Injfna, n. 8. a louse, flea.
Injio, subs, pro, indie, d, 8. sing,
and cl, a. //. it is it, it is they.
Injlsha, ku (njisha), v, /. (aus,
injils, to put into, to cause to
enter.
Injo, subs. pro. indie, cL 8. sing, and
cl. 3. //. it is not it
Isjomo, n. S. prosperity, happiness.
Injna, n. 8. a kind of rattle carried
by carriers and travellers.
InlD&bo, n, 8. a fork-stick used for
tying up slaves, fetter for the
neck ; also, a tmp of meat set for
a wild beast.
Inkako, subs, pro. indie, cl, 6. it
is it
InkAla, n, 8. a crab.
Inkal^pa, n, 8. for. (Eng.) harp.
TT^irft-ifTri^ n, 8. for, (Suto, kariki ;
Dutch, kairetje) a cart
InkJTfia, ». 8. a small bunch of
grass, the size of one's arm ; also
a small bundle of spears.
TnkAmbe, i». 8. for. (Eng.) a camp,
a government station.
Inkfoibi, n, 8. a present given to
conclude a bargain.
Ink&na, n, 8. a small group of
people, a class in schooL
ZnkAnda, n, 8. black, hard ground ;
a piece of country with few trees,
a scarcity of water and hard
ground.
Inkandele, n, 8. for, (Eng.) a
candle.
Ink&nga, n, 8. a guinea-fowl.
Inkanka, n, 8. a short stick driven
into the ground, a tent-peg.
Inkanka, n, 8. a big, wonderful
thing, used as adv. U ta ku
enda inkanka, you must not
travel hard.
Inkdnsho, n, 8. a tool used by the
blacksmith for making barbs on
spears.
Ink&nso, n, 8. a place for dancing.
Ink&nao, n. 8. meat left after all fat
is boiled out, eaten only by elders.
Inkftshi, ff. 8. a paddle.
Ink&shi, n, 9. //. of lonkaahi, a
calabash.
Inkisn, n. 8. loud talking ; quick,
loud answering, it may be, dis-
respectfully. Applied to any one
who is quick in answering when
called, in a amba inkasu, he
talks loudly and at length.
Inkata, n, 8. a pad used in canying
things on the head, also a coil.
Inkatekisima, n. 8. for, (Eng.)
a catechism.
Inkaya, ff. 8. an ivory bracelet.
Inkeleke, n. S.for, (Suto, kereke ;
Dutch, kerk) a church.
Inketani, n. %,for, (Suto, ketane ;
Dutch, keten) a chain.
Inketele, n, %.jfbr, (Eng.) a kettle.
Inki, n. i,for. (Eng.) ink.
Inkidi, n. 8. a stamping-block;
a mortar used for stamping grain.
Inko, subs, pro. indie, el, 5, 6. sing.
it is not it.
Inkodi, n. 8. a short stick with a
large knob, a knob-kerrie.
Inkdfa, n. 8. a lean animal, cow,
goat, or sheep. Properly the adj,
kofu in cl. 8.
Inkdfti, n, 8. a bug.
Inkokola, n. 9. //. of lukokola,
elbows.
Inkdla, n, 8. cruelty, malice.
Ink61o, n. 9. //. of, lukolo, breasts.
Inkoloi, n. 8. for, (Suto koloi) a
waggon.
Inkdma, n. 9. //. of lukoma, cala-
bash dippers.
400
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Inkdmba, n, 8. the last child a
woman will have.
Inkdxnba, if. 8. a large pot used
for cooking meat.
Inkomb&zhi, n. 9. //. 0/ lukom-
bazhi, palms of the hands.
Inkdmbe, n, 8. a message. Ku
tuma inkombe, to send a
message.
Inkomb^lo, n. 8. a manner of
prayer, religion.
Ink6mbOy n. 8. the bow or stern of
a canoe.
Inkombdla, n. 8. a kind oC snake,
very poisonous.
Inkomiki, n, 8. for. (Suto, komiki;
Dutch, kommetje) a cup.
Ink6mo, n, 8. a bag, sack.
Inkom6na, n, 8. fruit of the palm-
tree.
Inkomonkomo, n. 8. end of a
narrative, case, tale. The idea is
that at first a person may not tell
the exact truth, but at the end he
will out with it; this is the
makani a nkomonkomo.
Inkdmwe, n, 8. a steep bank, a
precipice.
Inkona, n, 9. //. o/lvLkonAy barbed
fish-spears.
Inkonaulamasanga, the moon of
June.
Ink6nde, n. 8. a necklace of beads.
Ink6ndo, n, 8. war.
Inkong61o, n, 8. a rainbow.
Inkong61o, n. 8. a butterfly.
Inkongol6kwa, n, 8. a butterfly.
Ink68a, n. 8. a knot tied in grass
by children.
Inkdsha, n. 8. meat-hunger. Nda
fwa inkosha, I want meat very
badly.
Inkdshi, n, 8. a bare mealie cob.
Inkosdle, n. 8. colour of a red
ox with a white stripe round the
body, an ox of that colour.
Inkosole-kutwi, n. 8. an ox or
cow with the ear notched, or
partly cut off.
Ink6ti, n, 8. the vertebra pro-
minens,
Ink6to, n, 8. the state in which
people are when they have been
fighting, they have no dealings
with each other, a grudge.
Inkot61o, n, 8. an ox or co^
without horns.
Inkdwe, n, 8. the eyelash.
Inkdya, n, 8. a big individual of
the Mankoya tribe.
Inkiiane, n. 8. a hat, cap, bonnet.
Inktidi, n, 3. a large calabash.
Inknko, subs, pro, indie, cL 5. sing,
it is it.
Inkdku, n, 8. a domestic fowl.
Inkumbankumba, n, 8, a snail.
Inkumbn, n, 8. pity, compassion
( s Intenda).
Inkumpani, n, 8. for, (Eng.) a
company of people.
Inktiinu, n, 8. the forehead.
Inktingo, n, 8. a stack of maize.
Inktingwa, n, 8. a barbed arrow.
Inktingwe, #f. 8. a kind of small
fish.
Inktinka, n, 8. a house built in.
beehive shape, the roof touching
the ground.
Inktuia, n, 8. a wrinkle, furrow on
the forehead.
Inkiishila, n, 8. a wave on a river
or lake, wrinkle on face.
Inktiti, n. 8. an apron of skin, &c.
worn by men in front, InkutiL
ya matako, apron worn behind.
Inkwa, If. 8. the axilla or armpit.
Inkwabilo, n, 8. a sandal, boot,
shoe.
Inkwakwa, if. 8. a kind of small
edible root.
InkwAnto, n, 8. a hole made in
a grain-bin for taking out grain.
Ink^dsho, If. 9. //. of lokwaaho,
blacksmith's pincers.
Inkw&ya, if. 8. dry, fallen leaves.
Inkw^la^ If. 8. name of a custom.
Ba la Chita inkwela. It denotes
a covenant made between a man
and woman ; a reminder of friend-
ship, or a renewal of the same.
The woman clears a piece of
ground by the side of a road, the
man plants a stick to represent
a house. He then chops down
some bushes around the place to
represent clearing a field.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
401
Inkwiy If. 9.//. ^iikwi,wiimowiiig-
baskets.
Inkwidlmba, n, 8. a domestic
pigeon.
Inkwino, ». 9. ku luma inkwino,
to gnash the teeth.
Inkwiflhita, n, 8. wave on surface
of river or lake^ fnrrow on foie-
heacL
In6ngo, n. 8. (? Tonga) a clay
pot.
Inafty H. 8. a kidney.
InaAta, n, 8. calf of the leg^.
InaahAy n. 8. for, (J^^») & s>^*
Ins&ka, n, 8. smithy, foxge, black-
smith's shop.
Tn«Av>^iAii^, n, 8. a kind of rattle
carried by carriers and travellers.
Insako, n, 9. //. of Inaako, spear
shafts.
Ina&kn, n. 8. a weed.
Ina^ma, n, 8. a burning brand, a
torch, a firebrand.
Tnaina, n. 8. strength, power,
ability. Used mostly mpL Ku
pa ixuana, to give streogth.
Ins&ngu, If. 8. seed of tobacco and
hemp.
Inainae, if. 8. a spark.
Inaapo, if. 8. a woman's girdle of
beads.
Tnaaithi, if. 8. a calabash in which
fat for anointing purposes is put.
Fig, a stont, £at person; e,g. a
la nana mafbta a mu nsashi,
he anoints himself with, fat out
of the insazhi.
Inaeba, if. 9.//. ^luaaba, bodies.
Inaebensabe, if. 8. quick going
with short strides. (See ka sebe-
naa.)
Ina^d, If. 8. a wen.
Inseke, if. 8. a single grain.
Ina^ka, if. 8. a hen.
Ins6nda»inkungwa, q,v,
Ina6nda, us. 8. a dam, bank across
a river.
Ina^u, If. 8. the colour of a white
oz with red spots on the back, an
OS of that colour. JDahi ing*ombe
. Binaea, this ox is of such a kind.
Inahi, if. 8. country, the earth. Fl.
is also maahi, nations.
Inahikila, if. 8. hiccough. Wesu
montu wa fwa nahikila, this
man hiccoughs.
Inahiliva, ». %,for, (Eng.) silver.
Inahlma, n. 8. bread. Used as an
interj, when doing easy work.
Inahima ! This isn't work, it's
bread! Ku dya nahima, is an
idiom for doing easy work. PL
is also Mashixna, of a quantity.
Inahimba, if. 8. a varie^ of wild
cat.
Inahfmbi, if. 8. an iron instrument,
leg-iron for prisoners.
Inahindarnwina, if. 8. the meal
left in the bottom of the inkidi ;
not to be eaten by children, it
being said that if they eat they
will not grow.
Inahinga, if. 9.//. ^lusbinga, q.v.
Inahingo, if. 8. the neck.
Inahfnka, n, 8. the butt end of a
spear.
Inahfpi, if. 8. a brass bangle, metal
belL
Inahiaho, subs, pro, indie, cl, 7, 8, 9.
//. it is they.
Inaho, subs, pro, indie, cl, 7, 8, 9. //.
it is not they.
Insli6nya, is. 8. the inside cartilages
of the nose.
Inaoki, n. 8. a grass seed.
Inadlo, n. 8. a bullet.
In8om6ni, if. 8. a cow that has
calved once.
Inadnga, if. 8. the point of a spear
or knife.
Inaongwa, n. 8. a long pointed
stick, used as a spear by boys
in playing.
Ina6ni, n, 8. shame.
Inatia, if. 8. a calabash for holding
milk, a chum.
Inai^ n, 8. the 'show* in child-
birth.
Inankele, if. 8. for, (Eng.) sugar.
Instiki, u, 8. a single hair of the
head.
Ins6ku, If. 8. the head-dress, cone,
of the Baila when still small.
Inatimpa, if. 8. the summit or top
of a house.
Inatimu, n, 8. colour of an oz^^a
d
403
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
kind of claret, an ox or cow of
that colour.
Insunda, n. S,/or. (Eng.) Sunday.
Instiiidi, n, 8. a barren cow, goat
or sheep.
Znawi,, n. 8. a flying ant.
Inswl, n, 8. a fish.
Inta, ft. 9. pi, of luta, cracks,
crevices in wood, &c.
Intafole, n, 8. for. (Suto, tafole ;
Dutch, tafel) a table.
Intalab&nda, n. 8. a bean.
Int&le, n, 8. iron binding on spear
shaft.
Int&ma, n, 8. a bundle of spears.
Intambo, n. ^.pL i^utambo, belts.
Intamb^o, n, 8. a step, stride.
Int&mo, n. 8. space between legs
when stretched out.
Int&mo, n. 8. false tales, excuses,
denials. "Wezo muntu wa tama
intamo, said of a person who
falsely denies his fault and lays
it upon another, or who falsely
accuses another of a crime he
himself has done.
Intdnda, n. 8. the morning star.
Intanda, n. 8. a falling, shooting
star, a meteor.
Intanga, n. 9. //. of lutanga,
cattle outposts.
Intangatanga, n, ^.pl. ^lutanga-
tanga, cobwebs.
Intdngwa, n, 8. feathers of arrow.
Intapintapi, n. 8. a renmant, any-
thing left over.
Intaaa, n. 8. an armlet put on the
upper arm.
Int^be, If. 8. a bag made out of
bark.
Int61a I interj, is it so !
Intela, n. 8. name of a game.
Int^lo, n. 8. a mould for bullets.
Intelongo, n. %.for. (Suto, teronko ;
Dutch, tronk) a prison. Some
pronounce it intolongo.
Interna, n, 8. a new field, wherein
trees are newly felled.
Intempele, n, 8. for, (Eng.) a
temple.
Int^nda, n, 8. pity, compassion.
Xu fwila muntu intenda, to
Xeel compassion for a person.
Intento, if. 9.//. ^lutento, plates.
Int^sha, ff. 8. a unit. Used in
counting; e.g. Ikumi diomwi
o mu ntesha yomwi, eleven.
Int^sho, n. 8. a calabash used for
drawing water, a pitcher.
Intestamente, n. 8. a testament
Intimba, n. 8. slough, marsh, mire.
Intimbwa, n, 8. a kind of musical
instrument
Intipa, n. ^^for, (Suto, tbipa) a
European knife.
Intite, n. 3. name of a small bird.
Into, subs. pro. indie. eU 6. //. it is
not they.
Int6bo, n. 8. a shield.
Intobdlo, If. 8. a gun. Chisomo
oha ntobolo, the wood support
on back of a gun.
Intola, n. Z.for. (Eng.) a tower.
Intomb^la, n. 8. a lizard.
Intombdla, n, 8. tail of a lion.
Intombola -kamine yaminuka,
i dya muntu, when a lion's tail
wags he*s going to eat somebody.
Int6mbwe, n. 8. snuff.
Intom^no, if. 8. mustache.
Intdngo, If. 8. grumbling, grumble.
A mu leke intongo shenu,
stop your grumbling.
Intongw^Bhi, if. 8. a star.
Intoni, If. 8. the penis.
Intopisho, If. 8. a gun-cap.
Intoto, If. 8. vagina feminete,
Intoya, n. 8. whey (Lumbu).
Inttidi, If. 8. a small piece of meat,
without bone.
Inttunba, if. 8. a basket
Inttunba, the east Ku ya ku
ntumba, to go to the east.
IntumbtUwa, if. 8. name of a kind
of fruit, dark in colour like a
plum, eatable.
Inttinda, if. 8. a hump on the back,
rounded shoulders, also a hump
in wall of house, where the poles
are not straight
Inttindu, if. 8. a kind of basket
Intdngu, If. 8. a kind of fish.
Intdntwa, if. 8. great astonishment,
amazement. Bantu ba la fwa
ntuntwa, the people are greatly
amazed.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
403
Inttbuho, If. 8. a needle.
Intato, subs, pro, i$uUc, cL 6. //. it
is th^.
Intatn, it. 8. a man's possessions
(Lnmbu).
Int6tw«, n. I a. //. bantutwa, a
giraffe.
-inn, <idj, UX. Incr'oxnbe injinu^
iat cattle. Mmita mwino, a fat
person.
Intima, if. 3. the back of anything,
of a person particolarly. Us^
adverbially,, behind. U !• as
mnnnma, he comes behind. As
a /n^. xnnnmna ya. U le sa
nmnunia yanca^ he comes be-
hind me.
Innmbelo, ff. S.ySv. (Eng.) a num-
ber.
Inifina» kn, v. /. to take anything
snch as a burden firom another in
order to give him relief and rest ;
to reliere.
Inungo, It. 8. a joint, as the
knuckles or knee ; also of reed or
bamboo.
Intmgn, if. 8. a smgle bead.
£ntuicri^ M* 8. seied of melon,
cucumber, pumpkin.
InThi, If. 8. grey hair.
Inw^nwe, if. 8. a finger-ring.
Inys, ka, v, /. cans, ina, to make
fat, to £Eitten.
Inyaba, n. 9.//. ^luyaba, nets.
Inyabo, if. 8. a veiy big thing;
iniefj, Vyabo! what a big
thing!
Inyama, n. 8. meat, flesh.
Inyambadla, if. 8. a kind of sharp
three-edged grass.
Inyinga, if. 8. an ivory bracelet;
also tusk.
Inyati, n. 5. a herd of buffaloes.
Inyauwe, if. 8. lewdness, lewd coo-
ducL
Inyemo, if. 8. ground-nut. Used
as inUrj, when doing easy
woik. Inyemo ! Inyemo ! This
b not work, it is inyemo! Ku
dya inyemo, to have easy work.
Iny6nda, if. 8. a needle.
Inyenge, ir. 9.//. ^Iwenge, large
riYcrs.
Pd
Inyando, it. ^, pL of Iwando,
journeys.
Iziyense, if. 8. a flying beetle which
eats leaves off trees, flies vdth a
buzdng noise.
Inyenso, if. 9. //. of Iwanso,
prayers.
Inyika, if. 8. a large barren plain,
a wilderness.
Inyimbo, if. 9. pi, of Iwimbo,
songs, hymns.
Inyimbldidi, if. 9. //. of Iwimbi-
didi, mane, cock's comb.
Inyinga, if. 8. a woman's leglet
Inyinaa, if. 8. dividing line l^twecn
fields, border, boundary.
Inyo, If. 8. the anus, comer of the
eye.
Iny6twa, if. 8. thirst.
Inyi^do, If. 8. a hammer.
Insa, ka, v. i. to be quiet, silent.
Insula, If. 8. hunger, famine, star-
vation. Ka fwtk ifiaala, to be
hungry.
InslUUno, if. 8. a scab.
Inshi, If. 8. the common house-fly.
Inshi, If. 3. a large village, town,
dty.
InaMba, if. 8. wild dove, pigeon.
Inahlbo, if. 8. stopper or plug of
the chum calabash.
Tnnhfe, if. 8. a kind of locust.
Tnahfia, n, 8. a path, road.
Inshimbwa, if. 8. cattle-fly.
Inshinge, if. 8. a quaiL Said to be
eaten as a medicine to secure one
from being seen.
Inaho, coHJ. and ado. now, then.
Inxho-inalLO, adv, at once, unmedi-
ately.
Insika, ka, v, t, caus, insa, to
silence, to quieten.
Ins6be, it. 8. the situtunga antelope
(Lumbu).
Ina6ka, if. 8. a snake.'
InstUd, It. 8. the honey-bee.
Ina6ahi, if. 8. the cerval cat.
Inswini, it. 8. a kind of pipe used
for smoking hemp,
lova. If. 3. froth, lather, scum.
I6shi, It. 3. a la^ string of bark,
a rope.
Ipai, ik 3. a coloored blinkct.
2
404
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ipango, n. 3. breast-bone of a
bird.
Ip»okab6aliay name given to the
Supreme Being. It signifies one
who gives gifts which do not
. last; €.£. the rain dries up, the
grain rots.
Ip6pa, n. 3. shell, dried skin of
animal, rind, prepuce, pod.
Ipapelo, «. Z'/^' (^gO <^ Pf^pc'y
or paper generally.
Zpelanks, n, ^.for, (Eng.) a plank.
Ipelete, n, ^for, (£ng.) a plate.
Ip6ini>a, n, 3. a newly*m»de, un-
baked pot.
Ipene, n, z.for, (Eng.^ a pea.
Ip«ni, n, 3.3^. (Eng.) a penny.
Ipensile, n, z,for, (Eng.) a pencil.
Ip^nshi, If. 3. trouble, difficulty,
anxiety.
Ipeps, If. 3. a light thing, a page of
a book.
Ip6pe, If. 3. a feather.
Ip^zlio, If. 3. a large brush or
broom.
Ipiki, If. %,for. (Eng.) a pick, pick-
axe.
Zpfnda, ko, v. t, to stir food while
cooking.
Ipini, If. 3. /v. (Eng.) a pin.
Ipobwe, If. 3. a feast.
Ip6mo, If. 3. a pole for the roof,
rafter. Mapomo are the smaller
poles put in a roof.
Ipdpa, If. 3. a big drum, a cask,
barrel.
Zpopi, If. 3. a low wall of earth, a
wall.
Ipopwe, If. 3. a mealie; generally
found in the//, mapopwe.
Xpub^bu, If. 3. name of a weed
plant, with yellow flowers, and
adherent seeds.
Ipumbulu, If. 3. a maize cob with-
out the sheath.
IptipullUwa, If. 3. a very strong
wind, a gale.
IptUihi, n. 3. a pumpkin.
la^ba, If. 3. a big marsh, swamp.
Isaka, n, ^./or, (Eng.) a sack.
Isale, If. I. far* (EngO ^ saddle.
Is&le, If. 3. grass growing on river
bank.
Zailo, If. 3.. a soft, fresh skin or hide.
Zs^Unbwe, if. 3. a good bargain,
good fortune in selling or buy-
ing.
Zaftmo, If. 3. a tree.
Za&nga-s&ngu, if. 3. a fruit shell
used as a snufif-box.
Zaani, if. 3. cloth, calico, print.
Zaani i tuba, calico. Zaani dia
mabala, coloured print.
Xsinsa, If. 3. a bunch of virild
? rapes.
xxBa, n. 3. a big busanaa.
Zsanzhi, n, 3. twig, small branch.
Zsapo, If. 3. small white beads.
Zaasa, «. 3. a large mat made oi
impolwe grass ; a mat of reeds.
laaso. If. 3. a sinew used m sew-
ing.
Xseka, n. 3. a leglet.
Zsenga, if. 3. sand, a sandy place..
Zaenge, if. 3. a grain stalk.
Zadngo, if. 3. a large luaengo,
q.v.
Zsdngo, If. 3. a hole in the bed of a
river where fish live.
Zs^ni, If. 3. a maggot found in
meat.
Zaenke, if. 3.yS7r. (Eng.) zinc, cor-
rugated iron.
Xa^za, If. 3. a large quantity of
marrow.
Za^zhi, If. 3. placenta of animal.
Zaha, ku, v, t. eaus. ita, to cause to
pass, to miss a shot.
Xaha, ku, v,t, caus, ilea, to cause
or help to cook.
Zahanya, ka, v. t, rec, caus. ita, to
miss each other by taking different
roads.
Zshi, If. 3. a quantity of smoke.
Zshinga, if. 3. blood in the urine,
haematuria.
Zahlni, if. 3. a cold in the heady
catarrh.
Zahialu, if. 3. dark-brown colour.
Zaho, n. 3. a salt-pan or pooL
Zahokdla, if. 3. a venereal disease.
Zahudiangdmbe, n, 3. yellow
colour ; lit, cattle urine.
Zaikile, if. z,for, (Eng.) a sickle.
Zaikiapenae, if. I* fir, (Eng.) a six-
pence.
ILA-ENGLISH VCKIABULARY
40s
Isoldsi, m, 5. fir, (Eog.) sock,
stocking.
Isdkwe, If. 5. country, with tall
grass ; scattered country.
l86mi>o, If. 5. name of a tree which
grows upon the river bank ; it
bears benies.
la6ndo, n, 5. a pole ibr the too£
Ian, pars. pra. i /.//. onx. Preceded
by gen, parts. , and the i coalesces
with a to forai •; e.g. mftnda
6811, oar house (nutnd* s-isu).
Isubilo, K. $. the bladdCT; isubilo
dia ndulwe, the gali-bladder.
Isoldla, ka, v, i. to start a journey
late in the day, to delay starting.
Istikii, If. 3. name of a tree ; wood
is good for poles ; it bearsa fmtt.
Isule, If. 3. the back; mwianle
( s xnn inde) dia, prep, behind.
Ismno, II. 3. a spear.
Isompila, n. 3. a bin made of grass
for receiving grain just harve^ed.
Isunta, If. 3. oxen or food consumed
at a fimeral feast.
Isontnla, n^ia. name of an animaL
IsuflO) If. 3. a large calabash.
Isusa, If. 3. hair of the head, head-
dress of the Baila when very talL
Ita, kn, V. t. to pass ; ba la ita,
they pass; ba la njita, they pass
me ; Ira. ita ansansa, to pass at
a distance.
Ita, ku, («kwita) v.t, to call;
mwita, call him ; ba le ta, they
are calling.
Itako, II. 3. the base of anything,
anvil, stock of gun ; pi. xnatoko,
the buttocks.
It&la, If. 3. side of river or valley;
mwitala modia, on the other
side.
Itala, n, 3. a big butala (^.v.).
It6ma, n. 3. the cheek.
It&nda, If. 3. a big shooting star,
meteor.
It&nda, If. 3. a chiefs shelter, where
he rests or judges cases.
Itanda, if. 3. stock of a gun.
Itanga, if. 3. a melon.
Itangnla, ir. 3. a gun.
Itano (« Ita anoj, the moon of
March.
ItantOa, if . 3. a big rabbish heap.
ItiMii, n. 3. an arm, hand.
Itdlo, H, 3. a stick or tree placed
across a road over which yoa most
step.
Itembulabnahii, is. 3. ka amba L —
to give an order indistinctly, so
that the person does not do uriut
yon say.
It6nde, if. 3. a foot, fin of fish.
Itenda dia nkoloi, a waggon-
wheeL
Itente, if. 3.ySir. (Eng.) a tent.
Itfba, If. 3. a large basin, bowl;
also that wliich holds the misemu
in a house.
Itikiti, n, 3. far. (Eng.) a ticket,
labour or census ticket
Itdmba, n, 3. dirt; e.g. mongV
nda mudi itoxnba, the house is
dirty inside.
It6iigo, If. 3. old deserted field and
village, where there are no people ;
xnwitongo, on the site of an old
village.
Itong61a, If . 3. a fish-eating bird.
Itoshi, If. 3. a fabulous water-mon-
ster (called by the Marotsi ingo-
ngodi) supposed to inhabit the
rivers. It has been described to
the writer as being as big as a
large camel-thom tree, but no-
body, unless he possesses strong
medicine to protect him, ever sees
it. If anybody else sees it he will
die. It is supposed that spirits
of men pass into these monsters.
There are several of them in the
Nanzela river, in which now reside
former chiefs of the locality. It
is supposed to seize people. When
this happens, a person who is duly
protected by medicine goes along
the bank, and sits there praying
for the captive's release. After a
time itoshi, annoyed by the man's
importunity, releases its captive.
The people seem to be very afraid
of this monster, and will paddle
very carefully past the place where
it lives.
It6vti, If. 3. a leaf of a tree.
Itti, If . 3. a variety of wild onmge.
4o6
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ittibe, If. 3. a cataract in the eye.
Itubtizhn, n, 3. green colour.
Ituxnpftta, If. 3* a clot of blood.
Itundila, n. 3. a brackish incrusta-
tion in a valley.
Ztmigiaho, if. 3. pole for a roof.
The matungisbo are the first poles
put on a roof ; they are generally
prepared on the ground and taken
up together.
Itatultiwe, If. 3. a cheetah.
Itt^a, If. 3. a blister.
Itw^, If. 3. ash, cinders ; nditwe,
it is true. See Eng.'Ila Vocab.
Itw^ntwe, If. 3. a country with trees
and only short grass.
Itwi, If, 3. a big head.
lobubu, If. 3. impudence, dis-
respect.
Ifunbs, If. 3. a worm found in men
and dogs, maggot in bread.
I^mbu, If. 3. a present of food given
to a traveller.
lumbiiawa, ». 3. a kind of ant-
heap.
Ifunpa, If. 3. a large dLumps (^.v.).
lumpalzhi, if. 3. name of a star.
Iiftnda, If. 3. a large field or garden.
lundu. If. 3. the jigger insect.
Iiftnga, If. 3. a large kind of thorn-
tree, camel-thorn, kameeldom.
I6iise, If. 3. name given to the first
product in making meal, the husk
still in it, * pollard ' or * seconds ' ;
//. maiinze, of a large quantity.
Itite, If. 3. an abscess, a boil.
Ivangele, if. 3. far. (Gr. Bvange-
lion), the Gospel.
Ivhu, If. 3. soil, ground.
iTh^mbi ikando, if. 3. the month
of October.
iTh^mbo^ ». 3. a basket-work fish-
trap.
ItIlwI, If. 3. the knee.
Iviki, If. 3 for, (£ng.) a week.
iTini, ff. 3.y2v. (Eng.) veine.
Iwe, If. 3. the east, generally used
as an iuh, in its locative forms,
ambo, Ictunbo.
Iwezhi, If. 3. a large fish-hook.
Iwi, If. 3. a wild orange.
lys, ku, v» U to teach, instruct.
Ijaiiaa, if. 3. a carving, moulding.
such as that on a spear shaft and
on a table leg ; also the curve in
a horn.
lyeye, if. 3. a thing done purposely,
out of spite.
lyiy ^* 3- P^' mal, an ^^,
lydnga, if. 3. a large spear used in
hunting elephants and buffalo.
Zydla, Ira, v, t, to take a pot off the
fire,
lytiiido, If. 3. a place where a vil-
lage once stood, together with the
old fields.
Isambiila, if. 3. the odour, scent of
a snake.
l£6n2lii. If. 3. name of a kind of
fish.
Iz6ng8, If. 3. a quantity of lusenge
iBeulu, If. 3. the space above, sky,
heaven.
l£ha, Ini, V, t, to converse together
after food.
Xshadflo, If. 3. a womb.
Ishibs, If. 3. a pool of water, a lake.
lahilo, If. 3. pole planted upright
in building wall of a house» gene-
rally heaid in//, mashilo.
l£hins. If. 3. a name, inheritance.
Ku dys izhina, to eat a name, to
inherit. Izhina diako ndiweni ?
What is thy name ?
Ishlwo, If. 3. the lower grinding-
. stone, millstone.
Izhizhi, If. 3. a fish-trap.
Izholaule, if. 3. a kind of spear.
lEubs, If. 3. the su% day.
lauba. If. 3. a venereal disease in
men and women.
laudila, ]ni, v, U to suffice for.
Izula, Ira. (kwiauls), v./. to be
fnlL Peff, izwile; e,g, Intu-
mba te swilo, the basket is
not full.
latine, » . 3. a big bird.
lawsngs, If. 3. a great noise of talk-
ing, as at a drinking-bout.
law^ If. 3. word, voice.
S[, pronounced as In English.
Ka (i) Classifier t cL 6. sing,
(a) Gen, part. cL 6. jf'i^. ; als^
ptrs, and rel, pro* same cL
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
407
(3) Prefix to adverbStluiXiotai dec.
(4) Imperatwe particle in sing, €tnd
pL In sing, its final s coalesces
with the pro, to fonn ko ; thus,
ko ys « ka u ya,
(5) Particle Qsed in formine several
tenses of the yerb. See ^3a/. vii.
Kab^ba, if. 6. poison on arrow, a
small feather.
Kabangnlulu, n,ia. name of a
forest tree, medicine made from it.
KabibiBi, If. 6. a scorpion.
Kabele, subs, pro, prep, cL 6. it
' (where it is).
Kabla, n. 6. a small pot.
Kablabe, adv, badly.
Kabiabe, if. 6. a pain in the chest.
STda fwa kabiabe, I am suffering
with a pain in the chest.
Kab^mbwa, it. i a. a frog ; idiom
ba ka Inma bakabombwe, the
frogs bite yon, said of a child with
a dirty nose.
Sabdmbwe, k. 6. name of a tree,
frnit nsed as fish poison.
Sabongvhwe, ado. easily, slowly.
KabonBhabdmbeihi, A^. the early
afternoon, f . e, when the shepherds
are beginning to get tired.
Kabota, adv, well, nicely.
Sabota-kabotUy adv, gently,
slowly.
Kabu, If. 6. a small reed.
Sabuambua, if. 6. a mushroom.
Kabnko, if . 6 « chibuko (^.v.)*
Kabw^, If. 6. a small dog, a pup.
Kabw6nga, if • i a. a hvaena.
Kabw6ngwe, if. 6. snake medicine.
(See Eng.'Ila Voc,, Medicine.)
Kabwlndie, if. i a. a muircat.
Kaoh6booh6bo, if. 6. a continuous
rainstorm.
Kadia, dem, pro* cL 6. sing, yon,
yonder,
-kadi, o^'. sharp, fierce, angry, wild,
bold.
Kadie P interr, pro, cl, 6. Jf if^.
which? Samindi kadie P which
needle ?
Sadika, ka, v,t. cans, kala, to
place, appoint, to install ; e, g, Ba
xnu kadika ma chona oha
bwami, they put him in the seat
of authority, install him as chief.
Idiom, ka kadika moio, to be
encouraged.
Kadikila, ka, v, t, caus, reL kala,
to place for somebody, &c.
Kadindiahi, n,ia.9, watcher, care-
taker ; prov, kadlndlahi ta fwi
naala, bakata mba ba ma
yaya, a caretaker doesn't die of
hunger (f . e, he helps himself to
what be can find), it is laziness
that kills him.
Kadunta, if. i a. a hair-louse.
Kadyo, if. 6. a small article of food.
KaAia, if. 6. a small bone.
Sa-fOmba-bombe-bombe, if. 6.
name of a game.
Kafambaftunba, if. 6. a plan,
stratagem. Udi kwete kafti-
mbaftunba, said of a person who
wants work but does not ask for
it ; he simply sets upon a job, so
that you may ask him : Do you
want work ?
Kafaxnbaftimba, if . i a. a kind of
scavenger beetle.
Kafombwi, if. i a, the sable ante*
lope.
Kafampe, adv, stealthily; a le
enda kafampe, he goes
stealthily, e, g, like a lion.
Kai, an interrogative particle ex-
pressing : Is it not ? Used especi-
ally in answer to questions ; e,g,
Ngoni owa leta inkani f Kai
oawe P Who is it brought fire-
wood ? Is it not we ?
Kaimba, if. 6.//. twimba, a wrinkle
on the forehead.
Kaimbo P interr. Is it not so ?
Kaimbo, if. 6. a small, short song.
Kaindi, if. 6. a small space of
time, a moment.
Kaini, conj, because.
Kaka (or Nkaka), if. i tf . a grand*
parent.
Kaka, dem, pro, cl, 6. sir^, this.
Kaka, ko, v, t, to reftise, disobey,
object
Kakalnta, if. 6. a small or weak
woman.
Kakaaha, ka, v, t. to prevent, stop.
Sakata, ka, v, t, said of a thief who
4o6
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ittibe, If. 3. a cataract in the eye.
Itubtizhn, n. 3. green colour.
Itnmpftta, if. 3, a clot of blood.
Itondila, if. 3. a brackish incrusta*
tion in a valley.
Itnngisho, if. 3. pole for a roof.
The matnngisbo are the first poles
put on a roof ; they are generally
prepared on the ground and taken
up together.
Itatultiwe, If. 3. a cheetah.
Ittiza, If. 3. a blister.
Itw6, If. 3. ash, cinders ; nditwe,
it is true. See Eng,'Ila Vocab,
Itw^ntwe, If. 3. a country with trees
and only short grass.
Itwi, If, 3. a big head.
lububii, If. 3. impudence, dis-
respect.
Ifunba, If. 3. a worm found in men
and dogs, maggot in bread.
I^mbu, If. 3. a present of food given
to a traveller.
lumbiiawa, ». 3. a kind of ant-
heap.
Itimpa, If. 3. a laige ohuinps (^.v.).
lumpalzhi, if. 3. name of a star,
Iiftnda, If. 3. a large field or garden.
lundii. If. 3. the jigger insect.
Iiftnga, If. 3. a large kind of thorn-
tree, camel-thorn, kameeldom.
I6iise, If. 3. name given to the first
product in making meal, the husk
still in it, < pollard ' or ' seconds ' ;
//. matmze, of a large quantity.
Itite, If. 3. an abscess, a boil.
Ivangele, if. 3. for, (Gr. Bvange-
lion), Uie Gospel.
iThu, If. 3. soil, ground.
iThfbnbi ikando, if. 3. the month
of October.
iThfunbo, n, 3. a basket«work fish-
trap.
iThwi, if« 3. the knee.
Iviki, If. 3 for, (Eng.) a week.
Ivini, ». 3.yi?r, ^Eng.) wine.
Iwe, «. 3. the east, generally used
as an adv, in its locative forms,
ambo, Ictunbo.
Iwezhi, If. 3. a large fish-hook.
Iwi, If. 3. a wild orange.
lys, Ini, v^ U to teach, instruct.
lyazuuty If. 3. a carving, moulding.
such as that on a spear shaft and
on a table leg ; also the curve in
a horn,
lyeye, if. 3. a thing done purposely,
out of spite.
lyi. If. 3. //. mal, an egg.
Iy6iiga, If. 3. a large spear used in
hunting elephants and buffalo.
lyUla, ku, V. /. to take a pot off the
fire,
lydndo, if. 3. a place where a vil-
lage once stood, together with the
old fields.
l£smbiila, If. 3. the odour, scent of
a snake.
l£6n2hi, If. 3. name of a kind of
fish.
Iz6Dge, If. 3. a quantity of loBenge
iBeulii, If. 3. the space above, sky,
heaven.
laha, ka, v, U to converse together
after food.
Xzhadflo, If . 3. a womb.
Izhiba, If. 3. a pool of water, a lake.
lahilo, If. 3. pole planted upright
in building wall of a house» gene*
rally heaid in//. maBhilo.
Ishins, If. 3. a name, inheritance.
Ku dys is^iina, to eat a name, to
inherit iBhina diako ndiweni ?
What is thy name ?
Ishiwo, If. 3. the lower grinding-
. stone, millstone.
Izhizhi, If. 3. a fish-trap.
Izkolaule, if. 3. a kind of ispear.
Izubs, If. 3. the su% day.
Izuba, If. 3. a venereal disease in
men and women.
Izudila, ku, v, t, to suffice for.
Izula, ka (kwizuls), v. /. to be
fulL Feff izwile; e,g, intu-
mba te swile, the basket is
not full.
IzTine, If. 3. a big bird.
Izwangs, If. 3. a great noise of talk-
ing, as at a driiScing-bout
Izw^ If. 3. word, voice.
'K, pronounced as in English.
Ka (i) Classifier y cL 6. sing,
(a) Gen, part, cl. 6. jfi^.; alsm
P(rs, and rel, pro, same cL
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
399
snch as the heart of the mwani
tree.
Injenj^ma, n, 3. a piece of flat iron
or metal — such as a sheet of zinc.
Injenji, n, 8. name of a fmit.
Inji, canj, bat. Kale ba ka bia,
inji usnnu pe, they were bad, but
to-day, no.
Inji di, If. 9. //. of Lwidi, q, v,
Injila, ku ( 1- njila), v. u to enter.
The initial vowel coalesces with
a preceding vowel ; ۥ g, ba le
Bjila ma ohimpata (ba la isjila),
they enter the kraal. The prep.
mil or ku must always follow the
verb ; the idiom is thus different
from onr own ; we say, they enter
the house; Baila say, they enter
into the house.
Injina, if. 8. a louse, flea.
Injio, mbs, pro. indie* cU 8. sing,
and cl. 2. pi, it is it, it is they.
Isjislia, ku (njizha), v, /. caus,
injila, to pot into, to canse to
enter.
Injo, subs* pro, indie, el, 8. sing, and
cl, 2, pi, it is not it
Injoino, n. 8. prosperity, happiness.
Injua, If. 8. a kind of rattle carried
by carriers and travellers.
Ink&bo, If. 8. a fork-stick used for
tying np slaves, fetter for the
neck ; also, a trap of meat set for
a wild beast.
Inkako, sidts, pro, indie, cl, 6. it
IS It.
Ink&la, If. 8. a crab.
Inkal^pa, if. 8. for, (Eng.) harp.
Inkalfki, if. 8. for, (Sato, kaxiki ;
Dutch, kaire^e) a cart
Inkfoia, If. 8. a small bunch of
grass, the size of one's arm ; also
a small bundle of spears.
Inkfoibe, if. 8. for, (£og.) a camp,
a government station.
Inklimbi, n, 8. a present given to
conclude a bargain.
Ink^mu, If. 8. a small group of
people, a class in schooL
ZnkAnda, if. 8. black, hard ground ;
a piece of country with few trees,
a scarcity of water and hard
ground.
Inkandele, if. 8. for, (Eng.) a
candle.
Ink&nga, if. 8. a guinea-fowl.
Inkanka, if. 8. a short stick driven
into the ground, a tent-peg.
Inkanka, if. 8. a big, wonderful
thing, used as adv. U ta ku
enda inkanka^ you must not
travel hard.
Inkftnsbo, if. 8. a tool used by the
blacksmith for msdcing barbs on
spears.
Ink&nzo, if. 8. a place for dancing.
Ink^nao, if. 8. meat left after all fat
is boiled out, eaten only by elders.
Inkftahi, if. 8. a paddle.
Ink&shi, If. 9. //. of lunkaahi, a
calabash.
Inkdau, if. 8. loud talking ; quick,
loud answering, it may be, dis-
respectfully. Applied to any one
who is quick in answering when
called, m a amba inkasu, he
talks loudly and at length.
Inkata, if. 8. a pad used in carrying
things on the head, also a coil.
InkatekiainiA, if. 8. for. (Eng.)
a catechism.
Inkaya, if. 8. an ivory bracelet
Inkeleke, if. %,for, (Suto, kereke ;
Dutch, kerk) a church.
Inketani, if. ^,for, (Suto, ketane ;
Dutch, keten) a chain.
Inketele, if. %.for* (Eng.) a kettle.
Inki, If. %,for, (Eng.) ink.
Inkidi, if. 8. a stamping-block;
a mortar used for stamping grain.
Inko, subs, pro, indie, el, 5, 6. 5iif^.
it is not it.
Inkodi, If. 8. a short stick with a
large knob, a knob-kerrie.
Inkofu, If. 8. a lean animal, cow,
goat, or sheep. Properly the adj.
kdfa in cl, 8.
Inkdfa, if. 8. a bug.
Inkokola, if. 9. //. of lukokola,
elbows.
Inkdla, if. 8. cruelty, malice.
Ink61o, If. 9. //. of, lukolo, breasts.
Inkoloi, If. 8. for, (Suto koloi) a
waggon.
I]ik6ma, if. 9. //. of lukoma, cala-
bash dippers.
4o8
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
takes off everything, leaving no-
thing; also of a carrier, who
gathers up things which remain,
leaving nothing behind.
gaVatfla, Ini, v. /. to cleave to, to
adhere, to stick to; e.g. bs la
kakatila shiansasbiabashikale,
they cleave to the customs of the
ancients.
Kakato, n. 6. dim, of chakato.
Kakaae, n. 6. a small cat, kitten.
Kakila, ku, v, t, rel, kaka, to refuse
for, on bdialf of.
Xako, dem. pro. cL 6. sing. that.
Used to express reason ; e. g, nka
kako nku nde sila, it is for that
reason I come. Inko kako, that
is not the reason.
Kak61e, num, six. This is the
Lnmlni word.
Kakoma, n» 6. a small hammer.
KakdmA, n. 6. a small cup, a small
calabash dipper.
Kakdmwe, n» 6. a small clod or
lump.
Kak6to, n, 6. a small knot, also
tonsil ( ^ kapopo).
Kakuane, n, 6. a small hat, cap.
Kakub6aiii, if. i a. a young man.
Kaktuno, if. 6. a small toe.
Kaktimii, n, 6. a small forehead.
Kaktine, n, \a. a long green thin
tree-snake, poisonous.
Kakiihii, n. 6. a small piece of fire-
wood.
Kakdsu, n. 6. a small morsel.
Kakuttila, ku, v. /. to scratch, to
force a thing out of a man's closed
hand.
Kakwangabaltiini, n, 6. a nettle.
Kakwlbwi, if. i a. a small kind of
white beads.
Kala, kn, v, i, to sit, to settle, to
abide.
K&la, If. 6. a tuft of feathers on a
bird's head, crest
Kal&ba, kn, v, i. to crawl.
Kal&bi, n. 6. a riddle, fable, folk-
tale.
Ealabfsha, ku, v, i. int, kalaba,
to crawl very carefully.
Kaladila, ku, v. /. reL kalala, to
be angry with, to rebuke angrily.
Kaladfsha, ku, v. i, int, kalala, to
be very angry.
Kalai, n. la, name given to the
elephant.
KaUlla, ku, v, i. to be angry, fierce ;
e, g. Ohela oha kalala, the iron
is fierce — said when in woricing
iron a fragment flies off and hits
you. "Wa kalala lesa, it lightens
and thunders.
Kal&la, n. 6. a palm-tree.
Kal&lo, n. 6. a small bridge.
Eal&lu, If. 6. madness, insanity,
lunacy.
Kal&mbwe, if. 6. a big, deep hole,
a pit.
Kalingu, If. 6. a small belL
KalAni, if. 6. the flower of the muze.
Kal&ta, ku, v. i, to gallop, of horses
and cattle.
Kalauka, ku, v, i, to sound a long
time (of drums) , also of guns fired
frequently. Ingoma aha ka-
lai:dca, tiie drums sound a loag
time.
Kalaukila, kn, v. /. to praise,
extol; e.g. wa dikalaukila, he
praises himself for strength or
swiftness.
Kalazha, kn, v> t caus, kalala, to
make angry, fierce.
Kile, adv. already, some time ago.
K61e-k&le, adv, long ago.
Kalebabddi, n. 6, long running
grass.
KflJ6nda, if. 6. an impediment in
the speedi.
Kalo, suds. pro. simple cl. 6. sing.
it, itself.
Kal6bo, If. 6. fish-hook, fishing-
rod.
Kalokanantindwe, if. 6. pi. tnlo-
twa-nanundw<e, a nettle.
Kalombw6na, if. 6. a boy.
Kal6nga, n. 6. a small river, a
brook.
Kaldnga, if. €. a chiefs house,
where cases are settled.
Kal6ngo, n. 6. a small line of people
in single file.
Kal6ngwe, if. i a. name of a kind
offish.
Kaluba, n. 6. a small flower, esped-
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
409
ally flower of pqmpkin, melon,
and snch like.
gftl^di, n. 6. a small roof^ a small
hoase erected in gardens, a sun-
shade or umbrella.
Ksliik61w8y If. 6. a larg^ pink
bead.
XAltUs, txL, V. f . to ran hard, as in
a race ; to throw up the sand with
one's feet in running.
KaluI6ine, if . 6. a toe.
Kaltunbu, if. 6. a musical instru-
ment*
Ealungs, n. 8. sugar reed.
Kalonsa, if. 6. a small bead.
Kalnngonshiba, if. 6. a wood-
pigeon.
Kama, kn, v. /. to squeeze, to milk.
Kanamuoliipwiohipwi, it. 6. a
kind of coloured beads.
yftTnaTikumAlfti if. 6. a shrub, the
leaves of which are used as a
medicine for diarrhoea.
Kamba, ka, v, u to clap.
K&mba, ku, S7. /. to scnitdi up the
ground (of a cat, &c.).
Xambtoia, ku, v.f. of one thing
resting upon another. Kamn-
Bhin^didi waya ku kambama
a makumbi, N. went to rest upon
the clouds.
Eamb&mba, if. 6. the lower end of
the sternum.
Kaxnbauka, ku, v, i. to speak at
length, to discourse, to preach.
Slambaukila, ku, v,t, reL kam«
bauka, to preach to.
Kambaula, ku, v. /. to scratch up
ground like a cat
Kambavhwe, adv^ sideways.
Kambelele, n, 6. a small sheep, a
lamb.
Kambidlla, ku, v, U reL kamba,
to salute by clapping.
Kambidfzha, ku, v, t, reL cans,
kambch to cause or help to salute,
to bring a present as a salutation
or to conciliate.
Kambfka, ku, v, t. to cany one
thing upon another, as two lots of
firewood upon one shoulder, to
carry a big load.
Kambflai ku, v, /. reL kamba, to
clap for another, as in clapping
an accompaniment to another's
song.
KambiBhi, if. 6. a whirlwind.
Ximbo, It. 6. pL twanibo» affair,
fault, saying, reason. Kambo
ka kubea, a lying tale. Kambo
nshinkuwa Chita bodiaf Why
do you act thus?
Kambo ka, prep, because of, on
account of.
Kambtika, ku, v.i, to be weary,
sick of a thing.
Kambtila, ku, v, U to tire, weary,
sicken (of anything that wearies
by its monotonousness). Maila
a la tu kambula, grain sickens
us, f. e. we are tired of eating
grain only.
Kamlnl, if. 6. a small crooked
thing.
Kamikfoii, if. 6. impudence.
Kamp6nde, if. 6. a variety of
pumpkin.
Kami>6ta, if. 6. a small enclosure. '.
Kamuchamba, if. 6. stabbing pain
in the chest, pleurisy.
Kamum^na, if. 6. a kUid of coloured
bead.
Kamw&le, if. i <7. a girl at and after
puberty.
Kamwftya, if . i a. a kind of bush ;
people take this bush and wave
it in the direction they wish the
clouds to take.
Kamw68himw68hi, if. 6. glow-
worm, firefly.
Kanakwabo, poss, phr, cL 6. sing*
their, of their place.
Kanakwabo, /(7JJ. phr, cL 6. sing,
thy.
Kanakwakwe, pass, phr, cL 6.
sing, his.
Kanakwangu, poss, phr* cL 6.
sing, my, mine.
Kanakwenu, poss, phr, cL 6. sing,
your, of your place.
Kanakweau, poss, phr. cL 6. sxng>,
our, of our place.
Kanana, ku, v, i, to narrate, to teA
at length.
Kanohele, if . i a. a quail.
Kanch^lench^le, if. 6. a shrill
410
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
crying. Bakaintu ba la tuna
tunohelenohele, the women
salute by crying shrilly with a
hand over their mouth.
Kanohenohema, n, 6. a small piece
of iron or zinc.
Kanohfnya, n.ia.axi evil spirit
Kanda, n. 6. a small forked stick.
Kanda, n, 6. a small house, a room.
Kanda, ku, v.t. to knead, to
trample or knead clay ; to bathe
a wound.
Kandamika, ku ; kandamfsha,
ku, V, t. to give a woman medicine
to make her bear a healthy child,
when her previous children have
all died In infancy.
Kandfla, kn, v, /. to dip, sop. Of
dipping bread into milk.
Kandfsha, ku, v.t. kanda. To
knead (clay) very much,
-kando, adj, great, big, large.
Kandolo, ». la. a variety of sweet
potato.
Eanga-, prefix to many words to
indicate diminutives.
Kanga-ohib6we, n, 6. a small or
young otter.
Kanga-chilumbnlumbu, n, 6. a
young or small roan.
Kanga-ohivhnbwe, if. 6. a small
or young hippopotamus.
Kanga-chiwena, n, 6. a small or
young crocodile.
Kanga-dibwa, n. 6. a small piece
of a broken pot*
Eanga-ftilwe, n. 6. a small or
young tortoise.
Kanga-kafumbwi, n, 6. a small or
young sable.
Kanga-kaze, n, 6. a kitten.
Kanga-konze, n.6, a small or
young hartebeest.
Kanga-lukai, ». 6. a small piece of
a broken pot.
Kanga-mukulo, n. 6. a small or
young water-buck.
Eanga-munyati, n. 6. a small or
young buffalo.
Kanga-munyiunbwi, ^ 6. a small
or young gnu.
Kanga-musaka, n, 6. a small or
young wild dog.
Kanga-mnsefu, if. 6. a small or
young eland.
Xanga-mwaba, n,6, a small or
young jackal.
Kanga-nainja, n, 6. a small or
young Lechwe.
Kanga-nakafwifwi, n. 6. a small
or young oribi.
Kanga-nakasha, n. 6. a small or
young duiker.
Kanga-naluTwi, n. 6. a small or
young reed-buck.
Kanga-namutentatila, » • 6. a
small or young kudu.
Kanga-nanundwe, n,6. a small
or young chameleon.
Kanga*nanzell, if. 6. a small or
young pallah.
Xanga-nznzhi, n, 6. a small or
young wild cat.
Kanga-pombo, if. 6. a snuiU or
young baboon.
Kanga-shankole, if. 6. a small or
young wart-h(^.
Kanga-ahempeUt, if. 6. a small or
young rhinoceros.
Kanga-shichiibabala, if. 6. a small
or young bush-buck.
Kanga-shiohinzobe, if. 6. a small
or young situtunga antelope.
Kanga-ahichisunu, if. 6. a small
or young puku.
Kanga-shikalonibwana, if. 6. a
youngster, a boy.
Kangai-iBhikembeBhi, if. 6. a
youngster, a boy.
Kanga-shikoswe, if. 6. a small rat,
a mouse.
Kanga-shiliiwe, if. 6. a small
leopard.
Eanga-aokwe, if. 6. a small or
young ape.
Kanga-anlwe, if. 6. a small or
young hare.
Kangh^ma, if. 6. a palm-tree.
Kango, If. 6. the thoracic cavity.
Kangoti, if. I a. a small hawk.
Kangvhule, if. 6. a little shade.
Kangvhungvwe, if . I a. a toad*
Kani P interr, pro, whose ?
Kanichi, if. 6. a very small youth.
Kanjenjema, if. 6. a small piece of
flat iron ^ kanohonohema*
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
4"
KaBji, euto, frequently.
Kanji-kaoji, adv, often.
Kanka, Ini, v. i, to begin.
Kanksbila^ ku, v,u to be stiff,
thick (of porridge) ; to be hard,
of uncooked food, nnripe frnit ;
of a person, to be strong.
Sankabasha, ku, v. U cans, kan«
kabal% to noake porridge stiff,
thick.
Kank&ma, kn, v.i. to shiver.
tremble.
Kankamina, ka, v, /. to hammer.
Kank6nga, »«6. a kind of white
and black bead.
Kank^ta, ka, v.L to throw
violently on the ground.
Tfankafeikft, ko, v, i, to walk with
a stick, or to go haltingly, as a
sick or infirm person.
Kankatfla, ka, v, t, to raise a price,
to put a high price on a thing.
KaTikila, ka, v. /. reL kanka. To
begin with.
Kankob^le, if. 6. a small native
piano.
Elankolenkole, n, 6. the pouch of
the stork ; also the fold of skin
under an eland*s neck.
Kankolomw^na, ». 6. cattle
disease, rinderpest.
Kank61wa, if. 6. a small quantity
of phlegm.
Xankontyonkontyoy i>.6. a kind
of beetle, makes a loud singing
noise in the rainy season.
Kanktmgwa, if. o. a child's grass
bracelet.
Eano, If. 6. a riddle.
KaPBJTna, if. i a. a kind of honey.
Kanaho, if. 6. a newly hatched
chicken, a newly bom baby.
Eaiit4nta, if. i a. the sable.
B[anteng6Ba, if. la. name given by
children to the little finger.
Children say : Kantengeza, kan-
tengeaa banako badi bongai P
K. K. how many are your
children ?
Kanta, if. 6. a small thing, derisive
name for a small person. 8a
mwa bona kantuf Have you
seen aught?
KanonkAo, if. 6. nipple of breast,
teat, dug.
KannndannTida, if. 6. name of a
kind of beetle.
Sanani, if. 6. the top, summit of a
hill.
Kanwa, if. 6. the cavity of the
mouth. Ka ma njila ma kan-
wa, to interrupt one in speaking.
Eanwino, if. 6. a drinking-ntensil,
cup.
Kanyangalakata, if. 6. name of a
plant, roots of which are used as
a fish poison.
Kanyftma, if. 6. a small animaL
Xanyimba, if. i a. the skunk.
K&nza, If. 6. a skull.
Kanzhi, if. 6. a small village.
Kanzhi, if. 6. a small fly.
K6pa, ku, V, t, to eat as a dog, to
catch.
Kap&nzha, if. 6. a small fragment,
a crumb.
KapApa, n, 6. a fragment
Kap^mpa, if. 6. a small newly made
unbaked pot.
Kap^zho, If. 6. a small broom or
brush.
Kapidi, if. 6. a small hill, hillock.
Kapidfdi, if. 6. a scorpion.
Kap6ngo, if. 6. a small goat, a
kid.
Kap6po, If. 6. a tonsil. Nda aata
tapopo, I am sick with quinsey.
Kapoteni, if. la. for, (i^ng.) a
captain.
Kapadlsha, ka, v, t, int, kapala,
to seek or want much.
Kapukapuka, if. i a. the month of
July, when there is much wind;
also name of the wind that blows
then.
Kaptila, ka, v, t, to seek, want.
Kaptimpu, if. i a, name given to
the lion.
Kapwila, ka, v, /. rel, kapala, to
seek or want for.
Kas&ka, if. 6. a dense forest country^
Kasala, ka, v, i, to be warm.
Kas&ma, if. 6. a small firebrand,
torch.
Kas&mo, if. 6. a stick, small
tree.
412
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Kssaaigabfinbe, n. i a. the month
of August, when the hawks come.
Kssapalaaapaia, n, 6. impudence.
Ks8&Bha, ku, v, /. to warm, to heat
up.
-kas&zhi, adj. warm.
£&86, i». 6. fragments of grass float-
mg on water.
Kasika, n. 6. an ear-ring.
Kaa^se^ n, 6. nausea, disgust.
Kasha, ku, v. /. to forbid, prevent,
obstruct.
Kashdmo; KaBhashAmo, if. 6. a
splinter.
Kishi, n. 6. a small nation.
Kaahfmbi, n. 6. a small girl.
Kashimbo, n. 6. a kind of dance.
Kaghimfnlaniv6mvu, ». 6. a kind
of coloured bead.
Kashixnpi, n. 6. a proverb, wise
saying.
Kashinga, n, 6. a blood-vessel.
Xashlsa, if . 6. a sinew.
K&sho, n, 6. a salt-pan, Balt-po<^
Kasdlo, n, 6. the hip-joint
Kasowe, n. 6. an abortion, still-
bom child.
STasua, if. 6. a small calabash
chum, paramour, partner in ini-
tiation dance.
Xasumo, ». 6. a small spear.
Xasundi, n,6, a small barren
thing.
Kasunae, n, 6. a nice smell, scent,
perfume.
Kata, n, 6. a child^s bow for shoot-
ing, a musical bow ( » kalumbu).
K&ta, n, 6. name of a game.
Kata, n, 6. a small cnu:k.
Kata, ku, v. i. to act as sentry, to
go cm patrol.
Kat&la, ku, v. i, to be tired, weary.
Kat&le, ». 6. a piece of rough native
iron.
Kat&ma, ku, v. u to deny a fault.
Katiznbo, if. 6. a small thong,
reim.
Katambulanshixna, n, 6. the
uvula.
Katamina, ku, v*i. to be sunk
under water, submerged.
Xatanda, if. 6. ^chelorhood,
celibacy.
Katizha, ku, v.t. eaus, katala,
to tire, annoy, bother. Pass :
kataahiwa. to be perplexed.
Katiba, if. 6. a small baan.
Katiti, Jf.€. the breast of an animal
(the part always sent to the
chief)*
Kat6mba, if. 6. a small dirty thing,
a foetus. Udi kwete katomba,
said of a woman in the early
stages of pregnancy.
Kat6mbo, if. 6. An occasional
action or way of doing things,
generally of bad deeds.
Katong61a, if. 6, a dish of nuts
crushed up, seasoned with salt,
eaten raw or cooked.
Katu, the month of September, when
the leaves fall and new ones
shoot
KattUa, ku, v. /!. to lift up, elevate,
raise.
Katulisha, ku, v.t, int. katula.
To lift up high.
Katultika, ku, v, i, rev. stai.
katala. To be rested, refreshed.
Katultila, ku, v./. reu, katala.
To refresh, rest.
-katulushi, adj\ refreshed, rested.
Katwila, ku, v. U rel, katula. To
lift up for.
Kaultingwe, n.ia. a poor person,
vagabond.
Kat^uHa, if. 6. a small field, garden.
Kaungakdnahi, n, 6. pL tunga-
konshi, a small creek, used in
fishing.
Kavhumbe, if. 6. grass used by
natives for thatching.
KaThumbi*ka8h6nto, the month
of October-November, when the
rain begins.
Kayebela, if. i a, spirit, ghost
Kay^ngo, i*. 6. a cup.
Kaa&ne, if. 6. a small piece of
meat.
KasaiMktLBlii, if. 6. a rag.
Kaze, If . I a. a cat.
K&sha, ku, v. /. to deny, disown,
contradict
Kazhalakdnae, the moon of July,
when the pallah is bora.
Kaahilambfidi, if. 6. a byway.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
4^3
gftuhfiTift, kn, V. /. r«/. kaih*, to
deny for.
Kasime, fr. 6. a small bird.
KAle (or keelo, for kaato), n, 6. a
small pimple, rash, papnle.
Kdla> (or keele, for kaela), a
small quantity of porridge.
Ximbe (or keembe, for kaambe),
n, 6. an axe.
Kdmbeshi ^or keembeihi for
kaembeshi), a boy of 7 or 8 3rears.
XJo (i)» jfiass. pro. a/, sing*^ thy;
also 3/. d, 5, 6. it; e.g, Ohintu
cha-ko, thy thing. Mwini wa-
k6, the master of it. (1) num,
part, cL 5, 6. sing,\ eg, kambo
koxnwi, one affair. (3) voc, part,
and adv, short form ^kono, &c.
Xob61a, kn, 9. /. to shield, to parry.
Kobel^la, kn, v. /. reL kobela, to
defend another, to parry for
another, to protect.
KobAsha, ku, v. /. to imitate, to
refuse to pay a debt because of
another owing to yon by your
creditor.
KobiU, num. adv, twice.
Koch&ni ? adu, how ?
Kodia, dem, pro, cl, 5. yon, yon-
der. As adv, yonder.
-kofa, adj, lean, thin.
Koka, ka, v.i. to be lean, thin,,
emaciated^
Eok^la, kn, v. L to be lean, thin
for. Kda kokela mwanangn, I
am thin for my child, i, e, through
grief for my dead child.
Koko, dem, pro, cl, 5. that. As
adv» there, thither.
Kokola, ku, v. i, to prepare a trap,
to prepare a stick by stripping off
twigs and thorns; also to bring
a wife home on day of wedding.
Proverb : Wa bu kokola bukole,
he has prepared a trap, i, &, of a
person who has killed a lion or
other dangerous beast, he has
conferred a public benefit
-kokola, adj, clean, stripped (of
grass, &c.). Bwiin bukokole,
clean grass.
Kokol6ka» ku, v, 1. to crow (of a
cock). A native will explain thii
by saying: munkombwa wa
amba 'ti : ko-ko-lo-ko.
Kokn, dem, pro, cl, 5. sing, this.
Kdla, ku, V. f . to cough.
Kdla, ku, V, 1. to be strong, to bear
an3rthing courageously, to be
tough, hard (of a person).
Eol^Ut» ku, v,t, rel. kola, to be
strong for, endure. Cha kolela
muahinae obipami, a riddle i
What old man endures the dark-
ness ?
Koloka, ku, v. i, to be hollowed out
•kolokele, ctdj, hollow.
Kolola, ku, V, t, to hollow out
Kolol6kwa, ku, v, i, to be sober,
to become sober.
Eololola, ku, V, t, to dig out, e,g.
a fountain to make it deeper, to
untie a load, to tell out everything
of an affair hiding nothing.
Xololdaha, ku, v, t, to make sober.
Kdlwa, ku, v, i. to be drunk.
Kolwe, n.ia, pL bakolwe or
bankolwe, kaffir com, red
variety.
-kolwelwe, adj. hollow.
E6ma, ku, v,u to dear one*s
throat by coughing.
Koma, ku, v, t, to be able. Nda
koma ku aaka, I am able to
build. Nda koma ku yaya
muntu pele nda tia, I am able
to kill anybody, but I am afraid to.
E6mba, ku, v»t. to pray to, to
worship.
K6mba, ku, v,t, to dear out a
dish, to lick out a dish, eat food
left over.
Eombaola, ku, v, t, per, rep, kom-
bola, to pluck fruit
KombekiLche, n. 6. a small ox, or
cow. Proverb : Kombekache ka
▼hwa ikumi dia ing'ombe, a
young ox (or cow) produces ten
head of cattle, — used to justify
charging interest on a loan.
Kombela, ku, v, t, rel» komba,
to pray for, or to.
Xombel61a, ku, v, t. reL komba,
to pray on behalf of, to persuade.
Xombdka, ku, o. L to decline, to
set (of the sun).
414
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Komb6ka, ku, v.f. to snap, be
broken.
Komb61a| kn, v, t, to snap, break
off (as a pumpkin from its stalk),
to lift up its head (of a snake).
Inzoka ya kombola, the snake
rears its head.
Xombom^na, ku, v, i, to be bent,
crooked.
Kombom^ka, ku, v. t. caus. kom-
bomana. To make crooked.
•komboxnene, adj. bent, crooked.
-komboshi, adj, snapped, broken.
Kombya, kn, v,t, caus, komba,
to give one food left over.
Kom^na, kn, v. i. to be large, to
become large, to increase in
size.
Komen^sha, ku, v, i, int. komena,
to be or become very large.
Kom^zha, ku, v, t, caus. komena,
to make large, increase in size.
Koxn6ka, ku, v, i. to fall in, as side
of a pit.
Koxn6na, ku, v. /. to break off, as
a piece of tobacco from a lump ;
to bite off a piece of bread.
Xomon^ka, ku, v, i, cap. komona,
to be breakable, brittle.
-komoshi, adj, broken.
Komwi, num. adv. once.
Kona, ku, v. t. to receive the things
of a dead person, also those of a
man who returns home from work
and shares the things he has
brought ; e.g, Nda kona shintu
slieahi 8ha muAi, I have re-
ceived these things of the dead
person.
Konaola, v. t. per. rep, konona, to
keep on breaking. Bapombo
ba la konaola mapopwe onse,
the baboons go on breaking all
the maize.
Konda, ku, v, t, to please, gratify.
Kone, num. adv. four times.
Konga, ku, v, t. to scare, frighten.
K6nka, ku, v. t, to cut ofif the ears
of mabele, to reap.
Konka, ku, v.U to gather people
together in crowds.
X6nka, ku, v,t, to bite (of a
snake).
KonkUa, ku, v,t, rel. konka, to
reap for somebody.
Konkolola, ku» v. t, ? rep. konka,
to cut even the poles of a roof or
the thatch.
Konkomdna, ku, v, i, to be bentr
crooked, warped.
Konkom6ka, ku, v,t„ caus, kon-
komana, to warp, make crooked,
-konkomene, cuij, bent, crooked^
warped.
Eonkom6na, ku, v, i, to knock, as
on a door, and as a woodpecker
knocks on a tree.
Konkwela, ku, v, /. to hatch
eggs.
Kono, dem, pro. locative^ this. As
adv. here, hither.
Kon6ka, Ira, v, i, to be broken.
Kon6na, ku, v. t, to break,
-konoshi, adj, broken.
Konse, cidv. everywhere.
Konse-konse, adv, everywhere,
wheresoever.
Kenya, ku, v, t. caus, kona, to
give one things that belonged to a
person now dead ; also of a per-
son who gives his friends thmgs
on his return from working — wa
ba konya.
Konze, n, i a, the hartebeest.
Kdnzha, ku, v, /. to overcome, to
be too mndi for, to be able. Ku
ta konzha, to be unable.
Konzhi, », 6. an overhanging tree,
or other thing.
K6pak6pa, ku, v./. to stir up
water.
Kopatila, ku, v, t, to wink the eyes
when yon are afraid anything
may enter them.
Kop6ka, ku, v,%, to be in want,
hungry.
Kopdla, ku, v.t, to want, need
(ku kapula).
Kopolo, n, I a, for, a corporal of
police.
Kosanwo, ord. num, five times.
Kosaoka, ku, v, i.per. rep, koaoka^
to be broken up.
KosaoBha, ku, v, t, caus, kosaoka,
to cause to be broken up.
KosatUa, ko, v./. to cut op meat
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
415
Kukoaanls shitadi, to cut up
meat into small pieces.
So86k% Ini, V. f. to be cat, to be
dead, to be settled (of afifairs).
"Wa kosoka mushixiBe, the
darkness is breaking.
Eo861s, ko, v,t. to cut, to settle an
affair; ku kosola twambo, to
settle affairs. Ka kosola im«
pTunbe, to take off the chignon.
Iieza u la kosola didi P When
will the rain stop? Mukaintii
wa kosola, the woman con-
ceives. "Wa kosola mukondo
wa mufweahi, he has found the
smoker's spoor — said in case of a
theft: people go to the place
where tiie theft took place, but
find the thief disappeared, then
the first person that comes there
they accuse of the theft. Shina
. ka koswelA, I had not yet cut —
an expression used by a person
who is greatly astonished by
something which he had never
seen or heard before.
XosTunlika, ku, v,i. to go ahead
leaving others behind.
Xo8w61a, ku, v.t. rel, kosola, to
settle for, cut for. Mwami wa
tn koswela twambo, the chief
settled the affairs for us.
Kot&ma, ka, v* < . to bend, to bow,
to incline.
Kotamina, ku, v,f. rel, kotaxna,
to bend down to, bow down
before.
Kotamiika, ku, v. u to lift the
head, stand erect, be encouraged.
Kotamiftna, ku, v,t, to cause to
stand np erect, to encourage.
Kot6twe, num, adv, thrice, three
times.
Kot6twe, num, adv, thrice.
£ot6ka, ku, v. i, to leave work at
rest-time or in the evening.
K6ze, n, 6. a string, cord.
K6zha, ku, v./. to be like, to
resemble.
Kdzha, ku, v. /. to intoxicate.
Xozh&na, ku, v. u rec, kozha, to
be like each other.
Koshftnya, ku^ v./. rec. cam.
kozha, to liken, compare. Wa
XQU kozhanya o sokwe, he
compared him to an ape.
-kozhene, adj, like, similar.
Kozhi, n, 6. a small bark-string, a
line, string.
Ku (x) classifier cl, 5. sing, ; also
pers, and rel. pro.
(a) Sign of infinitive mood.
(3) Preposition and locatiye classi-
fier^ to &c
(4) Pers, pro, 2 p. sing. ace. thee.
(5) Prep. by.
Kua, ku, V. i, to bark, to scare
birds from a field.
Kubele, subs, pro. prep, cl, 5. sing,
it (where it is).
Kub6ko, n, 5. fore-leg of animal,
arm of person.
Kudidila, ku, v. i, dble. rel. kula,
to grow up with; e.g. Chianza
ohakwe wa kudidila acho, he
has grown up with his custom,
i. e, that way of doing things he
had when young.
Kudie P interr, pro. cl. 5. which ?
Kutwi kudie P Which ear ?
Kufiingu, n,\ a. a superstitious
disease. Before a man has inter-
course with his wife after weaning
the child, he may send her to
another man, thinking she has
this disease and so get rid of it.
Kufw&fwi, adv. near.
Kufwafwi, ku, prep, near to.
Ktika, ku, v.i, to come out, as
handle of axe.
Kuk&zhI, n, i a, the month of
December.
Kukubtila, ku, v. t. to sweep.
Kuki!ibwe, n. i a, month of April.
Kuk41a, ku, v.t. to take away
everything firom a person, leaving
him nothing ; to gather things up,
sweep.
Kukumwina, ku, v.t. to gulp
down.
•kukutu, adj. Aijf very hard.
Ktila, ku, V. t, to extract a tooth ;
to take handle out of hoe or axe ;
to disjoint two mortised pieces of
wood.
KtUa^ ku, V. i, to grow
416
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
KnUktUa, ku, v, t, to clean beak
(as a fowl) by rubbiog it on the
ground. IT la knlaka&k mnlomo
anshi, he cleans his month on
the ground — said of an ungrateful
person.
Kulale, aeh. far, distant.
Kulu, n. 5. the leg.
Kulubwila, ku, v. /. to give a per-
son your old clothes.
-kulukulu, adj, very old, ancient
Knlula, ku, v. t. to shave.
-kalulu,a^'. broad (of a road only).
Inshila inkululu, a broad road.
Kultiltika, ku, v,u to be old,
ancient, useless; also of things
falling off a man's load, shieb
kululuka shintu.
Kultima, ku, v, i, to snore.
Kultimi, n, i a, the month of
January.
Kumani 1 interj.for, come on !
KumaniBha, ». 5. a desert, wilder-
ness. (See note in Eng.-lla
Vocad.)
Kumba, ku, v. /. to brew ; to sit
upon eggs (of a hen).
Kumbadi, adv. at the side, aside,
secretly.
Kumbadi ku, j^ep. beside.
Kumbata, ku, v, t. to caress, em-
brace. Ku dikumbata, to fold
the arms.
Kuxnbele, adv. before,, in front,
forward,
Kumbele, ku, prep, to or in front
of, before, ahead of.
KumbHa, ku, v, t, to beg, entreat.
Kumbfla, ku, v, t reL kumba, to
brew for.
Kumbo, <idv. to or towards the
west.
KumbtLka, ku, z/. t. to be remem-
bered.
Kumbtika, ku, v. i, to be chafed.
Kumbtila, ku, v. t. to rub or chafe.
Kumbtila, ku, v.i. to think or
remember, to desire.
Kumbtuha, ku, v, t. to cause to
desire, as when you offer a man
a thing not intending to give it to
him.
Kumpatila, ku, v. t, to stop (of the
rain). Wa bu knmpaula I«eza,
the rain is finished.
Knmpaula, ku, v,t, to drink
quickly.
guTnimka, ku, v. u to start, leave
on a journey.
Kunakwabo, poss, phr, cl, 5, sing.
their, of their placie.
Eunakwako, poss. phr. el. 5* sing.
thy.
Eunakwakwe, poss.phr. cl. 5. sing.
his.
Eunakwancn, poss, phr, cL 5. sing.
my.
Eunakwena, poss. phr. cL 5. sing.
your, of your place.
Eunakwesu, post, phr, cl. 5. sif^.
our, of our place.
Eunamizia, ku, v. i. to stoop down
so as to drink directly by the
mouth.
Euna^ika, ku, v.i. Xa Inrcb sud-
d«ly (of a canoe), to stagger (as
a drunken man).
Eunda, ku, v.t, ta copulate (of
mankind).
Eundulula, ku, v. U rtp^ ktinda,
to kunda over and over again.
Eunga-knnga, ku, v.t, to gather
things together.
Eung6iha, ku, v, t. to tax.
EuDJi, adv. elsewhere.
Etinka, ku, v.i. to flow, drift.
Buloa bwakwe bwa kunka
anshiy his blood flowed to, or was
spilt upon the ground.
Eunkila, ku, v. t. rel. kunka, to
be spilt upon, to flow upon.
EunkOBdko, n. 5. autumn.
Etmkudiko, adv. low, low ^ring.
Eunkula^ ku, v. t. to hoe up anew
field in dry season, ue. when the
ground is hard.
Eunkula, ku, v, /. to rub or scrape
against, as a yoke against ox.
Eunkuldka, ku, v. i. to descend,
to roll along (as a log).
Eunkultisha, ku, v, t. to roU along
(as a log).
Eunkumtika, ku, v.i, to fall (of
leaves in autumn), to fade (of
colours),
•kunkamxishi, adj, fiid^, shed.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
417
Knnknttila, Ya, v,t. to scrape.
Ku konlnitiUa busane ku
chifda, to scrape meat off a bone.
Etinsengwe, adv, ontside, towards
the outside.
Kunsengwe "kxi^prep, outside of.
Kunslii, adv. below, beneath.
Kunshi ku, prep, under, below.
Kunso, tutu, secretly.
Kuntti, n, he, place, locality,
direaion ; a place whose name
you forget or may not say.
Bonse bs swangana knnta
komwi, they all gather at one
place. Kunta yomwi, or
komwi, to another place,
another direction.
Kuntula, n, i a. bush-pig.
Kirnnna, ku, v. t, to pour. IT la
ktmuna mapopwe anslii, he
pours the maize upon the ground.
Knnse, euiu. 8a wa ya kunse
tuunuP have you been to the
bush to-day?
Kupa, ku, V, /. to bale.
Knpaila, ku, v, t. ?per, rep. kupa,
to apply water to the face of one
who is delirious.
Knpana, ku, v, i, to overflow.
Eupftnya, ku, v, /. to hll to over-
flowing.
Kupaula, ku, v,t, to take leaves
ofif mealies.
KuptLka, ku, v. u to have skin
grazed off.
XuptUa^ pu, V. t to graze, wotnd.
Ghisamo chechi cha nkupula,
this stick has wounded me.
Kupwila, ku, v. t, to put one^s
fault on another,
Kusa, ku, V, i, to wither, fade ; of
maize, &&, withering with heat.
Knsha, ku, v. t, to take away,
remove, extract, to take off.
Kusha, for ikusha, q. v. ; tudyo
twa nkusha, the food satiates
me.
Kuti, conj, that.
Kutula, » kuntula, bush-pig.
Xtitwi, n. 5. an ear.
XuwaXla, ku, v.i. to cry a long
. time (of a child), to speak a long
time.
Kuwaola, ku, v. /. to drive away
flies.
Kuyoba, the moon of February.
Ktusha, ku, v, t, cam, kula, to
cause to grow, to train up.
Kuzhfgha ku, v, t. caus, rel, kula,
to train up for.
Kwa, ku, V. t, to pay marriage
. dowry. Nda ka kwa ing'ombe
shobili, I paid a dowry of two
cattle.
Kwa (i) prep, denoting' agent ; also,
to, from,
(a) pers, pro, el. 5. sing ; also gen,
part, cl, 5. sing,
Kwabo,his home, his place, to them.
Kwadi » ku a di.
Kwale, ». I a. a pheasant.
Kwalo, subs, pro, cl. 5. sing, it,
itself.
Kwalula, ku, v, t, to scratch.
Kwanga, ku, v, t, to sharpen knife,
&c., on stone.
Kwanya, ku, v, t, to rub or scratch
when you itch, to comb, to tear
off a scab.
Kwasha, ku, v, /. to set a trap, to
catch fish.
Kwata, ku, v. t, to hold, seize, to
grasp, to arrest.
Kwatana, ku, v, t, rec, kwata, to
seize each other, to strive, wrestle.
Kwatila, ku, v.i. rel. kwata, to
be fast, firm, steadfast.
Kwatila, ku, v. t, to forgive. Ku
kwatila muntu luse, to forgive
a person in mercy.
-kwatile, adj, fixed, firm.
Kwatisha, ku, v, t. int. kwata, to
hold fast.
Kwazima, ku, v. i, to be broad,
wide.
Kwasamlka, ku, v. t, caus, kwa-
sama, to broaden, widen.
^kwazeme, adj. broad, wide.
Kwe, poss. pro. 3 /. sing, his ; prC'-
. fixed by gen. parts,
Kwela, ku, v.t, to draw, pull,
drag.
Kwelela, ku, v, t, rel. kwela, to
. pull towards.
Kwelesha, ku, v. t, int, kwela, to
pull hard.
E e
4i8
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Kwembs, ka, v, i. to gnmt.
Kwempa, ku, v.t, to snatch (as
a hawk snatches chickens).
XwenUythy place, thy home, to yon.
"Kwean, onr place, our home, to us.
Kweza -> ku eza, to come.
"Kwi ? adv, where ?
Kwiba. = ku iba, to steal.
Kwikay ku, v. t, to pnt .in a handle.
Kwika "■ ku ika, to cook.
Kwins B ku ina, to be noU
Kwlwe, £uiv. (life, cf iwe) to the
east, eastward,
Xwiseulu, loc. of iaeuXu as atkr,
up, above.
Kii^eulu ta^prepi above.
Kwishi « ku izhi ; kwishiflhi
-B ku iBhiehi, to know.
Ii, pronounced as in English. When
1 undergoes change it becomes d;
under some circumstances it is
omitted. See cAap. it, sac/. 2«
Iia, particle used in forming several
verbal, tenses ; see chap, vii,
Ii&ba, ku, v.t, to open mouth
widely, to put a finger down the
throat to bring out a bone stick-
: ing there, or to cause vomiting;
Muntu u Is labs, said of a man
who opens his mouth wide in
eating, and eats fast Phn, Ws
labs Iiezs, it lightens;
Iiabflca, ku, v, t, to ask riddles;
Iisblls, ku, V, /. to eat a little*
laab&ha, ku, z^ /. to call a person
by beckoning with the hand ; also
to give a person a little food.
Iiabukulula, ku, ti^i^ to answer
riddles correctly.
Xiadila, ku, 9. t, to eat the eveotng
meaL
^sidfla> ku, v.t; ral, lavth to.
order, command.
Iiak^ms, ku, v» i, to open, tiw-
mouth.
Iiakamiaha, kn, v* t. ifU. laksma,
. to open the mouth wide^
Iiak&mya, ku, v, /. caus. lakams,
to open another's mouth.
Iiak4ts, ku, v. i, to travel verylmrd,
so as to do a long journey in. ona
day.
Tiskfttflrs, ku, v. i, to fdiU from
a height (of leaves and fruit), to
arrive from a long journey,
•lakeme, aef;\ open (of the mouth).
Iiakauks, ku, v. i, to move the lips
without speaking, to keep on
opening the mouth, wil^ut
making a sound.
Iiaktika, ku, zr. ». to be open, of
a gun ; to gape, of a wound ; ^/^
of a maa who at last speaks after
being silent a long time.
Lakfils, ku, v, /. to opeu (a
gun).
Iiskumtics^ ku, m k to be- open
.(of a gun).
Lakum&is, ku, v, t. to open a gun
for putting- in caitridg^ to <q)en
wide a sput^ in anything.
Iisk&Bha, ku, v, /. caur. lakaks,
to open, to caaseto gape,
-lakuahi, a^'. open, gapmg.
Iisla, kn, V. L (? Tonga), to^ sleep.
The perf. lele is commonly used.
IJdi lele, he is lying down, or
asleep^
Itfslela, ku, Vi /. rel: lata^ to sleiep
for, &c. ; to be on guard a» when
a lion is about ; to go aad sleep
near- a village in order to seiae the
people there.
Tialuks, kn, v; t. to be split;.
Ijalula, ku, v. t, to split
la^ims, kn, 9. /. to smear, te: «■= kn
OAtS.
liamws, knv t>. ^ to be Mtisfied (of
affairs); k ^ that they aietme.-
Iiama^ka, ku, v, i. to- be soft and
sticky,
-lamsushi, adj, sticky;
Limba, ku, v, t to smeac* IJIe body
with clay in time of moamiog^ of
. aaimalszolling in the Brad.
Ii^Lmba/, ku, Vi fV to prostzato* one-
sdf in saluting^ a superior,
lismbsfithst kot perts^ repi laalis,
to smear dirt upon \Jig. to slander,
besmirch one*s chsiraoter.-
Lamfafla, ku, v, /; ni, lsiiiba».
to prostrate oneself btfocei to
woxship;
X^ambiaha^ ku, «v $. mi* tarns.
lamba» to cause one to prostrate
TLA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
419
. himself before a superior, to cause
to worship.
-IftmAi, adj, long, deep, tall, high,
lianiika) ku, v, t, to bring two
things dose together ; to put on
a patch ; to put a stamp on a
letter ; e,g. nda lamika xninkndi,
I put two calabashes t<^ther, tV.
on one »de of a load.
JLamikfla, ktz, z». /. r^L lamikft, to
put a pikch on for somebody, to
stamp a letter for somebody.
Iianaiia^ leu, v, «. to be far, long,.
deep, tall.
Iiftmpa, "kxky V, i, to be sharp.
I«Smpiaha-, ku, nu si. to be rery long,
far, deep.
Iifiaipishft) kiSy 0. i, to be very
sharp.
Juampiahi^ia, "kxL, tK /. caMs, reL
lAupa, to sharpen for another;
e. g, nsmpishizlui imiK>ko,
sharpen for mc the knife.
Iiftmpya, ka, v, /. caut, ISmps, to
sharpen, to make sharp.
TiaamVfty ku, 9. i, to be soft, free
from grit and lumps (of meal
especially) k
lAmtUuk, V, /. to make meal soft
and ftee from lumpSk
liamysi kUy v. U caus* lamav to
satisfy (of food oc affairs).
GhidjFO- oheehi eha ndamya^
tills food satisfies me.
Iianda, ka, v, L to fine, to- impose
ft fine upoQv to make pay for one'il
fiiult, to confiscate.
laaaadftbAlft, ka, v. i, to be stretched
out. Ferf, landabale ; e, g, ITdi
bmdftbeie, he ties s^etehed
0Ut.
lifttidftbtfahft,; kg, ik /. eems. landki-
bala,' to stretch out,, as a mat or
cloth;,
-kundabelej €uif, outstretched,
prostrafcer
IiancUUa, ku,. v* i, to be left in-
complete, unfinished. Undimo
Wft laadala^ the work is left
iacomplietiB:
Landila, ku, v, t, rel, laudn^, to
impose a- fine out somelxidya
bthalfy t» fine for; ^g, Sda
landila muntu mulauda
wakwe, I fine (on behalf of
another) the nun tor his fimlt;
Iiandisha, ku, v, t, reL caus.
lands, to cause or help to fine on
behalf of another.
Iisndudika, ku, 9. /. ct^» landuka^
to be crossable (of a^ ri^er).
Tiaudtika, kI^ tk $. to cross arrver,
to land.
Iiandukils, ku^ tu t, reL landuka,
to cross over to; e.g. a tu
landulrile mwitala modiay let
us cross over to the other side.
Iiaadiila, ku, vi /. to take a piece
of meat out of a pot, leaving the
rest
Iiandultila) ku^ 9;/. to take some
meat out of a pot, putting it on
a plate.
Lauddflha, ku,2r. /. ^oivr. landuka,
to cause to cross over, to ferry over.
Iianduahixha,. ku, v, t, cans, rel^
landuka, to ferry over (things)
on behalf of, for.
Landwila, ku, u, L rtL laadula,
to take out for.
Ii&nga, ku, V, t to behold, to look,
to want, to look for ;. also, to be
alive, to be welL
Tiangania, ku,. v. /. Jr, ku laiiga»
to look about for, to seek,
search.
Iiangidila, ku, v, t, reL langaj to
look at, to look out, to expect.
Iiangidizha, ku, v, /. reL cems,
langa, to cause to lod^ at, or look
for ; e,g. Bantu ba la ku langi-
diaha- mf dizno,. the people cause
yon tO' look at their work, r. e^ it
is done so welL
Iiangfla, ku, tr. t, reL lamga, to
look for, to look towards^ Ku
langila mu- ehiahiuvhiy to* look
with- shaded eyes. Eu dilaagilay
t0 look oat for oneseii; to
beware.
IianeiBha, kn^ o. A, int langai: to
look intently.
Iftfosha, ka> Vi /. cems, UxapSy to
lengthen,, to- make long;
!L«inirtiT>h«, kn^ v, /. eamK fwt^
iampav to lei4;tli«K foe
E e 2
420
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ii&nxhtk, kn, v. /. caus. lanffs, to
show ; e, g. Ba la nansha mi-
dixno yabo, they show me their
work.
IiamBhizha, kn, v, t. caus, reL
langa, to show on behalf of.
Ii6pa, ku, V, t, to take fire from one
place to another ; to take a person
to go and show him anything.
Fig. to anger (from this the
following words are derived^
lapuka, &c.)*
Iiapalla, ku, v, /. to fill up a hole
or grave.
Ijapila, ku, v. /. rel, lapa, to con-
vey fire for.
Iiap&ka, ku, v, u to msh, charge in
anger, as a man or lion.
IiapukUa, kii, v* U rel. lapuka, to
rush upon one in anger; to be
short, quick tempered.
Iiap^la, ku, z/. /. s kn lapusha.
Iiapula, ku, v. t. to spit, to
expectorate. Phr. kn lapiUa
mate, to break one*s fast ; to eat
early in rooming.
IiapultUa, ku, v, t. to scoop earth
out of a hole.
Iiapulwfla, ku, v. t. rel. lapnliiLa,
to scoop out earth for another.
LaptiBha, ku, v, t. caus, lapuka,
to anger, cause to charge (as
when people disturb and annoy a
lion).
Iiaya, kn, v. t. to order, advise,
teach.
Ii^zha, ku, V. t. to order, command.
Also to say adieu, good-bye.
IjazhiBlia, kn, v.i. rel, lasha, to
say good-bye for somebody else.
Ii€a, ku, V, t. to jump aside to
avoid a missile, to dodge a spear,
to escape, to evade.
Ii6ba, ku, V. i. to trip.
lieblUEa, ku, v. i, of a person, to
be footsore or lame after a long
journey ; of grain, dry at the time
of harvest, or bending down to
the ground ; e, g, maila a lebuka,
adi elele kn tebulwa, the grain
is dry, it must be harvested.
Iiebtila, ku, v. t. to cut off grain-
stalks so that they fall to the
ground ; to hit a man on the leg,
or knee, so that he &1U down ;
also of a maggot destroying grain-
stalks, eating them through.
X*edi, dent, pro, cl, 3. sing. this.
liedia, cUm, pro, cl, 3. sing, yon,
yonder.
Iiodio, dem. pro, cl, 3. sing, that.
Ii6ka, ku, V, t, to* leave, to leave
off, to cease, to stop; ku leka
mukaintu, to leave or divorce
a wife.
Iiekela, kn, v, t, rel, leka, to leave
for, cease for.
Iiok^zlia, ku, V. t. to leave off,
desist from a purpose ; to refrain
from acting.
Iiela, ku, V. t. to feed, to nourish,
to adopt a child.
Ii^la, kn, V. i, to fall short, to be
short in the sense of unable to
reach anything.
Iielina, ku, v. t. rec, lela, to feed
each other.
Iiele, petf, of kn lala, q. v,
Zael^la, kn, v. t. rel, lela, to feed
on behalf of.
Ij6ma, kn, v, i, to be heavy; of
a person, to be dignified ; e,g.
wa lema muntu, he is dignified,
honourable, respected and feared
by people.
Iiem^na, ku, v, i. to be angry.
Iiemanfna, ku, v.t. rel. lemana,
to be angry with.
Iiemizha, ku, v. t, caus, lemana,
to anger, enrage, offend, provoke.
Iiemba, ku, v, t. to write, engrave,
to tatoo, to notch. Ku lemba
mayanza, to carve or engrave
beading as on table leg. Ku
lemba inembo, to make incisions
in the skin.
Iiemba, ku, v. t. to teach, to show
way of doing anything ; e. g. nda
mu lemba ati a njidizhe, I teach
him that he may imitate me.
Iiembaila, ku, v, i. to travel or
walk listlessly, as in returning
disappointed and tired from hunt-
ing.
Iiom^ka, kn, v, t. caus, lema,
to hooour, to esteeniy to own
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
421
allegiance; e.g, tu la lemeka
mwami kn nsana shakwe, we
hononr the chief for his strength.
I«einekeka, ku, v, i, caus, cap,
lema, to be honourable.
Ziomekesha, ku, v,t, cans, int.
lema, to honour greatly, to revere.
Item^na, kn, v,t, reL lema, to
burden. Pass, lexnenwa, to be
burdened, to be overweighted;
e, g. nda lemenwa, I am over-
burdened. Ku lemena also
indicates the power of a chief
over his people. Mwami wa tu
lemena, the chief makes us afraid.
Iiem^sha, ku, v, U reL caus, lema,
to cause another to be heavily
burdened, to over^load a person.
-lemu, adj, heavy, honoured.
Mwami mulemu, a chief who
has dignity, power.
Ii^nda, ku, v, /. to stamp hard
maize, to hit a man hard on the
head.
Iiendila, ku, v, /. reL lenda^ to hit
a man on the head on behalf of
another.
I«endtUa, ku, v, i, to stammer, to
stutter, to have an impediment in
the speech.
Ii^nga, ku, V, /. to introduce
something hitherto unknown, to
establish a new custom, to invent,
discover; e,g, Iieza ngu a
■hi lenga, it is God who did it,
a rebuke to a man*s presumption ;
it was not by his strength.
MuluU ngu a ka lenga shitini
kono, it is the missionary who
first made bricks here.
Iienga, ku, v. /. to cut up cassava
roots or sweet potatoes.
IiengaUa, ku ■« ku lembaila.
Iieng&lay ku, v, i. to shirk, be
unwilling, of a man who starts
working but soon abandons it and
goes away ; or starts on a journey
and turns back.
I«enganka, ku, v. Lpers, rep, lenga,
• to be cut up,* to be out of
sorts ; to have no heart for work,
to be weak.
Ii0iigaukila» ku, v, L reL lenga-
uka, to be weak on account of ;
e,g, twa langaukila naala, we
are weak because of famine.
Iiengaula, ku, Iiengausha, ku,
v.L to cause one to be weak,
tottering. Bukoko bwa mu
lengausha, beer makes him
totter, to be weak on his legs.
-lengaushi, adj, weak, languid,
strengthless.
Zaengauaba, ku, v. /. to lead astray,
to seduce into wrong doing, to
entice one astray; applied, e*g.
to a ringleader in a strike, one
who leads others to leave their
work ; e.g. twa kalengauahiwa,
we were led astray.
Iiengawila, ku, v, t, <- ku lenga-
uBha.
Iieng^la, ku, v, i, to hang down,
be suspended; e,g, isani di la
lengela, the cloth hangs, i. e, as
a curtain.
Iiengela, ku, v, /. rel, lenga, to
cut up for.
I<engel61a, ku, 9. tL to be hung up,
as of a man suspended from a
tree with his feet dangling, as v, t,
to accuse falsely or bear false
witness against ; e, g, wa nenge*
lela kambo, he accuses me
falsely.
Iiengel^Bha, ku, v, t, to suspend.
Iiengtika, ku, v. i. to be weak,
very hungry, to be starving.
Phr. ku lenguka o mavhwi, to
be weak at the knees, i, e, weak
and helpless with hunger.
Iienglila ku, v, t, to make a person
weak, especially by beating.
L68ha» ku, v, t. caus, leka, to stop,
to cause to leave off, to restrain ;
e.g, ba mu lesha ku amba, they
stop him speaking. Ku dilesha,
to abstain, to rest in quiet doing
nothing.
Iieshizha, ku, v, i, caus, reL leka,
to restrain on behalf of; e,g,
ndeshizha muntu wezo ku
amba, stop for me that man
talking.
I«eta, ku, V, L to bring, fetch.
Iiet^la, ku, V, t, reL leta, to bring
422
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
for; g.^, ndetela menahi, being
me water,
Iiet^8ha> ku, v. /. iia^ leta, to bring
much.
lieystika, ku, v. i, to rode abont,
of a fanoe; of a man when he
fears to go to the chief, when
called, heeaose of his fault, and
avoids the chief's village.
Ijeydka, ku, v, t, to be dislocated.
Iieylils, ku^ v. /. £aus, leynka, to
dislocate.
XiOEa, n. la, prop, God, rain. See
note in Eng.^lla vocab, under God .
Ii^sfaa, ku, V. t, to show, to direct.
Iio (i) poss. prfi, cL 9 and 9 a,
sing. Prefixed by gen. parts.
Mwini waldi the master of it.
(2) Num, part, cl, 9, 9 a, sing. ;
e.g, Ijupidi lo-mwi, one hill.
I«6a, ku, V, t, to bewitch* Pass.
Iwews.
Iioba, ku, V, t, to catch fish with
a hook.
Ij6ba, kUy V. i, to capsise, upset.
Iiob6ka, ku, v, i, ? rev. loba, to
escape after being caught^ to run
away secretly.
I«ob61a, ku, v.t, to catch fish.
lK>b68lia, ku, V. t, caus. loboka,
to cause to nm away secretly, or
to help.
-loboslii, adj, fugitive.
IfObya, ku, v, t. caus. laba, to
capsize.
Iioela, ku, V. t, rel, loa^ to bewitch
for, on behalf of.
Ijolela, ku, v* u to be given any-
thing freely.
Iioleeha ku, v, t. to give a person
things freely, esp. to any one who
has nothing.
Iiol61a ku, V. /. to repeat, to do
anything again and again, ll^da
lolola makaui a tanguxxa, I
repeat the first affairs.
I«6ma, ku. v, i. to be given a thing
just suited to yon.
Xiomauka, ku« v. i. to be jagged,
notched.
Iiomatila, ku, v. t. to jag, to notch
(as an axe edge).
Ii6mba, ku, v, /. to aftk^ beg.
Uuda, kOy V. t, to come to take
anything, to fetch. 'W.a londa
nzhi P What are yon after ?
Iiondadka, ku, v, i, to drip, to
drop as medicine in drops, to
dri»de ; ^. ^ leza n la londauka,
the rain &lls in a drizzle.
XiOndauBhA, ku, v. t. caus, lon*>
dauka, to cause to drip, to drop
medicine.
Ijondoka, kn^ z^.f. stat, loudQla,
to be done well, to be ^CHnplete,
perfect
•londokele, adj. perfect.
Iionddla, ku, v,i. to work well, to
make a good job of anything.
Wezo muntu wa londola
xnudimo wakwo, wa bote, that
person does his work well, it is
good.
Iiondoldla, ku, n./. rev, limdola,
to speak at great length, so as to
weary people.
IiondoloshiEha, ku^sku loxido-
lola.
Iidnga, ku, v* S. to abaadon a
village.
Zions^la, ku, v. i, to put things into
a box or bija.
Iiong^lwa, ku, v, pass, cf lon-
cela, to be happy, to be made
happy, to be bletted.
Iiong^sha, ku, v, t, caus. lonsela,
to make happy, to blen.
Ldngo, Zjongol6lo« n, 9. pL inffo,
ingololoy dorsal fin of a fish.
Iidugo, n, 9. >/. ingonco, a
house, with gable ends.
Longolk, u. 9. the place round
about a hot spring.
Iaongol6lA, kn, v. i. to unlade, to
take things out of a box or
waggon.
Itontomoka, ku, v.t. Xq go ahead in
haste, to come rushing in anger.
Iiopa, ku, V. i. to be very wet,
drenched, soaked.
Iiota, ku, V, t, to dream.
Iiowo, n, I a. name of as animaL
Ijdyo, If. 9. quitch-grass.
Zidaha, ku, v. /. caus. lo», to
bewitch by means of something.
Jffda mu loaha ^tanmiywa, X
ILA-ENGUSH VOCABUIARV
423
cattsed Sum to be token by «
lion.
Xjosha, kxLj v. t. to be ftble, t«
overcome.
lK>Bhi, H, g. pL ingoihiy bark
string, any «ord, string, rope.
X«u (a) Classifier^ d* 9 mmd 9 a.
sing,^ (i) Pers. and reL pro, cL
9 amd^ a, sing,
IrtiMnbMiyma, vi. 9. the dia-
phragm,
lauangantfa, im. 9. contianal tying
and ant3^g of loads-~of people
travelliag, Beensu badi kw«te
Inaagmngft.
Xaoane, i». 9. a folk-tale, pait of
which is sung;
Xufttele, M. g,f6r, (Soto, l«o»tle)
the sea, ocean.
X6ba, n, 9. //. imba, a fence,
stockade.
Xaba, ku, cr. /. to forget, to -err, to
make a mistake.
lanbila, n, 9. baldness (on top of
head).
X^bAle, n, 9. string made of the
palm leaf.
3«iLb41o, «. 9. a wattle nsed in
building.
Xfab^KmbOy-ff. 5^ intercourse between
a man and another's wile, per-
mitted by the husband.
lanbinge, n, 9. wild hemp used
for smoking,
laubftnsa, n. 9.//. imansa, a clean
place in the midst of a kraal;
a ^ef s court for hearing cases;
threshing-floor,
Iiub6nEe, ». i a. a kind of large
hawk or falcon '^ Miahika.
IiUbapatiao, n, g,far, (£ng.) bap-
tism.
IfOb^bo, n. 9. repentance.
lAbele, M. 9. a kind of grain similar
to but smaller than mansi ; Polish
millet,
lanbele, subs, pro, prep, cL 9, 9 a,
sing, it (where it is).
Iiiib6t», n. 9. judgement, a meeting
for trying cases ; a law. ITsmiu
kadi kLbeta kwizeulix, to-day
. there is a court above ; said when
a halo is seen around the moon.
XiY&b«tekOy III.9. a judgement, sen*>
tence.
Ijubibi, ff . 9. cream,
laublla, ku, v,t, rel, Inba, to'foiget
about. Nda ka ma hibila, I
forgot about him.
Lubllo, n. 9. swiftness, speed, fast
pace. Kn leta liibilo» to come
quickly, Ku tola InbUo, io go
quickly. PL imbilo, used of
great swifbiess.
Zitibo, «f. I tf . a lynx.
Iiubolekaxnastiko, n, prop, name
given to the Supreme Being. It
signifies : he who rots the maSuko,
a fruit which goes rotten in the
rainy season.
Iiab6ndwe,i». ia.//.baluboitdwo,
the pallah.
Lab6no, n. 9. a load, possession.
Double plural : imbono, loads ;
mabono, riches, wealth.
Iinbiilo, n, 9 a. any iron or tool,
such as knife, spear, &c.
Iiubultisa, kn, v, i, to introduce,
to make two people known to
each other.
Iiubtimba, n, prop, name given to
the Supreme Being, signifying, the
Creator.
Iiubya, kn, v. t. cam, lubft, to
cause to err, forget.
Iitichena, n, 9. the chiefs villftge,
capital.
Iiuohende, n, i a, squirrel ( i*> shi-
konso).
Xudiabdma, n, 9. roof of the
mouth, palate.
Iiudiangaaga » luanganga.
Iiudika, ka, 9. /. to prepare, get
ready.
Iiudikila, kn, v, t, rel, ludika, to
prepare for.
Iiudila, n, 9. the umbilical cord.
Ijudlmi, n. 9. tongue, tip of knife.
ITdi kwete indimi shobili, he
has two tongues, i, e, be speaks
one thing now and another later.
lindinzo (ludiinao) n, 9. peace,
quiet, calm.
Ijudio, n, 9. the right hand. Used
adverbially, kn Itidio, to the
right, on Uie righ^.
424
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Jitfa, n. 9. death, //. ingfii, severe
mortal disease.
Iitiffiko, n, 9. dust.
Iiufokdsi, n. 9. hot ash under a fire.
Iiiif dmba, n, 9. a hoof.
Iiufdno, n. 9. love.
Iiuftituko, n. 9. salvation.
Iitika, ku, V. i. to vomit.
IfUka, ku, V, i, to weave, to plait.
Ku luka ohitendele, to make
a door of reeds.
Iitika, n, 9. Tsetse fly (used of a
number).
Ijukai, n, 9. a piece of a broken pot.
Iiuk&nda, ». 9. a skin (of man,
also of mubondo fish), scale, of
fish.
Xiuk&nks, ku, v. i, to run.
Iiukankila, ku, v, i. rel, lukanka,
to run towards.
Iiukankisha, ku, v,u int. lu-
kanka, to run fast.
Iiukansha, ku, v. t. caus, lukanka,
to cause to run.
Iiukataaho, n, 9 a. trouble, annoy-
ance.
Iiuk6n, n,ia.a number of women ;
//. balukazi, a large number of
women.
Iiukila, ku, v. /. rel. luka, to weave
for.
Ijuk6bo, n, 9. a fiock of white birds.
I«ukok61a, n, 9. the elbow.
liuk61o, If. 9. breast of male or
female.
Iiuk61we, n, 9. large white beads.
I«uk6ma, n, 9. a calabash dipper,
cup.
Xiukombftslii, n. 9. the palm of the
hand ; ku tuna lukombazhi, to
hit with the palm of the hand, to
slap.
Iiuk6mbo, if. 9. the umbilicus or
navel.
Iiuk6na, if. 9. a barbed spear.
I(UkonO| If. 9. possessions of a de-
ceased person distributed to those
who have the right to them.
Iiukuba, If. 9. a field where all the
grain has been reaped, the stalks
alone remaining.
Ijuktunba, m. 1 a, a. kind of hawk.
Jauktingu, n, 9. cream.
IiuktLni, If. 9. a log or piece of fire-
wood.
Iiuklita, ku, v.t, to chew hard
things, such as maize ; to gnaw, as
a dog at a bone.
IiukwSkwa, If. 9. a fence, stockade.
Iiukw^sho, If. 9. the blacksmith's
pincers.
Ii^wi, If . 9. a winnowing-basket.
Ijtila, ku, V, i. to be bitter, strong
tasting.
Iiul&bo, If. 9 a.* lightning.
Iiulaka, n. 9. tongue. IT la ka dya
kaahonto, pele ku kuaha lu-
laka, you may eat just a little —
only a taste, lit. to put out the
tongue.
IiuHma, ku, v,L to be right,
straight; used in a moral sense,
to be honest, righteous, just.
Peff, luleme; Inzhila idi lu-
leme, the road is straight.
Muntu udi luleme, the person
is good, honest, just.
Iiulamika, ku, v, t. caus. lulama,
to make right, to rectiiy, to put
in order.
Iiul6nga, If. 9. an interval of
drought in the rainy season.
-luleme, adj, straight, honest,
righteous.
IitUu, If. 9. an ant-heap.
Iiullidi, If. 9. //. indudi, a rooH
Iiultika, ku, v.i, to lose savour,
strength (of medicine, &c.).
Iiulukw&ti, If. I a. the mantis.
Iiuma, ku, v, /. to bite, to sting (of
a bee). Ku Itima inkwino, to
gnash the teeth.
Iiuma-luma, ku, v. i. redupl, luma,
to be unfluent, slow and hesitating
in speech.
Iiumimba, n. 9. //. imamba, war,
not of a single battle, but continu-
ous fighting.
ZaunULno, if. 9. pL imano, tongs,
pincers for taking up fire.
Iiumanya, ku, v. /. rec, caus, luma,
to cause to bite each other; to
join up, as wattles upon a fence.
Iiumany^ndo, if. I a. a large tree-
snake, said to be extremely
poisonous.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
425
Iitixnanyoy if. 9. abolition.
Iitunbs, ka, v, /. to thank, to praise,
extol, be grateful.
launibidila, ka, v,t, reU lumba,
to thank on behalf of another.
Iiumbila, ku, v,t, reL lumba,
to thank for, on account of. Ku
dilumbila, to praise for oneself.
IfXimbisha, ku, v. t, int, lumba, to
thank very mnch.
Iiumbtila, ku, v, t, to pay a tax.
laumbtuBlia, ku, v,t, cans, lu-
mbula} to impose, collect a tax ;
also, to kill by witchcraft. People
used to forbid their sons going to
Bulawayo to work, fearing that
while away, or on their return, they
would kill them by witchcraft :
it is to this the word is applied.
Itumiua, ku, v,u to be dirty, in
disorder, unclean.
•lumine, adj, dangerous (of a road),
Ut, biting; eg. inshila idi lu-
mine, the road is dangerous {i,e,
there is a lion upon it).
Iituniulzha, ku, v.t. to eat dry
meat with bread.
Iituno, n. 9. //. imo, a razor, a
knife for cutting ofif hair or
shaving.
I<uin6ma, n, 9. termite.
Iiump^Us, ku, v,u to get old (of
clothes, &c.).
Xiumpl^lia, ku, v, t, cans, luznpals,
to cause to get old.
IiTunpiika, ku, v. i. to rush out, as
out of a house, in anger.
Iiumpuke, n. i a. name of a fish.
laumpukils, ku, v, t. rel. luxnpuka^
to rush out after (in anger).
Xiumpute, n, 9. pi. impute, shaft
of arrow ; //. is also mimpute.
Iitimwi, If. 9. sunshine, heat of the
sun; phr, lumwi lu badisha,
the son is very hot.
Itunakwsbo, poss. phr, cU 9, 9 a,
sing, their, of their place.
Ifunakwako, poss, phr, cL 9, 9 a,
sing. thy.
launiJcwskwe, poss. phr, cL 9, 9 a.
sing, his.
Jbuu^kwangu, poss, phr, cl, 9, 9^
my.
Iiunakweuu, poss, phr* cl, 9, 9 a.
your, of your place.
Iiunakwesu, poss. phr, cl, 9, 9 a.
our, of our place.
Iiunda, ku, v.t, to be erected (of
the penis).
Iiuudina, ku, v. i. rec, lunda, to
be gathered together ; e.g. bwisu
bwa lundana, the grass is
gathered up.
Lundlka, ku, v. /. caus, lunds, to
collect together, to pile up, as
stones, &c., into a heap.
Iiundikila, ku, v,t, caus, rel,
lunda, to pile up for.
Iiundila, ku, v. i, to fold over, to
hem.
Iiundtika, ku, v, i, to be collected,
to go all in a body at once. Ba
limduka balombwana, the men
have all gone in a body.
Iiundumtika, ku, v, i, to be
brackish.
liundumnka, ku, v.i, to go in
crowds, nobody being left behind.
Iitinga, ku, V. t. to join up together,
end to end, to unite ; also, to
season meat with salt.
Iiiinga, n, la, a, kind of hawk.
liuugs, n. 9. a small quantity of
grain.
I*uiiff6ka, ku, v. i, to be vexed. Of
a man who loses something by
the carelessness or malice of
others, and is sorry and angry on
account of it.
Lunglila, ku, v, i, to be burnt, of
food ; e.g, bwa luugula butane,
the meat is burnt up. Chele cha
lungula, the porridge is burnt,
scorched; v. i. to vex, disap-
point.
Iiungtilu, If. 9. great heat; e^g,
mudilo u la pia lungulu, the
fire is very hot Muntu u la
pia lungulu, the person is in a
buming fever.
Iiungul^la, ku, v, t, to tell out a
matter speaking the truth all the
time, to be quick in learning.
Iiunguliila, ku, v,t. rev. lunga,
to disjoin, to disunite.
Lungvwentima, adv, backwards.
426
ILA-ENGLISH VCKIABULARY
Ibungwilo, n, 9. a lettor, writing of
any kind.
iMinkfahi, n. 9. a small calabash
used for drinking purposes.
Imnk6l0) n. 9. a fienoe.
liUnlEubwinlnibwi, n, 9. tributary,
or tributaries of a river. Pxoverb :
ICulonga u mla InnlnAnirinku-
bwi, the river is filled by its
tributaries, i.e. doesn't get full
all at once. Applied to one in a
hurry to learn, &c, he must not
expect to know eTerythingat first.
ZAiiiy4iiaho, ». 9. contempt ; of one
who despises counsel, refuses to
listen and pursues his own way^
ITdi kwete liinyansho.
Ziunya^nya, n. 9. desire for food.
Nda fwa lunyaunya, when you
see people sitting eating and tbey
give you nothing, this is to ask
for some.
Iiiinzha, ku *• ku lundA.
Iiupa, ku, V. L to please, to be
nice for; e.^. ohiansa -oheohi
cha mu lupa, this custom pleases
him, $. e. he will not break away
from it, or^ ohiansa ohidi mu
lupile.
Iiupamba, ». 9. thirst. Ko. fmtb
lupamba, to be thirsty.
liUp&ngo, n. 9. a kind of platform
in a house where firewood is
stored.
Iiupldi, n.^a.9L hill.
Iiupisha, ku, v.t, int. Inpa, to
please very much.
Ifiipo, n, 9. generosity ; a slanting
wall.
Jiuptikila, ku, v. t, to be angry.
Ijtipwe, n, 9. moisture in the eyes,
continually overflowing.
Iituaka, n, 9. dense bush.
Ijtis&ko, If. 9. a spear-shaft.
IjU86kwe, n, 9. the rough outside
of horns, also of a tree.
Ijus&nge, n. 9. a kind of thin tough
grass, very good for thatching.
I«£se, n. 9. mercy, grace.
Ijiis^ba, ft. 9. a body.
Iius^le, num. eight.
Iiusenge, n. 9. grain-stalks cut
down in a field.
Lns^ngo, is. 9. a horn corilMaing
chacm-iiiedicine, a diariii.
Iiusensa, n. 9. place with sboitgmss.
I^daha, ku, 9./. caus^ Inha, to
cause to vomit Mvaamo wa
kolnaha, an emetic
laoahiko, «i. 9. a baskdt-woik fish-
trap.
Imahime, if. 9. a thing known and
spoken about and kept in nMmory.
Obudiaonn ndusliiiiio, ta la
znana, even to-day it is « thing
spoken o<^ it does not come >to an
end.
Iiuahinga, n. 9. tootiiac^. XTda
fwa huMnga, I have toothache.
IiosongrKra, n, 9. a very full thing,
as a basket or grain-bin.
Ijiuotoko, ». 9. a transgression.
IiTistilo, If. 9. hate.
Iiustinaa, if. 9. harshness.
Iitita, n, 9. a crack,a long ditch dug
for the purpose of trapping game
or keeping locusts out of a £eld.
Iiut&mbo, «». 9. a band, girdle,
belt, rein.
Ijutdxiga, If. 9. a cattle oatpost.
Xjutingat&nga, n. 9. web of the
shilutangatanga spider.
Iiat&nzbi, if. 9. a previous time, a
first time ; used adverbially, before,
• at firsts
IiUt^le, If. 9. fishing-net, the pouch
of a stork or pelican.
Lutembaula, ». la^ eat who
praises or extols.
Iiut^nde, If. 9. a kind of plant from
which basket string is nuwie.
Ittit^nte, If. 9. a place where the
grass has been burnt off ; a grass
fire.
Iiut^nto, «». 9. a piece of a •fanroken
pot, used as a plate ; a plate.
Iiutfla, ku, v.i, tohe angry, hate.
Ijutflana, ku, v. i. rec. lurtila, to
hate each oUier, to be angry with
each other.
Iiutisha, ku, v.t. €aus» kUila, to
make angry, to anger.
Iiutuluka, ku, v. i. to be shipped
of its thatch (of a hut).
Iiutultila, ku, V. /. to taice the graas
off a hut. . ■
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
427
I^DEtiishi, n, 9. pasdonatenesi, tm-
patient temper, spite,
lautwalo, n. g, marriage.
I•UTMxu^ n. 9. umibers of Inshei
(chivhnna).
IiUTwabtfti, «. 9. a nb.
Ztawtez, m. 9. space between the
shiMilder-blades.
I^wo, M. 9« a light breeze.
Xmx&ba, if. 9. a net, mesh of fat
aroond the stomach; bill of
pelican and stork.
LauBAado, -n. 9. will, desire.
Iiuzenge, n, 9. spittle, e^iecially
tongh spittle of a side persoa.
Lnaha, ku, v. t. to forget or break
a promise.
Iinzhalo, u, 9. birth.
IiQSubo, n, 9. a hiding-place.
Iiwa (i) g€n, part, d, 9 and 90.
sing,
(a) fers, fr», cL 9 and 911.
Iiws, ku, V. /. to nght.
IiwUa, #f . 9 tf . a claw, finger-nail.
liwlla, ». 9. comb of cock.
IiwalOy fK&r./r^. simple cL 9, 9^.
jm/-. it, itself.
Iiwimps, If. 9^ a hoase not yet
roofed.
Iiw6na, ka, v. /. r^r. Iwa, to fight
together.
Itfw&ndo, ». 9. //. ingando, a reed
stockade pnt across the river in
catching fish.
Iiw<aig«, n. 5). drought
I«wftiiSB, if. 9. a stick with many
forks inside a village, or out,
upon which things are hmig,
spears rested, &c.
Iiwata, ff. 9. a slope. Mulambwe
weao udi kwete Iw&ta, this
game-pit slopes down to a
point.
-Iwaahi, ^'. sick, afflicted. Muntu
mnlwBBhi, a sick person. Ing'o-
mbe indwashi, a sick cow.
]Uwfila, ku, V, 1. to be nice, sweet.
law^ndo, If. 9. pL inyendo, a
journey.
I>w6nge, If. 9. pL iny enge, a large
river.
Irw6ngu, If. 9. a notorious thing, a
< thing JsBown to all, notoriety.
Iiw^nso, Yf. 9. pi, iayeinBo, a
prayer.
lArawa, pass, ku loa, to be be-
witched.
Ziwtek, ku, v,t, to astonish, te
amaze. IT la ndwesa, you
astonish one.
I^veswa, km, pass, Iwesa, te be
astonished, to be amazed, to
marveL
Iiwfdi, If. 9. //. izijidi, a kind of
mollusc.
Lwlki, If. 9. persistency, persever-
ance, patience.
Ijwlla, ku, v,t, reL Iwa, to fight
for.
Iiwimbididi, if. 9. //. inyimbi-
didi, cock's comb ; mane, hair
on an animal's back which can be
erected ; also, of a man who cuts
his hair, leaving one portion like
a cock's comb, udi kwete
Iwimbididi.
Iiwimbo, If. 9.//. inyimbo, a song,
hymn.
lAi^isha, ku, v./. caus. Iwa, to
fight against.
I/wiya, If. 9. side, quarter, direc-
tion. Ku Iwiya kono, to this
side.
Iiwiya, If. 9 a. pi. meya, horn.
Iiwishi, If. 9. a very large river, a
flooded river.
Iiwizu, If. 9. severe hunger. li'da
fwa Iwisu, I am very hungry.
M. Pronounced as in English.
M, cop, part, cL 4. sing.^ e.g. Mbu-
zane, it is meat.
Ma (i), classifier^ cl, 3, 4, 5, and
9 a, pi,
(3) pers, pro, 2 p. pi. ace, you.
Ma, ku for ku uma, to hit.
Mab&la, if. 3. pi. colours. Name
given to a black and white
speckled ox ; e. g. £zhi ing*oinbe
nja mabala, this ox is black and
white, speckled.
Mab&nga, if. 3. baldness on the
side-front of the head.
Mab&nge, n, ga. pi. sl quantity of
hemp for smoking.
Mabia, if. 3. if^ sing, a hot spring.
428
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Mabishiy n, 3. no sing, sour milk.
Mab6no, n. ga. pL riches.
iCabtunbUy n, 3. name of a kind
of fruit.
Mabiingo, ». 3. name of a kind of
fruit.
Mabtizo, n. 3. pods of the baobab.
Mabw&bwa, n, 3. //. a grove of
trees planted around a grave. The
sing, ibwabwa is used of a single
tree of the grove.
Mabw&ntu, n. 3. //. of ibwantu,
a quantity of beer.
Maohaka, n, 3. name of a plant
eaten as a vegetable.
Macheme, n, 3. no sing, Kaffir
com.
Madi, «. 3. no sing, for, money.
M&di, n. 3. no sing, two or more
jobs carried on at once, work
for more than one master ; poly-
gamy.
Madidila, n. 3. no sing, a funeral
feast.
Msdilwe, n, 3. no sing, cries,
crying) esp. at funeral. Madilwe
a ng'ombe, noise of the cattle.
Mafda, n, 3. no sing, place for
fire, stove, oven.
Maf6mba, n. 4. //. of buftunba,
dung.
Mafdnzi, n. 3. no sing, wicked-
ness, vice.
Mafdta, n. 3. fat.
MaX, n, i,pL ofii, eggs.
MaXla, n, 3.//. ^ila, grain.
Malmbo, n, ga. pi. many songs.
MaXnza, n, 3. no sing, summer
time, the rainy season.
Makaohidilo, Makachilo, n. 3. no
sing, a pretence, sham, lie.
Mak&di, n. 3. no sing, thunder.
Hakakata, n, 3. the divining-bones.
Makala, n, 3. //. live coals, em-
bers.
Mak61ambfa, n, 3. leavings, as in a
pot.
Hak&mLO, 11.3. a large number of
people.
Mak&nko, n. 3. seed already sown.
Makankflo, n. ^, no sing, be-
ginning, commencement of any-
Siing.
Mak&ta, n, 3. bundles, coils. In-
zoka ya dishiziga makata, the
snake coils up.
Makatfilo, n, 3. no sing, weari-
ness, fatigue.
Mak6ba, n, 3. //. i^ikoba, caves.
ICakobo, n, 3. //. overhanging
brows. Prov. Bapoxnbo ba In
diaeka u xna^obo, the baboons
laughed at each other about their
makobo, i, e, people don't see
their own defects.
Mak6kOy n, 3. no sing, self-sown
grain.
Mak6a, n, i. ait, pi, of mukna,
Europeans.
Makdba, n, 3. fields in which the
grain has been harvested.
Makwash&nyi, if. 3. pL sweepings.
Makwati, 11.3. //. of ikwati,
boxes, cases.
Makwati, if . i a. a white cotton
blanket.
Makwatilo, n, 3. //. of ikwatilo,
handles, of tools, &c.
Mila, If. 4. pi. ^bula, intestines.
Mala, If. ga, pi. of Iwala, daws,
nails.
Mal&ma, if. i a, pi, sbamalama, a
cheetah.
Mal6ngal&nga, if. 3.//. of ilanga-
langa, flowers.
Mal6kal6ka, if. 3. leaves of reeds
or grain.
Malelo, If. 4. provender, provision.
Maloa, If. 4. pi, of buloa, blood.
Often used in this pi. form.
Maltikwa, if. I a. an ugly person.
Mallimbu, if. 3. //. a variety of
maize.
Malungashiku, if. 3.//. middle of
the night.
Malungu, if. 4. //. of Bulonga, a
large quantity of beads.
Malw6za» if. 3. //. a wonderful
thing.
Mama, interj, express sorrow, dis-
tress.
Mamambe, if. i. if^ sing, adultery
(used of repeated acts).
Mamantfzha, ku, v, i . to be nig-
gardly, to stammer; to be carefiil
of one's possessionsi — as of one
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
429
-who keeps what he has, even
although they are old ; also of
one who carefully mends his
clothes althongh old.
Mamba, n, ^.pL ^lamba, hoes.
Mambdnyambdnya, n, 3. no sing,
self-satisfaction of a rich person
who despises the poor.
Mambumbu, n, 3. //. IT la dya
mambuinbu, he eats very slowly.
Mambw&mbwadi2lii,/f . 3. bubbles.
Mamlna, n, 3. no sing, mucus of
the nose.
Mampa, n, gtupL o/lMwaxa.'pt^f q.v.
Mamp&nda n, 3. no sing, a
dividing-place. Mampanda a
nzhila, bifurcation of roads.
Jffampombwe, n. 3. //. continual
begging, giving nothing in return.
Wa ohita mampombwe, said
to a person who always does so
(kn poxnbola).
Mampliba, n. 3. no sing, dread, fear.
Mtoa, kii, V. t. to finish, complete
to end, exterminate ; v, i, to be
finished, &c
Manakwibo, poss. phr. cl. 3, 4, 5
^a.pl. their, of their place.
Manakwako, poss, phr, cl, 3, 4, 5
9 a, pi. they.
Manakwakwe, poss. phr, cl, 3, 4,
5, ga.pl, his.
ICanakwangu, poss, phr. cl, 3, 4
5, g a, pi, my,
ISjKnAlLwenxLy poss, phr. cl. 3, 4, 5
9 a. pi. your, of your place.
Manc&cwesu, poss. phr, cl, 3, 4, 5
9 a. pi, our, of our place.
ICan&le, n,ia, a large white heavy
blanket
Mangle mushonto, n. la. k white
blanket with red stripe.
Mantosa, n, 3. no sing, syphilis.
M6ncha, ku ; Manch61a, ku, v. i,
to dawn (of the day).
Manchenga, 11.3. no sing, cross-
eyedness.
ICanda, n.i,pl, ^ing'anda, houses.
ICanda, n. 3. //. of ianda, a big
pole with a fork at the end.
M2nda, if. 3. //• balls of earth,
wrapped in grass, tied to the
JLiwando, to keep it sunk.
Uftndu, If. 3. if^ sing, coarsely
ground meal.
Mandyadi, if. 3. idle tales, affairs
of no consequence.
Mftnga, If. 3. if^ sing, twins.
Mwana wa m&nga, a twin.
Mftnga, If. 4.//. ^bwanga, kind-
ness.
Mang'a, if. 3. no sing, cracks,
fissures.
Iffangilo, If. 3. //. tags, ends for
tying.
MangolSzha, if. 3. if^ sing, late
afternoon.
Mang'omba, if. 3. chilies.
Mangwe, n. prop, name given to
the Supreme Being ; signifies, the
sender of so much rain that there
is no dry place left.
Mani, amj, then, until; e.g, Ke
endLa chinichini, mani wa
shima, he travelled hard, then he
stopped. IT la dlma ntiani nku
leshe, you will hoe imtil I stop
you.
Manfka, ku, v. t, to hang up.
Manlna, ku, v. t. rel, mana, to
finish for. "Kvl mu manina
midimo, to serve him, lit, to
finish work for him.
Maninfna, ku, v, i, rel, mana, to
be complete, peifect.
Manlzha, ku, v. t, to finish, to end,
Manjenji, if. 3. pi, red biting
ants.
Mank&lwe, if. 3. if^ sing, a kind of
potato.
Mankftnza, if. 3. if^ sing, honey-
comb.
Mankisi, if. 3. if^ ^fif^. for. (Eng.)
matches,
llankolongwa, if. 3. name of an
edible root.
Mankonga, if. 3. if^ sing, a
shelter made of tree branches.
llankonti, if. 3.//. things given to
a paramour.
Mankushita, if. 3.//. ^inkushita,
waves on a river, wrinkles on
forehead.
Mankwashinkwashi, if. 3. //.
things or affairs of no importance
or use, rubbish.
430
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
lCang*ong:we, if . 3. m? xm^. a kind
of grass used for making mats.
Mano,. n. 3. no sing, cunniogi
cleverness.
Mazuanse, n. 3. //. sparks.
Mans^nda, n, 3. //. lands prepared
at the close of the rainy season.
Mansha, ku, v. /. to lick with the
tongue, to taste*.
Manshonya, n. 3.//. ^imdiOBya,
the inside cartilages of the noss.
Mansi, n. 3. no sing, inyanti grain.
ICanstika, ku, v, i, to* (fie so&enly
without apparent cause.
Mantimbwa, n, 3. pi. ef Inti-
mtowa, g, v,
lCant6ngwe, n, 3.//. dry discharge
of the eyes {ue, that which is
washed away in the morning).
M&nta*m.&ntu, n. 3. na sing, little
bits of rubbish.
Mant6mbwimbwa, it. 3. iw sing,
false boasting.
Manukw^bo, n, 3. na sing, their
mothers, i, e, moUier and maternal
aunts.
Manuna, ku, v. iL to take down a.
thing, such as- anything from, a
shell
Manwina, kit, v,t, rei, nunuma,
to take down for.
Manya, ku, v, t, caus^ mansi to
abolish, bring to an end.
ManyanBha, n, 3. no: sing, a Idnd
of grass used for making nuUS.
Manyiny^hi, n, $. na sing, par-
ticles of fat swimming on a liquid.
Map^pa, m 3. no sing, meslie
bran ; //. of ipepa, pages.
Map6po, n. 3. no- sing, tiie. <sqX^
side bark of trees.
Mapdpwey n, 3. //. maize.
MapumbtUu, n, 3. pL maize cobs
without tlie sheath.
Mas^ke, n, 3. no sing, refnse left
after stamping grain,
llasekeseki, n. 3. no sing: cooked
maseke;
Has^kwe^ n, 3. no sing, the
colour of a white and black ox ;
e.g. ing'ombe. etXkt nim mose^
kwe, this ox is black andwhite.
Jias^sho, n. 3. no sing, jnt^jokm-
Maa^Uy. n, 3. no sing, contradic-
tion.
Mash% ku, o. t caus, mata,. to
cause or hdp smear, danb*
Mashikn, Mi4, pi, of biudiika,
night
Maahimbi, n. 3, no sing, char-
coal.
Maahfno^ m, ^^ na sing, labia
majora.
Maahtbudia, m 3. pi, tniU ol gnEss^
such as are left when the long
grass is burnt off.
MaBoafao, n. 3. no sing. coasol»
tion> comfort.
Masuke, n.^,no sing, batter milk.
Mastiki, n, 3. //. of iiumJd, many
hairs»
Maatmka, m. 3. name o£ a- kind of
finiit.
Mastbutuiya, n, 3, pi, roughness.
Kudi masunsuaya, to be xiongh.
Mata, "kXL, v:k to daab, smear r of
filling the interatices between tiit
wall-poles of a house.
Mat£ko, n, 3. //. rf UadDOv^ the
buttocks.
Mat&nga» ir. 4. pL of botanga,
herds; 11.3. //.^itanea, melons^
M&te, n, 3. no sing, spittle*
MatelaXahi, n*^,no sing: thoaghtSsr
Matila, ku, v, t, rol, nunto, to
smear, daub, for..
Mattlo, n. 3. no sing, a refbgc;
Mat6bo, n^ 3. name of a Idnd tfC
fruit.
Mat6mpOb ik 3. «■ Xitenvtompfii
q.v,
Kat6b% M.3. w4ute nuitt^ of
Kaffir com.
MattUa, ku, tv t rovi mate, t^
open (as a gtain-bin); .flerf.
matudile. Bhombwa^ aliidi ma^
tudilwo, the gnun-binsane' openv
Mattiahi, n» 3. no sittg, rsvilings,
curses;- impfvcatioBs.
llatwlla, ku, v. t, rel, nuBtalA^ to
open foNT.
MauBibay 111^3. nosing, Dmtlttr.
ICaumba, it. 3. pt- of iimiba,
wormS| maggots;
Koundaf li. Z* f^9f tuttds,, Inge
fields^ xauk ofi a Smmc uMier
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
431
people go to gather fruit in £unine
time.
Mavhuba, n. 3. //. bellows.
Maw6 r ^erf. Dear me 1 expreases
sorrow or distress.
Maw6 budio ! tn(gfy\ Oh dear me 1
expresses distress.
May^naa, n, 3. //. carvings, mould-
ings.
MaBea§la> n, 3.//. mind, thoughts,
desires.
M^aha, ft,^n^ sing, hair, on the
pnbes.
H tehi, n. 3. no sit^, feeces.
Maahilo, n,^» pi. 0/ iahilo^. widl-
polea of a house.
MaBhinsaAhila, n, ^ no sing,
recollection, memory, mind.
Ma^okelo, n. 3. pi, die place: to
which one returns.
Mba, gm, part. cL 1,. pL they
are of.
ICbaba, subs, pro, 3 p, pi, el, u
them.
Mbala, pAr, ku mbala, novtii-
wardii; i;i, towards, the Mbala
country.
Mbi^ particle used with kn. ahia;.
o,g, JX 1ft ahia mbi, he is. very
black. How black, is hel
Xbia, gsn, part, cl, j, pL they
are of.
Mbiaa, m 1 a>, pi, bambiaa,. a
dog.
ICbo, (j) cop. parti cl, i,pL they
arp ; (3) rel. pro. cl, i. //. which.
IVfivi, (r) cop. part, cL 4. sing, ML\sk%.
(3) rel, proi cl, 4. j/x^.. whiclu.
ICbubo, stibs, pro. cl. 4. sing, it
tiAodv. it is SO) it is all right.
Mbwai gen, part, cl, 4. sing, it is
of.
M61e, //. form cUt, cf ohale, poi^
ridge.
H6na» ka» v, i, to. grow (of pdantv
&c.).
Mena, n, 4. pi. o/hwinA, burrowak
Men6ka, ka, v, t causi iiiAn»,. to:
cause to groww Bintu bionae-
wa bi meneka Iveaai^. Gocb
makes all thingsgrow.,
Men^E^a^ ku, V4t, catiti. reli.
viaxi% to make.grow fozw
Menena, kii, v, t, rel, mena^ to
grow for.
MAno, n. ^*pl. o/dino, teeth.
KMiaa, kn, v. t. to dmw out hair
from the pubes (ku mesa).
Kenao, n, 3. //. 0/ dinaa, eyes^
▲ ahia a menao, it is dark about
the eyes,, tl /. he is blind.
Menya, ku, v. t. eaus. mema, to
cause, make to grow.
M^nae, n, 3. no sing, whey*
Mdnafai, n, 3. no sing, water, sap
of txee^ juice of fruit. A newly
bom duld is called KenaM
budio.
MenaO) n, 3. pi. place where one
visits, hostel.
M6ya, n, 4. //. ofhwiss^ thoma.
Midya, n, ga. pi. <^lwlya, horns.
Mi, classifier of cl. 2, pi,
Kiepo, n, 3. pi. straight hair, aa
that of £uropeansw
Xina, ku, v,L to swallow.. "Kbl
mina mate, lit. to swallow spittle,
to desiroi
Minakwabo, posp, phr, cL 2^ fi'.
their, of their place.
Mioakwako, poss, phr, cl, 3;. //.
thy.
M£iitd:wakwe, post, phr, cL %. pti
his.
Minakwangu, pass, pkr, d, 2i pt^
my»
Minakwenu, poss, phr, cL a. //.
your, of your place.
Minakwoau, poss. phr, cL a; /£
our, of our place.
Minama, ku, v. i. to be- crooked,.
dishonest. Frov* Shimwanda
umineme, aae wa minama, he.
who goes with a dishonest person
becomes dishonest himself.. Evill
communications corrupt good
manners.
Mini, m. 2, pi, of mwioi^ koe
handles.
Minikft, kn, v* i, cap,, mina. Ttt.
be swallowable.
Mint^ngwo,.*. i-ct, namerofa. bladl
birdi
Mintika, ku, v^L to. wagv ^ ^
erect (of:a.tail)»
Hinuna, ku, v, t, to erect (» tail).
432
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Minya, ku, v. t cans, mina, to
cause to swallow. Bantu ba
minya, the people annoy, vex me.
Mishika, n,ia, a kind of large
hawk.
Mishika, n, 2. pL birth pangs.
Mukaintu wa sata mishika,
the woman is in travail.
Mishinko, n, a.//, poles placed to
close a gateway.
Misukwe, n, 2. //. mane of lion.
ITshuxnbwa wa zhimika misu-
kwe, the lion erects his mane.
Mita, ku [ =ku imita], v, i. to be
pregnant.
Mo, he, part, and adv, short form
of xaom.0, there.
Moa, ». I. a coward.
Mddi, n, i. //. bodi, a lady, wife
of a chief.
Modia, loc, dem* used as adv, in
yonder, ont from yonder.
Mofu, n, I. pi, bofo, a blind
person.
Mofti [ = muofu], M. a. a storm.
Mola, M. I a. a gun-spring.
Moma-balumbu, «. a. an ox with
black head and rump and white
body.
Momba^ if. i. a kind of snake-eating
bird.
Mombankliku, «. i. a barren cock.
Mombe, n, a. a dividing-wall in a
house.
Mombe, n, i. //. bombe, a calf.
M6mbo, n.i, an impotent man or
bull.
Mdmbombo-wen&ngo, n, a.
bridge of the nose.
Momo, loc. dent, used as adv, in
there, out from there.
Mondo, n. a. pi. miondo, fore-
legs of skin used by women as a
cloak.
MOngo, n. a. spine, backbone ;
blunt edge of a knife.
MOngo, n, i. //. bongo, a male
goat.
Mono, n, 2. a fishing-trap.
Mono, loc, dem. used as cuiv, in
here, out from here.
Monse, loc. everywhere in here or
■ there.
Mosa, n, a. air, breath ; spirit, soul ;
Moza u 8wei8ha, the Holy
Spirit.
M6ze, «. I a. name of a bird.
M6zo, n, a. //. miozo, heart, core
of tree.
Mpemtina, if. lo. a kind of strong
tobacco.
Mpile, If. I a. spring-hare.
Mu, (i) classifier, cl, i and a. sing.
(a) locative prefix and prep,
denoting position within, motion
into or out from. (3) pers. pro,
3/. sing, cl. I. him, it; aiso 2 p,
pt, nom. and ace. you.
Mub&lo, If. a. a curved or bent
stick, a hoop ; the clavicle.
Mubambala, n. a. a kick. 'Wezo
munyama wa sansa mibam-
bala, that animal kicks.
Mub&mbi, if. i. a keeper, pre-
server.
Mub&nga, if. a. name of a forest
tree ; very hard timber, not eaten
by borers.
Mub&ngo, If. a. a piece of wood
used in a game, a bat.
Mub&nzhi, if. i. one who takes
food out of a bin ; one who feeds
people ; a trusty servant ; one iXrho
knows where things are kept ; e.g,
znu tume wezo, ngu mubanshi,
send him, he knows where things
are kept.
Mubapatizhi, if. i. one who bap^
tizes.
Mub&so, If. a. colour, paint.
Mubele, subs, pro, prep, a /. pi,
you.
Mubeleki, if. i. worker, labourer.
Mubeleko, if. a. work, labour.
Mub^nzhi, if. a. the spleen.
Mubeshi, if. i. a liar.
Mubeteshi, if. i. a judge.
Mubezhi, if. i. a worker in woody
carpenter, joiner.
Mubi, If. I. a sinner.
Mubiabe, if. i. a bad person.
Mubfdi, If. a. a body.
Mublnda, if. a. a loin-doth.
Mublshi, If. I. a destroyer.
Mubdmbo, if. a. name of a tree, it
has good bark which b lued by
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
433
the Mankoya for clothing and for
making intebe.
MubdmbOy n, a. trtmk of an
elephant.
Mub6ndo, n,i. name of a large
fish, the barbeL
Mab6ndo, n. 2. muscle of the calf
of the leg.
Mubtidi, If. I. a conncillor, teacher ;
name given to the women who
instruct girls previons to marriage.
Mubtimbi, n,i, a maker, creator.
MubtinxbUy if. 2. name of a tree,
bark used as a medicine in
diarrhoea and dysentery.
Mubtitix, If. I. a newly bom calf.
Mtibwa, If. I. a dog.
Muobinka, if. 2. a nice thing.
Muchanku, if.2. noisy chewing;
ku tafnna znuohanku, to chew
noisily.
Mucbaxua, if. i. an ox with widely
spreading horns.
Muoh^he, if. i. an infant.
Muohdcbel^zhi, if. 1. 1^ tale-bearer,
especially of lying tales.
Mucli^ka, If. I a, pL bamuoheka,
a kind of python..
Muoh^lo, If. 2. a fruit.
Muoheznb^le, if. i. an old person.
Muoh^nde, if. i. a bull.
Muoh6ngi, if. i. a deceiver.
Muchezije, if. 2. name of a tree from
which medicine is made for
bums ; fruit eaten.
Muoheteshi, if. i. a tax-gatherer.
Muob^shi, If. I. one who gathers
fruit.
Mucb^liiy If. I. a turner, maker of
ivory bracelets.
Maobikwatabakofa, the wrist.
Muchila, if. 2. a tail.
Muchinchi, if. 2. sound of foot-
steps.
Muohitashibi, if. i. a sinner.
Mucbiti, If . I . a doer, maker.
Muohitidi, if. i. one who does on
behalf of another, an agent.
Muohizhi, if. i. sister, brother. Used
by a man speaking to or of his
sister ; by a woman in speaking to
or of her brother.
Mudi, If. I. a buyer, purchaser.
Mudi a mundi.
Mudfango, if. 2. a doorway, gate-
way.
Mudianswi, if. 2. name of a forest
tree; hard, borer-proof timber:
walking-sticks made of it.
Mudib^zhi, if . i . a liar, deceiver ;
one who promises and does not
do.
Mudidlma, if. 2. stem of the water-
lily, made into snuff.
Mudiezhina, if . z . an heir, inheritor.
Mudfmakubtishu, if. 2. small-pox.
Mudimbultidi, if. i. a disbeliever,
sceptic.
Mudimbtiahi, if. i. a fool.
Mudfmi, If. I. one who cultivates,
hoer, gardener.
Mudfmo, If. 2. work.
Mudindizbi, if. i. a watcher, care-
taker, steward.
liudingudi, if. i. an examiner,
overseer.
Mudiniinishi, If . i. a proud person.
Mudisakamino ^ miuakamino,
If. I. a head-rest, pillow.
Mudfshi, n.i. Si big eater.
Mudfwo, If. I. a bad worker ; also a
bad person.
Mudiyi, if. i. a learner.
Mudizbj, If. I. a mourner.
Mudlifa, If. I. a person in danger of
death (or, mulufu.)
liudyadya, if. 2. a shrub, the root
of which is cooked in beer or
porridge and is said to stimulate
the appetite.
Mudyo, If. 2. an eatable.
Muevangele, if. i. /or. a writer of
one of the Gospels, or, Mwiva-
ngele.)
Muezhi, if. 2. a jaw-bone.
MuSzhi, If. 2. a waterfall.
Mlifa, If. I. a dead person.
Mufabaftiba, if. i. a fool.
Mnftibiu, If. I. a very short person,
a dwarf.
Muflifa, K. 2. a drizzling rain.
Mufiif6ma, if. 2. name of a tree,
bearing violet-like flowers. The
root is made into a medicine, of
which children are made to drink,
and in which they are washed, it
Ff
434
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
being thought it will make them
grow.
MufdkO) M. a. a charm, consisting
of a small bag, or a hollow brace-
let made of snake skin, and filled
with * medicine*.
Hufdxnba, «. i. a pregnant woman.
Mufdmpi, n, i. a raider, kid-
napper.
Muftindi, n, 2. name of a forest
tree.
Mufdndi, n. i. one who skins and
cuts up an animal, a butcher.
Muf&ndufiiiida, «. s. trail of a
snake.
Mufundnlnlu, » . a. a line, mark.
Mufangtishi, m. i. a weaned child.
Mufdni, n, i. one who loves, a
lover.
Mufdnka, n. i. one who misses in
shooting.
Mufdnwa, n. i. one who is loved,
a beloved.
Moitinzi, n. 2, a, herd of game, a
multitude of people, throng.
Mufattidi, n,i,a. deliverer, saviour,
rescuer.
Mufattishi, n, i. one who is saved,
delivered.
Mufdzhi, n. 1, a, blacksmith.
Mufiizhima, n. i. my fellow black-
smith; iniiftizhinoko, thy fellow
blacksmith, &c.
. Mufwafwi, fi. I. a short person,
dwarf.
Hufwafwi mu, prep, near to, in
the vicinity of.
Miifwebabach&zi, n, a. name of
a tree. See En^.-Ila Vocab,
Mufwebi, n, i. a smoker.
Mugabushi » znukabushi, n, i.
a madman, lunatic
Muhedene, n. i. for. (Suto, mo-
hedeiM ; Dutch, heiden), a
heathen.
Muhubn, fi. 3. a kind of willow.
Muhuldlu, n, 2. a long stretch
of cloth.
liuhunkbine, n, 2. a plant whidi
is supposed to keep off mosqui-
toes ; natives gather it and pot it
in their huts at night.
Muka*, prefix to many words and
proper names; indicates, the one
of, the wife of.
Mukaba, n. a. waist-belt, band.
Mukabiuhi, m. i. a madman.
Mukadi, m. i. a brave, fierce, angry
person.
Muk&ka, n, 2. name of a forest tree.
Mukaka, n, a. fresh milk.
Muk&lo, If. 2. a waterhole.
Mukambadshi, n, i. one who db-
courses, a preacher.
Muk&mu, H, 2. loaf, bread.
Mukamdfti,!!. i. a widow, widower.
Mukamufwi, n, i. wife of a jealous
person.
Mukamutwddi, ». z. a wife.
Mukamwenzhi^oko, n. i. the wife
of thy neighbour. Mukamwe-
nzhisA, his neighbour's wife,
&c.
Mukamw^zhi, n. i. name given to
a star which is seen very near the
moon, hence ' the moan's wife *.
Mukamwlni, if. i. an owner.
Muk6ndo, ff. i. a big or important
person, an elder brother, adult.
Mukindn, m. i. a coward.
Mokangablshi, if. 2. uncooked pap,
porridge.
Mukita, If. I. a lazy, idle person.
Mukatf, If. I. a sentry, watchman.
Mukati, loc.form aftheobsoL kati,
<idv, within, in the midst, inside,
in the centre.
Mukati ka, or xnn, prep, indde,
within.
Muk&zlii, If. I. woman, wife.
Mukazhixna, if. i. my fellow wife.
Mokazbina, n, t. her fellow wife.
Mukazhinoko, if. 1. thy feUow
wife.
Miikazhinokwabo, n, i. Uieir
fellow wife.
Mukazhinokwenu, if. i. your
fellow wife.
Mukaahinokwesa, if.i. oar fellow
wife.
Mukoa, n, 2. clan, £unily, genera-
tion.
MukobelaBB6ka, n, i. the secretary
bird.
Mukdfu, If. I. a lean persdn.
Mukdfti, n, a. a scar, wale.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
435
Mnkoka, n. a. trace of animal
dragged through bushes bj lion,
&c
Mnkdko, ^ i. a delayer.
MukolOy If. I. a person of the Kolo
tribe.
Mnkololo, If. 2. name of a tree, used
as firewood for chiefs ; it is said
that this tree indicates good soil.
Mukolotila, if. 2. small-pox.
Mukdlwi, If. I. a drunkard.
Mukdmba, if. 2. a forest tree.
Mnkombo, if. 2. kind, species.
Mnkdnibwe, if. i. a cock.
Mnkdmi, if. i. one who troubles,
annoys people.
Mtik6mpi, if. 3. the stalk of a
melon, &c
Miik6ndo, if. 2. a footprint, spoor.
Mtik6nico, It. 2. the clitoris feminae.
Miilf6Ti1ri, If. I. a reaper.
Mxik6no, ff. 2. the forearm ; trunk
of elephant
Mukdsbi, n, 2. the back of the neck.
Mukosol^ktitwi, if. i. a person
with part of his ear cut off.
MxLkdtrw; if. i. a water-rat.
Mukristi, if. i /cfr, a Christian.
Kaktia, tf. i. a white person, £uro*
pean.
Muktiba, if. 2. copper.
Muknku, if. 2. strong beer.
Kuknkatu, n. i. a hard man, e.g",
in bargaining.
Kuktila, If. 2. a game-path.
Miikiil&, If. 3. a short stretch of
cloth.
Muktilo, n. la, the waterbuck.
MnkambiEhi, n, i. one who is
always begging, a beggar.
Mukilimo, if. 2. a kind, species.
Kiik:6nga, if. 2. an alann ; ku uma
makanga, to sound an alarm.
Muktinku, if. 2. name of a tree.
Knklipa, if. 2. fresh milk.
Mnk^sa, if. 2. a plant from which
string is made (« Iiukuca).
Mokushi, If. 2. name of a tree,
stamping-blocks made of it
Mukdsa, if. 2. a morsel of bread.
Knkdta) if. 2. a piece of cloth just
long enough to go round the
waist.
Kukutabulongo, if. 2. name of a
tree.
Mukwabo (» nmkwa abo), n. i.
their father-in-lawl
Mukwako, it. i . thy &ther-in-law.
Mukwakwa, if. i. a wide road,
highway.
Mukwal^e, if. i. his father-in-
law.
Mukwangn, if . i. my father-in-law.
Mukwashi, n, 2. a family.
Mukwashi, if. 2. a big fire in a
kraal, around which the cattle
gather on cold nights.
Mukwaau, if. 2. a stabbing-spear.
Mukwe, If. I. son-in-law ; mukwe
wangu, my son-in-law.
Mukweka, if. i a, tobacco.
Mukwenu ( « mukwa e&u), your
father-in-law.
Mukwdsu (« mukwa esu), our
father-in-law.
Mukweau, if. i. our brother, our
sister — when brother speaks to or
of brother, or sister to or of sister.
Tudi o mukwesu, we are
brethren.
Mukwetlinga, if. i. one who has
married a chiefs daughter.
Muladilo, if. 2. a supper. Mula-
dilo wa mwami, the Lord's
Supper.
Mul&ka, If. 2. tongue.
Mulakumtine, if. i. a person with
a big mouth; name given to a
lazy person according to the pro-
verb, Mulakunmne ku kudya
kwalo udi kweto insana, In
eating is his strength.
Mal61a, if. i a. pi. bamulala, a
large tree-snake, said to be very
deadly.
Mulala, If. 2. name given to a white
and red ox.
Mnlalabnngu, if. 2. hair on the
chest and kbdomen ; name given
to a white ox with a black back ;
the Milky Way.
Multoibo, If. 3. a whitish clay
used for smearing bodies when
mourning.
Mul&mbwe, if. 2. a game-pit.
liul&mu, If. 3. a brother-in-law.
f2
43^
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Mulamwabo, n, i. their brother-in-
law.
Mulamwako, n, i. thy brother-in-
law.
Mulamwikwe, n, i. his brother-in-
law.
Mulamwansu, n, i. my brother-
in-law.
Mulamwenu, n, i. your brother-
in-law.
Mulamwesu, ». i. oar brother-in-
law.
Mulindu, n, a. a fanlt, <lebt, law-
suit.
Mulandushi, if. i. a ferryman.
Mulangu, fi. 2. a bell.
Mulanzhi, n, 2. termite.
Mulapi, n, 2. woman's apron, worn
in front.
Mulazho, n. 2. an order, command.
Mule, n, 2. a large bundle of grass
or sticks.
Mtileambezo, n. 2. name of a forest
tree, good timber.
MTilelab6ntu, fi. i. a mild, gentle,
kind person.
Mul^lwe, n. 2. recompense paid by
parents to people who have taken
charge of their children for a time.
Mtil^nia, ». I.' a repellent person.
Mtil^mbwe, n, 2. something added
to food to make it palatable.
Mul^mu, «. I. an honoured, digni*
fied, respected person.
Mul^nda, n, 2. a grave.
Mul^nga, fi. I. a lazy person.
Mul^nga, ;f. 2. a line stretched
across a house on which blankets
are hung, a game-path.
Mulenga^zbi, n, i. one who leads
astray, enticer.
Mnl^nzha, n, 2, a, kick ; ku diata
mulenzhA, to kick.
Mul^nzhi, n, 2. a kick ; ku sansa
mulenzlii, to kick.
Muleu, ff. 2. a milking-pail.
Mulevu, n, 2. a beard.
Mulezhi, n. i, a, feeder of people.
Muloboshi, ff. I. one who runs
away, absconds.
Mulola, n, 2. /or, (Suto, mulora,
ash), soap.
liulombe, n, 3. name of a tree,
with light, open timber, dark
heart, very good for joinery pur-
poses. Natives make canoes and
dishes of it
Mulombwana, n, i, a man.
Mulomo, n. 2. the orifice of the
mouth, beak of a bird. Milomo,
lips.
Mtddndo, n, i. one who is a good
worker.
Mulondo, n, i. a provident person.
Mulond6, ff. 2. a swamp, marsh.
Mul6nga, n, 2. a river.
Muldngo, n. 2. a covenant of friend-
ship, If. I. a friend.
Mulongwabo, n, i. their friend.
Mulongwako, n. i. thy friend.
Mulongwakwe, n, i. his friend.
Mulongwangn, n, i. my friend.
Mulon^wenu, n,i. your friend.
Mulonfifwesu, n, i. our friend.
Muldpwe, n. 1 a, pL bamulopwe,
name of a fish.
Mul6ta, n. 2. name of a tree some-
thing like the mupupu, used as
medicine.
Mulozhi, ff. I. a witch, wizard.
Mulozhi, n. 2. a whistle.
Mulu, fi. I. a deaf person.
Mulubululwa, n, 2. name of a tree.
Multidi, n. 2. barrel of a gun.
Muldko, ». 2. a seam, hem.
Mullilu, n, 2. name of a tree.
Mululwd, n. 2. name of a tree, root
used as a medicine for leprosy and
syphilis.
Mullilwe, n, 2. gall ; iaubilo dia
znullilwe, the gall bladder.
Multimbi, if. i. a thankful person.
Multimbu, «. i. a person of the
Balumbu tribe.
Mulumbu, n, i 0.//. bamulumbo,
name of a kind of fish.
Mulumbuluxnbu, n. i a, the roan
antelope.
Mulumbtbshi, n, i. a tax-gatherer.
Multime, n, i. one who is bitten.
Multuni, n. i. a husband.
Multimi, n, 1,9. biter.
Mulumikumf , if. 2. name of a tree,
light foliage. It is said that the
smell of its burning wood scares
away snakes.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
437
MulUnga, n. i. one who throws a
spear at a mark and hits.
Mtdtifni, «. 2. a stick nsed for beat-
ing any one. Riddle, nka ko lets
nitilu8u u ta umya ngombe ;
<ins, a snake.
Muluti, n, \for, (Sato, momti), a
teacher, missionary.
liulutiina, n, i. my fellow mis-
sionary, my colleague; muluti-
noko, thy colleague, &c.
Mulw^hi, n, i. a sick person.
Mulwi, If. 2. a heap of grass, clay,
or sticks.
Muma, If. 2. bank, edge, of a river.
Mtuna, ku, v, /. to shut the mouth.
Mum^ma, if. i. a person who looks
after his belongings, carefully
mends his clothes, &c.
Muxnba, if. 2. //. miumba, a fish
spear.
Miixnbadi, loc, form of ixubadi,
roundabout.
liumbadi xavL^prep, round, around;
ba la kala mumbadi mwakwe,
they are sitting around him.
Mumbele dlsk^prep, in the presence
of.
Mtimb6, loc, qfixDho, in the west.
Mmnbonina, n. i. his family ; e,g,
uswe tonse awa mumbonina,
we are all children of his family.
Miixnbonyokw&bo, if. z. their
family; sa ba bantu mumbo-
nyokwabo f are they of one
family ?
Mumbonyokwenu, if. i. your
fJEunily.
Mmnbonyokwesu, if. i. our
family.
Main6, if. 2. dew.
Mthni, If. I. a living person.
Mumlno, n, 2. throat, gullet.
Mtim6na, adv, just in there.
Miixn6ni, n. 2. light.
11111X111118, ku, V. t, to suck.
Mtimwe, if. 2. the body-smell of
people.
Muna-, prefix, the one of,
Munaisha, if. i. a person of my
place, my home.
Munakwabo, poss, phr, cl, i and 2.
their person or thmg.
M.xmt^kws^LOjposs.pAr.cl. i and 2,
thy person or thing.
Munakwakwe,/&i5./Ar. cl, i and 2,
his person or thing.
Munakwangu,/&jj./^r. cl, i aif^^2.
my person or thing, my relation,
friend.
Munakwenu, ^ss, phr, cl, i and 2,
your person or thing.
Munakweau, poss, phr, cl, i and 2,
our person or thing.
Munamazuba, if. prop, name given
to the Supreme Being.
MvLnamuzenu, if. i. your neigh-
bour, a person of your place.
Munamuxesu, n. i. a person of
our place, our neighbour.
Munamuzhabo, if. i. a person of
your place, your neighbour.
Munda, if. 2. a field, garden.
Mund&mbi, if. 2. name of a bush.
Iiund6ke, if. 2. a ramrod.
MvLudindi, if. 2. a large herd.
Munga, If. 2. name of a tree.
Mung'anga, if. i. a doctor.
Mung6, If. 2. a small pumpkin, a
spoon.
Mungwadi, if. I. a writer, scribe.
Mungwala, if. i. a giant.
Mungwimba, if. 2. liquid fat, oil.
Muni, n. 2, the liver.
Munfka, ku, v, t, to hold a light,
to give light, to illumine.
Munikila, ku, v, t, rel, munika, to
give light to or for.
Munimba, if. 2. long tail-feather of
a bird.
Munina, if. i. his younger brother.
Muninde, if. pro. name given to
the Supreme Being ; indicates one
who gives thunder and much rain.
Munlnga, if. 2. a variety of ground-
nut.
Munlni, what*s-its-name ? Used
when you are speaking of anything
of cl. 2 sing, and you don't know
or you forget its name.
Munislia, ku, v. t, cans, munika,
to show with.
Munji, adv, elsewhere.
Munkalank^nga, n, 2. a kind of
thorn-tree.
Munkanga, if. 2. the dying groan of
438
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
an animal; munyama wa boba
mtinkinga, the animal groans
its last : n. I CL B. kind of snake.
Mtinko, n, 2. stink, odour, stench.
ICunkolwe, n, a. a long deep trench
dug to keep spring-hares and
locusts out of a field.
ICunkombwela, n. a. the stem of
a calabash, i, e. the tapering end.
Munkondno, if. a. name of a tree»
dark heart.
Miink6xiya, n, a. gather made in
cloth.
ICunkdnBe, n, a. the marabont
stork.
Munkdahi, ». i. petty chief, indnna.
Monkdyo, if. a. name of a bush,
the root is added to porridge to
make it palatable.
Munktidi, n. a. a calabash.
Manktknbia, n, a. the leaven plant.
Munonkelo, if. a. the so-called
third stomach, the omasnm of
cattle and sheep.
Munsenda, if. a. large arrow-head
withont barbs.
MunshA, n. a. pestle, stick nsed for
stampii^ com in the inkidi ; ray
of the sun as seen at sunrise or
sunset
Miinahambwa, n. a. a nedclace of
beads.
Munshi, loc, ^inshi, as adv. after-
wards, behind.
Munshi di%prep, after, behind.
Munsha, u, a. urine.
Muntllmba, if. a. name of a fruit.
Muntaningo, n, a. pot clay.
Munt^mba, if. a. small calabash,
used as a sheath for arrows ; name
given to a paraffin tin.
Munt^mbwe, if. a. name of a forest
tree.
Mnntende, if. a. thick thatching-
grass.
Miint6, If. a. a tree with a white,
sticky sap, sap used as a glue ;
leaves are placed on the head as a
cure for headache.
Muntokoshia, n. a. name of a tree,
fruit eaten.
Miintu, If. I. a person. Often used
in an emphatic sense of a person
distinguished by some good
quality, just as we say, * He's a
man.*
Kuntoma, my fellow man ; mu-
ntunoko, thy fellow man» &c
Muntu suan, a good person.
Kuntunt^imba, if. a. name of a tree.
Mununia YB,y^ep. after, behind.
Muni&nfl^e, if. a. porcupine quill.
Mununiizhijit. i. one who ransoms,
redeems.
Munwe, n, a. a finger.
Munwlshi, if. i. one who gives to
drink, a butler, &c
Munyama, if. i. a head of game,
liunyati, if . i a. a buffalo. Idiom,
"Wa yasa munyatil You have
speared the buffalo » yoQ have
hit the nail on the head.
Muny 6ko, if. i . thy younger brother.
Mvinyokwabo, if. i. their younger
brother.
Miinyokw^nu, n. i. your younger
brother.
Kunyokw^su, if. i. our younger
brother.
Mnnyu, if. i. a greedy, selfish
person.
Munydmbwi, n, i a, the gnu.
Munza, if. a. daytime. Mtinsa
mwinimwini, noon.
Munzhi, if. a. a village.
Muok^shi, If. I. a spy.
Muoniiki, if. i. a kiag.
MuongoBhti, if. 1. a ytry old
person.
Muovbulwa, if. i. a destitute per-
son, pauper.
Mupimi, If. I. an old person, infirm,
helpless.
Mupazopazo, if. a. name of a tree,
hard, like znwaci.
Mupenshi, if. i. one in trouble.
Mupenzhima, my fellow sufferer ;
mupenshinoko, thy fellow suf-
ferer, &c.
Mupoliaa, if. i. far. (^?*) ^
policeman.
Mupomp68hi, if. i. one who is
continually travelling.
Muprofita, if. i. for. a prophet.
Mupuka, If. I. an insect, beetle.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
439
Eu sata mupuka, to have a
throbbing pain.
Mup6pu, n» 2, a, tree with thick
leaves, has a milky sap, which
causes great irritation if it reaches
the eyes.
Mupushi, If. I. a poor person.
Muposho, ft, 2, name of a tree.
Moa^ M. 3. a thing half full ; intu-
mba idi miui4, the basket is half
full.
Mu8&ka, n, i a. pL bamusaka,
wild dog.
Mua&ko, ftf. a. a walking-stick.
Musakamino, n, a. a head-rest,
pillow (mudisakamino).
MiuiUa, If. 2. a meeting of men or
women for playing, singing, or
talking.
MtuiOa, n. i. one possessed with a
spirit of divination, a prophet.
Mosala wa shinahima, the pro-
phet prophesies.
Mus^bna, n, i. my fellow initiate.
Men who were initiated at the
same time afterwards form a kind
of league ; one member addresses
another as musania.
Miis&Diba, n. 2. name of a kind of
tree.
Musamb^ahi, n, i. a pedlar, mer-
chant, trader.
Mnsambilo, n. 2. a place for wash-
ing and bathing.
Mtuamo, n, 2. medicine.
Mnsampaushi, n, \, z. scornful
person, mocker, one who de-
spises.
Musana, n, 2. the spine (? Tonga).
MuaaDgiUe, if. i. a very foolish
person.
MtuaBina, ». i. his fellow initiate.
Muaanoko, #f. i. thy fellow initiate.
Musanokwabo, ». i. their fellow
initiate.
Musanokwesu, ff. i. our fellow
initiate.
Muaanokwenu, it. i. your fellow
initiate.
Musansa, if. 2. wild grapes.
Muainaa, if. 2. a forest.
Husazhima, if. i. my friend, rela-
tion.
Muaaahina, ». i. bis friend, relation.
Kuaaahinoko, if. i. thy friend,
relation.
Muaazhinokwabo, if. I. their
friend, relation.
Moaaahinokwena, it. i. your
friend, relation,
liusaahinokwesa, if. i. our friend,
relation.
Muad, n. 2. name of a tree, used for
making walking-sticks and spear
shafts.
Musedia-y/r^jr to many words, as
follow, it indicates ' namesake * ;
a person is not allowed to speak
hisowniuine,hence, if speaking
to or of a person bearing the same
name with himself, he will say,
znusediangn, my namesake. So
with the names of one*s father, &c.
Musediabalna, if. i. her mother*s
namesake, f . c* she has the same
name as her mother.
Miuediachisha, if. i. my uncle's
namesake.
Musediama, n, i. my mother's
namesake.
Mutediangu^ if. i. my namesake.
Musediata, if. i. my father's name-
sake.
Mtuediaushe, if. i. her or his
father's namesake.
Musefti, If. I a. an eland.
Maa^ke, if. 2. kernel of nut, the
glans penis.
Muaekese, if. 2. name of a tree.
Mua^la, If. 2. a generation.
Mua^me, if. 2. long grass used for
making mats, also mats made of it.
Masempdalii, n. i. a porter, carrier.
Moa^mu^ if. 2. a pole for supporting
the roof of a house.
Musena, if. 2. a hole, gap, .in a
fence, &c.
Musendo, if. 2. a hammock.
Muaenga, ». 2. a sandy place.
Muaenzhi, n, i. name of a small
animal.
Mua^se, if. i. a fool.
Musese, n. 2. name of a tree, good
charcoal and stamping- blocks
made of it.
Muses^lio, If. 2. a ramrod.
440
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Mus^sa, n. a. a kind of potato,
edible tnber.
MushAla, If. I. an orphan.
Mushangi, ». i. a sower.
liushibi, n. a. name of a tree.
Mushidi, fi. 2. a powder.
Muflhidishi, n. 2. a physician.
Mushietdngo, n. i. a blackened
stump, a very black person.
Mushfka, n, 2. something added to
food to make it nice.
Muflhika, n. 2. a salty encrustation.
Mushikidi, n, 2. name of a tree.
Mushilo, n, 2 the end, completion
of a thing.
Muflhimbi, ff. i. a young girl, i, e,
before puberty.
liuflhinibuluko, n. 2. far. (Zulu,
tunsombuluko, the unfolding)
Monday.
Mushinda, n. 2. yolk of egg, pith
of reed, &c.
Mushlngo, n. 2. the front of the
neck.
Muflhingombe, n, a. a herd.
liushini, n, 2, b. circlet of beads
put around the head, crown.
liushinkem&twi, n. i. a deaf
person.
Miuhinko, n, a. a pole for closing
a gateway.
Mushfnshi, n, a. a children's play-
thing, made of grass.
Muflhinshi, ». 2. a dress, petti-
coat.
liushlnza, n, 2. gravy, broth, soup.
MuflliiiLze, n, a. darkness. Mu-
shinze wo ombuluka, the dark-
ness is breaking.
Mushlnzo, If. a. a journey.
Moahisa, if. a. the tendo Achillis.
Mushlshi, If. a. the round shank of
a spear head.
liushiwe, n. a. name of a tree, bark
good for string, also == znushu.
Mushizbi, if. a. wind broken down-
wards.
Muahdbo, if. a. a tribe. (Seems to
have also a reference to the dialect
of a tribe.)
Mushdngo, if. a. a cartridge.
liuahdaho, if. a. a cartridge.
liuahu. If. a. moistness. Inahi idi
Irwete musliu, the ground is
moist, i,g, after rain.
linsimnna, if. a. the moon of
January.
Muaolozhi, n, i. a leader, fore-
runner, predecessor.
Musolesdii, If. I. one who tries.
liusompe. If. a. name of a fruit.
Muflondi, if. a. a seer, diviner.
MtLBondoshi, if. i. a madman.
Musonge, if. i. a young adult.
MtLBongo, If. I. a wise person.
Musongozlio, If. a. a sharp stick for
digging a hole; also the point of
such a stick.
Muflonta, if. a. obstinacy, self-will.
Musonzhi, if. 1 . seer, diviner.
Musotoshi, If. I. a transgressor.
Musozha, If. a. cooked maize, i,e,
not previously stamped.
Mu86zhi, If. a. a tear of the eye.
Mus6zhi, If . I. a comforter, consoler.
Musii, If. I. a sad, sorrowful person.
Musuba, If . a s mutiba, a bowl,
basin.
Muauke, if. i. one's first husband,
or wife.
Muflliku, If. a. a horn used in cup-
ping.
MuBtikwe, if. a. a mane.
Muflundi, if. i. a barren woman.
Mustindu, if. a. a leech.
Mustine, if. i. an ox.
Musungudi, if. i. a leader, com-
mandant.
Musunte, if. a. a big bundle of
grass.
Musutelo, If. a. dry cattle-dung.
Muswazhi, if. i. a visitor.
Muflwexna, if. i a. pi. bamoswema,
a long light-coloured snake.
Musweya, if. i. a country with
trees and only very short grass.
liuta. If. a. a loan.
Mutaba, if. a. name of a tree, juice
used for birdlime.
Mutabi, If. a. a branch, bough.
liutaka, If . 1 . a squanderer, waster,
prodigal.
Mutaka, if. a. a small kind of hoe
used only by chiefs wife or child.
Mutala, If. a. spoor, footprint, game-
path.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
441
Mutalabala, n.prop, name giYen to
the Supreme Being ; signifies the
One who can do what none other
can.
liutaxnftL, i». a. a moist place.
Mutandachilashi, ». i. a wild dog.
Name given to a person who is
very persevering, persistent in
doing something) or in pursuing
some object.
HutangalaBhi, n, 3. no sing, self-
righteousness. ITdi kwete xnuta-
ngalazhi, said of one who boasts
of his own goodness and despises
other people as being bad.
Mutanti, n. 3. a cross-beam, a pole
fixed between two uprights.
Mutantwa, n, 2. name of a tree.
liutanshi, «. i. a first person, first
arrival, firstborn.
Mutatula, «. a. a whip, sjambok.
Mutavlm, ». i. a stingy, niggardly,
ungenerous person.
lintelo, If. 2»for, (Suto, Mothelo),
hut tax.
liutembo, n. 2. name of a forest tree.
Muteme, n, a. name of a tree,
bears a large peach-like fruit.
Mutendu, n. 2. a long strip of meat
cut for drying.
Muteng^uba, n, 2. the fierce
shining of the sun at midday.
Mutepaudi, i>. i. a tempter.
Mutepaoahi, n, i. one who is
tempted, seduced.
Mutate, n, 2. a kind of pipe.
Muteu, M. I. a thief.
Mnteshi, n, i. one who sets traps,
trapper.
Mutiba, i». 2. a bowl, basin.
Mutmdi, n, 2. a kind of creeper, the
root of which is used to suffocate
Dees.
Mutobo, n, a. name of a tree, fruit
eaten.
Mutolo, ». I. a lazy person.
Mutombio, n. a. a stick used for
taking fat out of a pot.
Mutondo, n, 2. name of a tree ;
wood used for making axe shafts ;
the flowering of this tree is taken
as a sign that it is time to search
for honey.
Mutondo, n, 2. a tabooed thing.
Mutonga, ». i. an individual of the
Tonga (or Toka) tribe.
Mutonga, n, 2. tobacco.
Mutongabofti, n.2, a shrub, the
root of which is used as a medi-
cine to produce fertility in women.
Mutubiakaldmo, n. 1 a. the roan
antelope.
Mutukuta, n. 2. perspiration.
Muttunbe, n.i. & female animal.
Muttimbu, ». i. a woman carrying
a child.
Muttimwa, n, i. one sent, a mes-
senger.
Muttindu, if. i. a hairy person, one
who grows quickly.
Muttlini, If. I. a selfish person.
Muttinta, if. 2. a corpse, carcase.
Mutliya, if. i. Lumbu name for the
mushiwe tree.
Mutw&di, If. I . one who marries or
is married.
Mutwanga, ». i. a servant.
Mutwashiroa, if. i. my fellow
child-in-law. When two men,
e.g. marry sisters, and so become
one man's sons-in-law they call
each other or refer to each other
by this name.
Mutwasbini^a, if. i. his fellow
child-in-law.
Mutwashinoko, if. i. thy fellow
child-inlaw.
Mutwasbinokwabo, if. i. their
fellow child-in-law.
Mutwashinokwenu, if. i. your
fellow child-in-law.
Mutwazhinokwe8U,if. i. ourfellow
child-in-law.
Mutwi, If. a. a head.
Muvhtibi, If. I. a rich person.
Muvbtini, if. i. a helper, deliverer.
Muvhwi, If. 2. an arrow.
Muvumini, if. i. a believer.
Muvwimi, if. i. a hunter.
Muvwizhi, If. I. a backbiter, slan-
derer.
Muwezhi, if. i. a hunter. Muwe-
zhima, my fellow hunter, &c
Muwo, If. 2. wind.
Muyayi, if. i. a murderer.
Mliye, n. 2. soot
442
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Muy^, M. 2. a thing done purposely.
"Wa Chita muye, he does on pur-
pose.
Muyemba, n. 2. a cloth big enough
to cover the whole body.
Muyeye, n. 2. tail of a fish.
Muyi, n. 2. nit, egg of louse.
Muy6ba, n. 2. a continuous rain.
PL used of a set-in rain of two or
three days.
M\xy6bOy If 2. a kind of reed.
Muyoka, «. i. a snake. (Name
given to a snake in songs only.)
M^yu, ft. 2. name of a tree and fruit.
Muza, n.i. an expert, one who
knows his business.
Muz&la, n, 2. name of a tree.
Muz&nda, m. 2. a root, fang of a
tooth.
Miuandi, n, i. one who likes,
desires.
liuzangadishi, if. i. an outcast,
exile.
Muzangi, ». i. a witness.
liozashi, n, i. a builder.
Muzembi, «. 1. a sentry.
Muzemuzhi, m. i. a carrier.
liuzenge, m. 2. a bundle of dung
wrapped up in grass ; burnt in the
burrow of an animal to scare it out.
Muz^nza, ». 2. a tassel.
Muz^zhi, If. I. a fisherman.
Muz^zo, n. 2. thought, desire.
MuzMle, If. I. a child ; a man's
own child, as distinct from bana,
which may include his people
generally, dependants and slaves.
Muzhdzbi, if. i. parent.
Muzhazhima, if. i. my fellow
parent. This is applied by a man
or woman to another man or
woman, whose children are inter-
married.
Muzhazhina, if. i. his fellow
parent
Muzhazhlnoko, if. i. thy fellow
parent.
Muzhazhinokwabo, if. i. their
fellow parent.
Muzhazhinokwenn, if. i. your
fellow parent.
Muzhazbinokwesu, if. i. our
fellow parent.
Muzhichema, it. i. my fellow slave.
Muzhiohanoko, thy fellow slave,
&c
Muzhidishi, if. i. a person who
has wandered, a wanderer.
MuzMke, If. I. a slave.
Kuzhile, if . i . a sister-in-law.
Generally used in the //.
MiizhiiBblla-ba-mwika,«f. 2. name
given to beans on account of their
constipating qualities.
Muzhlmo, If. I. ancestral spirit.
Muzhlnga, if. 2. noise of a falling
person or object.
Muzhinahi, if. 2. pith of sweet reed
spewed out after being chewed.
Muzbiu, If. 2. a load carried on a
stick upon the shoulder.
Miizbula, If. 2. name of a tree.
Muzkuzhabo, if. i. their graod-
child.
Muzkuzbako, if. i. thy grand*
child.
Huzkuzbakwe, if..i. his grand-
child.
Muzkuzhangu, if. i. my grand-
child.
Muzkuzhenii, if. i. your grand-
child.
Muzkuzheso, if. i. our grand-
child.
Muzobodi, If. }. a keeper, preserver.
Mozoka, If. I. a snake.
ICuzonzwe, n. la. pL bamuson-
8we, name of a fi^.
Muzovu, n. I a. //. bamuzovu, an
elephant.
Muzulum&twi, if. i a. the Kudu.
Muziimo, If. 2. a dry place.
Muzumu-azn^nBo, if. i. a joyful,
cheerful person.
Muzumumozo, if. i. an ungodly
person, hard-hearted person.
Kuztinde, if. i. a defeated person.
Muzundi, if. i. a conqueror,, victor.
Muztine, if. i. a bird.
Mwa, pers. pro, 2 p, pi. yoa.
Mwa, part, used with kn ziUa.
Ibandadie zula xnwenzhi mwa,
the valley is quite full of water.
Mwaba, n. \a. pi. bamwaba, a
jackal.
Mwadi s ma a di.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
443
Mwafa, If. 3. inside comer of square
house.
Mwaika, ku, v. £. to clear away (of
the clouds or mist).
MwaXla, ku, v. t. to rub a stone on
a skin in order to prepare it.
Mwaisha, ku, v,t, to dismiss an
assembly.
Mwaka, n, 3. a year.
Mwakadi, n. 2. last year.
Mwako, «. 2. a kloof» a comer.
Mwftla, ». 2. a big stone, rock.
Applied to a person who never
tires or gets sick ; a hardy person.
Mwala, n, 2. a mane.
Mwalala, n, 2, name of a tree.
Mwalangane, n. la. a kind of
small animal.
Mwalu, M. I. an elder.
MwambidiBhi, ». i. an adTOcate, a
mediator.
Mw&mbo, n. 2. a language.
Mw&znbO) ». 2. a band, Ixit, girdle.
Mwami, if. i. a chief, lord.
Mwamu, n, i. fornicator, harlot
Mwamwatika, ku, v.t, to fill a
basket to overflowing.
Mwana, m. i. a child. Mwana oma-
hiina, If. I. a bastard. Mwana
kaauanina, his lover, paramour.
Mwana mnfonenoko, thy close
friend, beloved. Mwana mnftme-
nina, his close friend, beloved.
Mwana-mnlanda, if. i. name given
to a musonshi.
Mwanankuku, if. i. a chicken.
Mwanda, if. 2. a hundred.
Mwandabanyama, if. i. name
given to a lion.
Mwandu, if. 2. a kind of drum.
Mwangampande, if. 2. name of a
tree.
Mwangu, in my place, my home.
Mwangula, «. 2. name of a tree ;
hard heart, resembles Muse.
Mwani, if 2. the mopani-tree.
HwanioUbgu. ». i my jroongei
brother. Mwaniohl[ko, if. i. thy
younger brother.
Mwanlche, ». i. a youth, young-
ster.
Mwanza, if. 2. ague, headache. Ku
Bhangainamwanza,to have ague.
Mwansa, ?name of a person.
Frav, Mwana* adi nnkile ku
■hia milandu kubi, Mwanza left
leaving a bad fault behind him ;
used to rebuke people ; one must
not commit a fault in passing
through a village, or must not
leave a place having acted badly.
Mw&nBhi, If. I. a disagreeable,
quarrelsome person.
Mw&nzho, If. 3. a large spear used
for killing elephants, &c.
Mw6nawa, if. 2. name of a tree ;
timber hard and useful
Mwao, If. 2. a yawn. Muntu wa
dya mwao, or wa ya mwao, the
person yawns.
Mw^ta, n. 2. a heap of firewood.
Mwatuzbo, If. 2. entrance to an
enclosure, gateway.
Mwaya, ku, v, t to scatter, de-
molish. Ku mwaya ng'anda, to
demolish a house.
Mwazhi, n, 2. the ordeal medicine.
Mw^ka, kUy v,i, to shine (of a
light).
Mwela, If. 2. a heap, division of
grain.
Mw61a, n, 2. an apron worn by
women.
Mwelanae, if. i. a homeless person,
a vagabond.
Mwemb^zhi, if. i. a shepherd,
herdsman ; young man of about
sixteen or seventeen.
Mwemvu, if. 3. short, new, rich
grass.
Mw6na, ku, v, i, to smile.
Mwendeahi, it. i. a governor, ruler.
Mwendo, if. 3. a leg ; hind-leg of
animal.
Mwfindo, If. 1. a person who goes
about trading.
Mwenje, if. 3. the moon of
November.
Mwenuka, ku, v, i. to be slighlly
opened.
Mwenuna, ku, v. /. to open
slightly.
Mwenaha, if. 2. anything taken by
a guest to those he goes to see.
Mwenzhenzhi, if. i. a vagabond.
Mwenshi, if. i. a guide, driver.
444
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Mwenzhina, n,i, his companion,
neighbour.
Mwenzhinoko, n, i. thy com-
panion, neighbour.
Mwenzbinokwabo, n. i. their
companion, neighbour.
Mwenzhinokwenu, n. i. your
companion, neighbour.
Mwenzhinokwesu, n. i. our com-
panion, neighbour.
Mwenzu, n.i, a traveller, guest,
stranger.
Mwenzuma, n, i. my fellow travel-
ler, my companion, neighbour.
Mweto, n. 2. the winter.
Mweto, n, 2. part of a bird-trap,
the stick planted as a spring.
Mwezhi, n, 2, a moon, month.
Mwezhi wa zhuka, the moon is
full. Mwezhi mwituba, the
moon in the first quarter.
liwi, num. one; indef, ad/, one,
other.
Mwidishi, n, i. &n imitator.
Mwiko, n, 2. tail of an animal pre-
pared as a fly-whisk.
Mwimbii ». i. a singer.
Mwixnbi, ». 2. a trench.
liwimbididi, n. 2, a. rut, such as
that made by a wagon wheel.
Mwina » mu ina, there is none.
liwinako, n, i. thy wife.
Mwinakwe, n. i. his wife.
-mwinana, num. one only.
Mwinangu, n. i. my wife.
Mwindi, n, i. the shin, wheel of
wagon.
Mwindi = mu ndi di.
Mwini, n. 1. a master, a true
one. Ndiwe o mwini, you are
your own master, it 's your affair.
Mwini, n. 2. handle of hoe or axe.
Mwino, n. 2. salt.
Mwinzho, ». 2. a door-fastening.
Mwinzo, n.i. B. spring of water.
Mwishi, n. i. a cook.
Mwiwa, n. i. a nephew.
Mwiwabo, n. 1. their nephew.
Mwiwako, n. i. thy nephew.
Mwiwakwe, n. i. his nephew.
Mwiwenu, n. i. your nephew.
Mwiwesu, n, 1. our nephew.
Mwiyi, ». I. a teacher.
Mwijriwa, n, i.//. balwa, a pupil,
disciple.
Mwizeulu, adv, above, in the air.
Myonga, ku, v, u to have colicky
pains^ Mala a myonga, the
bowels pain.
ST. Pronounced as in English.
W (i) cop, part, cl, 8. sing. ; e.g,
ITimpongo, it is a goat Also
cop, part, cl, 9 and ^a. The n
coming before the 1 changes it into
^\e.g, Ndnmo, it is a razor.
{2)pers.pro. i /. sing, I, me, pre-
fixed to verbs. See chap, v, sect, r.
BTa (i) imperative part,\ e,g, Na
mu bebe, repent ye.
(2) prefix to female propernames^
* the mother of.*
(3) interrogative part, \ e,g, Nau
le nta P Do you call me ?
(4) conj, when ; either, or.
Nabukdndo, n, i a, principal wife.
This is the name given to the first
wife of a polygamist ; the second
is called ITabukando mushonto ;
the third Nabushonto.
Nabunga, n, i a. name given to the
eland.
ITabushdnto, n. i a, the newest wife
of a polygamist.
ITabut^ma, n, 1 a. unmarried person,
old maid, widow.
ITabwaniche, n,ia. inferior wife
=■ Nabushonto.
STabwinga, n.ia, a bride.
ZTachiblnde, n. 1 a, bridegroom.
ITaohlndwe, n. la, the Oribi.
Nachinkwa, n. 1 a. small-pox.
Nachisandula, n, i a, a concu-
bine.
ITachis^kwe, n,ia, spur-winged
goose.
XTadinkw^nza, n,ia, a very large
canoe, a ship.
STainja, n, 1 a. the Lechwe.
Nakadindo, n.ia. a young un-
married woman ; virgin.
STakafwifwi, n. i a, the OribL
STakakddio, n.ia, 9. stork.
irakans&kwe, n, 1 a, the secretary
bird.
Nak&8ha| n, 1 a. the Duiker.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
445
Naknfyinwa, ii. i a. a faYourite wife
or child.
NaliUkDge, n,ia. a kind of white
bird » Shiliintuba. Much es-
teemed by the Balumbu.
Nalubdtu, n, la, a variety of
tobacco or snuff.
NalnnkaUmba, n. la, trigger of
gun.
Naluntfimbwe, n. la. a chame-
leon.
Naliivwi, n,ia, SL reedbuck.
Naluw^wa, n.ia. name given to
the zebra.
Namak^ti, n, i a, tobacco.
Namakunki^e, n.prop, name given
to the Supreme Being.
Namant^zi, n.\a, a woman (or
cow) who bears children which
all die, regarded as a useless
creature.
Namashizlia, n,ia, a very heavy
rain.
Namattidi, n, i a. name of a tree,
sap used as medicine for bwele.
Nantatwangabo, n, i a, their mis-
tress.
Namatwangako, n, la, thy mis-
tress.
Namatwangakwe, n. i a, his mis-
tress.
Namatwangangu, n, i a, my mis-
tress.
Namatwangenu, n,ia. your mis-
tress.
Namatwangesu, n.ia, our mis-
tress.
B'ambatalala. n.ia, name of a bird
(s Iiukiixnba).
Nambuti P interr, is it not so ? Or
how is it ?
Nambw^nga, n. i a. the zebra.
Nam^nzi, n, i a, strong beer.
Nam^se, ». i <7. a name given to the
Supreme Being — * the rain giver.*
yaTniffinda, n,\a. a name given
to an axe the shaft of which is
covered with copper; carried by
the bakwetunga.
Namuclieohddi, n, i a, name of a
game.
ITamuohipwiohipwi, if . i a. a kind
of scarlet and black seed, very
hard, used by children in a game
called kushanga.
Namudilakusliobway n, i a, name
of a beetle ; it is rubbed on the
gums of children to facilitate the
cutting of the teeth.
Namuka'akanyemo, n. i a. a plant
used as a relish with food.
Namukukwe, n, i a, the domestic
fowl.
Namula, if . i a. ? earth-worm.
ITamandelele, n.\a, a white
spider's nest, eggs are hatched in it
Namundilo, n, i a. a kind of red
bead.
Namiinkulunga, n. la. a plant
eaten as a relish with food.
Namunkwize, n, i a, a spring-
hare.
Naxnunweniuiiwe, n, i a, name
given by children to the fourth
finger.
Namusliolonia, fi. i a. a person,
animal, or thing which cannot
travel fast ; appli^ to the launches
and ponts on the Kafue.
Namutekam^nzhi, if . i a. the
mantis.
Namutendele, n.ia.z. bicycle.
Namutentaula, if. i a, the Kudu.
Namut6mpo, if. i a. maize planted
late and eaten green after the
ordinary harvest.
Namuw^e, if. la. the crested
crane.
Sramuzhingididi, if. i a. the mason
wasp.
ITamuzhiwe, n.ia.a, fool.
Namuzungula, n. la. the ' lily
tree *; a tree with very large seed
pods.
N6na, ku, v,f. to anoint oneself,
rub fat on one's body.
Nani^tla, ku, v. i. to walk stealthily,
on tiptoe.
ZTanamba, ku, v, i, to go stealthily,
as a cat.
ITanambislia, ku, v.t, int nan-
amba, to go very stealthily.
UTanamina, ku, v. t, to reach up as
high as possible.
ITanana, ku, v, i, to be stuck, as an
axe in a tree.
446
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ndnga, ku, v. t. to take away from
somebody, with or without consent.
Nangandamuleza, n, 10. name
given by children to the first finger.
Nangila, ku, v. L to take away on
behalf of another, to relieve by
carrying another's load,
Nanika, ku, v, U caus, nana, to
anoint, smear fat on, somebody.
19'anikila, kn, v, t, caus. rel. nana,
to anoint another for somebody.
Nanshizha. n, i a. a very heavy rain.
Nannndwe, n, i a, the chameleon.
Nanzeli, n. 1 0. the Pallah.
Nanzha, kn, v, t, caus, nanga, to
cause or help take away.
19'cha, gen, part, cL 7. sing, it is of.
Nchi (i) cop, part. cL 7. sing, it is.
(2) rel, pro, cl. 7. sing, which.
(3) conir, » ndi ohi, I am still.
Nohioho, subs, pro, ind, it. See
chap, z;, sect, 2 b,
Nohichona, subs, pro, indie, emph,
cl, 7. sing, it is just it.
19'da, pers, pro, \p, sing, I.
K'di ( I ) pers. pro, \p. sing, L
(2) cap. part, cl, 3. sing, it is.
(3) rel. pro, cl, 3. sing, which.
(4) adv. when ( = ni).
Ndia, gen, part, cl, 3. sing, it is of.
NdidieP interr, pro, 3. cl, sing,
which is it f
Ndidio, subs, pro^ ind, it. See
chap, Vf sect, 2 b,
ITdidiona, subs, pro, ind, emph. 3.
cl, it is just it. As an adv, just
then, immediately.
Ndime, subs, pro. indie, ip, sing.
It IS I.
Ndimena, subs, pro, indie, emph, it
is I (particularly).
Kdimeni f interr. pro. who am 1 1
Ndimwe, subs, pro, indie, 2/. pi,
it is you.
Ndimwena, subs, pro, indie, emph,
2p, pi, it is you (particularly).
Ifdimweni P interr. pro. whoareyou ?
Ndiwe, subs, pro, indie, 2p, sing,
it is thou.
Ndiwena, subs, pro, indie, emph.
%p sing, it is thou (particularly).
VdiweniP interr. pre, 2p, sing.
who art thou \
ITdn (i) cop, part, el, 9, ga, sing.
It IS.
(2) rel, pro, cl, 9, 90 sing, which.
ITdulo, subs, pro, ind, cl. 9 and ga,
sing, it is just it. See chap, Vy
sect, 2 b,
Ndulona, subs, pro, ind, emph, cl,
9 and 9 0. it is just it.
Ndumbana, n. 1 0. a young man.
Ndwa, gen, part, cl, 9, 9 a. sing, it
is of.
Ifd, particle used with ku tontola
and ku dinsa; e,g, menshi a
la tontola n6, the water is quite,
very, cold. A ma dinse n6y be
ye very quiet.
-ne, num, four. Bantu bo-ne,
four people.
Nemba, ku ; ITembula, ku, v, t,
to take a little porridge, &c, out
of a pot
ITenga, ku, v, t, to cut, gash.
Nengesa, ku; Nengesela, ku, v, i,
to be cut almost through; of any-
thing bulging at either end and
constricted in between (as a
wasp); e,g, isamo dia nsnse-
sela» the tree is cut almost
through, and likely to fall.
Nengulula, ku, v,t, rep, nenga,
to cut round, as a hide in making
leims, or as grass when finished
thatching.
Nengulwila, ku, v,t, rep, rel,
nenga, to cut round for.
Nenzha, ku, v, t, caus, nenffa^ to
cause or help to cut
ITetuka^ ku, v,i, to be leavened.
Inshima ya netuka bunMna,
the bread is leavened.
ig'etusha, ku, v,t, caus, netoka,
to leaven.
-netuahi, adj, leavened.
Ng. Pronounced as in finger.
JXg', Pronounced as in singer.
Ifgi, particle used with mubotn;
e,g, munzhi mubotu ngA, the
village is very good.
Nga,^«. part, cl 3» 4f 6> 9«-//.
they are of.
ITgadi «■ ng ( » a) a di.
Ngadie P interr, pro, d, 3^ 4, 5, 90.
//. which are they !
'^
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
447
-ngai f interr. pro, how many ?
Bantu bo-ngai ? how many
people ?
Kgao, subs, pro, ind, cl, 3, 4, 5. Q a.
//. them. See chap, v, sect, 2 b,
Ngodi Bi ngf^ u di.
IfgOka, Ira, 2^. f . to buzz, as bees ;
to chatter, of a number of people.
Ngombi, n.ia,VL plant, the root of
which is used as an emetic.
Kgomena, ku, v.t, to button,
fasten np.
Ifgona, subs, pro, indie, emph, cl,
3» 4» 5> 9 <>• //• it is jast they ; also
locative, just here, &c.
Kgonao, subs, pro, loc, just there.
As c^v, just then, immediately.
Ngongwa, n.\a, a kind of insect
very destructive to the maize.
Ngu (i) cop. peart, cl, I and 2. sing.;
(3) poss, pro, \p, sing, my, mine.
Prefixed by gen. parts, mtmzhi
wa-ngii, my village.
(3) rel.pro, cl, I and 2, sing, and
3, 4, 5, ga.pL which.
Kgadie f interr, pro. cl. 1 and a.
sing, which is it, or he T
Ngfukela, Viphrasej here it is finished
(of an affair).
Ngulube, n, i a. wild pig.
Kgombi, n, i a, name of a black
kind of bird.
Vgongumwina, ku, v, t. to swallow
«t a gulp, to gulp down.
Sgunguta, ku, v. t. to hum a tune.
Ngoni P interr, pro, who is it !
who is he I
Ngonika, ku, v. i, to travel alone.
Nguni-iigiini, pro. whosoever.
ITgao, subs, pro, ind, 2, cl. sing, it.
See chap, v^ sect, 2 b,
ITguwena, subs. pro. indie, cl, 1 and
3. sing, it is just he, it is just
it
ITgwa, gen. part, cl. i and 2, sing.
it is of.
ITgwala, ku, 7f. t, to write.
B'gwidi ^ ITgu i di.
-Ni ? interr. pro. who f whom ?
Kgunil who is it! Mbo bani?
who tJt they? Kwa chitwa
kwani t by whom was it done !
Wa ke enda oniP with whom
did yon go f
Ki, conj, although, though, when.
Ni- . . . \iVkfConj, either, or; neither,
nor. Pers. pros, are inserted be-
tween ni and ba. See chap, x,
sect, 3.
Niaba, or naba, ecnj, nor he {cL i).
Ifiba, conj. nor it, nor they {el, 8.
sing. 2 pi.),
Nibuba, conj. nor it {el. 4. sing.),
19'ichiba, conj. nor it {cl. 7. sing.),
Nidiba, conj, nor it (cl. 3. sing.).
IS'idipasa, adv. at sunrise.
Nikaba, eon/, nor it {cl, 6. sing.).
Nikuba, conj, nor it {cl, 5. sing).
Nikubabobo, conj'. nevertheless.
Niluba, conj', nor it {cl. 9, 9 a. sing.).
Nimba, conj. nor I (i/. sing,).
19'imuba, conj'. nor ye (3/. //.).
Kina, suffix forming enclitic posses-
sive, 3/. sing, his fellow. Musa-
nina, his fellow initiate.
Ifini, so-and-so {pi. banini).
Mwan'a nini, the child of so-
and-so.
Nishiba,^^^' northey (<:/. 7, 8,9.//.).
19'ituba, con/, nor we, nor they (i/.
pi. andcl. 6, pi,).
Niuba (or nuba) , con/, nor thou (3/.
sing,).
NJa, gen. part, cl, 8. sing, it is of ;
cl, 2, pi, they are of.
Nji (i) cop. part. 2. el, pi. it is, they
are. ITjiminzhi, they are villages.
(3) rel.pro. cl. 8. sing, and cl. 2.^
which.
-nji, ineUf, adj, other, different.
Bantu ba chishi obinji, people
of another nation.
NJila, ku — ku injila, to enter.
•nji-nji, adj. much, many.
Njiona, subs. pro. subs, indie, cl, 8.
sif^, and cL 2,pL it is just it.
Njoloma, ku, v. i. to be dear,
pure, especially of water, but also
used of people in a moral sense.
Ifjolomishisha, ku, v. t, caus, rel.
njoloma, to purify for another.
Xfjolomya, ku, v. t. caus. njoloma,
to purify.
ITka (i) gen. part, el, 6. sing, it b oC
(3) contr, s adi ka.
448
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Nkako, subs, pro, indie* cL 6. sing.
it. See chap, v, sect, id,
mcftkona, suds. pro. indie, emph. el.
6. sing, it is just it.
Kkambo, n. i a. grandparent.
Hkombwe, n, la, name of the
baboon clan.
mcu (i) cop. part. el. 5, 6. sing, it is.
(2) rel. pro. cl. 5, 6. sing, which.
Blrako, subs, pro, indie, el. 5. sing,
it See chap, v, sect. 2 b.
Slnikona, subs, pro, indie, emph,
cl, 5. sing, it is jast it.
Nkwa, gen, part. el. 5. sing, it is of.
TXok.oixk, ku, z^. f. to bleed from the
nose.
Xfoznona, ku, v. t. to select, choose.
Ku nomona dino, to knock out
a tooth as is the custom of the
Bandnwe.
XToxnozha, ku, v. t, eaus. nomona,
to canse or help to choose.
Ifongotezha, ku, v, t. to say in a
low voice, to whisper.
Nonka, ku, v. i. to suck (of chil-
dren, calvesi &c.).
Nonozha, ku, v. t. to arrange, put
straight.
Nonsha, ku, v. t, eaus. nonks, to
suckle.
ITotela, kn, v.t.for. (Suto, notlela),
to lock.
ITslia, gen, part, el, 7, 8, 9. //. they
are of.
ITshi, cop. pari, cl. 7,8,9. pi. they are.
Nshisho, subs. pro. indie, cl. 7, 8, 9.
pi. them. See chap, v, sect. 2 b.
Ifshishona, subs, pro. indie, emph,
el. 7, 8, 9. //. it is just they.
Kswd, part, used with ku zuma ;
e.g. menzhi a zuma-nsw^, the
water is quite dried up. Znma
may be omitted from the sen-
tence ; e. g, nda ka ya ku langa
menzhi. Nsw& I I went to
look for water. Quite dry I
Nt& I part, used with ku znma ;
e.g. I zuma-nt& I it is very hard I
ISltskf contr. = ndi ta.
Nti a ndi ti, I was about ; e.g. nti
mu me, I was about to hit him.
ISrtu (i) cop. part. cl. 6, pi. they are.
(2) rel. pro. el. 6. //. which.
Ntnto, subs, pro. indie, el. 6. pi,
them. See chap, v, sect, 2 b.
Ntntona, subs. pro. indie, emph. el.
6. //. it is just they.
TStwa,, gen, part, el. 6. pi. they are of.
Ifufozha, ku, v. t. to smell, to sniff.
Nunfaizha, ku, v. i. to repent very
much. Nda nunfwaizha » nda
beba ohiniohini, I repent yery
much.
Ifunka, ka, v, i. to stink, to smelL
Nunkika, ku, v, i. to be odorous,
capable of being smelt
Nunuka, ku, v, i. to be redeemed,
ransomed.
Nuntina, ku, v. t, to redeem, ran-
som, emancipatCi release.
Nunuzha, ku, v. t. eaus. nununa,
to ransom, &c., with.
Ifwa, ku, V. t. to drink.
Nwlna, ku, v. t. rel. nwa, to drink
in, absorb ; drink of, from ; Ivhu
di la nwina menzhi, the soil
absorbs the water.
Nwfsha, ku, v. t. eaus, nwa, to
give or cause to drink.
Nya, ku, v. i. to defaecate.
Nyabo I interj, to express surprise
at the greatness of a thing. Used
also as a noun, a surprisingly big
thing. "Wedia muntu ngu
nyabo, that person is wonderfully
big. As an adv.^ so much, so
greatly. ITda zanda muntu
wezo nyabo ! how much I like
that person I
-Nyamanzhi f interr. pro. what is
it? Chi nyamanzbi P what is it?
Nyambaula, n. la. a. sharp, three-
edged grass.
Ny&nsha, ku, v. t. to treat an older
person or superior with disre-
spect ; to hold in contempt.
"Ny&t&f ku, V, i, to wither with the
heat (of grain, plants, &c.).
Nyo = inyo, q.v.
la'ydna, ku ; Nyondnona, ku, v. t.
to wring out (as clothes).
Nyonauka, ku, v.i. to be grudg-
ing, unwilling.
ITyonaukila, ku, v. i. rel, nyona-
uka, to be grudging towards.
Nyonaula^ku,v./. tohurry over work.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
449
Nyonausha, Ira, v,t, to cause to
be grudging or unwilling, as when
you make a person work against
his will.
ITjonffolola, ku, v. t, to twist the
neck of a fowl; to break anything
off by twisting it round.
ITyonkaoka, ku, v. i, to fall out, as
feathers.
19'yonkaola, kn, v.t. pers, rep,
nyonkola, to thin out, as seed-
lings.
Ifyonkoka, ku, v.t, to come out
(of hair), to moult (of feathers).
Nyonkola, ku, v, t to pull up by
the roots (of plants), to pull
feathers (out of a bird).
Nyononona, ku, - ku nyona, q.v.
Kyonyonoka, ku, v, i, » ku nyo-
nauka.
Nyosa, ku, v. i, to be tardy, to be
slow, to delay.
TSizbl f interr. pro, what \
O. The vowel has three sounds :
broad, as in ku bOla; long, as
in insoki; short, as in didke-
sha.
Oy (i) prep, denoting the instru-
ment, with, by.
(a) Adv, there (short form of ano).
Mumoni no be o, let there be
light.
(3) Conj, even, and.
(4) Pass pro. ip, cl. 3, 4» 5» 9««
//. their, theirs.
(5) ^^^» port. cL I and 2, sing: ;
ci, 3, 4, 5, ga. pl,\ e,g, muntu o-
mwi, one person.
Oba, ku, V, t, to bend, surround ;
perf. obele.
Oba, {1) gen. part, cl. \,pU oU
(2) Rel, pro, cl, i,pl, which.
Ob^ka, ku, v.t, cap, oba, to be
bendable, pliable
Obol61a, ku, v,t, to gather to-
gether.
Obuluka, ku, v,t, to subside, to
abate, to decrease.
Obwa, (i) gen. part, cl, 4. sing, of.
(a) Rel, pro, cl, 4. sing, which.
Ocha, (i) gen, part, cl, 7. sing. of.
(2) Gen, part, cl, 7. sing, which.
Odia, (i) gen, part. cl. 3. sing, of.
(2) Rel. pro. cl. 3. sing, which.
Odimwi, culv. again.
Odimwi odimwi, adv. again and
again.
Ofw&la, ku, v.i. to grope about
like a blind person, to be blind.
Ofwazha, ku, v. t, cans, ofwaXa, to
cause to be blind.
Oka, (i) gen. part, cl. 6. sing. of.
(2) Rel. pro, cl, 6. sing, which.
Okela, ku, v, t, to go and look for
game, to go and spy out a country.
Okezha, ku, v. t. to cause or allow
to rest.
Okoya, prep, like, as if it were.
Okwa, (i) gen. part, cl, 5. sing. of.
(2) Rel, pro, cl. 5. sing. whicL
Oloka, ku, V. i. to be right, straight
Muntu udi olokele, the man is
good, reformed.
Olokela, ku, to come round (of the
seasons of the year) . "Wo olokela
mwaka ni nda dya m.apopwe,
the year has gone round since I
ate maize.
0161a, ku, V.t, to bend a thing
straight, as a bow. Ku diolola,
to stretch oneself.
016zlLa, ku, v,t. to have almost
ripe fruit (of a tree).
Olubwezha, ku, v.i. to shout, to
call the news to a person at some
distance.
Olwa, (i) gen. part, cl, 9, 9 a. sing.
of.
(a) Rel. pro. cl. 9, 9 a. sing, which,
Omahuna, n. xa. mwana oma-
huna, a child of adultery. Bana
bomahuna, children ot adultery.
Omba, ku, v, t. « ku diomba, to
practise masturbation.
Ombengana, ku, v. i. to spread out
extensively in growing, as a
pumpkin.
Ombolola, ku, v. t, to tell tidings,
to bring news to one.
Omboldzha, ku, v. t. cans, ombo-
lola, to cause to tell, i.e. to ask
the news, to enquire into a matter.
Ombuluka, ku (or umbuluka),
v.i, to break (of the darkness)^
to disperse (of people).
Gg
45^
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ombweaha, ku, v. /. to curse.
Ome, subs, pro. simple, ip. sing, I,
myself.
Ompa, ku, v, t, to ndt look straight
at people. Muntu u la ompa a
nienso, of a person who doesn't
look straight and hard at people
(reckoned a good person).
Oxnpauzha, ku, v, t. to stop a per-
son doing anything, to bring back
a runaway.
Ompolola, ku, v,t, to call aloud,
to shout
Omp6ta> kii, v. i, to wither in the
heat.
Omuya-xniaka, adv, for ever.
Ona, ku, v, i. to lie down, to sleep.
Oneka, ku, v. t, caus. ona, to lay
down, to cause to sleep.,
Onena, ku, v. i. rel, ona, to sleep
for, at.
Onenena, ku, v,t, rel. ona, to
sleep for. As when one lies in
wait for game at night, or around
a village to seize the people.
Onesha, ku^ v. i, int. ona, to sleep
soundly*
Onga, kUy v.i. to pass under by
stooping, to get out of the way, to
evade a missile.
Onga, ku, v. t, to deceive, to entrap
a person.
Ongai P interr. pro. how many ? (cl,
-ongeana, indef. adj, few.
Ongela, ku, v. t, rel, onga, to de-
ceive for, about. Ba mu ongela
a kudya, they deceive him about
food.
Ongola, ku, v. i. of a veiy old per-
son, who is tenacious of life| does
not easily die ; to live long.
Ongoleka, ku, v, i. to be bent up,
as an old man with weakness, or
a man with rheumatism (or other
pain) in the loins.
Ongozha, ku, v,t. caus. ongola,
to cause to live long.
Oni P with whom !
Oni oni, whosoever.
Onya, ku, v.t. caus, ona) to lay
down, to cause to sleep.
-onse, indrf, adJ, all, every.
,*■•
OnBa, ku, v. i. to stay a short time
in a place, to lodge.
Onza, ku, v. t. to dislodge anything
stuck up in a tree.
Onshi, an overhanging thing-.
Muntu weeo udi onzhi, that
person is doubled up, i.e. walks
with his body leaning forward.
Onzoka, ku, v. i. to go to the fields
until the grain is ripe.
Onaola, ku, v.t, to give a present
to a messenger.
Ora, n. i a. for. pi, baora, hour.
Osha, (i) gen, part, cl. 7. //. oL
(2) Rel. pro. cl, *l»pl* which.
Osobala, ku, v,i, to lie stretched
out like a corpse.
Otobala, ku, v, i. to be quiet
Otobasha, ku, v, t. caus. otobala,
to quieten.
Otwa, (i) gen, part, cl, 6.plroi,
(a) Rel. pro. cl. 6. pi which.
Ovhula, ku, v. t. to trouble a per-
son, to cause him to be in need.
Weso wa ngovhula, he troubles,
distresses me.
Ovhulwa, ku, v. i. to be in need,
to be poor.
Owa, (i) gen, part, cl, i and 2.
sing, of.
(2) ReLpro. cl, i and a. sing, who,
which.
Oya, (i) gen. part. cl. 8. sing, and
cl. 2, pi, of.
(a) ReLpro. cl, 8. sing, and cl, 2.
pi. which.
Ozona, culv, to-morrow, yesterday.
Ozona I Ozona I A phrase used in
thanking for a gift, i,e, give us
also to-morrow and to-morrow.
P. Pronounced as in English.
Fa, ku, V. /• to give, present. Eu
pa muta, to give a loan, to lend.
Padila, ku, v. t. rel, pala, to scrape
for.
Fadizha, ku, v,t, int, pais, to
scrape carefully, well.
Falla, ku, v. i. (?) rel, pa, to pray at
the graves.
Palzha, ku, v,t, caus, paila, to
pray by means of, to make an
offering at a grave.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
451
^dka, ku, v.i, to be increased,
multiplied.
Paklbiha, Ira, v. i. cans, pakata, to
be heavily laden, of a person
carrying many things. Nda pa-
kasha, I am very basy.
Fak4ta, ka, 9. t. to carry anything
under the arm.
Fakauka, ku, v.i, pers. rep. pa-
kaka, to arise (of a number of
people).
FaktLka, ka, v.i, to arise, get up
( = kabiika).
FiUa, ku, V, /. to scrape, to dress a
skin by scraping.
Fila-pdla, ku, v. t, redupl, paXa, to
scrape.
FaltUa, ku, v. t, to circumcise.
Falum,tika, ku, v. i. to be bitter.
Fdmba, ku, v. /. to tie tightly.
Famb&na, ku, v. i, to divide (of a
road).
Fitenpa, ku, v, t. to cut a person*s
head off; also, to take a thing
belonging to your master, not
stealing it, but borrowing it for a
time. (It was the custom to cut
off the heads of strangers and
take them to the chiefs; this is,
ka pampa.)
Fampamidna, ku, v, i, to be flat,
thin. Petf, pampamene ; e.g,
chidi pampamene, it is flat, or
thin.
Fampamlka, ku, v, t, cans, pampa-
mana, to beat out thin, or flat,
-pampamene, adj. flat, thin.
Famplila, ku, v, t, to dish up.
Fampwila, ku, z/. /. reL pampula,
to dish up for.
Fana, ku, v»t, rec. pa, to give
each other.
Ftoda, ku, V, i, to go to a new
place to build, to make new fields.
Fandultika, ku, v,L to be taught,
educated.
Fandultila, ku, v,t, to explain,
elucidate,
-pandulushi,^^'. educated, trained,
explicated.
Fandulwila, ku, v, t, reL pandu-
lula, to explain to, for.
Fangika, ku, v, t to hang up. Ku
pangika moBO, to set the heart
upon, determine, resolve. Ku
pangika kudya, to be unable to
eat because of sorrow.
Fapa, ku, v. i. of grain, about four
inches high, no longer eaten by
birds.
Fdpa, ku, V. i. to be add, sour.
F&pa, ku, V. f. to be rebellious, to
refuse to do as told.
Fapadika, ku, » ku shaahadika,
q.v.
Fi^adila, ku, v.t, nL papala, to
be rebellious against. Wa mu
papadila ahimatwangakwe, he
rebels against his master.
Fap^a, Ibi, v,i, to be rebellious^
self-willed.
FapatUa, ku, v. /. to cut up meat,
to take bark off .a stick.
Fapila, ku, v, t reU papa, to rebel
against, to refuse to acknowledge.
Fapula, ku, v.t» to clean, to pull
off a scab.
Fapuxn'dna, ku, v. t to gnaw, as a
rat at a piece of wood ; to tear
off anything fixed (as paper on a
wall).
P^a, ku, V. f . to rise (of the sun).
Faaauka, ku, v. i, to be cut up, to
be burst asunder. An Ua oath:
Nda pasauka, I will be cut up.
Fasaula, ku, v» t. to cut up, to ui-
tie, to give evidence.
FAsha, ku, v,t. cans, paka, to
multiply, increase in number.
Fasha, ku, v. t. cans, pasa, to cause
to rise (of the sun).
Faatika, ku, v. u to come into
view ; to be free from a fault, it
having been paid for by another.
FastHa, ku, v, t, to clear or free a
man by paying for his fault
Faaultika, ku, v, u to be explained,
explicated.
Fasultila, ku, v,t. to explain,
elucidate.
Faaulwila, ku, v, L reL pasulula,
to explain to, for.
Fata, ku, v, t, to sell.
Fata, ku, v. /. to close tightly.
Fata, If. I a. //. bamp&ta, name ot
a fish.
452
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Pataika, ku, v, /. /^. rep, patika,
to place things on a height, to lay
a stick between two fork-sticks^ to
do things hurriedly, carelessly.
Patana, kn, 9. u to be entangled,
fixed together.
Patanya, ku, v,t, to entangle, fix
together.
Patika, ku, v. t, to pat a stick in a
fork-stick, to put an arrow into a
bow.
Patlla, ku, V. i. to stick, be caught.
Ing'ombe ya patlla, the ox is
•tuck (as when it puts its head
through the poles of the kxaal
and cannot withdraw it),
-patile, adj, narrow.
Patlzha, ku, v. t caus, patlla, to
■cause to stick, to catch.
Paula, ku, v. i. to strip maize cobs
of the sheath.
P6ya, ku, V. i, to overflow, flood,
also of people when they disperse
after a meeting.
Pazha, ku, v,t, to give another
food left over.
Pasha, ku, v, t, <aus. pala, to cause
to scrape.
Pe, adv, no.
P^ka, ku, V. i. to wave (of grass or
grain).
Pek^sa, ku, v. t, to roll into a
ball, to tell lies.
Pela, ku, V, i, to lick the lips when
eating something nice.
Pela, ku, V, t, ret, ku pa, to give
for.
Pala, ku, V, /. to sweep.
Pole, €onj» and prep, and adv, only,
except, but.
P^miba, ku, v, t, to blow the nose.
PembtUa, ku, v,t. to take the
scum off beer, to blow the dirt
from surface of water before be-
ginning to drink.
Penda, lEu, v, t, of a woman leaving
her husband, of a tribe refusing a
chief.
P^nga, ku, V i, to be troubled.
Peng^la, ku, v, i. rel, penga, to be
troubled on account of.
P^nslia, ku, v.t, caus, penga, to
trouble, to persecute.
Penzhizlia, ku, v,t, caus, rel,
penga, to trouble on account of.
Pepa, ku, v,t, to sift, work a
lukwi.
Pepalila, ku, v, t, to turn over, to
keep on turning over the leaves of
a book, to fan anything by waving
something over it.
Pepeny6na, ku, v, i, to turn up at
the edges, like a hat-brim ; in-
kuane idi pepenyene, the hat
has its edges turned up.
Pepeny^ka, ku, v.t, to file the
teeth.
Pep^sha, ku, v, t, to lie, tell false-
hoods.
Pep6ta, ku, v,t. to cleanse grain
by removing the grit, &c.
Pepudlka, ku, v.i, cap. pepula,
to be capable of being blown
about.
Peptila, ku, v,t, to open a book,
to press down bushes with a stick
in looking for something.
Pepultika, ku, v.i, inv, stat,
pepula, to be blown about.
P^sa, ku, v,t. to spin thread, to
twist cord, to plait hair into
braids.
Pesela, ku, v. t. rel, pesa, to spin
for.
Pesha, ku, v.t. int. pa, to give
much, to be generous.
Pesultika, ku, v. t. inv. stat. peaa,
to be retwisted, replaited.
Pesulula, ku, v.t, inv, pesa, to
retwist, to replait.
Pettika, ku, v. t. to go round, to
disappear.
Petusha, ku, v, t, caus, petuka, to
cause to disappear.
Peeha, ku, v,t, caus. pela, to
cause to sweep, to sweep with.
Pi, part, used with ku pia; e.g,
menzbi a la pla-pi, the water is
very hot.
Pia, ku, V. t, to be hot, to be burnt ;
ku pla shukutu, said of things
dried up by heat and destroyed,
-pia, culj. new, young.
Pldingiina, ku, v, i, to be in dis-
order.
Pidlng6nya, ku, v./. ceuis, pidin-
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
453
ffsna, to cause disorderi con-
fusion,
^pidingene, adj, disorderly.
Pii8li6, ku » piaha, int, pia, to
be very hot
Fika, ku, v, /. caus, pia, to make
fire by friction.
Pikisa, ku, v, t, to rub with pres-
sure, as in embrocating, to bore
wood by friction ; wa ba pikiBa^
an imprecation.
Filatila, ko, v. /. to turn (a person)
over and over again.
Filtika, ku, v, u to turn back.
Piluklla, ku, v,t, rtl, piluka, to
turn back to, or from.
Pilula, ku, v.L to turn anything
back, to interpret, to translate.
Pimba, ku, v, i. to be very angry
(of a child crying lustily) ; mu-
longa wa pimba, the river is
full.
Pinatila, ku, v, t. to turn over and
over again.
Pindtila, ku, v. L to turn back, to
interpret, translate.
Pinga, ku, v, i, to affirm very
strongly, to swear, to take an
oath.
Pingisha, ku, v, i. to affirm, swear,
take an oath.
Pintika, ku, v.i. to lay oneself
down, to lie down.
Pintika, ku, v. L to turn aside, as
at a cross-road.
Pinula, ku, v,U to lay down, to
caase to lie down.
Pintina, ku, v. t, to lay any one
down, or to turn over.
Pisa, ku, v» t, to wring (clothes).
Piaatika, ku, v, i, to be sulky be-
cause made to do anything against
one's will.
Pisaiila, ku, v.t to do a thing
quickly.
Pisausha, ku, v. t, caus, pisauka,
to cause anybody to be sulky by
making him work against his
wUl.
Pisha, ku « ku piisha, to be very
hot.
Pisdka, ku, v, i, » ku pisauka,
also to have a limb broken.
Pitahano, u, i a, the moon of Feb.-
March.
Pit&na, ku, v, i. to be crooked.
Pitinya, ku, z>. /. caus, pitans, to
make crooked,
-pitene, adj, crooked.
Pili, part, used vfith ku subila }
t,g, ing'ombe i la 'svbila-pili,
the ox is quite red, or very red.
Poba, ku, v,i. to scream, shout
loudly.
Pobola, ku, V, i, to feast all day.
Pokom&na, ku, v, i. to be gloomy,
morose.
P61a, ku, v.L to remove one's
village, to go to another district
to live.
Pol6ka, ku, v, i, to be stamped (of
gram).
Pol61a, ku, V, t. to stamp com.
PoloDgwe, n,ia, a. squirrel.
Pdmba, ku, v, t, to fix spear head
in shaft by means of a glue made
from the root of musese tree, to
glue.
P6mbo, n,ia,K baboon.
Pombola, ku, v, i, to continually
beg, giving nothing ; prov, ingo-
ma sliidi shobili, oya mpom-
bole, imwi kupana kupana,
there are two drums, one which
I always beg, the other is to give
and give in turn.
P6mpa,ku, v. i,io subside, to abate ;
Iwizhi Iwa pompa, the flood
has abated.
Pompoma, ku, v,t, to discharge
(of an abscess).
Pompomona, ku, v.f, to impress
upon the mind.
Pompomwena, ku, v, t, rel. pom-
pomona, to impress upon one.
Pona, ku, v, i, to live, to be well.
Pona-pona, ku, v, i. redupl. pona,
to improve in health, to be better.
Pdnda, ku, v,t, to kill or crack
lice, to crack nuts, to wink.
Pondatila, ku, v, t, to crumble.
Pond^la, ku, v.L rel, ponda, to
wink at somebody.
Poni poni, adv, so so; mudimo
wezu mponi-mponi, this work
is so 80, not so good as it might be.
454
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ponya, ku, v, L cans, pona, to
cause to live, to heal, care.
P6poma» Ira, v, i. == ku ohu-
ohuma.
Popomdna, ku, v, t to draw out,
as grass from a thatch.
Pop&ha, ku, v./. to wait about,
delay, to travel about continually.
Pot&na, ku, v.i. to be entangled,
mixed up ; makani aza a la
potana, these affairs are mixed
up,
Pot&nya, ku, v. t, cans, potana, tp
entangle.
•potene, adj\ entangled, mixed up.
Potondna, ku, v. t. rev, pota, to
disentangle.
Po2aiika,ka, v. i. to be massacred,
to be killed in numbers.
Pozaula, ku, v, t, to kill many
game or people at a time, to
massacre.
Pozomoka, ku, v. i. to call aloud,
shout.
Pubuka, ku, v, i, siat. pubula, to
be annoyed, troubled by insects.
Pubula, ku, V, /. to annoy, trouble
(of insects).
Pdka, ku, V, t, to make rain, to
take a stick between the hands
and twirl it, in stirring porridge,
&c.
Puka, ku, V. i. to turn away one's
head in fear of something.
Puktila, ku, v,t, to take all the
food out of a pot, also things out
of a house. .
Pula, ku, V, /. to dish up, to turn
bread or porridge out of a pot.
PultUa, ku, V. t to strip leaves off
a branch.
Pulumtika, ku, v, i, to rush out of
a place.
Ptimpa, ku, v, /. to ask for, beg, to
entreat.
Pumpila, ku, v, t. rei. pumpa, to
ask for something. "Wa pumpila
ku twala, he asks for marriage.
Pumpisha, ku, v. t. int. pumpa,
to crave, ask earnestly, implore.
Pumpishiaha, ku, v, t, int. rel.
pumpa, to plead on behalf of
another. .
Punatika, ku, v, i. to refuse by
shaking the head.
Punisha, ku, v* t, for, (Eng,) to
punish.
Ptipa, ku, V. i, to understand
slightly, as when a person gets
instructions and soon forgets them
and returns to ask them again.
PtLpa, ku, V. i, to struggle, of a bird
caught in a trap and struggling to
escape.
PupulA, ku, V. t, to blow (of the
wind).
Pupulila, ku, V, t, to listen.
Puptima, ku, v, i, to go out in
force, in numbers, as when all the
people come out of a village to
see any one.
Pupumina, ku, v, t. reL pupuma,
to go out for. Bantu ba la
pupumina mwenzu, the people
go out to see the traveller.
Pupunff^a, ku, v,i, to be thin,
lean.
Pupunginya, ku, v, /. caus, pu-
pungana, to cause to be thin,
lean.
-pupungene, adj\ thin, lean.
Ptisha, ku, v, t. to shake a tail, to
make do without. Bhianaa sha
kale aha ba pusha, ta ba teledi
twambo twa Iieaa, that is, their
customs prevent them from be-
lieving in the Gospel : they under-
stand but they prefer the old
ways.
Pushumtika, ku, v, i, to slip out
Puta, ku, V, i. to be poor, destitute.
Pwfka, ku, V. /. to put aside.
Pwitapwlta, ku, v. t. to sip, to dip
a ladle.
Pyopyongftna, ku, v,i, to be in
tumult, in discord.
Pyopyonginya, ku, v.t, cans.
pyopyongana, to create a dis-
cord, tumult.
8, pronounced as in English.
Saba, ku, v. i, to make a noise, to
clamour.
Sabata, n, i a, for, the Sabbath.
Sabinta, ku, v, i, to eat (as a
dog).
ILA^ENGLISH VOCABULARY
455
8»bl!ika» kn, v. i, to go to the rear
(of children only).
Sabula, ku, v. t to mock.
Sabwila, ku, v.L rel, aabula, to
mock at
3adfka, ka, v.t. cap, sala, to be
.. choosable.
Sadila, ku, v, t. rel. sala, to choose
for, to set apart for, hence to hold
. sacred, to consecrate; ku disa-
dila, to choose for oneself.
Sadisha, ku, v. i. of a person who
alone out of a number has been
given something and exults over
Uie others.
Bafwalka^ ku, v, /. to do anything
carelessly.
Sakfina, ku, v, i. to be far, distant.
Sakanyi, ku, v.t, cutus, sakana,
to take to a distance.
tsakene, adj. far, distant.
Sakila, ku, v, t. to decorate, oma-
pient oneself
Sakiila) ku, v. /. to shave.
Sakula, ku, v, t. to prop.
Sakultila, ku, v. u to undress.
Sakulwila, ku, v. t, rel. sakulula.
to give a person your old clothes.
Lit, to undress yourself for him.
Sakumuka, ku, v, i. to come or go
in great numbers ; ku sakumuka
mate, to have a lot of spittle in
the mouth.
Sakumuna, ku, v. t. to make one*s
mouth water.
Sala, ku, v> t, to choose, select, to
set apart.
Sala, ku, v, t. to lay desolate,
Sal&la, ku, v. i, to be good, even
(of a road) ; to be good, pure (of
a person).
Sal&ma^ ku, v, i, to lie on the
back.
Salamika, ku, v. t, caus. salama,
to lay on the back.
SalfiBha, ku, v. i, caus. salala, to
make a road even, good ; to make
good, cleanse, purify (a person).
-ssJeme, adj, wide, broad.
Sftma, ku, v.t. to dress, clothe;
perf, samine; e.g. udi samine
sbikobelo shibotu, he wears
nice clothes.
S&ma, ku, v. t. to cut up ment fgt^
drying.
Stoiba, ku, v,i, to wash, bathe,
swim.
JSamb&la, ku, v. i. to trade, buy.
9amb6sha, ku, v t, caus. sambala,'
to trade, sell.
Samika, ku, v t, caus. sama, to
clothe, to dress another, to give
presents of cloth to your be-
trothed,
Samikisha, ku, v.t, caus, int,
sama, to clothe mugh, tQ
decorate.
Samlna, ku, v, i. rel. sama, to
dress for.
Samfsha, ku, v. i, int. sama, to
wear a lot of clothes, to be fop-
pish, to decorate oneself.
Simpa, ku, v. t. to copulate (of
cattle, &C.).
Sampaudika, ku, v, i. cap, samn
paula, to be despicable,
•sampaudishi, aJj. despicable.
Sampatika, ku, v, i. slat, sampau-
la, to be despised.
Sampatila, ku, v. t. to despise, to
contemn.
SampatUha, ku, v. /. stat. causi
«ampaulo,to despise by means of,
-sampaushi, cu/j. despised.
Bampuka, ku, v. i, to lose savour,
to be strengthless (of drugs) ; to
be exhausted (of the soil) ; to
be. lost, destroyed (of a mmi's
character or reputation).
JBampula, ku, v. t. to cause to lose
savour, strength, to cause to be
bad, to do evil,
-sampushi, adj, useless.
Sampuzha, ku, v. t, caus. sampu-
ka, to render savourless, to
exhaust (of soil), to destroy
character, make bad.
Samununa, ku, v. t, rev, sama, to
undress, unclothe.
Sinda, ku, v. i, of a plant braneh-
ing out extensively — ^kasamo ka
sanda.
Sandaula, ku, v. t. pers. rep. sat
ndula, to turn a thing over and
over, as a man' turns over a
blanket before buying.
466
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Sandudika, ku, v, i, cap. sandula,
to be tumable, fickle, change-
able.
•sandudiBhi, adj, changeable,
fickle.
Sanduka, ku, v. i. siat. sandula,
to change, alter, to reform, be
converted.
SandukUa, ku, v, i, siat* rel, aa-
ndula, to change from.
SandtUa, ku, v. /. to change, tun,
alter, transform, transfigure.
BandnmiULa, kii, vA, rev, stai,
sandula, to turn right over.
Sandilimiikila, ku, v, t. rel, sandu-
muka, to turn against.
Sandum'dna, ku, v./. rev. sandola,
to turn right over, to invert, to
reverse.
-sanduahi, adj. changed, altered.
Singa, ku, v. t, to pay a tax.
Bang&na, ku, v. i. to mingle, mix.
The custom is so called (kusa-
ngana) of man and wife eating
food together on marriage day.
Bang&nya, ku, v. t. caus. sangana,
to mingle, to mix, to add
together.
SangaiULa, ku, v. i, pers. rep,
sanin^a, to be dispersed, scat-
tered ; to be broken up (of a
tribe).
Sangatila, ku, v,t. to scatter,
disperse, waste.
-sangene, adj, mixed, mingled.
Bangila, ku, v.t, ba la sangila,
said of parents making presents
to their daughter who is a bride.
Bangtika, ku, v. i. of the spirit of
a man, surviving death and be-
coming a musangushi.
Bangtila, ku, v. t, » ku sandula.
Banika, ku, v.t. to open the
hand.
Banfna, ku, v. t. to feed.
Bankumuna, ku, v. t. to shake (as
blankets).
•sanu, ord. num. fifth ; bushiku
bwasanu, the fifth day.
Bansa, ku, v. /. to beat out new
com with a stick, to wipe the
feet, to kick, to shake something
ofif the hand (as an insect).
Bansadisha, ku, v. t. to moisten ;
also of a man going for a short
stroll, as when he makes the
round of his station in the after-
noon.
Bansalla, ku, v.t. to moisten, to
sprinkle, to baptize (by sprink-
ling).
Sanstta, ku, v. i. to saunter about.
Sansaiika, ku, v. i. to come or go
quickly, to hasten.
Bansalila, ku, v. t.pers. rep. sansa,
to do rapidly, to speak rapidly, to
beat out with quidc strokes.
Sansila, ku, v. t. to echo, to repeat
just what a previous speaker has
said.
Sansula, ku, v.t. to reprove, to
make a child leave off bad ways ;
nda sansula mwanangu ka
ahianza shakwe, I reprove my
child for his bad ways.
Bansultila, ku, v. t. to revert to a
subject under discussion after an
interruption, to explain.
Bansumtina, ku, v. t, to wash out
a dish with the hand.
Banta, ku, v, /. to ]t>ite a little (of
a dog).
B&nzha, ku, v. t. caus, samba, to
wash (clothes, &c.).
Banzisha, ku, v. t caus. int. samba,
to wash thoroughly.
Bapa, ku, v. t, to despise ( ^ oha-
pa).
Bapwa, ku, v. i. to shout with joy.
Ba la sapwa nzhiP what are
they shouting about ?
Basa, ku, v.i. to be fermented,
worked, sharp (of beer).
Basa, ku, v. t. to sew, to talk over
a matter.
Basina, ku, v. t. to open the hand
widely with fingers outspread.
S&sha, ku, V, t. caus. sata, to cause
or make to be ill.
Basidila, ku, v. t. rel. sasa, to mend,
sew up.
Basila, ku, v. t. rel. sasa, to sew for.
Basulula, ku, v. t, rep. sasa, to re-
sew, sew over again ; also to eat
again and again of a thing cooked^
e.g, a big piece of meat.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
457
Bata, kn, v. i. to be sick, ill ; ku
sata mubiabe, to have headache ;
ku sata mwifa, to have stomach-
ache.
Satisha, ku, v. i. int. sata, to be
very sick, to be worse.
Saola, ku, v. t. to give a present.
Saulula, ku, v, /. to kill a weak or
helpless animal or person.
Sausha, ku, v, t, to make wise.
Sauta, ku, v. t. to be wise.
Sea, ku, v» i, to menstmate.
S^ba, ku, v,t to winnow, to sift
meal, to fan,
Sebensa, ku, v. i, to go vdth quick
short strides, to amble.
Sebtila, ku, v,t. to clear away
grass from a road or camping-
place, to scufBe.
Sebwila, ku^ v,t rel, sebula, to
clear away for.
Seohobochobo, n.\a, a kind of
wood-sprite, described as a man
with one arm and one eye, living
in the forest ; he brings good Inck
to those who see him, he takes
people and shows them trees in
the forest which can serve as
medicines (sshichobocliobo).
8ec]i6kocli6ko, n. i a. name of a
very small fish.
86ka, ku, V. t. to laugh at, deride,
ridicule, to despise.
Bekela, ku, v. /. reL seka, to enjoy.
Sekel^la, ku, v,t. to rejoice on
account of something.
Sekel^sha, ku, v,t, to join with
another in rejoicing over his good
fortune, and in going to give
thanks, e.g. to the chief.
Sek^sha, ku, v.t. int. seka, to
laugh loudly, at length, to deride
much.
Sdla, ku, v.t. reL sea, to menstruate
for ; mwana u ta selwa, a child
bom before its mother had ever
menstruated.
8ela, ku, v.t. to look for a wife
( s ku sesa) ; to get a person to
do something for you. Ifda sela
inufuzhi, I get the blacksmith
(to do some work for me).
Bela^ka, ku, v. i.pers. rep. seluka,
to rise and fail continually, as
food boiling in a pot.
Selatila, ku, v. t. to throw anything
up and let it fall continually, as a
ball
Selebtta, ku, v. i, to lean against.
Belebasha, ku, v. t. caus. selebala,
to lean anything against another.
Beleb^ka, ku, v. t. caus. selebala,
to lean against.
Belela, ku, v, i. to arrive, of a canoe,
also of a bride to her husband's
house.
Belela, ku, v. t. rel. sela, to look
for a wife for another.
Seltika, ku, v. i. to descend, to dis-
mount, to come down.
Belukfla, ku, v.t. rel. seluka, to
descend to.
BeltUa, ku, v. t. to chew the cud.
Beltislia, ku, v. t. caus. seluka, to
cause to descend, pull down.
Belushlsha, ku, v.t. caus. rel.
seluka, to cause to descend for.
S^mpa, ku, v, t. to carry.
Beznpai&ka, ku,z/.f . to go backwards
and forwards between two places.
Sempatila, ku, v. t. pers. rep. se-
mpula, to take a thing backwards
and forwards between two places,
as a p>ostboy carries a post bag.
BemplUa, ku, v. t. to carry, to bear.
Semptizha, ku, v.t. caus. sempula,
to cause or help to carry.
Sempwlla, ku, v. t, rel. sempula,
to carry for, or to.
Semtina, ku, v.t. to beat out a
spear blade in order to sharpen it.
Bena, ku, v.t. to approach, to
come near.
Bena, ku, v, t. to lend a wife.
Benana, ku, . v. i. rec. sena, to
approach each other.
Benana, ku, v. t. rec, sena, to lend
each other your wives.
B^nda, ku, v. t. to break bread.
Sendal61a, ku, v.t. to recline
sideways.
Bend^lma, ku, v. i. to be crooked,
twisted, to be crooked in a moral
sense ; perf. sendeme ; 6.g. muntu
wezu udl sendeme, this person
is not straight, is dishonest, wicked.
458
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
BendelA, ku, v, t. to look into, as
when one climbs up to look into
a grain-bin (Imtftla).
•••Ddeme, adj, crooked, wicked,
dishonest.
Bendtila, ka, v, t. to shoot with bow
and arrow.
Benen^na, Ira, v.t. rel, aena, to
draw nearer, closer.
S^nga, ku, v, i. to meet for a beer-
drinking.
8enk«, n, i a. rust.
S^naa, kn, v. t, to peddle, to sell a
small article.
Senya, ku, v,t, caus, sena, to
bring a thing near.
Sepwel6ka, ka, v, i. to be loose,
not tied properly ; mabu a
aepweleka, loose reeds.
Sepwel^sha, ku, v. t. to tie a thing
loosely, so that it hangs down.
-•epweleshi, adj, loose.
86sa, ku, v»t, to go in search of a
wife. When a man is wandering
about aimlessly from place to
place people ask, Sa a la sesa P
Are you wanting a wife ?
Saa^ka, ku, v,t, to hide, conceal.
Bas^la, ku, v»U to replenish a
fire.
Ses^ma, ku, v» i. to be nauseated,
to have feeling of nausea ; moBO
wangu wa aesema, my heart is
nauseated ; nda sesemwa, I am
nauseated.
Bes^mya, ku, v,t, caus, aesema,
to nauseate.
S^sha, ku, v,i, caus, aeka, to
cause to laugh, to joke, to jest.
Sestika, ku, v i, sicU, seaula, to
get out of the way.
SestUa, ku, v. t, to remove, shift, to
take anything out of the way.
BesultUa, ku, v,t, to move any-
thing back.
Beaultila, ku, v, /. to contradict or
deny a thing when it is true.
Sha (i) prefix to proper names —
« The father of \
(2) Also found as the initial syllable
of many nouns of cl. i a. —denotes
one who possesses, or is charac-
terized by some quality.
(3) i^^' pf^' o^ /^Tf. pro. cl 7,
S,g.pi,
Sha, ku, V, /. to dig.
Bhabwfoii, n, i a, one who has
authority.
BhachikAiikft, n,i a. a kind of
lizard (? chameleon).
Bhaftunbdla, n,i a, a scavenger
beetle.
Bhakakwe, n.i a. a possessor,
owner.
Bhakanjtinso, n. i a, a variety of
cassava.
Shak^mba, n. prop, a name given
to the Supreme Being, the rain-:
giver.
Bhaktidya, n, 7. pi, food.
Shakuh61a, n. 7. pi, wages.
Shaktinwa, n, *!^pL drinkables,
drink.
Bhakua&ma, n, 7. pi, clothing.
Bli&la, ku, v,i, to stay, remaiq
behind.
Shalo, subs. pro. simple cl. 7, 8, 9.
//. they, themselves.
Bhallientambtiko, n, 1 a, one who
walks with long strides.
Bhaluxn&nOi #t. i a. an earwig.
ShaluBtike, n. i a, name of a fish
(said to eat other fish).
Bhaminga, n, 1 a,Q. wall-plate.
Bhamang6ua, n, 1 a. a. name givei|
to the lion.
Bhimba, ku, v.i, to pinch, tQ
scratch (of a cat).
. Shambfsha, ku, v. i. int. ahamba,
to pinch hard, scratch much.
Bham^nde, n.i a, an imitation
impande shell.
Bhamita, ku, v, i, to sneeze. When
Baila sneeze they say Ta! or
Tata!
Bhamtina, ku, v, t, to break with
the hand, as a lump of tobacco. .
Bhamusdzha, #t. i a. an earwig.
Bhanaohis^nke, n. i a, name given
to the pheasant (kwale).
Bli6nga, ku, v, t, to sow.
Bhangulula, ku, v, t. rep, ahauga,
to resow, i. e, when the first sowing
has failed.
Bhangwel interj. Thanks, sir! My
lord. (From the MarotsL)
ILA-ENGUSH VOCABULARY
459
Shanka, ku, v, A to give a present
• freely.
Shank^Kna, ku, v, i, to be narrow,
to shrink.
Shankinya, ku, v.t, caus, aha-
nkana, to narrow,
-shankene, ad/, narrow.
Shank61e, n,i a. a. wart-hog.
ShanshaiULa, ku, v.i, stat» aha-
nshaula, to be entirely broken
up and destroyed.
Shanshatila, ku, v, /. to break np
a thing entirely, to crush, as you
crush a snake's head.
Shanshdla, ku, v,t, to break,
damage.
Shany£:iga, ka^ v. /. to crush, as
you crush clay in making mortar.
Shanza, if . i a. a name given to a
lion.
Shftnaa, n, *j*pl. of chansa^ q. v,
Shapidio, n.ia.SL hawk.
Shasha, ku, v,t, caus, shala, to
detain.
Shashadika, ku, v. i, to stumble
(without falling).
Shasubila, n. i a, the Pallah.
Shat&mbe, jt,i a. a. dumb person.
She, see Shi.
Shedia, dem, pro, cL 7, 8, 9.//. yon,
yonder.
Shejani, n. 1 a, for, {En^,) a ser-
geant of police.
Sh^xnbwe, ». i a. a ram.
Shempela, n, i a, a. rhinoceros.
Sheshi, dem. pro, cL 7, 8, 9. //.
these.
Shesho, dem. pro, el, 7, 8, 9. //.
those.
Shetwi, n, i a. name given to a Hon.
Shi (i) classifier cL *j.pl,\pers. and
rel, pro. same cl. , also cl. 8 and 9. //.
(2) Negative part, used with i/.
sing, only; e,g. Shi bwene, I
have not seen.
(3) Shi and She form the initial
syllables of many nouns «Sha.
Shia, ku, v, t. to leave behind, for«
sake, desert.
Shia, ku, v, i. to be dark, black, to
be dusk ; kwa shia, the afternoon
salutation. Mozo wa shia, the
heart is black, i, e, it is sad.
Shiba, ku, v, t, to whistle, to blow
a trumpet ; ku shiba mulozhi,
to whistle ; ku shiba mpeta, to
blow a trumpet
ShibHa, ku, v, t, to moisten putty,
&a, by working it with the
fingers.
Shibele, subs, pro, prep. cl. 7, 8, 9.
//. them (where they are).
Shibinda, n.i a.K chief.
Shibomb^lwa, if . 1 0. a kind of ant.
ShibudikHa, if. i a. a kind of
snake.
Shiblifwi, n, la, a. jealous person.
Shibula, ku, v. t. to give presents
to a recalcitrant wife or husband
to induce her or him to submit.
ShibtUebtUe, if . i a. a bird with
long yellow legs seen on the brink
of a river.
Shibumfoibe, if. i a. an adulterer
(esp. of one act).
Shibundnga, n,ia, a deliberate
person.
Shibusdnso, n.i a, a wise person.
Shibuttoibo, n.i a, a ravenous
person.
Shibuz&ndi, n. i a. a precious^
valued person.
Shibw^mga, if . i a. a genial, amiable
person.
Shibwinzhi, n,ia, a disagreeable,
quarrelsome person.
Shiohibw&ba, n. i a. the bustard.
Shichilaka, if . i a. a person with
an impediment in speech, a
stammerer.
Shichimb^mbe, if. i a. a \)erson
afflicted with small-pox, a man
with small-pox marks on his face.
Shichimiui, if. i a. a crook-back.
Shiohimo, if. i a. a person of stature,
a tall person.
Shichimdnswe, if . i a. a left:
handed person.
ShiohUnp^bupa, if. i a. a bustard.
Shiohingongo, if. i a. the sand-
grouse (or shijingongo).
SUchingnini, n.i a. an obstinate,
self-willed person.
Shichins^nda, if . i a. a leper.
Shiohintanda, n.i a. a naked
person.
460
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
BhichinBdbe, n. i a. the sitatmiga
antelope.
Shichisiiiiu, n. i a, the Puktu
Bhiohoba, n,i a. a fortunate,
happy, blessed person.
Sbichoboolio ^ bo Seohoboohobo,
Sliich61we, n.ia. a prosperous
person.
Shidika, ku, v.t. to doctor, to
cure, heal, dress wounds.
Shidisha, ku, v.t. caus, shidika,
to doctor with, by means of.
Shidyo, n 7.//. food.
Shifdndwe, n.i a. z. pelican*
Shika, ku, v. t. to arrive.
Bhlka, ku, v, t. to paddle.
Bhlkabila, n, i a. the marabout
stork.
Shikabustimpwe, n, i a. the borer
insect.
Shikabwekatdnzbi, ». i a. a
lizard.
Shikadidlmo, n.\a, a kind of
water-bird.
Bhikakdnze, n.\a, a kind of
hawk.
Bhikaktiwa, ». i a. a kind of
hawk.
Bhik&kwe, ». i a, an owner, master
of things.
Sliikal&lu, n,\a, a madman,
lunatic
Bbikdle, n.m, an ancient, an
ancestor.
8hikal6nda, n,\ a, a stammerer,
stutterer.
Bhikaiki^ba, #t. i a. a kind of bush.
Bhikamikami, ». 1 u. an impudent
person.
Shikamimbfa, n. i a. a swallow,
also a spear with two barbs re*
sembling a swallow's tail.
Sbikaminomino, n.ia, a quarrel-
some person.
8hikamp6fwa, n,ia.K bat
BhikamuftLne, n. 1 a. muscle of
arm or leg.
Bhikanchlmwa, ;f . i a. an inactive
person.
Bbikanzfnse, n.i a. 2l. fool.
Bhikapulwe, ». i a, name of a
small animal.
Bhikapemp^nya, n, 1 a, moth.
Shikaatokwesinkwe, n^ia. an
impudent person.
Bhikasapilasapila, if. i a. an im-
pudent person.
Bhikaa^se, n, 1 a. 9. person liable
to nausea.
Shikasonto, m. i a. an epileptic.
Bhikat&nda, ». i u. a bachelor.
Shikatemamudilo, f». i a. a person
who does as he likes, a lawless
person.
Bhikat^ngut^nsni, n. I a. a dis-
respectful person.
Bhikatila, ku, v. t, to grasp firmly
with both hands.
Bhikatila, ku, v, t, to fold up (of a
folding-table or chair).
Bhikiswa, n.ia, an evil spirit,
ghost.
8hik§mb68hi, if . i a. a boy of about
seven or eight.
Bhikibabtta, if. i a, the bushbuck*
Bhikila, ku, v,L reL shika, to
arrive to, to reach.
Bhikila, ku, v. /. to leave off, desist
from.
Shikinkdtwe, if . i a. -^ shiofai^
nkotwe, the * knob-nosed ' goose.
Bhikiaftpi, if . i a. « ahichisapi, a
disobedient person.
Bhikisu, if. i a, name x>f a fruit.
Bhikistinu, n,ia,» shiohisona,
q.v,
Bhikiya, if . i a. a pupil, learner,
novice.
Bhikd, ioc. phr. I am not there.
Shikob^lo, If. 7. //. European
clothing.
Bhikdbo, if. i a. name of a bird ;
? knorrhaan.
Bhikondwindo, if. i a. name of a
bird.
Bhikdnao, if. i a. a squirrel.
Bhikdawe, if . i a. a rat.
Shiktibe, if. i a. a vulture.
Bhikdfws, if . i a. a dead person.
Bhikuka, ku, v. i. to have a limb
broken.
Bhikukwe, n,ia, ^ ahimowe, the
* go-away ' bird.
BhiklUe, if. idc a big stack of
maize.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
461
Bhilmlula, kn, v. t. to give a per-
son aa emetic.
ShikT&ndu, n,ia. a big milking-
pail.
Shiktiziku, n. i a, mist, fog, haze.
Shikupaupa, n. i a. & hypocrite.
Shikwa, ku, v. i, to be choked.
Shikwise, n,ia. a fish eagle.
Name given to an ox with black
head, black and white body.
Shik'weiia^, adv. always, con-
tinually.
81ula, ku, zf, t, rel, ahia, to leave
for, at, &C.
Shila, ku, v.L to grind tobacco
or grain.
Shilanswa, #t. i a. a rhinoceros.
Shilo, n, I a, the smell of burning
meat.
Shilubimbo, n.i a,z. person who
practises lubambo, q, v,
Shilub^bige, n,ia. a smoker of
hemp.
ShilabidOa, n,ia,z, kind of spider.
Shilabllo, n.ia, 9. swift person.
Shiludlmi, ». i a. a chatterbox.
ShiluftLalukovhu, «. i a. an old or
sick person who does not leave
his work notwithstanding his
infirmities.
Shiluf^we, n.ia.9. mole.
Shili&ka, n. 1 a. tsetse fly.
Shilumimba, n.ia, a warrior,
soldier.
Shilthnbi, n,i a, a thankless
person.
Sbilunktilu, n.ia. a person with
all his head shaved.
Shilunttiba, n.ia, name of a white
fish-eating bird.
Shiltise, ». i a. a merciful person.
Shilusliiisu, n,ia.2i harsh person.
SMlut&ngat^biga, n.ia.A kind of
spider.
Shiluttizhi, n.i a. a passionate,
quick-tempered, impatient person.
SMLfiwe, n.i a. 2i leopard.
Shiliizhftlo, ft. I a. 9. prolific person.
Shilwengu, n,i a, a notorious
person.
Shilw^nzo, n,ia. a religious per-
son, one who pra3rs continually.
Shilwiki, n,ia. a persistent per*
son, one who does not abandon
work or school, a * sticker '.
Sbima, ku, v. i, to hiss, as green
wood when burning.
Sbima, ku, v. i. to be mended,
repaired (esp. of a crack in any-
thing) ; e.g, obibia ohangu cha
shixna, my pot is repaired.
Shimadi, ft. 1 a. a polygamist, one
who serves two masters, or en-
gages in more than one job at once.
Shimofdnzi, n.ia. 9. wicked per*
son, rogue, rascal.
Shimah&nyo, n, 1 a. ^ shikisapi,
q,v.
81iimak6ma, n.ia. a long, dark-
coloured, spitting snake, very
poisonous ; ? the African
cobra.
Shimakw&ti, n.ia. 9. carrier.
Shimalw^Ba, n.i a. vl person who
does astonishing things.
Shimamftmbe, ». i a. an adulterer,
adulteress.
Shimambonyambonya, n, 1 a, one
who boasts of his belongings and
despises others because they are
poor.
Shimambtinibu, n. 1 a. one who
likes eating by himself.
Shimanch^nga, n.i a. 9 cross-eyed
person.
Shiminga, n.ia, 9. kind person.
Shim&no, n. ia.9, cunning, clever
person.
Sbbnantumbwimbwa, n.ia. a
false boaster, a person who boasts
falsely of the wonderful things he
can do.
Shimas^sho, n.i a. a joyous,
cheerful person.
Shimas^u, n.i a. a person who
contradicts.
Shimatiishi, n. 1 a, one who reviles,
curses.
Shimattiya, n.ia, 9. kind of small
animal.
Shimatwftnga, n, la. a master,
owner.
Shixnatwangabo, n, 1 a. their
master.
Shimatwangako, n. 1 a, thy
master.
462
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Shlmatwangakwe, n, 1 a, his
master.
ShimatwaTiganepi, n. 1 a, my
master.
Shimatwangenu, n, i a. your
master.
Bhimatwangesa, n, 1 a, our
master.
Shlxnba, ku, v. t. to carve in wood,
engrave.
Shimba, ku, v, t to carry a lot.
Shimbaula, ku, v. i, to delay when
sent upon an errand.
Shimb^mbe, n, la. a kind of
fish.
Shimbfla, ku, v, t. to stamp (as a
floor in a house).
Shim^nzo, «i. i a. a host.
Shixninina, ku, v, t. to press down
hard.
Shim6, loc, phr, I am not in here,
&c
Shimdwe, n. i a. the < go-away '
bird.
Shimozomuk&ndo, f». i. a witch,
sorcerer,
Shixnozdmwi, u, i a, an earnest,
single-hearted person.
81iimpa> ku, v.f. to stand up,
plant; v.i, of a person, to stop
growing.
Shixnplka, ku, v, t, to put a pot on
the fire. Wa shimpika leza,
the rain-clouds stand.
Shimpikila, ku, caus, rel. shimpa,
to plant trees, &c. ; idiom, wa
shimpikila ku ba tuka, he came
for the very purpose of cursing.
Nda ku shimpikila inzho, I
. recognize you now.
8himpl!ika, ku, v. i, rev, stat,
shimpa, to be uprooted.
8himpiila, ku, v,t, rev, shimpa,
to xiproot
Shimpuluktitwi, n. i a, wax in the
ear ; also name of a supposed
insect which is thought to produce
this wax in the ear.
Shimudfma, n, i a. a kind of
bat : it is said to eat fruit in the
night.
Shimuendadiche, ». i a. a solitary
traveller.
Shimuenshalubflo, a red biting
ant ; « Shimwenzhalubilo.
Shimuftilamwemvu, ». z a, a kind
of snake.
Shimukanyikwa, n, 1 a, spring-
hare.
8himuk6nkom6na, n. 1 a, the
woodpecker.
8himuktLndanoh61a, n, 1 a. dragon-
fly.
8himulalftkati, fuia. name given
by children to the second &ger.
8himul61e, ff. i a. name of a n^.
Shimuna, ku, v, t, to tell, narrate.
8himunika, ku, vJ, cap, shixnuna,
to be tellable.
8himuxiy6mba, n,ia, the wart-hog.
8himuxi76u, ». i a. a kind of blade
biting ant : a kind of game played
with this ant is also called shi-
musyeu.
8himti8unt&b6Ba, n»ia, a cater-
pillar.
8himutai]gal^hi, n, la, one who
speaks of his own goodness and
virtue and sa3rs others are bad.
8himlitwi, n. i a. one at the head
of a class, party, &c. ; one in the
forefront of a battle.
8himuz68u, n. 1 a, my chief, lord.
8himwexije ~ mwenje, q. v.
8himwina, ku, v. t, reL shimuna,
to tell to.
8himwinlna, ku, v. t. reL shi-
muna, to tell some one about
another. Ba mu shimwinina
ku mwami, they tell the chief
about him.
8himya^ ku, v.t, cans, of shima,
to mend, repair (esp. of a cracked
bowl, &c.).
8hina, ku, v, t, to squeeze, to choke,
to strangle, to throttle, to com-
press. Ku shina xnenso, to
close the eyes ; ku shina dinso,
to take aim.
8hinabw^wi, n, 1 a. breast of an
ox, &c., — ^the portion taken to the
chief.
8hinak6ba, n, 1 a, >■ 8hinab-
waswi.
8hinakwabo,/0fx. phr, cl. 7, 8, 9.
//. their, <^ their place.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
463
Shinakwako, poss, phr. cL 7, 8, 9.
//. thy.
Shinaln^akwe, poss. phr, cl. 7, 8,
9. //. his.
Shinakwftngu, poss, phr, cl. 7, 8,
9. //. my.
Shinakwenu, poss. phr. cl. 7, 8, 9.
• //. yours, of your place.
Shinakwesu, poss. phr. cl. 7. pL
our, of our place.
Shin&na^ ku, v. i. to be crowded, to
have no room.
Shinanina^ ka, v, i. to sneer.
Sfaina-shina, ku, v, i. redupL
shina, to wink.
Shinchlita, n.\ a, a locust, the
Yoetganger.
Shfnda, ka, v. t. to hoe a new field
at the end of the r-ainy season.
Shindaila, ku, v.t. to ram earth
into a hole, grain into a sack.
Shindibadfla, ku, v. t. rel. shindi-
bala, to sit very near to any one.
Shindib&la, ku, v. i. to sit close.
Shindika, ku, v. t. to push.
Bhindikfla, ku, v, t. to accompany
one on a journey.
Shindila, ku, v, t. to ram earth, &c.
8hindolo, n.\a. a drowsy, sleepy
person.
Shindya, «i. i a. a glutton,
BhinKa, ku, v. i. to be initiated (of
boys). See note Eng.-Ila Vocab,
Initiate.
ShingablUa, ». i. a small intestine.
BhinKangadino, ». i. a kind of
beetle.
Bhinffdnya, ku, v. U to curse.
Bhinsuliila, ku, v. t, to finish off
smearing.
Shin^'uxiBunsu, n. la, a person
who does as he likes, without
respect to law or order^
Shinikizha, ku, v,t. to agitate,
stimulate, stir up, to push.
Bhinina, ku, v. t, rel, shina, to
squeeze for.
BhiJiizha, ku, v. t. to tell the truth.
Bhinka, ku, v. t. to stop up, to
. caulk; mudiango udi shinki-
Iwe, die door is shut.
Shinkana, ku, v, t. to be narrow.
Bhinkana, ku, v, t, to meet
Shinkaula, ku, v,t, pers, rep,
shinka, to open and reopen a
box.
-shinkene, adj. narrow.
Shinkole, n,ia.K cruel, malicious
person.
Shinkombe, n. i a. a messenger.
Bhinkombwa, n. la, ^ messengen
Shinkond6ma, n. la. my enemy. <
Shinkondonina, n. i a. his enemy.
Shinkondondko, n. i a, thy enemy.
Shinkondonokw&bo, n, 1 a. their
enemy.
Shinkondonokw^nu, n. 1 a, your
enemy.
Bliinkondonokw^su, n. i a. our
enemy.
Bhinktila, ku, v, t, rev. shinka, to
unplug, to open a box or bag.
Bhinkwfla, ku, v.t. rtv. rel,
shinka^ to open for.
Shinsina, n. la. a person of
strength, a powerful person.
Shinshibftla, ku, v.i, to be de-
formed.
-shinshibele, adj. deformed.
Bhinshima, ku, v, t. to prophesy,
to foretell.
Bhinshixntina, ku, v. t, to break up
pieces of firewood in a fire, so that
they may blaze, to speak again
and again.
Bhinshiinwina, ku, v. t. rel. shi-
nshixuuna^ to tell, tell always,
to tell over again.
Bhintft, ku, v.t. to give iu ex-
change.
Shint^tfu, #f. I a. a glutton.
Bhintaxno, ». i a. a person who
denies faults he has committed.
Bhintina, ku, v, t. rec. shinta,
to exchange, to barter.
Bliint^nda, n. i a. a compassionate
person.
Shint6ngo, ». 1 a. a grumbler.
Shinttika, ku, v. i, to appear, as
locusts.
Shinttinda, «i. i a. a humpback.
Bhintyombwi, n, 7 the downy
feathers of a young chicken.
Shinyauwe, n, la. a lewd per-
son.
Bhinzha, ku, v,t, to go away
464
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
leaving things behind, as when a
man leaves some food, being quite
satisfied ; or of a person sweeping
and leaving much unswept.
8hi6, loc. phr. I am not there.
Shipa, ku, v. i. to spit out, also to
understand well.
Shipolisa, ». i a. a policeman.
Shiptika, n. la. vai idiot, idiotic
person; so called because he is
supposed to have insects in his
head.
Shipuptiza, n. i a. honeycomb with
no honey in it.
Shisha, ku, v,i. int, shia, to be
very dark, black.
Shisha, ku, v.t, int, sha, to dig
deep.
Shishs, ku, v,i, cans, shia, to
leave anything in another's charge.
Shitthimbwi, ». i a. a disrespectful
person.
Shishiinlika, ku, v, i, to revive
after a 6t, to awake.
Shishimuklla, ku, to sigh for
another, be sorry for another ; ku
dishishimukila, to take a deep
breath, sigh.
Shishimlina, ku, v, t, to touch, re-
mind ; to revive a person after a fit.
Shishimiislia, ku, v, L cans, shi-
shimuka, to revive a person from
a fit, to awaken.
Shish^a, ku, v, t. to scratch the
head.
Shishisliini, n. i a, an owl.
8hisweBham6BO, /» . i a. a patient,
persevering person.
81iitingo, n, 7. //. pieces of cloth
about a yard long.
81iitantas6kwe, n, i a. name of a
forest tree, good mining timber.
Shiti, ku, v.i, to stay, remain; a
mu chi shiti, stay ye still — a
parting salutation.
Shitidfla, ku, z/. /. to veil behind a
curtain, to sit in front of another
to hide him from view, to shelter
from the wind.
Shitikizha, ku, v. U to place, to
put.
Shituktilo, n. 7. pL white garments
of Europeans.
Shiubtibu, «. i a. a disrespectfiil
person.
Shiza, ku, v. t, to cut hair.
Shiaha, ku, v, /. caus, shia, to make
black, dirty.
She (i), pass, pro, cL 7, 8, 9. //.
their, theirs. Prefixed by gen,
parts. Mwini wa-8h6, their
master.
(a) nunu part, cl, 7, 8, 9. //., «^.
^iintu aho-bili, two things.
Shoba, ku, v, t. to clean, dust, rub,
polish ; ku dishoba, to rub fat
on the face ; ku shoba muAi
mafiita, to anoint a dead person
with fat.
8hob61a, ku, v, u to rub in the
hands, as an ear of maohexne.
8hob68h6ba, ku, v, A redupL
shoba, to brush dirt off the hands
after working.
8h6ka, ku, v,u to arrive (of a
canoe).
8hokauka, ku, v, i. to be weak,
tired.
8hoka^a, ku, v, /. to strip maize-
cobs off the stalks.
8hokol61a, ku, v. t. to call any one
by his old name, to unscrew.
8hok6ta, ku, v. t, to rub between
the fingers, to kill an insect in
that way ; ku dishokota, to rub
a sore eye.
8holatika, ku, v, i, to speak under
the breath, to murmur, grumble.
8h5ma, ku, v. t, to charge a gun.
8hdma, ku, v. /. to trust, confide
in, to rely upon.
8h6mbo, n, 7. //. edible leaves of
cassava.
8honibol61o, n, i a. the kudu.
8hoxnbonamaxig6ma, n, 1 a, small-
pox.
8]idm6ka, ku, v. i. cap, shoma, to
be trustworthy, faithful.
8hdm6na, ku, z^. /. reU shomay to
trust for.
-shomeshi, adj, faithful, trust-
worthy.
8hdxnesha, ku, v, /. caus, shoxna,
to cause to trust, to promise.
Shomya, ku, v* i, caus, shoma> to
promise.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
465
Slionsfolwe, n,ia, the millipede.
81i6nta, ku, v, t, to kiss.
Bhontina, ku, v, i, rec, shonta, to
kiss each other.
*8honto, adj, small, little.
Shuktita, ku, v.i, to move abont
when asleep.
ShUla, ku, V, t, to cleanse by rub-
bing, to obliterate.
Shtimbwa, n,ia.^ lion.
Shumbwa, n, 7. //. grain-bins.
Shumpiila, ku, v. i, to wither, to
be withered.
Soba, ktiy V, i, to jest, joke, play
with one.
Soblna, ku, v. i, to play.
8obanina> ku, v. t, rel, sobana, to
play for, amnse.
Sobanya^ ku, v,t, caus, sobana,
to cause to play.
8ob6lela,ku,z^. i. to walk stealthily,
on tiptoe.
8ofw&la, ku, v,u to be unclean,
dirty.
8ofw&Blia, ku, V, t, caus, sofwala,
to defile, make dirty.
86ka, ku, v. u to be established (of
customs) ; e,g, shianza aha ka
sdkabobo kwa Iieza, the customs
were established thus by God.
Soka, ku, z/. /. to go and examine
traps.
8okola, ku, v.U to remove husk
from grain.
8ok6nya, ku, v. t, to dislodge an
animal from its den.
86kwe, ft. I a, an ape.
861a, ku, V. t, to taste, eat a little.
8ol6ka, ku, v, t, to try, attempt.
8olela» ku, v, t, rel, sola, to taste
on behalf of another.
8ol61a, ku, v» i, to precede, to lead
the way.
Solol^la, ku, V, t» rel. solola, to go
in front of, to precede.
Soldsha, ku, v, U caus, solola, to
cause to precede, to send ahead.
861 we, n. i a. the honey guide.
86raa, ku, v, t. to eat new grain.
85nia, ku, v, i, to sheathe a l^ife, &c.
86mba, ku, v. t, to offer a person
payment, doubting whether it will
be accepted.
8om1:6zlia, ku, v, t. to offer a per-
son anything without intending to
give it.
8om6na, ku, v, /. to put the
masomo in a roof.
8om6Da, ku, v, t. to extract a
charge from a gun, to unsheathe
a knife.
8om6na, ku, v, i. to give birth for
the first time (of a cow).
8omon6na, ku, v. L rev, soma, to
draw grass out of a thatch.
8onionw6na, ku, v,t, rev, rel,
soma, to draw out for.
8omp^la, ku, v, t, to look out for
any one, to expect visitors.
8omp61a, ku, v, t, to pick one thing
out of a lot, to snatch, as when yon
are about to give a thing and the
person snatches it out of your hand.
86nda, ku, v, t. to divine.
8ond61a, ku, v,t, rel, sonda, to
look into (as into a grain-bin).
8ond6ka, ku, v. i, to be mad.
8ond68ha, ku, v, t, caus, sondoka,
to madden, to make mad.
86nga, ku, v,i. to heap up {i.e,
when a basket of grain is already
full).
8ongel61a, ku, v,t, to add one
statement to another, as different
witnesses.
8ongw&la, ku, v, i, to become wise.
8ongw61a, ku, v, /. to make a hole
in the ground for a pole.
Ponkat^la, ku, v, t, to eat a little
(as when one has already had
enough), to say * a few words *.
8onk6to, n, i a, the pinnacle put
on the top of a hut.
86nsa, ku, v, i, to bud, to sprout.
86n8a, ku, v, t, to light (a candle).
86nta, ku, v, t, to pick, choose.
8ont61a, ku, v, t, to pick up things
one by one.
86nza, ku, v. t, to start a song.
86nzha, ku, v, /. caus, sondk, to
cause or help divine.
8osaXka, ku, v, t, to conceal news,
tidings, affairs.
8os6ka, ku, v, t. to hide.
8osol61a, ko, v. /. to pull sticks out
of a fire.
Hh
4^4
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
leaving things behind, as when a
man leaves some food, being quite
satisfied ; or of a person sweeping
and leaving much unswept
Shidy loc, phr. I am not there.
Shipa, ku, v. t, to spit out, also to
understand well.
Shipolisa, /» . i a. a policeman.
Shiplika, n. i a. an idiot, idiotic
person; so called because he is
supposed to have insects in his
head.
Shipuptiza, if. i a. honeycomb with
no honey in it.
Shisha, ku, v»L int. shia, to be
very dark, black.
Sliisha, ku, v,t. int, sha, to dig
deep.
Shisha, ku, v.t, cans, shia, to
leave anything in another's charge.
Shitthimbwi, m. i a. a disrespectful
person.
Shishimlika, ku, v. i, to revive
after a 6t, to awake.
Shishimuklla, ku, to sigh for
another, be sorry for another ; ku
diehishimukila, to take a deep
breath, sigh.
Shishimtiiia, ku, v. t. to touch, re-
mind ; to revive a person after a fit.
Sbishimiislia, ku, v, t, caus, shi-
shimuka, to revive a person from
a fit, to awaken.
Shishhxa, ku, v, t. to scratch the
head.
Shishishini, n, i a, an owl.
ShisweBhamdzo, n, i a. a patient,
persevering person.
Shitingo, n, 7. //. pieces of cloth
about a yard long.
Shitantas6kwe, n. 1 a, name of a
forest tree, good mining timber.
Shiti, ku, v.t* to stay, remain; a
mu chi shiti, stay ye still — a
parting salutation.
Shitidfla, ku, v. t, to veil behind a
curtain, to sit in front of another
to hide him from view, to shelter
from the wind.
Shitikizha, ku, v, U to place, to
put.
Shituktilo, n, 7. //. white garments
of Europeans.
ShiubUbUy n,\a. a disrespectfol
person.
Shiza, ku, v, /. to cut hair.
Shizha^ ku, v, /. caus, shia, to make
black, dirty.
She (i), pass, pro, cl, 7, 8, 9. //.
their, theirs. Prefixed by gin.
parts. Mwini wa-shd, their
master,
(a) num. part, cl, 7, 8, 9. //., e^,
shintu sho-bili, two things.
Shoba, ku, v, t, to clean, dust, rub,
polish ; ku dishoba, to rub fat
on the face ; ku shoba muAi
mafiita, to anoint a dead person
with fat.
8hob61a, ku, v» u to mb in the
hands, as an ear of znaoheme.
Shob68h6ba, ku, v, t. redupU
shoba, to brush dirt off the hands
after working.
8h6ka, ku, v.u to arrive (of a
canoe).
Bhokauka, ku, v. i, to be weak,
tired.
Shokalila, ku, v. /. to strip maize-
cobs off the stalks.
8hokol61a, ku, v. t, to call any one
by his old name, to unscrew.
8hok6ta, ku, v, t, to rub between
the fingers, to kill an insect in
that way ; ku dishokota, to rub
a sore eye.
Sholatika, ku, v, i. to speak under
the breath, to murmur, grumble.
Shdma, ku, v. t, to charge a gun.
Sh5ma, ku, v. t, to trust, confide
in, to rely upon.
8h6mbo, n, 7. //. edible leaves of
cassava.
Shonibol61o, n, icu the kudu.
Shombonamangdma, n, i a, small-
pox.
Shomdka, ku, v. i, cap, shoma, to
be trustworthy, faithful.
Shomdna, ku, v. t, reL shoma, to
trust for.
-shdmeshi, eulj, faithful, trust-
worthy.
Shdxnezha, ku, v, t, caus. shoma,
to cause to trust, to promise.
Bhomya, ku, v. i, caus, shoma^ to
promise.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
465
Shongolwa, n. 1 a, the millipede.
81i6nta, ku, v, t, to kiss.
Bhonttfna, ku, v, /. rec. shonta, to
kiss each other,
•shonto, (ufy'. small, little.
Shuktita, ku, v.i, to move about
when asleep.
ShtLls, ku, v.t, to cleanse by rub-
bing, to obliterate.
Shftmbwa, it. i 0. a lion.
Shumbwa, n, 7. //. grain-bins.
ShnmptUa, ku, v. $. to wither, to
be withered.
Soba, ku, V, $, to jest, joke, play
with one.
Sob^na, ku, v. i, to play.
Sobanina, ku, v, t, reL sobana, to
play for, amuse.
SobMiya^ ku, v,t, caus, sobana,
to cause to play.
8ob6lela,ku, V. u to walk stealthily,
on tiptoe.
Bofwiltk, ku, v,i» to be unclean,
dirty.
Sofw&Bha, ku, v. t, caus, sofwala,
to defile, make dirty.
86ka, ku, v. i, to be established (of
customs); e,g, sbianBa sha ka
86kabobo kwa Iieaa, the customs
were established thus by God.
Soka, ku, V. /. to go and examine
traps.
Sokola, ku, v.U to remove husk
from grain.
Sokdnya, ku, v, /. to dislodge an
animal from its den.
8dkwe, If. z a. an ape.
861a, ku, V, /. to taste, eat a little.
8ol6ka, ku, v. t, to try, attempt.
8olela, ku, v. t, reL sola, to taste
on behalf of another.
8ol61a, ku, V, f. to precede, to lead
the way.
8olol61a, ku, V, t, rel. solola, to go
in front of, to precede.
Soldaha, ku, v. t, caus, solola, to
cause to precede, to send ahead.
861we, n, i a. the honey guide.
86raa, ku, v, t, to eat new grain.
8dma, ku, v, t, to sheathe a knife, &c.
86mba, ku, v, t, to offer a person
payment, doubting whether it will
be accepted.
8om1:62lia, ku, v. t. to offer a per-
son anything without intending to
give it.
8om6na, ku, v, t, to put the
masomo in a roof.
Somdna, ku, v, t, to extract a
charge from a gun, to unsheathe
a knife.
8om6na, ku, v, i. to give birth for
the first time (of a cow).
Bomondna, ku, v. t, rev, soma, to
draw grass out of a thatch.
Somonw^na, ku, v.t, rev,. rel„
soma, to draw out for.
Somp^la, ku, v, t, to look out for
any one, to expect visitors.
8omp61a, ku, v. t, to pick one thing
out of a lot, to snatch, as when you
are about to give a thing and the
person snatches it out of your hand.
86nda, ku, v, t, to divine.
Bond^la, ku, v.t, rel, sonda, to
look into (as into a grain-bin).
8ond6ka, ku, v, i, to be mad.
8ond68ha, ku,2r. /. caus, sondoka,
to madden, to make mad.
86nga, ku, v,i. to heap up {i.e,
when a basket of grain is already
full).
Songel^la, ku, v,t, to add one
statement to another, as different
witnesses.
Songwfila, ku, v, t, to become wise.
8ongw61a, ku, v, /. to make a hole
in the ground for a pole.
0onkali&, ku, v, /. to eat a little
(as when one has already had
enough), to say * a few words *.
8onk6to, n, la, the pinnacle put
on the top of a hut.
Sdnsa, ku, v, i, to bud, to sprout.
Sdnsa, ku, v, t, to light (a candle).
86nta, ku, v, t, to pick, choose.
8ont61a, ku, v. t, to pick up things
one by one.
86nza, ku, v. t, to start a song.
S6nzha, ku, v, t, caus, sonda, to
cause or help divine.
SosaXka, ku, v. t, to conceal news,
tidings, affairs.
8os6ka, ku, v, t, to hide.
8o8ol61a, ku, v. t, to pull sticks out
of a fire.
Hh
466
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Bosdma, ku, v, t. to smart.
Sosomyay kn, v.t, cams, soiolnay
to cause to smart.
Sotaoka, kit, v, u pers, rep, sotoka)
to keep on jumping, to hop as
insects.
Sotekela, ku, v, U ttl. sotoka, to
spring out upon any one (as a dog
or lion).
Sotoka, kn, v. i, to jump, spring.
Sowa, ku, vA, to throw away,
to abort Ku soWa mwaua) to
commit infanticide. Peus, swcrwa.
BowaOa, ku, v. t. pers, rep, sowa, to
throw away, waste.
86Blia, ku, V. U to console, comfort.
Sdeha, ku, V, t„ caus, sowa, to cause
abortion.
Stiba, ku, V, i, to micturate.
Bubfla, ku, V, i, reL suba, to be
red.
Bubidlsha, kU, v, /. reL fW. suba,
to be very r^, crimson.
Subuka, ku, v, i. stat, subula
•• ku pubuka q.T. ; also of people^
to repent; of Animals, to be alert,
nervous, through being much
hunted*
Bubula, ku,z;./. ^ ku pubula, q.v.
Buchftma, ku, v» i. to be homesick.
XTsunu ndi suclieme ku bana-
isha, to-day I am homesick for
my home.
Budika, ku, v, i. cap, sula, to be
hateful.
Sudlsha, ku, tk U int, sula, to hate
strongly.
^sudisM, adj, hateful, abominable.
Btika, ku, V. i, to marty first. Of
a man who marries a woman, and
shortly after she leaves him and
goes to another man. People then
ask, nguni oWa ka mu suka f
who married her first ?
Biika, ku, v. t, to make butter, to
chum, to softed a skin.
Buk&ma, ku, v, u « kU suohama^
q.v.
Btiko, fv. I a. nippU of a muzzle*
loader.
Suktila, ku, 9. /. to dress the hair.
Buktila^ ku, v, t% to sift, sieve.
Bukultila, ku, v, i, to gargle, wash
out the mouth. Eu diduktilula,
to gargle (also to desire strongly
anting not fit for one).
BukuluEha, ku, v.t. cam, artiku-
lula, to cause to gargle, f o ghre
medicine for gargling.
Buk6ma,ku, v. t, to Mance. Ku
sukuma isumo, to bakuite il
spear in taking aim.
Bukumtma, ku, v,i, to separate
milk and butter after churning.
Buktisha, ku, v, t, to try, attempt
Btila, ku, V, t, to hate.
Blila, ku, V. t, to defaecate.
Sul&na, ku, v, t, rec, sula, to hate
each other.
Bul6iiya, ku, z^ /. rec, caus, sula,
to cause to hate each other.
Sultibi, n, i a, the s^ruyi ant
Bultila, ku, v, i. to have diarrhoea.
BuliUa, ku, V, t, to mould ballets.
SlUwe, ft. I a. a hare.
Suman&ito, ku, v, i. to persist rh. a
thing, to adhere to it.
Bumfka, ku, v. t. to cup, to perform
the cupping operation.
Btunpa, ku, v, t, to bore (of the
borer insect).
Bumpa, ku, v, t, to place on the
head.
Bumpatika, ku, v.i. to jolt, be
jolted.
Bumptika, ku, v, i, stat, sumpula,
to be raised, promoted, exalted.
BumptUa, kU, v, t, to promote,
eicalt.
Bumpiizha, ku, v, t, caus, sumpu-
ka, to promote^ elevate, exalt
Stiuda, ku, V, t, to pmsh any one
when there is fib room.
Bund&na, ku, v, t, rec, sunda, to
push muttudly when there is no
room.
Buudtika> ku, v, i, stat. sundula,
to leave a pkce after resting.
BtLndtUa, ku, v, t. to move people
(f . g, carriers) off after a period of
resting.
Stinga, ku, v, t^ tb bind, to be in
travail (of a woman). U la sunga
ohindi, she has a long confine*
ment.
Bunga^ ku, v, i, to stir up, stimulate.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
461
Bxingfauk, kn, v, i. to be stirred up,
stimulated.
Sungtoya, ku, v. t. catis, rangana,
to stir up, sthnulate.
Stingtila, kn, v, t, to lead (soldiers).
Eu distLngnla, to lead oneself,
to offer oneself for a service ; e,g,
namuBhincrididi mbwadi mwa-
mi wa di8antfala,wa amba'ti-—
Ngani ngu tu ya ase ? N. as
he was a chief he offered him-
self, saying, ' Who will go with
me?'
Sungulula, ka, v, t, rev, snngai to
unbind, unfasten, release.
Sangututa^ kn, v, u to have ' pins
and needles'.
Sunktila, kn, 9. /. » kn pukala.
Sunkom^a, ku, v,i, to sit on
one*s toes.
Sonktuha, ku, v. t, caus, snnkuta,
to make lame.
Sunktita, ku, v. i. to be lame.
Sunkutalka, ku, z'. ^ to be a bit
lame.
Sunsukila, ktt, v. /. to take up a
song after interrupticn, to return
to a matter after leaving it for
a time.
Sunslina, ku, v. /. to peck (like a
fowl at a piece of meat).
Suntima, ku, v. 1. to kneel.
Suntamina, ku, 9. /. reL suntamay
to kneel to.
8untuka, ku, v. t, to die at once,
as an aninial shot and expiring
immediately.
'Sunu, adv, to-day.
Sun6na, ku, v, t, to break bread.
Stipa, ku, V. t. to bathe a wound.
Supila, ku, V, i. to be useless.
Stisa, ku, V, t, to carry away.
8iisha, ku, v. i. to despise, disr^ard,
pay no heed to a message.
8usu. Muntu»8U8U, a good person.
Susula, ku, V, /. to eat early in the
day, or at noon.
Susun&na, ku, v,u to be almost
dry.
Swa, ku, V, i, to be emaciated.
Swang&na, ku, v, i, to meet, to
join.
8wang^ya, ku, v,f, caus, swa-
H
ngana, to cause to meet, to join,
to add up, as figures.
Swiya, ku, v, i, to visit.
Swefsha, ku, v. 1. int, sweya, to
be very bright, holy.
Sw^ka, kn, v, u stat, sowa, to be
lost.
Swekdla, ku, v, i, stcU, reL sowa,
to be lost tO) by. Nda sweke-
Iwa mwanangu, I am lost to by
my child, i, e. my child is lost.
8wena, ku « ku sena, to approach.
8 w6ya, ku, v, i. to be bright, clean,
holy.
Sw^Bha, ku, V. t, caus, sweya, to
make clean, holy. Ku swesha
moso, to be patient, persevering.
SweBhlsha, ku, v.t, caus. int.
Bweytk, to make very clean,
sanctify.
Swile, ^rf. cf ku «ula. Wezo
m,uxitu ndi mu swlle, I hate
that person.
T, pronounced as in English.
Ta, negative verbal particle'!, e.g,
ta ba man! midimo, they do not
work. IT ta dyi, you must not eat.
Ta I voc, tata, my father !
Taba, ku, v, t, to answer.
Tabila, ku, v, t, reL taba, to
answer for.
Taftina, ku, v. t, to chew, masticate.
T&ka, ku, V. i. to eat a great deal.
Takana, ku, v.i. rec. taka, to be
satisfied with food (of a lot of
people).
Takanya, ku, v. i. rec. caus, taka,
of a lot of people crowding to get
food.
Takata, ku, v. i. to be dissatisfied.
Takolapakasha, ku, v. i, to move
the lips without speaking.
Taltila, ku, v,t. to open up the
belly of an animal.
Tima, ku, v, t. to falsely deny. See
Intamo.
Tamaiika, ku, v, i. to wander in
speech, in ordinary speech as well
as in delirium.
Timba, ku, v, t, to take grain out
of a bin.
T&mba, ku, zvA to invite.
h 2
468
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Tambfila, ka, v, i. to run about, as
calves, in play.
TambikA, ku, v. t, to hold oat the
hand in order to give, to offer.
Tambikila, ku, v. t, rel, taxnbika,
to offer to, to hold out the hand
to.
Tambikfaha, ku, v, t, to give one
to take to another.
Tambila, ku, v, t, to work a paddle
towards you when taming a canoe,
to invite on behalf of.
Tamb61a, ku, v» t. to receive.
Taxnbtizha, ka, v.t. caus, taxnbula,
to cause to receive.
Tambozhdnya, ka, v, t, €aus, rec,
caus. tambula, to pass from one
to another, to circulate.
Tambwalla> ka, v.u to totter as
a child learning to walk.
Tambwila, ku, v, t, rel, tambula,
to receive on behalf of.
Tamikisha, ku, v. t. to bear false
witness.
Tamina, ku, v,.t, rel, tama, to
deny for.
Taminlna, ku, v, /. to contradict,
to cross words.
Tinda, ku, v, A to drive away, to
disperse, to banish, to put away
a wife, to dismiss.
Tandab&la, ka, v, u to stretch out,
V, t. to steer a boat with a rudder.
"Wa tandabala matende, his
legs are stretched out. lioyo
Iwa tandabala, the quitch-grass
stretches out, runs out (in grow-
ing).
Tandila, ka, v,U rel, tanda^ to
drive away for.
Tandubud&a, ka, tu, i, cap, tanda-
bala, to be stretchable, to be
elastic.
-tandabadishi, adj, elastic.
Tandabtika, ka, v, i, to be stretched
out.
Tandubtila, ka, v, /. to poll out,
as elastic.
Tftnga, ka, vA, to begin (of the
rain), to be the first.
Tinga, ka, v, t. to make a covenant.
Nda tanga mulongo, I make a
covenant with him.
Tang£Ui, ku, v,L to rejoice, to be
glad.
Tang&na, ku, v. /. rec, tanga, to
make a covenant mutually.
Tangftnya, ku, v,t. to cause to
rejoice, to make glad.
Tang&Bha, ku, v. t. caus, tangala,
to gladden, cause to rejoice.
Tan^ina^ ku, v, f . to be firsts to
commence.
Tinka, ku, v.t, to travel steadily.
Tinta, ku, v. i, to go away {e. g,
to Bukwayo) to work, to climb
(? Tonga).
Tant6na, ku, v, i, to disperse, to
sit at a distance from each other.
Tantanta, cuh), in different direc-
tions. Xa ba tia budio tanta-
nta, they simply ran away in
different directions.
Tantika, ku, v, i, to sleep up on a
platform.
Tantum^a, ka, v,t, to place a
thing near by.
•tanzhi, adj. first.
Tapa, ku, v.t, to extract honey
from a nest.
Tap&la, ku, v, i, to shake. Munta
u la tapUa, said when footsteps
ase heard outside.
Tapata, ku, v, i, to rebuke.
Tapatila, ku, v, t. to rebuke kindly.
Tapiiaha, ku, v. t, caus. tapala, to
shake, to rouse a sleeping man,
&c.
Tata, u, I a. my father.
T&ta, ku, V, t. to prepare food.
Tatana, ku, v. i, to mourn loudly.
Tatanftna, ku, v, $, to stand with
legs stretched out.
Tataaba, ku, v. t, of a lot of men
overcoming and beating one.
Tatauka, ku^ v. i. to be scattered,
wasted.
Tataula, ka, v. /. to scatter, waste.
Tatela, ku, v, t, to load (a gun).
Tateau, n, i a, our father.
Tatila, ku, v. t.rel. tata, to prepare
food for.
-tatu, num. third. Buahikn bwa-
tatu, the third day.
TattUa, ku, v, t, to castrate.
-tatwo, num. three.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
469
Taya, ku, v.i, to begin to take
things out of a fiill box, &c. ; to
throw ash upon a person — ^this
is reckoned a very serious fault.
See Appendix 7, dltaya.
Teh, represents ch preceded by ex-
plosive sound.
Tohita I interj, I don*t know \
Te (i) Neg, part, Te6, he is absent
Ka te6, he was absent.
(2) Contr. s ta + i.
T^a, "kxL, V, t, to trap, to ensnare.
T6a, ku, V, t, to bring forward the
hands, &c., to receive.
T6ba, ka, v,t. to copulate. Teba,
of the man ; tebwa» of the woman.
TebtUa, ku, v. /. to harvest.
T6ka, ku, v,t, to draw water, to
dip.
Tekina, ku, v, i, to roll from side
to side (of a canoe), to stagger as
a drunkard.
Tekdnya, ka, v, t, caus. tekana,
to cause to roll from side to
side.
-teke, adf, wet, moist
Tek^Ia, ka, v, t. rel, teka, to draw
for.
Tek6, loc, phr, he is not there or
here.
Tektina, ku, v. i, to be ticklish.
Tektinya, ku, v, /. to tickle.
TelaSka, ku, v, t, to think, consider,
suppose.
Tel^kela, ku, v, i, to be clear, quiet
(of water).
>telekele, adj, quiet, clear (of water).
Tel^la, ku, v, t. to hear, understand,
to feel, to obey.
Telel&na, ku, v. t, rec, telela, to
hear, understand each other.
Telel^ka, ku, v, i, cap. telela, to
be audible, understandable.
Telel^sha, ku, v, U int, telela, to
hear distinctly, to understand well,
'teleleshi, adj, audible, understand-
able.
T^ma, ku, v, t, to fell trees, hew.
Tembatila, ku, v, /. to repeat one*s
names, to praise.
Temb^ka, ku, v, i. to carry a load
slung between on a pole, as a
machila.
TembiUa, ka, v, /. to tell one's own
names. Eo tembola maghipa
ako onse, tell all thy names.
Tem6ka, ku, v,t, to dry fish or
meat over a fire.
-temeke, €idj, dried, smoked. Bu-
Bane butemeke, dried meat,
biltong.
Tem6, loc. phr, he is not (in) there.
TOnda, ku, v, t, to cut with knife,
axe, or saw.
T6ndeka, ku, v, t, to point.
T^ndekela, ku, v, t, reh tendeka,
to point to.
Tonga, ku, v,t, to be dissatisfied
with, to complain about VTa
tenga madi iJcwe, he is dissatis-
fied about his money.
Teaga, ku, v. /: to sell.
Tengela, ku, v, /. to sell for.
Tengela, ku, v, /. reL tenga, to be
dissatisfied for.
Tengen^zha, ku, v» i, to carry on
the head without holding or sup-
porting the load.
Tengtiila, ku, v, t, to treat an elder
or superior with disrespect.
T6nta, ku, v, t, to bum, to set on
fire, to scald, to singe. Ku tenta
butale, to smelt iron.
Tenteb61a, ku, v, t. to be slack (of
a line).
Tentumuka, ku, v. i, stat, tentu-
nLuna,to be cracked, to be slightly
open (of joints, seams).
TentuTn<ina, ku, v, /. to bring off
chickens, to hatch.
Te6, loc, phr. he is not there or here.
Tepauka, ku, v, u to be tempted.
Tepalila, ku, v. t, to tempt one to
do wrong.
Tepek^Bha, ku, v, L to whisper.
TepekeBh&na, ku, v. t, rec. tepe-
keBha, to whisper to each other.
Tepula, ku, v, t. to gather and
carry away much fruit.
Tesha, kUjZ/./. caus. teka, to draw
water with, to cause or help to
draw. Nina oha ku tesha, I
have nothing to draw with.
Tet6ma, ku, v. i. to creak.
TeBha, ku, v.i, to give a person
food.
470
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Teihima, ku, v, t. to be slippery
(like a fish).
Tezhiintika, ku, v, u to slip and
falL
Ti, ». I a. for, (Eng.) tea.
Ti, ku, V. t. to say. Used to express
< about, on the point oi\ A ti a
yaye shuxnbwa, when he was
about to kill a lion.
Tia, ku, V. i, to be afraid of, to fear,
to run away.
Tidna, ku, v, i, rec, tia, to run to-
gether.
Tianina, ku, v. t, rec, reL tia, to
mn towards.
Tidila, ku, v, t, rel, tila, to poor
into, upon.
Tidimtika, ku, v. u to jump back-
wards in alarm, to shudder after
taking nasty medicine.
Tifdka, ku, v, i. to be indented.
Tif waudika, ku, v. i. cap, tifwaula,
to be indentable.
Tifwauka, ku, v, i, to be indented.
Tifwaula, ku, v. t. to indent
Tika,.ku, v. i. cap. tia, to be dread-
ful, terrible, awfuL
Tflca, ku, V. i. to be spilt
Tikaika, ku, v, t, to be spilt
Tikalsha, ku, v, t, to spill.
Tikila, ku, v.t. of a number of
people putting fault upon one
person, either truly or falsely, —
ba xnu tikila makani.
Tikinya, ku, v,L to shake. Ku
ditikinya, to shrug the shoulders.
Tikita, ku, v. t. for, (Eng. ticket)
to mark a labour ticket.
Tiktila, ku, v, i, to belch (of
dogs).
Tikumdka, ku, v. i, of a tree cast-
ing its leayes.
Tikumtina, ku, v, t, to shake the
head, to refuse, to shake. Mu-
Bune wa ditikumuna, the bird
flaps its wings. Iieaa wa tiku-
xnuna masalo akwe,Leza shakes
his skins (of gentle thunder).
Tila, ku (or ku tiila), v, t, rel, tia,
to run to, for, &c.
Tila, ku, V, t, to pour, to spill.
Timba, ku, v. i, to be growing and
getting strength (of a child).
Tlmbatimba, ku, v.t. to press
matter out of an abscess.
Tinde, if. i a. a fish poison.
Tlnta, ku, to separate two things
by means of a different thing, sndi
as to put a small person between
two big ones, a cidf between two
oxen, &c.
Tintdna, ku, v,u to be different
(of people). Tudi tintene, we
are of different tribes, &c.
Tintimana, ku, v, i, to be breast-
deep in water or a hole.
Tisha, ku, v, t. cans, tia, to make
afraid, to cause to flee.
To, (i) Pots, pro, cl, 6. pL theur,
theirs.
(2) Num, part, cl, 6. //., e,g,
twambo to-bili, two sayings.
(3) Contr, « ta -<- u.
Toba, ku, v, t. to sprinkle.
Tobela, ku, v, t, to follow, to
chase. Ku tobela mikondo, to
follow a spoor.
Tcbw61a, ku, v.t, to pour water
upon clay and tread it.
Todia, dem, pro, cL 6. pi. yon,
yonder.
Tok6, loc, phr. cl, 2. it is not there,
or here.
T61a, ku, V, t, to take to, to carry
to.
ToUla> ku, V. t. rel, tola, to take
towards, to take for.
Toma, ku, v, t, to taste food when
cooked, to begin eating.
Tdmbay ku, v, t, to take faX out of
a pot.
Tombwe, n, i a, tobacco.
Tomana, ku, v, t. rel, toma, to
taste for.
Tom6, loc, phr, cl, 2, it is not here,
or there.
Tomwena, ku, v.t, to cram the
mouth with food.
T6nda, ku, v, i, to be taboo, to be
forbidden. See Eng.-Ila Vocab.
Taboo.
Tond^ka, ku, v. t, to point
Tondek61a, ku, v, t, rel, tondeka,
to point towards.
Tondesha, ku, v, t, to point
out
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
47^
Tondila, ku, v.i, r^U tonda, to
prohibit on account of.
Tondya, fcu, v, /, cau$, ton4a, to
taboo, forbid.
Tdiiffa, ku, V. i. to grumble^ marnuir.
Tongatika, ku, v. i, to grumble.
Tongatila, ku, v, i. to be sad, ^orry,
disappointed.
Tongausha, ku, v,t, caus, ton-
gauka, to cause to grumble.
Tongela, ku, v. i, to breathe hard,
groan, moan.
Tongoka, ku, v. i, of a man or wife
eating food alone ai^l not giving
to the other.
Tong61a, ku, v, /. to pick o^t, as
with a knife or pin. Ku dito-
ngola, to pick the teeth.
T6nka, ku, v, /. to pu^h, to pQsh
off.
Tonkila, ku, v,t^ rtl, tonkay to
push towards.
Tonkisha, ku, v. U int, tonka, tp
push hard.
T5nta, ku, v. t. to foUow a spoor ;
fig. to speak out a whole affair,
follow up all details, to leare off
old habits.
Tont61a, ku, v, i, to be cold^ to be
quiet, to be well. Tontola! be
quiet, silence !
Tontolelwa, ku, v, pass. rel.
tontola, to be left quiet, at peace.
Tontolo, part, Wa tont(^ ton-
tolo, he was very quiet
Tont6zha, ku, v, t, caus. tantolay
to make silent, quiet, to makje
cold, e.g, by pouring water on
any one.
T6nzha, ku, v. t. to taboo, forbid.
Toto, dem, pro. cl. 6. //. those.
Totu, dem. pro. cl. 6. pL these.
Tdwa, ku, v, t. to dazzle, to tempo-
rarily blind by putting something
in the eye ; pass, twewa. Izuba
dia ntowa, the sun dazzles me.
Tu, (i) Classifier cl. d. pi.
(2) Pers. pro, i p. pi. we, us ; also
cl. 6. pi.
Tuba, ku, v. t. to be white.
Tubele, stibs. pro. prep, i /. ph
cl. 6 pi. us (where we are), them
(where they are)..
Tubiem, n. 6. //. a smaU quantity
of sour milk.
Tabw^tu, n.6.pl. i^smairquaQtity
of beer.
Ttibya, ku, v.t cat4s, tuba* to
make white,y?^. to gladden,
TtLdie P interr. pro. cl. 6.pl, which?
Tudyo, n. 6. pi. a small quantity of
food.
Ttika, ku, V. t. to swear at, revile,
to curse, to ezepr ate, to call foul
names.
Tukimba, n, 6, //. a small qiiantity
oi cassava.
Tukina, k^« v.i. rec. tuka, to
curse each other.
Tok^ni, n. 6, pi. small affairs,
details, small facts^
Tukuku, n. 6. pi. a small quantity
of strong beer.
Tuktila, ku, v.t. to shine up, to
scrub, to polish.
yukumilka, ku, v. i. to be inflated,
to be puffed up, proud,
^kuxnti^a, ku, v. t. to inflate.
Tuktingu, n. 6. pi. a small quantity
of cr^fgn.
Tiila, ku, V. t. to put on the ground,
of a burden*
Tula, ku, V. t. to take a present to
a chief,
Tulauka, ku, v . i. pers. rep. tuluka,
to be pierced slightly, to be per-
forated. HijEuaansia wa tulauka,
the forest is a bit light; as in early
fqorping or evening.
Tulaukila, ku, v.t. to be partly
burnt, as a. stretch of country.
Tulaula* ku, V. t. to p>er£6rate. Ki^
tulaijila menso, to pat out
eyes.
Tulembi, n. 6« pi. a snoall quantity
of arrow poison
Tulo, n. 6. //. sleep.
Tuluka, ku, v. i. iat^ tulvla, to be
bored, pierced.
Tuldla, ku, v. t. to bore, pierce.
Tulungu, n. 6. pi. a small quantity
of beads. ^
Tull&sha, ku, v.t. caus. tulula,
to cause or help to. pierce, to
pierce by means ot
TUma, ku, v. t. to sei^, njii^ct*
472
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ttimba, ku, v, i, to gather (of an
abscess, &€.)•
Tumbatfla, leu, v. U to hold care*
fully in the hand,
-tumbe, €ulj, female, child-bearing.
Tnmbfka, kn, v. /. to give a person
all his things.
Tumbila, ku, v, i, to gather, sup-
purate. Bwa tumbila bushila
odimwi, it is suppurating again.
Tumbuka, ko, v. i. to be delivered
of a child.
Tumbusha, ku, v. t, cans, tumba-
ka, to deliver, to act as midvafe.
Tumlna, ka, v.t, reL tuxna, to
send to or for.
Tumpwika, ku, v. t, to put meat
into a pot without first cutting
it up.
Tunakwabo, poss, phr, cL 6. //.
their, of their place.
Tunakwako, poss,phr. cl. 6. pi. thy.
Tunakwakwe, poss, phr, cL 6. //.
his.
Tanakwanflru, poss» phr, cL 6. //•
my.
Tunakwenu, poss, phr, cL 6. //.
your, of your place.
Tunakwesu, poss, phr, cl, 6. //.
our, of our place.
Tun&aiay ka, v, t. to look intently
in one direction, to stare.
Tanamfna, ku, v, t. rel, tunama,
to look intently towards.
Tunclielenchele,//. ^^anchelen-
chele. Baksintu ba la tuna
tunchelenchele, the women
salute by crying shrilly.
Tunga^ ku, v, t, to thread a needle,
to thread beads, to pierce as when
sewing thatch on.
Ttinglka, ku, v, t, to put up a roof.
Tunta, ku, v, t, to shake things out
of a bag.
Tuntatika, ku, v, u to beat (of the
heart).
Tuntudwila, ku, v,t, rel, tun-
tulula, to pour water upon, as
in watering plants.
Tuntula, ku, zr. /. »= ku Bubulula.
Tuntuliila, ku, v, t, to pour water.
Tunvuka, n, 6. //. a small quantity
of beeswax.
Tunyoni, it. 6. //. a necklace of
beads.
Tusesa, if. 6. pU a small quantity
of marrow.
Tutubala, ku, v, i, to hide away.
Tutuluka, ku, v, i, stat. tutulula,
to be open (of the eyes).
TutultUa, ku, v,t, to open (the
eyes).
Tuttima, ku, v, i, to shiver, tremble,
to quake.
Tuula, ku s ku tula, v. t, to give
a present to a chief.
Twa (i) gen, part, cl. 6. //. (2)
pers,pro, i /. //. we. (3) pers
pro, cl, 6. //. they.
Twa, ku, V, t, to stamp grain.
Twadfka, ku, v,i, cap, twala, to
be marriageable.
Twala, ku, v,t,X.o marry.
Twalinay ku, v, t, rec. twala, to
marry each other.
Twalo, subs, pro, simple cl, 6. //•
they, themselves.
Tw61a, ku, V, i, to be on the look*
out, to spy.
Tweltika, ku, v, i, to perceive.
Tw^ha, ku, v, /. (used in count-
ing). Ikumi o shi twesha
sbobili, twelve.
Tweta, ku, v, i, to breathe.
Twetana, ku, v, i, to decrease, in
number or size.
Twet&nya, ku, v, /. caus, twetana,
to decrease,
•twetene, adj, decreased.
Twika, ku, v, t, to put a load on
another's shoulders. "Wa dit-
wika, he loads himself.
Twlla, ku, V, /. to put poison into
water to destroy fish.
Twila, ku, v, /. reU twa, to stamp
grain for.
Twimba, n. 6. pi, wrinkles between
the eyes.
Twine, n, 6, pi, a small ^quantity of
salt
U. The vowel has two sounds — ^u
as 00 in moon and ii as in full.
U, {1) pers, pro. sing, a/, thou ; also
3/. sing, cl, I and 2. he, it. (2)
modified form of the locativi mu.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
459
Shaaka, kn, v. t to give a present
• freely.
Shank&oa, ku, v. i, to be narrow,
to shrink.
Shank&nya, ku, v.i. caus. sha-
nkana, to narrow,
-shankene, adj. narrow.
ShankdlOi n»i a, 9, wart-hog.
ShaTiBhatlka. ka, v.t, stat, sha-
nshaula, to be entirely brokoi
np and destroyed.
Shanshatila, ku, v, t, to break up
a thing entirely, to crush, as yon
crush a snake's head.
Shanshdla, ku, v.t. to break,
damage.
Shany^igay ku» v.t, to crush, as
you crush clay in making mortar.
Shanza, if. 1 a. a name given to a
lion.
81i6nza, n. *l»pl. of chanaa, q. v,
Shapidlo, ». i a. a hawk.
Bhaaha, kn, v.t, cans, ahala, to
detain.
Shashadfka, ku, v. 2. to stumble
(without falling).
Shasubfla, n. i a. the Pallah.
Bhat&mbe, M.ia.z. dumb person.
She, see Shi.
Shedia, dem. pro. d. 7, 8, 9.//. yon,
yonder.
Shejani, n,\€t, for, {En^.) a ser-
geant of police.
Sh6xnbwe, n. la. & ram.
Shempela, n, i a. n, rhinoceros.
Sheshi, dem. pro. cl, 7, 8, 9. //.
these.
Shesho, dem. pro. cl. 7, 8, 9. //.
those.
Shetwiy n. i a. name given to a lion.
Shi (i) classifier cl. *j.pl.\pers. and
rel. pro. same cl. , also cl. 8 and 9. pL
(3) Negative part, used with \p,
sing, only; e.g. Shi bwene, I
have not seen.
(3) Shi and She form the initial
syllables of many nouns >» Sha.
Shia, "kxiyV.t. to leave behind, for*
sake, desert.
Shia, ku, v. i. to be dark, black, to
be dusk ; kwa 8hia> the afternoon
salutation. Moao wa shia, the
heart is black, i. e, it is sad.
Shiba, ku, v. t, to whistle, to blow
a trumpet ; ku shiba muloahi,
to whistle ; ku shiba mpeta, to
blow a trumpet.
• Shibfla, ku, v. t. to moisten putty,
&C., by working it with the
fingers.
Shibele, subs. pro. prep. cl. 7, 8, 9.
//. them (where they are).
Shiblnda, n,ia.ti chief.
Shibomb61wa, /». i a. a kind of ant.
ShibudikHa, n, 1 a. ti kind of
snake.
ShiblifWi, ». I a. a jealous person.
Shibula, ku, v. t. to give presents
to a recalcitrant wife or husband
to induce her or him to submit.
ShiblilebtUe, n*ia. a bird with
long yellow legs seen on the brink
of a river.
Shibumftmbe, n.i a. an adulterer
(esp. of one act),
Shibun6nga, n.i a. a deliberate
person.
Shibusdngo, n.i a. sl wise person.
Shibutimbo, n.i a, a ravenous
person.
Shibuzftndi, n, 1 a. a precious^
valued person.
Shibw^uQSa, n.ia.Si genial, amiable
person.
Shibw&nBhi, n.ia. o. disagreeable,
quarrelsome person.
Shichibw&ba, n. 1 a. the bustard.
Shichilaka, n, la. a person with
an impediment in speech, a
stammerer.
8hichimb6mbe, n.i a, a v^^^on
afflicted with small-pox, a man
with small-pox marks on his face.
Shiohimini, n. 1 a, a. crook-back.
Shichimo, n.ia.tL person of stature,
a tall person.
Shichimdnswe, n. i a. a left:
handed person.
Shiohimptoipa, n.i a, a. bustard.
Shiohingongo, n. 1 a. the sand-
grouse (or shijingongo).
Shiohinguni, n.i a. an obstinate,
self-willed person.
Shichina^nda, n.i a, & leper.
Bhiohintanda, n.i a. a naked
person.
471
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
fRimbft, ka, v. t. to g&thei (pt in
■bsccEs, Sec).
TombatflB, ko, v. I. to hold cue-
full; in the hand.
-tambe, ad;, female, child-beuing.
Tnmblka, ka, v. t. (o give a penon
all bte things.
Tonibila, kn, v. i. to gather, tap-
pnrste. Bws tmnbilB biublla
odlmwi, it ii snppDiating ngun.
Tambaka, ku, v. i. to be deliveted
of a child.
Tmnboaha, ka, f. A <ratu. tombii-
ka, to deliver, to act as inidwile.
Tuminft, ka, v.t. rtl. tania, to
irfor.
Vumpwlka, ka, v. I. to put meat
into a pot wtthont fint cntting
it up.
Tonakirabo, pess. fkr. tl. 6. pt.
tbeii, of (heir place.
Taiiakwako,^i:r./ilr.i:/.e./Jl thy.
Tanakirakwe, ftts. fkr. cL 6. pi.
Tnoakmiaga, post. pkr. cl. 6. pi,
my.
Tunakireau, pois. phr. cl. 6. pi.
yonr, of your place.
Tunakwoaa, poss. phr. cl. 6. pi.
Tnnima, kn, v. t. to look intently
in one direction, to stare.
Tnnamiiia, ka, v. I. ret. tuiuma,
to loolc intently towards.
Tnnokelonaliele,//. ^/kanohelvn-
okelfl. Bakainta ba la nma
taBohalenohele, tlic women
salute by crying shrilly.
TouKa, ku, D. I. to thread a needle,
to thiead beads, to pierce lis when
sewing thatch on.
Tasgfka, ka, v. I, to pnt up a roof.
Ttinta, ka, v. t. to shake tlungs ont
Tontaiilia, ka, v. i. to beat (of the
heart).
Tantudwlla, ka, v.t, rtl. tan-
tnlula, to poor water upon, as
in watering plants.
Tantula, ka, r, t, ■• kn aabalala.
Tuntaliila, kn, v. f. to poor water.
Tanvoka, ». 6. pi, a small quantity
of beeswax.
Tonronl, m. & //. a nedclace of
Tnaasa, m, 6. ^. a small quantity
of marrow.
Tatabala, kn, r. i, to hide away.
Tntaloka, ka, v. i. stat. tatolnla,
to be opeo (of the eyes).
TutnllUa, ka, v. I, to open (tlte
eyes).
Tot&inB, ko, V. i. to shlTer, tremble,
Tanla, ka <• ka tiila, v. i. to give
a present to a chief.
Twft (i) gtit. part, cl, 6. pt, (a)
pen. pre. i p. pi, we. (3) pen
pri>.et,6.pl.thej.
Tw», kn, v. I. to stamp grain.
TwadEka, kn, v.i. tap. tw«U,to
be marriageable.
Twala, kn, v, I. to marry.
TwaUna, ka, v, I. rec, twftl% to
many each other,
iralo,
they.t
Tw jla, ka, V. i. to be on the look-
ont, to spy.
Twslttka, ka, v. i, to perctive.
TwiahA, ku, v. I. (used in coont-
ing). Iknml o ahl twwha
ahoblli, twelve.
Twata, ka, v. i. to breathe.
Twataoa, ku, v. i. to decrease, in
number or size.
Tvrat&nTa, kn, v. t. taus, tw«tana,
TwikA, kn, v, t. to put a load on
another's shoulders. Wa dit-
wlka, he loads himself.
Twlla, kn, v.t. to pnt poison into
water to destroy (ish.
Twila, ku, v. t, nt. twa, to ituip
grain for.
Twimba, n. 6. pi. wrinkles b
Twino, n. 6.fl. a
salL
XS. The vowel has
flu
V,{y)pers.pra.
ZP- stng. cl,
modifitd ferm af ikt'
ILA-ENGUSH VOCABULARY
473
bdbie Dtmat, be, bq^imuiie with
m; aboof ka befbie Chose begin-
ning with k. (3) ciaiiifier cl. i a.
sing, genemlly omitted, uid beard
t>a\y wluo the noun stands aloDe
or coma Gist in 1 tentence.
Uftohinhfl, n, i a, my uncle.
Bb^ ku, p. 1. to be light (not
Ub»1Uk, l(u, V. i. to dishonour, to
nuke tight of.
UbelB, mil. pre. prtp. 1 p. sing,
thee (wheie thon ait),
XnmM,frefi. as.
tTbnU, kn, v. t. to take thingi off
— (rf clothes, oiDtments. iDBolu
T> dinbol*, the snake changes It*
tTlralAl*, ka, v./. to take a man's
load from him, to lelieve htm.
"Ubj*^ kD, V. I. cam, at», to
lighten, make light
IFohA-aluti, M. I u. a col throagh
the middle of an inimaL
ITohabaeliambola, ». j a. the
placenta.
ITchDalu-iuMiiao, n. i a, ■ ihoit
sighted person.
TTdidl, ndidie P ado. when T
Vdie t itHerr. fra. cl. I and ». sit^.
which?
TTdfka, kn, v. i. eaf. nl>, to be
ITdlka, ka, c t. to give « name, to
TTknba, cenj. If, If ]itrlin|.i,
tnrtnjl, adv. othcrwlsr, cllffBttnLlji.
TTkuti, conf. bf!Ciiu«e.
tTkwi P aiiv. where t_
Ula, ku, eJ
Ulnklla, kn, V. «. tW. ulnka, to Oj
to, foi. U la ulukll* makMl,
i«td of one who hasten* lo speak
of matter* before propetly imder-
standing Uieni.
tJlalema, n. i a. a good penon.
Ululdka, kn, v. ■'. rra. stai. nlvka,
lo be blown about, away ; t.g.
inB'andJi ra nlulnkft kamtilsU,
the roof 1* blown awajt by the
whirlwind.
UluliUa, kn, v. t. rtf. ala, to trade
with a thing over and over again.
Tnalala, kn, v. I. to cause to blow
away, winnow.
Ulnaha, ku, v.t. cats, ulnka, to
cause to fly.
nmaikUiV./.lobeatiStTike.topDnUh.
TT-mi I inttrf. ll it so ! really J
Umambako, n. i a, thy paramout
(In allowed adultery, &c.}.
tTmamtaakwa, h. i a. bis paramonr.
ITmMnbancu, k. i a. my paramoiu.
UnuM, ku, V. i. rtc. uma, to
strike each other,
trmaura, kti, v. t. rtc. catu. uma,
10 cause to strike each other.
Umauma, ku, v.l. ndtipl. nmft,
to continue knocking, as at a door.
TTnbk, ku, e. t. to go past game, or
other thing, without seeing it.
TTmbllk, ku, c, /, to make a big fire.
Umbudfaba, ku, v. t. to soothe,
quieten a noisy child.
ITmbula, ku, v. I. to finish, end.
Umbnluks, ku, u. i. to be light, ai
In Ihe very early morning, to be
lost by dispersion ( ~ ombulnka).
Umbnlnla, kn, v. t. to shell maiie,
to diminish a thing.
UnibweEhB, ku -^ ku ombwenfaa.
474
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Xrmpula, Iniy v, /. to remove, strip
off bark.
TTinpalala, ku, v. t, to diy fish or
green com at a fire.
TTmwe, subs, pro. simple a /.//. you.
TTnga, ku, v,i, to blow (of the
wind). IT la unga IiOEa, the
wind blows.
TTnguka, ku, v, i. to be blown away.
TTnguma, )m, v. t. to shake, be un-
firm (of a weak child).
TJngnmaTia, ku, v. i, to be morose,
solitary, sad.
UngiiTTianya, ku, v, t. to cause to
be sad, morose.
TTnka, ku, v, i. to start, depart.
TTnkoshi, n,ia. a petty chief^ in-
duna.
TTnjiy indef. pro, cL i and a. sin^,
another, different.
Upa, ku, V. t. to deceive,
TTpaupa, kn, v, i, to deceive. Kn
upaupa mexiso, to be a hypo-
crite.
ITsa, kti, V, i. to sorrow, be sad.
TTsendeme, n.\a, a wicked, dis*
honest person.
TTsha, ku, v, t, caus, usa, to make
sorry, to disappoint.
XTshabo, n, i a, their father.
TTshatwakwe, n,ia,z, name given
to the Supreme Being : indicates
that He is master of all things
and can do as He wishes.
TTshe, n. i a. his father.
TTshenu, n. i a. your father.
TTshesu, n. i a. our father.
TTshetwi, #». i a. a name given to
the lion.
TTshiswezhamoEO, if . i a. a patient,
persevering person.
ITso, n, I a, thy father.
ITsungula, n,ia, a leader, com-
mander.
TTsunu, adv, to-day.
ITswe, subs, pro simple ^ we.
TTwa, ku, V. i. to be addled.
Uwaoliikwapi, n. la. a bnffalo.
ITwanibeaa, n,ia. a. buffalo.
Uwe, subs, pro. simple^ thou.
XTwebesho, n,ia, a shoulder-joint
of meat.
ITzha, ku, v. t, caus, ola, to sell.
XTslia, ku, V. I. to be stlent, to xiefnse
to answer when called.
V. Pronounced as in English.
Vh, for the sound represented by
this sign see €hap. it, sect, i.
Vhuba, ku, v. i, to be rich.
Vliubya, ku, v, t, caw. vlmba, to
enrich.
Vhukuta, ku, v, t, to blow bellows.
Vhukutila, ku, v, t, rel. vhu-
kuta, to blow bellows for.
Vhula, ku, v,i, to be numeroiis,
abundant.
Vhula, ku, v,t, to examine anyr
thing («.^. food), to see if all is
there.
Vhula-vhula, ku, v, i, to open and
shut the eyes, or wink, yriesx yo«
are afraid something will enter.
Vhulalata, ku, v./, to close the
eyes, as in prayer.
Vhulula, ku, v» t, to take up a
thing and go along with it.
ybuma, ku, v, i, to wade.
Vhuma, ku, v. i. to pot (chann)
medicine on track of a lion.
Vhtimba, ku, v, t. to cover any-
thing, to thatch.
Vhumbuka, ku, v, i. rev. stat.
vhumba, tobenncovered, to stink.
Vhumbula, ku, v. i, to pncover.
Vhumbuluka, ku, v, i, to be un-
covered, untbatched.
Vhumbulula, ku, v, t rev. vhum-
ba, to uncover, unthatch.
Vhumoka, ku, v,i, to seize sud-
denly.
Vhumokila, ku, v. t, to catch hold
of a person suddenly, without
speaking ; to commit rape.
VbJiunpa,ku,9.f. to crowd, to press.
Vhuna, ku, v.t, to get a person
out of difficulties, to deliver, to
help, to separate fighters.
Vhunaika, ku, v. i, pers, rep,
vhnnfka, to cover up, close.
Vhundama, ku, va. to iie on the face.
Vhundamika, ku, v. /• cam, vhiin-
dama, to lay on the ^e.
Vbundamina, ku, v, t, rel, Thun-
dama, to lie down before, in
homage.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
475
Vliundika, ku, v, t. to bury a thing
for the purpose of rotting or
softening it.
Vhundila, ku, v,%, to be mouldy
(as bread).
Vhungo, ku, v, t, to fold up, to roll
up, to wind up.
Vhungana, ku, v, i. rec, Thimga,
to shrink up (as garments).
Thnnguludika, ku, v» i. rev. cap,
vhunga, to be unfoldalde, to be
stietchable.
Vhungoluka, ku, v. i. r^v. siat,
rhunfl^ to be unrolled, un-
folded.
Vhtmguliila, ko, v. t. rtv, Thnnga,
to unroll, to unwind, to unfold.
Vhonikila, ka, v. /. to cover a pot,
close.
Tliunta, ka, v,i, to throb. Mu«
pnka u la vhunta, the insect
throbs, f . e, I have a throbbing pain.
Vlmnttika, ku, v, i. to blaze.
Vhtmsulay ku, v, t. to tslf e a thing
from a man forcibly.
VhuThnta, ku, v,i. to hum (of
people).
VhUBha, ku, v, /. cau$, Thula, to
multiply, increase.
Vliwa^ kUf v» i. to emerge, to come
out, to come from. £u vhwa
moBO, to sufier remorse.
Vhwila, ku, v, t, reL vliwa, to
emerge to, or from.
Vukaila, ku, v, t to fill up a hole.
Vukmnima, ku, f^. /. to take earth
out of a hole,
VuBta, ku, «. /. to protect a village
by surrounding it with (charm)
medicine ( » ▼huma).
Vumina, ku, v, t, to absent, to
agree.
Vuminana, ku, v, t, reu Tumina,
to agree together.
Vuminijus ku, v, /. r^, vumina,
to allow, to permit.
Vuminya, ku, v, /. caus, vumina,
to oonvince.
Vuya, ku, v.t, to take counsel
against, to conspire against.
Vwela, ku, v. u to mix, mingle,
Vwima, ku, «. /. to hunt
Twiya, ku« v. i, to speak aside in
a grumbling manner, to grumble,
to backbite.
W. The semi-vowel w represents
the simple vowel o or u followed
by another vowel.
W*» ( j) ^»' port^ cL I and a. sing. ;
e. g, Muzhike wa«kwe, his slave.
(a) pers, pro. d. i. sing, he, she, it.
Wa, ku, V. i, to falL
Wala, ku, v, t. to throw.
Walo, mbs. pro. simple 3 /. sing,
cl, I and a. he, himself; it, itself.
Wazlia, ka, v.i. caus, wala, to
cause, help to throw. £sp. of a
musondi throwing the bones in
divining.
W6 1 infefy. expresses surprise, dis-
gust, reproof.
We. Wa becomes we when fol-
lowed by a verb beginning with i ;
£.g. we nJUa for wa inJiJa, he
enters.
Wedia, dem. pro, cl. i and a. sing.
yon, yonder.
Wela, ku, v, i. to cry aloud, the
way of women ; to cry shrilly.
Weza^ ku, v.L to hunt.
Weza«Bwa iza^ he comes, he
came.
Wezela, ku, v. i. rel. weza, to hunt
for, on behalf of.
Wezha, ku« v.t. caus. weza, to
cause or help to hunt.
Wezo, dem. pro. cl. i cmd a. sing,
that.
Wezu, dem. pro. cl, i and a. sing.
this.
Wi I particle expressing quiet,
silence. Mwana wezu wi I this
child is very quiet. Kudi inzile
wi 1 it is very quiet.
Wila, ku, V. i. reL wa, to fall to,
upon. Wa ka wil* anshi, he
fell to the ground.
Wilana, ku, v.i. to go on, not-
withstanding fatigue, sickness, or
other obstacle.
Wifiha, ku, v. /. caus. wa, to throw
down, to let fall. Ba la ngwisha,
they throw me down.
Wizauka, ku, v. i, to totter, to be
weak on the legs, to stagger.
476
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
WiBaosha, Ini, v, /. to cause to
totter, stagger.
Y. The semi-vowel y is the simple
i followed by another voweL
When 7 changes it becomes J;
e.g, ba la yana, they find; ba
la njana, they find me.
Ya, (i) gen, part, cl. 8. sing, and
cl, 2,pl.\ e,g, ixnpongo ya-ngu,
my goat ; misaino yangu, my
medicines, (a) pers, pro, cL 8*
sing, and cl, 2. pi,
Ya, Ini, V, i, to go. Eu ya im-
ptiwo, to be known, famous.
Yabila, leu, v. t, to sing alone.
Yadila, ku, v, t, rel, yala, to shut
against, for ; to dam up a stream.
Yala, ku, v, t, to close, to shut a
door.
Yalo, subs, pro, simple cl, 8. sing,
cl, 2, pi, it, itself ; they, themselves.
Yalula, ku, v, t, rev. yala, to open.
Perf, yalwile e.g, mudiangoudi
yalwilwe, the door is open.
Yalwila, ku, v, t, rev, rel, yala, to
open for.
Yamba, ku, v,t, to wear a mu-
yemba, to cover the whole body
with cloth.
Yamina, ku, v, t, to scare away
birds.
Yana, ku, v, t, to find, to discover.
Perf, yene.
Yanana, ku, v. i, rec, yana, to find
each other, to join, to be recon-
ciled ; e.g, Kavuvu wa yanana
o Shungu, the Kafue joins the
ZambesL
Yanga, ku, v, t. to scratch up (of a
fowl). Ku yanga inyemo, to
harvest ground-nuts.
Yanika, 1^, v. t, to bring together,
as oxen into a yoke.
Yanyanya, ku, v, t, rec, caus,
yana, to cause to find each other,
to join two things side by side, to
reconcile.
Yasa, ku, v, t, to spear, to wound,
to stab.
Yasaula, ku, v, t. to cut up meat.
Yaya, ku, v, t, to kill, to murder,
to destroy. Eu yaya mulongo,
to bleak a covenant, Ku di-
yaya, to commit suicide.
Yayika, ku, v, u cap, yaya, to be
killable ; of an animal easily
killed, one that does not spring
upon you when it is wounded.
Yayiwa, ku, pass, jajA, to be
killed.
Yazha, ku, v,l, caus, yaya, to
cause or help to kill, to kill with.
Ba la diyazha nmshinao, they
kill themselves with travelling.
Ye 1 Ye 1 Ye ! Ye I iniefy. ex-
presses reproof on retam of a
delaying messenger.
Yeba, ku, «ku eba, ^. v,
Yedia, dem, pro, cl, 8. sing, and
cl, 2, pi, yon, yonder.
Yeni, Tu yenil let ns go onl
Yeni is the imp, pi, of ya.
Yeyel Yeye!! inter;, women's
cry at funeral.
Yo, (i) poss, pfo, 3 f, cU 8. sing,
and cl, 2. pi, its, their, theirs,
(a) Num, part, el, 8. sing, cl, a.
//.; e,g, ing'ombe yo-mwi, one
ox.
Yoba, ku, v, i, to diatter, to make
a noise.
Yoboloka, ku, v, i, slat, yobolola,
to be brought together.
Yobolola, ku, v,i, to bring scat-
tered things together.
Yoko, n, cl, I a, for, (£ng. yoke)
a yoke.
Yonkola, ku, v.i, to speak alto-
gether, making a tumult.
Yosa, ku, V, i, to abate, to subside,
of a flood.
Yovwa, ku, V, t, to help, to assist.
Yula, ku, v,t, to take a pot off the
fire.
Yumbula, ku, v, t, to feed travel-
lers.
Yuoma, ku, v, i, to ferment.
Z. Pronounced as in English.
Zaila, ku, v, t, to weed.
Zaka, ku, v, t, to build, to erect a
building.
Zaka, ku, v, i, to blaze.
Zakila^ ku, v, t, rel, laka, to build
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
477
for. Km disakila, to build for
oneself.
Zakishs, ku, v»i, tnt, Baka, to
blaze much, fiercely.
Zala, ko, v,/, to spread out Ku
Bala bnlo, to spread out, prepare
a bed.
Zaluka, ku, v, i, to menstruate for
the first time.
ZalwUa, ku, v,t. to take young
birds out of the nest.
Zama, ku, v, i, to stick to, to ad-
here to ( *B ku Bhama).
Zamba, ku, v, /. to bind round.
Zambaila, ku, v, /. pers. rep,
Bamba, to bandage, to curl round
(of a plant tendril, or snake). InBO-
ka ya disambaila, the snake
curls itself up.
Zambika, ku, v, U to stir up (por-
ridge, &C.).
Zambila, ku, v,t, rtl, Bamba, to
bind a broken stick with string or
wire.
Zambuka, ku, v, t. to leap, jump,
spring.
Zambukila, ku, v,u to be con-
tagious, infectious (of a disease).
Ohimbembe ohi la aambukila,
small-pox is infectious.
-Zambuluka, ku, v,i, rev, stat%
samba, to be disentangled, un-
ravelled.
Zambulula, ku, v, /. rev, Bamba,
to disentangle, unravel.
Zftmina, ku, v, u to lean, recline
against (of a person).
Zamuka, ku, vA, to migrate, of
game leaving a place and going
elsewhere.
Zamuka, ku, v, i. to be wise.
Zanda, ku, v,t, to like, wish for,
to desire,
Zajidala, ku, v. i, to grow, spread
out (of quitch<grass).
Zandana, ku, v,t, rec, aanda, to
like each other.
Zandika, ku, v,i, eap, aanda, to
be precious, costly, valuable.
•■andishiy adj, precious, costly,
valuable.
Zanga, ku, v, t, to bear witness, to
testify.
Zangadika, ku, v, i, to be a vaga-
bond, exile.
Zangadisha, ku, v, /. caus, aanga-
dika, to exile.
Zanika, ku, v,t, to hang out to
dry.
Zanta, ku, v, i, » ku aamuka.
Zanaa, ku, v. /. to place a pot on
the fire.
Zanaalka, ku, v,t, to evade, by
prevaricating.
Zanaala, ku, v,t, to stir up grain
when laid out to dry.
Zapauka, ku, v. i, to be ragged.
•Bapauahi, adj, ragged.
Zapuka, ku, v, i, stat, Bapula, to
be torn.
Zapula, ku, v, t, to tear.
Zasha, ku, v.t, caus„ aaka, to
make a fire blaze.
Zasha, ku, v,t, caus, aaka, to
help, cause to build, to buUd with.
Zaaambe, n. la, name given to a
climbing plant, supposed by the
people to have neither beginning
nor end. Fi^, TVeBo muntu
ngu aaaambe, that person goes
on for ever, he never leaves off
talking.
Zea, ku, v, i, to think, consider.
Zeka, ku, v.i, to lean one thing
against another, especially when
closing a gateway.
Zekema, ku, v.t, to pant (as an
animal).
Zela, ku, v. i, to set fishing-nets in
water, to catch fish in net or trap.
Zelaila, ku, v, t. to keep on hiding.
Zeluluka, ku, v. i, to prevaricate.
Zema, ku, v. u to be quiet, reserved
in speech.
Zemba, ku, v, i, to march up and
down at a funeral, carrying spears.
This describes the custom of the
men at such times.
Zemuna, ku, v, t, to carry, to bear.
Zenga, ku, v, t, to boil fat, to boil
the beans of castor-oil plant in
making fat.
Zengunuka, ku, v, i, to melt, dis-
solve.
Zeni, imperative pi, of kwesa,
come ye.
478
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULAkV
ZenBela, ka, 9. i. to become loose,
of a cord or string.
Zepa, ku, v. /. to clear away graas
(ku sebula).
Eepanla, ku, v. t to extract jiggers.
Zepula, ku, v. t, to cut.
Zesa, ku, v.t, to desire, wish for,
ponder, think over.
Zesha, ku, v,t, caus, sesa, to
think of. 19'da seEha shumbwa,
1 thought of a lion, f . e, that it
was a lion.
ZIl Pronounced as b in azure.
Zhadiaha, ku, v.t. int, shala, to
bring forth much, to be prolifia
Zliala,-ku, v.t, to bear, bring iosth.
children. Also of animals, to
calve, &c. Fig. Inshila ya
Ehala, the road gives birth ; said
when travellers arrive at a village.
Zhaluluka, ku, v. i. rep. stat. ahala,
to be bom again, anew.
Zhalulula, ku, v. t rep. Bhala, to
bear anew.
Zhalwa, ku, v. %, pass, shala, to be
bom.
Zhama, ku, « ku sama, v. i. to
adhere, to stidc.
Zhaminina, ku, v.t, rel, Bhama,
to stick to. Bwa nahaminina
bulougo, the day sticks to me.
Zhana, ku, v. i. to dance.
Zhanga, ku, v. /. to revile, curse.
Zhangama, ku, v.i. to tremble,
quake with fear. Ku Ehangama
mwansa, to have the ague.
Zhanina, ku, v. t, rel. Bbana, to
dance for. Ba Bhanina baka-
mwale, they dance for the baka-
mwale.
ZhaBBa, ku, v.t, caus. Bhala, to
cause or help to be bom.
-BhaBhi, adj. female, child-bearing.
Zhi, ku (kwiBhi) « ku Bhiba, to
know.
Zhia, ku, v,t, to grind corn with
stones.
Zhiba, ku, v, t. to know.
Zhibaluka, ku, v,t, rep, stat,
zhiba, to recollect.
Zhibalula, ku, z^. /. == ku Ehiba-
lusha.
Zhibalusha, ku, v,t, rep. stat.
caus, Bhiba, to cause to recollect,
to remind.
Zhibana, ku, v,t, rec* Bhiba, to
know each other.
Bhibanya, ku, v, t, rec, caus. 8hi«
ba, to cause to know each other.
Zhibidila, ku; Zhibila, ku, v.t,
rel, Bhiba, to be accustomed to,
used to.
Zhibya, ku, v,t. caus, Bhiba, to
make known, notify, to acquaint.
BiBhibya, ku, to make oneself
known. Mwami wa dishibya^
the chief reveals himself.
Zhidika, ku, v. t. to put one thing
on top of another, of a woman
carrying two pots on top of the
other.
Zhidika, ku, v, i, to wander.
Zhldikila, ku, v, t, to give a present
on conclusion of a bargain.
Zhika, ku, v, i, to bury. Ku di-
Bhika, to bury oneself. TTdi
diBhiidle, he has buried himself,
said of one who stays always in
his house.
Zhila, ku, v,%, to be forbidden,
tabooed.
Zhiluka, ku, v. i, to be extinguished
(of a lamp or fire), to be dull,
stupid, unconscious (of a person).
Zhilwa, ku, v.i, to suffer. ISTda
Bhilwa malwaBhi, I am suffering.
Zhima, ku, v. i, to stand.
Zhima, ku, v.t, to put oat a fire
or lamp.
Zhimba, ku, v, i, to swell.
Zhimba, ku, v.ti to hide, conceal
part of an affair.
Zhimbila, ku, v. t. to constipate.
Zhimbilwa, ku,/afx. v, to be const!*
pated.
ZhimbiBha, ku, z^. ^. to constipate.
Zhimbuluka, ku, v.i, rev, stat,
zhimba, to be abated (of a swel-
ling).
Zhimbulula, ku, v. t. rev. Bhimba^
to abate a swelling by appljring
medicine.
Zhimika, ku, v. t. caus. sliima, to
stand up, to raise, to erect.
-Bhimikile, adf, upright, erect^
steep.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
479
Zhixnina, kn, v. /. shima, to stand
for. As V. i, to be lost.
Zhixningana, ku, v, u to be effaced,
rubbed out.
Zhiminganya, ka, v,t, caus, fthi-
mingana, to erase, to wipe oat,
to hide tracks, to obliterate, to
entangle affairs so as to prerent
one's fault becoming known.
Zhimoka, ku, v, i, stat, ahima, to
stand up, to start or leaye.
Zliinga, ka, v. i. to coil as a rope)
to come continually to a place, be
perplexed.
Zhingana, ku, v.i, to qnestloti
oneself.
Zhingashila, ka, v, t, to think of,
remember, to call to mind.
Zhingatunkasa, ka ; Zldnga-
twimba, ka, v. t, to frown, scowl.
Zhingaka, ka, v,u to gather
aroimd.
Zhingulaka, ka, v,i, to revolve,
, to go round about or round a
thing, to be late, to be perplexed.
Zhini^ihila, ka, v. i. to unravel.
Zhingalosha, ku, v.t, caus. lihi-
nguloka, to cause to revolve, to
perplex.
ZhinEhilika, ku, v. t. to search, to
seek for.
Zhiwimka, ka, z^. ^. to be forgetful.
Zhiahi, ka (kwishizhi) «- ktt
shiba, to know.
Zhoka, ka, v,u to return, go or
come back.
Zliokela^ ka, 9./. t(iL thoka, to
return to. Ka shokela maiuihi,
to retreat, to backslide.
Zhokelana, ku, v, i, rec. zhoka, to
return to each other, to be recon-
ciled.
Zhokelanya, ku, v.i. rec, cans,
shoka, to cause to return to each
other, to reconcile.
Zhola, ku, V. t. to cause to return,
to bring or take back. Ku zhola
mata, to repay a loan.
Zholaula, ku, v.t,pers. rep. zhola,
to bring back one who has left
his home.
Zhoznbwela, ku, v, i. to be round-
about, not direct Inzhela i la
zhombwela, the road is round-
about.
Zhombwelela, ku, v, t. to examine
a witness by asking him things
over and over again.
Zhuka, ku, V. i. to be full (of the
moon).
Zhula, ku, V. /. to draw out by the
roots, to root up.
Zhula, ku, v.i. to find out, dis-
cover.
Zhunga, ku, v. i. to vibrate. Ku-
zhunga ku menso, to be dim-
eyed on account of hunger.
Zila, ku, V. t. rel. kweza, to come
for. Mwe zila nzhi? Why
have you come? what have you
come for ?
Ztza, ku ■** kweza, to come.
Zobola, ku, v.t. to keep, preserve.
Zoboka^ ku, v.i. slot, zobola, to
be kept, preserved, saved.
Zoboloka, ku, v.i, to collect,
gather together (people).
Zobwela, ka, v.t rel. sobolai to
keep, preserve for.
Zocha, ka, v, t, to bake, roast.
Zochila, ku, v.t, rel, zocha, to
roast, bake for.
Zola, ku, v. i, to' take a thing out,
extract ; e,g. from a bag.
Zomba, ku, v. t, to hunt.
Zomona, ku, v,t, to peck (as a
fowl).
Zonaoka, ka, v. i. to be destroyed.
Zonaula, ku, v. t. to destroy,
-zonaushi, eidj, destroyed.
Zonawila, ka, v,t. rel. zonaula,
to destroy for.
Zosha, ku, v.t, caus, zowa, to
astonish, to amaze.
Zota, ku, v.t. to sit around. Ba
la zota mudilo, they sit around
a fire.
Zowa, ku, v.i, to be astonished,
amazed.
Zoza, ku, V, i. to breathe.
Zuba, ku, V. i, to hide, to conceal
oneself, be hidden.
Zubaila, ku, v. t. pers. rep, zuba,
to keep on hiding.
Zubika, ku, v,t, caus. zuba, to
hide, conceal.
468
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Tamb&ls, ku, v. i, to run about, as
calves, in play.
Tambika, ka, v, /. to hold out the
hand in order to give, to offer.
Tambikila, ku, v, t, ril, tambika,
to offer to, to hold out the hand
to.
Tambikfaha, ku, v, t, to give one
to take to another.
Tambila, ku, v. /. to work a paddle
towards you when turning a canoe,
to invite on behalf of.
Tambfila, ku, v. /. to receive.
Tambtizha, ku, v.t, cans, tambula,
to cause to receive.
Tambuzhtoya, ku, v, t. €aus, rec.
caus, tambula, to pass from one
to another, to circulate.
TambwaUa, ku, v,i, to totter as
a child learning to walk.
Tambwlla, ku, v. t, rel. tambula,
to receive on behalf of.
Tamikisha, ku, v. U to bear false
witness.
Tamina, ku, v,£, reL tama, to
deny for.
Taminlna, ku, v,t, to contradict,
to cross words.
Tfinda, ku, v, t, to drive away, to
disperse, to banish, to put away
a wife, to dismiss.
Tandab&la, ku, v, u to stretch out,
V, /. to steer a boat with a rudder.
"Wa tandabala matende, his
legs are stretched out. Xioyo
Iwa tandabala, the quitch-grass
stretches out, runs out (in grow-
ing).
Taudila, ku, v,t, rel, tanda, to
drive away for.
Tandubud&a, ku, v, u cap, tandu*
bula, to be stretchable, to be
elastic.
-tandubudiahi, adf, elastic.
Tandubtiks, ku, v, i, to be stretched
out.
Taudubtila, ku, v, /. to pull out,
as elastic.
T6iiga, ku, v,i, to begin (of the
rain), to be the first.
Tibiffa, ku, V, t, to make a covenant.
Nda tanffa mulongo, I make a
covenant with him.
Tangfila, ku, v,L to rejoice, to be
glad.
Tang&na, ku, v, t. rec, tansa, to
make a covenant mutually.
Tang&nya, ku, v,t. to cause to
rejoice, to make glad.
Tangftsha, ku, v, t, caus, tangala,
to gladden, cause to rejoice.
Tansiinay Ini, v, i, to be firsts to
commence.
T&nka, ku, v, t, to travel steadily.
T6nta, ku, v. i, to go away (^. g,
to Bulawayo) to work, to climb
(t Tonga).
Tant&na, ku, v, u to disperse, to
sit at a distance from each other.
Tantanta, adv. in different direc-
tions. JCa ba tia budio tanta-
nta, they simply ran away in
different directions.
Tantika, ku, v, i, to sleep up on a
platform.
Tantumtina, ku, v,t, to place a
thing near by.
•tanahi, adj, first.
Tapa, ku, v.t, to extract honey
from a nest.
Tap&la, ku, v. i. to shake. Muntu
u la tapila, said when footsteps
ase heard outside.
Tapata, ku, v. i. to rebuke.
Tapatila, ku, v, t to rebuke kindly.
Tapiaha, ku, v, t, caus, tapala, to
shake, to rouse a sleeping man,
&c.
Tata, ft. I A. my father.
T&ta, ku, V, /. to prepare food.
Tatana, ku, v. il to mourn loudly.
Tatanfina, ku, v. i, to stand with
legs stretched out.
Tataaha, ku, v. t, of a lot of men
overcoming and beating one.
Tatauka, ku; v, i, to be scattered,
wasted.
Tataula, ku, v.t, to scatter, waste.
Tatela, ku, v,t, to load (a gun).
Tatesu, n.ia. our father.
Tatila, ku, v. /. rel. tata, to prepare
food for.
-tatu, num. third. Buahika bwa-
tatu, the third day.
Tattila, ku, v, t, to castrate.
-tatwe, num. three.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
469
Taya, ka, v.t, to begin to take
things out of a fiill box, &c. ; to
throw ash upon a person — ^this
is reckoned a very serious fault.
See Appendix /, ditaya.
Teh, represents ch preceded by ex-
plosive sound.
Tchita I interj, I don't know \
Te (i) Neg, part, Te6, he is absent
Ka te6, he was absent*
(2) Contr. = ta + i.
T^a, kn, v, t. to trap, to ensnare.
T6a, ku, V, /. to bring forward the
hands, &c., to receive,
T^ba, ka, vj. to copulate. Teba,
of the man \ tebwa, of the woman.
Teblila, ku, v. /. to harvest.
T6ka, ku, v,t, to draw water, to
dip.
Tekina, ku, v» i. to roll from side
to side (of a canoe), to stagger as
a drunkard.
Tek&nya, ku, v, /. caus, tekana,
to cause to roll from side to
side.
-take, adj, wet, moist
Tek^Ia, ku, v, /. reL teka, to draw
for.
Tek6, loc, phr. he is not there or
here.
Tektina, ku, v, i, to be ticklish.
Tektinya, ku, v, i, to tickle.
TelaSka, ku, v, t, to think, consider,
suppose.
Tel6kela, ku, v, i, to be clear, quiet
(of water),
-telekele, adj, quiet, clear (of water).
TeI61a, ku, v, t. to hear, understand,
to feel, to obey.
Telel^na, ku, v, t. rec, telela, to
hear, understand each other.
TeleUka, ku, v, 1. cap, telela, to
be audible, understandable.
Telel6sha, ku, v, /. int, telela, to
hear distinctly, to understand well,
^teleleshi, adj» audible, understand-
able.
T6nia, ku, v, i. to fell trees, hew.
Tembatila, ku, v, L to repeat one's
names, to praise.
Temb^ka, ku, v, U to carry a load
slung between on a pole, as a
machila.
Vemb^Ua, kn, Vm /. to tell one's own
names. Ko tembula mashixia
ako onse, tell all thy names.
Tem^ka, ku, v,L to dry fish or
meat over a fire.
-temeke, adj» dried, smoked. Bu-
sana butemeke, dried meat,
biltong.
Tem6, loc. phr, he is not (in) there.
TOnda, ku, v. U to cut with knife,
axe, or saw.
T6ndeka, ku, v, t, to point.
T^ndekela, ku, v, /. reL tendeka,
to point to.
Tonga, ku, v,t, to be dissatisfied
with, to complain about "Wtb
tenga madi akwe, he is dissatis-
fied about his money.
Tenga, ku, v. t, to sell.
Tengala, ku, v, t, to sell for.
Tengela, ku, v. /. rei, tenga, to be
dissatisfied for.
Tengen^zha, ku, v. /. to carry on
the head without holding or sup-
porting the load.
Tengtila, ku, v, t, to treat an elder
or superior with disrespect.
T6nta, ku, v, U to bum, to set on
fire, to scald, to singe. Ku tenta
butale, to smelt iron.
Tenteb^la, ku, v, $, to be slack (of
a line).
Tentumuka, ku, v. t, stat, tentu-
muna, to be cracked, to be slightly
open (of joints, seams).
Tentumtina, ku, v, /. to bring off
chickens, to hatch.
Te6, loc, phr. he is not there or here.
Tapauka, ku, v, i, to be tempted.
Tepalila, ku, v. /. to tempt one to
do wrong.
Tepek6sha, ku, v, t. to whisper.
Tepekeshftna, ku, v, /. rec. tepe-
keEha, to whisper to each other.
Tepula, ku, v. f, to gather and
carry away much fruit.
Tasha, ku, v, /. catis, teka, to draw
water with, to cause or help to
draw. Nina oha ku tesha, I
have nothing to draw with.
Tetania, ku, v, i, to creak.
Tezha, ku, v,t to give a person
food.
470
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Teshima, kn, v, u to be 8lipper]f
(like a fish).
Tezhimtika, kn, v, u to slip and
falL
Ti, n, I a. for, (Eng.) tea.
Ti, Ini, V, t. to say. Used to express
< about, on the point of'. A U a
yaye shumbwa, when he was
about to kill a lion.
Tla, ka, v. L to be afraid of, to fear,
to run away.
Ti6na, ku, v, i. rec. tia, to ran to-
gether.
Tianina, ku, v.t, rec, rei, tia, to
ran towards.
Tidlla, ku, V. /. rel. tila, to pour
into, upon.
Tidimtika, ku, v. u to jump back-
wards in alarm, to shudder after
taking nasty medicine.
Tifdka, ku, v, i. to be indented.
Tifwaudika, ku, v. i, cap. tifwaula,
to be indentable.
Tifwauka, ku, v. i. to be indented.
Tifwaula, ku, v, t. to indent
Tika,.ku, v. i. cap. tia, to be dread-
ful, terrible, awfuL
Tflca, ku, V. i. to be spilt
TikaSka, ku, v, t, to be spilt
Tikalsha, ku, v. t. to spill.
Tiklla, ku, v.t, of a number of
people putting fault upon one
person, either truly or falsely, —
ba mu tikila makani.
Tikinya, ku, v.t. to shake. Ku
ditikinya, to shrug the shoulders.
Tikita, ku, v. i. for, (Eng. ticket)
to mark a labour ticket.
Tiktila, ku, v, i. to belch (of
dogs).
Tikumdka, ku, v. i. of a tree cast-
ing its leaves.
Tikumtina, ku, v. /. to shake the
head, to refuse, to shake. Mu-
Buue wa ditikumuna, the bird
flaps its wings. Iiesa wa tiku-
muna masalo akwe,Leza shakes
his skins (of gentle thunder).
Tila, ku (or ku tiila),z'. /. reL tia,
to run to, for, &c.
Tila, ku, V. /. to pour, to spill.
Timba, ku, v. i, to be growing and
getting strength (of a child).
Tfmbatlmba, ku, v.L to press
matter out of an abscess.
Tinde, n, i a. & fish poison.
Tinta, ku, to separate two things
by means of a different thing, such
as to put a small person between
two big ones, a calf between two
oxen, &c.
Tintdzia, ku, v.i, to be different
(of people). Tudi tintene, we
are of different tribes. Sec,
Tintimana, ku, v, i. to be breast-
deep in water or a hole.
Tisha, ku, v, t. caus. tia, to make
afraid, to cause to flee.
To, (i) Poss, pro, cl. 6. //. their,
theirs,
(a) Num, part, cl, 6. pl,^ e,g,
twambo to-bili, two sayings.
(3) Contr, « ta -f u.
Toba, ku, v, t. to sprinkle.
Tobela, ku, v, t, to follow, to
chase. Ku tobela mikondo, to
follow a spoor.
Tcbw^la, ku, v.t. to pour water
upon clay and tread it.
Todia, dem, pro, cL 6. pi. yon,
yonder.
T(dEj6, he. phr^ cl, a. it is not there,
or here.
T61a, ku, V, t, to take to, to carry
to.
To16Uk ku, V. t. reL tola, to take
towards, to take for.
Toma, ku, v, t, to taste food when
cooked, to begin eating.
T6mba, ku, v. t, to take fiit out of
a pot.
Tombwe, n. i a, tobacco.
Tomena, ku, v.t, reL toma, to
taste for.
Tom6, lac. pkr, cL a. it is not here,
or there.
Tomwena, ku, v.t, to cram the
mouth with food.
Tdnda, ku, v, i. to be t^)oo, to be
forbidden. See Eng.-Ila Vocab.
Taboo.
Tond^ka, ku, v. t, to point
Tondek^la, ku, v, t. rel, tondeka,
to point towards.
Tondesha, ku, v, t, to point
out
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
47^
Tondila, ku, v,u rel, topda, to
prohibit on account of.
Tondya, ku, v, /, cau^. ton^a, to
taboo, forbid.
T6nga, ku, v, i. to grumble^ murmur.
Tongatika, ku, v, t. to grumble.
TongatUa, ku, v, i, to be sad, ^orry,
disappointed.
Tongausha, ku, v,t, cans, ton-
gauka, to cause to grumble.
Tongela, ku, v. i, to breathe hard,
groan, moan.
Tongoka, ku, v. u of a man or wife
eating food alone an4 not giving
to the other.
Tong61a, ku, v. t, to pick oot» as
with a knife or pin. Ku dito-
ngola, to pick the teeth.
T6nka, ku, z;. /. to pu^h, to p^sh
off.
Tonkila, ku, v,t^ rcL tonka^ to
push towards.
Tonkisha, ku, v, t, int. tonk», tp
push hard.
T^nta, ku, v, t. to follow a spoor ;
Jig. to speak out a whole sfiiair,
follow up all details, to leaye off
old habits.
Tont^la, ku, v, u to be cold^ to be
quiet, to be well. Tontola! be
quiet, silence !
Tontolelwa, ku, v, pass, rtL
tontola, to be left quiet, at peace.
Tontolo, part, "Wa toutpla toi^-
tolo, he was very quiet
Tontdzha, ku, v, t, cans, tontola^
to make silent, quiet, to mak^
cold, ^.^. by pouring water on
any one.
Tdnzha, ku, v, t, to taboo, forbid.
Toto, dem, pro. cl, 6. //. those.
Totu, dem. pro. cl, 6. pi, these.
T6wa, ku, V, t, to dazzle, to tempo-
rarily blind by putting something
in the eye ; pass, twewa. Jssuba
dia ntowa, the sun dazzles me.
Tu, (i) Classifier cl. 6. pi.
(2) Pers, pro, i p, pi, we, us ; also
cl, 6. //.
Tuba, ku, v. t. to be white.
Tubele, subs, pro. prep, i /. ph
cl, 6 pi. us (where we are), them
(where they are)^
Tubishi, n. 6. pi, a smaU quantity
of sour milk.
Tubw^ntu, M.6.pl. asmairqvantity
of beer.
T^bya, kUy v,(, cans, tuba* to
make white,yf^. to gladden.
Ttidie ? interr. pro. cl, 6, pi. which?
Tudyo, n, 6. pi, a small qui^itity of
food.
Tlika, kUy V. t, to swear at, revile,
. to curse, to exeprate, to call foul
names.
Tuk&mba, « , 6, pi, a small qiiantity
of cassava.
Tukiina, kq« v,t, rec, toka, to
curse each other.
7uk6niy ft. 6. //. small affairs,
details, small facts.
Tukuku, n, 6. //. a small quantity
of strong beer.
Tukiila, ku, v, t. to shine up, to
scrub, to polish.
ITukumtika, ku, v, i, to be inflated,
to be puffed up, proud.
TukumtiAa* ku, v, t. to inflate.
Tuklingu, n, 6. pi. a small quantity
of creapi..
Tiila, ku, V, t, to put on the ground,
of a burden.
Tiila, ku, v, t, to take a present to
a chief.
Tulauka, ku, v . i, pers, rep, tuluka,
to be pierced slightly, to be per-
forated, IjCusABsa wa tuUuka,
the forest is a bit light; as in early
morning or evening.
Tulaukfla, ku, v,i, to he partly
burnt, as a stretch of country.
7ulaula> ku, V, t, to perforate. Km
tulaula m&nBOy to put out
eyes.
Tiilembi, n. 6« //. a small quantity
of arrow poison
Tulo, n, 6. pi, sleep.
Tuluka, ku, v. i, staf, tulula, to be
bored, pierced.
Tuldla, ku, v. t, to IxM'e, pierce.
Tulungu, n, 6. pL a small quantity
of beads.
Tult^ha, ku, v.t. caus, tulula,
to cause or help to pierce, to
pierce by means o£
Tiima, ku, v. t, to sei^ii .dixiect* .
\
47»
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Ti&mba, ka, v, i, to gather (of an
abscess, &c.)«
Tumbatfla, kn, v. i, to hold care*
folly in the hand,
-tnmbe, adj, female, child-bearing.
Tombfka, ku, z/. /. to give a person
all his things.
Ttunbila, ku, v, i. to gather, sap-
pnrate. Bwa tombila btuhila
odimwi, it is suppurating again.
Tumbuka, ku, v. i. to be delivered
of a child.
Tumbusha, kn, v, /. caus, tumbu-
ka, to deliver, to act as midwife.
Tumina, ku, v.t. reL tuma, to
send to or for.
Tumpwika, ku, v. i, to put meat
into a pot without first cutting
it up.
Tunakwabo, poss, phr, cl, 6. //.
their, of their place.
Tunakwako, pass, phr, cL 6.pL thy.
Tunakwakwe, pass, phr, cL 6. //.
his.
Tunakwan^ru, pass, phr, cl, 6. pL
my.
Tunakwenu, pass, phr, cl, 6. //.
your, of your place.
Tunakwesu, poss, phr, el, 6. //.
our, of our place.
Tuii&aa.a, ku, v, t, to look intently
in one direction, to stare.
Tunamlna, ku, v, t, rel, tunama,
to look intently towards.
Tunohelenchele,//. ^^anchelen-
ohele. Bakaintu ba la uma
tunchelencliele, the women
salute by crying shrilly.
Tunga^ ku, v, /. to thread a needle,
to thread beads, to pierce as when
sewing thatch on.
Ttmgika, ku, v, t, to put up a roof.
Tunta, ku, v, /. to shake tlungs out
of a bag.
Tuntaiika, ku, v, u to beat (of the
heart).
Tuntudwila, ku, v,t, rel, tun-
tulula, to pour water upon, as
in watering plants.
Tuntula, ku, v, /. <= ku subulula.
Tuntulula, ku, v, t, to pour water.
Tunvuka, n, 6. //• a small quantity
of beeswax.
Tunyoni, n, 6. //• a nedclace of
beads.
TusoEa, If. 6. pi, a small quantity
of marrow.
Tutubala, ku, v, i, to hide away.
Tutuluka, ku, v, i, stat. tfutulula,
to be open (of the eyes).
Tutultila, ku, v,t, to open (the
eyes),
Tuttixna, ku, v, i, to shiver, tremble,
to quake.
Tuula, ku B ku tula, v. /. to give
a present to a chief.
Twa (i) gen, part, cU 6. //. (a)
pers.pro, i /. //. we. (3) pers
pro, cl, 6. pi, they.
Twa, ku, V, t, to stamp grain.
Twadfka, ku, v,i, cap, twala, to
be marriageable.
Twala, ku, v,t,io marry.
Twal&na, ku, v, t, ree, twala, to
marry each other.
Twalo, subs, pro, simple cL 6. //.
they, themselves.
Tw^la, ku, V, f . to be on the look*
out, to spy.
Tweltika, ku, v, i, to perceive.
Tw^ha, ku, v, /• (usied in count-
ing). Ikumi o ahi twesha
shobili, twelve.
Tweta, ku, v, i, to breathe.
Twetana, ku, v, i, to decrease, in
number or size.
Twet&nyay ku, v, t. caus, twetana,
to decrease,
-twetene, adj, decreased.
Tvnka, ku, v, t, to put a load on
another's shoulders. Wa dit-
wika, he loads himself.
Twlla, ku, V. t, to put poison into
water to destroy fish.
Twila, ku, v, t, rel, twa, to stamp
grain for.
Twimba, n. 6. //. wrinkles between
the eyes.
Twine, n, 6, pi, a small ^quantity of
salt.
17. The vowel has two sounds — ^u
as 00 in moon and ii as in full.
IT, {1) pers, pro. sing, 2 p. thou ; also
3/. sing, cl, I and a. he, it. (a)
modified form of the locative mu.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
473
before nonns. Sec, he^ning with
m ; also of kn before those b^;in-
ning with k. (3) classifier cL i a,
sing, generally omitted, and heard
only when the noun stands alone
or comes first in a sentence.
TTaohisha, n, i a. my uncle.
Uba, ku, V, i, to be light (not
heavy).
TJbatUa, ka, v. t, to dishonour, to
make light of.
XJbele, suds, pro, prep. 2 p, sing.
thee (where thou art).
Ubudi, /r(f/. as.
Hbula, ku, V, /. to take things off
^of clothes, ornaments. Ix»oka
ya diubula, the snake changes its
skin.
XTbultila, ku, v. /. to take a man's
load from him, to relieve him.
Ubya, ku, v. /. cans, aba, to
lighten, make light
TTcha-akati, it. i a. a cut through
the middle of an animal.
TTohabachembele, if. i a. the
placenta.
ITcheslia-axiienao, i». la. a short
sighted person.
ITchinemunema, n. i a. name of a
game.
TJdidl, udidf e P adv, when ?
TTdie P interr. pro, cL i and 3. sing.
which?
TTdfka, ku, v*i, cap. tila, to be
saleable.
TTdika, ku, 9. /. to give a name, to
name.
Udila, ku, v, U rel, ula, to buy for.
TTka, ku, v,U to steal in time of
famine.
XTkuba, conj, if, if perhaps.
TTkliiiJi, adv, otherwise, diifferently.
XTkuti, conj, because.
Ukwi P adv, where ?
ITkwl-ukwl, adv. wherever.
'Dla, ku, V. t, to buy, selL
Ula, ku, V, t, to take ofif meat killed
by a wild beast.
Ula, ku, v,i. to cry shrilly, as
women do at funeral,
mfina, ku, v. t. rec, ula, to buy or
sell to each other, to barter.
TJltika, ku, v. i, to fly (of a bird).
Xnukila, ku, v. t, rel. uloka, to fly
to, for. IT la ulukils makani,
said of one who hastens to speak
of matters before properly under-
standing them,
muleme, it. i a. a good person.
Ulultika, ku, v. i. rev, stcU. uluka,
to be blown about, away; e.g.
ing*and» ya ululuka kambishi,
the roof is blown away by the
whirlwind.
Ulultila, ku, v. t. rep. ula, to trade
with a thing over and over again.
Xnulula, ku, v. t. to cause to blow
away, winnow.
Ulushii^ ku, v.t. cans, uluka, to
cause to fly.
Uma, ku, v.t,\.o beat,strike,to punish.
TT-mA I interj, is it so ! really !
TTmambako, n. i a. thy paramour
(in allowed adultery, &c.).
TTmambakwe, n, i a. his paramour.
Umambanfiru, n, i a. my paramour.
TTmana, ku, v.t. rec. uma, to
strike each other.
TTmanya, ku, v, t. rec. cans, uma,
to cause to strike each other.
TTmauma, ku, v.t. redupl. uma,
to continue knocking, as at a door.
ITmba, ku, v. t. to go past game, or
other thing, without seeing it.
TTmbila, ku, v, t. to make a big fire.
TTmbudfBha, ku, v, t. to soothe,
quieten a noisy child.
Umbula, ku, v. t, to finish, end.
Umbuluka, ku, v. i. to be light, as
in the very early morning, to be
lost by dispersion (^^ ombuluka).
TTmbulula, ku, v. t. to shell maize,
to diminish a thing.
Umbwesha, ku b ku ombweBha,
V. t. to curse.
Umisha, ku, v, t. tnt, uma, to beat
much, hard, severely.
XTmishi, n.ia, a woman in the
family way.
TTmpa, ku, v. t. to roast slightly on
the ashes.
Umpampachubo, n,ia, a plant
eaten as a relish with food.
TTmpi, If. I a. a wild dog.
TTmpuka, ku, v, i. stat. umpula, to
be removed^ stripped off (of bark).
474
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Xrmpula, ku, v. /. to remove, strip
off bark.
TTrnpulula, ka, v, /. to dry fish or
green com at a fire.
Umwe, subs, pro. simple 2p,pL you.
XTnga, ku, v,i. to blow (of the
wind). IT la un^a Iiesa, the
wind blows.
TTnguka, ku, v, i. to be blown away.
TTziguina, ku, v. i. to shake, be un-
firm (of a weak child).
TJngnmaTia, ku, v. i. to be morose,
solitary, sad.
UngiiTTianya, ku, v, /. to canse to
be sad, morose.
TTnkai ku, v» i. to start, depart.
TTnkoshi, n,ia. a petty chief, in-
duna.
Unji, indef. pro. cL i and a. sin^,
another, different.
Upa, ku, V. t. to deceive.
TTpaupa, ku, v, i. to deceive. Kn
upaupa menso, to be a hypo-
crite.
ITsa, ku, V, i. to sorrow, be sad.
XTsendeme, n,\a, a wicked, dis-
honest person.
XTsha, ku, v, /. cans, asa, to make
sorry, to disappoint.
XTshabo, n, i a. their father.
TTshatwakwe, ». i a. a name g^ven
to the Supreme Being : indicates
that He is master of all things
and can do as He wishes.
TTshe, n. i a. his father.
TTshenu, n. i a, your father.
TTshesu, n. i a. our father.
TTshetwi, ». lo. a name given to
the lion.
XTshiswezhamoso, if . i a. a patient,
persevering person.
TTso, n. I a. thy father.
TTsungula, n,ia, a leader, com-
mander.
Usunu, adv. to-day.
TTswe, subs, pro simple ^ we.
ITwa, ku, V. i. to be addled.
ITwachikwapi, ». i a. a buffalo.
Uwambeza, n.ia.^ buffalo.
XT we, subs. pro. simple^ thou.
Uwebesho, n.ia. a shoulder-joint
of meat.
Usha, ku, V. t. cans, ula, to sell.
TTsha, ku, v. i. to be stleot, to xiefnse
to answer when called.
V. Pronounced as in English.
Vh, for the sound represented by
this sign see thap. it, sect, i.
Vhuba, ku, v. i, to be rich.
Vliubsra, ku, v. /. cans, vlmba, to
enrich.
Vhukuta, ku, v. t, to blow bellows.
Vhukutila, ku, v, t. rel. vhu-
kuta, to blow bellows for.
Vhula, ku, vA, to be nttmerons,
abundant.
Vhula, ku, v,t, to examine anyr
thing («.^. food), to see if all is
there.
Vhula- vhula, ku, v, i, to open and
shut the eyes, or wiak, when yo«
are afraid something will enter.
Vhulalata^ ku, v./, to close the
eyes, as in prayer.
Vhulula, ku, v. t. to take up a
thing and go along with it.
Vhuma, ku, v, i. to wade.
Vhuma, ku, v, i. to put (charm)
medicine on track of a lion.
Vhtimba, ku, v. t, to cover any-
thing, to thatch.
Vhumbuka, ku, v* i. rev, slot.
vhunoiba, to be uncovered, to stink.
Vhumbula, ku, v. i. to pncover.
Vhumbuluka, ku, v, i. to be un-
covered, untbatched.
Vhumbulula, ku, v. L rev. vhnm-
ba, to uncover, unthatch.
Vhumoka, ku, v.i. to seize sud-
denly.
Vhumokila, ku, v. t. to catch hold
of a person suddenly, without
speaking ; to commit rape.
Vluunpa,ku,9.f. to crowd, to press.
Vhuna, ku, v.t. to get a persoa
out of difficulties, to deliver, to
help, to separate fighters.
Vhunaika, ku, v, i. pers, rep,
▼hnnfka, to cover up, close.
Vhundama, ku, v,i. to lie on the face.
Vhundamika, ku, v. /. cam. vhun-
dama, to lay on the ^ace.
Vhundamina, ku, v. /. rel. vhun-
dama, to lie down before, in
homage.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
475
YlLundika, ku, v. t. to bniy a thing
for the purpose of rotting or
softening it.
Vliundila, ku, v. /. to be monldy
(as bread).
Vhunga, ku, v, t, to fold up, to roll
up, to wind up.
Vhungana, ku, v. i. rec. vhanga,
to shrink up (as garments).
YhunguludJka, ku^ v. i. rev. cap,
vhunga, to be onfoldable, to be
stretchable.
Vhungoluka, kn, v. i. rtv. siat,
Thunga^ to be uoroUed, un-
folded.
VhuBgalula, ko, v. t. rev, vhnaga,
to unroll, to unwind, to unfold.
Vhunikila, ku, v, t, to <:over a pot,
close.
Vhunta, kn, v,i. to throb. Mu«
pnka u la vhnnta, the insect
throbs, f . e, I have a throbbing pain.
Vliuntuka, ku, v, i. to blare.
VhtuiBulai ku, v. /. to talfe a thing
from a man forcibly.
Vbuvhuta, ku, v, i. to hum (of
people).
VliUBha, ku, V, t, cans, Thula, to
multiply, increase.
Vhwa^ ku, V, i. to emerge, to come
out, to come from. £u vhwa
moEO, to suffer remorse.
Vhwila, ku, v, /. rel, vhwa, to
emerge to, or from.
Vukaila, ku, v, t. to fill up a hole.
Tukumuna, ku, tf. /. to take earth
out of a bole.
VunoLft, ku, V, t. to protect a village
by surrounding it with (charm)
medicine ( = vhnma).
Vumina, ku, v. t, to assent, to
agree.
Vuminana, ku. v, t, rec* Tumina,
to agree together.
Vuminina, ku, v. t, rel, vumina,
to allow, to permit.
Vuminya, ku, v. /. caus, Tumina,
to convince.
Vuya, ku, v.t, to take counsel
against, to conspire against.
Vwela, ku, v. i. to mix, mingle.
Vwima, ku, v, /. to hunt
Twiya, ku« v. i. to speak aside in
a grumbling pianoer, to grumble,
to backbite.
W. The semi-vowd w represents
the simple vowel o or a followed
by another vowel.
"^^9 ( i) ^». part, cl, I and 2, sing. ;
e. g, Muahike wa«kwe, his slave.
(3) pers. pro. cl. i. sing, he, she, it.
Wa, ku, V, i, to fall
Wala, ku, v, t. to throw.
Walo, tubs, pro, simple 3 /. sing,
cl, I a$td 2, he, himself; it, itself.
Wazha, ku, v. I. caus, wala, to
cause, help to throw. Esp. of a
muaondi throwing the bones in
divining.
W6 1 intefy. expresses surprise, dis-
gust, reproof.
We. Wa becomes we when fol-
lowed by a verb beginning with i ;
£.g. we x\jila for wa injUa, he
enters.
Wedia, dem. pro. cl, 1 and 2, sing,
yon, yonder.
Wela, ku, v, i, to cry aloud, th«
way of women ; to cry shrilly.
WezQ^ ku, V. t. to hunt,
Weza^wa iaa^ he comes, he
came.
Wezela, ku, v. t. rel, weza, to hunt
for, on behalf of.
WeBha, ku« v.t, caus, weza, to
cause or help to hunt.
Wezo, dem, pro, cl, i cmd 2. sing.
that.
Wesu, dem, pro, cl, i and a. sing,
this.
Wi I particle expressing quiet,
silence. Mwana wezu wi I this
child is very quiet. Kudi inzile
wi I it is very quiet
Wila, ku, V, i, rel, wa, to fall to,
upon. Wa ka wil' analu, he
fell to the ground.
Wilaua, ku, v.i. to go on, not-
withstanding fatigue, sickness, or
other obstacle.
Wisha, ku, v. t. caus. wa, to throw
down, to let fall. Ba la ngwisha,
they throw me down.
Wizauka, ku, v, i, to totter, to be
weak on the legs, to stagger.
476
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Wisaasha, Im, v, /• to cause to
totter, stagger.
T. The semi-vowel y is the simple
i followed by another voweL
When 7 changes it becomes J;
e,^. ba la yana, they find; ba
la njana, they find me.
Ya, (i) g€H. part, cl. 8. sing, and
d, 2.//. ; e,g, impongo ya-ngu,
my goat ; misamo yangu, my
medicines. (2) pers, pro, cl. 8*
sing, and cl, 2. pi,
Ta, ko, V. i, to go. Eu ya im-
puwo, to be known, fiunous.
Tabila, ku, v. t, to sing alone.
Tadila, ko, v. t, rel, yala, to shut
against, for ; to dam up a stream.
Tala, ku, v, t, to close, to shut a
door.
Talo, subs, pro, simple cl, 8. sing,
cl, 2, pi, it, itself ; they, themselves.
Talula, ku, v. t, rev. yala, to open.
Perf, yalwile e.g. mudiango udi
yalwUwe, the door is open.
Talwila, kti, v, t, rev, rel. yala, to
open for.
Tamba, ko, v,t, to wear a mu-
yemba, to cover the whole body
with cloth.
Tamina, ka, v, t, to scare away
birds.
Yana, ku, v, i, to find, to discover.
Petf, yene.
Tanana, ku, v. i, rec, yana, to find
each other, to join, to be recon-
ciled ; e.g. Eavuvu wa yanana
o Shiingu, the Kafue joins the
2^mbesL
Tanga, ku, v, t. to scratch up (of a
fowl). Ku yanga inyemo, to
harvest ground-nuts.
Tanika, ku, v. t, to bring together,
as oxen into a yoke.
Yanyanya, ku, v, U rec, cam,
yana, to cause to find each other,
to join two things side by side, to
reconcile.
Yasa, ku, v, t, to spear, to wound,
to stab.
Yasaiila, ku, v, t. to cut up meat.
Yaya, ku, v, t, to kill, to murder,
to destroy. Eu yaya mulongo.
to break a covenanL Ku di-
yaya, to commit suicide.
Yayika, ka, v, i. cap, yaya, to be
killable ; of an animal eanly
killed, one that does not spring
upon you when it is wounded.
Yayiwa, ko, pass, yaya, to be
killed.
Yaaha, ku, v,t. eaus. yaya, to
cause or help to kill, to kill with.
Ba la diyaaha nrashixiao, they
kill themselves with travelling.
Ye I Ye I Ye I Ye I inlefy, ex-
presses reproof on return of a
delaying messenger.
Yeba, ka, ^ ka eba, ^. v.
Yedia, clem, pro. cl, 8. sing, and
cl. 2. pi, yon, yonder.
Yeni, Ta yenil let us go onl
Yeni is the imp, pi. of ya.
Yeye! Yeyell inlefy. women's
cry at funeral.
Yo, (i) poss. pfo, 3 f. cl. 8. sing.
and cl, 3. pi. its, their, theirs.
(2) Num, part. el. 8. sing. cl. 2.
pi,; e,g. iiig*ombe yo-mwi, one
ox.
Yoba, ka, v. i. to diatter, to make
a noise.
Yoboloka, ka, v, i, sfat. yobolola,
to be brought together.
Yobolola, ka, v,i. to bring scat-
tered things together.
Yoko, n. cl. I a. for. (Eng. yoke)
a yoke.
Yonkola, ko, v.i, to speak alto-
gether, making a tumult.
Yosa, ku, V. i. to abate, to subside,
of a flood.
Yovwa, ku, V, t. to help, to assist.
Yula, ku, v.t. to take a pot off the
fire.
Yumbula, ku, v, t. to feed travel-
lers.
Yuoma, ku, v. i, to ferment.
Z. Pronounced as in English.
Zaila, ku, v, t, to weed.
Zaka, ku, v.t. to build, to erect a
building.
Zaka, ku, v, i, to blaze.
Zakila, ko, v.t, rel. saka, to build
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
477
for. KvL disakila, to bnild for
oneself.
Zakishs, ku, v,i. tnt, saka, to
blaze much, fiercely.
2ala, ku, v,/, to spread out. Eu
sala bnlo, to spread out, prepare
a bed.
Zalnka, ku, v, f. to menstniate for
the first time.
Zalwila, ku, t^./. to take young
birds out of the nest.
Zama, ku, v, i. to stick to, to ad-
here to ( >B ku zhama).
Zamba, ku, v, /. to bind round.
Zamballa, ku« v, t, pers. rep,
samba, to bandage, to curl round
(ofa plant tendril, or snake). Inao-
ka ya disambaila, the snake
curls itself up.
Zambika, ku, v, A to stir up (por-
ridge, &c.).
ZambilA, ku, v,t, rsL zamba, to
bind a broken stick with string or
wire,
Zambuka, ku, v» t. to leap, jump,
spring.
Zambukila, ku, v.u to be con-
tagious, infectious (of a disease).
Ohimbembe chi la zambukila,
small-pox is infectious,
^ambuluka, ku, v,u rev. stat*
samba, to be disentangled, un-
ravelled.
Zambulula, ku, v,i, rev, samba,
to disentangle, unravel.
Zftmina, ku> v, u to lean, recline
against (of a person).
Zamuka, ku, vA, to migrate, of
game leaving a place and going
elsewhere.
Zamuka, ku, v, t. to be wise.
Zanda, ku, v,t, to like, wish for,
to desire.
Zandala, ku, v, i, to grow, spread
out (of quitch-grass).
Zandana, ku, v,t, rec, sanda, to
like eadi other.
Zandika, ku, v,i, cap, sanda, to
be precious, costly, valuable.
-sandUhiy adj, precious, costly^
valuable.
Zanga, ku, v, /. to bear witness, to
testify.
Zangadika, ku, v, i, to be a vaga*
bond, exile.
Zangadisha, ku, v,t. caus, sanga-
dika, to exile.
Zanika, ku, v./. to hang out to
dry.
Zanta, ku, v. i, « ini samuka.
Zansa, ku, v, /. to place a pot on
the fire.
Zansalka, ku, v,/, to evade, by
prevaricating.
Zansala, ku, v,t, to stir up grain
when laid out to dry.
Zapauka, ku, v. i, to be ragged,
•sapauahi, adj\ ragged.
Zapuka, ku, v, i. stat, sapula, to
be torn.
Zapula, ku, v, t, to tear.
Zasha, ku, v.t, caus, saka, to
make a fire blaze.
Zasha, ku, v,t, caus, saka, to
help, cause to build, to build with.
Zasambe, n. la, name given to a
climbing plant, supposed by the
people to have neither beginning
nor end. Fig. "Wezo muntu
ngu sazambe, that person goes
on for ever, he never leaves off
talking.
Zea, ku, v, t, to think, consider.
Zeka, ku, v,t, to lean one thing
against another, especially when
closing a gateway.
Zekema, ku, v.i, to pant (as an
animal).
Zela, ku, v. t, to set fishing-nets in
water, to catch fish in net or trap,
Zelaila, ku, v, t, to keep on hiding.
Zeluluka, ku, v, i, to prevaricate.
Zema, ku, v,uX,oht quiet, reserved
in speech.
Zemba, ku, v, t. to march up and
down at a funeral, carrying spears.
This describes the custom of the
men at such times.
Zemuna, ku, v, /. to carry, to bear.
Zenga, ku, v, t. to boil fat, to boil
the beans of castor-oil plant in
making fat.
Zengunuka, ku, v, i, to melt, dis-
solve.
Zeni, imperative pL of kwesa,
come ye.
478
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Zenaela, ka, 9. i. to become loose,
of a cord or string.
Zepa, leu, V. /. to clear away grass
(ku sebula).
Zeimnla, ku, v. /. to extract jiggers.
Zepula, ku, v. t. to cut.
Zesa, ku, v.t, to desire, wish for,
ponder, think over.
Zesha, ku, v.t, cans, Besa, to
think of. Nda seiha shumbwa,
1 thought of a lion, i. e, that it
was a lion.
ZIl Pronounced as B in aznre.
Zhadiaha, ku, v.t, int, shala, to
bring forth much, to be prolific
Zhalajku, v.t, to bear, bring forth
children. Also of animals, to
calve, &c Fig. Inshila ya
Bhala, the road gives Mrth ; said
when travellers arrive at a village.
Zhaluluka, ku, v. i. rep. stat. shala,
to be bom again, anew.
Zhalulula, ku, v. t. rep. shala, to
bear anew.
Zhalwa, ku, v. L pass, shala, to be
bom.
Zhama, ku, «= ku sama, v. i. to
adhere, to stidc.
Zhaminina, ku, v.t, reU shama,
to stick to. Bwa TwihamlniTia
bulongo, the clay sticks to me.
Zhana, ku, v, i. to dance.
Zhanga, ku, v, t. to revile, cnrse.
Sihangama, ku, v.t. to tremble,
quake with fear. Ku shangama
mwansa, to have the ague.
Zhanina, ku, v. t. rel, shana, to
dance for. Ba shanina baka-
mwale, they dance for the baka-
mwale.
Zhassa, ku, v.t, caus. shala, to
cause or help to be bom.
-shashi, adj, female, child-bearing.
Zhi, ku (kwishi) « ku shiba, to
know.
Zhia, ku, v,t. to grind com with
stones.
Zhiba, ku, v, t. to know.
Zhibaluka, ku, v,t. rep, stat.
shiba, to recollect.
Zhibalula, ku, z^. /. = ku shiba-
lusha.
Zhibalusha, ku, v,t, rep, stat.
caus, shiba, to cause to recollect,
to remind.
2Ehibana, ku, v.t, rec, shiba, to
know each other.
Zhibaaya, ku, v, t, rec, caus, shi^
ba, to cause to know each other.
Zhibidila, ku ; Zhibila, ku, v, t,
rel, shiba, to be accnstomed to,
used to.
Zhibya, ku, v,t. cams, shiba, to
make known, notify, to acquaint.
Bishibya, ku, to make ooeself
known. MwMul wa dishibya,
the chief reveals himself.
Zhidika, ku, v, t. to put one thing
on top of another, of a woman
carrying two pots on top of the
other.
Zhidika, ku, v, i, to wander.
Zhidikila, ku, v, t, to give a present
on conclusion of a bargain.
Zhika, ku, v,i, to bury. Ku di-
shika, to bury oneself. ITdi
dishikile, he has buried himself,
said of one who stays ahrays in
his house.
Zhila, ku, v,i, to be forbidden^
tabooed.
Zhilnka, ku, v. i, to be extinguished
(of a lamp or fire), to be dull,
stupid, unconscious (of a person).
Zhilwa, ku, v,i, to suffer. IVda
shilwa malwashi, I am suffering.
Zhima, ku, v, i, to stand.
Zhima, ku, v.t, to put oat a fire
or lamp.
Zhimba, ku, v, i, to swell.
Zhimba, ku, v.t, to hide, conceal
part of an affair.
Zhimbila, ku, v. t, to constipate.
Zhinibilwa,kii,/af J. v, to be consti*
pated.
Zhimbisha, ku, v, t, to constipate.
Zhimbuluka, ku, v,i, rev, stat,
shimba, to be abated (of a swel-
ling).
Zhixnbulula, ku, v, t, rev, shimba,
to abate a swelling by appl3ring
medicine.
Zhimika, ku, v, t. caus. shixna, to
stand up, to raise, to erect,
-shimikile, adj, npright, erect,
steep.
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
479
Zhimlna, ku, v. t, shlma, to stand
for. As V, i, to be lost.
Zhimingana, ku, v, f. to be effaced,
rubbed out.
Zhiminganya, ku, v.t. cam. tibi-
mingana, to erase, to wipe oat,
to hide tracks, to obliterate, to
entangle affairs so as to prerent
one's fault becoming known.
Zhimoka, ka, v, i. stat. ihimaj to
stand np, to start or leave.
Zhinga, ka, v. i, to coil as a rope^
to come continually to a place, be
perplexed.
Zhingana, ku, v.i, to question
oneself.
Zhingashila, ku, v* t, to think of,
remember, to call to mind.
Zhlngatunkusa, ku ; Zhinga-
twimba, ku, v, i, to frown, scowl.
Zhinguka, ku, v,u to gather
around.
Zhinguluka, ku, v.i, to revolye,
to go round about or round a
thing, to be late, to be perplexed.
Zhinc^ilula, ku, 9. i. to unraveL
Zkingulusha, ku, v.t. eaus. ahi-
nguluka, to cause to revolve, to
perfdex.
Zhinzhilika, ku, v. t. to search, to
seek for.
Zhinsuka, ku, v. i. to be forgetful.
ZhiaOii, ku (kwishizhi) li- ku
ahiba, to know.
Zhoka, ku, v. t. to return, go or
come back.
Zhokela, ku, v.t. rel. Ahoka, to
return to. Eu ahokela munahi,
to retreat, to backslide.
Zhokelana, ku, v. i. rec. zhoka, to
return to each other, to be recon-
ciled.
Zhokelanya, ku, v.t. rec. caus»
ihoka, to cause to return to each
other, to reconcile.
Zhola, ku, V. t. to cause to return,
to bring or take back. Eu zhola
muta, to repay a loan.
Zholaula, ku, v.t. per s. rep. zhola,
to bring back one who has left
his home.
Zhoxnbwela, ku, v. i. to be round-
about, not direct Inzhela i la
Bhombweta, the road is round-
about.
Zhombwelela, ku, v. t. to examine
a witness by asking him things
over and over again.
Zhuka, ku, v. i. to be full (of the
moon).
Zhula, ku, V. t. to draw out by the
roots, to root up.
Zhula, ku, v.t. to find out, dis-
cover.
Zhunga, ku, v. i. to vibrate. Ku-
zhunga Ini menso, to be dim-
eyed on account of hunger.
Zila, ku, V. t. rel. kweza, to come
for. Mwe zila nzhi? Why
have yon come? what have you
come for ?
Ziza, ku '** kweza, to come.
Zobola, ku, v. t. to keep, preserve.
Zoboka^ ku, v,t. stat, zobola, to
be kept, preserved, saved.
Zoboloka, ku, v.i. to collect,
gather together (people).
Zobvrela, ku, v.t. rel. zobola, to
keep, preserve for.
Zooha, ku, v. t. to bake, roast.
Zoohila, ku, v.t. rel. zoeha, to
roast, bake for.
Zola, kti, V. t. to' take a thing out,
extract ; e.g. from a bag.
Zomba, ku, v. t. to hunt.
Zomona, ku, v.t. to peck (as a
fowl).
Zonauka, ku, v. i. to be destroyed.
Zonaula, ku, v. t. to destroy,
-zonaushi, cidj. destroyed.
Zonawila, ku, v.t. rel. zonaula,
to destroy for.
Zosha, ku, v.t. cans, zowa, to
astonish, to amaze.
Zota, ku, v.t. to sit around. Ba
la zota mudilo, they sit around
a fire.
Zowa, ku, v.i. to be astonished,
amazed.
Zoza, ku, V. i. to breathe.
Zuba, ku, V. %. to hide, to conceal
oneself, be hidden.
Zubaila, ku, v. t. pers. rep. zuba,
to keep on hiding.
Zubika, ku, v.t. cans, zuba, to
hide, conceal.
48o
ILA-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Zabnluka, ka, v, i, to be disclosed.
Zubulula, ku, v.t, rev. subs, to
disclose an affair which has been
hidden.
Zudila, kUy v, t, reU zula, to be
fiili for, sufficient. Tudyo twa
ka be audila, the food was suffi-
cient for them.
Zudisha, ku, v. i, int. sula, to be
very, quite full.
Zukuma, ka, v, t. to grimace.
Zula, ku * kwizula, v. i. to be full,
Zula, ku, V. t, to find guilty.
Zulwa, ku, V. pass, inla, to be
found guilty.
Zuma, kUy z/. /. to hunt
Zuma, ku, v, i, to be hard, dry, to
be costly, dear.
Zumanana, ka, v,i. to quarrel,
dispute.
Zamanika, ka, v,t cans. Btuna*
nana, to cause to quarrel, dispute.
Zumazoma, ku, v. t. redupl. zuma,
to be thick (as porridge, &c.).
Zumba, ka, v. t. to push any one
over (as over a precipice).
Zumbana, ka, v, i, rec. Btunba, to
shake as a hammock when carried
quickly.
Zumbanya, ka, v. t. caus. zumba-
na, to jolt, cause to jolt, to cause
to rock or swing (as a hammock).
Zamlna, ku, v, t. rel, zuma, to be
hard for, difficult for.
Znminina, ku, v. i, rel. Eoma, to
be quite dried up, to be uncon-
scious. Ku Buminina itashii
to have a paraljrsed arm.
•Eumo, cuij. hard, dry, difficult.
Zumuka, ka, v.t. to fly high, to
soar.
Zumuka, ku, v.t. to throw, or
spear, violently.
Zumya, ka, v,t, caus, soma, to
dry, harden.
Zunda, ku, v. t, to overcome, beat,
to vanquish.
Zanga, ka, v.t. to suppose, to
think of doing something.
Zungana, ku, v, t. to be shaky (as
a hoe-head in its handle), to
shake.
Zunganya, ku, v. t. caus. zungana,
to shake, as a bottle of medicine.
Zungidila, ku, v.t. to add to.
Zungidiiha, ku, v.t» to add to.
Zungila, ku, v. t. to add.
Zungizha, ku, v.t. to add up
figures.
Zungula, ku, v. /. to cleanse grain
by removing all grit.
Zunguna, Ini, v.u to be loose,
shaky, of a pole.
Zungunya, ku, v.t, caus. sunguna,
to loosen, as a pole by grasping
and swaying it to and nro.
Zunka, Inz, v,i. to change one's
place of abode.
Zunaa, ku, v. t. to raise the hand
threateningly, to examine traps.
Zupa, ku, V, t. to peel, to shell.
Zupulula, ku, v.t. rep. supa, to
peel off skin.
Zutuka, ku, v, i. to be cut, torn.
Zutula, ku, V, t. to tear to pieces.
Zusha, ka, v.t. coms. aula, to fill.
END OF PART III
APPENDIX I
CONTAINING WORDS INADVERTENTLY OMITTED AND
OTHERS ACQUIRED SINCE PART III WENT TO PRESS
Ambauzha, ku, v. t.fr. ku amba,
to speak repeatedly to a person
who does not answer.
Ambawila, ku, v, t,fr, ku amba,
to go on speaking or telling.
Ampaika, ku, v, u to spesdc in a
false, mocking manner.
Andulula, ku, v. /. rep, anda, to
divide up. Ku andulula ohishi,
to pass through a country.
Ansansa, aav. at a distance. Ku
ita ansansa, to pass at a dis-
tance.
Anzauka, ku, v,i. to have head-
ache, also of people or cattle
d3dng in a pestilence.
Anzulula, ku, v. t, to completely
empty, to come to an end in
speaking.
Anzwila, ku, v, /. to drain the last
drop in drinking.
Apostele, n, i a. for, an apostle.
Babila, ku, v, t. to hum grass round
a village so that grass-fires may
not reach the houses.
Balunzandi, n, i. //. people who
are needed, precious.
Bashinkwela, n, i a. pL lads who
dance the chishimbo.
Bizusha, ku, v, /. to ripen, cause to
be ripe.
Bonununa, ku, v. t, rep, bona,
to see again, as a blind man when
cured.
Bozwa, ku, V. pass, to belch.
Budimo, n. 4. a hoeing.
Bukatila, ku/ v.t. to embrace,
caress.
Bulashi, ;i. 4. » bukwazhi, q. v.
Busaleme, ». 4. -■ busazhi, q, v,
Ku ona busaleme, to lie on the
back.
Busukuma, n, 4. a herd of the
small Baila cattle.
Buzashizho, n, 4. fuel for kindling
a fire.
Buzhole, n, 4. a bringing back.
Bwilauka, ku, v,u to go about
from place to place.
Chabala, n, i a. name of a bird.
Chadiyana, adv, in revenge. Wa
ka mu yaya chadiyana, he
killed him in revenge.
Chamwanda, adv, hundredfold.
Chango, n, 7. a three-pronged
stick.
Chekumi, adv, tenfold.
Obengaila, ku, v. i. to leave a path
in order to avoid meeting a person
whom you suspect
Chensniluka, ku, v. i, rev. stat.
ohenga, to be undeceived.
Chengulula, ku, v, t, rev, ohenga,
to undeceive.
Obenzelelelo, n, 7. a place for
prayer.
Ohezha, ku, v,i. See Delay, p.
284.
Chldiatizho, n, 7. a press.
Chikaminwe, lit. something like
the fingers. Babo bantu bad!
dikwete chikaminwe, those
people are very close friends. Ku
kwata chikaminwe, to hold
anything very tightly.
Ohikokozho, n, 7. an instrument
for stripping leaves, cleaning
grass, &c
I 1
482
APPENDIX I
Ohilai, n, 7. a mound, embank-
ment.
Chilezho, n. 7. a sign.
Chilolezho, n. 7. present, gift
Chimbo, n. 7. a song.
Ohimpampa, n. 7. ' pins and needles.'
Nda fwa chimpampa.
Ohimwexnwe, ». 7. a hone.
Ohinsema, n. 7. biestings.
Ohintolo, n. 7. /or, (Eng.) a store.
Chipani, n. 7. hammer of a gun.
Chishimuzho, n, 7. evidencei
proof.
Chishinko, n. 7. a bribe to secure
silence, hush-money.
Ohisukulo, n. 7. a comb.
Chitango, n, 7. a short stretch of
cloth.
Chituta, n. \a. a. deaf person.
Chivini, n. 7. /or. (Eng. vine) a
vineyard.
Ohiyilo, n. 7. a school.
Chlyiwo, n, 7. a teaching, doc-
trine.
OlLolobola, ku, v.^, to hoe a
munchadi, ^. v,
Oholobwela, leu, v,t. to look in-
tently at anything.
Chonankando. ^ Moon, P* 31S.
Champa, n, 7. a bundle tied up in
grass.
Dinga, ku, v. t, to try, attempt.
Dipambula, ku, v» i, to shave one-
self.
Ditaya, ku, v, u of a slave who
deserts one master through ill-
treatment and goes to another
man whom he likes and throws
ash upon him. This is reckoned
a serious fault (see ku taya) and
in consequence of it the slave be-
comes the man*s possession, and
the former master must redeem
him if he wants him back. It
also applies to a freeman who
wishes to be under the protection
of another, and by throwing ash
upon him he becomes his slave.
Emba, ku, v. i. to play.
Enzanya, ku, v»t, caus, enzana,
to make whole, restore.
Enzelelela, ku, v.f, rel, ensela,
to pray on behalf of, for any one.
Ezhezha, ku, see p. 386 ; also, to
determine. We ezhAzha mozo
wakwe ati a ohite kabotu, he
determines to do good, lit, he
smoothes his heart
Fuama, ku, v,u to be adjacent,
near, alongside.
-faeme, adj. adjacent
•Azkete, adj. half full.
Fuluka, ku, v, i, to be thin,
emaciated.
-fulukele, adj. emaciated
Fuzhuka, ku, v, i. to persevere.
Twenta, ku, v. i, to walk labori-
ously, as in soft sand; v./. to
learch diligently.
Fweta, ku, v. t, to backbite.
Hulula, ku; huluzlis, ku, v. t.
to have a nap.
Ibovhu, n» 3. dewlap.
Ikulula, ku, v,t, rep. ika, to re-
cook.
Ikungubulo, n.^,% large bed, bed
for two.
Ilakula, n. 3. gill of fish.
Uala, ku, v. i, to go to bed hungry.
Imbu, n. 3. a kind of fruit.
Ixnpemba, n, 8. white clay.
Induluka, ku, v. i. to be changed.
Indulula, ku, v. t, to change.
Inkanamino, n. 8. muscle of thigh.
Inkobwa, n. 8. a plant with a pea-
like flower, root eaten as vege-
table.
Injelele, n. 8. a small insect found
darting about on surface of water ;
eaten with food as a charm to
render one invisible in battle.
Intengatenga, n. 8. youn g reed.
Intomo, n. %. /or. (Suto, thomo;
Dutch, toom) a bridle.
Intongo, n, 8. soft maize cooked
and put in the sun to harden.
Intovhulumo, n. 8. froth, foam, at
a person's mouth. Ku kuiEQia
intovbulunio, to foam at the
mouth.
Invhundi, n, 8. mildew*
APPENDIX I
483
Inyanyi, n» 8. » inkobwa^ q, v.
Ipeznpe, n, 3. a moth.
Ishiedizlii, n. 3. indistmctness.
Ku langa ishiedizhi, to see
indistinctly.
Itangatanga, ^ 3. an open space,
as in a village.
Itungu, n. 3. a shelter erected in a
field. Tu la ya ku matunga^
we are going to the fields, ue,
to our temporary residences in
the fields,
luxnwankodi, n. 3. a large dmm.
Izuzukiaha, ku* v, t, fr» ku aula,
to fill to the brim.
Ka, expresses ' like '; e.g. ko fuma
ka shimbiila, get up very early,
i.e. like a shimbula, a person
who gathers imbula fruit.
Kabwibwi, n» 6. kind of small
bead.
Safato, fx. (S. a small bend in a
piece of wood.
Kaianza, n, 6. a small or trivial
custom.
Kalalatimba, n, 6. a kind of grass.
Kamantana, ku, v, 1. to sti(^ to-
gether.
Samantanya, ko, v. /. caus, kama-
ntana, to cause to stick together.
Kanana, ku, v, /. to nan ate.
Elananina, ku, v,t, reU kanana,
to relate to.
Kankamana, ku, v. 1. to be greatly
astonished.
Sankunga, ». \a,pL batunkunga,
B kamwale, q. v,
Sanondanonda, n,\a, a kind of
beetle.
Sansazisainwe, «. 6. coolness, of
the day.
Kanshiansbia, n, 6. a tradition.
Kanza, ku, v, i. to speak of going
away.
Kapukupuku, n. 6. a kind of tree.
Kapumpu, n. 6. the state of being
minus a hand or foot; the pi,
tupumpu refers to both hands or
feet being absent. It was the
custom among the Baila to cut off
these members in punishment for
adultery.
Kasankwesankwe, n, 6. impu-
dence.
Kaaondo, if. 6. a needle.
Eayobe, ^ katongola, q, v,
Eoma, ku, v. t. to trouble.
Eonkomwezha, ku, v.t, to im-
press upon one.
Euma, ku, v, t. to speak, to tell.
Eunka, ku, v, t, to lop, to cut off
branches of a tree.
Eusula, ku, V, t, to strip the lukusa
plant.
Iiaisha, ku, v.t, to make an em-
bankment.
Ijebya, ku, v. /. caus, leba, to trip,
cause to stumble.
Iiengazha, ku, v, /. caus, lengaa,
to cause to shirk.
Itengaka, ku, v. /. phr, ku lenge-
ka mozo, to go on doing a thing
not knowing what will come of it,
as when people hoe their fields
feeling they may not get a harvest.
Iiengela, ku, v. t, to astonish.
Iiengniliila, ku, v, t, rep, lenga, to
re-establish, restore.
Iiubulula, ku, v.t. rev, luba, to
tell clearly.
Ijukusa, n, 9. ^ mukusa, q, v.
Iiundulula, ku, v, t. to replait.
Ijungutuka, ku, v, i, to be very
dry (of grain).
Iiunkulu, n, 9. a shaved head.
Ijushika, ». 9. a kind, variety.
Ijuzhalulo, n, 9. a rebirth, regener-
ation.
Iiwezeka, ku, v, i. cap, Iweza, to
be wonderful.
Ijwinga, If. 9. //. inyinga, a pot-
sherd.
Mabangrwapopo, n, i a, wood-
pecker.
Mabua, n. 3. //. a country with
trees and short grass.
Maohenchela, n, 3.//. side-glances.
Ku langa maohenchela, to look
with side-glances.
Makakala, n. 3.//. rough surface.
Makushikushi, n, 3. pL rubbish.
Malele, n. 3. pi. an accident.
Malowe, n, 3. pL an accident.
484
APPENDIX I
ICAiiCwalOKhi, n, 3. //. a thing not
seen. Modi nzhi mu ohinkudi ?
What is in the calabash? Ma-
nffwaloshi. XT ta angwa ta dyi.
M. He that is not tied up is not
to eat. lliis is said to repress
curiosity.
Manjezha, n, 3. //. thoughts, con-
science. Weso munta a ina
maDJeshai that person has no
conscience, — said of a person who
is always doing evil.
Mankondole, n. 3. pL a large kind
of melon.
ICaDsenda, n, 3. pi, lumps on the
ground.
Masankulnnya, n, 3. pL rough-
nesses.
Masunsunya, n. 3.//. roughnesses.
Mbu, particle used with Ini fuma.
Ku fuma mbu, to get up very
early.
Mbwa, particle used with ku shiti.
Ba shiti mbwa, they stay well,
in health and prosperity.
Momba-a-balnmbn, n, la.a kind
of large drum.
Mozha, n, 2. a kind of tree.
Muohembazhi, n. i, a,n aged per-
son.
Mudiato, n, i, & greedy person.
Mudilo, n. a. fire. Mudilo wa
Leza, God^s fire, leprosy.
Mufwi, ». I. a jealous person.
Mukuma, n.i, a. large tree-lizard,
said to live on air.
Mnkuta, n. 2. an unsoftened skin.
Mukutulo, n, 2.2L sound.
Mulumo, ;;. 2. a sound.
Muma, n, la, 9. bush-pig.
Miixna, ku, v,t, to surround a
village.
Muna, ku, v.t, to look out of a
door, &c.
Manchadi, n, 2. a long narrow
stretch of hoeing.
Mungu. Ku shoma mungu, to
trust implicitly. Eu zhiba
xnungu, to know entirely.
Munkunkumbele, ku dya, pAr.
to eat without chewing.
Munwa, ». i . « mubanzhi, a per-
son who annoys another.
Mnxiya, ku, v.t» cans, nmiiAy to
hand a thing from inside a
house. .
Mupiy «. I. a giver.
Mnaanguahi, n. i. a spirit, also a
person possessed by a spirit.
Muaendo, if. 2. a hanmiock, ma-
chila.
MaaenluBhi, n. i. one who con-
tradicts.
Muaonunu, ». 2. a bamboo.
Mutembeahi, if. i. a hanmiock-
bearer.
Mutua, If. 2. a kind of tree.
Mwabi, If. I. a giver.
Mwftmi, If. I. a prophetess. These
women not only foretell events
but they promote peace among
the difilerent chiefs. They are
highly honoured among the
people.
Mwana-Iieza, if. prop, the child of
God. It is said that very long
ago He descended and stayed
some time in the district of
Lusaka, telling the people to leave
off fighting. He was killed at
Chongo, but His spirit entered
into others, and the bami carry
on His mission of promoting
peace. This year (1906) people
were weeping over a very large
area because Mwana-Leza was
dead.
Mwezhu, If. I. a hale old person.
Mwiningizha, ku, v, t. to see in-
distinctly.
Nga, particle indicating ' fast *. Ku
kwatila nga, to be quite fast.
Mwami na kale nga 1 may the
chief sit fast I i . e, be prosperous.
Pele nga 1 quite fast I
Nswala, if. i a. a coward.
Nswana, n, la, bh heir, inheritor.
Nuna, ku, v.t, to take out of
water.
Nyanyemuka, kti, v. t, '■= ku pa-
paluka, g, v,
Nyema, ku, v, i, to be angry.
Pabauka, ku, v.i, to chatter, to
babble.
APPENDIX I
485
Fsbn-pabu, inter;, rebuke to chat-
tering people.
FapalaJa, ku, v, u to be very hard,
dry.
Fapulnka, ku, v, i. to be detached,
loose, as boot sole from upper
leather.
Fomboloka, ku, v, i, to be node-
ceived.
Fombolola, ku, v. t, to undeceive.
Fosana, ku, v, i. to go to and fro,
to be entangled.
Fosola, ku, v,t, to pull out
forcibly.
Fozha, ku, v,t, to hide away, as
cattle in time of war ; v, i, to be
many.
Futa, ku, V, t. to be poor.
Sampukuluka, ku, v,u rev. stat.
sampuka, to be restored, as a
man who went wrong but is now
reformed.
Sampukulula, ku, v, /. rev, sam-
puka, to restore, reform.
Sampulula, ku, v,t, rep. sampa,
q.v,
Sangabala, ku, v. i, to be over-
seasoned with salt.
Sangabasha, ku, v.t, to over-
season with salt.
Sekaula, ku, v. t.pers. rep. sekula.
Sekula, ku, v. t. to lift up a woman's
dress.
Sena, interr, part, Sena njeP
Shall I go ?
Shankalka, ku, v.t, pers. rep,
shankika, to distribute one by
one, to keep on distributing.
Shankaila, ku, v. 1. to go steadily.
Shankika, ku, v. t, to give, dis-
tribute.
Shichimbodio, n, la. a one-eyed
person.
Shikapumpu, n. 1 a. person with
one hand or foot cut off.
Shikukila, ku, v. t, to seize a per-
son forcibly.
Shimauka, ku, v, i. to be seen afar
off.
Shimuka, ku, v,i, to be seen,
noticed. Frov, Ta ka shimuka
ku makamo, a small thing is not
noticed in a crowd.
Shimuzha, ku, v. t, to bear testis
mony, to prove.
Shinampwila, ku, v. /• to peer,
to look as one does in Xxying to
penetrate a mist or darkness.
Shinkombelo, n. lo. a religious
person.
Shinshanya, ku, v,t» to suppose,
to imagine.
Shitupumpu, n. la. a person with
both hands or feet cut off.
Shoka, ku, v. t. to ask a person his
family, clan, &c.
Sola, ku, v,i, to be quiet, com-
forted. Sola ndo, otiiet, my dear
(said to a crying child).
Somba, ku, v. t. to redeem.
Sombaola, ku, v. t. pers. rep, som-
bola, to turn out, cast out, — of
many.
Sombola, ku, v.t, to turn out, to
cast out, expel.
Sumba, ku, v, /. to hand out from
within.
Sungidiaha, ku, v,t, to constrain
to go.
Swana, ku, v. i, to meet
Tafoninwa, ku, v, pass, to be
overcome. Muntu ta taftmin-
wa, the person is not to be con-
quered. Mudilo to tafuninwa,
the fire is not to be overcome,
i, e, it will bum even though the
wood may be damp.
Takata, ku, v. t. to refuse a thing
because it is insufficient.
Takatika, ku, v. i. cap, takata, to
be refusable, unacceptable.
Tama, ku, v, i. to stand with legs
apart.
Tambauka, ku, v.t, to stride
along.
Tankula, ku, v. t. to raise, lift up.
Tantaika, ku, v.t. to place at
intervals.
Tantanya, ku, v. t. cans, tantana,
to disperse. Ku tantanya ma-
tende, to stretch the legs wide
apart.
K
486
APPENDIX I
Tentebesha, ku, v. /. caus, t»nte«
bels, to slacken (a line).
Tesula, ku, v. t. to bring nearer.
Tinga, ku, v. t. to tie tightly with
one cord, strangle.
Toa, kn, v. t. to put a small amount
of meal into a pot to make the
water boil when making por>
ridge.
Tuntmnbweza, ku, v, t. to delay,
fool about, dawdle.
Tupuka, ku, v, i, to gush, as water
out of a bottle.
Twa, particle. Bnloa twa ! How
much blood !
Vhuka, ku, v. i. to speak in chorus.
Vhmnaika, ku, v.L to be silent,
refuse to tell.
Vhunduka, ktt, va. to get up early ;
to be changed as when the new-
ness of a thing has worn off.
Vhunganya, ku, v. /. caus, vhung-
ana. Ku vhunganya bushu,
to let the countenance fall, to be
sad, gloomy.
Vhwemeiha, ku, v.t, to scare,
frighten.
Wayuka, ka, v, i, to spring to
ODe*s feet.
Tasa, ku, v, t, to spear, woimd.
Zaia, ku, v. i. to be lost, to die.
Zalula, ku, v,t. to clear away
(a table).
Zangulula, ku, v. /. rep, aanga, to
bear witness against.
Zelauka, ku, v. i. to be afraid, of
a person fearing to approach a
chief because conscious of a fault.
Zhandaika, ku, v,t, to set grass
alight.
Zhiminina, ku, v, /. rtl, ihima, to
stand by, to be on the side of.
Zholeka, ku, v,%. stat, ihola, to
be brought back, to leave off un-
believing and to believe.
Zbuluka, ku, v, i. of a blind man
turning his eyes about.
Zuwa, ku, v,t, to overthrow, over-
turn.
APPENDIX II
SOME PROVERBS IN ADDITION TO THOSE GIVEN
IN THE VOCABULARIES
Bomba, u dye xnalelo : be bumble tbat yon may eat. Advice to a baughty
person.
Bulemu bwa lulu ngu nasanga : the honom* of an ant-heap is the grass
upon it, I. e, it is not feared miless there is grass upon it in which
a lion might be hiding. A man is to be honoured according to what
he has.
Bushiku boxnwi ta bu bozba muzovu : one day does not rot an elephant.
Rome was not built in a day.
Chi konda u twele : it pleases who is married. If a wife pleases her
husband or a thing its master it does not matter what others may say.
Cbibi Chi zhi mulomo : a bad thing knows the mouth. Don't refuse
without tasting ; don't give up without trying.
Cbibi ku bantu ukudi baina ncbibotu : what is bad to (other) people is
good to its (a child's) mother.
Cbidingadinga cbidi badi nkumu: good luck is of those who have the
(lucky) forehead. It is not every one who has good luck.
Ing'ombe insolozbi nji nwa znenzbi : the ox which first arrives is the
one that drinks good water. First come, first served.
Kabwenga moa ngu ongola : it is a cowardly (or prudent) hyena that
lives long. Discretion is the better part of valour,
Ku mukando ta ku tika musbinza : by an elder gravy is not spilt. He
knows better than a youngster how to do things.
Ku zuba o mwana kulu mwinzbila : hiding with a child the leg is in
the road, i, e. it will be seen by those searching for you. Don't trust
in unworthy people when you are in trouble.
Kula, u bone twa 'nshi : grow that you may see the things on the earth.
The more you live the more you see.
Kupa nkwanzbika : to give is to hang up. He who gives will receive.
Iiemeka kana, ako ka ku lemeke : honour a child that it may honour you.
Matako aswangene ta budi mutukuta : buttocks meeting do not lack
perspiration. People who live long together are bound to quarrel
some time.
488 APPENDIX II
Mukando mu shie lubilo, mano to mu shii : yon may surpass an elder
in speed but not in cunning.
Mulombwana muzovu, u la dikwela : a man is an elephant, he draws
himself. Encouragement to one in distress.
Mulonga owa ta ka zholwa wa kwata makobo : a river which could not
be straightened has bends. Of a man who spurns advice and persists
in evil ; later he will not be able to change. As a tree falls so it lies.
Munwe omwi to ponda injina ; one finger does not crack a louse. It
needs two people to do a job or to quarrel.
Muzhimo u diamba ngu dya nyama : it is the muzhimo who speaks
that eats the meat. If you want anything, ask for it.
Mwenzu ta la,ngw€k ankumu, mu lange mwifU : a traveller is not to be
regarded as to his face but as to his stomach. You must not simply
look at him but must offer him food.
Ngulube wa ka fwa mu shitamba : the pig was caught in a trap. Said
to an obstinate person who rejects advice.
Ngunungunu ngwa babili : a journey is to be imdertaken by two people,
not by one.
Shakazhimina ka langa ku muntonoko : a thing that is lost is to be
looked for to your fellow man.
Shikoswe wa ka bu sukusha butale : the rat tried (his teeth) on the
iron. Of a person who attempts the impossible, as when he makes an
impossible claim with small hope of success. There is no harm in
trying.
Shikwaze ta budi budilo bwa nswi : a fish eagle does not lack fish for
its food on a journey. An admonition to travellers to trust people for
their food.
Twa bwene indudi : we have seen them, 1. i, houses, as to the roofs.
You may see a man*s actions, not his motives.
XT bosha oba mu weza : he pays them out who hunted him. Assigning
blame to those who run into danger and get hurt.
IT kwete luse Iwa mulozhi : he has the kindness of a witch. Applied in
distrust to any one who is over-kind.
IT la tia mushinze u ina kabwenga : you fear the darkness that has no
hyena. Applied to a person who is timid without cause,
nshikwaze u le lala : even the fish eagle goes to bed hungry sometimes.
One cannot always have food.
ji
se
e
a
a
ale
:uko
'ao
ukona
ona
bele
8le
ao
-o
•
adj
oni
aza
azc
adi
a
a
ngi
\
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11